



l!ook_^ 



PRESENTED BY 



- 



THE FOLLOWING WORKS 
BY A. BOLMAR, 

May be had from any of the Principal BooU, Mers in the 
United States. 

1st. A Collection of One Hundred Fables, with two 
Keys: one for the literal and free translation, and the other 
for the pronunciation of the French text. 

2d. Les A ventures de Telemaque with a Key for the 
literal and free translation of the first eight books, and in 
tended as a Sequel to the Fables. 

3d. A Collection of Colloquial Phrases, on every 
topic necessary to maintain conversation ; arranged under 
dill'ercnt heads; with numerous remarks on the peculiar pro- 
nunciation vid use of various words. The whole so disposed 
as considerably to facilitate the acquisition of a correct pro- 
nunciation of the French. 

4th. A Complete Treatise on the Genders of French 
Nouns; in a small pamphlet of 14 pages. This little work, 
wnich is the most complete of the kind, is the fruit of great 
labour, and will prove of immense service to every learner. 

5th. All the French Verbs, both Regular and Irregu- 
lar, in a small volume. 

The verbs Hre to be, avoir to have, parler to speak, Jinir to finish, 
recevoir <d -°ceive, vendre to sell, se lever to rise, se bien porter to be 
well, s'en alter lo go away, are there all conjugated throughout — affirma- 
tively — negatively — interrogatively — and negatively and interrogatively ; 
an arrangement which will greatly facilitate the scholar in his learning the 
French verbs, and which will save the master the troubJe of explaining 
over and over again what may lit much more easily learned from books, 
thus leaving him more time to give his pupil, during the lesson, that in- 
struction which cannot be found in books, and which must be learned 
from a master. 

Gth. The Institutes of Morality, for the instruction of 
Youth, with numerous Scriptural References, by questions and 
answers. Translated by Eli K. Price and A. Bolmar. 

This little book on .Morality will soon be published for the 
use of French Scholars, in the form of French and English 
dialogues. 

N. B. The above Treatine on the Genders, and the volume of French 
Verbs, which may be bad separately, are to form part of a French Gram- 
mar on quite a new plan, antl which will soon be published. Like the 
Fables and Telemachus, the French Grammar- will be calculated for 
•chooi and self instruction. 



A KEY to the exercises of this Grammar will short- 
ly be published. 

That Key will be so arranged as to suit equally .veil 
this present edition of Levizac's, or the edition sold 
previous to the publishing of this one. 



THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL 

GRAMMAR 

OF THE 

FRENCH LANGUAGE; 



THE PRESENT USAGE IS DISPLAYED AGREEABLY TO THE DECISIONS OF 
THE FRENCH ACADEMY. BY M. DE LEVIZAC. 

WITH 

NUMEROUS CORRECTIONS AND IMPROVEMENTS, 

AND WITH THE ADDITION OP 

A COMPLETE TREATISE 

ON THE 

GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS, 

AS ALSO WITH THE ADDITION OP 

ALL THE FRENCH VERBS, 

BOTH REGULAR AND IRREGULAR, CONJUGATED AFFIRMATIVELY — NEGATIVELY 
— DNTERROGATIVELY— AND NEGATIVELY AND INTERROGATIVELY. 



BY A. BOLMAR, 



PRINCIPAL OF THE WEST CHESTER ACADEMY, AND AUTHOR OF SEVERAL WORKS TO 
FACILITATE THE ACQUIREMENT OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 



TWENTY-NINTH EDITION. 



PHILADELPHIA: 

CAREY AND HART. 

Sold by Grigg & Elliott, Hogan & Thompson, Thomas, Cowpertiiwait & 
Co., Philadelphia.— -Wiley & Putnam. A.' S. Barnes & Co., Paine & Burgess, 
New York.—W. D. Ticknor, C. C. Little & Co., Boston.— .J. Stkele, New 
Orleans. — W. H. Berrett, Charleston. — F. Taylor. Washington. 

1849. 



^G 



\ 



,«* 



VU<\ 



\ 



Entered according to the act of the Congress of the United States, 
A. D. 1834, by Anthony Bolmar, in the office of the Clerk of th« 
Eastern District oi Pennsylvania. 






Primed by T. K. & P. G. Collins. 



CONTENTS. 



PAGS 

Names of the French Letters • 1 

Observation on the French Letters 1 

Sounds of the French Letters « 2 

Table of the Simple Sounds of Vowels « 7 

Table of Dipthongs 8 

Observation on the Pronunciation of a in mare and e in mere.. ... 10 

Pronunciation and Accentuation . 11 

Introduction to the Exercises 12 

Elision or Apostrophe, &c 14 

Wurds alike in both Languages 16 

English Words which become French by changing their Termina- 
tion 17 



PART I. 

OF WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR NATURE AND LV- 
FLECTIONS. 

CHAPTER I. 

Of the Substantive or Noun 18 

Of Genders 19 

List of Nouns, ending with eur for the masculine, and eure for the 

feminine 32 

List of ?\ T ouns ending with eur for the masculine, and rice for the 

feminine 36 

List of Nouns ending with eur for the masculine, and which form 

their feminine variously 38 

Of Numbers 39 

Formation of the plural of French Substantives or Nouns 39 

Formation of the plural of Compound Nouns 41 

CHAPTER II. 

Of the Definite Article 41 

Elision of the Article 42 

Contraction of the Article 43 

Cashes in which Contraction does not take place 43 

General Rule of the Article , 44 

Of the Article in a Partitive Sense 45 

CHAPTER III. 

Of the Adjective 46 

Of the Formation of the Feminine of French Adjectives 46 

Of the Formation of the plural of the French Adjectives 51 

Of the Degrees o{ Signification of French Adjectives 54 

iii 



IV CONTENTS 

PAGB 

Of the Positive , „ ... 54 

Of the Comparative of Superiority 54 

Of the Comparative of Inferiority 54 

Of the Comparative of Equality 55 

Observations on JMkffl#ur t Mjindre, and Fire 55 

Of the Superlative 56 

Of the Superlative Absolute 56 

Of the Superlative Relative 56 

Agreement of the Adjective with the Substantive 57 

When the Adjective relates to two Substantives Singular of the same 

Gender 57 

When the Adjective relates to two Substantives Singular of differ 

ent Genders 58 

Nouns and Adjectives of Number 58 

Observations on several Numerical Adjectives 60 

CHAPTER IV. 

Of the Pronouns . . . , , 61 

Of the Personal Pronouns 61 

Pronouns of the 1 st Person 61 

Pronouns of the 2d Person 62 

Pronouns of the 3d Person 63 

Reflected and Reciprocal Pronouns 64 

Of the Relative Pronoun en 65 

Of the Relative Pronoun y 66 

Of Possessive Pronouns 66 

Pronominal Adjectives relating to one Person expressed 67 

Pronominal Adjectives relating to many Persons expressed 67 

Pronominal Adjectives relating to one Person understood 68 

Pronominal Adjectives relating to many Persons understood 66 

Of the Relative Pronouns 65 

Of Pronouns Absolute 69 

Of Demonstrative Pronouns 7G 

Of Indefinite Pronouns ^ 71 

Of Indefinite Pronouns of the 1st Class T. 71 

Of Indefinite Pronouns of the 2d Class 72 

Of Indefinite Pronouns of the 3d Class 73 

Of Indefinite Pronouns of the 4th Class 73 

CHAPTER V. 

Of the Verbs 74 

(£jf* See at the end of the Verbs for a Table of the Contents of the 
part containing the Verbs, 

Exercises on Avoir to have Affirmatively 74 

Exercises on Avoir to hnve Negatively 77 

Exercises on Avoir to have Interrogatively 79 

Exercises on Avoir to have Interrogatively and Negatively 19 

Exercises on Etre to be 80 

Exercises on the 1st Conjugation in BR 83 

Exercises on the 2d Conjugation in ir 87 

Exercises on the 3d Conjugation in oi r 89 

Exercises on the 4th Conjugation in he 91 



CONTENTS V 

PAGB 

Of the Pronominal Verbs 94 

Of the Passive Verbs 97 

Of the Neuter Verbs 98 

Of the Impersonal or Unipersonal Verbs 98 

Of the Verb falloiu 99 

Of the Verb r avoir 99 

Exercises on the Irregular Verbs of the 1st Conjugation 100 

Exercises on the Irregular Verbs of the 2d Conjugation 100 

Exercises of the Irregular Verbs of the 3d Conjugation 103 

Exercises on the Irregular Verbs of the 4th Conjugation 105 

CHAPTER VI. 

Of the Prepositions 110 

Of the Prepositions denoting Place 110 

Of the Prepositions denoting Order HI 

Of the Prepositions denoting Union Ill 

Of the Prepositions denoting Opposition 112 

Of the Prepositions denoting Derivation 112 

Of the Prepositions denoting the End 112 

Of the Preposition denoting the Cause and Means 113 

Of the Preposition a 113 

Of the Preposition de , 1 14 

Of the Preposition en 1 14 

CHAPTER VII. 

Of the Adverbs 115 

CHAPTER VIII. 

Of the Conjunctions 119 

CHAPTER IX. 

Of Interjections 122 



PART II. 

SYNTAX, 
OR WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR CONSTRUCTION. 

CHAPTER I. 

Of the Substantive 123 

Of Compound Nouns 123 

CHAPTER II. 

Of the Article 124 

A Comparative Table on the use of the Article 125 

On Measure and Weight 127 



yi CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER III. 

PAGB 

Of the Adjectives 128 

Difference of Construction between the English and French Lan- 
guages 129 

Regimen of the Adjectives 130 

Promiscuous Exercises 130 

CHAPTER IV. 

Of the Pronouns 131 

Of the Personal Pronouns , 131 

Of the Place of Personal Pronouns 131 

Of Personal Pronouns used as Subject 131 

Of Personal Pronouns used as Regimen 133 

Of the Relative Pronouns 135 

Of Pronouns Absolute , 138 

Of Demonstrative Pronouns 14C 

Of Indefinite Pronouns 141 

Of Indefinite Pronouns 1st Class 141 

Of Indefinite Pronouns 2d Class . . . . 144 

Of Indefinite Pronouns 3d Class 145 

Of Indefinite Pronouns 4th Class 149 

A General Exercise on the Pronouns 151 

CHAPTER V. 

Of the Verb 153 

Agreement of the Verb with the Subject 1 53 

the Regimen of Verbs 1 54 

Of the Nature and Use of Moods and Tenses 157 

Of the Indicative 157 

Of the Conditional 160 

Of the Imperative 160 

Of the Subjunctive. . ..... 161 

Of the Infinitive 162 

Of the Participle 162 

Of the Participle present 162 

Of the Participle past 163 

Agreement of the Participle past with its Subject 163 

Agreement of the Participle past with its Regimen 165 

CHAPTER VI. 

Of the Adverbs 168 

Situation of the Adverbs 168 

CHAPTER VII. 

Of the Conjunction 170 

Of the Conjunction que 170 

Government of Conjunctions 171 

Conjunctions that are followed by an Infinitive 171 

Conjunctions that are followed by the Indicative 172 

Conjunctions that are followed by the Subjunctive 173 

Promiscuous Exercises on the nine Parts of Speech 173 



CONTENTS. TO 

PART III. 

PAOS 

Idioms, or Words considered in their particular Rules ... 177 

CHAPTER I. 

Of the Substantive .....•..* 177 

CHAPTER II. 

Of the Article 179 

Cases in which the Article is to be used 179 

Cases in which the Article is not used 1 S3 

CHAPTER III. 

Of the Adjectives 1 87 

Of the Adjective with the Article 187 

The Place of the Adjectives 189 

Regimen of the Adjectives 191 

Adjectives of Number 192 

CHAPTER IV. 

Of the Pronouns 191 

Of the Personal Pronouns 1 94 

Office of Personal Pronouns 194 

On the Pronoun soi 198 

Cases in which the Pronouns elle, elles, eux, lui, leur, may 

apply to things 199 

Difficulty respecting the Pronoun le explained 201 

Repetition of the Personal Pronouns 203 

Relation of the Pronouns of the 3d person to a Noun as expressed 

before 205 

Possessive Pronouns 206 

Explanation of some difficulties attendant on the Use of the Pos- 
sessive Pronouns 206 

Relative Pronouns 210 

Of am 210 

Of auE 212 

Of LEMUEL and DONT 213 

Of dvo i 214 

Of ol 214 

Absolute Pronouns 215 

Demonstrative Pronouns 21b 

CHAPTER V. 

Pronouns Indefinite 220 

Of on 220 

Of ancoNauE 220 

Of CH AC UN 220 

Of I'KRSOXXF. 221 

Of l'un et l'*.ctre 221* 



Vlll CONTENTS. 

PAfJE 

Of ni i/tts si l" autre 222 

Of tout and rien . 222 

Of auELauE — q,ue and q.uel q.ue 223 



CHAPTER VI. 

Of the Verb 225 

Agreement of the Verb with the Subject 225 

Of the Collective Partitive 226 

Place of the Subject with regard to the Verb 227 

Government of the Verbs 230 

On the use Proper or Accidental of Moods and Tenses 232 

Of the Indicative 232 

Of the Conditional 238 

Remark on the use of the Conditional and Future 239 

Of the Subjunctive 240 

Relations between the Tenses of the Indicative 242 

Relations between the Tenses of the Subjunctive and the Indicative 244 

Further Observations upon the Conditional and Subjunctive 247 

Relations between the Tenses of the different Moods 248 

Relations of the Indicative 248 

Relations to the Conditional and of the Conditional 249 

Relations of the Present and Future Absolute, &c 249 

Principal Relations with the Subjunctive 250 

Of the Infinitive 251 



CHAPTER VII. 

Of Prepositions .... 253 

Of the Use of the Article with Prepositions 254 

Repetition of the Prepositions 255 

Of the Government of Prepositions 256 

CHAPTER VIII. 

Of the Adverbs 257 

Of the Negative ne 257 

Of the Place of the Negatives 257 

Of the Use of pas and point 257 

When may both pas and point be omitted 258 

When ought both pas and point to be omitted 259 

Of plus and davantage 262 

CHAPTER IX. 

Of Grammatical Construction 263 

Of Inversion 267 

Of the Ellipsis 268 

Of the Pleonasm 268 

Of the Sy llepsis 269 

CHAPTER X. 

I )f Grammatical Discordances 269 

Of Amphibologies 270 

Of Gullicisms 271 



CONTENTS. U 

Page 

Free Exercises 275 

Phrases 283 

Examples of Phrases on the principal Difficulties of the French 

Language , 283 

On the Collective Partitive 283 

On some Verbs which cannot be conjugated with Avoir to have. . . 283 

On Words of Quantity 283 

On the Personal Pronouns 284 

On soi, lui, soi-meme, and lui-meme 284 

On the Relative Pronouns , 284 

On the Demonstrative Pronouns , 2S5 

On the verb Avoir to have employed Impersonally 286 

Promiscuous Phrases 287 

Phrases in which the Article is used . , 2S8 

Phrases in which the Article is omitted 2S9 

Phrases on the Pronoun le 290 

Phrases on the Participle Past 291 

Phrases on the Relations of Moods and Tenses 991 

Phrases on the Negative ne 292 

Phrases on some Delicacies of the French Language , , , 294 



EXPLANATION 

Of the Abbreviations and Signs used in this Grammar. 



h. when the letter h at the beginning of a word is followed by a (.* 
period, it shows that h is mute in that word. 

m after or in the place of a French word, shows the word to be mas 
cuiine. 

f. after or in the place of a French word, shows the word to beftmir 
nine. 

pi, under an English word or after a French one, shows that that French 
word is to be put in the plural, though the corresponding English 
word is in the singuktr. 

art. put before a French word indicates that the definite article must be 
put before that word, though there is no article before the correspond- 
ing English word. 

• an asterisk (*) under an English word, means that that word is not 
to be expressed in French. 

When under an English word there is neither a French word or an *, 
it means that the French of that word has already been given in some 
previous exercise, or is to be Frenchified according to the directions given 
page LGth and i 7th. 

The Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, &c. placed before French wordo, show the or- 
der in which they must be placed in writing down the French exercises. 
If toe I\os. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, &c. are placed before English words, they show 
the order in which the corresponding French words must be placed in 
writing down the French exercises. 

When several Engli>h words are put between a parenthesis (), they 
aie all expressed by the French word or words placed under them. 

The letters a. v. c. »., &c. placed umler an English verb, shows *he 
tense in which tlie French corresponding vero must be puL 



GRAMMAR 



OF THE 



FRENCH LANGUAGE. 



1. French Grammar is the art that teaches how to speak 
and write the French Language with propriety. 

2. The French alphabet consists of twenty -five letters : 

3. Of the Names of French Letters. 

a, b { c, d, e, f, gt, h, i, it, k, 1, m, n, o, p, qt, 

ah, bay, say, day, a, eff,*zkay, ash, e,*zhee, hah, el, em, en, o, pay, ku, 
r, s, t, ut, v, x, y, z. 
air, ess, tay, u, vay, eeks, ee-greck, zed. 

f 4. The names of letters thus marked, t cannot be given with precision, 
and must be learned from a teacher. 

5. Letters are either vowels or consonants. 

6. A vowel is a letter that forms a perfect sound when 
uttered by itself. 

7. There are in French six vowels : a, e, i, o, u, y. 

8. The letter y is by some considered as a consonant, but as it has 
Che sound of i and often of two Vs, it is preferable to call it a vowel. 

9. A consonant is a letter that forms but an imperfect sound 
when uttered by itself. 

10. There are 19 consonants, b, c, d, f, g, h, j, k, 1, m, n, 
p, q, r, s, t, v, x, z. 

11. The letter w which is named in French double vay, does not be- 
long to the French alphabet, it is never met with in French books, except 
in foreign words. 

12. Of the Sounds of the French Letters. 

The sound of a letter, or of a combination of letters, must not 
be confounded with the name of the letter or letters ; for instance 
in English, the letter a, which is named ay, has several sounds, 
as heard in fate, far, far, fall, what; the name of d, in English, 
is dee, and its sound, that heard at the beginning and at the 
end of the word dead when pronounced. The letters sh, are 

* Zh in the name ©f g and j are proneuneed like z, glazior. 

a i 



2 THE SOUNDS 

named, in English, ess, and aitch, and their sound, when to 
gether, is that heard in she, pronounced sh-e. The same 
might be said of other letters, and combinations of letters. 

13. Of the Sounds of the French Simple Vowels. 
a, sounds like-a in at, fat, mat, rat, marry, flat, 
a, sounds like-a in arm, barn, far, dart, part, mark, 
e. sounds like-u in tub, burn, gust, lurk, rust, dusk, 
e, sounds like-a in ale, bale, cave, dale, fate, game. 
e, sounds like-a in mare, fare, or ai in air, pair, fair.* 
e, sounds like-e in there, where. f 
i, sounds like-t in idiom, dip, kit, big, tin, pin. 
i, sounds like-ee in eel, bee, deer, keel, reed, peer, 
o, sounds like-o in opera, not, crop, frog, prop, trot. 
6, sounds like-o in over, more, no, bone, rope, note. 
ut, sounds neither like u as heard in tube, nor u as heard in 
bull. 

14 It has nearly the sound of w in the word twenty, in which this letter 
is not pronounced so full as in other words. In order to pronounce u, let 
the pupil pronounce the English letter e; then, without changing tne posi 
tion of his organs, let him close his lips a little more than for the e, and 
articulate the sound of the French u. 

ut, has the same sound as the above, only a little longer. 
y, sounds like i, in idiom, dip, bit, big. 
y, sometimes sounds like two i's. 

y, sometimes has the sound of y in yard, year, and may then 
be considered as a consonant. 

15. Of the Sounds of the French Compound Vowels. 

eu, sounds like u in muff, cuff, puff. 

eut, has the same sound as the above, only much longer. 

eur, that is eu followed by r sounds exactly like ur in blur, fur, 

ou, sounds like oo in too, or u in bull, full, pull. 

ou, sounds like oo in fool, moon, cool, mood 

16. Of the Sounds of the French Nasal Vowels. 

ant, sounds nearly like an in rang, sang, sprang, hang. 
int, sounds nearly like en in strength, strengthen, length. 
onT, sounds nearly like on in wrong, long, 
unt, sounds nearlv like un in clung, hung, rung, sung. 

17. Of the Compound Sounds, of ox, oi. 

oif, sounds nearly like o in opera and a in at, put together; 
as boiter, to limp — pronounce boa te. 

♦ See page 10. f When there and where are pronounced with great emphasis. 



OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 6 

oit, sounds nearly like o in opera and a in arm, put together ; 
as boite, a box — pronounce boat, or like wa in water. 

f 18. All these sounds, and particularly those marked f, will be better 
learned from a master than from any direction ; however, an intelligent 
person may, from the above directions, learn enough of the pronunciation to 
make himself perfectly understood. 

19. Of the Sounds of the French Consonants. 

b, sounds like b in oad, ru6, bed, mob. 

c, before a consonant sounds like k in key, kite. 
c, before a, o, or u, sounds, like k in key, kite. 
c, before e, i, sounds like s in sat, seat. 

5, that is c with a cedilla before a, o, or u, sounds like s in 
sat, seat. 

c, sounds like g in second and its compounds. 
ch, sounds like sh in s/iad, das/i. 

ch, sometimes sounds like k in kick. 

d, sounds like d in de&d, den, baa 7 , roa?, did. 

d, sometimes takes the sound of t at the end of words, when 
followed by a word beginning with a vowel, to which 
it must be joined, if the meaning of the sentence re- 
quires it. 

f, sounds like / in fit, /an, if, cal/, /or. 

f, sometimes takes the sound of v, at the end of words, when 

followed by a word beginning with a vowel, to which 
it must be joined, if the meaning of the sentence re- 
quires it. 

g, before a consonant sounds like g in g&g. 
g, before a, o, or u, sounds like g in g&g. 

g, sometimes takes the sound of k in kick, when followed by 
a word beginning with a, vowel, to which it must be 
joined, u, after g is very seldom pronounced, 
g, before e or i, sounds like J. (See that sound.) 
gn, sounds like ni in union, pinion, minion, onion. 

20. Pay great attention to the pronunciation of this combination of let- 
ters, for it is difficult ; and hence it is not uncommon, even in France, to hear 
magnifique, fyc. pronounced as if spelt ma-ni-Jique. The same sound in the 
Italian language is represented by the same letters gn, and in the Spanish 
by n. There are a few words in the French language, in which gn are 
sounded as g and n, as in magnitique, pronounced mag-ne-tique. 

h, there are two kinds of h, one silent, the other aspirated. 

21. But in either case it has no sound; (such is also the case with the 
Italian and Spanish language.) By aspiration is not meant, in French, as 
in English, a forcible breathing, as heard in Aigh, /torse, house, &c. The 
best proof of this, is the difficulty which every Frenchman has to pronounce 
the English aspirated h, even after a number of years' practice. Besides 



& THE SOUNDS 

my own observation, as a native of France, I can here mention L'Abbe 
d'Olivet, whose opinion and writings are for us, what Walker's are for an 
Englishman. He says, in speaking of the aspiration of the Greek and 
German languages, the French language, which always aims at softness 
and euphony, attributes no other effect to the aspiration of the h, than that 
of communicating to the vowel, following the said aspirated h, the pro- 
perty of a consonant ; that is, to prevent the elision of the final vowel of the 
preceding word. For instance, le hero's, in which the h is called aspirated, 
is pronounced le-e-ro, and not le-rb, as would be the case with Vheritier, in 
which the h is called mute, and which is pronounced le-ri-tie, and not 
le-e-ri-tie. The aspirated h, prevents, also, the final consonant of the 
word that precedes it, from being connected with the vowel which follows 
it ; for instance plus haut, in which h is called aspirated, is pronounced 
plu 6 and not plu zb; while plus honorable, in which h is mute, is 
pronounced plu- zo-no-r able and not plu-o-no-rable. Again, des auteurs 
some authors — is pronounced de-zb-teur, and des hauteurs some heights — is 
pronounced de-b-teur; the only difference in the pronunciation of the above 
two expressions, merely consists in joining the s of des to auteurs 
authors — whereas it must not be done to hauteurs heights. From my ac- 
quaintance with the English pronunciation, I am confident that if Boyer, 
Chambaud, &c, from whom all others have copied this error, without taking 
the trouble of ascertaining the fact, had been well acquainted with the nature 
of the English aspirated h, they would never have assimilated the 
French to it. 

j, sounds like s in pleasure, or like z in glacier, arure. 

22. The sound of which letter is represented by Walker by zh, 
k, sounds like k in k\ek, keel, wea&, kid, cloaA:. 

1, sounds like Z in /ad, coaZ, lot, pupiZ,Zump, sou/. 
il or illt, sounds like Hi in Wi/Ziam, biZZiard, collier. 

23. With regard to the pronunciation of the I or 11, mouilltes, it is 
proper to mention that they are differently pronounced by different persons, 
thus the words soleil, Jille, travail, tailleur, &c. instead of being pronounc- 
ed as directed above, are pronounced as if written thus: so-le-ye, Ji-ye y 
tra-va-ye, ta-yeur, giving to the y the sound it has in the word year. 

24. This last pronunciation being the easier of the two, has been adopted 
by so many people in France, that it is no longer considered as a fault, 
except by grammarians. However I recommend the former, not only on 
account of its correctness, but also on account of its being a sound very 
common to the Spanish, the Italian, and the Portuguese languages; in 
which languages this sound docs not admit of any variation. It is repre- 
sented in the Spanish by 11, in the Italian by gli, and in the Portuguese 
bylh. 

25. When in a word I or 11 preceded by i, are liquides, or viouillees, 
I have, in the figured pronunciation of the verbs, and of the fables, repre- 
sented this sound by ill, standing by itself; and this with a view of forcing 
the attention of the pupil. It will be seen also, that in those words in which 
the i that precedes the I, or 11, is pronounced; I have repeated it, as in 
Jillc, Ji-ill, billet, bi-ill-e, in which the i is distinctly heard, before the 
utterance of the //, mouilltes; which is not the case in travail, tra-va-ill, 
tailleur, ta-ill-cur; soleil, so-le-ill ; sommeillcr, so-me-ill-e. 

m. sounds like m in ?;ian, men, stem, minim, slim. 



OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 5 

am, em, im, om, um, ym, are pronounced like 
an, en, in, on, un, in, which see. 

n, sounds at the beginning of syllables like n in nap, nip, note. 

n, preceded by the vowels a, i, o, u, form the four nasal sounds 
an, in, on, un, mentioned under article 16th, which see 

n 3 at the end of a word, although preceded by a vowel, some- 
times has the sound of n in pan, pen, pin, ton, sun. 

26. When it is to be pronounced so, it is indicated by a capital n, 
which refers to the word ameN, in the key to the figured pronunciation 
of the verbs of this Grammar, and in that of the Fables. 

n, final — When a word ends with an n, and is followed by a 
word beginning with a vowel or an h mute to which it 
must be joined, the n final is doubled; that is, another n is 
added in the pronunciation ; and that added n is joined to, 
and pronounced with the next word, for instance : 

ancien ami, bien /zeureux, are pronounced as if spelt, 
ancien nami, bien neureu. 

27. However it is a pretty general custom with regard to 
the four following words : bon, mon, ton, son, not to double the 
jinal n, but to pronounce the final n of each of these words, 
with the following words, beginning with a vowel, or an h 
mute, for instance : 

bon ami, mon ami, ton ami, son ami, must be pronounced as 
bo nami, mo nami, to nami, so nami. [if speit, 

28. I must also here observe, that un when followed by a word begin- 
ning* with a vowel, or a silent A, is pronounced in two ways. Thus for 
instance, the masculine nouns, un esclave, un exemple, un ami, will be 
pronounced by some, u-nesclave, u-nexemple, u-nami, as they would pro- 
nounce the feminin nouns, une esclave, une exemple, une amie ; by others, 
un esclave, un exemple, unami, w T ill be pronounced as if written, un nesclave^ 
un nexemple, un nami, and une esclave, une exemple, une amie, u-nesclave t 
u-nexemple, u-namie. 

29. By the latter way of pronouncing un, the speaker, besides pre- 
serving the proper nasal sound of un, does away with the ambiguity about 
the gender, to which the former way of pronouncing gives rise. I nave 
adopted the latter in the figured pronunciation ; not because it is the most 
used, but because it is considered the most correct way of the two. 

p, sounds like p, in pap, pet, step, pip, pop. 
q, sounds like k, in kick, kid, keel, &oran. 

30. U after q is very seldom pronounced. 

r, sounds like r in roar, rat, rap, red, rid, rod, rub. 

31. The French r, must always have the jarring sound. The jarring 
sound of the initial or rough r, is formed, says Walker, by jarring, or vibra- 
ting the tip of the tongue against the roof of the mouth, near the fore teeth, 

A2 



x, has five sounds < 



6 THE SOUNDS 

s, sounds like s in sassafras, atlas, seldom, silk, sole. 

s, between two vowels, or at the end of a word, followed by 

a word beginning with a vowel, or an h mute, to which 

it must be joined, has generally the sound of z, as heard 

in zeal, zone, or s in rose, 
bh, sounds like sh in s/iad, das/i, sAed, fresft, sMp, fisft, sftop, 

clasA, sAun, blusA. 
t, sounds like t in fart, fell, jef, fop, spof. 
t, in the middle of a word, has sometimes the sound of s, as 

in sat, seat, for instance, in parience, caution, &c. 
th, sounds like t in fap, fop. 
t, at the end of a word, is generally joined and sounded with 

the next word, beginning with a vowel or h mute. 
v, sounds like v in rat, rent, i?il, uotiue, tmlgar. 

'k ""l Texcellence-eA'-se-lans. 

k-s as in the J axiome aA:-si-om.* 

g-z > French < exemple — eg*-zan-ple 

s words soixante soi-sant. 

2 J ^sixieme si-zi-em. 

32. * In the words in which x is pronounced like k-s ; s must not be 
pronounced like sh, as it is in the English word axiom, pronounced 
ak-shum, but like s in sister, 

z, sounds like z in zeal, zest, zone, and s in rose, 
w, is generally pronounced like v in rery. 
w, is in a few words pronounced as it is in the English, in 
work. word. 



33. I should have mentioned that new names have been 
given to the letters of the French alphabet, which, though far 
preferable to the old ones, are as yet not generally taught. 

a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, m, n, o 
a, be*, ke, de, a, /et, ge, he, e%,je, ke, le, me, ne, o, 

p, q, r, s. t, u, v, x, y, z. 

pe, ke, re, se, te, u, rt, kse, e grec, ze. 



* The c after each consonant has the sound of it in tub, and is pronounced but 
feebly. 
i g here has the sound it has in gag, gig, &c. 
t j sounds littez in glazier. 



OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 



34. Table of the Simple sounds of Vowels ; showing at 
one view the different combinations, by which these simple 
sounds are represented in different words.* 



sounds 


examples 


sounds like represented by 


examples 


a 


ami 


a, in at 


£ea 


fern me 


•woman 






• 


il gagea 


he betted 


a 


ane 


a, in arm 


cea 
ai 


bas 


stocking 


e 


te 


u, in tub 


rougeatre 
nous faisons 


reddish 
■we do 








f ai . 


aigu 


sharp 


€ 


ecrit 


a, in ale 


) eai 


geai^ 


jay 








) ee 


annee 


year 








U 


aesophage 


oesophagus 








f ai 


aide 


aid 


n 


mere-j- 


a, in maref 


1 aie 


baie 


bay 








l ei . 


baleine 


-whale 








Leai 


monnaie 


money 


H 


^tret 


e, in theret 


ai 


alne 


eldest 




idole 


i, in idiom 


i 


imiter 


to imitate 


i 


gite 


ee, in eel 


ie 


folie 


fiUy 




opera 




Can 
ceo 


aurore 


aurora 





o, in opera 


flageolet 


flagelet 








rau 


auteur 


author 


6 


oter 


o, in over 


\eau 


marteau 


hammer 








^eo 


geole 


goal 








Ceu 


gageure 


•wager 


a 


mur 


none 


\eue 


eue 


had 








^ue 


laitue 


lettuce 


u 


mur 


none 


u 


flute 


flute 


eu 


jeune 


u, in muff 


su 


oeuf 


egg 








f seu 


nceud 


knot 


ea 


jeune 


none "> 

Ceuo 


queue 


tail 


ou 


tout 


oo, in too 


ou 


tout 


all 


ou 


voute 


oo, in fool "> u 

9 Coue 


aout 
roue 


august 
•wheel 








am 
aon 
ean 


ample 


ample 


an 


an ere 


an, in sang , 


paon 
affligeant 


peacock 

ajfiu'ing 








em 


membre 


member 








^en 


entendre 


to hear 








'"aim 


essaim 


srvar?:* 








ain 


crainte 


fear 


in 


ingrat 


en, in length < 


ein 

im 


peinture 
impoli 


picture 
impolite 








ym 


symbole 


symbol 








u« 


syntaxe 


syntax 


on 


onde 


on, in long 


'aon 


taon 


ox-fly 








. eon 


pigeon 


pigeon 








^om 


ombre 


shade 


un§ 


un§ 


un§, in sung 


i"eun 
>um 


a jeun 
parfum 


fasting 
perfume 



* See page 10. | See page 10. \ See note page 2. § See page 5. Art. 23 



8 THE SOUNDS 

Table of Diphthongs. 

35. A diphthong is a coalition of two sounds, which are 
distinctly heard by a simple emission of the voice. The 
diphthongs of the French language will all be found in the 
following table, opposite to the simple sounds of which they 
are composed. 

36. In the figured pronunciation of the Fables, and of the Verbs, the 
two sounds forming a diphthong have been separated, -with a view of 
causing the pupil to pronounce distinctly the two sounds. The master 
must not allow the pupil to pause between the two vowels, but pronounce 
them as closely as possible. 



diphthongs 


simple sounds 


! 


examples. 


ia 


i-a 


fiacre 


hackney coach 


ia 


i-a 


galimatias 


nonsense 


iai"^ 




je denai 


I challenged 


ie £» 


i-e 


amitie 


friendship 


ie j 




riez 


laugh 


iai~) 




je purifiais 


I purified 


i&i 


i-e 


biere 


beer 


ie5 




ciel 


heaven 


io 


i-o 


violon 


violin 


iau 


i-6 


miauler 


to mew 


iu 


i-a 


reliure 


binding 


ieu 


i-eu 


relieur 


book binder 


ieu "> 
ieue 5 


i-eu 


mieux 
lieue 


better 
league 


iou 


i-ou 


chiourme 


the crew of a galley 


ian? 
ien5 




viand e 


meat 


i-an 


audience 


audience 


ien 


i-in 


chretien 


christian 


ion 


i-on 


passion 


passion 


oi 


o-a 


boite 


maturity of wine 


°! 1 

oie5 




boite 


box 


o-a 


foie 


liver 


oe ~) 
eoi3 


o-e 


moelle 
nageoire 


marrow 
fin 


oi 


ou-e 


voisin 


neighbour 


oin 


ou-in 


besoin 


want 


oua 


ou-a 


rouage 


wheel-work 


oua 


ou-a 


nous nouames 


we tied 


oueu 


ou-cu 


boueur 


dust man 


oue ""A 




denouer 


to untie 


oue I 


o\i-6 


djjoue 


baffled 


ouc'e f 


trouee 


opening 


ouai J 




je jouai 


J /'/■.. 


oi ^ 




oiseau 


bird 


oue C 


ou-e 


fouetter 


to whip 


ouai j 




je louais 


J praised 


oui £ 
ouie 5 


. 


cambouis 


coom 


OU-l 


Touie 


the hearing 


oueu 


ou-eii 


noueux 


knotty 


ouan } 
uuen ) 




louange 


praise [France 


ou-an 


Rouen 


Houen y cii 



OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 



diphthongs 


simple sounds 


I 


examples. 


ouin 


ou-m 


babouin 


baboon 


ouon 


ou-on 


nous jouons 


we play 


ua 


ou-a 


lingual 


lingual 


ua 


u-a 


nuage 


cloud 


ua 


u-a 


nous tuames 


ive hilled 


lieu 


u-eu 


lueur 


glimmering 


uai "^ 




je remuai 


I moved 


ue 1 


, 


eternuer 


to sneeze 


ue j 
ueej 


u-e 


denue 


stript 




nuee 


cloud 


ue ^ 
uai 3 


n ^ 


menuet 


minuet 


u-e 


il suait 


he perspired 


ui 


u-i 


buisson 


bush 


uie 


U-l 


pluie 


rain 


uo 


u-6 


iinpetuosite 


impetuosity 


ueu 


u-eu 


majestueux 


majestic 


uan? 
uen3 




nuance 


shade 


u-an 


influence 


influence 


uin 


u-in 


juin 


June 


uon 


u-on 


nous tuons 


ive kill 



37. A single view of the two tables, here given, will show of what advan* 
tage figured pronunciation will be to him, who is desirous of acquiring 
an accurate pronunciation, whether he has a master or not. If he has a 
master he will be able to revise his reading lesson, and by this means 
make great progress ; if he is deprived of the assistance of a master, he 
will be able to obtain a tolerable pronunciation, which would have been 
impossible for him, without this help. 



38. The following table treats of some terminations which 
differ very materially in pronunciation from the English. 
English learners, in these terminations, are always inclined to 
sound e before I or r as they do in their own language ; for 
instance, they will pronounce acre, akur. 



ble 




bul 




ta-ble 


^ to i 


bl-aze 


bre 


3 


bur 


<! 


sa-bre 


§ S* 


br-ace 


del 










8 ICs 

co •§ e I 3 
s •£ to S 

*? ^3 <? <• 




for I 
klej 




kul 


3 


mira-cle 


kl-ick 


ere 1 
fori 
krej 
dre 


1 SS 

i ^ 


kur 
dur 


s 

CO 

1 

CO 


a-cre 
pou-dre 


final termm 
out the e an 
ounds they 
dng Englis, 


cr-ane 
dr-ain 


fle 


to "a 


ful 


C3 


buf-fle 


s $ZM 


fl-ame 


fre 
gle 
gre 




fur 
gul 
gur 


P 

to 
o 


cof-fre 
an-gle 
mai-gre 


§1*3 

~ to *» to 

^ g © > 


fr-ame 

gl-are 

gr-ave 


pie 


§ «* 


pul 


am-ple 


£ I 2 & 

X ° s 


pl-ane 


pre 


3"! 


pur 


6 


pro-pre 


*• 2 to - 2 
^ © o § 


pr-aise 


tre 


s 


tur 




an-tre 




tr-am 



10 NOTES. 

* In comparing this table of simple sounds of voiveh with Levizac's, it 
will be seen that though he gives but seventeen sounds I give twenty. 

Since Levizac gives the short and long sounds of o and of eu, I do not 
see why he omitted the long sound of i, ofu, and of ou. 



| Soon after the publication of my book of Fables, at tho beginning of 
which I have drawn an approximative comparison between the French 
and the English sounds, I saw in a number of the Yankee, then (1S29) 
published in Portland or in Boston, an article which reproved me for 
having dared to compare the sound of e in mere with the sound of a in 
mare, or which amounts to the same thing, for having dared to make a 
difference between the sound of a in mare, fare, &c. and the sound of a 
in ale, fate, &c. 

At the time I made that difference I looked for no authority, but I 
trusted to my ear, which seldom deceives me with regard to the least 
shades in the sounds of languages. Since the publication of the above 
mentioned article in the Yankee, I have made some researches, the result 
of which has proved to me, that if I was wrong, many eminent English 
and American orthoepists were so too. 

For the information of the writer of said article in the Yankee I shall 
quote the authors who are in favour of the difference I made, and still 
make between, the above two sounds. 

See J. A. Cummings' Pronouncing Spelling Book, third edition, Bos- 
ton, 1822 ; preface, page ix. 

See John Franklin Jones' Analytical Spelling Book, second edition, 
New York, 1824, page 14, line 10th; page 19, the word rare ; page 60, 
the word bexvare; page 61, column 4th, the word affair, and following. 

See E. Hazen's Speller and Definer, New York, 1830 ; page 7, the 
word fate ; page 189, the words pair, pare, and pear, 

See^WiLLiAX Pelham's System of Notation, Boston, 1S08, pagexxiii. 
the words mare, tare, and care. 

See Webster's 4to. Dictionary, Vol. I. Directions for the pronuncia- 
tion of words, page 2, 17th line from the bottom. 

See Webster's 8vo. Dictionary, page iv., 21st line from the bottom. 
There will be seen not only the opinion of Mr. Webster himself, but that 
of Mr. J. E. Worcester of Cambridge, and of Professor Goodrich of 
Yale College, who, we are told by Webster's preface, have had much to 
do with the editing of his 8vo. dictionary. 

In the passage referred to, it will also be seen that Perry, the English 
orthoepist, has made the same difference in his Dictionary, which is, and 
has been, since its publication, the best authority quoted by well informed 
people in England. 

See I. E. Worcester's 12mo. Dictionary, New York, 1830, page iii. 
Key to the sounds of the marked letters, and also, page xi., 14th line from 
the bottom. 

See Hknry Butter's Etymological Spelling Book, London, 1831, a 
book much esteemed in England. 

See William Klssell's Lessons in Enunciation, Boston, 1830, page 
12, 1 1th line from the top. 

Mr. William Russell is the editor of the Journal of Education (first 
scries), and taught elocution for many years in Cambridge and Boston. 



PUNCTUATION AND ACCENTUATION. 11 

Punctuation and Accentuation. 

39. Besides the marks of punctuation, which are the same 
both in French and in English — comma , virgule — semicolon, 
; point-virgule- — colon : deux points — period . un point — 
note of interrogation ? point oV interrogation — note ot admira- 
tion, or exclamation ! point oV admiration ou oV exclamation 
— the parenthesis () laparenthese — the dash — le trait de se- 
paration — a quotation " " guillemets ; there are other marks 
called accents. 

40. The acute accent ' accent aigu — is placed over e in 
certain words, and gives it the sound called /enrce ; as heard 
iw prefers, regenere, fyc. 

41. The grave accent v accent grave— is placed over a, e, 
u, in certain words ; and gives to the e the sound called 
ouvert ; as heard in mere, proces, $*c. 

42. The grave accent, put over a, u, has no influence on 
their sound : it is used principally to distinguish one part of 
speech from another ; for instance, to distinguish a. to, from 
a has — la there, from la the — oil where, from ou or, &c. 

43. The circumflex accent /x accent circonflexe — is placed 
over a, e, i, o, u, in certain words, to give these vowels a 
long sound ; as in age, tete, epitre, cote, buche, fyc, which 
were formerly written aage, teste, epistre, coste, busche, &c. 

44. The cedilla g cedille — is a kind of comma placed un- 
der c, to give it the sound of s, before a, o, u, as in fagade, 
fagon, regu, $c. ; in which words c would be hard, and pro- 
nounced like k in kick, were it not for the cedilla. 

45. The diceresis •• trema or dierese — are two dots placed 
over the vowels e, i, u, to indicate that these vowels are not 
to form a diphthong with the preceding vowel, but are to be 
pronounced separately ; as in poete, naivete, saill, fyc. 

46. The hyphen - tiret or trait oVunion — is used to con- 
nect — 1st, compound words ; as belles-lettres, arc-en-ciel, $c. 
2dly, the personal pronouns ; je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, Us, 
elles, to the verb, when used interrogatively : as parle-je, 
parles-tu, fyc. 3dly, the conjunctive pronouns ; moi, toi, lui, 
4*c. to the verb, when put after it; as paries -moi, dites-hd. 
4thly, and also, to show at the end of a line, that a word has 
been divided, part of which begins the following line. 

47. The apostrophe ' apostrophe — is used to show the 
suppression or elision of a vowel before another vowei, or 
before an h mute ; as — Veglise, instead of la eglise — Vhomme % 
instead of le homme, 8fC. 



12 



INTRODUCTION. 



INTKODUCTION TO THE EXERCISES. 



the sin 
gular. 



48. The learner is to render the English definite article 
le before a noun masculine "*] 

la before a noun feminine 
the by -^ V before a noun masculine or feminine 

beginning with a vowel or h mute J 

les before nouns of either gender in the plural. 

19. The learner is to render the English indefinite article 
, C un before a noun masculine singular. 
a or an y ^ Mng before a noun feminine singular. 

EXAMPLES. 
Le livre the book les plantes 

la rue the street un homme 

f'ame* the soul une femme 

«'histoire the history un heros 

EXERCISES, 
the^forest, the houses, the men, 

foret, f. maisons, h.ommes. cour, f. 

the arms, the room, the garden, the windows, 

chambre, f. jar din, m. fenetres, 

a foreigner, 

ttranger, m. 
the moon, 
lune, f. 



the plants 
a man 
a -woman 
a hero. 

the court, 



bras, 
a novel, 

roman, m, 
the sun, 
soleil, m. 



a walk, 
promenade, 


a day, 
f. jour, m, 


the stars, 
etoiles, 


a body, 
corps, n\ 



1'ne wood, 
bois, m. 

thfe foot, 
pied, m. 

a history, 

histoire, f. 
a night, 

nuit, f. 

a card, a crown. 

carte, f. ecu, m. 

50. The learner will render the English prepositions 
of and from by de, ~) and when followed by the article the he will render 
to and a? by a $ them thus : 

fdu before a noun masculine } si " suIar be g ln " in S wi <!> 

J <fc to before a noun feminine < a «» so '"^ « r * as l»* 
^ J rated. 

1 de V before any noun beginning with a vowel or h mute. 

\jfes before any noun in the plural. 



of the by 

or 

from the by 



to the by 

or 
at the by 



au before a noun masculine 
a la before a noun feminine 



singular beginning with 
a cojisonajit or h aspi- 
rated. 

a f before any noun beginning with a voivel or h mute 

aux before any noun in the plural. 

51. When the above prepositions of from, to, and at, are followed by 

a or an, he will render them thus : 

r r , C (fun before a noun masculine. 

of a or from a by £ ^ before a n<nm feminine# 

. ") a 7m before a noun masculine. 
to a or at a iy > ^ Mne De f ore a noun feminine. 



• Levizac in his own grammar writes time contrary to the best authorities. See 
GramrtHiire des Grammuires, 7th ed. page 1073. 



TO THE EXERCISES. 



13 





EXAMPLES. 






Du pare of the 


park 


al\ 


esprit 


to the mind 


de la riviere of the 


river 


aux 


carrosses 


to the coaches 


de l'esprit of the 


mind 


d'unjour 


of a day 


des carrosses of the coaches 


d'une nuft 


of a night 


au pare to the 


park 


a un jour 


to a day 


a la riviere to the 


river 


a une nuit 


to a night 




EXERCISES. 






The palace of the king, of the queen 


, of the man, to the 


palais, m. roi f 




reine, 


h 


.omme, 


king, to the queen, 


to the 


man, 


to the 


men, from 


a balcony, from a window, 


of a 


prince, 


to a princess, 


balco?i, m. fenttre, f. 




prince, 


princesse, 


of the gardens, of the evening, 


to the courtiers, 


of a table, 


jardins, soir, m. 




courtisans, 


table, f. 


to the master, to a lady, 


of the soul, 


of the horse, 


to a cat, 


maitre, dame, 


ame, f. 


cheval f chat, m. 


of the houses, of a carpet. 




■* ■ 




maisons, tapis, m. 








55. The learner will render 










00 




00 


00 


singular, m 




sing.f plur. m., and f. 


of or from my by 


de mon 




de ma 


de mes 


of or from thy by 


de ton 




de ta 


de tes 


of or from his~) 










of or from her v by 


de son 




de sa 


deses 


of or from itsj 










of or from our by 


de notre 




de notre 


de nos 


of or from your by 


de votre 




de votre 


de vos 


of or from their by 


de leur 




de leur 


de leurs 


to or at my i by 


a. mon 




a ma 


a mes 


Zo or at thy by 


a ton 




a ta 


a tes 


fo or at Ids') 










to or a? her C by 


a son 




a sa 


a ses 


£o or at its j 










to or at our by 


a notre 




a notre 


a. nos 


ft> or at your by 


a votre 




a. votre 


a vos 


?o or at their by 


a leur 




a leur 


a leurs. 



(a) JWon, ton, son, are put before nouns singular m. and before nouns 
sir.g. f. when the sing. f. nouns begin with a voioel or an h mute. 

(b) Jlla, ta, sa, are put before nouns singular f. beginning with a con- 
sonant or an h aspirated. 

(c) Mes, tes, ses, are put before any nouns plural m. or f. 
53. The learner will render 

"ce before a noun singular 
m. beginning with a con- 
sonant or an h aspirated, 
of this, of that, from this, from that by de j cet before a noun singular 
to this, to that, at this, at that, by a * m. beginning with a vow- 
el or h mute. 
cctte before any norm 6in- 
^ gular 1. 
B 



14 



INTRODUCTION 



of these, of those, from these, from those, by de ces\ before amy noun 



to these, to those, at these, at those, by a ces 

EXAMPLES. 

of my father a. leur travail 



de mon pere 
a ta mere 
de son frere 
de notre ville 
a votre maison 



to thy mother 
of his brother 
of our toivn 
to your house 



de cette terrace 
de ce lieu 
de cet homme 
de ces arbres 



5 in the plural. 



to their -work 
from this terrace 
of that place 
of this man 
of these trees 



Of my clothes, 
habits, 



EXERCISES, 
of thy handkerchief, 
mouchoir, m. 

of our treasure, to their house, 



of his pocket, 
poche, f. 



of your 



tresor, m. 

of this tower, 
tour, f. 



letters, 
lettres, 

that hero, 
heros, 

your relations, the top 

parens, sommet m. montagne, f. 

pleasures, of our duties, to their connexions, 
plaisirs, devoirs, liaisons, 

to my neighbours. 
voisins. 



of this steeple of 
maison, f. clocher, m. 

of these models, of my sister, to 

mo deles, sceur, 

of this mountain, to my friend", of these 
ami, m. 

of his acquaintances, 
connaissances, 



ELISION. 

54. The Apostrophe ' marks, we have said, (page 11, art. 
47.) the suppression of a vowel before another vowel or an h 
mute. 

55. This suppression is called Elision. The only vowels 
that suffer elision before another vowel or h mute are a, e, t. 

56. The vowel i is only suppressed in the word si when 
it comes before either of the two following words il, he or it 
— Us, they, thus : s'il, if he or if it, instead of si il, if he or 
if it — s'ils, if they, instead of si Us, if they. 

57. The vowels a, e, are suppressed in the following words : 
when these words are placed before other words beginning 
with a vowel or h mute. 

58. Throughout this book, whenever a word begins with an /* mute, 
the h will be an italic h if the French word is in Roman ; if in italics, 
then a . will be put after the h — thus, h.omme. 



si 


if 


See article 56 , above. 




le 


the 


before a vowel, or h mute, 


r 


le* 


him 


it U U 


r 


le* 


it 


U it « 


r 


la 


the 


u u U 


r 



TO THE EXERCISES. 



15 



la* 


her 1 


la* 


it 


je* 


I 


me 


me 


te 


thee 


m 


himself 


je 


herself 


se 


itsel 


se 


themselves 


ce 


this 


ce 


that 


ce* 


it 


de 


of 


ne 


pot 


que 


that 


que 


which 


que 


whom 


parceque 


because 


quoique 


although 


puisque 


since 


jusque 


till 


vu que 


since 


des que 


as soon as 


quelque 


some 


entre 


between 



before a vowel or h mute, 



V 
V 

y 

nv 



« « s 

a « s > 

« " c' 

U « c ' 

a u c » 

« « d' 

« " n' 

«• " qu' 

u k q U » • 

" " qu' 

u " parcequ 

" " quoiqu' 

" " puisqu' 

" « jnsqu' 

« " vu qu' 

" " des qu' 

" u quelqu' 

" " entre 

59. The e in entre, before eux, elles and autre, may or may not be 
suppressed ; it is indifferent whether we write, entre eux, or entr'eux — ■ 
entre elles, or entr'elles — entre autres, or entr'autres. 

60. * When the words (all pronouns) thus marked * in the above list, are put 
after the verb of which they are the nominative— or by which they are governed 
in the objective case — they do not suffer elision, although the word that comes 
after them begins with a vowel or an h mute— thus, apportez-le ici, est-ce a tui t dj-c. 

EXERCISES. 

The soul, the heroine, the mind, he loves him, she loves her 
ame,f, heroine, f. esprit,m, il 2 aime He, elle 2 aime Ha, 

I love this man, you do not understand me, he esteems thee, 

je aime h.omme, vous * ne 3 pas 2 entendtz l me, il 2 estime He, 

he goes away, it was the golden age, do not go there, if 

se enva, ce etait 2 d'or l dge, *hie z pas 2 allez 4 la, si 

he comes, if they please, what has he said ? till night, 

vient, ils veident, que a~t- il dit ? jusque au soir, m, 

though he says, since he knows, when he saw, between them, 
quoique dise, puisque sait, lorsque vit, entre eux, 

somebody is come. 
quelque un est ve?iu. 

61. In the following French negative modes of speech, which answer 
to the accompanying English translation, the caret A points out the place 
which the French verb must occupy, whenever it is not in the innnitive 
mood. 



16 



INTRODUCTION 



Not 



?ne A 



pas 
point 



never ne jamais 
nothing ne A rien 

nobody ne*personne 



not a jot ne * goutte 



■we have not, 



>™< 



no where 



ne A nulle 
part J 



"je ne suis pas, &c. lam not, &c> 

nous Savons 

point, 

il nejoue jamais, he never plays 
vous ne dites ~) 

rien, $ you say nothm ^ 

je ne vols per- 

sonne, 



/ see nobody, 

} I do not see, or 
je ne vols goutte, £» / see not in the 
j least. 



je ne vais nulle 
. part, 



}lgo 



no where. 



62. But in compound tenses, it is the auxiliary verb that parts the ne- 
gative ne from the pas, ox point, &c. that accompanies it, as nous n' 'avons 
point parle, we have not spoken ; on i^aurait jamais cru, one could never 
have believed, 

63. The addition of pas, or point, to the negative particle ne, must not 
be considered as a second negation ; but only as a complimental part of 
it. For in such cases, pas, point, goutte, are mere restrictive terms, 
nearly resembling the English word, jot, bit, tittle, sometimes added to 
not, with this difference, that pas and point in French have nothing trivial 
in them. 

I do not say, I have not said, I have never seen, I never (tell a 
* dis, ai dit, vu, 

falsehood), I do nothing, I have done nothing, is he not arrived 1 
mens, fais fait est-il ariHve ? 

does he not come 1 I see nothing, has he never seen 1 he never loses 
* HI l vient ? vais a-t- vu ? perd 

his time, that (is worth) nothing, I met nobody. 
temps, m. cela vaut rencontrai 

N. B. The above exercise and directio?i, article 61, are out of place* 
JLivizac ought to have remembered that the scholar kriows as yetnotldng 
about simple and compound tenses, 

64. There are many words which are alike in both languages, and 
others which differ only in their termination. 

65. The expressions, which are perfectly alike, are particularly those 
that have the following terminations : 

C animal, cardinal, fatal, general, local, moral, natal, origi- 

(_ nal, principal, &c. 

C capable, fable, &c. bible, eligible, &c. noble, double, 

C. soluble, insoluble, &c. 

<^ face, grimace, grace, place, preface, race, surface, trace, 

I &c. 

^chance, complaisance, extravagance, ignorance, lance, 

I temperance, &c. 

C abstinence, conference, continence, diligence, eloquence ? 
C patience, &c. 

C artifice, auspices, edifice, justice, injustice, office, orifice, 
c precipice, solstice, &c 



-al 


as 


-ble 
-ace 
-ance 
-ence 
ice 















TO THE EXERCISES. 



17 



C miracle, oracle, obstacle, receptacle, tabernacle, specta- 
£ cle, &c. 

C ambuscade, cavalcade, brigade, esplanade serenade, re- 
C. trograde, &c. 

C £ge, adage, bandage, cage, cordage, image, page, plumage, 
t rage, &c. 
college, privilege, sacrilege, siege, sortilege, &c. 
\ vestige, doge, barge, charge, orange, forge, rouge, refuge, 
I deluge, &c. 

C globule, ridicule, animalcule, corpuscule, formule, module, 
C mule, pustule, valvule, &c. 

5 bile, debile, agile, docile, ductile, facile, fragile, nubile, 
c reptile, versatile, &c. 

5 carabine, fascine, doctrine, heroine, machine, marine, fa- 
i mine, mine, rapine, &c. 

S action, fraction, legion, nation, opinion, passion, question, 
1 religion, &c. 

5" arrogant, constant, elegant, elephant, petulant, piquant, 
C poignant, vigilant, &c. 

5 absent, accident, compliment, argument, content, element, 
c frequent, serpent, &c. 

66 Many other English words require only the change of termination, 
ua the following manner : 



•acle 


as 


-age 
-ege 
-ge 

-ule 

-ile 

-ine 

-ion 

-ant 

-ent 


















-gy 


into 


-gie 


as energy 


energie 


-arv 





-aire 


— military 


militaire 


-ory 





-oire 


— glory 


gloire 


-cy 





-ce 


— clemency 


elemeneb 


•ty 





-te 


— beauty 


beaute 


-0U8 





-eux 


— dangerous 


dangereux 


-our 





-eur 


— favour 


faveur 


or 


■ 


-eur 


— error 


erreur 


-ine 


. 


-in 


— clandestine 


clandestin 


-ive 





-if 


— expressive 


expressif 


•ry 





-rie 


— fury 


furie 


-dy 


■ 


-die 


— perfidy 
T-eux"^ 


perfidie 

C-euse 


N.B. 


Adjectives in 


< -if C make their feminine in <J -ive 








f-in S 


C _me 



EXERCISE. 

The beauty of the fable, the horror of vice,the utility of science, 
£ f. h.orreur, m. art. m. f. art. f. 

the atrocity of this action, the violence of his passions the simplicity of 

f. f. f. passions f. 

that machine; an 2 audacious 'conspirator, the absurdity of that opinion, 

f. f. f. 

the military evolutions, an 2 industrious ! nation, an important 'victory, 

2 miUtaires x evolutions, f importante f. 

an 2 alimentary 'pension, a 2 dangerous 'animal, a 2 figurative 'expression, 

£ m. f. 

a famous general, his 2 constant 'generosity, he is incapable of attention, 
constante £ est f. 

B2 



18 INTRODUCTION TO THE EXERCISES, 

his imprudence is visible,' his fidelity is indubitable, she is very at- 

*• £ elle tres- 

tentive, your clemency is admirable, the destruction of his fortune was 
f - £ L f. Jut 

the consequence of his temerity, she is very scrupulous, his condition 

£ f. tres- f. f. 

is horrible, his parents are very miserable, this history is incontestable, 

parens sont miserables, f. 

your facility is prodigious, his perfidy is odious, it was a horrible 2 famine, 

£ perfidie, f. ceetait f. 

the sublimity of his sentiments is still preferable to the energy of his 

£ sentimens encore energie, f. 

expressions, it was a decisive 'action, the carnage was terrible, that 
expressions, f. f. m< t u ^ 

obstacle is invincible, this instrument is not harmonious, the prosperity 

m. m. f. 

of the wicked is not durable, your insidious 'presents are not acceptable, 
michans, presens sont acceptables, 

his memory is truly extraordinary, that is his principal 'occupation, a 

f. vraiment ce est principale f. 

2 central position, his extravagance is visible, these arguments are 
centrale f. f. argumens 

insoluble. 
insolubles 



PART I. 

OF WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR NATURE AND INFLECTIONSL 

67. There are, in French, nine sorts of words, or parts of speech, namely : 
1. Substantive, or Noun, 4. Pronoun, 7. Preposition, 

2 - Article, 5. Verb, 8. Conjunction, 

3. Adjective, 6. Adverb, 9. Interjection. 

CHAPTER I. 

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE, OR NOUN. 

68. The substantive is a word, which serves to name a person, or thing, 
as Pierre, Peter ; livre, book, &c. 

69. There are two sorts of substantives, the substantive proper, or 
proper name, and the substantive common, also called appellative, 

70. The proper name is that which is applied to a particular person, or 
thing, as Cesar, CaBsar ; la Tamise, the Thames. 

71. The substantive common is that which belongs to a whole class of 
objects, The word homme, man, is a substantive common, as it is appli- 
cable to any individual. 

72 Of these nouns, some are collective, and others abstract. 

7b. Collective nouns express either a whole mass, as une armee, an 
army ; unejoret, a forest : or a partial assemblage, as une quantitc de, &c, a 
quantity of; la plitpart, most part, &c. 

74. Abstract nouns are the names of qualities abstracted from their 
subjects, as surface, rondeur, science, sagesse ; surface, roundness, know- 
ledge, wisdom, &c 

75. In substantives, are to be considered Gender and Number. 



19 



OF GENDERS. 



76. Gender is the distinction of sex, or the difference be- 
tween male and female, 

77. The^e are in the French Language but two Genders : 
the Masculine, which belongs to men and animals of the male 
kind ; as, John, lion, S/c. The Feminine, which belongs to 
women or animals of the female kind ; as, Lucy, lionness, fyc. 

78. This distinction has, through imitation, been extended 
in the French to all those substantives (inanimate objects) that 
are neither male nor female; and which, in English, are of the 
neuter gender. Thus in French — un livre a book, is mascu- 
line — une table a table, is feminine, fyc. 

79. The gender of French nouns, which in English are 
neuter, is commonly ascertained by their terminations. 

A great number of writers have endeavoured to give rnles: 
but none have had the patience to go carefully over the 
" Dictionnaire de l' Academie," to make themselves sure 
that the rules they were giving embraced a greater number 
of words, than the list of exceptions to those rules. 

They all found it less irksome, after having given the ex- 
ceptions they could remember, to have recourse to this 
phrase — " You must except such and such words ; and others 
that usage will teach." By this method it is evident that the 
scholar cannot know whether the nouns, whose gender he 
wants to ascertain, come under the rules given, or is one of 
those words that usage is to teach him: in this predicament he 
must have recourse to a dictionary; and if there is none with- 
in his reach, he must expose himself to make a blunder in the 
gender of some noun, which will sometimes change entirely 
the meaning of his phrase, and sometimes excite laughter. 

The following few pages contain A Treatise on the Gen- 
ders of French Nouns, as short as the subject w T ould admit. 
The rules are precise, and the list of exceptions complete ; so 
that any person, after having learned the rules and exceptions, 
can, without the help of any dictionary, which he cannot 
always carry about him, ascertain at once the gender of any 
noun contained in the Dictionnaire de l'Academie and in 
the supplement to that work. 



20 



A. Bolmar's Complete Treatise 



MASCULINE, 

FROM THEIR SIGNIFICATION. 

1. Dieu God— homme man — all animals of the male kind — 

lion lion, &c. — and all those objects to which we fancifully 
attribute masculine qualities ; as — ange angel — satire satyr 
— soleil sun, &c. 

2. The names of Trees ; as — chene oak — peuplier poplar, &c. 

Exception. 
yeuse holm. 

3. The names of Shrubs ; as — rosier rose-bush, &c. 

Exceptions. 
aubepine hawthorn, ronce briar, 

bourdaine black alder, vigne vine. 
epine thorn, 

4. The names of the Seasons of the year; printems spring—' 

ete summer, &/C. 

automne autumn, is of both genders. 

5. The names of the Days of the week ; dimanche Sunday — 

lundi monday, &,c. 
C The names of Metals and Minerals; as — fer iron— 
mercure mercury, &c. 

7 The names of Colours ; as — noir black — blanc white, &c. 

8 The letters of the Alphabet ; as — un a — un b, Slc. 

9. Adjectives, numeral adjectives, pronouns, verbs, adverbs, 
prepositions, conjunctions, and interjections, used sub- 
stantively ; as — le bon good — le manger the eating — un 
quart one fourth — un dixieme one tenth, &lc. 
Exceptions. 

uric moitic a half, and all Nos. ending with aine as 
douzaine, quinzaine, &c. 



unc antique antiqi/c, 
une courbe a curve, [dicular, 
une perpendiculaire a perpen- 
une tangente a tangent, 



are fem. statue statue or 
medaille medal in the 
1st, and ligne line in the 
three last being underst. 



21 



on the Genders of French Nouns. 



FEMININE, 

FROM THEIR SIGNIFICATION. 

, Deesse goddess — femme woman — all animals of the female 
kind; lionne lioness — and all those objects to which we 
fancifully aXtnbute feminine qualities ; as — lune moon, &c. 
The names of Virtues ; as — modestie modesty, &c. 
Exceptions. 
courage courage, merite merit. 
The names of Vices ; as — jalousie jealousy, &c. 
The names of Holy-days ; as — Toussaint all-sainfs day — ■ 
Paque the passover, (fee. 

Exceptions. 

Paque or Paques easter, is masculine. 

Noel christmas, is masculine. 

N. B. When the diminutive mi half, is prefixed to a noun, the noun is then 
fern, as la mi-car erne. All other diminutives follow the gender of the nouns 
from which they are derived ; thus une globule a small globe, is mase. 

, The names of the Four Parts of the world ; as — Europe 
Europe-^- Amerique America, &c. 



FEMININE, 

FROM THEIR TERMINATION. 

Nouns with the following terminations are feminine. 
te] as — sante health — bonte goodness, &c 
Exceptions. 



aparte aside, 
arrete decree, 
benedicite grace 
at meal. 



comite committee, 
comte county, 
cote side, 



pate pie, 

precipite precipitate, 

traite treaty or treatise 



tie] as — .amitie friendship — moitie half, &c. • 
ion] as — nation nation — religion religion, &c. 
Exceptions. 



bastion bastion, 
besti on beak-head, 
brimborion bauble, 



camion minikin pin, 
galion galleon, 
lampion small lamp, 



pion pawn, 
scion twig, 
talion retaliation 



22 bolmar'j? complete treatise 

MASCULINE. 

10. Nouns compounded of a verb and a noun are also mascu- 

line ; as — cure-dent tooth-pick — casse-noisette nut-cracker 
— tourne-broche a jack, &,c. Although dent, noisette, 
broche, are feminine. 

Exception. 
garde-robe wardrobe. 

1 1. The names of the Cardinal Points, and of the winds j 

as— le sud the south — le nord the north, &c. 
Exceptions. 

bise north-east wind, I tramontane tramontane, 
brise light wind, | mousson monsoon, 

12. The names of Empires, Kingdoms, and Countries \ as— 

Bresil Brasxl — Portugal Portugal, &c. 
Exceptions. 

Those names of Empires, Kingdoms, and Countries, that 
end with e mute, are feminine; as — Russie Russia— 
France France, &c. 

However, Bengale Bengal — Mexique Mexico — Pe- 
loponese Peloponnesus — Le Caire Cairo — are masculine, 
although ending with e mute. 

13. The names of Mountains ; as — Caucase Caucasus— 

Parnasse Parnassus — Vesuve Vesuvius, &c. 
Exceptions. 
Alpes, Cordilliere, Pyrenees, Vosges. 

11. The names of Towns, Boroughs, and Villages ; some 
are masculine, some feminine ; and as no good rule can 
be given it is better both for a Frenchman and a 
foreigner, to avoid mistake, to use after them, the words 
ville, bourgj village — and say, for instance — Paris est une 
belle ville Paris is a fine town, &c. instead of Paris est 
beau Paris is fine. 

15. The names of Rivers, follow their termination, if they 
end with any other letter except e mute, they are mas- 
culine ; as — le Rhin the Rhine — le Nil the Nile, &c. 
Those ending in e mute, are feminine; as — la Seine 
the Seine — la Tamise the Thames, &c. 
Exceptions. 
le Rhone, le Tibre, le Danube, le Cocyte, are masculine, 
though they end with e mute 



ON THE GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS/ 



23 



FEMININE. 

4. son] as — chanson song — maison house, &c. 



Exceptions. 



blason heraldry, 
diapason diapason, 
oison gosling 



poison poison, 
tison firebrand. 



N. B. All nouns ending with • sson or on, except those 
ending with the above terminations (ion and son) are 
masculine, according to the rule 1st, in the masculine 
column ; all nouns ending with a consonant are masculine. 
For the exceptions, see the table annexed to that article, 
eur] as — fureur fury — douceur mildness, &,c. 
Exceptions. 



bonheur happiness, 
chceur chorus, 
cceur heart, 
deshonneur dishonour, 
equateur equator, 



exterieur the outside, 
honneur honour, 
interieur the inside, 
labeur labour. 
malheur misfortune. 



Except also all nouns ending with eur, which can only be 
applied to man ; as — docteur doctor, &,c. And also 
those nouns ending with eur, which have a feminine , 
as — masculine, acteur actor — feminine, actrice actress — 
masculine, parleur talker — feminine, parleuse talker — 
masc. pecheur sinner — fern, pecheresse sinner, &c. 

All nouns ending with e mute, are feminine, provided 
they be neither comprised under the rules of Masculine 
nouns, nor in the following list of those Masculine 
nouns ending with e mute, which cannot be brought 
under any particular rule. 



List of Nouns which cannot be brought under any particu- 
lar rule, and which are Masculine, though ending with e 
mute. 



Abaque 


Abacus. 


aide 


assistant. 


acousmate 


acousma. 


aide 


support, is fern. 


acrostiche 


acrostic. 


aigle 


eagle (bird) or a 


acte 


act. 




great genius. 


adminicule 


adminicle. 


aigle 


eagle (a standard,) is 


adverbe 


adverb. 




[fern 



24 



BOLMAR S COMPLETE TREATISB 



16. 



MASCULINE, 

The names of some Animals, Birds, Fish, Shell-fish, 
Reptiles, and Insects, in which the male is not dis- 
tinguished from the female, and that do not end with 
e mute ; as — ours bear — vautour vulture — saumon sal- 
mon — homard lobster — ver worm. &c. 



Exceptions 
fourmi ant, 
perdrix partridge^ 



souns mouse, 
chauve-souris bat. 



Those names of animals, birds, fish, shell-fish, reptiles 
and insects, in which the male is not distinguished from 
the female, and that end with e mute, are feminine , 
as — panthere panther — colombe dove — truite trout — 
huitre oyster — vipere viper — mouchefly, &c. 

Exceptions. 



aigle eagle, 
bievre beaver, 
buffi e buffalo, 
capricorne Capricorn, 
crabe crab, 



cygne swan, 
dromadaire dromedary, 
iievre hare, 
merle black-bird, 
rouge-gorge redbreast. 



MASCULINE 

FROM THEIR TERMINATION 

1. Nouns ending with a consonant ; as — fusil gun, &c. 
Exceptions. 



amours amours, flame 
amours loves, plural 

of amour is masc. 
boisson beverage, 
chair fleshy 
chaux lime, 
clef key, [feiting, 
contrefacon counter- 
cour yard, 
croix cross\ 
cm Her spoon, 
CuissOD billing, 
delices delights, 

delice delight, in the 

singular is masc. 
dent, tooth, 



dot dower, 
facon making, 
faim hunger, 
faux sit he, 
fin end, 

fin main point, is 
fois time. [mas. 
for et forest, 
gent nation, race, 
gens people m.& f. 
hart halter, 
econ lesson, 
main hand, 
rnoeurs manners, 
mer sea, 
moisson harvest, 



mort death, 

nef nave, 

noix walnut, 

nuit nio-ht, 

paix peace, 

part share, 

pi u part most part, 

poix pitch, 

p re m i c e s first fruits, 

rancon ransom, 

so if thirst, 

tour tower, 

tour trick, is mas. 

toux cough, 

vis screw 

voix voice. 



ON THE GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS. 



25 



List of Masculine nouns, ending with e mute. 



alveole 


alveolus. 


caustique 


caustic. 




C combination of 
< two numbers at 
( the lottery. 


cenotaphe 


cenotaph. 


ambe 


cerne 


circle. 




chambranle 


jamb. 


amiante 


amiantus. 


chose (quelque) something. 


amulette 


amulet. 


chose 


thing, is fern 


animalcule 


animalcule. 


cimeterre 


cimeter. 


antidote 


antidote. 


cimetiere 


church-yard. 


antipode 


antipodes* 


cippe 


cippus. 


aphelie 


aphelion. 


cirque 


circus. 


apogee 


apogee. 


cistophore 


cistophorus. 


apographe 


autograph. 


cloaque 


sink. 


apologue 


apologue. 


coche 


barge. 


aromate 


aromatic. 


coche 


notch, is fern 


asterisque 


asterisk. 


code 


code 


astragale 


astragal. 


codicille 


codicil. 


athenee 


athaneum. 


codille 


codil. 


augure 


augur. 


colisee 


colisoeum. 


automate 


automaton. 


colloque 


colloquy. 


axe 


axis, [baptism. 


collyre 


collyrium. 


baptistere 


certificate of « 


collosse 


colossus. 


basalte 


basaltes. 


colure 


colure. 


becarre 


c-sharp. 


commerce 


trade. 


bejaune 


ninny. 


compte 


account. 


beurre 


butter. 


conciliabule 


conventicle. 


branle 


jogging. 


conclave 


conclave. 


caducee 


caduceum. [ing. 


cone 


cone. 


caique 


counter-draw- 


conte 


tale. 


cahille 


calville. 


controle 


register. 


eamee 


camea. 


conventicule 


private meeting. 


campestre 


campestre. 


corpus cule 


corpuscle. 


camphre 


camphire. 


corymbe 


corymbus. 


cantique 


canticle. 


coryphee 


coryphceus. 


capitole 


capitol. [teer. 


cothurne 


buskin. 


cdpre 


a sort of a priva- 


coude 


elbow. 


cdpre 


caper {a pickle) 


courage 


courage. 


capuce 


capuche [is fern. 


crane 


skull. 


oarrosse 


coach. 


crater e 


crater. 


caractere 


character. 


crepe 


crape. 


casque 


helmet. 


crepe 


a kind of pan- 


catafalque 


catafalco. 




cake, is fern. 


catalogue 


catalogue. 


crepuscule 


twilight. 


catarrhe 


catarrh. 


cromorne 


krumhorn. 



26 



BOLMAR S COMPLETE TREATISB 



MASCULINE. 

From the Masculine nouns, that end with a consonant — 
except, also, nouns ending with 

ion } which are feminine, with very few exceptions ; 
son > see these terminations among the feminine 
eur ) terminations. 

Nouns ending with the following letters, are Masculine 
2 a] as — opera opera — sofa sofa, &c. 
3. e] as — cafe coffee — de thimble, &c. 
Exceptions. 

Nouns ending with 

te ) . . • 

... > are feminine : see feminine terminations. 

tie ) ' 

4 l] as — parti party — pli fold, &c. 

Exceptions. 

apres-midi after- 1 loi law, 

foi faith, [noon. | merci mercy, 

5. o] as — piano piano — numero number, &c. 

Exceptions. 
albugo albugo, | virago virago* 

6. u] as — chapeau hat — couteau knife, &c. 

Exceptions. 

eau water, 1 peau skin, I vertu virtue, 

glu bird-lime, | tribu tribe, 

7. ge] as — usage usage — cirage blacking. 

Exceptions. 



merci thank, is masc. 
paroi partition. 



alonge elcing-piece, 
apophyge apophyge, 
auge trough, 
bauge retreat of a 
cage cage,[wild boar : 
enallage enallage, 
e.piloge Roman coat, 
eponge sponge, 
fangc mire, 
f range fringe, 
forge forge, 
gorge throat, 
gouge gouge, 



grange barn, 
horloge clock, 
hypallage hypallage, 
image image, 
jauge gage, ^ 
litige litigation, 
loge hut, box. 
longe loin, [sire, 
malerage violent de- 
meninge meninges, 
a la nage swimming, 
neige snow, 
orange orange, 



orge barley, 
page page of a book y 
parasange parasang, 
phalange phalanx, 
plage flat shore, 
purge cleansing, 
rage rage, 
rechange re-ex- 
serge serge, [change 
tige stalk, 
toge Roman gown, 
vendange vintage, 
vidange clearing. 





ON THE GENDER 


OF FRENCH NOUNS. ' 


List of Masculine nouns, ending with e mute. 


cube 


cube. 


genie 


genius. 


culte 


worship. 


genre 


gender. 


decalogue 


decalogue. 


gite 


abode. 


decompte 


discount. 


glaive 


sword. 


dedale 


labyrinth. 


globe 


globe. 


delire 


delirium. 


globule 


globule. 


demerite 


demerit. 


golfe 


gulf- 


derriere 


back part. 


grade 


degree. 


diacode 


dyacodium. 


greffe 


rolls, graft. 


dialecte 


dialect. 


groupe 


group. 


dialogue 


dialogue. 


guide 


guide, tutor. 


diese 


sharp. 


guide is fern. 


rein. 


diocese 


diocese. 


gymnase 


gymnasium. 


disque 


disk. 


gynecee 


gymnoeceum. 


distique 


distich 


gypse 


gypsum. 


dithyrambe 


dithyrambus. 


hale 


sun-burning. 


dividende 


dividend. 


hemisphere 


hemisphere. 


divorce 


divorce. 


hemistiche 


hemistich. 


domaine 


domain. 


here 


poor wretch. 


doute 


doubt. 


hieroglyphe 


hieroglyphic* 


ellebore 


hellebore. 


horoscope 


horoscope 


elysee 


elysium. 


hymenee 


hymen. 


emetique 


emetic. 


hymne 


hymn. 


empire 


empire. 


iambe 


iambus. 


empiree 


empyreum. 


incendie 


conflagration. 


entr'acte 


interlude. 


indicule 


index. 


epilogue 


epilogue. 


insecte 


insect. 


episode 


episode. 


interligne 


interline. 


equinoxe 


equinox. 


intermede 


interlude. 


erysipele 


erysipelas. 


intervalle 


interval. 


escompte 


discount 


jable 


crome. 


espace 


space. 


jade 


jade. 


euphorbe 


euphorbium. 


jaspe 


jasper. 


exergue 


exergue. 


jeune 


fasting. 


exode 


exodus. 


labyrinthe 


labyrinth. 


exorde 


exordium. 


laque 


lacco. 


faite 


top, summit 


laticlave 


laticlavium 


faune 


faun. 


leurre 


lure. 


feurre 


kind of a straw. 


levitique 


leviticus. 


flligrane 


hTigrane. 


lexique 


lexicon. 


fleuve 


river. 


libelle 


libel. 


fluide 


fluid. 


limbe 


limb. 


foie 


liver. 


lithophyte 


lithopyton. 



27 



28 



E0LMAR 3 COMPLETE TREATISE 



MASCULINE, 

8. me] as — crime crime — baume balm, &c 
Exceptions. 

alarme alarm, 
ame soul, [ness, 
amertume bitter 
arme arm, 
brume thick fog, 



cime top, 
coutume custom, 
creme cream, 
dime tithe, 
drachme drachm, 
ecume froth, 
encluine anvil, 
enigme enigma, 
epigramme epi- 
gram, 
escrime fencing, 
estame worsted, 



estime esteem, 
ferme farm, 
flamme fame, 
forme form, 
frime pretence, 
gamme gamut, 
gomme gum, 
gourme the stran- 
gles. 
lame blade, 
larme tear, 
legitime share, 
lime fie, 
maxime maxim, 
palme victory, 
palme a hand's 
breadth, is m. 



pantomime panto- 
mime, 

paume tennis, palm 
of the hand, 

plate-forme plat- 
form, 

plume feather, 
quill, and pen, 

pomme apple, 

prime prime, 

rame oar, ream, 

reforme reform, 

rime rhyme, 

somme sum, 

somme nap, is m 

trame woof, plot y 

victime victim. 



9. ice] as — orifice opening— sacrifice sacrifice, &c. 
Exceptions. 



avarice avarice, 

cicatrice scar, 

delices delights, is 
fern, but delice 
delight, is masc. 

epice spice, 



immondice rubbish, 
injustice injustice, 
justice justice, 
lice list, 
malice malice, 
matrice mould, 



milice militia, 
notice notice, 
office pantry, 
office office, is m* 
police police, 
varice varix, 



10. ile or yle] as — asile asylum — style style, &c. 
Exceptions. 



argile clay, 
bile bile, 
file file, 



huile oil, 
ile isle, 
tuile tile, 



vigile vigil, 
voile sail, 
voile veil, is m. 



11. aire] as — dictionnaire dictionary — vocabulaire vocabulary 
— inventaire inventory, &c. 
Exceptions. 
affaire business, 



aire area, 
cliairc pulpit, 
circulaire circular, 



gramma ire grammar 
haire haircloth, 
paire pair. 



ON THE GENDERS OP FRENCH NOUNS. 

List of Masculine nouns, ending with e mute. 



29 



lobe 


lobe 


omoplate 


shoulder-blade* 


lobule 


lobulus. 


opuscule 


opuscule. 


logogriphe 


riddle. 


orbe 


orb. 


luxe 


luxury. 


organe 


organ. 


lycee 


lyceum. 


ovgue 


organ. 


malaise 


trouble. 


orgues, is fern. 


organs. 


manche 


handle. 


ovale 


oval. 


manche, is fern, sleeve. 


pacte 


bargain, [thers. 


manipule 


maniple. 


panache 


bunch of fea- 


manque 


want. 


pancrace 


pancratium. 


masque 


mask. 


panegyrique 


panegyric. 


mausolee 


mausoleum. 


paniographe 


pantograph. 


mecompte 


mis-reckoning. 


paradoxe 


paradox. 


menisque 


meniscus. 


paragraphe 


paragraph. 


mercure 


mercury. 


parafe 


flourish to a sig* 


merite 


merit. 




nature. 


mesaise 


trouble. 


parallele 


parallel. 


Messie 


Messiah. 


parapluie 


umbrella. 


meteore 


meteor. 


parere 


advice. 


microscope 


microscope. 


parjure 


perjury. 


ministere 


ministery. 


parterre 


flower - garden, 


mode 


mood. 




or pit (theatre.) 


mode, is fern. 


fashion. 


participe 


participle* 


modele 


model. 


patrimoine 


patrimony. 


module 


module. 


pecule 


peculium. 


mole 


pier. 


pedicule 


pedicle. 


monde 


world. 


peigne 


comb. 


monocorde 


monochord. 


pendule 


pendulum. 


monologue 


soliloquy. 


pendule, is fem.clock. 


monopode 


monopodium. 


pene 


bolt. 


monopole 


monopoly. 


pentacorde 


pentachord. 


monastere 


monastery. 


pentateuque 


pentateuch. 


monticule 


small hill. 


perigee 


perigeum. 


moule 


mould. 


perinee 


perinaeum. 


multiplicande 


multiplicand. 


periode 


pitch, summit. 


murmure 


murmur. 


periode, J3 fem.period. 


musee 


muscBum. 


peritoine 


peritoneum. 


mystere 


mystery. 


personne 


nobody. 


navire 


ship. 


personne, is f. person. 


negoce 


traffic. 


petale 


petal. 


nimbe 


nimbus. 


phare 


light-house. 


obelisque 


obelisk. 


;phenomene 


phenomenon 


olympe 


olympus. 


!phosphore 


phosphorus. 



c2 



30 



BOLMAR S COMPLETE TREATISE 



MASCULINE. 



12. 



13 
14. 



15. 



16. 



oirej as — auditoire auditory — memoire account, &e 
Exceptions. 

ecritoire ink-stand, nageoire fin, 
gloire glory, jpassoire strainer 

histoire history, \ poire pear, 
memoire memory, ivictoire victory. 

cide] as — homicide homicide — acide acid, &,c. 
ste] as — buste bust — poste post, (military station,) &c 
Exceptions. 

liste list, 

peste pest, 



armoire press, [tub, 
baignoire bathing- 
decrottoire shoe- 
foire fair, [brush, 



amethyste amethyst, 
batiste cambric, 



ble 
cle 
fle 



aigle eagle (stand- 
bible bible, [ard,) 
boucle buckle, 
couple couple, two, 

bre 



piste track, 
poste post, (for let 
Teste vest, [ters,) 

C sable sand — couple a couple (as man and 
as < wife)— siecle century — exemple example 
( — ongle nail, &c. 

Exceptions. 

debacle breaking fable fable, 

of ice, regie rule, 

e table stable, table table. 
exemple copy, 



ere 
dre 
fre 



gre 
pre 
tre 
vre 



capre a sort of a privateer — foudre large 
vat — livre book — pourpre purple (stuff) 
— monstre monster — cadre frame, &,c. 



acre acre, 
algebre algebra, 
ancre anchor, 
anti-ckainbre anti- 
chamber, 
balafre scar, 
calandre calender, 
capre caper (pickle) 
cbambre chamber, 
cendre ashes, 
chartre charter, 
dartre tetter, 
encre ink 



Exceptions. 
epitre epistle, 
escadre squadron of 
fibre fibre, [ships, 
fenetre window, 
fie vre fever, 
foudre thunder bolt, 
gaufre wafer, 
guetre gaiter 
iettre letter, 
levre lip, 

livre pound, [vre, 
manoeuvre manceu- 



mitre mitre, 
montre watch, 
nacre nakre, 
ceil vre works of an 
offre offer, [author, 
ombre shade, 
outre leather bottle, 
poudre powder, 
pourpre purple (co- 
pontre beam, [lor,) 
rencontre meeting 
v it re pane of glass. 



ON THE GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS. 

List of Masculine nouns, ending with e mute. 



31 



planisphere 


planisphere. 


remise, is fern, coach-house. 


plebiscite 


piebiscitum. 


repere 


mark. 


poele or poile 


stove, pall. 


reproche 


reproach. 


poele, is fern. 


frying-pan. 


reve 


dream. 


pole 


pole. 


reverbere 


street-lamp. j 


polygone 


polygon. 


risque 


risk. 


polype 


polypus. 


role 


part. 


polypode 


polypodium. 


sacerdoce 


priesthood. 


ponche 


punch. 


scandale 


scandal. 


pore 


pore. 


scrupule 


scruple. 


porche 


porch. 


sexe 


sex. 


porphyre 


porphyry. 


signe 


sign. 


portique 


portico. 


silence 


silence. 


pouce 


thumb , inch. 


simulacre 


simulacre. 


preambule 


preamble. 


site 


site. 


precepte 


precept. 


socque 


sock. [count* 


preche 


protestant ser- 


solde 


balance of ac- 


prelude 


pr elude, [mon. 


solde, is fern. 


soldier's pay. 


presbitere 


presbytery. 


soliloque 


soliloquy. 


pretexte 


pretext. 


somme 


nap. 


principe 


principle. 


somme 


sum, is fern. 


prologue 


prologue, [ing. 


sourire 


smile, 


prone 


sermon, scold- 


sphero'ide. 


spheroid. 


protocole 


protocol. 


specifique 


specific. 


proverbe 


proverb. 


spondee 


spondee. 


pylore 


pylorus, [gure. 


squelette 


skeleton. 


quadrilatere 


quadrilateral fi- 


stade 


stade. 


quadrille 


quadrille. 


store 


blind. 


quaterne 


combination of 


subside 


subsidy. 




four numbers 


symbole 


symbol. 




at the lottery. 


synode 


synod. 


quinconce 


quincunx. 


tarse 


tarsus. 


quine 


combination of 


telegraphe 


telegraph. 




five numbers 


telescope 


telescope. 




at the lottery. 


tenare 


tsenarus 


quinquenove 


quinquenove. 


teorbe or tuoi be theorbo. 


quinquerce 


quinquertium. 


terne 


combination of 


regne 


reign. 




three numbers 


regule 


regulus. 




at the lottery 


relache 


relaxation. 


texte 


text. 


relache, is fern 


. harbour. 


thyrse 


thyrsus. 


remede 


remedy. 


tintamarre 


thundering noise 


remise 


hired coach. 


tithymale 


tithymal 



82 



bolmar's complete treatise, 



List of Masculine nouns, ending with e mute. 



tonnerre 


thunder. 


ulcere 


ulcer. 


topique 


topic. 


vase 


vase. 


toxique 


toxicum. 


vase, is fern. 


mud. 


traite 


treaty, treatise. 


vaudeville 


ballad. 


trapeze 


trapazium. 


vehicule 


vehicle. 


tribule 


calthrop. 


verbo 


verb. 


triomphe 


triumph. 


vermicelle 


vermicelli. 


trochee 


trochee. 


verre 


glass. 


trochisque 


trochisch. 


vestibule 


lobby. 


trone 


throne. 


viatique 


viaticum. 


trope 


trope. 


vide 


emptiness. 


trophee 


trophy. 


vignoble 


small vineyard 


tropique 


tropic. 


violoncelle 


violoncello. 


tube 


tube. 


viscere 


intestines. 


tuber cule 


tubercle. 


vote 


vote. 


tumulte 


tumult. 


zele 


zeal. 


tuorbe 


theorbo. 


zodiaque 


zodiac. 


type 


type. 







80. Among the French nouns ending with eur, there are some that are 
used both for the masculine and the feminine. We say, in speaking of a 
gentleman, il est Vauteur de ce liv^e, he is the author of this book ; and 
of a lady, elle est Vauteur de ce livre, she is the authoress of this book. 
Some change the termination eur into euse for the feminine ; thus we say 
of a gentleman, tin danseur, a dancer; and of a lady, une danseuse, a 
dancer. Some change the termination eur into rice thus, we say of a 
gentleman, un lecteicr, a reader; and of a lady, une lectrice, a readei. 
Some others are very irregular in the formation of the feminine. 

81. Some of the nouns ending with eur are also used as adjectives; 
they will be found among the adjectives, page 49, and will be pointed 
out in the three following lists, by an asterisk * placed before them. 

82. All substantives ending with eur, not found in the three following 
xists, have no feminine, or their feminine is like the masculine. 

83. (list of nouns ending with eur for the masculine, and cuse for the 
feminine. 



MascuJine. 


Feminine. 


Enclifh. 


.Accapareur 


accapareuse 


monopoliser. 


.acheteur 


acheteuse 


buyer. 


aflVontcur 


affronteuse 


impostor. 


• arraeheur 


arracheuse 


puller. 


nvaleur 


avaleuse 


one that swallows. 


.baigneur 


baigneuse 


bather. 


.ualayeur 


Halayeuse 


sweeper 



ON THI 


I GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS. 3c 


Masculine. 


Feminine. 


English. 


baragouineur 


baragouineuse 


Jabberer. 


barguineur 


barguineuse 


haggler. 


bateleur 


bateleuse 


juggler. 


bayeur [er 


bayeuse 


gaper. 


.blanchisseur, bleach- 


blanchisseuse 


"washerwoman. 


-boudeur 


boudeuse 


one "who pouts . 


bousilleur 


bousilleuse 


bungler. 


.brasseur 


brasseuse 


brerwer. 


bredouilleur 


bredouilleuse 


stammerer. 


brocardeur 


brocardeuse 


scoffer. 


brocheur 


brocheuse 


stitcher. 


.brodeur 


brodeuse 


embroiderer. 


brunisseur 


brunisseuse 


burnisher. 


.buveur 


buveuse 


drinker. 


.cajoleur 


cajoleuse 


cajoler. 


caqueteur 


caqueteuse 


prattler. 


cardeur 


cardeuse 


carder. 


*.causeur 


causeuse 


talker. 


.chanteur 


5 chanteuse 
C cantatrice 


singer. 


singer 


a theatrical singer. 


.chasseur 


5 chasseuse 
C chasseresse 


huntress. [huntress, 


hunter 


used in poetry, 


chercheur 


chercheuse 


seeker. 


chicaneur 


chicaneuse 


chicaner. 


chuchoteur 


chuchoteuse 


"whisperer. 


clabaudeux 


clabaudeuse 


cla7iiorer. 


.coiffeur 


coiffeuse 


hair dresser. 


.complimenteui 


complimenteuse 


complimenter. 


.confiseur 


confiseuse 


confectioner. 


.connaisseur 


connaisseuse 


connoisseur 


conteur 


conteuse 


teller. 


.couch eur 


coucheuse 


bed-fello-w. 


.coupeur 


coupeuse 


cutter. 


.coureur 


coureuse 


runner. 


.cracheur 


cracheuse 


spitter. 


craqueur 


craqueuse 


Jibber. 


criailleur 


criailleuse 


squaller. 


crieur 


crieuse 


barvler. 


.danseur 


danseuse 


dancer. 


.debiteur 


debiteuse 


spreader of news. 


.debiteur 


debitrice 


debtor. 


de coupeur 


de coupeuse 


carver. 


demandeur 


demandeuse 


begger. 


demandeur 


demandresse 


prosecutor. 


devideur 


devideuse 


■winder. 


.devineur 


devineuse 


guesser. 


devineur, diviner 


devineresse 


divineress. 


discoureur 


discoureuse 


tattler 


.diseur 


diseuse 


teller. 


.donneur 


donneuse 


giver. 


doreur 


doreuse 


gilder. 


.dormeur 


dormeuse 


sleeper. 


ecornifleur 


^cornifleuse 


spunger* 



34 



GENDERS 



Masculine. 


Feminine. 


English. * 


.ecouteur 


ecouteuse 


listener. 


emboiseur 


emboiseuse 


coaxer. 
C one that makes strati 
\ bottoms for chairs. 


empailleur 


empailleuse 


erapeseur 


empeseuse 


starcher. 


empoisonneur 


empoisonneuse 


poisoner. 


.emprunteur 


emprunteuse 


borrower. 


enjoleur 


enjoleuse 


ivheedler. [or prints. 


enlumineur 


enlumineuse 


one -who colors maps 


ensorceleur 


ensorceleuse 


bewitcher. 


.entrepreneur 


entrepreneuse 


undertaker. 


eplucheur 


eplucheuse 


picker 


escrc-queur 


escroqueuse 


sharper. 


.false ur 1 


faiseuse 


maker. 


faneur 


faneuse 


haymaker. 


fendeur 


fendeuse 


cleaver. 


.fileur 


fileuse 


spinner. 


finasseur 


finasseuse 


a sly person. 


f.agorneur 


flagdrneuse 


sycophant. 


* flatteur 


flatteuse 


flatterer. 


fluteur 


fluteuse 


•whistler. 


frappeur 


frappeuse 


striker. 


fraud eur 


fraudeuse 


cheat. 


gageur 


gageuse 


better. 


.gagneur 


gagneuse 


gainer. 


garde ur 


gardeuse 


keeper. 


gaspilleux 


gaspilleuse 


squanderer* 


gausseur 


gausseuse 


Jlouter, 


.glaneur 


glaneuse 


gleaner. 


glisseur 


glisseuse 


slider. 


gloseur 


gloseuse 


censurer. 


goailleur 


goailleuse 


jeerer. 


grapilleur 


grapilleuse 


grape gleaner. 


.grasseyeur 


grasseyeuse 


lisper. 


.grondeur 


grondeuse 


scolder. 


hableur 


hableuse 


boaster. 


j argon neur 


jargonneuse 


gibber er. 


.jaseur 


jaseuse 


prater. 


jeuneur 


jeuneuse 


faster. 


.jouenr 


joueuse 


gamester. 


jugeur 


jugeuse 


judger. 


louangeur 


louangeuse 


praiser. 
Cpraiser, or a person 


loueur 


loueuse 


"\ iv ho lets out any 
C thing. 


lavcur 


laveuse 


ivasher. 


leveur 


leveuse 


$one iv ho takes up 
C printed sheets. 






ligueur 


liguetise 


lea purr. 


liscur 


liseuse 


a lover of reading. 


i ivkheur 


macheuse 


cheiver. 


.mangcur 


mangeuse 


eater. 


jnarcheur 


marcheuse 


-walker. 



OF FRENCH NOUNS. 



35 



masculine 
marieur 
*.menteur 
.moissonneur 
*.raoqueur 
.riageur 
ouvreur 
.parfumeur 
.parleur 
piailleur 
.plaideur 
.pleureur 
plieur 
polisseur 
.porteur 
pourvoyeu^ 
.preneur 
.preteur 
.prometteur 
.proneur 
*.querelleur 
.questionneur 

queteur 



rabacheur 

raccomodeur 

raconteur 

.radoteur 

*.railleur 

.raisormeur 

ranconneur 

.rapporteur 

ravaudeur 

receleur 

jeceveur 

Tempailleur 

remueur 

.repasseur, grinder 

.revendeur 

*.reveur 

.ricaneur 

.rieur 

rioteur 

rogneur 

.ronfleur 

rotisseur 

roupilleur 

sarcleur 

hauteur 



Feminine, 
marieuse 
menteuse 
moissonneuse 
moqueuse 
nageuse 
ouvreuse 
parfumeuse 
parleuse 
pi ai lie use 
plaideuse 
pleureuse 
plieuse 
polisseuse 
porteuse 
pourvoyeuse 
preneuse 
preteuse 
prometteuse 
proneuse 
querelleuse 
questionneuse 

que te use 



rabacheuse 

raccomodeuse 

raconteuse 

radoteuse 

railleuse 

raisonneuse 

ran^onneuse 

rapporteuse 

ravaudeuse 

receleuse 

receveuse 

rempailleuse 

remueuse 

repasseuse 

revendeuse 

reveuse 

ricaneuse 

rieuse 

rioteuse 

rogneuse 

ronfleuse 

rotisseuse 

roupilleuse 

sarcleuse 

sauteuse 



English. 

matchmaker, 

liar. 

reaper. 

mocker. 

sivimmer, 

box-keeper. 

perfumer 

talker. 

squatter. 

narrator, 

•weeper, 
folder. 

polisher. 

porter. 

purveyor. 

taker 

lender. 

promiser. 

praiser. 

quarreller. 

questioner, 
rone that goes about to 
\ obtain money fir 
/ charitable purposes, 
rone that ?nakes tire' 
} some repetitions in 
/ discourse. 

mender, 

re later. 

dotard. 

jeerer. 

reasoner. 

exacter. 

reporter. 

patcher. 

concealer. 

receiver 
rone -who puts nerto 
) straw bottoms to 
( chairs. 

mover. 

one who irons linen, 

huckster 

dreamer 

giggler. 

laugher. 

smiler. 

clipper. 

snorer. 

one that roasts meat, 

dozing persoti. 

iveedcr, 

leaper 



36 



5 


GENDERS 




Masculine 


Feminine. 


English. \ 


.siffleur 


slffleuse 


iv fustier. 


souffieteur 


souffleteuse 


c one who slaps the 
£ cheeks of another. 


souffleur 


souffleuse 


prompter. 


suborneur 


subomeuse 


suborner. 


tateur 


tateuse 


feeler. 


tatonneur 


tatonneuse 


fumbler. 
Cone -who takes the 


tilleur 


tilleuse 


2 filaments from the 
£ hemp or fax plant. 


.tisonneur 


tisonneuse 


c one who likes to poke 
£ the f re 


tousseur 


tousseuse 


cougher. 


.trembleur 


trembleuse 


coward. 


tricoteur 


tricoteuse 


knitter. 


*.trompeur 


trompeuse 


deceiver. 


troqueur 


troqueuse 


swapper. 


veilleur 


veilleuse 


night watcher. 
r one -whose profes- 


.vendeur 


vendeuse 


2 sion is to sell any 
t thing. 


vendeur 


venderesse 


one who sells. 


vendangeur 


vendangeuse 


vintager. 


verbiageur 


verbiageuse 


a prolix talker. 


ve tilleur 


vetilleuse. 


punctilious person. 


vielleur 


vielleuse 


C player of the hurdy 
{_ gurdy. 


.voleur 


voleuse 


thief. 


.voyageur 


voyageuse 


traveller. 



84. List of nouns ending with eur for the 
feminine. 



Masculine. 
Accelerateur 
.accompagnateur 
.accusateur, accuser 
.acteur, actor 
administrates, admi- 
.admirateur [nistrator 
*.adorateur 
.adulateur, adulator 
.ambassadeur, ambas- 
approbatcur [sudor 
.bienfaiteur, benefac- 
.calomniateur [tor 
•collaboratcur 
.conciliateur [tor 

.conducteur, conduc- 
.conservateur 
•eonsolateur 

contemplateur 

co-ope>ateur 
.correcteur 



Feminine, 
acceleratrice 
ac c ompagnatnce 
accusatrice 
actrice 

administratrice 
admiratrice 
adoratrice 
adulatrice 
ambassadrice 
approbatrice 
bienfaitrice 
calomniatrice 
collaboratrice 
conciliatrice 
conductrice 
conservatrice 
consolatrice 
contemplatrice 
co-op^ratrice 
correctrice 



masculine and rice for the 

English. 
accelerator, 
accompanist, 
accuseress. 
actress. 

administratrix, 
admirer, 
adorer, 
adulatress. 
ambassadress, 
approver, 
benefactress, 
calumniator, 
fellow-labourer* 
conciliator, 
conductress, 
conservator, 
consoler, 
contemplator. 
co-operator, 
corrector 



OF FRENCH NOUNS. 



37 



Masculine, 


Feminine. 


English. 




.corrupteur 


corruptrice 


corruptor. 




*.createur, creator, 


creatrice 


creatress. 




.curateur 


curatrice 


curator. 




.debiteur 


debitrice 


debtor. 




.debiteur 


debiteuse 


spreader of news. 




.delateur 


delatrice 


delator. 




.denonciateur 


denonciatrice 


denunciator 




* .de sapprobateur 


desapprobatrice 


b lamer. 




.dessinateur^raw^/iJ- 


dessinatrice 


a lady -who draws* 




detenteur [man 


detentrice 


detainer. 




♦.devastateur 


devastatrice 


destroyer. 




dilapidateur 


dilapidatrice 


spendthrift. 




.directeur, director 


directrice 


directress. 




.dispensateur 


dispensatrice 


dispensator. 




.dissimulateur 


dissimulatrice 


dissembler. 




.dissipateur 


dissipatrice 


•waster. 




.distributeur 


distributrice 


distributer. 




divulgateur 


divulgatrice 


divulger. 




dominateur 


dominatrice 


dominator. 




.donateur 


donatrice 


donor. 




emulateur, emulator 


emulatrice 


emulatress. 




.exagerateur 


exageratrice 


amplifier. 




.executeur, executor 


executrice 


executrix. 




.expositeur 


expositrice 


expositor. 




fauteur, fautor 


fautrice 


fautress. 




.fondateur 


fondatrice 


founder. 




.generateur 


generatrice 


generator. 




.imitateur 


imita trice 


imitator. 




*improbateur 


improbatrice 


one who improbates, 




improvisateur 


improvisatrice 


Cone -who speaks ex 
£ tempore. 




inoculateur 


inoculatrice 


inoculator. 




insidiateur 


insidiatrice 


insidiator. 




.inspecteur 


inspectrice 


inspector. 




.instigateur 


instigatrice 


instigator. 




JinstitnteuTyinstructor 


institutrice 


instructress. 




.interpretateur 


interpretatrice 


interpreter. 




interrupteur 


interruptrice 


interrupter. 




introducteur 


introductrice 


introducer. 




.inventeur 


mventrice 


inventor. 




investigateur 


mvestigatrice 


indagator. 




.lecteur 


lectrice 


reader. 




.legislateur, legislator 


legislatrice 


legislatress. 




.liberateur 


liberairice 


liberator. 




.litterateur 


litteratrice 


a literary character. 




.rnediateur, mediator 


raediatrice 


mediatress. 




.moderateur 


moderatrice 


moderator. 




*.observateur 


observatrice 


observer. 




.operateur 


operatrice 


operator. 




.perse cuteur 


perse cutrice 


persecutor. 




perturbateur 


perturbatrice 


perturbator. 




presentateur 


presentatrice 


patron. 




-profanateur 


profanatrice 


profaner. 





D 



38 



GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS. 



Masculine. 
* ,iprotecteur,protector 
.reconciliateur 
•re formate ur 
.seductcur 

.spectateur, spectator 
subornateur 
tentateur, tempter 
.testateur 
.luteur 
.violateur 
.asurpateur 
.zelateur 



Feminine, 
protectrice 
reconciliatrice 
reformatrice 
seductriee 
spectatrice 
subornatrice 
tentatrice 
testatrice 
tutrice 
violatrice 
usurpatrice 
zelatrice 



English. 
protectress, 
reconciler, 
reformer, 
seducer, 
spectatress, 
b. iber. 
temptress, 
testator, 
guardian, 
infringer, 
usurper, 
zealot. 



85. List of nouns ending with eur for the 
their feminine variously. 
Masculine. 



•Avant-coureur 
bailleur 
chanteur 
chanteur 

.chasseur, hunter 

defendeur 
demandeur 
demandeur 
devineur 
.devineur 
dissertateur 7 
disserteur £ 
.empereur, emperor 
*.enchanteur, 

enchanter 
.gouverneur, gover- 
.pecheur [nor 

procureur 
procureur, solicitor 
•serviteur 
.vendeur 
t vendeur 



Feminine, 
avant-couriere 
bailleresse 
cantatrice 
chanteuse 

r chasseresse 

£ chasseuse 
defendresse 
demandresse 
demandeuse 
devineresse 
devineuse 

disserteuse 

imperatrice 
enchanteresse 

gouvernante 

pecheresse 

procuratrice 

procureuse 

servante 

venderesse 

vendeuse 



*.vengeur, avenger vengeresse 



masculine, and which form 

English. 
forerunner, 
lessor. 

opera singer, 
singer. 

huntress, (inpoetry.) 
huntress, 
defendant, 
prosecutor, 
beggar, 
divineress. 
guesser. 

dissertator. 

empress, 
enchantress. 

governess. 

sinner. [proxy. 

one -who acts by 

the solicitor's -wife. 

servant. 

seller. [is to sell. 

one ivhose profession 

avengeress. 



86. I have said much on the nouns ending with eur because the sub- 
ject could not be treated in a shorter way to be of any use. No grammar 
that I know gives any information on this subject. Wanostrocht does 
not speak of it. What Levizac says about it, page 87, of his own gram- 
mar, is no direction for the learner. Many nouns in the above three lists 
are seldom used. It would be well if the learner committed to memory 
those before which a . is placed as the most used. 



NUMBERS. 39 



OF NUMBERS. 

87. By Number is understood that property which nouns have of de- 
noting either one or several persons or things. 

88. There are two numbers, the singular and the plural. 

89. The singular number expresses but one person or one tiling — as, 
a man, a table, &c. 

90. The plural number expresses more than one person or thing — as 
men, tables, &c. 

Of the Formation of the Plural of French Substantives. 

Direction. 

91. Whenever you want to form the plural of any French noun — 1st, 
See whether that noun does not come under the following exceptions 
(which may be ascertained by its termination in the singular) : if it does 
not come under any of the exceptions, then it comes under the genera] 
rule. 

General Rule. 

92. The plural of French nouns, is generally formed, as in English, ry 
the addition of an 5 to the singular, as : 

porte door, portes doors, 

rue street, rues streets. 

Exceptions. 

93. 1st, Alt nouns ending in the singular, with s, x, or z, remain the 
same for the plural, as : 

fils son, fils sons, 

voix voice, voix voices, 

nez nose, nez noses. 

94. 2d, All nouns ending in the singular with au, eu, or osu, take x to 
form the plural, as : 

bateau boat, bateaux boats, 

feu Jire, feux fires, 

V03U VOW, V03UX vows. 

95. 3d, Of nouns ending in the singular, with on, 6 of them take x to 
form the plural ; the rest follow the general rule, that is, they take s. 

bijou jeivel, bijoux jewels, 

caillou pebble, cailloux pebbles, 

chou cabbage, choux cabbages, 

genou knee, genoux knees, 

hibou owl, hiboux owls, 

joujou plaything joujoux playthings. 

96. 4th, Of nouns ending in the singular with al, 21 of them change 
that termination al into aux, to form the plural. The rest follow the ge- 
neral rule, that is, they simply take s to form the plural. 

amiral admiral^ amiraux admirals. 

animal animal, animaux animals. 

arsenal arsenal, arsenaux arsenals. 

canal canal, canaux canals. 



40 





NUMBERS. 


i 


capital 


principal, 


capitaux 


principals. 


cheval 


horse, 


chevaux 


horses. 


cristal 


crystal, 


cristaux 


crystals. 


fanal 


light-house, 


fanaux 


light-houses. 


general 


general, 


generaux 


generals. 


hopital 


hospital, 


hopitaux 


hospitals. 


madrigal 


madrigal, 


madrigaux 


madrigals. 


mal 


evil, 


maux 


evils. 


marechal 


farrier, marshal, 


marechaux 


farriers. 


metal 


metal, 


metaux 


metals. 


mineral 


mineral, 


mineraux 


minerals. 


quintal 


quintal, 


quintaux 


quintals. 


rival 


rival, 


rivaux 


rivals. 


signal 


signal, 


signaux 


signals. 


total 


total, 


totaux 


totals. 


tribunal 


tribunal, 


tribunaux 


tribunals. 


vassal 


vassal, 


vassaux 


vassals. 



vantail 



baux 


leases. 


coraux 


corals. 


emaux 


enamels. 


soupiraux 
sous-baux 


vents, 
under-leases. 


travaux 


•works. 


vantaux 


C leaves of a 
\ folding door. 



97. 5th, Of nouns ending in the singular with ail, 8 of them change 
that termination ail into aux, to form the plural. The rest follow the 
general rule, that is, they take s for the plural. 

bail lease, 

corail coral, 

email enamel, 

soupirail vent, 

sous-bail under-lease, 

travail work 

Co leaf of a 

\ folding door, 

9& 6th, Nouns of more than one syllable ending in the singular with 
ant and ent, according to the most general practice, drop the t and take 
s to form the plural, as : 

enfant child, enfans children, 

moment moment, momens moments. 

99. 7th, Monosyllables retain the t and take s to form the plural, as: 

gant glove, gants gloves. 

dent tooth, dents teeth. 

100. 8th, The only monosyllable that drops the t and takes s is gent, 
nation, which makes gens, people. 

101. 9th, The six following nouns are quite irregular in the formation 
of their plural. 

ail gariick, aulx garlicks. 

be tail cattle, bestiaux cattle. 

ai'eul grandfather, aieux ancestors. 

ciel heaven, cieux heavens. 

ceil eye, yeux eyes. 

bercail sheepfold, has no plural, 

miel honey, has no plural. 

102. 10th, JLieul, ceil, ciel, make also a'ieuls, dels, ceils, as: ses aieuls, 
meaning a person's two grandfathers ; des ciels-de-lit, testers of bed* $ 
des oeils de boeuf, ovals. 



NUMBERS. 41 

Of the formation of the plural of Compound Nouns. 

103. N. B. As several parts of speech are here introduced which hare 
not yet been explained, no exercise on them will be given in this place. 
I give these rules now to be referred to hereafter. 

104. When a noun is compounded of a substantive and an adjective 
both take the mark of the plural, as : 

un gentilhomme, a nobleman , des gentilshommes, noblemen ; 
une basse-cour, a poultry-yard ; des basses-cours, poultry yards. 

105. We say for the sake of pronunciation without giving to the ad- 
jective the mark of the plural : 

grand'' mere grandmother, grand 'meres grandmothers. 

grand'messe high mass, grand? messes high masses. 

106. When a noun is compounded with a verb or with an adverb and 
a substantive, the substantive alone takes the mark of the plural, as : 

tin tour nebroche a jack, des tournebroches jacks. 

un avant-coureur a fore-runner, des avant-coureur s fore-runners. 

107. When a noun is compounded of two substantives united by a 
preposition, the first alone takes the mark of the plural, as : 

un maiire-d" hotel, a steward. des maitres-d 'hotel, stewards. 

108. Coq-a-tdne, and tete-a-tete do not take the mark of the plural , 
We say un coq-a-1'a.ne, des coq-a-1'ane, un tete-a-tete, des tete-a-tete. 

109. Words compounded with a verb and an adverb, or with a prepo- 
sition, do not take the mark of the plural, as : 

un passe-partout, a master key. des passe-partout, master keys. 

110. The following nouns, compounded with sieur, dame, demoiselle* 
and with the possessive pronoun mon and ma, take s for the plural, and 
change mon and ma into mes : 

JMonsieur, Sir or Gentleman, Messieun, Sirs or Gentlemen, 

Madame, Madam, JMesdames, Ladies, 

JMademoiselle, Miss, JMes demoiselles, Misses. 

111. N. B. In the following exercises the French noun, when put under 
the English, will be put in the singular : the learner will have to form 
the plural according to the foregoing rules and exceptions whenever the 
English noun is in the plural : 

EXERCISE. 

The flowers of the gardens, the niceties of the languages, 

Jleur jardin, dtlicatesse iangue, 

the palaces of the kings, the woods of those countries, 

palais roi, bois pays, 

the walnuts of their orchards, the pictures of those painters, 

noix verger, tableau peintre, 

the feathers of these birds, the melody of their voices, the gods of 

plume oiseau, milodie f. voix, dieu 

the pagans, the jewels of my sisters, the cabbages of our gardens, 
pa'len, bijou, soeur, chou jardin, 

these charming places, the horses of my stables, the fans of these 

2 charma?is Hieu, cheval ecurie, event ail 

ladies, the (front gates) of those churches, the actions of my 
dame, portail igtiae, 

d2 



42 OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 

ancestors, the evils of this life, the victories of those generals, 

a'ieulj mal vie, 

the works of those architects, the corals of those seas, the 

travail architecte, corail mer, 

(learned men) of those times, the presents of my parents, the 

savant temps-la, 

teeth of your combs, the playthings of our children, the heads of 
dent peigne, joujou enfant, tete 

these nails. 
clou. 



CHAPTER II. 
OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 



112. The definite article is a small word prefixed to substantives to 
determine the extent of their signification. 

C le before a sing, mascu. ~\ 
The French defi- J substantive. f the plural is les for both 

rate article is y la before a sing, femin. Q genders. 

C substantive. ) 

EXAMPLES. 

sins S le i om tneda y Ivixu S les ) mrs theda ys- 

8 * \la nuit the night 5 ' \les nuits the nights. 
EXERCISE. 
The sun, the moon, and the stars, are the glory of nature. 
soleil,m. lune, f. etoile, f. soxt f. art. f. 

The king, the queen, and the princes are well pleased. The 

roi, reine, trts-satisfaits. 

rose, the violet, the tulip, the narcissus, the hyacinth, 

f. violette, f. . tnlipe, f. narcisse, m. jacinthe, i. 

the gilliflower, the jasmine, the lily, the honeysuckle, the 

girofiee, f. jasmin, m. lis, m. chevre-feuille, m. 

ranunculus, are the delight of the sight. Poetry, 

renoncule f. dtlices f. pi. vue f. art. poesie, f. art 

painting, and music are (sister arts). The day and the 

peinture, f. art. musique f. sceurs. jour m. 

night are equally necessary. 
nuit f. egalement necessaires. 

113. The article is subject to elision and contraction. (Seepage 14.) 

114. Elision of the article is the omitting of the e in le, or the a in la, 
when these articles precede a noun beginning with a vowel or h mute. 

EXAMPLES, 
i'argent C instead f C le argent the money, 
l'histoire (_ \la histoire the history. 

115. But in this case the place of the letter thus omitted is supplied by 
an apostrophe. 

The soul of man without cultivation is like a diamond 
ame f, art. homme m. tans culture est comme diamant m. 



OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 



43 



(in the rough). The history of Spain is sometimes very interesting. 
brut. hisioire f. Espagne est quelquefois tres-inttressante. 

(Look at) the amaranth and the anemone ; what beauty I 
Considerez amaranthe f. f. quelle 

Self-love and pride are always the offspring of a weak 

art. amour-propre art. orgueil sont toujour s part age m. 2 faibJe 
mind. Honesty, innocence, honour, and the love of 

{ esprit m. art. Honnetete, art. art. honueur amour art. 

virtue are (very much esteemed). Summer, autumn, and 
vertu f. tres-estimes art. ete art. automne, art. 

winter are very changeable. France is separated from Italy by the 
hiver variables, art. separee de art. Italie par 

Alps, and from Spain by the Pyrenees. 
Jllpes, art. Pyrenees. 

116. Contraction in grammar is the reducing of two syllables into one, 
and takes place when the preposition a or de precedes the article ; m 
which case, instead of putting de le before a masculine singular, beginning 
with a consonant or h aspirated, du must be employed ; instead of a le, au 
must be used ; and before the plural substantives of both genders, de lee 
is changed into des, and a les into aux. 



Thus<( 



Du roi 
du heros 
au roi 
au heros 
des rois 
des reines 
aux rois 
l^aux reines 



is instead of 



de le roi 
de le heros 
a le roi 
a le heros 
de les rois 



are 



The 



of the king 
of the hero 
to the king 
to the hero 
of the kings 
de les reines of the queens 
a les rois to the kings 
a les reines to the queens 

EXERCISE. 

The top of the mountains and the bottom of the vallies 

sommet m. montagne fond m. vallee 

equally agreeable. Silk is soft to the touch. 

egalement. agreables, art. Sole f. douce toucher m. 

happiness of a 2 feeling iman is to relieve the wants of the poor. 

bonheur m. sensible de subvenir a besoin pauvre m. s. 

A man given to pleasure was never a great man. He obe}^ed the 

livre art. plaisir m. fut grand II obeit a 

orders of the king. The warbling of birds, the murmuring of 
ordres gazouillement m. art. oiseau, murmur e m. art. 

streams, the enamel of meadows, the coolness of woods, the 
ruisseau, email m. art. prairie, fraicheur f. art. bois, 

fragrance of flowers and the sweet smell of plants contribute 
parfum m. art. fteur douce odeurf. art. plante contribuent 

greatly to the pleasures of the mind and to the health of the body. 
beaucoup esprit sante f. corps m. 

117. De and a. are never contracted with la before a sing. fern, sub- 
stantive beginning with a consonant or an h aspirated. 

EXAMPLES. 

De la reine of the queen a la rein° to the queen. 

118. Nor are de and a contracted with le or la before any substantive 
singular beginning with a vowel oi h mute, but then the article sutlers 
elision. 



44 OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 

EXAMPLES. 

De V esprit of the mind de Vhomme of the man 

A V esprit to the mind a Vhomme to the man 

De Vame of the soul a Vame to the soul 

De Vhistoire of the history a Vhistoire to the history 

119. Contraction likewise does not take place when the adjective tout, 
all, every, intervenes between de or a and the article. 

EXAMPLES. 
De tout le monde, of every body A tous les hommes, to all men 
TJe tons les homines, of all men De toutes les vertus, of all virtues 

A tout le monde, to every body A toutes les maisons, to all houses 
EXERCISE. 
The hope of success strengthened the cause of virtue 
esptrance f. art. reussite f. fortifia f. art. vertu f. 

and weakened the audaciousness of rebellion. Fire of 

affaiblit audace f. art. f. art. Feu m. art. 

imagination, strength of mind, and firmness of soul, 

f. art. force f. art. esprit, art. fermete f. art. ame, 

are gifts of nature. We saw with horror that man (given up) 

des don art. f. Nous vimes avec livrt 

to avarice and voluptuousness. Good cultivation is that 

art. a art. volupte f. art. Bonne culture f. ce 

which contributes most to the fertility of the soil. More or less 

qui contribue le plus terre f. Plus ou moins 

pain is the lot of (every body.) The histor} T of man under 

de peine partage m. tout le monde m. art. dans 

all the circumstances of life is the study of the wise. 
toutes circonstance f. art. vie f. etude sage m. sing. 

Playfulness (does not become) all ages nor all 

art. Enjouement m. ue sied ni a art. m. ni a art. 

characters. 
caractere m. 

120. General Rule. In French, the article always agrees in gender 
and number with the substantive to which it relates. 

EXAMPLES. 
Le livre que je cherche, The book which I am looking for, 

Lufemme que je vois, The woman whom I see. 

Les hommes qiu ttudient, The men that study. 

EXERCISE. 

The father, mother, brothers, sisters, uncles, aunts, 
pere art. mere art. frere art. sceur art. oncle art. tante 
and several other relations were present. What we 
plusieurs autres parens Haient presens. Ce que nous 
value is health, frugality, liberty, vigour * of 

estimons cest art. sante f. art. f. art. f. art. vigueur f. art. 
mind and body ; it is the love of virtue, reverence 

de art. corps m. ce amour m. art. f. art. crainte f. 

for the gods, fidelity to all mankind, moderation in 

de dieu in. art. f. envers art. monde m art. f. dam 

prosperity fortitude in adversity, courage, good 

art. f. art. force f. art. f. art. m. art. bonnes 

morals v and the abhorrence of flattery. 
maeurs, horreur f. art. f. 



OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE 45 

121. General Rule. The article and the prepositions a and de, 
whether contracted or not, are invariably to be repeated before e^ery 
substantive. 

EXAMPLES. 
U esprit, les graces, et la beauti nous Wit, grace, and beauty, captivate 

captivent. us. 

Je vis hier le roi, la reine, et les I saw yesterday the king, queen, 

princes. and princes. 

Uignorance est la mere de Verreur, Ignorance is the mother of error, 

de V admiration, et des preventions admiration, and prejudices of 

de toute espece. every kind. 

EXERCISE. 
Innocence of manners, sincerity, obedience, and 

art. f. art. moeur art. f. art. obeissance f. art- 

abhorrence of vice, inhabit this happy region. The plants 

horreur art. m. habitent heureuse f. plante 

of the gardens, the animals of the forests, the minerals of the earth, 

jardin, m. foret, f. terre f. 

the meteors of the sky, must all concur to store the mind 

meteore del, ra. doivent tons concourir a enrichir 

with an 2 inexhaustible 'variety. Neither suffering punishment 
par intpuisable f. * art. peine, f. art. chdtiment m. 

nor kindness (make any) impression on those minds. 

* art. carresse f. pi. ne font nulle sur a?ne. 

The lily is the emblem of virginity, candour, 

lis m. symbole m. art f. de art. f. de art 

innocence, and purity, 

f. de art. purete f. 

122. JDu, de la, de l\ des, answering to the English indefinite adjective 
pronoun some or any, expressed or understood, have by way of ellipsis 
passed into habitual use. The same directions must be attended to as are 
given page 12, art. 50. 

EXAMPLES. 

Je mange du pain. I eat bread. 

II prend de la peine. He takes some trouble. 

Nous mangeons du hachis. We eat some hash. 

Elle concoit de la haine. She conceives a hatred. 

Vous avez de Vamitii, You have some friendship. 

Vous prenez de Vhumeur. You go into an ill humour. 

JVous cueillons des pommes. We gather apples. 

Its vendent des oranges. They sell oranges. 

EXERCISE. 

Give me some bread and butter. Offer him some meat 
J)onnez-moi pain m. beurre m. Offrez-lui viande f. 

Take some salt. (There is) mustard. We have some girkins. 
Prenez sel m. Voila moutarde f. Nous avons cornichon. 

(Shall I offer you) some chicken 1 (Shall I help you to) some fruit ? 
Vous offrirai-je poulet m. Vous servirai-je m. 

I (will take) (with pleasure) some broth. Bring me some bread. 

Je prendrai volontiers bouillon in. Apportez-moi 

(Pour me out) some beer. Drink some wine. Take some tea. 

Versez-moi biere f. Buvez vm m. Prenez the ra 



46 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

(Put in) some sugar and milk. I hear some noise. (There 

J\fettez~y sucre m. lait m. Xentends bruit m. II 

falls) some hail. She has some pride. Have you any ink 

torn be grele f. s. Elle a orgueil. Jivez-vous encre f. 

and pens 1 Put some oil and vinegar to the salad. Eat 

plumes? JMettez huile vinaigre m. sur saladef. Mange 
some lobster. He has received gold and silver. 

homard m. II a requ or m. argent m. 



CHAPTER III. 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



123. The adjective is not, like the substantive or noun, the name of 
any person or thing, physical, metaphysical, or abstract, but it is a word 
which, when added to a substantive or noun, expresses the. particular 
quality or defect of that substantive or noun, as 

bon pere, good father. bonne mere, good mother. 

mauvais peres, bad fathers. mauvaises meres, bad mothers. 

bon ange, good angel. mauvais ange, bad angel. 

beau livre, fine book. mauvais livres, bad books. 

124. In the above sentences, good and bad are the adjectives which 
express the qualities and defects of the substantives or nouns father, 
fathers, mother, mothers, angel, angels, book, books. 

125. In English the adjective is invariable; that is, the English adjec- 
tive is the same before a noun, whether that noun be masculine or femi- 
nine, singular, or plural, as 

un homme savant, a learned man. 

une femme savante 9 a learned woman. 

homines savans, learned men. 

femmes savantes, learned women. 

126. In French, the adjective must agree with the noun which it quali- 
fies, in gender and number ; that is, the adjective must be masculine 
singular, if the noun be mas. sing. ; feminine singular, if the noun be fern, 
sing. ; masculine plural, if the noun be mas. pi. ; feminine plural, if the 
noun be fern. pi. The adjective learned, which is the same in the above 
four English sentences, has in French four duTerent terminations. 

Of the formation of the Feminine of French Adjectives. 

127. N. B. Whenever you want to form the feminine of any adjective, 
first see whether that adjective is to be found amongst the lists of exeep- 
tions to the dillerent rules: if not to be found there, find out from its 
masculine termination under what rule it comes. 

128. Foi the formation of the plural of French adjectives, see page 51 
art. 150. 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 47 

129. French adjectives that end in the masculine singular with an e 
mute* remain the same for the feminine singular. 

Masculine. Feminine. English. 

aimable aim able amiable. 

aveugle aveugle blind. 

130. *The name of mute is given to the French e without an accent ; it is not 
pronounced at all at the end of French words of more than one syllable, but causes 
the consonant that precedes it to be pronounced very forcibly: it is of the same 
nature as the English e at the end of love, mate, tare, &c. 

131. French adjectives that do not end in the masculine singular with 
e mute, take e mute to form the feminine singular, if not found under the 
following rules or exceptions : 

Masculine. Feminine. English. 

prudent prudente prudent. 

sense sense e sensible. 

poli polie polite. 

tortu tortue crooked. 

instruit instruite informed. 

132. Adjectives ending in er in the mas. sing., besides taking an e 
mute to form their fern, sing., require a grave accent to be put over the e 
that precedes the r in the masculine, as 

Masculine. Feminine. English, 

leger legere light. 

cher chere dear. 

133. French adjectives that end in the mas. sing, with the following 
terminations, 

el, eil, ien, on, et, 
form their feminine by doubling the last consonant and taking e mute. 
Masculine. Feminine. English. 

cruel cruelle cruel. 

pareil pareille like. 

ancien ancienne ancient, 

bon bonne good. 

net nette clean. 

134. The following adjectives, although ending with et, form their 
feminine by taking an e, and placing a grave accent on the e that pre- 
cedes the t in the masculine : 

English 

concrete. 

discrete. 

indiscreet. 

uneasy. 

complete. 

incomplete. 

replete. 

sourish. 

135. The thirteen following French adjectives, though not ending in 
the masculine singular with el, eil, ien, on, or et, form their fern. sing, by 
doubling the last consonant and taking an e mute : 

Masculine. Feminine, English. 

loiu. 
C hoarse, or 
C broken*. 



Masculine. 


Feminine. 


concret 


concrete 


discret 


discrete 


indiscret 


indiscrete 


in quiet 


inquiete 


complet 


complete 


incomplet 


incomplete 


replet 


replete 


suret 


surete 



48 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



Masculine. 


Feminine 


English 


gras 


grasse 


fat. 


las 


lasse 


tired. 


expres 


expresse 


express. 


profes 


professe 


professed. 


epais- 


epaisse 


thick. 


metis 


metisse 


mongrel. 


gros 


grosse 


big, large. 


sot 


sotte 


foolish, or silly* 


vieillot 


vieillotte 


oldish. 


nul 


nulle 


null, or none. 


gentil 


gentille 


genteel. 



138. The French adjectives that end in the masculine singular with an 
/, change this letter / into v, and take e mute to form the feminine 
singular, as 

Masculine. Feminine. English. 

bref breve shore. 

actif active active. 

naif naive ingenuous, 

neuf neuve new. 
J 37. French adjectives that end in the masculine singular with an x, 

cnange this letter x into s, and take an e mute to form the feminine 
singular : 

Masculine. Feminine, 

honteux honteuse 

vertueux vertueuse 

jaloux jalouse 

*38. EXCEPTIONS. 

Masculine. Feminine, 

prefix prefixe 

faux fausse 

roux rousse 

doux flouce 

aigre-doux aigre-douce 

139. The five following French adjectives have two masculines singu- 
lar, and they form their feminine singular by doubling the / in the mas- 
culine singular before a vowel and taking an e mute : 

Masculine, before a Masculine, before a 
cons, or A aspirated. vowel or h mute. 

beau bel 

fou fol 

nouvcau nouvel 

mou mol 

vieux vieil 

140. The nineteen following French adjectives are entirely irregular 
in the formation of their feminine singular : 

Masculine. Feminine. English, 

blanc blanche -white. 

franc franche frank. 

frais fraiche fresh. 

sec seche dry. 

grec grecque Greek. 

public publique public, 



English. 
shameful, 
virtuous, 
jealous. 



English. 

prefixed. 

false. 

reddish. 

sweet. 

tart. 



Feminine. 


.English. 


belle 


fine. [zy. 


folle 


mad or era- 


liouvelle 


new. 


molle 


soft. 


vieille 


old. 



OF THE ABJECTIVE. 



49 



Masculine. 


Feminine. 


English. 


caduc 


caduque 


decrepit. 


turc 


turque 


Turkish. 


long 


longue 


long. 


benin 


benigne. 


benign. 


malin 


maligne 


malignant. 


tiers 


tierce 


third. 


tors 


torse or torte 


twisted. 


coi 


coite 


still. 


favori 


favorite 


favorite. 


jumeau 


jumelle 


twin. 


traitre 


trattresse 


traitor. 



141. French adjectives ending with eur, and which are also used as 
substantives, form their feminine singular as follows : 

The eight following change the mas. termination eur into ease for the £ 

Masculine. Feminine. English, 

causeur causeuse prattler. 

flatteur flatteuse flattering. 

menteur menteuse tying 

moqueur moqueuse mocker. 

querelleur querelleuse quarrelsome. 

railleur railleuse jeering. 

reveur reveuse thoughtful. 

trompeur trompeuse. deceitful. 

142. The seven following change the masculine termination eur into 
rice for the feminine : 

Masculine. Feminine. English, 

adorateur adoratrice adoring. 

createur creatrice creating. 

desapprobateur desapprobatrice blamer. 

devastateur devastatrice destructive. 

improbateur improbatrice disapproving. 

observateur observatrice observing. 

protecteur protectrice. protecting. 

143. The two following change the masculine termination eur into 
eresse for the feminine : 

Masculine. Feminine. English, 

enchanteur enchanteresse charming. 



vengeur 



vengeresse 



r efuL 



144. The eleven following adjectives, ending also with eur, simply 



take e mute to form their feminine : 



Masculine, 
anterieur 
citerieur 
exterieur 
inferieur 
interieur 
majeur 
meilleur 
mineur 
posterieur 
superieur 
ulterieur 



Feminine, 
anterieure 
citerieure 
exterieure 
inferieure 
interieure 
majeure 
meilleure 
mineure 
posterieure 
superieure 
ult^rieure 

E 



f 

English. 

anterior. 

citerior. 

exterior. 

inferior. 

interior. 

of age. 

better. 

minor. 

posterior. 

superior. 

ulterior. 



50 OF THE ADJECTIVE 

145. The eleven above adjectives, ending with eur, are not used as 
substantives, as those of the three preceding lists are. 

146. The above twenty-eight adjectives are the only adjectives ending 
in eur in the French. 

147. Some adjectives have no feminine, as dispos, active ; fat, foppish; 
paillet, pale, &c Others have no masculine, as blette, melloiv, &c. 

148. For the formation of the plural in French adjectives, see page 51. 

149. N. B. In the following exercises, when the French adjective is 
put under the English, it is put in the masculine : the learner will have 
to form the feminine, when required, by the foregoing given directions : 

EXERCISE. 
She is decent. This house is well situated. This pear is 
Elle Cet maison f. bien situe, poire 

too ripe. She is tall and well formed. This story is very enter- 
trop mur. grand bien fait. histoirei. tres-amu- 

taining. This person is very unsteady. This mountain is steep. 
sant. personne f. bien leger. montagne f. escarpe. 

This road is not very safe. The door is not open. This 
route f. sur. perte f. ouvert. 

room is dark. This street is too narrow. It is an ancient cus- 
chambre f. obscur. rue f. etroit. Ce cou- 

(om. She has carnation lips. His memory will be immortal. 
fume f. a art. 2 vermeil Hevre f. Sa immortel. 

His manners are natural. The engagement was warm. (That is) an 

maniere naif action f. fut vif voila 

original thought. This cloth is the best of all. They are 

2 neuf x penste f. £toffe f. meilleur toutes. Ce des 

delusive promises. He seduces by his fawning manners. The 
^trompeur l promesse f. seduit par 2 fatteur l manitres f. 

delightful valley of Tempe is in Thessaly. 

ddlicieux valine f. Tempe dans art. Thessalie f. 

EXERCISE. 
The grass is very thick. That soup is very good, but too fat. It 
herbe f. soupe f. mais trop 

is a foolish undertaking. (There is no) truth in all that. This 

sot entreprise f. II iHy a nid ve'rite' f. dans tout cela. 
water is not clean. It is a 2 very silly 'history. It is in the newest 
eau f. net* Ce fou f. a nouveau 

fashion. It is a fine statue. The law is express upon that point. 
mode f. beau f. loi f. 57/?- m. 

He lives in % state of luxurious idleness. This wax is not very white. 
// vit dans * * mou oisivete' f. cire f. 

She is as fresh as a rose. The paint on that wainscot is not dry. 

* comme f. peinture f. de larnbris m. 

His answer is a mere evasion. The thing is public. That plant 

response f. franc defaite f. chose f. herbe £ 

possesses a pernicious property. She (is of) a benevolent character. 

a 2 malin ^qualite". a 2 b£nin x humeur f. 

The avenging thunderbolt smote that (impious wretch). He extended 

2 vcngeur foudre f. frapp a impie m. 2 tcndit 

to us a protecting hand. This woman is jealous and deceitful. His 

* l nous iprotecteur } main f. femme f. jaloux faux. 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 51 

temper is mild. This color is too red. These old clothes 

humeur f. doux. couleur f. trop roux. ha^des £ 

are good for nothing. 
a ne rien. 

Formation of the Plural of French Adjectives. 

150. General Hule. The plural of adjectives and participles is gene- 
rally formed like the plural of nouns by adding an s to the singular : 

Mas. sing. Mas. plu. Fem. sing. Fern. plu. English. 

grand, grands, grande, grandes, great. 

poli, polis, polie, polies, polite. 

aime, aimes, aimee, aimees, loved. 

151. The above rule admits of no exceptions with respect to the forma- 
tion of the plural feminine from the sing. fem. of adjectives' but in form- 
ing the masculine plural from the mas. sing, there are several exceptions, 
which must be attended to. 

152. N. B. To form the plural feminine of any adjective, it is necessary- 
first to find its feminine singular, from which the feminine plural is formed 
Dy the addition of an * ; 

153. First exception — Adjectives ending with s or x in the mas. sing 
do not change their termination for the plural masculine : 

Mas. sing. Mas. plu. English, 

gras, gras, fat. 

heureux, heureux, happy. 

154. Second exception — Adjectives of more than one syllable (polysyl- 
lables), ending with ant and ent, according to the most general practice, 
change t into s to form the plural masculine : 

Mas. sing. Mas. plu. English, 

reconnaissant, reconnaissans, grateful. 

diligent, diligens, diligent. 

155. Third exception — However, adjectives of one syllable (monosyl- 
lables) retain the t final and take an s to form the plural masculine : 

lent, lents, sloxv. 

156. Fourth exception — The adjective tout makes tout mas. sing.; 
toute, fem. sing. ; tGus, mas. plu. ; toutes, fem. plu. all. 

157. Fifth exception — Adjectives ending with au in the sing. mas. take 
x to form the plu. mas. ; as 

Mas. sing. Mas. plu. English, 

beau, beaux, fine. 

nouveau, nouveaux, new. 

158. Sixth exception — Some adjectives, ending with al in the masculine 
singular, change that termination al into aux, to form the plu. mas : 

159. List of adjectives ending with al, which form their plural mascu- 
line in changing that termination al into aux : 



fasculine singular. 


Masculine plural. 


English. 


.annal 


annaux 


annual. 


austral 


austraux 


austral. 


.automnal 


automnaux 


autumnal. 


banal 


banaux 


common. 


.baptismal 


baptismaux 


baptismal. 


biennal 


biennaux 


hienniaL 



52 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



Masculine singular. 


Masculine pluraL 


English. 


.brutal 


brutaux 


brutal. 


bursal 


bursaux 


pecuniary. 


.capital 


capitaux 


capital, {brain. 


cerebral 


cerebraux 


belonging to the 


ceremonial 


ceremoniaux 


ceremonial. 


claustral 


claustraux 


claustral. 


collateral 


collaterau 


collateral. 


.collegial 


coliegiaux 


collegiate. 


.colossal 


C colossals 
(_ colossaux 


colossal. 


commensal 


commensaux 


commensal 


conjugal 


conjugaux 


conjugal. 


costal 


costaux 


costal. 


crural 


cruraux 


crural. 


decemviral 


decemviraux 


decemviral. 


decennal 


decennaux 


decennial. 


decimal 


decimaux 


decimal. 


.de loyal 


deloyaux 


disloyal. 


diagonal 


diagonaux 


diagonal. 


doctrinal 


doctrinaux 


doctrinal. 


domanial 


domaniaux 


belonging to a de* 


dorsal 


dorsaux 


dorsal, [mesne, 


dotal 


dotaux 


dotal. 


.£gal 


e*gaux 


equal. 


.electoral 


electoraux 


electoral. 


.episcopal 


episcopaux 


episcopal. 


.equilateral 


equilateraux 


equilateral. 


.equinoxial 


equinoxiaux 


equinoxial. 


fcal 


feaux 


trusty. 


feodai 


feodaux 


feudal. 


fiscal 


iiscaux 


jiscaL 


.fondamental 


fondamentaux 


fundamentals 


.general 


generaux 


general. 


.grammatical 


grammatically 


grammatical. 


.horizontal 


horizontaux 


horizontal. 


ideal 


ideaux 


ideal. 


.illegal 


illegaux 


illegal. 


.immoral 


immoraux 


immoral. 


impartial 


impartiaux 


impartial. 


.imperial 


imperiaux 


imperial. 


inegal 


inegaux 


unequal. 


infernal 


infernaux 


infernaL 


.lateral 


lateraux 


lateral. 


.legal 


legaux 


legal. 


-liberal 


liberaux 


liberal. 


.litteral 


litteraux 


literal. 


.local 


locaux 


local. 


.loyal 


loyaux 


loyal. 


machinal 


niachinaux 


machinal. 


.martial 


martiaux 


martial. 


.medicinal 


medicinaux 


medicinal. 


.meridional 


meridionaux 


me'ridionaL 


.moral 


moraux 


moral. 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



53 



.natal 


C natals 
(_ nataux 


natal* 


.national 


nationaux 


national. 


.numeral 


numeraux 


numeral* 


.nuptial 


nuptiaux 


nuptial. 


.occidental 


occidentaux 


occidental. 


.ordinal 


ordinaux 


ordinal. 


.oriental 


orientaux 


oriental. 


.original 


originaux 


original. 


paradoxal 


paradoxaux 


paradoxical. 


patrimonial 


patrimoniaux 


patrimonial. 


.partial 


partiaux 


partial. 


patriarcal 


patriarcaux 


patriarchal* 


.pectoral 


pectoraux 


pectoral. 


presidial 


presidiaux 


presidial. 


prevotal 


prevotaux 


provost ah 


primordial 


primordiaux 


primordial. 


.principal 


principaux 


principal. 


.proverbial 


proverbiaux 


proverbial. 


.provincial 


provinciaux 


provincial. 


.pyramidal 


pyTamidaux 


pyramidal, 


quatriennal 


quatriennaux 


quadrennial. 


.radical 


radicaux 


radicah 


.royal 


royaux 


royal. 


.rural 


ruraux 


rural. 


seigneurial 


seigneuriaux 


seigneuriah 


.septentrional 


septentrionaux 


northly. 


sepulcral 


sepulcraux 


sepulchral. 


.social 


sociaux 


social. 


spiral 


spiraux 


spiral. 


synodal 


synodaux 


synodal. 


transversal 


transversaux 


transversal. 


triomphal 


triomphaux 


triumphal. 


trivial 


triviaux 


trivial. 


venal 


venaux 


venal. 


verbal 


verbaux 


verbal. 


vertical 


verticaux 


verticah 


vital 


vitaux 


vital. 



160. All adjectives ending with al not found in the above list have no 
plural or are only used in the plural feminine. The learner will do well 
to commit to memory those most commonly used in conversation, and 
which are marked with a . before them. 

EXERCISE. 
They are envious and jealous. Those fowls are big and fat 

lis poulet m. 

Owls are frightful birds. (There are) some beautiful jewels, 
art. hiboum. des Viideux ] oiseaum. Voila de beau bijou nv 

The two new operas have succeeded. Men are only 

deux nouveau m. out reussi. art. ^sont l ne 4 que 

equal in the infirmities of nature. The 2 general Officers are assem- 
3 egal par art. f. officiers assem- 

bled. This fruit is excellent. His proficiency is slow, but solid. 
ble. m. pi. sont Ses progrcs m. pi. sont solide* 

E2 



54 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

All his friends have been very glad to see him. Those ladies are 

ami m. out ete bien aise de ^voir He. damn 

tired with walking. You have powerful enemies, but their efforts 
las de marcher. Vous avez de ennemi m. mats leurs 

(will be) vain and useless. The four 2 cardinal 'points are the 
seront inutile. quatre point m. 

east, west, south, and north. 

orient m. art. Occident m. art. midi m. art. nord m. 

Of the Degrees of Signification of the Adjective. 

161. Grammarians commonly reckon three degrees of comparison: the 
positive, the comparative, and the superlative. 

162. The positive is the adjective expressing the quality of an object, 
without any increase or diminution, as beau, fine ; bon, good. 

.EXERCISE. 

A child gentle, amiable, and docile, is beloved (by every body.) 

enfant m. doux, aimable, aime de tout le monde. 

An 2 ingenuous 'candour, an amiable simplicity, and a lively artlessness, 

inginu f. f. ^piquant hiaivetef. 

are the charms of youth. The sight of an agreeable landscape 

charme m. art. jeunesse f. vue f. agreable paysagem. 

is a 2 varied s and 4 rapid 'source of 2 delightful l sensations. 
varie rapide f. delicieux f. 

163. The comparative is so called because it draws a comparison be- 
tween two or many objects. When two things are compared, the one is 
either superior, inferior, or equal to the other ; hence, three sorts of com- 
parison — that of superiority, inferiority, and equality. 

164. The adverbs plus, moins, and aussi, which mark these three kinds 
of comparison, are to be repeated before every adjective, when several are 
joined to the same substantive, and are followed by the conjunction que, 
rendered in English by than or as. 

165. The comparative of superiority is formed in French by putting 
plus, more, before the adjective, and que, than, after it. 

EXAMPLE. 
La rose est plus belle que la vio- The rose is more beautiful than 

lette, the violet. 

166. Observe that in English the comparative of superiority may be 
expressed by putting more before the adjective — as more wise; or in 
adding to the adjective the termination er — as -wiser. When the compa- 
rative is expressed in English in the last manner, it must be rendered in 
French as if it stood more raise. 

EXERCISE. 
The republic of Athens was more illustrious than that of Lacede- 
rSpublique f. Athenes a etc illustre celle Lacidl- 

mon. Homer was perhaps a greater genius than Virgil ; but Virgil 
mnne. Ilomcre etait peut-etre grand ge'n'tem. Virgile ; mats 

had a 2 more s delicate 4 and 5 more ^refined 'taste 7 than Homer 
avait fin d licat gout in. H.omcre. 

Milton appears (to me)more sublime than all the other epic poets. 
-parait ] me autre ' } t pique x poite. 

1 67. The comparative of inferiority is formed by prefixing moins, less, 
to the adjective, and adding que, than, after it. 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 55 

EXAMPLE. 

La violeite est mains belle que la The violet is less beautiful than 

rose, the rose. 

EXERCISE. 
Shipwreck and death are less fatal than the pleasures 

art. rfaufrage m. art. mart f. funeste m. 

which attack virtue. The violet is less brilliant to the eye than 

qui attaquent art. f. f. brillant m. pi. 

the lily, a true emblem of modesty and of pride. 

lis, m. * ^vtriiable ] embleme m. art. f. de art. argued m. 

Autumn is less varied than spring, but it is richer, 

art. automnei. varie art. printemps wu elle riche. 

16S. The comparative of equality is formed by placing aussi, as, before 

the adjective, and que as, after it. 

EXAMPLE. 

La tulipe est aussi belle que la The tulip is as beautiful as the 

rose, rose. 

EXERCISE. 
j-Pope's images are as perfect as his style is harmonious. Deli 

Pope f. par fait son ra. art deli' 

cacy of taste is a gift of nature, as scarce as' true 
catessef. art.goO.t m. donm. art. f. rare o.rt.vrai 

genius. The love (of our neighbour) is as necessary in society 
?'nie m. amour die prochain dans art. 

for the happiness of life, as in Christianity for eternal 

pour bopJieicr m. art. vie f art. Clirisiianisme m. art. 2 eteniel 

salvation. It is as easy (to do) good as to do evil. 
l sa!ut m. aise defaire du bien du mat, 

] Pope's images translate The images of Pep e. 

169. The three Hollowing adjectives — meilleur, better, pi re, worse, main- 
dre, less — are comparatives in themselves : 

170. N. B. As most beginners are apt to confound these comparative 
adjectives with the comparative adverbs, mietjx, pis, and ^ioixs, because 
they are generally rendered by the same English words better, ivorse, and 
less, it may be advisable to subjoin here these comparative adverbs with 
their positives, that the difference of meaning may serve as a distinction: 

f JMeiUeur, better, is the comparative of ban, good, and is used 
£ j instead of plus ban, which is never said. 

*«' I Pire signifies plus mauvais, worse, or more wicked, and is used 
ff. j instead of plus mauvais. 

toindre means phis petit, less, or smaller, and is used instead 
plus petit. 

f JMieux, better, is the comparative of bien, well, and is used 
| instead of plus bien, more well, which is said in neither language. 
J Pis is the comparative of mal, badly, and is used for plus mal y 
j worse, which is likewise employed. 

I Mains is the comparative of peu, little, and is used for plus peu, 
which is never used. 



M 
Lof ph 



56 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

EXAMPLES. 

Ce fruit-la est bon, mais celui-ci est That fruit it good, but this U 

meilleur, better, 

•Sa condition est mauvaise, mais His condition is bad, but it has 

elle a ete pire, been ivorse. 

Ma depense est petite, mais la vo- My expense is small, but yours is 

tre est moindre, smaller, 

II se conduit bien, mais elle se He behaves -well, but she behaves 

conduit encore mieux, still better, 

II se portait mal, mais il est pis He -was unwell, but he is -worse 

que jamais, than ever, 

Je parle peu, vous parlez encore / speak little ; you speak still 

moins, less, 

EXERCISE. 

His reasoning is not better than yours. Your style is 

Sm raisonnement m. le votre. Votre m. 

(a great deal) better than that of his brother. The thickness of this 
de beaucoup celui son epaisseur f. 

wall is less than that of the 2 next 'wall. This column is less than 
mur m. celle voisin colonne f. 

the other in height and thickness. The remedy is worse than 

autre en hauteur f. en grosseur f. remede m. 

the disease. Your horse is worse than mine. 
mal m. cheval m. le mien, 

171. The adjective is in the superlative degree when it expresses the 
quality in a very high, or in its highest state ; hence there are two sorts 
of superlatives, the absolute and the relative. 

172. The superlative absolute is formed by putting tres, fort, bien, 
very, before the adjective ; it is called absolute, because it does not express 
any relation to other objects. 

EXAMPLE. 
Londres est une trts-belle ville, London is a very fine city. 

173. Remark. The adverbs extremement, extremely, iiifiniment, infi- 
nitely, are likewise marks of the superlative absolute. 

EXAMPLE. 
Cet homme est extremement savant, That man is extremely learned. 
Dieu est infniment heureux, God is supremely happy. 

EXERCISE. 
That landscape is very diversified, very extensive, and infinitely 
paysage m. varie itendu 

agreeable (on every side). The Alps are very high and very steep. 
agriable de tout cote" m. Alpes f. haut escarpe. 

The style of Fcnelon is very rich and very harmonious, but it is some- 
m. Fcnelon il quelque- 

times prolix ; that of Bossuet is extremely sublime, but it is sometimes 
fois prolixe ; celui clevt, 

harsh and unpolished. 

elur rude. 

174. The superlative relative is formed by prefixing the article le to 
me comparatives meilleur, moindre, pire, and to the adverbs phis and 
mo-ins; it is called relative, because it expresses a relation to other objects. 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 57 

EXAMPLES. 
Lonclres est la plus belle des miles. London is the finest of cities. 
Je prffere une maisqn de campagne I prefer a country-house to the 
an plus beau palais. finest palace. 

175. Plus and moins with the article are repeated before every adjective 

EXERCISE. 
The most beautiful comparison (that there is) perhaps in any 
comparaison f. que il y ait peut-etre dans avcun 
language is that which Pope has drawn from the Alps, in his Essay 
langue f. celle que tire f. de dans son Essai 

on Criticism. The most able men are not always the most 

sur art. Critique f. habile gens toujours 

virtuous. The most ancient and most general of all kinds of 

vertueux. f. f. art. espece f. 

idolatry was the worship rendered to the sun. The least excusable 

etait culte m. rendu soleil m. 

of all errors is that which is wilful. 

art. f. celle qui volontaire. 

Agreement of the Adjective with the Substantive. 

176. Rule I. The adjective always agrees in gender and numbei with 
the substantive to which it relates, 

EXAMPLES. 
he bon pere, The good father. 

La bonne mere, The good mother. 

De beaux jar dins, Fine gardens, 

De belles promenades, Fine walks. 

177. Bon is masculine singular, because pere is mas. and in the sing.; 
bonne is feminine singular, because mere is fern, and in the sing.; beaux 
is in the masculine plural, because jar dins is mas. and pi., &c. 

EXERCISE. 
These hills are covered with trees loaded with fruit already 
coteau m. convert de arbre m. charge de m. pi. dtja 
ripe. A pure stream rolls its limpid water through the 
mur. clair ruisseau m. roule sonHimpide ] eau a 

midst of meadows enamelled with flowers. (Every thing) interests 
milieu m. de prairie f. emaille de fleur. Tout interesse 

the heart in this abode, which is full of charms. Fly, incon- 
coeur m. sejour m. * * plein attrait m. Fuyez, Hncon- 

siderate youth, fly from the enchanting allurements of a vain 
side re l jeunesse f. * 2 enchanteur ] attrait 2 vain 

world: its perfidious sweets area 2 slow 'poison, which (would 
l monde m. ses 2 perjide l douceur f. lent m. qui de- 

destroy) in your soul the noble enthusiasm of goodness and 
truirait dans ame enthousiasme m. art. bien m. 

the precious seeds of 2 sublime 'virtues. 
germe m. art. vertu. 

178. Rule 11. When the adjective relates to two substantives singula! 
of the same gender, it must be put in the plural, and agree with them in 
gender. 



58 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



EXAMPLE. 

Le roi et It berger sont egaux The king and the shepherd are 
apres la mort, equal after death. 

EXERCISE. 

Uprightness and piety are much esteemed even by the 

art. droiture f. art. piete f. tres estime meme de 

wicked. A man in the most elevated and a man in the 

mediant pi. Le dans He A plus 5 eleve He 7 4tat le 2 le 

most obscure situation are equally precious in the eyes of God. 
4 plus 5 obscur He 2 6tat m. igalement a m. Dieu. 

Pilpay and Confucius are very celebrated among the nations of Asia. 

celebre par mi peuple m. art 

179. Rule III. When the two substantives to which the adjective 
relates are of different genders, the adjective is to be put in the masculine 
plural. 

EXAMPLE. 

Monpere et ma mere sont contens, My father and mother are contented. 

EXERCISE. 

His probity and disinterestedness are known (every where), 
f. son de sinter essement m. connu partout. 

The love of life and the fear of death are natural to 
amour m. art. vie f. crainte art. mort f. naturel 

man. Ignorance and self-love are equally presump- 

art. art. f. art. amour-propre m. prisomp- 

tuous. My sister and brother were very attentive to the instruc- 

tueux. f. mon ont it6 

tions of their masters. 
maitre m. 



NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES OF NUMBER. 

180. Numbers are divided into five classes, viz. cardinal, ordinal, 
collective, distributive, and proportional. 



CARDINAL 
NUMBER. 


ORDINAL NUMBER. 


NUMERICAL COLLECTIVE 
NOUNS. 


1 


un, une 


premier 


first 


unite 


unit 


2 


deux 


C deuxi'arce, ~) 
(_ second 5 


2d 


couple, paire 


couple 


3 


trois 


troisi'eme 


3d 


trio 


trio 


4 


quatre 


quatrieme 


4th 


deux couples 


two couple 


5 
6 


cinq 
six 


c'mquieme 
sixieme 


5th 
6th 


C demi- 
(_ douzaine 


half a dozen 


7 
6 


sept 
huit 


sepU'eme 
huiti cme 


7th 
8th 


huitaine 


eight 


9 


neu/ 


neuvieme 


9th 


neuvaine 


C nine days of 
£ prayer 


10 


dix 


dlxiane 


10th 


dizaine 


half a score 


11 


onze 


ouzitme 


11th 






12 


douze 


douzieme 


12th 


douzaine 


dozen 



ftF THE ADJECTIVE. 



59 



CARDINAL 

NUMBER. 



ORDINAL NUMBER. 



NUMERICAL COLLECTIVE 
NOUNS. 



treize 

quatorze 

quinze 

seize 

dix-sept 

dix-huit 

dix-neu/ 

vingt 

vingt-et-un 

vingt- deux 

trente 
C trente-et- 
C un, &c. 
quarante 
$ quarante- 
£ et-un 
cinquante 
C cinquante- 
(_ et-un 
soixante 
C soixante- 
£ et-un 
C soixante- 
£ et-dix 
C soixante- 
£onze 
C soixante- 
£ douze, &c, 
C quatre- 
(_ vingts. 
C quatre- 
< vingt-un, 
£&c. 

C quatre- 
(_ vingt-dix 



quatre- 




C cent-un, 
deux cents 



1000 mille 



txeizieme 

quatomeme 

quinzihne 

seizie?ne 

dix-sepU'e??ie 

dix-huiu'ewie 

dix-neurieme 

vingte'ewe 

C vingt-et- 

(_ unieme 

C vingt deux- 

(_ieme, &c. 
tientieme 
trente- 
unieme 
quarantine 

C quarante- 

(_ unieme 
cinquante'eme 

C cinquante- 

(_ unieme 
soixanU'ewe 

C soixante- 

C. unieme 

C soixante- 

C dixie?ne 

5 soixante- 

C onzieme 

5" soixante- 

C douzi'eme 

5 quatre- 

c vingtieme 

Cquatre- 

) vin . g v t_ 
C unieme 

C quatre- 

^vingt- 

C dixie wie 

Cquatre- 
\ vingt- 
C onzieme 
centieme 

5" cent-un/- ' 
{_eme, &c. 

Cdeux-cent- 
mill/eme 



13th 
14th 
15th 
16th 
17th 
18th 
19th 
20th 

21st 

22d 
30th 
31st 
40th 
41st 
50th 
51st 
60th 
61st 

70th 

71st 

72d 

80th 

81st 

90th 

91st 
100th 
101st 

200th 

1000th 



qumzame 



vingtaine 



trentame 



quarantaine 



C cinquan- 
C taine 



soixantame 



C quatre- 
C vingtai] 



gtame 



centame 



1 centaine 



; fortnight, 
\ fifteen 



a score & a half 

tivo score 

C two score 
(.and ahalf 

three score 



{f°> 



Jive scare 



one hundred 



2 centaines livo hundred 



1 millier 



one thousand 



* Levizac had soixante-dix ; in his dictionary, at the word soixante, he gives 
soixante-dix ; and in the same dictionary, at the word seventy, he gives soixante-et 
diz. It should be soizante-et-dix. See Grammaire des Gramraaires, 7th ed page 333 



GO 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



CARDINAL 
NUMBER. 



ORDINAL NUMBER. 



NUMERICAL COLLEC- 
TIVE NOUNS. 



2000 
10,000 

1,000,000 



C deux mille 
l&c. 
dix mille 

C mille-fois 
? miile 



deux-mill- 

ihne, &c. 

dix-milUeme 



< milliomeme 



2000th 
10,000th 

millionth 



2 milliers 
1 myriade 

1 million 



2 thousand 
1 myriad 

1 million 



181. The formation of the ordinal number from the cardinal does not 
require any explanation, except that -unieme is only found in compound 
numbers, where premier and second are inadmissible. 

182. When mentioning the days of the month, the French make use 
of the cardinal instead of the ordinal number, and say le onze d'avril, 
not le onzieme, &c. le vingt-cinq du mois prochain, and not le vingt- 
tlinquieme, &c. except, however, that instead of fun du mois, they say le 
premier, the first day of, <&c, and sometimes le second, though not so 
well, for le deux ; but this mode proceeds no farther. 

183. Although onze eleven, and onzieme eleventh, begin by a vowel, 
when the article is put before them it does not suffer elision ; for we say 
le onze, le onzieme, and not Vonze, V onzieme ; we say also sur les onze 
heures, and not sur le zonze heures, 

184. Remark that in French we use the conjunction et, and, although 
not used in English, in the following numbers : — vingt-et-un, vingt-et- 
une, twenty-one ; trent-et-un, trente-et-une, thirty-one ; qv.arantc-et-un, 
quarante-et-une, forty-one ; cinquante-et-un, cinquante-et-une, fifty-one ; 
soixante-et-un, soixante-et-une, sixty-one ; soixante-et-dix, seventy. The 
above are the only ones used with et and ; for though we say vingt-et-un, 
&c, we cannot say vingt-et-deux, Sec. ; some say and write soixante-et- 
onze, soixante-et-douze ; but it is not right. 

185. The following mode of counting in English, one-and-txventy, six- 
anti-thirty, &c, is not used in French. 

1 86. When in quatre-vingts, vingt is immediately followed by a noun, 
either expressed or understood, it takes an s as the mark of the plural. 
We say, for instance, quatre-vingts chevaux, eighty horses ; how many 
books have you 1 fen ai quatre-vingts, I have eighty, &c. ; but if in 
quatre-vingts, vingt is followed immediately by any other number, it 
does not take s, and we say quatre-vingt-trois chevdux, eighty-three 
horses ; how many books have you 1 fen ai quatre-vingt-quatre, I have 
eighty-four, &c. 

187. When in deux cents, trois cents, &c, cent is immediately fol- 
lowed by a noun, either expressed or understood, it takes an s as the mark 
of the plural : we say, for instance, trois cents livres, three hundred books ; 
how many pens have you? fen ai c/uatre cents, I have four hundred, &c. ; 
but if in deux cents, trois cents, &c., cent is immediately followed by an- 
other number, it does not take s, and we say trois cent six lix'res, three 
hundred and six hooks ; how many pens have you 1 fen ai cinq cent huit, 
I have five hundred and eight, &C. 

188. JM'ille, thousand, takes no 5 as mark of the plural: we say deux 
miltc, two thousand, <Scc. ; but mille, mile, takes an s for the plural; as il 
y a deux milles dc JJ. a I\, it is two miles from 13. to P. 



OF THE PRONOUN. 61 

189. J\£t, instead of mille, is used for the date of the year: thus we 
write mil huit cent trente, one thousand eight hundred and thirty. 

190. Observe that a, one, put in English before hundred and before 
thousand, are not expressed in French ; and that and put in English after 
hundred and after thousand, when followed by another number, is not 
expressed in French : thus we say, for instance, cent cinquante tables, 
one hundred and fifty tables ; mille soixante tables, one thousand and 
sixty tables, &c. 

191. In some parts of France, instead of soixante-et-dix, soixante~onze 9 
&c, they say septante, septante-un, septante-deux, &c. 

192. Instead of quatre-vingts, quatre-vingt-un, quatre-vingt-deux 9 
&c, they say octante, octante-un, octante-deux, &c. 

193. Instead of quatre-vingt-dix, quatre-vingt-onze, quatre-vingU 
douze, &lc, they say nonante, nonante-un, nonante-deux, &c. 

194. There are many other numerical expressions used in poetry, music, 
games, &c, as distique, tercet, quatrain, sixain, huitain, &c. ; -solo, duo, 
t~io, quatuor, qidnque, quinte, octave, &c. ; beset, sonnez, &c. 

195. TJn millier is very often employed for one thousand -weight t 
quintal is never used except in the sense of one hundred weight. 

196. The distributive numbers are those which express the different 
parts of a whole; as la moitie, the half; le quart, the quarter; un 
cinquieme, a fifth, &c. 

197. The proportional denote the progressive increase of things ; as 
le double, the double ; le triple, treble ; le centuple, a hundred-fold, &c. 



CHAPTER IV. 
OF THE PRONOUN. 



198. A pronoun is a word substituted in the place of a noun. 

199. There are several kinds of pronouns, as the personal, possessive.-, 
relative, absolute, demonstrative, and indefinite* 

Of the Personal Pronouns. 
DO. Personal pronouns are used for the names of persons or things. 
Jl. There are three persons : the first, who speaks ; the second, who 
is spoken to ; and the third is the person or thing spoken of. 

202. Pronouns of the First Person. 

Singular. 



Subject, je 






J 


je loue Dieu 


1 praise God, 


^ r me 


for 


a moi 


to me 


il me donne 


he gives me. 


1 ^me 


for 


moi 


me 


il me blesse 


he hurts me. 


•S 4 j moi 


for 


a moi 


to me 


donnez-moi 


give me. 


( moi 


for 


moi 


me 


aidez-moi 


help me* 



62 



OF THE PRONOUN. 



Stib; 


nous 




we 


Obj. 


C nous 


for 


a nous to us 


(.nous 


for 


nous us 



Plural. 

nous louons Dieu we praise God. 

il nous donne lie gives us. 

il nous blesse he hurts us. 

203. They are both masculine and feminine ; that is, of the same gender 
as the person or persons they represent. 

204. In general, je and me are put before the verb, moi after it, and 
nous before, but sometimes likewise after it. 

EXERCISE. 
I cast my eyes upon the objects which surrounded me, and 

portai vue f. sing, sur objet qui environnaient me, 

saw with pleasure that all was calm and tranquil. Do s you ! not 4 
je vis avec que etait calms tranquille. * 

2 see in all the features of my father that he is satisfied with me 1 
voyez dans trait m. que il content de moi? 

We have told the truth. What were they saying of us 1 If we desire 
avons dit verite f. Que * 2 on ] disait Si desirous 

to be happy, we 2 must ^ot 3 deviate from the path of virtue. 

de itre devons nous ecarter de sentier m. art. f. 



205. Pronouns of the Second Person. 

Singular. 

thou tu crains Dieu thou fear est God. 

to thee il te parle he speaks to thee, 

thee il te voit he sees thee. [hie, 

to thee donne-toi la peine give thyself the iron- 

thee h*bille-toi dress thyself. 




ye or you vous louez Dieu you praise God. 

a vous to you il vous parle he speaks to you. 
vous you il vous respecte he respects you. 

206. In general tu and te are put before the verb, toi after, and vous 
before, but sometimes after it. 

207. Remark. Politeness has led to the use of the plural vous, instead 
of the singular tu : as vous ties bien bon, you are very good, for tu es 
bien bon, thou art very good. (See verbs page 6, art. 55.) 

EXERCISE. 
Thou art greater than I ; and from thee I have 2 (at once) 'learnt 
es moi; toi ai en mime temps ajFpris 

humility and wisdom. I (was telling) thee that dancing is 
art. f. art. sagesse f. disais te qiie art. danse £ 

to the body what taste is to the mind. You -have 'shown 'us 

m. ce que art. m. esprit. avez montre de 

gicat talents ; when -(will you show) 'us great virtues 1 How 3 amiablo 

in. quand montverei-vous de f. Que 

'you 2 are ! How 'good 'you 2 are (to have thought) of us! (It was said) 

ites ! de vous itre occupd On disait 

of you the other day, that (you intended to) spend a winter in 

autre jour m. vous vous proposiez de passer m. & 






OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUN. 63 

London, (in order to) see (everything) 6 curious ^hich 2 that s city 
Londres pour voir tout ce que cette ville 

presents. 
offre de, 

208. Pronouns of the Third Person. 

Singular. 

f ., , C il perd son } he loses his 

%z il m, he < c . > 

o j (_ temps 3 time, 

^< ,. f h S e ^ e trava i^ e 2. s ^ ie ** always 

(g e e J' C toujours 5 at -work, 

Lil it ilpleuvra it -will rain, 

^dites-Ztttqueie"?*^ A ' m that 
luim. for a lui fo him < Zm - parlera j > I will speak to 

Tdites-luique "^ te/Z her that 

lui/. for a elle £o her < vous Zzm donne- >you will give 

£rez J her, 

Tie ne connais") T 7 , 

- , 7 . j ? • a ( * knoiv but 

hum. for le bm ^to de ea-^ ^^ 

le m, for lui /tim je le me prise I despise him, 

la/. for elle her je la respecte I respect her 

_ ' - ii , ^ il ne connait ? 7ze knows but 

elle/. elle fer £ qu'e.'fe $ ^ 

„ . C je ne Ze savais? I did not knoio 

Jem. for cela tf ^ J pas \ iu 

Plural 
^fusm. - - they ih chantent JgaSS^) 

| Relies/. — — %s etorient f*^<j5£) 

Cpayez Zewr ce Ow*/ them w/ia* 
leur m. for a eux £o fkm < que vous leur < wow owe to 

Cdevez C tnem (tomen). 

CAhes-leur, que (ZfshTlltk 
leur /. for a. elles to ^em < je desire tewr<( *, 5 ^? 

<-P arler Lladies)? m 

, r ^, C vous les trou- C you ivill find 

lesm. for eux them ^ yerez £ them (men). 

les/. for elles Mm il to admire {(hem" (Mies). 

- Cje ne vois C / see but them 

eux m. — — Mem < J , ^ / *? n 

£ qu e?*.r £ (gentlemen). 

n j. _, C il ne connait C he knows but 

L elles/. - - then £ ^^ £ them (ladies). 

209. All the personal pronouns je, tu, il, elle, nous vous, Us, elles, 
when subjects, are put after the verb in interrogations, as 



O 



64 



OF THE REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS. 




Singular. 

I 

thou 

he 

she 
Plural. 



dois^'e payer 1 
as-tu dit 1 
chante-t-^7 bien 1 
travaille-t-e//e ? 



must I pay ? 
hast thou said? 
does he sing well 1 
does she work ? 



shall we go ? 
•will you come? 
do they sing ? 
do they work? 



£ ("nous ive irons-nous ? 

£ J vous you \iendrez-v ous ? 

*¥) ils m. they chantenta'/s ? 

°Q Relies/, they trnvaillent-elles ? 

210. 1Z, le, ils, eux, are always masculine: elle, la, elles, feminine; 
and les, leur, of both genders, as well as lui, when meaning to him or to 
her : in other cases, lui exclusively belongs to the masculine. 

211. All personal pronouns, when subjects, are placed before their 
verbs, except in interrogative sentences, and most of them likewise, when 
objects precede them, except in the imperative affirmative. But the objec- 
tive eux, elles, lui, for le, and moi, toi, soi, with one exception of this last, 
in soi-disant, styling himself, are invariably placed after the verbs by 
which they are governed. 

EXERCISE. 

He loved them because they were mild, attentive, and grateful. 

aimait m. parce que doux reconnaissant 

He 2 (was saying) *(to them) do 3 you ^ot 4 2 know that the property 

disait savez que propre m. 

of merit is to excite envy ] She often exhorted me to 

art. merite m. de exciter art. envie f. ^souvent l exhortait 

the study which is the most useful, that of the 2 human * heart. They 

etude f. * * utile, celle m. 

make us love virtue, more by their examples than by their words. 
font aimer art. f. par exemple m. parole f. 

What (has been said) of them 1 Did they speak of them 1 Do 



4 Que 3 on 2 a-t 4 dit 



l parlait f 1 



4 you ! not 5 3 see 2 her ' With what pleasure she plays ! 



voyez 



quel 



joue J 



O I si 



r 



verb 



i 



212. Reflected and Reciprocal Pronouns of the Third Person. 

Singular. examples. 

Cwith a preposi-S , . , . C ever y one draws 

I tion I CnaCUn lUe a SOt I to himself. 

C governed by the C ^ego5Lsmefaitqu , - S, 

' ■? ° n . < person see none 

onnevoit quern ^but himself. 

il se donne des C he gives himself 

louanges £ praises. 

elle se fait illu- C she imposes on 
sion. 

'< il se perd 
elle se flatte 



se for 



se for 



for 
for 



v 



soi, a lui- 
mime 
elle mi- 
me 
i or lui 
meme 
soi or elle $ 
meme 



i 



herself. 



I 



< he ruins himself. 

C she flatters her- 
l self 



OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN EN. 



65 



Plural, 
se for a eux-memes 



> ils s'attribuent 

► gloire de, &c, 






se for a elles-memes* 



se for tun a V autre < 



se for eux-memes 



EXAMPLES. 

they attribute to 
themselves the 
glory of &c. 

they prescribe to 
themselves as a 
rule to, &c. 



1' 



» they exchange gifts, 

i they have disgraced 
i themselves. 



L 



for 
for 
for 



elles-memes 



\ elles se prescrivent ( 
) pour regie de, &c. { 

"ils s'entredonnent," 

ou se font des ca- J 

£ deaux 

C ils se sont desho-^ 

(_ nores * 

C n . „ ..' ? they have flattered 

< elles se sont flattees > * ., J , 
(_ 3 themselves. 

run V autre ils s'entr'aident they helpone another, 

\ les uns les au- C les rats, dit-on, s'en- ~) rats, it is said, eat 

tres (_ tre-devorent 5 eacn other. 

213. Remabk. Se is placed before a verb, and soi after a preposition, 

and sometimes after a verb. 

EXERCISE. 

In a thousand instances we do not watch sufficiently over ourselves. 

* mille occasion f. on * veille assez sur soi. 

The glory of the world (passes away) in an instant. He gives himself 

mondem. s'evanouit en m. 2 donne ] se 

(a great deal) of trouble. She tires herself. People should (very seldom) 

beaucoup peine f. lasse se. On doit rarement 

speak of themselves. Virtue is amiable in itself. We must take 

parler soi. art. f. de soi. On doit prendre 

upon ourselves the care of our own affairs. 

sur soi soin m. ses propre affaire f. 

214. Of the Relative Pronoun en. 

Tcet homme vous"^ that man pleases 
de lui of him < plait, vous en par- s you, you speak of 

£ lez souvent j him often. 

Cje ne crois pas cette^) I do not believe that 
d'elle of her < femme sincere, je 

C. m'erc mefie 

Tees fruits paraissent 
d'eux of them -^ bons, j'en mange- 

£ rais volontiers 

Cvoila de belles oran- 
d'elles of them -\ ges, voulez-vous 

C m'e?i donner 1 






de cela of it 



) onnem'apastrompe ( 
> yen suis sur ( 



•woman sincere, I 

distrust her. 
these fruits look 

good,] should like 
to eat some of them. 
these are beautiful 

oranges, ivill you 

give me some. 
/ have not oeen i?n- 

posed upon, I am 

sure of it. 



d'ici 



dela 



hence 



thence 



l il arriva ici, comme? he T arrived here a J. 
I j'enpartais ? J »«««»»«"# 



> vous allez a Paris, et ( 
\ monsieur en vient < 

f2 



from hence. 

you are going toPa~ 

ris, this gentleman 

c(/mes from thence, 



66 OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN Y. 

215 Of the Relative Pronoun, or Adverb y. 

" a lui to him $ cest Un ^ onn ^ te Z * ie * s an honest man 9 

£ homme, fiez-vous-t/ 3 trust him. 
a elle t h S ce ^ e ra i son es t so- ~) that reason is good, 

(_ lide, je m'y rends 3 I yield to it 

Tees argumens sonO these arguments are 
a eux to them < pressans, je n'y vois > cogent, I see no 

(.point de replique j reply to them. 

faccabM devoscivili-1 l™dedjvithyour ci- 

aelles to them \ tesjenesaiscom- > white*, I do not 

S« ] mentyrepondre \ ^^tojxc- 

\^ J knowledge them. 

Cj'ai eprouve cette"^ / experienced that 
a cela to it < perte quand j'y > loss, -when I least 

C. pensais le moins j thought of it. 

C nous partions de "^ ive set off from Lon- 
ici here < Londres, quand > don, -when you 

£ vous y veniez J came hither. 

rVestunendroitcharO It is a fine place, 1 
la there < mant, je compte > intend to settle 

L £ xrCy fixer j there. 

216. Remark. Y and en are always put before the verb, except with 
the imperative affirmative. 

EXERCISE. 

They speak (a great deal) of it. You like French authors, you 

On parte beaucoup aimez art. -franqais x auteur, 

are 2 always Speaking of them. That is a 2 delicate l aifair ; the success 

* parlez Ce delicat f. succes m. 

of it is doubtful. See them ; I consent to it, but (do not trust 

douteux. Voyez consens ne vous y fiez 

them). That is a fine appointment : he had s long 2 aspired 

pas. Ce charge f. * depuis long-temps aspirait 

*to it. He has done it ; but he will get nothing by it 
a fait z gagnera 1 ?ie A rien y. 



OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 

217. These pronouns (now called pronominal possessive adjectives), 
denote the possession of things. When we say mon habit, my coat ; votre 
maison, your house ; son jardin, his or her garden ; it is the same as 
saying C habit qui est a moi, the coat which belongs to me ; la maison qui 
est a vous, the house which belongs to you ; le jardin qui est a lui, or a 
elle, the garden which belongs to him or to her. 

218. Of these pronominal adjectives, some always agree with a noun 
expressed, and the others with a noun understood ; hence there are two 
sorts of possessive pronouns. 

219. Of those that always agree with a noun expressed, some relate to 
9ne person and others to several. 



OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. Oi 

220. Pronominal Adjectives relating to One Person. 
person. Singular. Plural. 

f"lst mon, m. nia,^. mes, m.f. my. 

for the < 2d ton, m. ta, f. tes, m. f thy. 

£3d son, m. sa,y*. ses,m.f. his, her, its. 

221. Pronominal Adjectives relating to Many Persons. 
person. Singular. Plural. 

rist notre, m.f nos, m.f our. 

of the < 2d votre, m. f vos, m. f your. 

^3d leur, m.f leurs, ?w >% /! */*«>. 

222. N. B. These possessive pronouns in French always agree in gen- 
der and number with the object po°sessed, and not with the possessor as 
in English, for which reason they must be repeated before every noun. 

EXAMPLES. 

Mon ptre, ma mere, et mes freres My father, mother, and brothers 
sont a la camp ague avec vos amis et are in the country, with your 
leurs enfans, friends and their children. 

Mon cousin est alle consoler sa My cousin is gone to visit and con- 
sceur, qui a perdu son fi Is, sole his sister, who has lost her son. 

223. Mon, ton, son, are also used before a noun feminine when begin- 
ning with a vowel or h mute ; thus, mon ame, my soul ; ton humeur, thy 
humour ; son amitii, his friendship ; must be said instead of ma ame, ta 
humeur, sa amitie. 

EXERCISE. 
My principles, my love of retirement, my taste for 

principe m. gout m. pour art. retraite f. amour m. 

(every thing) that (is connected) with learning, and my detestation 
tout ce qui tient a art. instruction, haine 

of all spirit of party, (every thing) has induced me to prefer a life 
pour esprit parti, tout porte preferer la vie f. 

passed in the closet, to the 2 active Uife of the world. Do not think, 
* de * cabinet, f. monde m. * pense, 

my daughter, that thy candour, thy ingenuousness, thy taste, so delicate 
que f. ingenuite f. m. si delicat 

and so refined, and even thy graces, can (shelter) thee from 

fin, mime m. puissent mettre a Vabri de 

censure. His wit, his talents, his honesty, and even his 
art. f. esprit m. m. h.onnetete f. meme 

(good nature), make him beloved (by every body). Our constancy and 
bonhomie f. font aimer de tout le monde. f. 

our efforts will (at last) surmount all obstacles. I see nothing 
m. * 2 enfin 1 surmontero?it art. m. vois ne rien 

that can (be censured) in your conduct. Their taste for the 
que on puisse reprendre dans conduite f. pour 

fantastical, the monstrous, and the marvellous, gives to all their 
bizarre m. monstrueux m. merveilleux, m. donne 

compositions, although very fine in themselves, an air of deformity, 
f. quoique beau en elles-memes, m. difformite f. 

which shocks at first sight. 
qui choque a art. coup-d'oeilm.. 



68 OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

224. Of the pronouns, which always agree with nouns understood, 
some relate to one person and others to several persons. 

225. Those which relate only to one person are : 
person, m. Sing. f. Sing. m. Plur. f. Plur. 

1st Le mien, la mienne, les miens, les miennes, mine 
2d Le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes, thine 

3d Le sien, la sienne, les siens, les siennes, his } her,ita. 

226. Those which relate to several persons are : 
person. m. Sing. f. Sing. PL of both gen. 

1st Le notre la notre les notres ours. 

2d Le votre la votre les votres yours. 

3d Le leur la leur les leurs theirs. 

227. N. B. The real use of these pronouns is to spare the repetition 
of the nouns which have been expressed a little before. 

EXAMPLE. 

Avez-vous toujour s votre cheval ? Have you still your horse 1 I 
je n'ai plus le mien. have disposed of mine. 

EXERCISE. 

Is it your temper or hers that hinders you from living well together 1 

ce humeur f. qui empeche de vivre ensemble ? 

If it be yours, it 2 is 3 easy for 'you (to remedy) it (by mastering 

ce est il aise * de porter remede y en le prenant 

, your temper ;) if it be hers, redouble (your) complaisance, atten- 

siir vous-mcme ; ce redoublez de de 

tion, and good behaviour ; it is very seldom that this method 

de procedt m. pi. il trts-rare ce moyen 

(proves unsuccessful). If my friends had served me with the same 

ne reussisse pas. Si avaient servi mhne 

zeal as yours, it is very certain that I (should have) succeeded : but 

ztle m. que il tres-su* aurais reussi : 

yours have been all fire, and mine all ice. All the pictures which 

ont ett de de glace. tableau m. que 

we expected from Rome are arrived : (there are some) that are a little 

attendions arrives : il y en a qui un pen 

damaged ; but yours, his, and mine are in good condition. We know 

endomirages ; en etat m. savons 

perfectly well what are your amusements in town, and I assure 

parfaitement * quels a art. ville f. assure 

you we are very far from ? envying ! you 2 them ; but if you 

que sommes bien tloigne envier 

knew ours in the country, (it is most likely) 

saviez quels sont a campagne f. il y a toute apparence que 

you (would not be long) in giving them the preference. You have 
ne tarderiez pas a donncr leur f. avez 

opened your heart to me with that noble frankness which 2 so -'well 
ouvert franchise f. qui si 

'becomes an honest man : this confidence : %ell 'deserves mine. 
sied a honnttt conjiance f. merite 

228. Remark. When through politeness vous is used for tu, then votre f 
vos must take the place of ton, ta, tes, and le vutre, la votre, les voire*, 
must be used for le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes* 



OF THE RELATIVE AND ABSOLUTE PBONOUNS. 



69 



EXAMPLES. 

Que vous rcssemblez peu a vcs How little you resemble your an- 

ancltres ! cestors ! 

Quand vous auvez entendu nos When you have heard our rea- 

raisons,7ious ecouterons lesvotres. sons, we shall listen to yours. 



OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

229. Relative pronouns are those which relate to a preceding noun, or 
pronoun, called the antecedent. In the phrase Vhomme qui joue, the man 
who plays, qui relates to the substantive homme ; Vhomme is then the 
antecedent to the pronoun relative qui. 



Qui < 



who 
which 



Dieu qui voit tout 



C whom 
Que < 



Dont 

or 
de qui 



which 

C of which 

J whose 

of whom 



Lequel 
Laquelie 



wnich 



C God, -who sees every 

\ thing. 

, 7 . C the horses -which are 

les chevauxqm courent < 

u (_ running. 

Vhomme que vous cher- Cthe man -whom you 

chcz (_ seek. 

C les his que nous obser- C the laws ivhich we ob- 

(_ vons c serve. 

C finsulte dont vous C the insult of ivhich you 

(_ vous plaignez \ complain. 

^ la nature dont nous C nature -whose secrets 

(_ ignorons les secrets (_ are unknown to us. 

C les gens de qui vous C the people of -whom 

(_ parlez \ you speak. 

C c'est une condition ("it is a condition, w r ith- 



Jluxquels 
Auxquelles 



to whom * 



Quoi < 



230. 
231. 



which 



why 



out -which he will do 
nothing. 

those to -whom he ap- 
plied, refused to pro- 
tect him. 

these are things 
-which you do 
think. 

the reason -why 
was arrested, 
known. 



of 

not 

he 
is 



sans laquelie il ne 
veut rienfaire 
" ceux aux quels il s'est 
adresse, ont refuse 
de le defendre 
' ce sont des choses a 
I quoi vous ne pensez 
_ pas 

' la cause, pourquoi 
I on Va arrtte, est 
_ connue 
Qui, que, and dont, are of both genders and both numbers. 
Lequel is a compound of quel, and the article le, la, les, with which 
it coalesces in the following manner : 

m. Singular, f. m. Plural, 

lequel laquelie lesquels 

duquel de laquelie desquels 

auquel a laquelie auxqueis 

232. This pronoun always agrees in gender and number with its ante- 
c dent. Quoi, which sometimes supplies its place, is always governed by 
a preposition. 



, f. 

lesquelles 
desquelles 
auxquelles 



•which 
of which 
to -which 



OF PRONOUNS ABSOLUTE. 
233. Pronouns absolute are those which have no relation to an ante 
cedent. They are the five following : 



70 



OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 



Qui 



j who 
«< whom 
whom 



Que 



Quoi 



Quel. 



je vous dirai qui Va C I will tell you ivho has 

fait (. done it. 

vous pouvez consulter C you may consult -whom 
qui vous voudrez \ you please. 

[<i.mcomulterez.vou S ?^ hom "Jf* con ' 

£ .7 ne salt que r<Wre J he J°f, not know on 
t c wAaf to determine, 

que ferez-vous ? what will you do 1 

en quoi puis-je vous C in ?p/iaf can I serve 

servir ? (_ you 1 

it if a la je ne sais C there is in it I do not 
quoi d'obscur (_ know -what obscurity. 
C quelle instability dans C -what instability in hu- 
(_ les choses humaines J (_ man affairs ! 

C -7 -^ i x .-("he does not know 

3 il ne sait quel parti ) ■ _ , .. 

< m." j *\ -what resolution to 
£ prendre £ take> 

Clequel aimez-v&us leC 7 . , •, e 

3 • 7 ^ ) which do you prefer 

< mieux de ces ta-< -,, • * i 
J * j o • or those pictures i 
(_ oleaux f , ■ . "C. . 
C ,/e sazs fo'era lequel je C I know well which I 
? choisirais (_ would choose. 



S what 
C. what 
j what 

j what 

f what 

] what 

L 

which 
Lequel < 

j which 

234. Qui applies only to persons. Que and quoi to things. 

235. Quel, mas. sing., quelle, fem. sing., quels, m. pi., quelles, f. pi., 
always precede a substantive, the gender and number of which they take. 

236. Lequel, m. s., laquelle, f. s., les quels, m. pi., les quelles, f. pi. — 
which ; duquel, m. s., de laquelle, f. s., desquels, m. pi., desquelles, f. pi. 
— of which ; auquel, m. s., a laquelle, f. s., a«.r #we/s, m. pi., arzjr quelles, 
t'. pi. — to which ; are used to mark a distinction between several nouns or 
objects. 



OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
237. Demonstrative pronouns arc those which point, as it were, to the 
objects spoken of. They are, 



Singular. 


Plural. 




mas. 


fem. 


mas. fem. 




ce, cet* 


cette this or that 


ces ces 


these or those 


celui 


celle this or that 


ceux celles 


these or those 


celui-ri 


celle-ci this 


ceux-ci celles-ci 


these 


cclui-la 


celle-la that 


ceux-la celles-la 


those 


ceci 
cela 


S thesehave 


no plural. 






Tce before a consonant 


ce livre 


this book 


• m< , 


1 ce before an h aspirated 


ce heros 


that hero 




j ckt before a vowel 
I^cet before an h mute 


cet enfant 


this child 




cet h.omme 


that man 


/ 


cette before any feminine 


noun cette femme that -woman 




f"when without a noun, "3 ( 
^intimates a person or>as < 
C thing spoken of, j ( 


"~qui est-cel "3 


who is it 1 


;m ce 


ce que je vous > 


what I tell you 




dis est vrai j 


is true. 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 



71 



EXERCISE. 

Nothing is so opposite to that true eloquence, 2 the office 
2 ne ] rien oppose veritable f. /auction f. 

'(of which) is to ennoble (every thing), as the use of those refined 

de 2 ennoblir l tout que emploi m. yin 

thoughts and hunting after those light, airy, (unsolid) 

x penstei. art. recherche f. de 2 Uger 3 delie A sans consistance 

ideas, which, like a leaf of 2 beaten l metal, 2 (acquire) 
Hdee f. comme feuille f. battu m. prennent de 

-brightness ^nly 4 by losing part of their solidity. This man 
art. eclat m. ne que en perdant * * art. f. 

has nothing in common with that hero. This long restrained 

en commun hero. Hong-temps z contenu 

hatred (broke out), and was the unhappy source of those dreadful 
{ haine f. eclata fit malheureux f. terrible 

events. It is a great pleasure to me. It was a great 

ivtnement m. plaisir m. pour 

pain to us. 

dtplaisir m. pour 



fut 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

239. Indefinite pronouns are those which are of a vague and indeter- 
minate nature. They are of four sorts : 



FIRST CLASS. 
240. Those that are never joined to a substantive. 

("one [on aime Use flatter ^«e is apt to flatter one' 

C on rfest pas toujours C a man is not always mas- 

\ maitre de soi (_ ter of his own temper. 

C"on n'est pas toujours C it is not always in the 
a woman < mattresse dialler cu* s powei of a -woman, to 

C_ Ton veut {. §° where she wishes, 

somebody \onfrap P e a la parte £ *■«*•* ^«*« * the 

C on pense et * Ton dit C people think and say 
C tout haut (_ openly. 

C on raconte diver sement C they relate that story dif- 
(_ cette histoire £ ferently. 

C on acquiert V experience C ive acquire experience at 
C a ses depens (_ °ur own expense. 

on trouve partout des C you will find troublesome 
importuns c people everywhere. 



people 
they 
we 
you 



in- 
stead 
of 

and 

*In- 

stead 
of 



it is better for euphony 
to part these words 
with an V 



t les habitudes qu'on. contracte. 
\ ce apres quoi on court. 
) quoiqu'on croie. 
[ un homme a qui on reproehe. 




when the next word 
does not begin with 
an /, as is seen by 
the examples. 



les habitudes que Von contracte 
ce apres quoi Von court, 
quoi que Von croie. 
un homme a qui Von reproehe,. 



72 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 



{ I 



they 



Quelqu'un 



"on previent qiCon na\ 
point eu i intention de, ■ 
&c. i 

" Quand on vous dit I 
que * l'on compte snr- 
vous I 

'si * Ton vous blame i 

i et si * on le hue, on a - 



tort 



'I beg to observe, that 
/ had no intention to, 
&c. 

when / tell you that 1 
1 depend upon you. 

"if they blame you and 
\ praise him, they are 
wrong. 



Quiconque 



Chacun 



Autrui 



Personne 



Rien 




I quelqu'un m'a dit, somebody told me. 



each 
every one 

other people 



others 
L 

nobody 

no one 
C nothing 
< not any thing 
(_ any thing 



C quiconque commit les hommes, apprend 

< a s'en dejier, whoever knows man- 

(_ kind, learns to distrust them. 

C chacun s'en plaint, every one complains 

t of him. 

fn'enviez pas le bien d 1 autrui, do not 

covet the property of others. 
J ne faites pas a autrui ce que vous ne 
j voudriez, pas qu'on vous fit, do not 
do to others what you would not have 
^ done to you. 

C la Jierte ne convient a personne, pride 
\ becomes nobody. 

rien ne lui plait, nothing pleases him. 
y a-t-il nen qui puisse lid plaire ? is 
there any thing that can please him 1 
EXERCISE. 
If you (behave yourself) (in that manner), what will people say of 
vous conduisez ainsi que * 2 on x dira-t 

you 1 It (is thought) that this news is true. They write me word 

On croit nouvelle f. icrit * 

from Ispahan that thou hast left Persia, and art 

Ispahan as quitti art. Perse f. que tu es 

now at Paris. One (cannot) read Telemachus without becoming 
actuellement a ne pent lire Ttltmaque sans devenir 

better : we there find (every where) a mild philosophy, 2 nobIe 
■meilleur : on y trouve partout doux f. des 

%nd 4 elevated 'sentiments : we there find in every line the efTu- 
ilive* • y voit a chaque ligne expan- 

sions of a noble soul, and we admire precepts calculated t» 

chement m.\ beau f. dcs pricepte propre 

effect the happiness of the world. 
/aire bonhew m. monde m. 



241. 



Quclqn 



Chaque 



SECOND CLASS. 
Those which are always joined to a substantive. 

C Csi cela Hait vrai, quelqxC historien en 

s some < aurait parU, if that were true, some 

C C historian would have mentioned it 

[ a chaque jour sujjit sa peine, the trouble 
of each day is sufficient of itself. 



each, every* 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 



73 



^ . C whoever 

Quelcongue £ whateyer 



Certain, m. s. 
Certaine, f. s. 
Certains, 
Certaines 

Un, m. une, f. 



f. s . j 

m. pi. ^ 
,f.pl. I 



certain 
some 



il ?i y y a raison queiconque qui puisse 
Cy obliger, no reason whatever can 
oblige him to it. 

r 

J certain homme, a certain man. 
] certaines nouvelles, some news. 

C fai vu un homme, I saw a man \ 
\ prenez une orange, take an orange. 



THIRD CLASS 

242. Those which are sometimes joined to a subsia?itive and some- 
times not. 



Nul, m. s. 
Nu lie, f. s. 
Nuls, m. pi. 
Nulles, f. pi. 

Pas un, m. s. 
Pas une, f. s. 

Aucun, m. s. 
Aucune, f. s. 
Aucuns, m. pi. 
Aucunes, f. pi. 

Autre, m. f. s. 
Autres, m. f. pi. 



Meme, m. f. s. 
Memes, m. f pi. 

Tel, m. s. 
Telle, f. s. 
Tels, m. pi. 
TWfes, f. pi. 

Plusieurs, inde- 
clinable 



Tow?, m. s. 
Toute, f. s. 
Tows, m. pi. 
Toutes, f. pi. 



> no, not one 



many 



fnulle raison ne pent le convaincre, no 
J reason can convince him. 

] wwZ d'eux ne l'a rencontre, not one 

^ of them has met him. 

Cil n\i a pas une erreur dans cet oil- 
< vrage, there is no error in that work. 

£_ pas un ne le dit, not one says so. 

fje ne connais aucun de vos juges, I 
J know none of your judges. 

] il n'a fait aucune dijficnlte, he has 

t_ made no difficulty. 

Cservez-vous (Tune autre expression, 
J make use of another expression. 

j je vous prenais pour un autre, I took 

^ you for another. 

{Jest le meme homme que je vis hier 
J he is the same man I saw yesterday. 

] cet homme vJest plus le meme, that 

L man is no longer the same. 

fil tint a peu prcs un tel disc ours, 
J he delivered nearly such a discourse. 

| je ne vis jamais rien de tel, I never 

L saw any thing like it. 

fil est arrive plusieurs vaisseaux, se- 
veral vessels are arrived. 
■^ Une faut pas que plusieurs patusent 
pour un seul, many must not surfei 

L for one. 

{tons les ttres ere is, all created be- 

I ings. 

] tout disparalt devant Dieu, every 

L thing vanishes before God. 



243. 
Qut que 



FOURTH CLASS. 

Of those which are followed by qul. 

C Cqui que tu sots, whoever thou mayest 

< whoever < be. 

C. C_qui que ce soft, whoever it may be. 

G 



74 OF THE VERBS. 



SCquoi que ce soit, whatever it may be. 
whatever -^ quoi que vous disiez, whatever you 



(\ 



(^ may say. 

Cquel que soit cet homme, whoever 

j whoever J that man may be. 

^ " "S whatever j quel que soitvotre courage, whatever 

L i_ your courage may be. 

,. 7 . C i $ cette etoffe est telle que vous la voulez, 

V (_ C this stuff is such as you wish for. 

C fquelque raison qua vous donniez, 

^ . J whatever I whatever reason you may give. 

^ " " *S however j quelque puissant que vous soyez y 

L L however powerful you may be. 

^, C , C tout savant quHl est, however learned 

Taut-que ^however £ he may be. 



CHAPTER V. 

OF THE VERBS 



244. Here, instead of adopting Levizac's plan about the arrangement 
of the different kinds of verbs — that is, instead of scattering them in 
different parts of the Grammar — I have placed them all at the end of it. 

The arrangement and division or classification of the verbs adopted by 
Levizac I know, by long experience, is far from being advantageous to 
scholars ; and if I have adopted a different arrangement, &c, it is because 
I have been convinced in the course of my teaching that the verbs in 
Levizac's own Grammar are not laid down at sufficient length to make 
plain to scholars the difference and the relation of the French and English 
verbs. 

N. B. At the beginning of each exercise on the verbs, I have indicated 
the page of the particular verb on which each exercise is given ; and in 
order to facilitate the finding out of the verbs, the part that contains every 
thing about them is of a different color from that of the rest of the Grammar. 

A thorough knowledge of the French verbs is one-third of the acquisi- 
tion of the French language, and should of course be better explained and 
better learned than is generally done. 

Note.— The verb avoir, to have, must of course be thoroughly learned before the 
following exercises are written. 

EXERCISES ON AVOIR, TO HAVE— VERBS, PAGE 10. 

245. In the following exercises, the substantive being taken in a parti- 
tive sense, it will be necessary to use the article according to the direction 
given, page 45, art. 122. 

INDICATIVE. 
Present. — I have books. Thou hast friends. He has honesty. 
livre. ami. h.onneteti f. 

She has sweetness. We have credit. You have riches They have 

douceur f m. ricficsse pL m. 

virtues. They have modesty. 
vertu £ f. 



EXERCISES ON THE VERB AVOIR, TO HAVE. 75 

Freterit Indefinite. — I have had pleasure. Thou hast had gold. 

plaisir m. or m. 

He has had patience. She has had beauty. We have had honours. 

f. f. honneur. 

You have had friendship. They have had sentiments. They have had 

ami tie f. m. £ 

sensibility. 
f. 
Imperfect. — I had ambition. Thou hadst wealth. He had sincerity.. 
f. bien m. f. 

She had graces. We had oranges. You had pears. They had apples. 

poire. m. pomme 

They had lemons. 
f. citron. 

Pluperfect. — I had had apricots. Thou hadst had nectarines. He 
abricot. brugnon. 

had had walnuts. She had had hazel-nuts. We had had chestnuts. You 

noix* noisette. chdtaigne. 

had had figs. They had had medlars. They had had filberts. 
fgue. m. nefe. f. aveline. 

Preterit definite. — I had plums. Thou hadst cherries. He had 
prune. cerise. 

strawberries. She had pineapples. We had almonds. You had cur- 
fraise. ananas. amande. grc- 

rants. They had raspberries. They had grapes. 
seiRe. m. framboise. £ raisin. 

246. In the following exercises, the addition of an adjective, after the 
substantive, will make no change in the remark on the preceding exercise. 

Preterit anterior. — I had had 2 very "black ! ink. Thou hadst had 

fort noir encre f. 
2 honest proceedings. She had had ^uncommon ^aces. We had had 
honnete proc6de. rare 

2 very 3 ripe ! grapes. You had had 2 exquisite Melons. They had had 
mur exquis m. 

2 ready ^oney. 
comptant argent m. 

Future absolute. — I shall have 2 studious : pupils. Thou wilt have 

applique ettve m. 
2 horrid 'pains. He will have 2 ridiculous Udeas. We shall have 
horrible peine f. ridicule idee f. 

2 useless ] cares. You will have 2 true 2 and J -real 'pleasures. They will 
inutile soin m. reel m. 

have 2 poignant 'griefs. 

cuisant chagrin m. 

247. But if the adjective precedes the substantive, then de before an 
adjective beginning with a consonant or an h aspirated, and d' before an 
adjective beginning with a vowel or an h mute, only is to be used. 

Future anterior. — I shall have had good paper. Thou wilt have 

papier m. 
had excellent fruit. She will have had charming flowers, We shall have 
m. pi, charmant feurs £ 



76 EXERCISES ON THE VERB AVOIR, TO HAVE. 

had good pens. You will have had large buildings. They will 

plume f. grand bailment m. 

have had fine clothes. 
superbe habit m. 
Present of the conditional. — I should have fine engravings. Thou 

gravure f. 
shouldst have pretty playthings. He should have immense treasures. 
joli joujou m. tr^sor m. 

We should have beautiful pictures. You would have pretty houses. 

tableau m. f. 

They should have long conversations. 
f. 

248. After words expressing quantity, such as beaucoup, a great deal, 
great many ; pen, little, few ; plus, more ; moins, less ; trop, too much, 
too many, &c, de and d J are used as directed art. 247. 

249. After bien, much, many, du, de la, de l\ des, are used as directed 
page 45, art. 122. 

Conditional past. — I should have had a great deal of trouble. Thou 

peine f. 
wouldst have had more pleasure. He would have had (a vast deal) of 

infiniment 
knowledge. We should have had more opportunities of succeeding 

connahsance f. pi. occasion f, reussir. 

You would 2 certainly J have 'had many advantages over him. 
certainement beaucoup av ant age sur lui 

They would have had many enemies. 
Men ennemi. 

250. Observe that when the verb is followed by several substantives, the 
proper article and preposition must be repeated before each. 

Imperative. — Have complaisance, attention, and politeness. Let him 
f. egard m. pi. politesse f. 

have modesty, and 2 more 3 correct 'ideas. Let her have more decency, 
f. juste de'cence. 

Let us have courage and firmness. Have gravy soup, nice 
m. fermete f. un -gras ] soupe f. bon 

(roast beef), and a pudding. Let them have ale, rum, and punch. 
rosbifm. ponding m. m. c/H.rarara. ponchem* 

Let them have manners and conduct, 
f. mceurs f. conduite f. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

251. The subjunctive, in French, is always preceded by the conjunction 
que, that, which is often suppressed in English. 

Present. — That I may have many friends. That thou may'st have 
beaucoup 
good reasons to give him. That he may have ? elevated 'sentiments, 

donner lui. <?leve m. 

That wc may have courage and magnanimity. That you may have 

bravonre f. f. 

^delightful 'landscapes, and beautiful (sea-pieces). That they may 
diheieux payaage m. mart up f. pL 

nave more condescension and ? more •''prepossessing 'manners. 
condescendance prSvenant manitrc f. 



EXERCISES OX THE VERB AVOIR, TO HAVE. 77 

Preterit. — That I may have had wine, beer, and cider. That 

vin m. Here f. cidre m. 
thou may'st have had a gocd norse, and a fine dog. That he may have 

c /lev a I chien. 

had 2 en lightened 'judges. That we may have had snow, rain, and 

eclaire juge. neige f. pluie f. 

wind. That you may have had a great (dining-room), a beautiful 
vent m. salle a manger f. superbe 

(drawing-room), a pretty (dressing-room), and a cnarming 

salon m. joli cabinet de toilette m. charmant 

(bed-room). That they may have had vast possessions, fine 

chambre a coucher f. vaste f. 

meadows, and 2 delightful 'groves. 
prairie £ delicieux bois m. 

Imperfect. — That I might have a sword, musket, and pistols. 

epee f. fusil, m. pistolet m 

That thou might'st have a knife, a spoon, and a fork. That 

couteau m. cuillere f. fourchette f. 

we might have a penknife, pencils, and good copies. That he might 

canifm. pinceau m. mo dele m. 

have a coach, a good house, and furniture, simple but elegant. 

carrosse m. f. meuble m. pi. mais 

That you might have health and great respect That they might 

sante f. un consideration f. 
have 2 fruitful 'lands. 
fertile terre f. 

Pluperfect. — That I might have had friendship. That thou might'st 

amitie f. 
have had gloves, boots, and horses. That he might have had 2 zealous 

gant m. botte f. cheval m. zeli 

3 and ^faithful 'servants. That we might have had fine clftthes, 2 precious 

jidtle domestique m. 
jewels, and 2 magnificent furniture. That you might have had 2 warm 
bijou m. magnifique m, pi. chaud 

friends. That they might have had greatness of soul and pity. 

grandeur f. piti6 f. 

Sentences on the same Verb, with a Negative. 

252. In the following sentences, the preposition de or a" is put before 
the substantive, according as it begins with a consonant, an h aspirated, 
a vowel, or an h mute (see art. 247) ; ne is put between the personal 
pronoun and the verb, and pas or point after the verb in the simple tenses, 
and between the verb and the participle in the compound tenses ; as, 

Je n'ai pas de livres, / have no books. 

Tu n'avais pas de bien, Thou hadst no iveattn. 

Elle n'eut pas d'honnetete, . She had no honesty. 

Nous n'avons pas eu d' amitie, We have had no friendship. 

Vous n'aviezpas eu depuissans amis, You had not had powerful friends. 
Us n'auront pas d'ennemis redou- They ivill not have formiaable ene~ 
tables, mies. 

Q 2 



78 EXERCISES ON THE VERB AVOIR, TO HAVE, 

' EXERCISE-— See Verbs, page 13. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. — I have no 2 precious 'medals. We have no 2 useless 

medaille f. inutile 

things. Preterit indefinite. — I have had no constancy. We have 
chose f. f. 

had no generosity. Imperfect. — Thou hadst not a beautiful park. 

f. pare m. 

You had no good cucumbers. Pluperfect. — He had had no fine 

concombre m. 
houses. They had had no money. Preterit definite. — He had not 

argent m. 
a skilful gardener. They had no carpets. Preterit anterior. — 

habile jardinier m. tapis m. 

Thou hadst had no complaisance. You had had no great talents. 

f. m. 

Future absolute. — I shall have no great business. We shall have 

affaire f. pi. 
no 2 uncommon prints. Future anterior. — Thou shalt have had 

rare est amp e f. 
no consolation. You shall not have had 'quiet 'days. 
f. tranquille m. 

CONDITIONAL. 

Present. — He should not have bad pictures. They should 

mauvais tableau m. 
have no leisure. Past. — I should have had no griefs. We should 

loisir m. chagrin m. 

have had no troubles. 
peine f. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Have no impatience. Let him not have 2 absurd ] ideas. Let us not 
sing. absurde f. 

have 2 dangerous ] connexions. Have no such whims. Let them not 

liaison f. caprice m 

have 3 so 4 whimsical 2 a 2 project. 
bizarre projet m. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. — That I may have no protectors. That we may have no 

m. 
success. Preterit. — That he may have had no perseverance. That 
8ucces m. f. 

they may have had no valour. Imperfect. — That thou might'st have 

bravoure f. 
no principles of taste. That you might not have a just 

principe m. gout m. juste 

reward. Pluperfect. — That I might have had no good advice. 
recompense f. o.vib to. pL 

That we might have had no news. 

nouvelle f. pi. 



EXERCISES ON THE VERB AVOIR, TO HAVE. 79 

The Verb Avoir, interrogatively. 

253. In interrogations, the personal pronoun, accompanied by a hyphen 
(-), is placed after the verb in the simple tenses, and between the verb 
and the participle in the compound tenses ; and when the third person 
singular of the verb ends with a vowel, for euphony a t is put between it 
and the pronoun, preceded and followed by a hyphen; thus, (-). 

254. Mind what has been said page 45, art. 122. 

Ai-je des livres ] Have I books ? 

Avais-tu du bien ] Hadst thou -wealth ? 

Eut-elle de l'honnetete ] Had she honesty ? 

Avons-nous eu de bons conseils 1 Have -we had good advice? 

Aviez-vous eu de la prudence 1 Had you had prudence ? 

Aura-t-il de l'argent \ Will he have money ? 

Aura-t-elle eu des protecteurs 1 Will she have had protectors ? 

EXERCISE.-— See Verbs, page 16. 
INDICATIVE. 
Present. — Hast thou needles! Have you Coloured 'mapsl 
aiguille f. enlumini carte f. 

Preterit indefinite — Have I had pens 1 Have we had Convenient 

plume f. commode 

houses] Lviperfect. — Had she silk] Had they large buildings] 

sole f. grand bdtiment m. 

Pluperfect. — Had she had pins ] Had they had 2 extensive 'fields 1 
epingle f. spacieux champ m. 

Preterit defi nite. — Had he good shoes ] Had they (looking-glasses)] 

Soulier m. f. miroir m. 

Preterit anterior. — Hadst thou had lace ] Had you had 2 odoriferou3 

dentelle f. o do rife^ant 

shrubs ] Future absolute. — Shall I have gold, silver, and pla- 
arbuste m. m. argeirt m. pa- 

tina ] Shall we have (good luck) ] Future anterior. — Will she 
tine m. bonheur m. 

have had joy 1 Will they have had company ] 
joie ? compagnie f. 

CONDITIONAL. 
Present. — Shouldst thou have happy moments \ Should you have 

heurcux m. 
good wine and 2 nice Cordials ] Past. — Should he have had 

vin m. Jin liqueur f. 

uncommon fruits ] Should they have had rich clothes ] 
rare m. 

T7ie Verb Avoir, interrogatively and negatively. 

255. In interrogative and negative sentences, observe the diffeient rules 
(art. 245, 246, 247, 248, 249), and always place ne at the beginning of 
sentences, and pas or point after the personal pronoun, whether in the 
simple or compound tenses. 

N'ai-je pas des livres ] Have I no books ? 

JV'avais-tu pas des amis 1 Hadst thou no friends ? 



80 EXERCISES ON THE VERB ETRE, TO BE. 

N'a-t-elle pas beaucoup d'esprit 1 Has she not a great deal of wit? 

N'avons-nous pas eu de bons pro- Have -we not acted fairly ? 
cedes 1 

N'aviez-vous pas eu de nouvelles Had you not had new gowns ? 
robes 1 

N'aura-t-il pas des ressources 1 Will he have no resources ? 

N'auront-elles pas eu des consola- Will they have had no consola- 
tions 1 tions ? 

EXERCISE.— See Verbs, page 18. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. — Hast thou no diamonds 1 Have you no 2 indulgent parents? 

diamant m. m. 

Preterit indefinite. — Hast thou not had contempt and even hatred 

mepris m. meme haine f. 
for that man 1 Have you not had better examples 1 Imperfect. — 
pour meilleur exemple m. 

Had he not a 2 rigid 'censor 1 Had they not inattentive 'children ! 
severe censeur m. enfant m. 

Pluperfect. — Had I not had other views 1 Had we not had amethysts, 
autre vue ? f. amethyste f. 

rubies, and topazes 1 Preterit definite. — Had I no great wrongs 1 
rubis m. topaze f. tort m. 

Had we not 2 perfldious 'friends 1 Preterit anterior. — Had he not 

perfide 
used 2 far-fetched 'expressions 1 Had they not excellent models 1 
eu tres-recherchJ f. modele m. 

Future absolute. — Wilt thou not lead a 2 more 3 regular 'life 1 Will 

avoir regie co7iduitei\1 

you not have 2 fashionable 'gowns ] Future anterior. — Shall I have 

a la mode robe f. 
had no sweetmeats 1 Shall we not have had a good preacher ? 

confiture f. 1 predicateur m. 

CONDITIONAL 
Present. — Should she not have 2 clear 2 and 4 just 'ideas 1 Would 

clair 
they not have 2 more ^extensive 'knowledge? Past. — Should she 

etendu connaissances f. pi. 
have had no patience 1 Should they have had no rectitude 1 

f. droiture f. 1 



Note.— The verb ftrc, to be, must of course be thoroughly learned before the fol 
lowing exercises are written. 

EXERCISES ON ETRE, TO BE.— See Verbs, page 24. 
INDICATIVE. 
Present. — I am very glad to see you. Art thou not pleased with 
aise de voir satisfait de 

that book ] Is she really amiable 1 We are happy. Are you 

viritablement heurcux, 

not too condescending] *Are your friends still in London? 
complaisant ? encore a Londres ? 

* About such sentences, see Verbs, page 8» art. 63. 



EXERCISES ON THE VERB ETRE, TO BE. 8 J 

Preterit ixdefi f ite. — Have I not been constant 1 Hast thou always 

been steady ? She has been faithful. Have we been firm and courage- 
pas? ? fid tie. far me 
ous 1 You have been charitable. Have those men always been good 

and benevolent 1 
bienfaisant ? 

Lviperfect. — I was too busy to see you. "Wast not thou 
occupe pour recevoir 
troublesome ] Was this girl idle ] Were we not too untractable 1 You 
importun? fille paresseux ? indocile? 

were not 2 quiet 'enough. They were vain, frivolous, and coquettish. 
iranquiile assez. f. frivole coquette. 

Pluperfect.— I had hitherto been very indifferent. Hadst thou not 
jusqu'alors insouciant. 

been too imprudent] Had his wife been sufficiently modest and 

epouse assez assez 

reserved 1 We had not yet been sufficiently attentive. Had you 
reserve* ? encore applique. 

been envious and jealous 1 They had not been grateful. 

jaloux ? reconnaissant. 

Preterit definite. — Perhaps I was not sufficiently prudent. 

Peut-ttre que assez 

Wast thou 2 discreet 'enough on that occasion 1 Was not that princess 
discret en f. princesse 

too proud ? We were very unhappy. Were you not too hasty 1 
fier ? prompt 2 

They were not much satisfied. 
fort satiofait. 

Future absolute. — To-morrow I shall be (at home) till 

Demain chez-moi jusqu'a 

(twelve o'clock.) Wilt thou always be restless, brutal, and sour ? 

midi inquiet, bourru, chagrin ? 

Will your father be (at home) this evening ] Shall we not be 

* Monsieur chez-lui soir m. 

more diligent 1 Will you ^always 2 then j be capricious, obstinate, and 

done quinteux, opiniatre, 

particular 1 Will not your scholars be troublesome 1 

pointilleux ? * - e"colier incommode ? 

.*»■ 
Future anterior. — Shall I not have been too severe ] Thou wilt 

have been too distrustful. Will not his sister have been whimsical and 

defiant. scsur fantasque 

capricious 1 Shall we not have been 2 eager 'enough? Will you not 

empresse 
have been inconsiderate 1 Will not the judges have been just 1 
in discret ? juge 

* 256. It is customary, through respect, in speaking of a person's relations, to 
prefix to the name Mr., Mrs., or Miss : thus we say, Monsieur votre per e ; Monsieur 
votre frere ; Madame votre mere ; Mademoiselle votre saur, &c. 



82 EXERCISES ON THE VERB ETRE, TO BE. 

Conditional present. — I would not be so rash. Would'st thou 

ttmirai^e. 
be as consistent in thy behaviour as in thy language 1 Would not 

consequent dans condnite f. propos m. pi. 

his son be ready in time 1 Should we be always incorrigible ? You would 

fls pret a 
not be disinterested Enough. Would not those ladies be always virtuous 1 
de sinter esse dame vertueux ? 

Past. — (Had it not been for) your instructions, I should have been 

Sans conseil m. 

proud and haughty. Would'st thou not have been malicious and 
dedaigneux hautain. malin 

sarcastic 1 Would that man have been so destitute of common sense 1 
ricaneuv? tellement depourvu bon sens? 

Certainly we should not have been so ridiculous. Would you not have been 

si ridicule, 

more kind and indulgent] They would not have been so ungenteel 

doux plus complaisant ? malhonnete. 

Imperative. — Be liberal. Do not be so lavish. Let us be equi- 

sing. sing. prodigue. 

table, humane, and prudent. Let us not be covetous. Be economical 

humain avide. pi. iconome 

and temperate. Do not be thoughtless. 
sobre, pi. leger. 

257. As the third person singular and plural of the imperative mood 
belong rather to the subjunctive, they are there exemplified. 

258. Before the subjunctive can form a complete sense, it must bo 
preceded by another verb. For the sake of brevity, therefore, complete 
sentences will only be given on the present tense. This remark applies 
alike to the four conjugations. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. — Is it possible I can be so credulous ] They wish 
\que credule On desire 

thou may'st be more modest. Is it possible she can be so obstinate 1 

modeste. entite" ? 

They wish us to be more assiduous. It is not expected you should be 

assidu. On * s f attend 

timid. It is feared they may be guilty 
timide. On * craint ne cotipable. 

Preterit. — That I should have been so hasty and impatient. That 

emporte" si 
thou should'st have been so (puffed up) with pride. That she should have 

bouffi de 
been so fickle. That we should have been so (headstrong). That you should 

volage tctu. 

iiave been so avaricious. That they should have been so unreasonable. 
avare. dt'raisonnable . 

l J50. Observe, the verb etre serves as an auxiliary to conjugate the 
passive verbs through all their tenses, the compound tenses of the pron- 
ominal verbs, and those of about fifty neuter verbs. See Verbs,/?. 162. 

t See page 76, art. 251. 



EXERCISES ON THE REGULAR VERBS IN EF- 83 

Imperfect. — That I should not be humane and generous. That thou 

humain 
might'st be more careful. That she might not be so arrogant. That 

soigneux. 
we might be victorious. That you might not be so stern. That they 

severe. 
might not be so cruel. 

Pluperfect. — That I might have been more studious. That thou 

might'st have been more circumspect. That she might have been more 

circonspect. 

attentive to her duty. That we might have been less addicted to 

devoir m. pi. livre a 

pleasure. That you might have been more assiduous and more 

art. m. pi. assidu plus 

grateful. That they might have been less daring. 

reconnaissant. hardi. 



First Co?ijugation in er. 
See Verbs, page 34 and following, and 48 and following. 

Note.— The verb parler, to speak, must of course be thoroughly learned before 
the following exercises are written. 

260. Observe, that in the following exercises the French verbs, which 
are found under the English verbs, are in the infinitive present ; it is for 
the student to put them in the tenses required by the meaning of the 
English sentences. 

261. Adverbs, with few exceptions, must be placed after the verb in 
simple tenses, and between the auxiliary and the participle in compound 
tenses, when this adverb is only a single w T ord. 

EXERCISES ON THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN ER. 

Indicative present. — I willingly give that plaything to your sister. 
volontiers donner joujou m. 
Do I prefer pleasure to my duty ] Dost thou not irritate thy 

preftrer art. m. devoir m. ii riter 

enemies \ He does not propose 2 salutary Advice to his friends. We 
ennemi ? proposer un avis m. 

sincerely love peace and tranquillity. We do not neglect 
sinctrement art. paix f. art. f. ne negliger 

(any thing) to 2 please l you. Do you not admire the beauty of that 

rien pour plairs admirer f. 

landscape 1 Do not your parents comfort the afflicted ] They 

paysage m. consoler afflige m. pi. 

(make use of) all means to succeed. 

employer art. moyen m. pi. pour reussir. 

Preterit indefinite. — I have (given up) my 2 favourite 'horse to my 

ceder favori cheval 

cousin. Hast thou not exchanged watches with my sibter 1 Has the 
changer de montre 



84 EXERCISES ON THE REGULAR VERBS IN ER. 

tutor given fine engravings to his pupil 1 We have spoken 

prfcepteur gravure f. pupills m. 

(a long while) of your adventure. Have you not insisted (too much) 

long-temps aventure f. insist e trop 

upon that point 1 Have your aunts prepared their 2 ball 'dresses 1 
&ur m. tante preparer de bal habit m. 

Imperfect. — I unceasingly thought of my misfortunes. Didst thou 

sans cesse penser a malheur m. 

dread his presence and firmness ? He exhibited in his person all 
redouter f. sa fermete" ? retracer en f. 

the virtues of his ancestors. Did not that woman accuse her friend of 
f. ancetre, accuser amie f. 

levity ] We did not protect that bad man. You despised a 
lesrlrete f. proteger merchant mepriser 

^vain 'erudition. Did the Komans disdain 3 so 4 weak 'an 2 enemy] 

f. Romain dedaigner faible m. 

The bees were there sucking the cups of the flowers. 
abeille y sucer calice m. Jleur. 

Pluperfect. — I had drained an 2 unwhoIesome 'marsh. Had'st 
dessecher maVsain marais m. 

thou not married a man rich, but unluckily without education 1 

ipouser malheur eusement sans f. 

Had his father rejected these Advantageous 'offers] We had not 
rejeter avantageux offre f. 

long listened to the singing of the birds. Had you already 
long-temps ecouter * chant m. oiseau m. deja 

'studied geography and history 1 Had not his friends procured 
Studier art. f. art. h.istoiref. procurer 

him a troop of cavalry ] 

lui compagnie f. cavalerie ? 

Preterit definite. — Did I not gladly give peaches and flowers 

avec plaisir peche f. Jleur f 

to my neighbours ! Thou forgottest an 2 essential 'circumstance. Did 

voisin m. oublier essentiel cir Constance f. 

not your cousin relate that charming history with (a great deal) of 

raconter charmant avec beaucoup 

grace 1 He lightly judged of my intentions. Did we not shew 

legerement juger montrer 

courage, constancy, and firmness] Did you visit the grotto and the 

m. f. f. visiter grotte f. 

grove ] JJJhey did not generously forgive their enemies. 

bois m. ge'nereusement pardonner a 

Preterit anterior. — I had soon wasted my money and exhausted 

bientbt manger argent m. e'puiser 

my resources. Hadst thou (very soon) reinforced thy party ? Had not 

ressauvce f. vite renforcer parti m. 

Alexander soon surmounted all obstacles 1 We had not 2 soon 'enough 
Alexandre suvmonter tons art. m. • tot assez 

shut the shutters, and (let down) the curtains. Had you not quickly 
Jcrmrr volet baissej rideau. promptement 

dined 1 In (the twinkling) of an eye. they had dispersed the mob. 
dfner ? Dans im clin * *•>'/, disperser populace f. 



EXERCISES ON THE REGULAR VERBS IN ER. 85 

262. There is a fourth preterit, called preterit anterior indefinite, which is used 
instead of the preterit anterior, when speaking of a time not entirely elapsed.. a3 
fai eu acheve mon ouvrage ce matin, cette semcine, &c, and nolj'eus acheve: as it is 
found in every conjugation, I shall insert it here : fai eu parl\ tu as cu parle, il a 
eu parle, nous'avojis eu parle, vous avez eu parle, Us out cu parle, they had spoken. 

Future absolute. — I shall relieve the poor. Wilt thou faith- 

soulager pauvrem.ipl. fidtle- 

fully keep that secret ] Will he consult 2 enlightened 'judges 1 He 

merit gartler m. consulter ■ eclaire juge . ? 

will support you with all his credit. We shall not prefer pleasure 

appuyer de m. preftrer art. m. 

to glory , and riches to honor. 'By ? such 2 a 4 conduct, 

art. f. art. art. tel conduit e f. 

will you not afflict your father and mother 1 Will they astonish 

ajjliger voire etonner 

their hearors 1 
audit eur m. 

Future anterior. — I shall soon have finished this book. By thy 

achever m. 

submission, wilt thou not have appeased his anger 1 Will the king have 
soumissio?i f. appaiser coltre f. 

triumphed over his enemies? 2 We 'perhaps shall not have rewarded 
triompher de recompenser 

enough the merit of this 2 good 'man. Will you not have flown to 

m'.rite m. de bien voler 

his assistance"! Will our servants have brought money] 
secours m. domestique m. apporter argent ? 

Conditional present. — Should I form conjectures without number? 

former f. nombre? 

Thou would'st not avoid 2 so -'great 'a ^danger. Would not his attorney 
eviter procureur 

(clear up) that business 1 We would (drive away) the importunate. 
debrouiller affaire f. chasser importunm.pl, 

Would you not discover that 2 atrocious 'plot 7 They would not 

devoiler atroce complot m. 

unravel the clue of that intrigue. 
demtler Jil m. f. 

Past. — I should have liked hunting, fishing, and the coun- 
aimer art. chasse f. art. peche f. cam- 

try. Would'st thou not have played ] Would he not have bowed 

pagne f. jouer ? saltier 

to the company ? W'ould we ^gladly 'have 2 praised his pride 

compagnie f. avec plaisir loner orgueil m. 

and incivility ! You would have awakened (every body.) Would 

sa malhonneteti f. eveiller tout te tnoude 

those merchants have paid their debts 1 
marchand payer dette f. 

Imperative. — In all thy actions, consult the light of reason 
Dans f. consulter lumitre art. 

Never yield to the violence of thy passions. Let us love justice, 
te abandonner f. art. 

peace, and virtue. Let us not cease to work. Sacrifice 
art* f. art. f. cesser de travailler. Sacrificr 

II 



86 EXERCISES ON THE regular verbs in er. 

Vour own interest to the 2 public 'good. Do not omit such 

* in&fvetm. pi. bien n^gliger des 

2 useful -and 'interesting 'details. 

si utile si interessant m. 

263. The second person singular of the imperative of this conjugation, 
and likewise of some verbs of the second ending in vrir, frir, lir, take s 
after e before the word y and en . as, portes-en a ton fr ere, carry some to 
thy brother ; offres-en a ta sceur, offer some to thy sister ; cueilles-en 
aussi pour toi, gather some likewise for thyself; apportes-y tes livres, 
bring there thy books. 

Subjunctive present. — -That I may not always listen to a 2 severe 

ecouter * 
'censor of my defects. That thou should'st find real friends. 

defaut m. trouver vrai 

That he would adorn his speeches with the graces of a 2 pure 'diction. 

parer discours de f. 

That she would remain in her boudoir. That we should so hastily 

rester m. legerement 

condemn the world. That you may pout incessantly. That 
condamner monde m. bonder sans cesse. 

they may work more willingly. 
travailler phis voiontiers. 

Preterit. — That I may have caressed insolence and flattered 

caresser art. f. Jtatter 

pride. That thou would'st have added nothing to that work. 
art. ajouter ouvrage m. 

That he should have carried despair into the soul of his friend. 

porter art. desespoir m. dans ame 
That we may have blamed 3 so 4 prudent 5 and 6 so "wise 'a 2 conduct. 

bldmer sage conduite f. 

That you may have exasperated 3 so 4 petulant 'a '-character. That they 

exasperer car act ere m. 

may not have (taken advantage) of the circumstances. 
projiter circonstance. 

Imperfect. — That I should not copy his example. That thou might'st 

imiter ex em pie m. 

(give up) 2 perfidious 'friends. That he might inhabit a hut 
abandonner perfide habiter chaumieref. 

instead of a palace. That we should fall at the feet of an 2 ilie- 
au lieu palms m. tomber pied m. le- 

gitimate 'king. That you would respect the laws of your country. 
gitime respecter hi f puys ni. 

That they would not speak (at random). 

a tort et a travers. 

Pluperfect. — That I should not have burnt that work. That thou 

br filer m. 

might'st not have contemplated the beauties of the country. That he 

contempler campagne. 

should have perfected his 2 natural 'qualities. That we might not 
ptrfectionner naturel f. 



EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJ. IN IR. 87 

have gained the victory. That you had enchanted the public That 

remporter f. enchanter m. 

they would have struck their enemies with fear. 
f rapper de crainte. 



Second Conjugation in ir. 
See Verbs, page 52 and following. 

Note.— The verbs finir, to finish, page 54 ; ouvrir, to open, page 130 ; stntir, to 
feel, pace 130; and tenir, to hold, page 132, must be thoroughly learned befcre the 
following exercises are written. 

264. Important direction. — Whenever the student has a French verb 
ending with ir to translate, the first thing he must do is to look for it 
among the verbs composing the list given page 162. If the verb looked 
for is not to be found in the above mentioned list, he must conjugate it on 
finir, to finish, page 54 ; and if it be found in the list, he will be directed 
on which verb to conjugate it. 

EXERCISES. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. — I choose this picture. I feel all the unpleasantness 

choisir tableau m. desagriment it. 

of your situation. Whence comest thou] Does he thus define 

Ifoii venir ainsi dejinir 

that word 1 Does his mother (go out) so soon ] Do we not (set off) 

mot m. sortir tut partir 

for the country 1 Do you not pity his sorrows 1 Do you 

campagne f. compdtir a mal m. 

not (tell a lie) ] They are finishing at this moment. They 

mentir jinir dans art. m. 

(act contrary) to your orders. 
contrevenir ordre. 

Imperfect. — I fortified his soul against the dangers of seduction. 

premunir contre art. f. 

I served my friends warmly. Did'st not thou amuse him with 

servir avec chaleur. entretenir de 

fair promises ] He complied (at last) with the wishes of his 

beau promesse f. consentir enfin a desir m. 

family. Did we not frequently warn our friends of the bad 
famille f. frequemment avertir 

state of their affairs ] Did we sleep then ] Did you not belie 
itat dormir alors ? demeniir 

your character ] Did not the enemies invade an 2 immense 'country 1 
caractere m. envahir pays m. 

Did the -wild 'beasts often (come out) from the bottom of their 

sauvage bete f. souvent sortir fond m. 

mountains 1 
montagne ? 

Preterit. — I softened my father by my submission. I foresaw 
fitchir soumission f. pressentir 

that 2 terrible 'catastrophe. Thou did'st not (come again) as thou 

revenir comma le 



88 EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJ. IN IR. 

had'st promised. He did not succeed through thoughtlessness. Did 

promts. renssir par etourderie, 

his daughter not (set out again) immediately ? Did not Alexander sully 
repartlr sur le champ ? ternir 

his glory by his pride 1 Did we (go out) of the city before him 1 We 

sortir ville f. avant hit ? 

never betrayed that important 'secret. Did you not agree (to 

trahir m. consentir de vous en 

trust) to me 1 They served their country with courage. Did the 
rapporter moi ? pays 

ancient philosophers enjoy great consideration 1 

philosophe m. jouir de un f. 

Future. — Shall I not obtain this of you 1 What will become 

obtenir cela de Que devenir 

of thee if 1 forsake thee 1 ? Will he not embellish his (country-seat)] 

* tu abandonner embetlir maison de campagne? 

He will not sleep quietly. Shall we consent to that -ridiculous 

tranquillement. 
'bargain 1 With time and patience you will compass your 
marchz m. Avec m. f. venir a bout de 

end. We shall not sully the splendor of our life by an -unworthy 

dessein m. e'clat m. indigne 

'action. Will those men enrich their country by their industry ? 

enrichir pays Industrie ? 

Will not our friends offer us their assistance \ 

offrir sec ours ? 

Conditional. — I would open the door and the window. I should 

porte f. fenetre f. 

still cherish life. Would'st thou not interpose in that affair ! Would 

cherir art. intervener 

my brother (set off again) without taking leave of us 1 You would 

repartir sans prendre "j"A. conge 
not succeed (in injuring him) in the 2 public l opinion. Could'st 

parvenir a nuire jA lui dans f. 

thou soften that 2 fiinty 'heart! Could thev foresee their misfor- 
attendrir de rocher pressentir mal~ 

tune] Would men always (grow old) without growing wiser, 
heur ? art. vieillir sans devenir A.t 

if they reflected on the shortness of life! 
rejlechir sur brieve te f. art. 

Imperative. — Shudder with horror and terror. Support thy 
Fremir de h.orreur de effroi m. Soutenir 
character in good and bad fortune. Do not obtain thy 

art. dans art. mauvais f. ne parvenir a 

point but by means Consistent with 'delicacy. Let us 

Jin f. pi. que par des moyens que la avoue * de'icatesse. 

\ The student must have before this time observed that, in th3 conjugatioa of the 
verbs, letters A, B, C. &e., have been put before the name of each tense, with a 

view to use these letters as references in the exercises. Here, fur instance, grow- 
ing is in the present participle; and as the French idiom requires the French verb 
devenir in the present of tiie infinitive, the letter A is put after devenir as a warning 
to the student 



EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE THIRD COXJ. IX OIR. 89 

feed the poor. Let us gain glory by our perseverance. Let 

nuiimr m. pi. obtenir art. f. 

us not divulge our secrets (to every body). Never submit to ? so 

decouvrir a tout le monde. fiichir sous 

4 unjust ! a 2 yoke. Do not maintain 5 so 4 absurd ! an 2 opinion. Do 

joug m. soutenir absurde 

not (come upon us) again (in that unexpected manner.) 
ne survenir plus ainsi a Vimproviste, 

Subjunctive present. — That I may never blemish my reputation 

fietrir f. 

That I may (be beforehand) with 2 such ? dangerous Enemies. (I will 
prevenir de si je ne veux 

not have thee) (go out) this morning. That he may not enjoy his 
pas que tu sortir Q. matin m. jnuvr de 

glory. That he may not obtain his ends. That we may become 
f. parvenir a Jin f. deienir 

just, honest, and virtuous. That you may punish the guilty. That 

honnete vertueux. coupablepl. 

you may return covered with laurels. That they may establish 2 wise 

revenir convert de laurierm. . etablir 

3 and -just 'laws. That they may agree about the conditions. 

convenir de 

Imperfect. — That I might stun the whole neighbourhood. That 
etourdir tout voisinage m. 
I might not (bring about) my designs. That thou would'st 

vevir a bout de projet m. 
(tell a wilful lie). That he might not bear his disgrace with 

mentir de dessein premedite. soutenir f* 

firmness. That we might disobey the laws. That we should 
fermete. desobeir a 

belong to that great king. That you might renounce your errors 
appartenir revenir de 

and prejudices. That they might weaken the force of their 

de vos prr'juge. affaiblir f. 

reasons. That they might hold 2 the •'most 4 absurd 'ideas. 
raisonnement. tenir aux 



Third Conjugation in oir. 

See Verbs, page 64 and following. 

EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJ. IN OIR, 

Indicative present. — I perceive the summit of the Alps covered 
apercevoir sommet Alpes f. 

with 2 perpetual 'snow. What gratitude dost thou not owe 

de ttemel neigef.pl. reconnaissance f. devoir 

to her ] who 3 (has discharged) 5 (the duty of a mother) ^(to thee) 

celle remplir prts de toi 

Xin thy infancy) ! Does your scholar understand well that rule which 

ecolier concevoir bien regie f. * 
is so simple 1 We do not owe a large sum. Do you not perceive the 
* devoir gros sonvne f. 

h2 



90 EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJ. IN OIR. 

snare 1 5 Ought 2 firm s and 4 courageous 'men to yield to 
piege m. Devoir des hommes * ceder art 

circumstances 1 
cir Constance P 

Imperfect. — Did I not receive him kindly 1 Did he see 

le avec amitie ? apercevoir 

the castle from such a distance 1 We did not receive our income. 

chateau si * loin? percevoir reve?ium.ip\. 

Did you not receive great civilities ? Did those tyrants conceive 
de honnetete f. tyran concevoir 

all the blackness of their crimes ] 
noirceur f. 

Preterit. — I perceived him walking (by moon light). 

le quisepromenait.au clair de la lune. 

Did the queen conceive a great esteem for that 2 honest Jman. Did we 

estime f. de bien 

not immediately perceive the snare 1 You did not receive his letters (in 

lettres a 
time). Did the ministers conceive the depth of his plan. 
temps. ministre profondeur f. m. 

Future. — Shall I receive visits to-day 1 He will not discover 
visite aujourd'hui? 
the spire of his village. We shall conceive 2 well- 3 founded 'hopes. 

clocherm. m. fonde esperancef. 

Will you never conceive 2 so 4 luminous ] a principle 1 Shall men 

art. 
always owe their misfortunes to their faults 1 
malheur faute ? 

Conditional. — Should I receive the offers of my enemy 1 4 Should 'a 

offre Devoir 

s wise 2 man 6 thus 5 (give himself up) to despair 1 Should we con- 

s'abandonner art. desespoir m. 
ceive 2 such s abstract 'ideas 1 You would easily perceive 3 so 4 gross ] a 

si abstrait des idees ? grossier 

2 trick. Would not my sisters receive their friend with tenderness 1 
ruse f. tendresse f. 1 

Imperative. — Conceive the horror of his situation. Do not receive 

that mark of confidence with indifference. Let us entertain a 

marque f. conjiance concevoir * 

horror of vice. Let us never owe (any thing). Receive 

de le h.orreur pour art. % m. rien. 

his advice with respect and gratitude. Receive no more of his letters. 
avis lettre f. 

Subjunctive present. — That I may receive consolations. That he 

should not conceive a thought so well explained. That we may always 

pensie f. dtveloppe*. 

receive false news. That you may not perceive the danger of 

nouvelle f. pi. art 



EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJ. IN RE. 91 

oooks which are contrary to good morals. That they may not 

* * contre * art. metiers f. 

collect 2 unjust Haxes. 
percevoir injuste f. 

Imperfect. — That I might conceive 2 such 'a 3 project. That he might 

tel projet m. 
perceive the 2 secret 'designs -j-of the enemy's general. That we should not 

cache dessein * 

receive every body with civility. That you could not conceive the 
honnetete. 
depth of this book. That they might not perceive the masts 

profondeur f. mo. i m. 

of the ship. 

vaisseau m. 



Fourth Conjugation in re. 

See Verbs, page 76 and following. 

Note. — The verbs vendre, to sell, page 78 ; joindre, to join, page 148; paraitre, to 
appear, page 152 ; plaire, to please, page 153 ; and reduire, to reduce, page 156, must 
be thoroughly learned befure the following exercises are written. 

265. Important direction. — Whenever the student has a French verb 
ending with re to translate, the first thing he must do is to look for it 
among the verbs composing the list given page 162. If the verb looked 
for is not to be found in the above mentioned list, he must conjugate it en 
vendre, to sell, page 78 ; and if it is found in the list, he will be directed 
on which verb to conjugate it. 

Indicative present. — I know his 2 fiery 3 and 4 impetuou ^em- 

connaitre bouillant carac- 

per. I wait his return with impatience. Does he fear 

tire m. attendre retour craindre art 

death] Does not virtue please everybody? We do not force you 

f. plaire a contraindre 

to adopt this opinion. We suppress for the present several interesting 
de adopter f. taire m. inter ess ant 

'circumstances. Do you not confound these notions one with 

f. confondre art. art. 

another ! You seduce your hearers by your 2 modest ] exterior. Do 

seduire auditeur m. m. 

your sons acknowledge their errors 1 Do not those workmen waste their 

reconnattre ouvrier perdre 

time about trifles 1 

a des bagatelle? 

Imperfect. — I did not displease by my conduct. I was pitying 
deplaire plaindre 

those sad victims of the revolution. ^Did not this dog bite 7 Did 
triste victime f. f. chien mordrc ? 



f Translate, af the general of the enemies. \ See verbs, page 8, art 63. 



92 EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJ. IN RE. 

that man (at last) acknowledge his injustice 1 We did not appeal 

enfin f. 

convinced. We joined our sighs and tears. Were you painting 
convaincu f. soupir m. nos larme f. peindre 

an ^historical Subject ] Did those orators throw the graces of ex- 

(fhistoire tableau m. repandre art. 

pression into their speeches 1 They led the people into an error. 
discours ? induire m. en * 

Preterit. — I aimed at an 2 honest 'end. Did his prudence extinguish 

tendre a but m. f. eteindre 

the fire of a disordered 'imagination 1 Did not your conduct (do away) 

deregle f. ccnduite f. detruire 

his prejudices 1 We led our friend back to his 2 country 'house. 

prevention f. veconduire * de campagne f. 

Did we offer our incense to the pride of a blockhead 1 Did you feign 
vendre encens sot? feindre 

to think as a madman 1 Did you conduct your children from truth 
de en * fou ? conduire veritc 

to truth 1 Did l those s frightful 2 spectres appear again 1 Did 

en effrayant m. apparaitre de nouveau ? 

not the children (come down) at the first summons 1 

descendre a ordre m. sing. 

Future. — Shall I hear the music of the new opera 1 I shall 
entendre musique f. 
aot conceal from you my mind. Will the general constrain 

taire * facon de penser f. contrainare 

the officers to join their Respective 'corps 1 Will not a thought, true, 

officier rejoindre f. 

grand, and well expressed, please at all times 1 We shall (make 

exprime dans art. m. 

our appearance) on this great theatre 2 next. ^onth. Shall we 

paraHre sur m. art. prochain viois m. 

describe all the horror of this 2 terrible 'night 7 Will you not (new- 
d? peindre nuit f. re* 

model) a work so full of 2 charming 'ideas 1 Will you know 
fondre plein reconnaitre 

your things again ] Will they always reduce our duties to bene- 
effet m. * devoir m. art. bien- 

ficence ] They will assiduously correspond with their friends. 
faisance f. assiddment correspondre 

Conditional. — Should I, by these means gain the 2 desired 

moyen m. atteindre a d'sir ! 

'end 1 I should (carry on) the undertaking with success. Would his 
but m. conduire entreprise f. 

mother wait witn (so much) patience ] Could sincerity displease 

tant de art. f. a 

the man (of sense) I Should we sell our liberty 7 Should we 
sense vendre 

build our house upon that plan] Would you oblige young 

construire m. astreindre des 

people to live as you do 1 Would you reduce your child to 

§rem pi. vivre comme * 



EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE FOURTH COXJ. IN RE. 93 

despair! They should dread 'the 3 (public) 2 censure. Would 
art. desespoir m. craindre du public f. 

my protectors introduce an unknown person into the world 1 
introduive inconnu m. * 

Imperative. — Depict in thy idyl all the charms of a 2 rural 

Peindre idylle douceur f. champttre 

life. Expect not happiness from 2 external 'objects; it is in 

Attendre art. art. exterieur m. il 

thyself. Know the powers of thy mind before thou writest. Let us 
force f. avant cle * ecrire A. 

unite prudence with courage. Let us not descend to 

joindre art. f. a art. m. descendre dans des 

2 useless 'particulars. Let us not (give offence) by an air of haugh- 

partiadarite. deplaire des m. pi. 

tiness 1 2 Seem 'neither 3 too cheerful nor too grave. Ye sovereigns, 
Parattre ne ni gai ni serieux. * souverain 

make the people happy. Do not despise his friendship. Sweet 
rendre pi. dedaigner doux 

illusions, vain phantoms, vanish ! (Keep to yourself) such truths 

f. fantbme m. disparaltre ! taire certain 

as may offend. 
qui peuvent offenser. 

Subjunctive present. — That I may fear that cloud of enemies. 

nuee f. 
That I should please every body, is impossible. That he may not 
a ce 

reply to 2 such 'absurd 'criticism. That he may lead his pupil 
repondre un si critique f. conduire elcve 

step by step to a perfect knowledge of the art of speaking and writing. 
pas a connaissance de A 

That we may entice by an 2 enchanting 'style. That we may confound 

seduire enchanteur in. 

the arts with the sciences. That you may have 2 the 3 same 4 end 

but m. 
'(in view.) That they may not depend on anybody. That they 
tendre a dependre de personne. 

may not increase our sufferings. 
accroitre peines. 

Imperfect. — That 1 might not melt into tears. That I would 

fondre en larme. 
acknowledge the truth. That he might (draw a picture of) 
reconnaltre peindre art 

distressed 'virtue. That she might please by her accomplishments 
malheureux f. elle grace f. 

more than by her beauty That we might conduct him to court 

conduire art. couri 

That we should affect 2 such 3 low 'sentiments. That you might 

feindre des si bas m. 

hear their justification. That you might know your real friends 

entendre vrai 

That they might (wait for) the opinion of 2 sensible 'persons. That 

attendre art. sense f. 

they would not appear so scornful and vain, 
f. dtdaigneux ni si 



94 EXERCISES ON THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 

Of Pronominal Verbs. 

See Verbs, page 88 and following. 

Note. —In all past participles, except absous, dissous, and resous, which are to be 
seen hereafter, the feminine is formed by adding e mute to the masculine, and the 
plural by adding s to the singular, both masculine and feminine, when it does not 
already end with s. In the following exercises the past participles, if put in 
French under the English, are always put in the masculine singular; it is for the 
student to put them in the number and gender required. 

Indicative present. — I commonly walk (by moonlight). 

d? ordinaire se promener au clair de la lune. 
Dost thou not (deceive thyself) 1 He (is never happy) but (when he 
se tromper ne se plaire que a 

is doing) wrong ! Do we not (nurse ourselves) too much 1 How 
faire A. du mall s'ecouter 

do you do 1 They mean to travel in the spring. 

se porter ? se proposer de voyager a m. 

Preterit indefinite. — I (have been) tolerably well for some 
se porter assez Men depuis 
time. Didst thou not (lose thyself) in the wood ] (It is said) that he 

s'egarer On dit 

(killed himself) (out of) despair. Have we (flattered ourselves) without 

se titer de se flatter 

foundation 1 Ladies, have you walked this morning 1 Did 

fcndement ? JVfesdames, se promener 

those ladies (recognise themselves) iu this portrait 1 
dame se reconnaitre a m. 

Imperfect. — I (tormented myself) incessantly about the affairs of 
se tourmenter sans cesse pour 

others. Wast thou not (laying the foundation for) much sorrow by 
autrui. se preparer bien des regrets 

thy foolish conduct 1 He (made himself) more and more unhappy 

se rendre 

(every day). We despaired without reason. Did you not 
de jour en jour. se desesperer 

laugh at us ] They (ruined themselves) wantonly. 
se moquer de se perdre de gaiete de caur. 

Pluperfect. — I (had trusted myself ) to 2 ( very uncertain) guides. 
se livrer a des pen sur m. 

Didst thou not confide too inconsiderately in this man 1 Had that 

se confler Ugirement a 

officer rushed rashly into this danger 1 We had con- 

iflicier se preciplter time* r air ement dans m. se con- 

demned ourselves. Had you not (been engaged) in trifles ? Had 
damner nous-mimes. s'occuper de bagatelle f. 

those travellers (gone out) of the right way 1 
voyageura se detoumer droit chemin m. 

Preterit. — I repented but too late of having taken 2 such 'a step. 

tard A. fait* tel dimarckei. 

Wast thou not well entertained (yesterday evening 1) He (suffered 

s'amuser hier au soir ? nesetrouver. 



EXERCISES ON THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 95 

for) his imprudence. We met in the street, but did 

pas bien de se rencontrer rue 

not speak. Did you say nothing (to each other) 1 Did not 

se parler. dites-vous * 

those 2 rash 'children (applaud themselves) for their folly 1 
temeraire s'applaudir de sotiise ? 

Preterit anterior. — (As soon as) I discovered that they sought 

Des que s'apercevoir on chercher 

to deceive me, I was on my guard. What didst thou, when 
H. tromper se tenir J. garde t. pi. Jis quand 

thou (sawest thyself) thus forsaken 1 When she recollected 
se trouver ainsi abandonneP se souvenir 

all the circumstances, she was quite ashamed. When he had 
de f. J. toute honteux. 

rejoiced sufficiently, we parted. When you (had amused 

se rejouir assez se separer J. s'amuser 

yourself) sufficiently at his expense, did you not leave him quiet 1 

a depens m. pi. laisserl. tranquille? 

When they had walked enough, they (sat down) at the foot of a tree. 
se promener s'assirent a 

Future absolute. — I will yield if they convince me. Wilt thou 
se rendre on convainc 
remember the engagement that thou makest 1 W'hat will not he 
se souvenir de prendsP Que 

reproach (himself for) 1 We shall not (forget ourselves) (so far as) 
se rtprocher a lui-meme ? s'oublier jusque 

to : (be wanting) 'in respect towards 'him. Will you employ the 

manquer A de * lui. se servir de 

means I (point out) to you 1 Will not these flowers fade 1 

que indiquer * f. sefetrir? 

Future anterior. — Shall I have betrayed myself] Wilt thou 

se trahir moi-mime ? 
not have (degraded thyself) in his eyes ] He will have (been proud) of 

s'avilir a s'enorgueillir 

this trifling advantage. We shall have (fatigued ourselves) 

faible avantage m. se fatiguer 

(to no purpose). In the end, you will have (been undeceived.) Will 

inutilement. a fin f. se desabuser. 

your children have (loved each other) (too much) 1 
s'entr 1 aimer trop ? 

Conditional present. — Should I (suffer myself) to (be drawn) 

se laisser * entratner 
into the party of the rebels 1 Wouldst 2 thou be 2 (so easily) 

parti m. de si pen de chose 

'frightened ? Would not the nation submit to 3 so 4 just ! a 2 law ? 
s'effrayer ? f. se soumeitre 

We should not rejoice to see the triumph of guilt. Would 

se plaire voir triomphe art. crime m. 
you (dishonour yourselves) by 2 such ! an action ] Would those 
se dishonorer tel 



96 EXERCISES ON THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 

lords (avail themselves) of their birth and fortune, 

seigneur se prevaloir de naissance f. de leurs richesses 

(in order to) hurt our feelings 1 

pour /aire violence a sentiment ? 

Past. — Should I not (have devoted myself) entirely to the service 

se dtvouer entierement 
of my country ? (Had it not been for) thy carelessness, thou wouldst 

pays m. sans insouciance f. 

certainly have (grown rich). Would this pleasing hope have vanished 
s'enrichir * doux espoirm s'evanouir 

so soon] Should we have (degraded ourselves) to 2 such ] a degree] 

se degrader point m. 

You would have (reduced yourselves) to every kind of want. 

se reduire toute sorte pi. privation f. pi. 

They would have (been drowned) if (they had not had assistance). 
se noyer on ne les avait secourus. 

Imperative. — man, remember that thou art mortal. Do not 

se souvenir 
flatter (thyself that thou wilt succeed easily). Lotus take an 
te promets un succes facile. se vendue 

2 exact 'account of our actions. Let Us not deceive ourselves. 

cornpte se seduire nous-memes, 

(Rest yourself) under the shade of this tree. Do not (expose 

Se reposer a ombre s'exposer 

yourself) so rashly. 
* t emir air ement. 

Subjunctive present. — (I must) rise to-morrow at an ear- 

llfaut que se lever de meil* 

Iier hour. I wish that thou mayst be better. (I wish him to) 

leur heure f. souhaiter se porter mieux. Je veux qiCil 

(conduct himself) better. Is it not essential that we should contain 

se conduire essentiel se conienir 

ourselves] They wish that you should (accustom yourselves) 
* On desire sliabituer 

early to labor. It is time that they should 

de bonne heure art. travail m. 
(have relaxation) from the fatigue of business. 
se delasser f. art. f. pi. 

Preterit. — Can I have (been deceived) so grossly 1 

Se peut-il que se tromper grossierement ? 

It is astonishing that thou hast determined to stay. It is not said that 

ctonnant se decider rester. On* dit 

he interfered in this business. It will never (be believed) that we have 

se mfier de On cro-ira 

(conducted ourselves) so ill. It is not suspected that you have 

se comporter mat. On * soupcontie 

(disguised yourselves) so ingeniously. It is not feared that they 

se de'guiser adroitement. On * craint 

have behaved ill. 
se conduire 
Imperfect. — They required that I should (go to bed) at ten o'clock. 
On exigeait se coucher a heure. 



EXERCISES ON THE PASSIVE VERBS. 97 

They wish that thou shouldst walk oftener. Did they not 
On voudrait se promener On 

wish that he should practise fencing] Was it necessary that 

voulait s'exercer a fair e des armesP 

we should (make use) of this method 1 Did they wish that you should 
se servir moyen m. voulait 

complain without reason 1 ? Did they not wish them 

se plaindre on desire H. que Us 

(to make more haste) j 
se hater S. davantage ? 

Pluperfect. — Would they have wished that I had (revenged 

voulu se vender 

myself) 1 I could have wished that thou hadst (shewn thyself) 

desirer se montrer 

(more accommodating). I could have wished that this painter had 

moins difficile. voulu peintre 

(been less negligent.) Would you have wished that we should have 

se negliger moins. voulu 

(ruined ourselves) in the 2 public 'opinion, (in order to) satisfy your 

se perdre f. pour satisfaire 

resentment 1 I could have wished perhaps that you had (applied 

ressentiment ? desirer peut-etre s' appliquer 

yourselves) more to your studies. We could have wished that they 

* davantage 

had (extricated themselves) more skilfully from the difficulties 
se tirer adroit ement emb arras 

(in which) they (had involved themselves). 
ou s'etaient mis. 



Conjugation of the Passive Verbs. 

266. There is but one mode of conjugating passive verbs: it is by 
adding to the verb ttre, through all the moods and tenses, the participle 
past of the verb active, which then must agree in gender and number 
with the subject ; as, 

Je suis aime, or aimee I am loved. 

tu etais estime, or estimee thou toast esteemed. 

ce roi fut cheri de son peuple that kimg was beloved by his people. * 

elle fut toujours cherie she was always beloved. 

mon pere fut respecte my father was respected. 

ma mere fut revere e my mother was revered. 

nous serons loues or louees we shall be praised. 

vous en serez blames, or blame'es you will be blamed for it. 

ils seroient craints et redoutes they would be feared and dreaded. 

je voudraisque les portes fussent? j7 7 

ouvertes S ww/l doors were opened. 

tu en avais ete averti, or avertie thou hadst been apprized of it, 

lorsqu'il eut ete mordu when he had been bitten. 

je soupgonne que la ruse aura ete \ I suspect the artifice will have been 

decouverte 5 discovered. 

vous auriez ete apersus, or apercues you would have been perceived 



98 EXERCISES ON THE NEUTER AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 

bien qu'elles aient ete reconnues although they -were recognised. 

supposez quo les lumieres eussent ~) .. ,. 7 . , . . 7 , . . 
f 1 ,., /, . > suppose the lights had been put out. 

ete eteintes j 

267. In the following exercises upon the verbs, the tenses will now 
be promiscuously intermixed *. — 

EXERCISE ON THE PASSIVE VERBS. 
That young lady is so mild, so polite, and so kind, that she is 
jeune demoiselle doux, honiute, bon, 

beloved by every body. He performed with (so much) ability, that 

aime de jouer J. taut de intelligence, 

he was universally applauded. He is known by nobody. How many 

J. applaudi. connu de Que de 

countries, unknown to the ancients, have been discovered by 2 modern 

pays, inconnu decouvert art. 

•navigators 7 
navigateur m. 

Of the Neuter Verbs. 

See Verbs, page 160 and following. 

268. Remark. — The participle of these neuter verbs, which take etre 
for auxiliary, must accordingly agree both in gender and number with 
their subject. 

EXERCISE ON THE NEUTER VERBS. 

They came to see us in the greatest haste. When 

G. * voir avec empressement. 'Quand est-ce que 

did they arrive ] That estate fell to his lot. He fell 

arriver G. terre i.hd est echu en * partage. tomberG. 

from his horse, but happily received only a slight contusion on the knee. 
* il G. ne que leger f. a genou m. 

Of the Impersonal or Unipersonal Verbs. 

See Verbs, page 123 and following. 

269. Observe that, in impersonal verbs, il has no relation to a substan- 
tive, as may be seen by the impossibility of substituting a noun in its place, 

EXERCISE ON THE UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 

Does it rain this morning] Did it hail 2 last ] night] Il 

pleuvoir matin m. grtler J . art. dernier f. 

does not snow. I thought it had thundered. Does it not 

neiger. croyais que tonnerl. 

lighten] Do you think it freezes? It is a '-'remarkable 'thing. It 

iclcdrer ? croyez que geler ? Ce Ce 

was a 2 terrible •hurricane. It is ten o'clock. It (was not my friend's fault) 

J. ourugan. heure. ne tenir pas a man ami 

that (it) was not so. It will freeze long. I do not think 
la chot>e S. ne ainsi. long-temps. crois 

so, it seems, (on the contrary), that it thaws. It (is fit) to act 
le; eembler au contraire dtgeler. connenir da 



EXERCISES OX FALLOTR AND Y AVOIR. 90 

so. It (was of great importance) to succeed. Would it be proper 
ainsi. importer H. beaucoup de reussir. a propo* 

to write to your friends ] It appears that he has not attended to that 
de ecrire s'occuper de 

business. Perhaps it (would be) better (to give up) the undertaking. 

vaudrait abandonner entreprise. 

It (was sufficient to) know his opinion. 
siijfisait de 

EXERCISE ON THE VERB FALLOIR. 

See Verbs, page 136. 

270. Observe, that all expressions implying necessity, obligation, or 
Ldered by falloir as, I want a new grammar, il me fant 



z/u. UBsEfiVii, uiai an expressions 
want, may be rendered by falloir as. 
une grammaire neuve 



You must speak to him about that affair. It was necessary for him 
de f. H. que * il 

to consent to that bargain. We were obliged to (set out) immediately. 
* S. marche vol. J. partir S. sur le champ. 

Children should learn every day something by heart. Shall I suffer 
art. N. S. L. Q. 

patiently 2 such ] an 2 insult ] He must have been a blockhead not to 

O. S. sot pour 

understand 2 such ? easy 'rules. (How much) do you want ? He 
comprendre des si regie f. Combien 

does what is requisite. Do that as it (should be). What must he 
fait Faites F. Que lui F. 

have for his trouble 1 You are the man I want Do not give me 

peine f. que F. 

anymore bread; I have already more (than I want). (I n?ed 
de en dejh qiCilne tn 'enfant. R ne rte 

not) ask you whether you will come. I do not think that it is neces- 

faut pas A. si crois il Q. 

sary to be a conjurer to guess his motives. I could not suspect 

* * sorcier pour deviner motif. pouvais soupcouner 

that I ought (to ask) pardon for a fault I have not committed. 

S. A. de faute f. que commise. 

EXERCISE ON Y AVOIR, THERE TO BE. 

See Verbs, page 20 and following. 

271. N. B. This verb in English is used in the plural, when followed 
by a substantive plural ; in French it remains always in the singular. 

There must be a great difference of age between those two persons. 
U doit f. 

There being (so many) 2 vicious 'people in this world, is it astonishing 

taut de gens m. pi. etonnant 

that there are so many persons who become the victims of the corruption 

Q. devenir perversitt fl 

of the age \ (It is a thousand to one) that he will not succeed. 

siecle m. II y a mille a parier contre un viussir. 



J 00 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

There would be more happiness if (every one) knew how to moderate 
bonheur chacun savait * * modtrer 

his desires. I did not think that there could be (any thing) to blame 

desir. croyais S. rien reprendre 

in his conduct. There would not be so many duels (did people) 
conduits f. si Con 

reflect that one of the first obligations of a Christian is to forgive 
re'Jlechir H. f. f. Chretien de pavdonner 

injuries. Could there be a king more happy than this, who 
art. Pourrait-il celui, 

has always been the father of his subjects ? 

sujei P 

EXERCISE ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE 
FIRST CONJUGATION. 

See Verbs, s*en alter, to go away, page 112 ; also page 122. 

272. The imperative va of alter, to go, takes an s when followed by 
y ; as vas-y, go thither : however, it takes no s when the y is followed 
by a verb ;. as va y donner ordre, go and order that affair. 

273; Je vas, I -go, and je men vas, I am going, although authorized, 
are but seldom used by any writer. 

Will you go this evening into the country ? I am going to pay 
soir a campagne f. * faire 

some visits, and if I be 2 early ] (at liberty) I shall certainly 

F. de bonne henre libre 
go home. Go there with thy brother. Go and do that 

s'en ailer chcz-moi. * faire 

errand. Go there, and put (every thing) in order. Let him go 

commission f. * mettre tout en 

lo church on (holidays). By being loaded with scents, 

art. eglise f. * les jour de fete. A force de A. charge de odeurf, 

and particularly amber, he (offends the smell). They have woven 

surtout d\nnbre, sentir mauvais. tissu 

silk and cotton together, and (made) a very pretty stuff. I shall 

m. en ont fait etoffe f. 

send 2 spring lowers to those ladies. I would go to Rome, if I 
printanier f. dame. 

could. We would (send back) our horses. Why do they go 
le pouvais. Pourquoi 

away so soon ] My brother and my sister went yesterday to 

ma J. 

Windsor. I will not go (any more) (a hunting). 
plus a la chasse. 

EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE 
SECOND CONJUGATION. 

See Vkhbs, page 124 and following. 

May the name of that good king be -[blessed from generation to gener- 
nom m. be'nir en 

t See page 87, art 2'Ji. 



EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 101 

ation! These trees blossomed twice (every year). The arts and 
H. deux fois tons les ans. 
sciences -[-flourished at Athens in the time of Pericles. Horace 
art. H. a At /lines Pericles. 

and Virgil -[flourished under the reign of Augustus. We discovered 
Virgile H. sous regne Auguste. d'courrir 

from the top of the mountain a vast plain full of 2 flowery 

haut plaiue f. rempli JlenHssant 

'meadows. The empire of the Babylonians was long a flourishing 

pre' m. BabyJoniens J. bong-temps * 

one. We did not ^hate the man, but his vices. Does she really {hate 
* 

that vain pomp and all the parade of grandeur 1 
pompe f. appareil art. 

Take that water off the fire ; it boils too fast. Do not let 
Retirer f. de dessus m. elle boiiillir fort. laisser 

the 4 soup -(boil away) ^so much). That sauce (has boiled away) 

ebouillir taut f. 

(too much). Boil that meat again; it has not 2 boile<l 

trop. Faites r ebouillir viande f. * f. 

(long enough). He runs faster than I. He ran about uselessly 

assez. phis vlte moi. J. * inutilement 

all the morning. We ran at the voice of that honest man, and assisted 

matinee f. J. f. J. 

him. (The moment) he saw us in danger, he ran to us and delivered us. 

Des que vit en J. * J. 

By 'so A whimsical ] a -conduct, should we not contribute to our destruction 1 

bizarre concourir perte f 

He discoursed so long on the immortality of the soul, and the certainty / 
J. 5?/?' certitude f./ 

of another life, that he left nothing unsaid. If we (were to ac^ 

laisser J. en arriere, agir H. 

thus), we should certainly incur the displeasure of our parents. 
ainsi disgrace f. / 

would not have recourse to 5 so ^base 'a 2 method. Will men 

bus mo yen m. art. 

always run after shadows 1 
chimire f. 

He (was near) losing his life in that rencounter. He (was near) 
faillir J. perdre * art. rencontre t failllr 

falling into the snare which was laid for him. His strength 
donnev A. piegem. qiCon avait tenda * lui. * art. f. pi. 

fails him (every day). Let us have something 2 to 'eat 

defaillent lui tons les joins. Donnez-nous * munger 

J direct!y ; we are fainting with fatigue and hunger. I cannot meet 
v:te ; d'faillons de de faim. ne puis rencontrer 

him ; he shuns me. When (we have no employ), we endea 

fiiir on ne sait pas s'occuper, on cher- 

vor to fly from ourselves. Would he not avoid flatterers, if he 
che se fair * soi-meme. fuir art. Jlatteur m. 

t See Verbs, page 128, \ See Verbs, page 129 

i2 



102 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

knew all their falsehood] He died by a 2 (very painful) disease 
connattre H. fausseU f. de cruel maiadie f 

She died of grief (for the loss of) her son. He (is dying.) She 

J. chagrin m. d } avoir perdu se mourir, 

was expiring with grief, when the fear of death (at last) wrested 

se mourir de craintei. art. enfin arracherS. 

her secret from her. 
m. * lui. 

(Send for) the physician, and follow exactly his advice. Go and 
Envoyez querir medecin, suivez * 

fetch my cane. Every day he acquired celebrity by works 

canne f. Tons les jours H. f. des ouvrage m. 

calculated to fix the attention of an 2 enlightened public. That I 

fait pour eclaire 

would acquire riches at the expense of my honesty ! He had acquired 

S. depensm.]A. probite f. 

by his merit great influence over the opinions of his contemporaries. 
une f. sur opinion sing. contemporain. 

I have inquired about that man (every where), and have not 

de homme-la partout je 

(been able) (to hear any thing of him). Who 3 has Requested 

pu en avoir de nouvelles. Qui est-ce qui requerir 

2 it of ! you 1 Sesostris, king of Egypt, conquered a great part of Asia. 
en * J. art. 

The formidable Empire which Alexander conquered did not last 

Alexandre I. ne durer pas 

longer than his life. I have heard that important 'news. 

plus long-temps f. oiiir-dire sing. 

He dressed himself (in haste), and (went out) immediately. I wish 

se vetir a la hate sortir J. sur-le- champ, voudrais 

she would dress the children with more care. If his fortune 

que vetir S. de 

permitted 'him, he would clothe all the poor of his parish. Two 
It bermettait lui, paroisse f. 

strvants clothed him with his 2 ducal ] mantle. He only passed 

domestiq'ie revetir H. de manteau m. ne que H. 

for a traveller ; but lately he has assumed the character of an envoy. 

voyageur ; depuis peu revetir un * envoy e. 

It begins to be very warm; it is time to (throw off some clothing). 

commencer faire chaud ; de se divitir. 

I will gather with pleasure some of these flowers and fruits, 

quelques-unes de ces 

since you wish to 2 have 'some. Do not gather those peaches 

puisque seriez bien aise de en f. 

before they are ripe. That is a country where they neither 
avant que ne Q. mur. Ce pays ou on ne 

reap corn nor gather grapes. We shall collect in 2 ancient 

recueillir ni bit ni * vin. recueillir 

history ^important *and 'valuable 'facts. He received us in :; the 

precieux fait, accueillir dela la 

3most 1 pohte 'manner. Poverty, misery, sickness, per 

mantere f art. f. art f. art. maladie f. art. 



EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 103 

secution, in a word, all the misfortunes in the world, have (fallen upon) 

f. en malheur m. de accueillir 

him. You will give six inches to that cornice ; it will project 
voulez donner ponce cornichei. elle saillir 

too much. That balcony projected too much; it darkened the 

balcon m. H. obscurcir H. 

dining-room. When Moses struck the rock, there gushed out 
Quand Mo'ise frapper J. rocher m. il saillir* X. 

of it a spring of 2 (fresh running) ] water. The blood gushed from 

en. sonrce f. vif f. H. 

his vein with impetuosity. We shall assault the enemy to-morrow in 

veine f. pi. demain 

their entrenchments. Were we not overtaken by a horrible storm 1 

retranchement. J. assailli tempete f, 

At every word they said to him concerning his son, the good 
A chaque que on disait * de 

(old man) leaped for joy. Shall you not shudder with fear! 

vieillard tressaillir H. de joie. tressaillir peur f. 

EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE 
THIRD CONJUGATION. 

See Verbs, page 134 and following. 

274. Important direction. — Whenever the student has a French verb 
ending with oir to translate, the first thing he must do is to look for it 
among the verbs composing the list given page 162. If, the verb looked 
for is not to be found in the above mentioned list, he must conjugate it on 
recevoir, to receive, page 66 ; and if it be found in the list, he will be 
directed on which verb to conjugate it. 

I had apartments x that I liked ; I will endeavor to have them 
H. un logement sing. aimer H. veux essayer de le sing, 

again. Beware of falling. How has he fallen into poverty ? 

Prenez-garde A. Comment dechoir en pauvrete ? 

Since the publication of his last work, he has much fallen in the 
Jjepuis dernier dechoir dans 

esteem of the public. If he do not alter his conduct, he will 

changer F. de * 
decline (every day) in his reputation and credit. He has 

dechoir de jour en jour de f. de son m. 

put in the lottery, and he hopes that a capital prize will fall 
mis a loterie f. * art. gros lot m. echoir 

(to his share). That bill of exchange has expired. The first term 

lid lettref. change echoir. *ermem. 

expires (at Midsummer). You have drawn on me a bill of ex- 

d la Saint Jean. tirer sur moi 

change ; when is it payable 1 I did not believe that (I must) so 

echoir F. croyais il me fallut 

soon (have taken) that journey. He must have sunk und\_r 

faire voyage m. a fallu q\Cil succomber 8 

the efforts of (so many) enemies. 
tant de 



104 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

The spring which moves 2 the 'whole machine is very ingenious, 
ressort m. tout f. 

though very simple. It was passion which moved him to that 
quoique Ce H. art. f. J. 

action. Can you doubt that the soul, though it is spiritual, moves 

f. Pouvez douter f. * * spiritnelne Q. 

the body (at pleasure) 1 That is a man whom nothing moves. We 

a sa volonte ? Ce emouvoir. 

had scarcely lost 4 sight 3 of Hand 2 when there arose a 
H, a peine perdu vue f. la terre f. que il s* emouvoir 
violent tempest. We were moved with fear and pity, When 
grande tempete f. J. emus de crainte f. de pitie f. Quand 

the famous d'Aguesseau was promoted to the dignity of chancellor, all 
celebre . J. f. chancelier 

France shewed the greatest joy. That bishop 2 well 
art. f. en timoigner J. f. eveque 

'deserved, by his talents and by his virtues, that the king should promote 
miriter H. S. 

him to the dignity of primate. The people think that it rains 
primat. peuple sing, croit 

frogs and insects at certain seasons. It will not rain 
grenouille f. insecte m. en temps m. 

to-day, but I (am fearful) (of its) raining to-morrow. 
d'aujourdliui craindre quHl ne Q. 



When he arrived at home he (was quite exhausted). The 
flit arrive chez-lui n'en pouvoir H. plus. 

minister had (so many) people at his levee, that I could not 
ministre H. tant de monde a audience f. G. 

speak to him. Are 2 you 'afraid that he will not accomplish 

* craignez pouvoir Q. venir a bout de 

that affair 1 I know that he is not your friend, but I know likewise 

savoir de pi. aussi 

that he is a man of probity. Let them snow that their pardon depends 
* Men. savoir grace dependre 

on their submission. I could wish that he knew his lessons a 
de soumission. desirer N. savoir Q. 

little better. Let us see if this 2 (new-fashioned) ] gown becomes 

voir (fun nouveau goOt robe seoir 

you or not. Be assured that 2 too s gaudy 'colors will not become 

non. art. voyant f. seoir 

you. The head-dress which that lady wore became her very ill. 

coiffure f. que porter H. H. lui 

These colors become you so well, you (would do wrong) to wear any 

*C. avoir N. tort de en porter 

others Set that child in this arm-chair, and take care lest 

Asseoir m. fauteuil m. prenez-garJe que 

he fill. I will sit down on the top of that hill, whence 

ne Q. s'asseoir sommet m. coteau m. 

I shall discover a prospect (no less) magnificent than diversified. 

decouvrir sce?ie f. aussi magnijique varii . 

We (were seated) on the banks of the Thames, whence we were 
s'asscoir I. bord m. Tamise f. 



EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 



105 



contemplating myriads of vessels, which bring (every year) the 

H. milliers vaisseau, apporter tons les una 

riches of the two hemispheres. 



See the 2 admirable 'order of the universe : does it not announce a 
Voir m. 

2 supreme 'architect! Has he again seen with pleasure his country and 

artisan m. revoir p^h' s 

nis friends 1 (Had he a glimpse of) the dawn of this fine day } To 

entrevoir aurore Pour 

finish their affairs, it would be necessary for them to (see one another ) 

falloir N. que * ils * s' 'entrevoir 8. 

1 clearly foresaw (from that time) all the obstacles he would have to 
Men prevoir J. des lors m. 

surmount. Would you have the judge (put off) the execution 
surmonter. H. * que surseoir S. 

of the sentence that he had pronounced 1 I shall not put off the 
arret rendu ? 

pursuit of that affair. If men do not provide (for it), God 

pour suite f. pi. art. pourvoir y 

will provide for it. Would this book (be good for) nothing? You 

valoir N. 
have not paid for this ground more than it is worth ; (are you afraid) 

* terre f. f. ne valoir F. craignez-vous 

that it is not worth six hundred pounds 1 Let us take arbitrators. 

que Q. livres sterlings? prenons arbitre. 

One ounce of gold is equivalent to fifteen ounces of silver. Doubt 

once f. equivaloir 

not that reason and truth will prevail (at last). I can 

art. art. * ne prevaloir Q. a la longue. pouvoir 

and will tell the truth. If you are willing, he will be willing 
je vouloir dire le vouloir le 

too. Let us resolve to resist our passions, and we shall be sure 
aussi. veuillons combattre 

to conquer them. (Be so good as) to lend me your grammar. 
de vaincre veuillez * preter 

EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE 
FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

See Verbs, page 141 and following. 

Wood which (is burned) (resolves itself) into ashes and 
art. bo is m. on brute \se resoudre en cendre f. en 

smoke. Have they resolved on peace or war 1 The fog 
fumie f. on rSsoudre * art. f. art. f. brouillard m* 

(has resolved itself) into ram. Could that judge 2 thus 2 lightly 

se resoudre G. pluie f. si legerement 

'absolve the guilty 1 2 Strong 'waters dissolve metals. 

absoudre N. coupable m. pi. art. Fort f. dissoudre art. 



t See page 91 art. 265. 



106 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS 

'Those -'drugs (were dissolved) (before they were put) into that 

drogue on a dlssmis avant que de les mettre A. 
medicine. My sister was sewing ail day yesterday. That piece is not 
reinedem. coudreS. * hier m. 

well sewed ; it must (be sewed over again). Unpick that lace, 

la recoudre JJecoudre dentelle 1 

and sew it again very carefully. Does he set a great value 

avec beaucoup de soin. mettre prix m. 

upon riches ] I never admitted those principles. Has he committed 
aux admettre J. commettre 

that fault 7 If he (would take my advice), he would resign his 

faute f. m?en croyait se de mettre de 

charge in favor of his son. He put his arm (out of joint) 

f. en se demettre J. le bras m. 

yesterday. I will omit nothing that depends on me to serve 

omettre de ce qui dependre L. de pour 

you. God frequently permits the wicked to prosper. 

souvent permettre que mediant m. pi. * prosperer Q. 
Put this book in its place again. Under whatever form of govern- 

Remettre a f. * Sous quelque gouverne- 

ment you may live, remember that your first duty is to be 

ment m. que vivre, se souvenir devoir m. de 

obedient to the laws. It frequently happens that fathers transmit to 
aoumis arriver art. transmettre 

their children both their vices and their virtues. He has long 

et long-temps 

meddled w T ith 'public -affairs; but his endeavors have not 

$ entremettre de art. effort 

been crowned with success. 
couronner de art. in. 



I took great pains ; but, at last, I ground all the coffee. 

prendre J. beaucoup enfin moudre J. cafe m. 

(irind those razors with care. Those knives (are just) ground. 

hnoudre rasoirm. c out eau in. viennent d'etre 

This grain is not sufficiently ground ; it should be (ground again). 

assez il faut le remoudre. 

I wish that you would take courage. What news have you learned 1 

von loir Q. f. pi. 

Philosophy comprehends logic, ethics, physics, 

art. comprendre art. loq-ique f. zxt.morale f. s. art. physique f.s. 

and metaphysics. It is (with difficulty) that he (divests himself) 

art. metaphysique f. s. Ce dijfi cilement que se d( prendre 
of his opinions. He has forgotten all that he knew. I fear 
di sapprendre ce que savoir H. 
you will undertake a task above your strength. Could 

mie ne entreprendre Q. tdchef.au-dessusde f. pi. 

he have been mistaken so grossly 1 I reproved him continually 

sefromperO. grossieremeni reprendreYL. sans cesse 

for his faults, but (to no purpose). We surprised the enemy, and 
dtfaut, inuti'cDicnt. surprendre J. pi. 

cut them to pieces. In the middle of the road the axletree of oui 
tailleri, en a chemin essieu m. 



EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 10? 

carriage broke. Bad company corrupts the minds of young people. 

carrosseserompje J. art. f. pi. corrompre esprit s. gens^A. 

Why do you interrupt your brother, when you see him busy ] 
Pourquoi intervnmpre occupe ? 

3 (For a long while) 'we followed that method, which was only 
long-temps saivre J. t f. H. ne que 

calculated to mislead us. What (is the consequence) 1 See the errors 
propre eg aver Que s'ensuivre 

that (have sprung) from this proposition, which appeared so true. 

se sont ensuivies f. H. 

We pursued our course, when some cries, which came from the 

suivre H. chemin, lorsque des cri, * sortis 

midst of the forest excited terror in our souls. The Greeks 

fond m. for%t f. porter J. art. f. ame. Grec 

vanquished the Persians at Marathon, Salamis, Platea, and Mycale. 

Perse a a Salamine, a Platee, a 

I have at last convinced him, by 2 such s powerful 'reasons, of the 

convaincre des si fort f. 

greatness of his fault, that I (have no doubt) but he will 
enormite faute f. ne doute nullement que ne 

repair it. It is during winter that they thrash corn in 

reparer Q. Ce pendant art. on battre ble 

2 cold 'countries. The enemy was so completely beaten in that 
les fro id pays m. pi. battre 

engagement, that he was forced to abandon thirty leagues of the country. 
rencontre f. de lieue f. * pays. 

The cannon (beat down) the tower. They were fighting with 

canon abattre J. tour f. combattre un 

2 unexampled 'fury when a 2 panic 'terror made them take 

sans exemple acharneinent m. panique f. faired, leur 

flight, and dispersed them in an instant. Beat these mattresses 
art. fuite f. J. m. Rebattre matelas m. 

again. Happy are those who live in solitude ! 2 Long 'live that 

vivre art. retraite f. Long-temps Q. 
good king ! He did not long survive a person who was so dear to him. 
survivre a f. 
Fathers live again in their children. He was in a strange dejection 
art revivre accablemeiU 

of mind ; but the news which he has received (has revived) him. 
esprit ; f. pi. f. pi. out fait revivre A. 

What will you (have him do) ? Do not make (so much) 
Que vouloir que il fasse ? tunt 

noise. Do they never exact 1 That woman mimicked all the 
de bruit. surfaire ? contrefaire H. 

persons whom she had seen ; this levity rendered her odious. It was 
f. que f. pi. legeretef. J. f. Ce J, 

with difficulty he (divested himself) of the false opinions which 

peine que se defaire f. on 

had been given him in his infancy. Could it be possible that we should 

* f.pl. lui f. 

not again make a journey to Paris, Rome, and Naples \ He 
refaire S. art. * voyage de de de 



108 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

says that you have offended him, and that, if you do not satisfy him 
dit offense satisfaire 

quickly, he will find means to satisfy himself. 

pro?npte?ne?it, art. moyen sing, de se satisfaire lui-meme. 

(Every night) she milked her sheep, which gave her a 2 (great 
Tons les soirs traire H. bvehis pi. H. lui abort' 

quantity) of -wholesome 'milk. Have you milked your goats? Are 
dant * ct sain lait m. chevre f. 

the cows milked ] Salt is good to entice pigeons. You 

vac he art. Sel m. pour attraire art. m. 

will never know the nature of bodies, if you do not abstract their 

connaltre art. abstraire 

2 necessary Qualities from those which are inherent (in them). The 
celles leur. 

least thing (diverts his attention). Will you not extract that 
moindre le distraire F. extraire 

charming passage 1 Have you darned your gown 1 Should he 

m. ventraire 

not redeem that land 1 What ! would you (have me screen) 
retraire Quoi ! F. que je soustraie 

those (guilty persons) from the rigor of the laws ! 
coupable m. pi. a rigueur f. 

Was not Virgil born at Mantua 1 It is from that 2 poisoned 'source 
naitreJ. JVLantoue? Ce empoisonne f. 

that have arisen all the 2 cruel 'wars that have desolated the universe. 
que naitre f. pi. f. desoler 

The fable says that, (as soon as) Hercules had (cut off) one of the heads 
f. dit aussitbt que H.ercule couper tete f. 

of the hydra, 2 others '(sprang up). While their 2 united 

hydre f. d'autres il en renaitre H. Tandis que reuni 

'flocks fed on the 2 tender 'and 4 flowery 'grass, they 

troupeau m. paitre H. * feuri herbe f. 

sang under the shade of a tree the sweets of 2 rural 'life, 

chanter H. a ombre douceur f. art. champitre f. 

Your horses have not fed to-day: (y ou must have them fed). 

repaitre ifaujourd-hui ilfaut les /aire repaitre A, 
He is a man who thirsts 2 after nothing 'but blood and slaughter. 
Ce ne se repaitre de * que de carnage m. 

The thunder which roared from afar announced a 

tonnerre m- bruyait dans art. lointain m. H. 

2 dreadful 'storm. They heard roar the waves of an 'agitated 

terrible orage m. On entendre H. bntive A. fot m. agile 

•sea. That street is too noisy for those who love retirement and 

mer f. rue i. bruyant art. retraite 1*. 

study. I (have a glimpse of) something that shines through 

ait. entrevoir qvelque chose a travers 

those trees. A ray of hope shone upon us in the midst of the 

rayon m. luire J. * a milieu 

misfortunes which overwhelmed us. (Ever}' thing) is well rubbed in 

malheur m. accabler H. Tout frotU 

that house: everything shines, even the floor. Would he not 
y rtiuire, jvsque a planchcr m. 



EXERCISES OX THE IRREGULAR VERBS 109 

have injured you in that affair 1 Jesus Christ was circumcised eight 

nuire circoncis 

days after his birth. Will you preserve these peaches with sugar, 

naissancei. confire a art. sucre m. 

with honey, or with brandy 1 Did you pickle cucumbers. 

a art. miel m. a art. eau-de-vie f. concomhre m. 

purslane, and sea-fennel ] If he loses his lawsuit, all his 

pourpier m. perce-pierre f. proces m. 

property will not suffice. 

bien siiffire. 

Always speak truth, but with discretion. Never contradict 
dire art. f. 
(any one) in public. You thought you were serving me in speaking 
per sonne en penser G. * * A. en parler 

thus : well (let it be so) ; you shall not be contradicted. What ! 
ainsi: eh! bien, soit ; r£en pas dedire. Quoi ! 

would you forbid him all communication with his friends 1 That 

interdire f. 

woman who slandered (every one) soon lost all kind of 

H. de tout le monde, J. espece f. 

respect. You had foretold that event. Let us curse no one ; 

consideration. ne per sonne ,- 

let us remember that our law forbids us to curse even those who 

se rappeler defendre * de 

persecute us. Write (every day) the reflections which you make 
perse'cuter ecrire tons les jours 

on the books you read. Did he not read that -interesting 'history with 

lire. J. 

(a great deal) of pleasure ? God is an infinite 'being, who is circum- 

beaucoup etrem. ne 

scribed neither by time nor place. Will you not describe 

ni art. ni par art. lieu m. pi. 

in that episode the '^dreadful ! tempest |vhich assailed your hero? ' l Get 
m. horrible f. J. faire 

Hhose ^soles 5 and 6 whitings -fried. If you wish to form your taste, 

ess merlan frireA. vouloir * 

(read over and over) unceasingly the ancients. He was elected by a 

lisez et relisez sans cesse J. a 

great majority of voices. We have laughed heartily, and have 

f. rire de bon cosur, nous 

resolved to (go on). He did not answer him (any thing:) but be 
r solu de continuer. ne repondre J. lui rien 

smiled at him, as a sign of approbation, in the 2 kindest 'manner. 
sourire J. * lui, en * de gracieux air m. 

Seated under the shade of palm-trees, they were milking their 
Assis a art. palmier 

goats and ewes, and ^'merrily 'drinking that nectar, which 

chevre f. leurs brebis f. avec joie m. 

(was renewed) every day. Should they not have drunk with ire 1 
se renouveler H. boire a art. 

This window does not shut well ; when you have made some alterations 
clore M. reparation f. 

K 



110 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

(to it), it will shut better. He had scarcely closed his eyes, when the 

y f. vlore mieux. a peine I. les que 

uoise which they made at his door awoke him. Have they not 

que on H. a reveiller J. on 

enclosed the suburbs within the city ] Will you enclose your park 
enclave faubourg m. dans ville f. pare 

with a wall or a hedge ] Put the eggs of those silk-worms 
de murm.de haie f. Mettez ceufm. vers a soiem. 

in the sun, that they may hatch. Those flowers just blown, 
au soleil m. • ecloreQ. nouvellement e 'close , 

spread the sweetest fragrance. When did they conclude this treaty 1 
"epandre doux parfumm. G. traite m. 

His enemies managed so w'ell, that he was unanimously excluded from 

faire J. J. unanimement 

the company. Did you think me capable of s so 4 black ' an 2 act? 

compagnie f croire F. noir trait m. 

He possesses some kind of knowledge; but (not so much as he thinks). 

quelque espece savoir il S* en fait trop accroire. 



CHAPTER VI. 
OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 



275. Prepositions, which are so called from being /jrefixed to the nouns 
which they govern, serve to connect words with one another, and to show 
the relation between them. Thus, in this phrase, le fruit de Varbre, the 
fruit of the tree, de expresses the relation between fruit and arbre. 
Likewise in this, utile a Vhomme, useful to man ; a forms the relation 
between the noun homme and the adjective utile. De and a are preposi- 
tions, and the word to which the^ are prefixed is called their regimen. 

276. There are different kinds of prepositions. 

277. Some denote place, as : 
Chez. 77 est chez-lui, he is at home. 

Dans. II se promene dans le jar din, he is walking in the garden. 
Dkvant. II est toujour s devant mes yeux, he is always before my eyes 
Derriere. line regarde jamais derriere /7«', he never looks behin d him. 
Parmi. Que de fous parmi les homines ! how many fools among men ! 
Sous. La taupe vit sous terre, the mole lives under ground. 
Sur. // a le chapeau sur la tete, he has his hat on his head. 
Vers. Vaimant se tourne vers le nord, the loadstone points towards 
the north. 

EXERCISE ON THESE PREPOSITIONS. 
We find less 2 real 'happiness in an 2 elevated 'condition than in a 
On de bonheur f. 

^middling 'state. One is never truly peaceful, but at home. 

moyen vtritablement tranquille que sot. 

He walked before me to serve me as a guide. There was a 2 delightful 
marcher pour de * H. 



OF THE PREPOSITIONS. Ill 

Jgrove behind his house. Among (so many) different 'nations, 
bosquet m. ta?it de 

(there is not one) that has not a 2 religious 'worship. Nature 

il rCy en a pas une Q. culte m. art. 

displays her riches with magnificence under the 2 torrid 'zone. 
deployer torride f 

s Etemal 2 snows '(are to be seen) on the summit of the Alps. Towards 

f. OTi voit sommet Alpes. 

the north, nature assumes a 2 gloomy and wild 'aspect, 
art. prend. triste sauvage aspect m. 

278. Some mark order, as : 

Avant. La nouvelle est arrivee avant le courrier, the news is come 

before the courier. 
Apres. II est tvop vain pour marcher apres les autres, he is too proud 

to walk after other people. 
Entre. Elle a son enfant entre les bras, she holds her child in (for 

between) her arms. 
Depuis. Depuis la creation jusqiCa nous, from the creation to the 

present time. 
Des. Des son enfance,from his infancy ; des sa source, from its source. 

EXERCISE. 

We (were up) before (daylight) (in order to) enjoy the 2 mag- 

se lever I. art. jour pour de mar 

nificent 'spectacle of the 2 rising 'sun. After such great faults. 

zrnifique m. levant. de si faute f. 

it only remained for us to repair them (as well as we could). Be- 

ne que rester H. * reparer de noire mieux. 

tween those two mountains runs a s deep 2 hollow 'road. 2 Many 

est pro fond et creux chemin m. 
4 very 5 astonishing 3 events '(have taken place) 6 within these ten years. 

il s'est passe" depuis * 
From my earliest infancy I have had an abhorrence of lying'* 

tendre * horreur art. mensonge m 

279. Some denote union, as : 

Avec. Mfaut savoir avec qui on se lie, we ought to know -with whom 

we associate. 
Durakt. Durant la guerre, during the war; durant fete, auring 

the summer. 
Pendant. Pendant Vhiver,in winter ; pendant lapaix, in time of peace. 

This preposition denotes a duration more limited than durant. 
Outre. Outre des qualites aimables, it faut encore, &c, besides 

amiable qualities, there ought still, &c. 
Suivant. Je me deciderai suivant les cir Constances, I shall determine 

according to circumstances. 
Selon. Le sage se conduit selon les maximes de la raison, a wise 

man acts according to the dictates of reason. 

EXERCISE. 
With wit, politeness, and some (readiness to oblige), one generally 
unpen de prevenance. 



112 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

succeeds in the world. We are fit for meditation during winter 

reussir On est propre a art. f. 

(In the course of) that siege the commandant of the city made some 

Pendant siege m. J. 

2 very Successful 'sallies. Besides the 2 exterior 'advantages of figure 

heureux sortie f. art. 

and the graces of deportment, she possesses an Excellent 'heart, a 

art. maintien m. avoir 

2 correct judgment, and a ^sensible 'soul. Always act according 

sain jugement se conduce 

to the maxims which I have given you. 
* f. inculquer f. pi. 

280. Some express opposition, as : 

Contre. Je plaide contre lui, I plead against him. 
Malgre. II I 'a fait malgre moi, he has done it in spite of me. 
Nonobstast. Nonobstant ce quon lui a dit, not-withstanding what 
has been said to him. 

EXERCISE. 
We cannot long act (contrary to) our own character: notwith- 
savoir N. agir contre * 

standing all the pains we take to disguise it, it (shews itself), and 

que pour se montrer 

betrays us on many occasions. (In vain we dissemble) ; in spite 
trahir en bien nous avons beau fair x ; 

of ourselves, (we are known) at last. 

on nous connait a la longue, 

281. Some express privation or separation, as: 
Sans. Des troupes sans chef troops -without commanders. 
Excepte. Excepte quelques malheureux, except some wretches. 
Hors. Tout est perdu hors Vhonneur, all is lost save honor. 
Hormis. Tous sont entree hormis mon frere, they are all come in 

except my brother. 

EXERCISE. 

(Had it not been for) your care, I should have been ignorant all my 
Sans pi. ttn 

life. All the philosophers of antiquity, except a few, 

art. tres-petit nombre, 

have held the world to be eternal. All laid down their arms, 

croire * * mettre bas let 

except two regiments, who preferred (making their way) through 

se faire A. jour a travert 
the cnemv. Every thing is absurd and ridiculous in that work, 

pi. 
»xcept a chapter or two. 

282. Some denote the end, as : 

Exvers. 77 est charitable envers les pauvres, he is charitable to the 
poor 



OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 113 

Touch ant. H a ecrit touchant cette affaire, he has written respect- 
ing that business. 
Pour. 77 travaille pour le bien public, he labors for the public good. 

EXERCISE. 
I have written to you concerning that business, in which I take the 

a laquelle 
most lively interest ; and as I know your benevolence towards the 
vif connattre bierweillance f. 

unfortunate, I (make not the least doubt) that you (will carefully 
malheureux pi. ne doute nullement ne dormer Q. tons 

attend) (to it), (not so much) for the satisfaction of obliging me, as for 
vos soins y moins A. 

the pleasure of justifying innocence and confounding calumny. 
justifier A. art. de confondre A. art. f. 

283. Others mark the cause and means, as : 

Par. // Vafitchi par ses prieres, he has softened him by his entreaties. 
Moyexnant. II reussira moyennant vos avis, he will succeed by 

means of your counsels. 
Attexdu. // ne pent partir attendu les vents contraires, he cannot 

sail on account of contrary winds. 

EXERCISE. 

Is there any man that has never been softened by tears or dis- 

aucun Q. fiechir art. m dfs- 

armed by submission 1 Through the precautions which we took, 

armer art. que J. 

we avoided the rocks of that 2 dangerous ! coast. Owing to the bad 

J. ecueilm. cote f. 

state | (of my father's health), I shall not travel this year. 

voyager annee f. 

284. The use of the prepositions a, de, en, is very extensive. 

235. A is generally used to express several relations, as destination, 
tendency, place, time, situation, &c, being often a substitute for various 
other prepositions ; ex. : — destination, to : aller a Londres, to go to 
London. — Tendency, to, toward : courir a sa perte, to hasten to one's 
ruin. — Aim, at, for : aspirer a la gloire, to aspire to glory. — Residence, 
a'\ in: ctre a Home, to be at Rome. — Time, at: a midi, at twelve 
o'clock. — Concern, on : a ce sujet, on this subject. — Manner, -with : sup- 
plier a mains jointes, to entreat earnestly.— Means, ivith : peindre a 
Vhuile, to paint in or ivith oil ; ivith : bas a trois fils, three-thread stock- 
ings — that is, ivith three threads. — Situation, at, ivith : etre a son aise, 
to be at ease. — Purpose, for : une table a manger, a dining-table. — Suit- 
ableness, for, to : homme a reussir, a man likely to succeed. — Desert, to : 
crime a ne pas pardonner, a crime not to be forgiven, &c. 

EXERCISE ON THE PREPOSITION a. 
Fathers ? give good counsels and - ? still ! better 2 examples to your 

encore meilleur 

t Translate as if it stood thus :—Ofthe health of my father 

k2 



114 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

children. A good minister only aims at the glory of 2 serving 3 his 

ne que aspirer a A. 

4 country 'well. When we were in the country, we devoted the 
pays H. a campagne f. consacrer'R. 

morning to study, we walked at noon, and at three or four 
matinee, f. art. se promener H. midi 

o'clock we went a hunting or fishing. Michael Angelo has 
heure H. a art. chasse f a la peche f. JVIichel-Ange 

painted (a great deal) in fresco. It is a bed with (ivory posts) 

beaucoup art. J res que f. Ce litm. colonnes dHvoire 

and (mahogany feet). That man, with his 2 gloomy 'looks and 
a pied d* acajou, les sombre regard m. 

2 surly 'behaviour, seems fit only to serve as a scarecrow. 
au brusque maintienm. semble propre ne que de * epouvantail. 

286. De is generally used to express separation, extraction, possession, 
appartenance, cause, shift, result, &c, and supplies the place of several 
prepositions; as, from: je viens de France, I come from France; d'un 
bout a? autre, from one end to the other. — Of: le palais du roi, the 
palace of the king ; les facultes de Vame, the faculties of the soul ; un 
homme d'esprit, a man of wit. In a partitive sense — of: moitie de, 
quart de, &c, the half of, the fourth of, &c. : it is used for par, by: il 
est aime de tout le monde, he is beloved by every hody ; for, through, 
or by, &c. ; mourir de faim, de soif to die of hunger, of thirst. — On, 
upon, -with: vivre de fruits, to live upon fruit. — On account of, ox for: 
sauter dejoie, to leap for joy. 

EXERCISE ON THE PREPOSITION de. 
I come from London, where I have spent (a week) very agreeably. 
ou passe huit jours 

From one end of the horizon to the other, the sky was covered with 

bout m. m. del m. 

2 thick 3 black 'clouds. The marble of Paros is not finer than that 
e*pais et noir nuage m. 
which we get from Carrara. Montaigne, Madame de Sevigne, and 

qui nous vient Carrare. 

La Fontaine, were writers of 2 truly 3 original 'genius. One half 

H. icrivain un moitie* i 

of the 2 terrestrial 'globe, is covered with water, and above a (third part) 

terrestre globe m. plus de tiers m. 

of the rest is uninhabited, either through 2 extreme 'heat or through 
inhabitc, ou par un chaleur f. 

^excessive 'cold. In that happy retreat, we lived on the milk of 
un froid m. asile m. H. 

our flocks, and the 2 dchcious 'fruits of our orchards. 
brebis pi. de verger m 

287. En serves to mark the relations of time, place, situation, &c, and 
is variously expressed ; as, cetait en hiver, it was during winter ; ctrc 
en Angl'terre, to be in England; aller en Italie, to go into Italy; elle 
est en bonne saute*, she is in good health ; il vaut mieux etre en paix, 
gu'cn guerre, it is better to be at peace than at war ; il V a fait en haint 
de lui, he did it out of hatred to him, &c. 



OF THE ADVERB. 115 

EXERCISE ON THE PREPOSITION en. 

s He had 'for 2 (a long while) 4 lived in France ; the troubles which 
* depuis long-temps vivre H. 
agitated that fine kingdom obliged him to retire to Switzeiland, 

J. royaume m. J. de se retirer Suisse, 

whence 3 he 'soon 2 after (set out) for Italy. We were at peace, and 
d'ou se rendre J. H. 

enjoyed all its blessings, when ambition rekindled the 
nous en gouter H. art. * charme m. art rallumer 

flames of war, and forced us to put our frontiers in a state of 
feu sing. art. J. de mettre frontiere f. * 

defence. The savage is almost continually at war ; he cannot remain 

presque toujours 
at rest. He has acted, on this occasion, like a great man. 
rep os. dans en * 



CHAPTER VII. 

OF THE ADVERB. 



288. The adverb is a word which accompanies verbs, adjectives, and 
even other adverbs, to express their manner or circumstances. 

289. Remark. There are adjectives which are sometimes used as 
adverbs ; as, il chante juste, he sings well ; elle chante faux, she sings 
out of tune ; Us ne voient pas clair, they do not see clear ; cette fleur 
sent bon, this flower has a good smell, &c. The adjectives juste, faux, 
clair, and bon, here supply the place of adverbs. 

290. Adverbs are of different kinds. 

291. The most numerous are those which express manner, and are 
formed from adjectives by the following method : 

292. Rule I. When the adjective ends in the masculine with a vowel, 
the adverb is formed by adding ment ; as, modeste-ment, modestly ; poll' 
ment, politely; ingenu-ment, ingenuously, &c. 

293. Exceptions. Impuni makes impunement, and trattre, trai- 
treusement. 

294. The following six take e close before ment, instead of the e mute 
in the adjective : 

aveuglement, blindly conformement, conformably 

commode ment, commodiously £normement, enormously 

incommodement, incommodiously opiniatrement obstinately 

295. Rule II. When the adjective ends with a consonant, in the mas- 
culine, the adverb is formed from the feminine termination, by adding 
ment ; as, grand, grandement, greatly ; franc, franchement, frankly *, 
naf, naivement, artlessly, &c. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

296. 1st, Gentil, makes genti me nt, prettily. 

297. 2d, The following eight adverbs, 

communement, commonly importune ment, importunately 

confus£ment. confusedly obscure ment, obscurely 



116 OF THE ADVERB. 

diffuse ment, diffuse dly precise ment, precisely 

expressement expressly profondement, deeply 

take before ment the e close, instead of the e mute, in the feminine of the 

adjectives from which they are derived. 

298. Remark. The six following adverbs are not derived from adjectives : 
comment, hoiv profuse ment, lavishly 
incessamment, presently nuitamment, by night 
notamment, especially sciemment, knowingly 

299. 3d, Adjectives ending in nt form their adverbs by changing nt 
into mment ; as consta-nt, consta-mment, constantly ; eloque-nt, eloque- 
mment. Except lent and present, the only two of this class that follow 
the second general rule, making lentement and pre sent ement. 

300. Remark. Most adverbs denoting manner, and a few others, have 
the three degrees of comparison ; as, profondement, aussi, plus, or moins 
profondement, fort, bien, or tres-profondhnent, and le plus profondement. 

301. The following degrees of comparison are irregular : 



POSITIVE. 


COMPARATIVE. 


SUPERLATIVE. 


bien, -well 


mieux, better 


le mieux, the best 


mal, bad 


pis, ivorse 


le pis, the worst 


peu, little 


moins less 


le moins the least 



EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

Bourdaloue and Massillon have both spoken very eloquently 

Vim et V autre 
on 2 evangelical x truths ; but (the former) has principally (proposed 
art. evangelique celui-la se pro- 

to himself) to convince the mind ; (the latter) has generally had in 
poser de convaincre celui-ci en 

view to touch the heart. Several of fLa Bruyere's characters are 
vue de art. 

as finely drawn as they are delicately expressed. Buflbn is one of 

fnement trace' * * 

the best writers of the 2 last Century; he thinks deeply, describes for- 

siecle m. peindre for- 

cibly, and expresses himself (with dignity). Comeille and Racine are 
tement, nohlement. 

the two best 3 French 2 tragic ^oeis ; the pieces of the former are 

tragique f. 

^strongly 3 but 4 incon erctly Written; those of the latter are more regu- 

larly beautiful, more purely expressed, and more delicately conceived. 
beau, pensL 

302. There are likewise various other sorts of adverbs 

f Affirmation, as Certes, certainly ; oui, yes. 

I Consent, as Soit, be it so ; volontiers, willingly. 

0F J Doubt, as Peut-ttre, perhaps. 

^Denial, as JYon, ne, ne pas, ne point, no, not. 

t Translate, Of the characters of La Bruyere.^-AU such phrases are rendered in 
French in this manner. 



OF THE ADVERB. 117 

EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION, &c. 
Certainly, either I mistake, or the business passed (in that 
ou se tromper, se passer J. 

manner). Do you think that he listens willingly to this proposal ? 
ainsi. ecouter * 

Have you ever read in Racine the famous scene of Phaedra's delirium ? 

f. Phtdre dtlire m. 

Yes, I have ; and I own it is one of the finest of the 2 French 

la hie; avouer que ce 

1 theatre. Perhaps you will discover, on a second perusal of La 

dans lecture f. 

Fontaine's Fables, beauties which you did not perceive at first 
f. que avoir H. apercues a la f. 

Will you have some 1 No. Will you not have any 1 The 

VouloirY. * en * 

man who (is willing) to do good is not stopped by any obstacle 

vouloir ¥. * * art. arrtie aucun 

I will pay him what I owe, but not (all at once). 
lui ce que lui non pas tout a la fois. 



f~~ , C Premier ement, first; secondement, secondly, &c. 

I T? k ' ) D'abord. at first ; ensuite, apres, afterwards, then 

j ' C. auparavant, before, 



! PI C ^"> wnere ' ?cz > nere 5 ^> there ; de-ca, on this side; 

j yy ' < de-la, on that side ; part out, every where ; pres, 

[^ ' (_ pro die, near, nigh ; loin, far, &c. 



EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF ORDER, &c. 

We ought first to avoid doing evil ; afterwards we ought to do 
Ilfaut * de art. * 

good. ! Read ^books 4 of "instruction 2 first, and then you may 
art. art. * 

proceed to those of entertainment. If you will go, settle 

passer L. agrtment. vouloir s*en aller regler 

first what is to be done. The painter had (brought together) 
auparavant falloir * * A. rassembler 

in the same picture several different 'objects: — here, a troop of Bac- 
un tableau Bac- 

chants : there, a troop of young people ; here, a sacrifice ; there, a 
chante : gens 

disputation of philosophers. Sesostris carried his conquests farther 

dispute Sesostris pousser conqutte 

than Alexander did afterwards. Call upon your cousin ; he 

ne faire J. depuis. Passer chez 

lives 2 near 'here. I cannot see that, if I be not near it. When 
loger F. auprss * Quand 

he knew where he was, he began to fear the consequence of 

savoir J. H. commencer J. suite 

his imprudence. Contemplate (at a distance) lofty mountains. 

de loin art. haut f 

if you wish to behold prospects ever varied and ever new. 
vouloir * decouvrir site ra. 



118 



OF THE ADVERB. 



304. OF TIME. J 



Present 
Past 

Future, 



C Jllaintenant, now ; a present, at pre 
(_ sent; actuellement, this moment, &c. 
CHier, yesterday ; avant-hier, the day 
< before yesterday ; autrefois, former- 
£ ly, &c. 

C Demain, to-morrow ; apres-demain, the 
C day after to-morrow, &c. 
*C Souvent, often ; cT ordinaire, generally ; 
Indeterminate < quelqnefois, sometimes; matin, early ; 
L C. tvt> soon '•> iard, late, &c. 

EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF TIME. 
I have finished the work you prescribed me ; what do you wish 
achever que ordonner I. que voidoir 

me to do now 1 Formerly, education was neglected ; it is 3 now 
que je * Q. on 

2 (very much) 'attended to ; it is (to be hoped) that 3 new 4 views 

beaucoup s'occuper en; falloirY. esptrer A. on 

will 2 soon '(be adopted). They grieved (at it) yesterday; now 

adopter. On s'affligerH. en aujourtThui 

they laugh (at it) ; to-morrow, it will no longer (be thought) of. It is 

rire en; on plus penserh. y. 

one of those accidents which it is sometimes impossible to avoid. The 

de 
dew incommoded 'me 2 (very much) ; I shall not (in future) 
serein m. G. desormais 

walk so late. 2 Rude 3 and 4 coarse 'criticism gene- 

se promener JVLalhonnete grossier une f. 

rally (does greater injury) to the person who indulges himself in 
nuire plus se permettre * * 

it, than to him who is the object (of it). 
celle en. 



305. of<J 



u 



C Peu, little, few; assez, enough; trop, too 

Quantity, as < much ; beaucoup, much, very much, ma- 

£ ny ; tant, so much, &c. 

C Plus, more ; moins, less ; aussi, so ; autant. 
Comparison, as < ' , \ ' 

r 7 £ as much, &c. 

EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF QUANTITY, &c. 

There are many people who have pretensions ; but very few who 

gens * * a en 

have such as are well founded. To 2 embellish 3 a ^subject 'too much, 

Q. * * * * de fo?ide f. pi * 
frequently betrays a want of judgment and taste. One very often 

souvent ttre faute 

experiences disgust in the midst of 2 the most riotous 'pleasures, 

trouver art. ennui a des bruyant 

She is a 2 giddy 3 and 4 thoughtless 'woman, who speaks much and 
Cc leimr inconsequent 

reflects little. She has so much kindness, that it is impossible 
re'jie'clur de dc 

not to love her These stuffs are beautiful ; consequently they (are 
ttoffe i. aussi content 



OF CONJUNCTIONS. 119 

dear). This book has merit ; but there are others as good. If he 

clier. en de anssi 

has done that, I can do (as much). What I say to you (about it) is 

en autant. en 

meant less to give you pain, than to apprize you of the language 
* pour faire avertir pr-opos pi. 

(that is used). She is six years younger than her brother. Nobody 
qu'on tient. avoir de moins 

is more interested than you are 3 (in the success) of Hhe 2 afTair. 

ne * a ce que reussir Q. * 

You do not offer enough for this garden : give something more. The 

offrir de de * 

•more ignorant 2 we s are, the 5 less we (believe ourselves so). 
on est. * on croit Vetre. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

OF CONJUNCTIONS. 



306. The conjunction is a word which serves to connect words or sen- 
tences ; as, H pleure et rit en meme temps, he cries and laughs at the 
same time : the word et unites the first sentence, il pleure, with the second 
il rit. Likewise in Pierre et Paul rient, Peter and Paul laugh : the 
word et unites these two sentences into one, Pierre rit ^nd Paul ril. 

307. There are different kinds of conjunctions. 

308. To unite two words under the same affirmation, or under the 
same negation, et is used for the affirmation and n», neither, nor, for the 
negation. 

309. To denote an alternative or distinction — ou, eithei, or ; toit, que, 
whether, or ; tantot, sometimes, &c. 

310. To restrict an idea — sinon, but, except; quoiqi: 2, encore que, 
though, although ; a moins que, unless, till. 

EXERCISE ON THESE CONJUNCTIONS. 

Gold and silver are metals less useful than iron. To listen 
art. art. art. * 

with joy to a slanderer, and to applaud him, is to cherish the serpent 

* medisant, * lui, ce * rechaujfer 

which stings, tbat he may sting more effectually. I like neither 

piquer, ajin que phis surement. les 

flatterers nor the wicked. Those who have never suffered, know 
Jlatteur pi. t savoir 

nothing ; they know neither good nor evil. You may choose 
connaitre art. bien art. mal. avez a cKoisir 

either a happy mediocrity or a sphere more elevated, but exposed to 

de de f. 

many dangers. He is an inconsistent ^an ; he is sometimes of one 
bien Ce inconsequent tantot 

opinion and sometimes of another. I have (nothing more) to say to 
avis ne autre chose 



120 OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

you, only that I will have it so. I shall not yet proceed to the perusal 

sinon que vouloir * * encore lecture f. 

of the authors of the second class, unless you advise me to do so. 

ordre m. ne conseiller Q. * * le 

311. To express opposition — mais, but; cependant, yet, nevertheless; 
?iea?im§ins, for all that, however ; pour t ant, however, though ; toutefois 
bien que, although. 

312. To express a condition — si, if; sinon que, except that; pourvu 
que, provided that ; a condition que, on condition that. 

313. To express consent — a la verite, indeed; a la bonne heure 
very well. 

314. For explanation — savoir, c 'est- a- dire, viz., that is to say; 
comme, as. 

EXERCISE. 
The serpent bites ; it is only a bite ; but from this bite the venom 
ce ne que morsure f. ; venin 

communicates itself to the whole body : the slanderer speaks ; it is but 

ne que 
a word ; but this word resounds every where. (That is) certainly a 

parole f. retentir Voila 

superb picture ; nevertheless, there is some incorrectness in the design. 
tableau ; incorrection pi. dessein. 

Although Homer, according to Horace, slumbers (at times), he (is) 

Homere, soimneillerQ. quelquefois n J e?iest 

nevertheless the first of all poets. You will succeed, provided you 
pas mains art. rtussir, 

act with vigor. We have within us two faculties that are seldom 
agir Q. en * * 

united, viz : imagination and judgment, 
art. f. art. m. 

315. To express relation or parity — comme, as; ainsi, thus, so; de 
meme, as, just as ; ainsi que, as ; autant que, as much as ; si que, as, &c. 

316. To express augmentation — d'ailleurs, besides, moreover; outre 
que, besides that ; de plus, au surplus, besides, furthermore. 

317. For diminution — au moins, du moins, pour le moins, at least. 

318. To express the cause or the reason of a thing — car, for; comme, 
as ; parce que, because ; puisque, since ; pour que, that, in order that, &c. 

EXERCISE. 

The most beautiful flowers last but a moment ; thus 3 human 
durer ne que art. 

2 life 'passes away. The (greatest part) of mankind have, like 
* plu part f. art. h.omme pi. 

piants, -hidden 'qualities that chance discovers. Madame 
art. cache propriety f. art. hazard fait decourrir. 

de Sevigne's letters are models of elegance, simplicity, and taste ; 

art. de de 

besides, they are replete with interesting 'anecdotes. Nothing is 

plein de f. * de 

more entertaining than history ; besides, nothing is more instructive. 
amusant art. * de 



OF CONJUNCTIONS. 121 

Circumstances show us to others, and still more to our- 

art. Occasion faire connaHre encore 

selves. I shall always advise you to take the ancients as voui 

conseiller de pour 

guides ; at least, 2 quit l but seldom the way which they 

4 carter de nevous que de route f. que 

Have traced for you. We must, at least, know the 2 general 'principles 

tracee * E faut, 

of a language, before (we take upon ourselves) to teach it 

langue f. de se mder A. de * enseigner 

Certain people hate grandeur, because it lowers and hu» 

f. gens art. f. elle les rabaisser quelle 

miliates them, and makes them feel the privation of the 

que elle leur 

advantages which they covet 
bien aimer, 

319. To draw a conclusion — or, now; done, then; par co?iseque7it f 
consequently ; e'est pourquoi, therefore. 

320. To express a circumstance — quarid, lorsque, when ; pendant que, 
tandis que, whilst, while; taut que, as long as: depuis que, ever since, 
avant que, before; des-que, aussitnt que, d'abord que, as soon as; 
a peine, hardly, scarcely ; apres que, after that ; en/in, in fine, finally, to 
conclude, &c. 

321. To express a transition — car, for; en effet, indeed, in eifect; au 
reste, besides, otherwise ; a propos, now I think of it ; apres tout, after ail. 

EXERCISE. 
We ought to love what is amiable : now, virtue is amiable ; there- 
77 faut * ceqid art. 

fore we ought to love virtue. We ought to practise what the 
* art. * ce que 

Gospel commands us ; now, it commands us, not only to forgive 
4vangi!e m. non de pardonner 

our enemies, but also to love them. Desprcaux was (extremely 
a encore de de la plus grande 

particular) in not coming late, when he was invited to dinner ; he 
exactitude a A. trop H. 

said that all the faults of those who (are waited for) present themselves 
H. defaut se font atiendre 

to those who wait for them. The pride which possesses us, 

attendre * posse der toui 

visible as it is, escapes our eyes, while it manifests itself to the eyes of 

que a. 

the public, and displeases (every one). After( we had) examined 

choquer tons les esprits. avoir 

that ^singular ] effect, we (inquired into) (its) causes. We had hardly 
rechercher J. en les H. 

done, when he (came in). Pride counterbalances all our imperfections; 
Jinir, que entrerJ. contrepeser miserc 

for, whether it hides them, or whether it discovers them, it glories in 
ou cacher si se glorifier de 

knowing them. (None but) an Englishman can (be a judge) 
connaitre A. II »'y a que Anglais qui Q. juger A. 

L 



122 OF INTERJECTIONS. 

of Shakspeare ; for what foreigner is sufficiently versed in the English 
quel anglais 

language to discover the 2 sublime 'beauties of that author 1 
langue f. pour 

322. The conjunction que is always placed between two ideas, both 
necessary to complete the sense ; as, H est trts-important que tout le 
monde soit instruit, it is of great importance that every body should be 
well instructed. It differs from the relative pronoun que, as it can never 
be converted into lequel, laquelle. The conjunction que is generally 
repeated in French before every member of a period, although it is often 
understood in English. 

EXERCISE. 
(As long as I live), this image will be before my eyes ; and, if 

Toute ma vie f. f. peint f. 

ever the gods permit me to reign, I shall not forget, after 3 so 4 terrible 'an 

/aire v 

2 example, that a king (is not) worthy to govern (nor) happy in 

t\! est de commander et n'est 

his power, (but in proportion as) he subjects it to reason. I 

puissance f. qiCautant que soumettre art. 

am very glad to see that you do not love flattery, and that one 

de 
(runs no risk) in speaking to you with sincerity. 
ne hazarde rien a A. 



CHAPTER IX. 
OF INTERJECTIONS. 



323. Interjections are words which serve to express the sudden emo- 
tions of the soul. The only point to be attended to, is not to place them 
between words which custom has made inseparable. There are interjec- 
tions for every feeling, viz : Of 



Pain ahi, aie ! ouf ! ah ! 

Grief he las ! mon Dieu, &c. 

Fear ha ! he ! 

Joy ah ! bon, bon ! o ! 

Aversion fi ! fi done ! oh, oh ! 
Disgust pouah, pouah ! 

Indignation foin de ! 
Imprecation peste de, la peste de ! 
Disbelief chansons, tarare ! 
Surprise ouais ! 



Astonishment oh ! bon Dieu ! mise- 

ricorde ! peste ! 
Warning gare ! hem ! hola, ho ! 
Checking tout beau ! hola ! 
Encouraging alerte ! allons ! c, a cou- 
nty/; /a?/ J///^- bravo, vivat ! [rage! 
Encoring bis, bis ! 
Calling hola ! ho ! hem, hem ! 

Derision oh! eh! zest! oh, oh, oh! 
Silence chut ! paix ! s 



(123) 

PART II. 



THE SYNTAX; 

OR, 

WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR CONSTRUCTION 



CHAPTER I. 

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 



324. There are some substantives which are never used in the plural ; 
such are — 1. The names of metals, considered in their original stale : as, 
Vor, gold ; le platine, platina. — 2. The names of virtues and vices ; as, la 
chastete, chastity ; Vivrognerie, drunkenness. — 3. Some Words of a phy- 
sical or moral nature; as, Vou'ie, hearing ; V odor at, smelling; le sang, 
blood; le sommeil, sleep; la pauvrete, poverty. — 4. The infinitive of 
verbs and adjectives used substantively, together with some other words, 
which cannot be reduced to any particular class. 

325. Others, on the contrary, which likewise cannot be reduced to any 
particular class, are never used in the singular ; as, aim-ales, annals ; a?ice- 
tres, ancestors ; mouchettes, snuffers, &c. 



OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 
Of the formation of their Plural 

326. When a noun is compounded of a substantive and an adjective, 
they both take the sign of the plural ; as, un gentilhomme, a nobleman ; 
des gentilshommes, noblemen. 

327. When a noun is compounded of two substantives, united by a 
preposition, the first only takes the sign of the plural ; as, arc-en-ciel, a 
rainbow ; des arcs-en-ciel, rainbows. 

328. When a noun is compounded of a preposition or verb and a sub- 
stantive, the substantive alone is put in the plural ; as, un entresol (a 
low room between two floors), des entresols ; un garde-fou (rails on 
bridges), des-garde-fous. 

329. Rex auk. There is a small number of substantives composed of 
a verb and an adverb ; as, un passe-partout, a master or general key ; or 
of a verb repeated ; as, passe-passe, sleight of hand : they never take the 
>/gn of the plural. 

See page 41, art. 103 and following. 



124 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 

EXERCISE ON SUBSTANTIVE AND COMPOUND NOUNS. 
Gold is the most pure, the most precious, the most ductile, and, 
art. par fait, 

after platina, the heaviest of all metals. Chastity is an obligation 

art. m. pesant art. art. * 

of all times, all ages, and all conditions. Intoxication 
art. de art. de art. etat m. art. Jvresse 

which proceeds from beer is of longer duration than that which pro- 

venir art. * * celle 

ceeds from wine. It is the sense of feeling which teaches 

art. Ce art toucher ap prendre 

to guard against the errors of sight. Sleep is the image of 
a se garantir de art. art. 

death. 2 (Early) ' learn to distinguish truth from 

art. De bonne-heure apprendre distinguer art. 

falsehood. That is more bitter than wormwood. Dignity 

art. faux. amer de art. absinthe, art. Elevation 

of mind was formerly the (distinguishing mark of) 

art. sentiment m. pi. H. ' ce qui * distinguer H. 

noblemen. One of the buttresses of the vault has fallen, 

art. arc-boutant m. pi. tomber. 

He is always making (cock-and-bull stories). The Tartars always 

* fait des coq-a-Vane m. Tart are 

form the scouts cf an army. The fish-carriers did not 

etre avant-courier m. chasse-maree m. 

arrive in time. This door is only fastened with a latch ; and 

J. a ne que fermer a * art. loquet m. * 

all (the persons) in the house have each their key. 

ceux de passe-partout m. 



CHAPTER II. 
OF THE ARTICLE. 



330. The difficulty attendant on rendering into French the a or an 
which precedes a substantive, when it follows the verb to be, will easily 
be removed by examining whether that substantive be restricted by a 
particular idea: if it be not restricted, the a or an is not expressed in 
French ; thus, T am a Frenchman, I am a prince, must be translated by 
je suis Franca) s. je suis prince. But if it be restricted, then the a or 
un must be expressed by the word un placed before the substantive ; as, 
J am a Frenchman of an illustrious family, I am a very unfortunate 
prince* must be translated by je suis un Francais d'une illustre maiso?i t 
je suis vn prince tris-malheu**eux, 

331. .When the verb etre is preceded by the demonstrative ce t in 
phrases of this kii.d, un is always required before the substantive ; as, 
c est un tre'sor, eve. 

332. The French do not use the article before substantives expressing 
the quality of a preceding noun, though in cases of this kind the English 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 125 

usually employ the article the, and still more frequently a or an ; as, 
Telemaque, Jils lV Ulysse roi cf It a que, Telemachus, the son of Ulysses 
king of Ithaca; le Due iTYovk, prince du sang, the Duke of York, a 
prince of the blood. 

EXERCISE ON THE ARTICLE. 
I am a Frenchman and a merchant ; after having (been at) the most 
negotiants A. par count 

famous (trading towns) in the Levant, (my commercial concerns) have 

echelle f. de m. les affaires de mon commence 

brought me here. I am an unhappy Frenchman, who, a Striking 
conduire * memorable 

'example of the vicissitudes of fortune, seeks an asylum where I 

art. chercher asile m. 

may end my days in peace. He was a man of 2 uncommon 'probity 
puissejinir Ce un rare f. 

and of -tried 'virtue : (as a reward) for the services he 

un eprouve f. pour le recompenser de que 

had rendered to the church and state, the king has made him a 

H. m. pi. eglise a le 

bishop. Neoptolemus had hardly told me that he was a Greek, when 
evrqve'. Neoptoleme eut a peine d't que 

I (cried out), " 0, enchanting words ! after so many years of silence 

s' eerier J. doux parole f. de 

and 2 umceasing 'pain ! O, my son, what misfortune, what 

de sans consolation malheur m. 

storm, or rather what 2 propitious 'wind has brought you hither 
tempete f. plutot favorable conduire 

to end my woes?" He replied, " I am of the island of Scyros, I 
pour malPm. repondre J. He 

am returning thither; (I am said to be) the son of Achilles." 
retourner y on dit que je suis Jichille. 

333. Without entering more minutely into this subject, the following 
comparative table, in which the same words are exhibited, according to 
circumstances, both with and without the article, will, it is presumed, be 
considered as a sufficient illustration of custom. 

COMPARATIVE TABLE 

WITH THE ARTICLE. WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 

The writings of Cicero are full of j The writings of Cicero are full of 



the soundest ideas. 
Divest yourself of the prejudices 
se defaire 

of childhood. 
The different kinds of animals that 

are upon the earth. 
He enters into a detail of the rules 

of a good grammar. 
He affects circumlocutions. 

chercher des detour. 



sound 'ideas. 

Have no prejudice (with regard 
to) this question. 
sur 

There are different kinds of animals 
upon the earth. 

He enters into a long detail of fri- 
volous 'rules. 

He affects long circumlocutions, in 
order to explain the Simplest 
'things. 
l2 



126 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 



WITH THE ARTICLE. 

He loads his memory with the verses 

of Virgil and the phrases of Cicero. 
Essays supported by 2 strong ! ex- 
Discours souteuu 

pressions. 
He has collected precepts of 
"ecueillir sur 

morality. 

mceurs pi. 
Make use of the tokens 

se servir signe dont 

(we agreed upon). 

nous sommes convenu. 
The choice of studies, proper &c. 

Knowledge has always been the 
Connaissance pi. 
object of the esteem, the praise, 

eloge pi. 
and the admiration of men. 
The riches of the mind can (only 
be acquired) by study. 

ne que s'acquerir. 
The gifts of fortune are uncertain. 

fragiles. 
The connexion of proofs makes 
enchatnement preuve 
them please and persuade, 
qu'elles 
It is by meditation upon what we 
read, that we acquire 2 fresh 
knowledge. 
connaissance pi. 
The advantages of memory. 
The memory of facts is the most 
showy. 
brillant. 
The aim of good masters should 
devoir F. 
be to cultivate the mind and 
etre de 
reason of their pupils. 
The taste of mankind is liable to 
homme pi. 
great changes. 
He has no need of the lessons you 

wish to give him. 
France, Spain, England, &c. 

The isle of Japan. 
He comes from China. 
He arrives from America 
The extent of Persia. 



WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 

I He loads his memory with i insipid 
'verses 2 and phrases. 
Essays supported by lively ex- 
vive 
pressions. 
A collection of precepts in morals. 
* recueil sur 



We are obliged to use some Ex- 
terior ] signs in order to make 
ourselves understood. 
nous entendre. 

He has made a choice of books 
which are, &c. 

It is an object of esteem, of praise, 

Ce 
and admiration 



There is in Peru a prodigious 
le Perou 

abundance of 2 useless Miches. 
Gifts of fortune. 
Bien 
There is in this book an admirable 

connexion of ' 2 solid proofs. 



It is by meditation that we acquire 
fresh knowledge. 



There are different kinds of memory. 
He has only a memory of facts. 

He has an air of pedantry that 
ton m. 7iiaitre 
shocks you at first sight. 
abord. 



Society of 2 chosen ] men. 



He has no need of lessons. 

avoir besoin 
Kingdom of France, of Spain, of 

England, &c. 
Island of Candia. 
He comes from Poland. 
He arrives from Italy. 
He is gone to Persia. 
en, 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 



127 



WITH THE ARTICLE. 

He has returned from the East In- 
dies, from Asia, &c. 

He lives in Peru, in Japan, in the 
a 
Indies, in Jamaica, &c. 

The politeness of France, &c. 

The circumference of England. 

The interest of Spain. 

The invention of printing is attri- 
buted to Germany. 

He comes from 2 French 'Flanders. 
francais Flandre f. 



WITHOUT THE ABTICLE. 

He has returned from Spain, from 

Persia, &c. 
He lives in Italy, in France, 

in London, in Avignon, &c. 

a a 

The fashions of France. 
The horses of England. 
The wines of Spain. 
The empire of Germany is divided 

into a great number of states. 
He comes from Flanders. 



ON MEASURE, WEIGHT, &c. 

334. The English make use of a or an before nouns of measure, 
weight, and purchase; as, wheat is sold for a crown a bushel; butter 
sells for sixpence a pound ; ivine sold yesterday for forty crowns a hogs- 
head, his more than a groat a bottle. But the French make use of the 
article le, la ; as, le ble se vend un ecu le boisseau ; le beurre se vend 
six sous la livre ; le vin se vendit hier quarante ecus le mui d, cest plus 
de quatre sous la bouteille. 

335. When speaking of time, a or an is expressed in French by the 
preposition par ; as, so much a week, tant par semaine, 

336. In English a is sometimes put between the pronoun which ex- 
presses admiration and the substantive that accompanies it ; as, what a 
beauty ! but in French, the un is never expressed in similar cases ; as, 
quelle beauie ! 

337. In English, when the adverbs more and less are repeated to express 
a comparison, they must be preceded by the article ; as, the more difficult 
a thing is, the more honorable it is. But in French, the article is omitted ; 
as, plus une chose est d'fficile, plus elle est honorable. 

EXERCISE ON MEASURE, WEIGHT, &c. 

Corn sells for eight shillings a bushel. Veal and mut- 

art. ble m. se vendre * schelling boisseau. art. Veau art. 

ton cost ten pence a pound. This lace (is sold at) 2 half 'a 3 guinea 
covter sou livre f. f. se vendre F. demi guinee 

an ell. The best 2 French 'wines (are sold at) from twelve to fifteen 
aune. de France se vendre Y. 

* shillings a bottle. My father goes to Ireland four or five times a year 
bouteille f, en Irlande fois an. 

He gives hb son seven shillings a day. It (is necessary), if you 

falloir 
desire (to improve fast) that you should take a lesson three 

faire des progres rapides preniez * 

times a week. The more I contemplate those 'recious remains of 

reste m. 
antiquity, the more I am struck with wonder. What a beautiful 
art. frappe de etonnement* 

morning ! come, let us go and walk in the fields. 

matine'e f. * se promener A. champ m. 



128 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

CHAPTER III. 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



33S. It has been said (page 46) that an adjective agrees in gendei 
and number with the substantive which it qualifies : from this rule, how- 
ever, must be excepted, nu, bare, and demi, half, when placed before a 
substantive, and feu, late, when before the article or a pronominal adjec- 
tive ; as il va nu~pieds, he goes barefoot ; je suis a vous dans une demi- 
heure, I will be with you in half an hour ; feu la reine, the late queen ; 
feu ma mere, my late mother. But the agreement takes place if nu and 
demi be placed after the substantive, and/<?w between the article or prono- 
minal adjective and the substantive ; as, il a les pieds nus, his feet are 
bare ; je suis a vous dans une heure et demie, I will be with you in an 
hour and a half; lafeue reine, ma feue mere. 

339. An adjective frequently serves to qualify two or more substantives 
expressing either persons or things of different genders. 

340. If it be used to qualify more than two substantives, it must agree 
with them, for either these substantives perform the office of subject ; as, 
la grammaire, la logique, et la rhetorique, methodiquement enseignees^ 
Tie s'oublient guere, grammar, logic, and rhetoric, when taught with 
method, are seldom forgotten : or they constitute the regimen ; as, c'est 
un homme d J une valeur, dhine vertu et d'une fdelite, eprouvees, he is 
a man of tried courage, virtue, and fidelity. 

341. If it be used to qualify only two substantives, the substantive of 
peisons must be distinguished from the substantive of things; with the 
first, the rules of agreement are to be observed in ail cases ; with the 
second, custom allows, when the substantives form the regimen, to make 
the adjective agree with the last only ; as, elle avait les yeux et la bouche 
ouverte. Nevertheless, modern grammarians prefer the agreement, even 
in this case. 

342. With respect to phrases like the following, les langues anglaise 
et f ran raise sont fort cultive'es, though they are in opposition to the 
rules of grammar, yet it is allowable to use them. However, in strict 
propriety, it seems better to say, la langue francaise et Vanglaise sont 
tres-cultivees. 

EXERCISE ON THE ADJECTIVE. 

He ran through the streets like a madman, bare-foot and bare-headed. 
H. * rue f. tcte. 

His 'legs '(were) bare. Give me half a guinea,.*and then you 

* art. jambe f. il avait 

(will only owe) me a guinea and a half. I shall be at home in 
tic dri rez /'his que chez-moi dans 

half an hour. Come before ? half '(past one). 2 The 'late queen 

Une hen re et. 
was idolized. The late queen was universally regretted. His impetuosity 
II. adore. J. 

and courage, long restrained, soon surmounted all obstacles. The 
eon enchaine*, J. art. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 129 

imagination and genius of Ariosto, although irregular in their 

art. VArioste, quoique 

course, yet interest, (hurry along), and captivate the reader, 

marche, neamnoins attacker, entrainer, lecteur, 

who can never be tired of admiring them. There are in Gessners 
se lasser A. 

idylls sentiments and a grace altogether affecting. The good taste 
art. idylle tout-a-fait touchant. 

of the Egyptians, (from that time), made them love solidity and 

des-lors J. leur art. 

2 unadorned 'regularity. In those climates, the dry and the rainy 

tout nu sec pluvieux 

monsoons divide the year. 
mousson f. se diviser annee. 



Difference of construction between the English and French 
Languages. 

343. In English, the substantive of measure is placed before the sub- 
stantive or adjective expressing the dimensions ; as, a tower two hundred 
feet high, or in height. In French, the word which expresses dimension 
is placed first, if it be an adjective, and the preposition de be added to it 
as a regimen ; as, une tour haute de deux cents pie 'ds. But if it be a 
substantive, or an adjective used substantively, it is placed after, with the 
preposition de, either before the noun of measure or of dimension , as, 
une tour de deux cents pieds de haut, or de hauteur. This last mode 
is the most elegant. 

344. The English manner of expressing dimensions is to use the verb 
to be ; as, the walls of Algiers are twelve feet thick and thirty feet hign . 
the French, in general, make use of the verb avoir when there are two 
constructions ; as, les murs d' Alger ont douze pieds cTepaisseur, ei trente 
de hauteur ; or les murs d' Alger ont douze pieds d'epaisseur sur trente 
de hauteur. This second mode of expression is most generally adopted. 

345. In comparative sentences, to express difference, the English sen- 
tence often runs thus: she is taller than her sister by the whole head. 
The French, in this manner : elle est plus grande que sa sceur de toute 
la tete 

EXERCISE ON THE DIFFERENCE OF CONSTRUCTION. 

This trunk, which is six feet long, is very convenient. You will 
coffre m. commode. 

be stopped in your march by a river three hundred feet broad. This 

arrete f. 

observatory, which is twelve hundred feet high, is very proper foi 

knowing the true position of the stars. It is a terrace a hundred 
connaitreA. astrem. Ce terrace f. 

and eighty feet broad and twelve hundred feet long. The walls of 

large mur m. 

our garaen are twenty feet high and three broad. It is one of the 
jardin Ce 



130 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE 

finest stones that (was ever seen) : it is twenty feet long and six 
on ait jamais vites : longueur 

thick. This ditch is nine feet six inches deep and six 

tpaisseur. fosse m. pouce m, profondeur f. 

feet broad. My son is taller than yours by two inches. 



Regimen of the Adjectives. 

346. Several adjectives have a regimen ; some require the preposition 
de and others the preposition a before a noun or a verb, which is then 
called the regimen or government of the adjective. 

EXAMPLES. 

Digne de recompense, Worthy of reward. 

Utile a r/wmme, Useful to man. 

Digne de regner, "Worthy of reigning. 

Content de son sort, de vivre, &c. Satisfied -with his lot, -with living. 

Beau a voir, bon a manger, Fine to the sight, good for eating. 

Apre au gain, avide <S!honneur, Eager after gain, greedy of honor, 

Pvopre a la guerre, Fit for war. 

347. Recompense is the government of the adjective digne, as it is 
joined to that adjective by the word de: Vhomme is the government of 
the adjective utile, because it is joined to that adjective by the word a, 
and so of the rest. 

EXERCISE ON THE REGIMEN OF THE ADJECTIVES. 

2 Virtuous "men are always worthy of esteem. A 2 weak 'mind 

art. Vertueux toujours estime f. faible m. 

is liable to many contradictions. A heart free from cares enjoys 

sujet Men de.s f. cceur m. libre de soin m. jouit 

the greatest 2 possible 'felicity. Voltaire was always greedy of 

de f. fut avide 

praise and insatiable of glory. Rousseau, endowed with a 2 strcng 

iouangef. pi. doue de fort 

3 and ! fiery 'imagination, was all his (life time) subject to frequent 

bouillant f. vie f. encl'ui a de 

fits of misanthropy, and liable to all the variations (attendant upon it). 

acccsm. sujet f. qui en sont la suite. 

PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES ON THE ARTICLE AND THE 
ADJECTIVES. 

THE FAl'LTS OF INFANCY. 

de'faut m. art. enfance. 

The amiable Louisa and her young brother Charles were gentle, 

Louise H. doux, 

humane, and sensible. To the 2 most interesting 'person, Louisa joined 

vendible, spiritiieL inte'reBtant figure f. Louise H. 

all the modesty, the pleasing ingenuousness, and 'artless graces of her 

f. heureux inge unite f. naif art. f. 

*ex ; and Charles, the vivacity, the tire, and the manly gracefulness 
$rrcm f. feum. male agr cm entm.pl. 



SYNTAX OF THE PKONOUNS. 131 

of his. But these advantages, the 2 precious 'gifts of nature, were 
du sien. avantage m. * don m. art. f. H. 

obscured by great defects. They were both inclined 

unpen obscurci de defaut m. Vun et V autre enclin 

to idleness, and liable to fits of sullenness and ill humor 

art. paressei. sujets des acces bouderiei. de * h.umeur 

when they were contradicted. Faults are diseases of the soul, 

lor s que H. contredit. art. Defaut des maladies ame % 

2 the "cure '(of which) is the work of time. In (good dispositions), 

guerison f. dont ouvrage art. m. les ames Men n<?es 

it is generally the fruit of the developement of reason and 

elle d* ordinaire m. developpement m. art. de 

the desire of pleasing. Though their parents 2 were ^persuaded ' (of this), 

m. A. Quoique S. en 

they employed, to hasten it, an expedient which succeeded. If 
employer J. pour hater la, moyen m. leur reussir, * 

2 they 'were satisfied with them, contentment and joy were painted 

H. content de art. satisfaction f. art. f. H. peint 

in their countenances; if dissatisfied, they did not 

sur figure f. * en etaient-ils me content, * les 

scold, but they received them with a 2 sorrowful 'air, a 2 dejected 
gronder H. H. triste regard, abattu 

'countenance, and every sign of chagrin and trouble. 

maintien, tous art. signe m. pi. art. m. de art. doideur. 

Louisa and Charles were naturally kind and feeling ; they could 

naturellement bon sensible; ne pouvaient 

not long support the idea of having afflicted 2 such s tender 

long-temps resister a idee A. afflige des si tendre 

'parents. They felt their error, burst into tears, and asked pardon. 

H. fautei. fo?idreH. larme, H. m. 

2 A11 3 was 'immediately 4 forgotten, and satisfaction (again smiled) 

H. aussitbt oublie, art. contentement m. renaitre H. 

around. It was by this means that these amiable children 2 soon 

autour d'eux. Ce fut moyen que bientot 

'became models of docility, complaisance, and application. 

dtveniri. des modele m. de de 



CHAPTER IV. 

OF THE PRONOUNS. 



OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS 



Of the Place of Personal Pronouns. — See page 61. 

348. There is no difficulty in placing personal pronouns, when they 
act as subjects : the person who speaks always names himself last, and 
the person addressed is generally named first 



182 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

EXAMPLES. 

Vous et 77101, nous irons a la cam- You and I will go into the coun- 

pagne, try. 

jVWs irons ce soir a la promenade, We will take a walk this evening, 

vous, votre frtre, et moi, you, your brother, and I. 

EXERCISE. 

My sister and I were walking by the last rays of the 2 setting 
nous H. a rayons m. couchant 

'sun, and we were saying, what a mild splendor does 2 it 3 still 'spread 

disions, eclat m. pas ne rtpand 

over all nature ! In the long 2 winter 'evenings, my father, my 

art. de h.iver soiree f. 

brothers, and I (used to spend) two hours in the library, and 

nous passer H. bibliothtque f. nous 

to read there, (in order to) (unbend our minds) from the 2 serious 'studies 
r lisions y, pour nous se delasser 

of the day, those 2 amiable 'poets who interest most the heart, by the charms 

le plus 
of a 2 lively Hmagination, and make us love truth, by disguising it under 

riant art. en deguiser 

the mask of an ingenious 'fiction. You and your friend shall accompany 
trait m. pi. f. accompagner 

me to the museum, where we shall study nature in her three kingdoms. 
musee m. ou regne m. 

349. Rule. The pronouns il and Us always represent a substantive 
masculine — il, if it be singular and Us, if it be plural ; and elle and elles, 
on the contrary, represent a substantive feminine — elle, if it be singular, 
and elles, if plural. 

350. Thus, in speaking of the rose, we should say, elle a un parfum 
exquis, aussi est-elle lajleur la plus ^ecnerchee, it has an exquisite fra- 
grance, and is indeed the choicest of flowers — because rose is feminine 
and singular ; and. in speaking of several ladies, elles out autant de mo- 
destie que de ueaute, d? esprit, et de grace, they have as much modesty 
as they have beauty, wit, and accomplishments — because dames is femi- 
nine and plural. 

EXERCISE. 

(Look at) that magnificent building; it unites grace to beauty, 

Regarder magnijique bdtimentm. re uni r art. grace f. art. f. 

and elegance to simplicity. Ignorance is jealous, presumptuous, 

art. f. art. f. f. prtsomphieux 

and vain; it sees difficulties in nothing, (is surprised) at nothing, 

n<> de f. a rien, ne s'etonuer de 

and stops at nothing. Let us gather these roses ; Heavens ! what 
nes'arritera cueilUr Ciel ! quel 

a sweet frairranee they exhale ! Never judge from appearances ; 

* parfum earhaler ! sur art f. 

they are often deceitful : the wise man examines them, and does not 

* * te 

decide upon them till he has had time to fix his judgment 
di'ddtr (fap^ee f. que I'jrsque art. m. de % fixer 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 1 

351. With respect to pronouns, when used as a regimen, custom has 
established the following rules : 

352. Rule I. The pronouns me, te, se, leur, le, la, les, y, and en, are 
generally placed before verbs, as are nous, toils, and lui, when without a 
preposition in French, whether they are or not in English. 

EXAMPLES. 

II me dit, he tells me. Je lui parte, I speak to him. 

Je le v,ois, I see him. J'y songerai, I will think of it. 

Je les ecoute, I listen to them. J' en suis ravi, I am delighted at it 

EXERCISE. 
(As soon as) he had explained to us the maxims of Socrates, he 
Des que expliquer K. * So crate, 

said, you see that it is not without reason (he is looked upon) as 
J. ce que on le regarde 

truly wise. He was continually saying to me, Yet a little patience, 
un vrai de 

and you will disarm even envy itself. You have, no doubt, 
desarmer * art. etre, sans doute, 

(some foundation) for reproaching him with his faults ; but is there 

fonde a A. lui de * art. m. 

(any man) on earth that is exempt (from them) 1 To please 
quelquun art. qui Q. en Pour 

her, you must never flatter her. To abandon one's self to 2 metapby- 
lui, des melaphy- 

sical 'abstractions, is to plunge into an 2 unfathomabie 'abyss. 
sique ce * sejeter sans fond ablme m. 

353. Rule II. The pronouns moi, toi, soi, nous, vous, hit, eux, *He 
and elles, are placed after verbs, when they are preceded by a preposition, 
in French, whether they are or not in English. 

EXAMPLES. 

C?ltv depend de moi, That depends on me. 

Jt pense a toi, I think of thee. 

On s^occupe trop de soi, We are too attentive to ourselves 

Que dltes-vous d'eux 1 What do you say of them ! 

EXERCISE. 

My father loved me so tenderly, that he thought of none but me, 
H. penser H. a ne que 

(was wholly taken up) with me, and saw none but me in the universe 
ne s'occuper H. que de H. 

If you wish to obtain that favor, you mast speak to him himself. It 

de 
depended on you 10 excel your rivals, but you wculd not. 

H de de V emporter sur le vouloir G. 

2 Piiilip, father 'of ^Alexander, '(being advised) to expel from 
Philippe comme on conseillait a de chasser 

his dominions a man who (had been speaking) ill of him, I shall take care 
Stat m. parler I. se garder bien 

not to do that, said he ; he would go and slander me every where. 
* * * en, J. * mtdire de 

M 



134 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

354. Rule [II. In imperative phrases, when affirmative, moi, toi, nous, 
vous, lid, leur, eux, elle, e'les, le, la, les, y, and en are placed after verbs ; 
; >ut, with a negation, me, te, se, nous, vans, lid, leur, le, la, les, y, and 
en are placed before verbs. 

EXAMPLES. 

AFFIRMATIVELY. 

Dites-jnni, Tell me. 

Do?inez-inen la moitie*, Give me half of it. 

S«ngez-y serieusement, Think of it seriously. 

tfEGATIYELY. 

Ne me elites pas, Do not tell me. 

JSTe m'en donnez point, Do not give me any. 

J\ %1 y songez pas, Do not think of it. 

355. Remark. If the pronouns me, te, moi, toi, intervene between an 
imperative and an infinitive, me, te are used when the imperative is 
without a regimen direct. 

EXAMPLES. 
Venez me parler, Come and speak to me. 

Va te /aire coeffer, Go and get thy hair dressed. 

356. But moi, toi are used if the imperative have a regimen direct. 

EXAMPLES. 

Laissez-moi faire, Let me do it. 

Fais-toi coeffer, Get thy hair dressed. 

357. If moi, toi, when placed after the imperative, be followed by the 
pronoun en, they are changed into me, te. 

EXAMPLES. 
Donnez-nien, Give me some. Iletourne-t' en, Go back. 

358. When there are two imperatives joined together by the conjunc- 
tions et, on, it is most elegant to place the second pronoun before the verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

PolissezAe sa?is cesse etlevepolissez, Polish and repolish it continually 
Gardez-ies, ou les renvoyez, Keep them or send them back. 

EXERCISE. 
Listen to me ; do not condemn me without a hearing. Complain ; 
ecoiiter * * m'ec outer A. se plaindre ; 

thou hast just cause of complaint: however, do not complain too 
un snjet plaint e : 

bitterly of ttie injustice of mankind. Give some. Do not give any. 
amerement art. homme pi. en. en. 

Think (of it). Do not think of it. Repeat to them continually, that, 

y 
without honesty, one can never succeed in the world. Do not repeat to 

on 

them continually the same things. Acknowledge him as your master, 

Reconnaitre pour 

and obey him. Tread upon that spider, and kill it. 

lui. Marcher araignfe f. 4 eraser 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 135 

359. Rule IV. When several pronouns accompany a verb, me, te, se, 
nous, vous, must be placed first ; le, la, les, before lui, leur ; and y before 
en, which is always the last. 

EXAMPLES. 

Pretez-moi ce livre ; je vous le Lend me that book ; I will return it 
rendrai demain ; si vous me le to you to-morrow ; if you refuse 
refusez, je saurai m'en passer, me, I can make shift without it. 

Aurez-vous la force de le leur Will you have resolution enough to 
dire ? mention it to them ? 

II n'a pas voulu vous y mener, He would not take you there. 

Je vous y en porterai, I will bring you some there. 

360. Exception. In an imperative sentence, when affirmative, le, la, 
les, are always placed first ; as, donnez-le-moi, give it me ; offrez-la-lui, 
offer it to him ; conduisez-les-y, conduct them thither : and moi is placed 
after y ; as, menez-y-moi, carry me thither : but nous will precede y ; as, 
menez-nous-y, take us thither. 

361. Remark. The word meme is sometimes added to the pronouns 
moi, toi, soi, nous, vous, eux, lui, elle, elles, to specify the person or thing 
spoken of. 

EXAMPLES. 
Us se sont perdus eux-memes, They have ruined themselves. 

Le monde estime bien des choses The world prizes many things which) 
qui, en elles-mtmes, sont fort in themselves, are worthless. 
meprisables, 

EXERCISE. 
You wish to make a present to your sister. (There is) a beautiful 

vouloir * Voila 

fan ; you should present her with it. (How many) people are there 
eventail m. devoir N. offrir lui * Que de gens * * 

(destitute of) merit and without occupation, (who would be mere nothings) 

sans ne tenir N. a rien 

in society, did not gaming introduce them (into it). I shall speak 

art. si art. jeu m. introduire H. y. 

to them (about it), and give you a 2 faithful ] account of it. It is cer- 

en je rendre exact compte m. 

tain that old Geronte has refused his daughter to Vale re : but because 

art. 
he does not give her to him, it does not follow that he will give her to you. 

s'ensuivre 



OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

362. The relative pronouns are qui, que, dont, lequel, &c. — See page 69. 

363. Rule I. Qui, when a relative, is always of the number, gender, 
and person of its antecedent. 

EXAMPLES. 
Jlfoi qui suis son fi Is, I who am his son. 

Toi qui es si jeune, Thou who art so young. 

V enfant qui joue, The child who plays. 

Nous qui etudions, We who study. 

Vous qui riez, You who laugh. 

Les livres qui instruisent, The books which instruct. 



136 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

364. In the first example, qui is singular and of the first person, because 
the pronoun moi is in the singular and of the first person. In the second, 
it is singular and of the second person, for a similar reason, &c. 

EXERCISE. 
I, who did not suspect (so much) falsehood, cunning, and 

soupqonner H. tant de faussete f. de rnse f. de 

perfidy, m a man whom I loved, blindly followed his counsels. 
f. H. aveuglement je suivre J. conseil m 

Thou, who art candor and innocence itself, trust not too lightly. 

art. f. art. f. meme, te conjie Ugtrement. 

The great empire of the Egyptians, which was, (as it were), detached 

m. Egyptien, J. comme, dttachS 

from all others, was not of long duration. We who know the 

art. J. duree f. council tre 

value of time ought to make a good use (of it), instead 

prixm. art. nous devoir F.* emploi m. en, an lieu 

of wasting it in idleness and frivolity. What ! is it you, my 

perdre A. dans art. oisivete f. art. inutilite f. Quoi ! ce 
daughter, who (would wish) that I (should love) you less? The 

vouloir N. que S. 

greatest men, who were the ornament and glory of Greece, Homer, 
G. ornement art. f. art. Grtcef.Homere, 

Pythagoras, Plato, even Lycurgus and Solon, went to learn 
Pythagore, Platon, meme Lycuvgue Solon, J. * apprendre 

wisdom in Egypt. 
an. sagesse f. en Egypte. 

365. Rule II. Que, when a relative, is of the number and gender 
of its antecedent. 

EXAMPLES. 

C'est moi que Con demande, It is I whom they ask for. 

C'est toi qiCon appelle, It is thou whom they call. 

La femme que je vois si bien paree, The woman whom I see so well 

dressed. 
C'est nous que vous offensez, It is we whom you offend. 

C'est vous que je c here he, It is you I am seeking. 

Les dames que vous voyez, The ladies whom you see. 

EXERCISE. 

I, whom temptation surrounded on every siv^e, fell 

art. seduction f. environner H. de tout part f. pi. je tombai 
into the snare. It is thou whom the 2 public 'voice calls to that 
dans piege m. Ce f. appeler 

employ. A power which terror and force have founded, 
place f. puissance f. art. f. art. f. fundi £ 

cannot be of long duration. ft is we whom they persecute with 
ne pent dure'e f. Con poursuit avec une 

2 unexampled 'rage. You, whom (every body) respects, hasten to 
sans ex em pie fur eur f. tout le monde respecter, se hater de 

(come forward). (Everything) in the universe alters and perishes, 

paraltre. Tout dans universm. s'alterer fte'rir ; 

but the writings which genius has dictated shall be immortal. 
tcrit m. zxl. gtiiie xxu diet 6 m. pi. itnmortcl 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 137 

366. Dont sometimes represents dequi, duquel, de laquelle, desqueh, 
des que Lies , and even de quoi. 

EXAMPLES. 

Vhomme dont vous parlez est The man of whom you aie speak- 

parti, ing is gone. 

La tour dont nous apercevons les The tower whose battlements we 

cre'neaux doit etre tres-eleve'e, perceive must be very high. 

Ce dont je vous ai parte V autre What I was speaking to you of tn« 

jour n y a pas reussi, other day did not succeed. 

367. Qui, que, and dont may equally apply to persons and things; 
but qui, preceded by a preposition, can never apply to things : in this 
case, lequel, duquel, auquel, &c. must be used. 

368. Lequel, laquelle, &c. apply both to persons and things; but 
quoi applies only to things. 

369. The adverb oil is likewise employed as a relative pronoun, foi 
dans lequel, auquel, dans laquelle, &c. 

EXAMPLES. 

Voiloi le but ou il tend, That is the object he has in view. 

Ce sont des affaires, ou je suis Those are affairs with which I am 
embarrasse, perplexed. 

370. Remark. Oil admits the prepositions de and par, 

EXAMPLES. 

Voila une chose d'oit depend le That is an affair on which the 
bonheur public, public happiness depends. 

Tels sont les lieux par ou il a These are the places through 
passe, which he passed. 

EXERCISE. 
Persons of -ordinary Condition have not the same need of 
art. Personne f. commun f. mtme besoin m 

being cautioned against the dangers to which elevation and 

A. precautionne f. pi. contre ecueil m. art. f. 

authority expose those who are destined to govern man- 

art, autorite f. exposer ceux destine m. gouverner art. horn.' 

kind. The protection on which he relied has been too weak. 
me pi. f. sur compter H. faible. 

That after which a true philosopher sighs most ardently, is 

Ce apres vrai philosophe m. soupirer art. plus ardemment, 

to spread that sentiment of Universal 'benevolence which should 
de rcpandre m. universel bienveillance f. devrait 

unite and (bring together) all men. These are conditions 
umr rapprocher art. Ce sont de 

without which the thing would not have been concluded. Nature, of 

sans fait f. art. f. 

whose 3 secrets 'we 2 (are ignorant), will be always s a 4 source 5 of 

art. m. ignorer f. 

Conjecture 'to 2 mankind. That of which we complain most 

£ pi. pour art. homme pi. Ce se plaindre 

m2 



138 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

bitterly is not always what affects us the most. The only 
amerement ♦ ce qui affecter seul 

moments in which his soul 2 still ] expands to pleasure, are 

m. pendant encore s'ouvrir art. 

those which he devotes to study. The mountains from whence 
ceux consacrer art. etude f. f. oil 

2 gold '(is extracted) are not in general fruitful. The different 
art. or on tire * en infertile, 

countries through which he has passed have furnished his pencil 
pays m. par passe fourni a pinceau m. 

with 2 romantic 3 and ""picturesque 'scenes. 

de art. romantique pittoresque 



OF PRONOUNS ABSOLUTE. 

iSee page 112 — The pronouns absolute qui, que, quoi, quel, lequeL 

371. Qui signifies quel ho mme, what man; quelle per sonne, what person. 

EXAMPLES. 
Qui vous a dit cela P Who told you that ? 

J"ignore qui a fait cela, I don't know who did that 

372. Que signifies quelle chose, what thing. 

EXAMPLES. 

Que dit-on ? What do they say ? 

Je ne sais qu'en penser, I don't know what to think of it. 

373. Quoi has the signification of que. 

EXAMPLES. 
A quoi s'occupe-t-on ? What are they engaged in 1 

Dites-moi en quoi je puis vous servir, Tell me how I can serve you. 

374. Remark. If que or quoi be followed by an adjective, it requires 
the preposition de before that adjective. 

EXAMPLES. 

Que dit-on de nouveau ? What news is there ? 

Quoi de plus instructif et de plus What is more instructive and 
amusant ? amusing 1 

EXERCISE. 
Who will not agree that life has few real pleasures and 

convenir art. f. peu de vrai 

many 2 dreadful 'pains 1 (Some one) entered secretly ; guess 

beaucoup d 'affreux peine f. On entra secrtteinent ; deviner 

who it was. What have you read in that book that can have excited 

* * m. qui puisse porti 

in your soul emotion and enthusiasm 1 I know not what to 

art. f. art. enthousiasme m. savoir * 

think (of it) At what did you find them occupied ? There is in 

en. avez trouves occupe m. pi. 

that discourse I know not what, which appears to me designing. What 
discourt m savoir sembler • insidUux. 



SYNTAX OF THE TRONOCJNS. 1S*> 

have you remarked good, beautiful, and sublime in Komer 1 What more 

remarque Homere? 

brilliant, and, at the same time, more false than the expressions of a 
man who has (a great deal) of wit, but wants judgment ? 

beau coup esprit, qui manque cle jugement ? 

375. In interrogations, or after a verb, quel is used to ask the name 
or qualities of a person or thing. 

EXAMPLES. 

Quel homme est-ce ? What man is it? 

Quel temps fait-il ? What weather is it] 

Je ne sais quel homme c'est, I don't know what man it is. 

U sait quel parti prendre, He knows what steps to pursue. 

376. The adverb oil, it has been already seen, is employed as a relative 
f ronoun ; it is likewise used as a kind of absolute pronoun. 

377. Ou represents en quel endroit, in what place, or a quoi, to what. 

EXAMPLES. 

Ou allez-vous ? Where are you going to ? 

Ou cela nous mtnera-t-il? Where will that take us to 1 [me 

J* ignore ou Von me conduit, I don't know whither they are taking 

11 na pas prevu ou cette conduite He did not foresee where such a con- 
le mtnerait, duct would lead him to. 

378. Remark I. When ou is preceded by the preposition de, it marks 
the place or cause spoken of. 

EXAMPLES. 

D'oii vient-il? Where does he come from 1 

D'oii sa hahie procede-t-elle ? Whence proceeds his hatred 1 

Voilct d'oii il vient, It was there he came from. 

Le mal me vient d'oii fattendais The evil proceeds from that quarter 
mon remede, whence I had expected a remedy. 

379. Remark II. Ou, preceded by the preposition par, signifies 
through what place, or by what means. 

EXAMPLES. 

Par oil avez-vous passe* ? Which way did you come ? 

Par oil me tirerai-je d? affaire ? Which way shall I extricate myself 7 
Voila par oufai passe, This is the way I came. 

Te ne sais par ou je me tirerai I don't know which way I shall ex» 
d' affaire, tricate myself. 

380. By the manner in which these pronouns are employed, it will be 
seen they are only interrogative when at the beginning of a sentence, and 
consequently the most proper name for them is that of pronouns absolute 

EXERCISE. 
What grace, what delicacy, what harmony, what coloring, what 
grace f. delicatesse f. f. coloris m. 

beautiful lines in Racine ! What, 2 then, ] must have been that 

vers m. done doit 



140 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

Extraordinary 'man, to whom seven cities contested the glory of 

se son} dispute f. 

having given birth ] He does not know what model to follow. 
avoir A. donne art. jour m. savoir rnodelem. * suivre. 

i have told you what man it is. Which of those ladies do you 

ce f. dames f. 

think the most amiable 1 Choose which 4 cf 5 those 6 two 7 pictures 
trouver f. Choislr m. tableau m. 

*you 2 like 2 best. Where am I] He knows not where 

aimer art. mieux. Oil en savoir 

he is. He is gone, I don't know whither. (Whence) does he get 

en ♦ alle, ne savoir D'ou * lui vient 

that pride 1 (It is) from where he derives his origin. (Which way) 

orgucilm. Voila de tirer origine. Par oil 

did you come 1 (That is) (the road) I came. 

et es-v ous arrive ? Voila par ou venir G. 



OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.— Page 113. 

381. Ce, cette, ces, are often joined to the adverbs of place — d 9 here, 
and la, there — in order to point out in a more precise manner the thing 
spoken of; the demonstrative pronoun is then placed before the substan- 
tive, and ci and la after it. 

EXAMPLES. 
Ce livre-ci, this book. Cet homme-ld, that man. 

Cette Jleur~ci, this flower. Ces femmes-ld, those women. 

3S2. Celui, celle, ceux, celles, are followed by the preposition de, when 
placed before a substantive, and by a pronoun relative when placed before 
a verb. 

EXAMPLES. 
Les maladies de Vaine sont plus The disorders of the mind arc more 

dangereuses que celles du corps, dangerous than those of the body. 
Uliomme dont je vous ai parte, The man of whom I spoke to you is 

est celui que vous voyez, he whom you see. 

De toutes les choses du monde, Of all the things in the world, it is 

c'est celle que faime le moins, that which I like least. 

383. Remark. The pronouns celui, celle, ceux, celles, when followed 
by a pronoun relative, are expressed in English by the personal pronouns 
\e, she, they, or by that -which, those ivhich, such as, &c. 

EXERCISE. 

The pleasures of the wise resemble in nothing those of a 2 dissipated 
ressembler a dies if >6 

'man. He that suffers himself to (be ruled) by his passions, must 
se laisse * dominer A. doit 

renounce happiness. This stuff will become you wonderfully. 

renoncer a art. bonheur m. e'tojfe-cil. siera a mervcille. 

That action is worthy of blame. This scene is calculated to 
f. la blame. f. ci faite pour 

interest all men, but that cannot succeed. 
ite'resser art. Id ne saurait reussir 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 141 

384. Celui-ci and celui-la adopt the gender and number of the sub- 
stantives whose place they supply. When opposed to each other, ceiui- 
ci marks the nearest object, and celui-la the remotest. 

EXAMPLE. 

Celui-ci plait, mais celui-la captive, This pleases, but that captivates. 

3S5. Ci and la coalesce with ce, and form two other demonstrative 
pronouns, ceci and cela — the first of which signifies cette ckose-ci, this 
object ; the second, cette chose-la, that object. 

386. They may be used singly ; but when they are opposed to each 
other, ceci expresses the nearest object and cela the remotest. 

EXAMPLE. 
Jerfaime point ceci, donnez-moi cela, I don't like this, give me that 

387. Rexahk. When cela is alone, and not opposed to the pronoun 
:eci, it refers, like this last, to an object pointed to. 

EXAMPLES. 

Que dites-vous de cela ? What do you say of that ! 

Cela est fort beau, That is very handsome. 

EXERCISE. 
(Here are) certainly two charming prospects; this has some- 
Voila certainement beau perspective f. quelquc 

Lhing more cheerful, but many people think that more 

chose de riant, Men de art. personne f. pi. trouver 

striking and more majestic. The body perishes, the soul is 
imposant majestueux. m. perir, f. 

immortal ; yet all our cares are for that, while we neglect 

immortel ; cependant soin tandis que negliger 

this. What means this 1 That is true. It is not that. This 

veut dire Ce 

is low and mean, but that is grand and sublime. 
bas rampant, 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
FIRST CLASS. 

Of those that are never joined to a Substantive. — Page 114. 

388. Quelqu'un, quelqu'une, means un, une, one. 

EXAMPLES. 

Nous attendons des hommes, il en We expect men, some one will 

viendra quelqiCun, come. 

Plusieurs femmes m'ont promis de Several women have promiseo mc to 

venir, il en viendra quelqu\ine, . come, some one of them will come 

389. Quelqu'un, quelqiCune, taken absolutely and substantively, is oi 
both genders, and means une personne, a person, some one, any one. 

EXAMPLE. 
T attends id quelqxCun, I wait here for somebody. 



142 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

390. Que/ques-uns, quelques-unes, signifies some people, some ; plu- 
sieurs dans un plus grand nombre, several out of a great number. 

EXAMPLES. 
Quelques-uns assurent, Some people affirm. 

Entre les nouvdles quit a debitees, Among the reports he has circu- 
il y en a quelques-unes de vraies, lated, several are true. 

391. Quico?ique, whoever, signifies quelque personne que ce soit, qui 
que ce soit, any person whatever. It takes no plural, and is never used 
but of persons. 

EXAMPLE. 
Ce discours s'adresse a quiconque This speech is addressed to who- 
est coupable, ever is guilty. 

392. Chacun, chacune, every one, is used either distributively or col- 
lectively. It has no plural. 

393. Distributively, it means chaque personne, chaque chose, each 
person or thing. It is then used likewise in the feminine, and requires 
the preposition de after it. 

EXAMPLES. 
Chacun de nous vit a sa mode, Each of us lives as he pleases. 

Voyez stparement chacune de ces Look at each of these medals 
midailles, separately. 

394. Collectively, it signifies toute personne, every person. ■ 

EXAMPLES. 
Chacun a ses defauts, Every body has his faults. 

EXERCISE ON THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

2 Can 'any one (be still ignorant) that it is from the earliest 

Pourrait-il ignorer encore ce des tendre 

infancy we ought to form the mind, the heart, and the taste ? Will 

enfance f. on doit * former 

not some one of these ladies be of the party 1 Some people like to read 

f. partie f. aimer 

(every thing new). (There are) beautiful pictures ; I could wish 
toules les nouveautes. Voila de superbe tableau m. vouloir en 

to buy some. Whoever has studied the principles of an art, knows that 
* acheter principes m. savoir 

it (is only) (by length of time) and by deep reflection, that he can 
ce ?i' est que a la longue de profond ve'jlexion f. 

succeed in making it his own. All the ladies at the ball were very fine- 
reussir serendvele * propre. balm, H. superbe- 

ly dressed, and each differently. Every one should, for 

mi tit pave, avait ime parure differente. devrait,pour 

(the sake of) his own happiness, listen only to the voice of reason 
* propre m. 7i6c outer que * voix f. art. raison f 

and of truth. What is the price of each of these medals 7 

art. veritc f. pri.r m. f. 7ne"daiUe f 

395. Jlutrui means les autres perso7ines, other people : it only applies 
to persons, is never accompanied by an adjective, has no plural, and is 
never used in a sentence without being preceded by a preposition. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 143 

EXAMPLE. 

La charite se rejouit du bonheur Charity rejoices in the happiness 
d'autrui, . of others. 

396. Personne^ which is always masculine and singular, means nut, 
qui que ce soit, no one, nobody, whosoever. In this sense, it is preceded 
or followed by the negative ne, which is placed after personne when this 
word stands before the verb, and before the verb when personne stands 
after. The same observation applies to Hen, 

EXAMPLES. 

It ne faut mure a persenne, We must injure nobody. 

Personne n'est assure de vivre Nobody is certain of living till to- 
jusquau lendemain, morrow. # 

397. Remark I. The negative is sometimes understood ; as, y a-t-it 
quelqiCun ici? is there any body here] personne, nobody. Personne 
stands for il n'y a personne, there is nobody here. 

398. Remark II. In interrogative phrases without negation, or in 
those expressing doubt, personne signifies quelqiCun, any body. 

EXAMPLES. 

Personne oserait-il nier ? Would any body dare deny ? 

Je doute que personne soit assez I doubt whether any body be bold 
hardi, enough. 

399. Remark III. When personne is placed in the second member 
of a comparison, it means any body, 

EXAMPLE. 

Cette place lid convient mieux That place suits him better thap 
qxCa personne, any body. 

400. Rien, nothing, which is masculine and singular, is used with gi 
without a negation. When with a negation, it means nulle chose, nothing. 

EXAMPLE. 

77 ne s* attache a rien de solide, He applies himself to nothing fixed. 

401. When used without a negation it means quelque chose, something. 

EXAMPLE. 

Je doute que rien soit plus propre I doubt whether any thing be more 
a f aire impression que, &c. suited to make an impression 

than, &c. 

402. The negation is sometimes understood — que vous a couti cela < 
rien, how much did you pay for that ] nothing. 

403. It always requires the preposition de before the adjective or parti« 
ciple that follows it, and then the verb is understood, as is likewise the 
negation ; as, rien de beau que le vrai, nothing is noble but truth. 

EXERCISE. 

To most men, the misfortunes of others are but a 

Pour la plupart de art. <> mal m. ne * 

dream. Do not to others what you would not wish (to be done to you). 

eonge m. vouloir qiSon vous jxU 



144 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

No one knows whether he deserves love or hatred. An egotist 

savoir si est aigne tie de egoiste 

loves nobody, not even his own children ; in the whole universe, he 

pas mhne propre dank. * univers, 

sees no one but himself. He is, more than (any body), worthy of the 
voit que lui seuL digne 

confidence (with which) the king honors him. I doubt whether any 
conjiance f. dont honorer que 

one (ever painted) nature, in its amiable simplicity, better than 

ait jamais peint art. f. f. 

the sentimental Gessner. Has 2 any body 'called ? on me this 

sensible * est-il venu chez 

morning 1 Nobody. There was nothing but what was great 
matin m. H. que * de * grand 

in the designs and works of the Egyptians. I doubt 

dam dessein m. art. ouvrage m. Egyptiens. 

whether there is any thing better calculated to exalt the soul than the 

que Q. plus propre 

contemplation of the wonders of nature. 
merveille f. art. f. 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

SECOND CLASS. 

Of those which are always joined to a Substantive. — P. 116. 

404. Quelque, some, signifies un, une, entre plusieurs, one out of 
several ; it is of both genders, and takes the number of the substantive. 

EXAMPLE. 

Adressez-vous a quelque autre personne, Apply to somebody else. 

405. Chaque, each, every, which is of both genders, has no plural. 

EXAMPLE. 

Chaque pays a ses coutumes, Each country has its customs. 

406. Quelconque, aucun, any, quel que ce soit, whatever it be ; quel 
quil soit, whoever he be, is of both genders, and is always placed after a 
substantive ; when used with a negative it is always singular. 

EXAMPLE. 
fl ne vent se soumettre a aucune He will submit to no authority 
autorite quelconque, whatever. 

407 Certain signifies quelque, certain, some. In this sense it is used 
alike of persons and things ; but it is always placed before the substantive. 

EXAMPLE. 

rai ou'i dire a certain homme, a I have heard some man say. 
nn certain homme, 

408. Un, unc, a or an, when used indeterminately for quelque, certain, 
some person or some thing, takes the gender of the substantive to which 
it is joined 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 145 

EXAMPLES. 
J'ai vu un homme qui courait, I saw a man who was running. 

Je me suis promene dans une I walked in a large fine meadow. 
grande et belle prairie, 

EXERCISE ON THE SECOND CLASS. 
Some 2 enlightened J people among the Egyptians preserved the 
eclaire esprit m. pi. Egyptiens conserver H. 

idea of a first being, whose Attributes Hhey Represented under 
idee ttre, art. attribut m. representer H. 

various symbols; (this is proved by the following) inscription 
different symbole m. c 1 est ce que prouve cette f. 

upon a temple : — " I am all that has been, is, and shall be : 3 no 2 mortal 
de m. ce qui mortel 

'ever removed the veil that covers me." Every nation has 2 (in its turn) 
lever G. voile m. f. a son tour 

^hone on the theatre of the world. There is no reason whatever that 
brille m. raison f. 

can bring him to it. Some figures appear monstrous and deformed, 
puisse determiner f. monstrueux 

considered separately or too near ; but if (they are put) in their proper 

f. pi. siparement de pres ; on les met * 

light and place, the true point of view restores their beauty 

jour a leur m. vue m. leur rendre * art. f. 

and grace. Yesterday I saw a lady 2 remarkably 'beautiful. 

art f. J. d?une rare beaute'. 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
THIRD CLASS. 

Of those which are sometimes joined to a Substantive and 
sometimes not. — Page 117. 

409. Nul, m. nulle, f. and pas un, m. pas une, f., not any, not one, no 
one, are employed either alone or in conjunction with a substantive. 
They are accompanied by the negation, have no plural, and may be fol 
lowed by the preposition de, 

EXAMPLES. 

Nul de tons ceux qui y ont ite Not one of those who went there 

n'en est revenu, has returned. 

Pas un ne croit cette nouvelle, Not one believes that intelligence. 

Je rHen ai nulle connaissance, I have no knowledge of it. 

Tl ny a pas une seule personne There is not a single person that 

qui le croie, believes it 

410. Aucun, m. aucune, f., signifies nul, no, not any, none, when 
accompanied by a negation, and may be followed by the preposition de. 

EXAMPLES. 
Vous n'avez aucun moycn de rtussir You have no means of succeeding 
dans cette affaire, in that aflair. 

N 



146 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

411. This pronoun is seldom employed in the plural, except before 
substantives which, in some particular sense, are better employed in the 
plural. 

EXAMPLE. 
H n a fait aucunes dispositions, He has made no dispositions. 

412. Remark. Aucun, m. ancune f., any, any one, may be employed 
without a negation in interrogative sentences, or those which express 
doubt or exclusion. 

EXAMPLES. 

Aucun homme fut-il jamais plus Was ever any man more success- 

heureux ? ful 1 

On doute q\C aucune de ces affaires They doubt whether any of those 

reussisse, affairs will succeed. 

Le plus beau morceaud' 'eloquence The finest piece of eloquence that 

quHly ait dans aucune langue, exists in any language. 

EXERCISE ON THE THIRD CLASS. 
No one likes (to see himself) as he is. No expression, no truth of 
se voir tel que f. f. 

design and coloring, no strokes of genius in that great work. He is 
dessein de colorhs, trait ouvrage m. 

as learned as any one. Not one of these engravings announces any 
aussi savant que gravure f. a?inonctr un 

great skill. None of his works will descend to posterity. He is so 

talent m. passer art. f. 

ignorant, and at the same time so obstinate, that he will not 

en * meme temps obstine, 

(be convinced) by any reasoning. Did any man ever attain 

se rendre a raisonnement m. ja?nais parvenir J. 

to such a pitch of glory ! I doubt whether there be, in any science, 

ce * comble m. que Q. f. 

a 2 more 3 evident 'principle. 
plus lumineux principe m. 

413. Autre, other, expresses a difference between two objects, oi 
between one and several ; as, quelle autre chose souhaitez-vous de moi ? 
what else do you wish of me 1 

414. Remark. Autre is sometimes used to express a person but inde- 
terminate ; as, faime mieux que vous Vappreniez de tout autre que de 
moi, 1 had rather you learn it of any other person than of me. 

41(5. Un is sometimes opposed to autre, in which case these two words 
are preceded by the article, supply the place of the substantives to which 
they relate, adopt their gender and number, and form the pronouns Vun 
Fautre, Vune V autre, les uns les autres, les unes les autres, Vun et V autre, 
and ni Cun ni V autre. 

416. Vun V autre, each other, one another, applies both to persons and 
things: it takes both gender and number, and requires the article before 
the two woids of which it is composed. If there be any preposition, it 
must be placed before the last. When these two words are used in con- 
junction, they express a reciprocal relation between several persons or 
thing*. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 147 

EXAMPLE. 

Tlfanl se secourir Vun V autre, We ought, to assist each other. 

417. When used separately, they denote a difference. 

EXAMPLE. 
Les passions s'entendent les unes Our passions have a relation with 
avec les autres ; si Von se laisse each other ; if we indulge some, 

aller aux unes, on attire bientot the others will soon follow. 

les autres, 

418. Remark. In the latter case Vun is used for the person or thing 
first mentioned, and V autre for the person or thing last spoken of. 

419. Vun et V autre, m., Vune et V autre, f., both; these two words 
mark union. They require the verb to be in the plural. 

EXAMPLE. 
Vune et V autre sont bonnes, Both are good. 

420. JVY Vun ni V autre, neither ; these two words mark separation. 
The verb ought to be put in the singular ; however, many writers put it 
in the plural in French. 

EXAMPLE. 
Ni Vun ni V autre n'ont fait leur devoir, Neither has done his duty. 

EXERCISE. 
Ask another. Would any other have been so 

Demander a * aurait-il eu * assrz 

self-conceited as to think that his 2 private Opinion could counter- 
ed tt2<mr-/>rop re * pour penser particular f. put ba- 
balance the 2 public 'sentiment'? Reason and faith 2 equally 
lancer opinion f. art. liaison f. art. foi f. 
demonstrate that we were created for another life. They speak ill of 
demontrer creer G. f. ma* 
one another. The happiness of the people constitutes that of the prince , 

m. /aire m 

their true interests are connected with each other. Presumption 
inter tt m. lie a pi. pi. art. Pre 'somptionf. 

and pride 2 easily 'insinuate themselves into the heart ; if we 

art. orgueil se glisser * m. Von y 

allow 2 one the 'entrance, it is much to (be feared) that we shall 
donne a f. * entree, bien craindre on * 

2 soon '(abandon ourselves) to the other. Both relate the same 
bientfjt ne se livre rapporter 

story, though neither believes it to be true. 

fait m. ne penser que * soit 

421. Meme, same, signifies qui n'est pas autre, which is not different 
It is of both genders, and takes the plural. 

EXAMPLES. 

C'est le m£me homme, It is the same man. 

7/d mhne pereonne, The same person. 

Ce sont les mhnts reasons, They are the same reasons. 

Ce poeme est le meme que celui This poem is the same that I was 
dont je vous'ai parle", mentioning to you. 



148 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

422. Tel, m. telle, f. tels, m. pi. telles, f. pi., means pareil, semblable, 
de meme, such, like, similar. It takes both genders and both numbers. 

EXAMPLES. 

Un tel projet ne saurait riussir, Such a scheme cannot succeed. 
77 n'y a pas de tels animaux, de There are no such animals, no such 
telles continues, customs. 

423. When used alone, it either preserves its proper signification, or it 
expresses a person indeterminately. 

EXAMPLES. 

Vous ne sauriez me persuader You cannot persuade me of any such 

rien de tel, thing. 

Tel fait des liberalites, qui ne The same man is liberal in giving 

paie pas ses dettes, who does not pay his debts. 

424. Plusieurs, several, which is plural and of both genders, is used 
alike of persons and of things. When united to a substantive, or relating 
to it, it signifies an indeterminate number, without relation to another. 

EXAMPLES. 

Plusieurs motifs Vont determine, Several reasons determined him. 
Je crois cela pour plusieurs raisons, I believe that for several reasons. 

425. But it is likewise used as a part of a greater number. 

EXAMPLE. 

Parmi un si grand nombre de gens, Out of so great a number of pei- 
il y en eut plusieurs qui s*y oppo- sons, several objected to it. 
serent, 

426. When plusieurs is employed absolutely as a substantive, it 
always means plusieurs personnes, several persons. 

EXAMPLE. 

Plusieurs aiment mieux mourir que Many would rather die than forfeit 
de perdre leur reputation, their character. 

427. Tout is used either alone or with a substantive. 

428. When employed alone, it signifies toutes choses, all things; tovte 
sorte de choses, every kind of things. 

EXAMPLE.. 

Tout nous abandonne au moment Every thing forsakes us at the mo- 
de la morti il ne nous reste que ment of death ; we retain nothing 
nos bonnes ceuvres, but our good works. 

429. When united to a substantive, it is used either collectively or 

distributively. 

430. Considered collectively, tout signifies the totality of a thing, and 
is then followed by the article. 

EXAMPLES. 

Tout Cunivers, The whole universe. 

Thus les corps celestes. All the celestial bodies. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 149 

431. Considered distributively, tout signifies chaque, each ; in this 
case, it is not accompanied by the article. 

EXAMPLE. 
Tout bien est desirable, Every good is desirable. 

EXERCISE. 
Does he always maintain the same principles ? Yes, they are abso- 
soutenir principe ? Old, ce abso- 

lutely the same. That general is the same that commanded 2 last 
lument pi. H. art. de ~?iier 

J year. 2 Such ] a 3 conduct is inexplicable. There are no such 
annee f. conduite f. de 

customs in this country. I never heard (any thing) similar. 

continues f. pays m. ai entendu dive rien de 

The same man sows who often reaps nothing. l l Hhis ^morning 

* seiner recueillir matin 

deceived several letters. Among those manuscripts, there are several 
G. letire f. manuscrits, 

much esteemed. Many, by endeavoring to injure others, 

qxCon beaucoup estime. en s'ejforcer de nuire a, art. 

injure themselves more than they think. All is in God and 
se nuire a ne penser. en 

God is in all. The whole course of his life has been distinguished 

cours m. f. marqui 

by 2 generous Actions. Every vice is odious. 
des f. m. 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

FOURTH CLASS. 

Of those which are followed by que. — Page 118. 

432. Qid, que, whoever, is only said of persons, and signifies quelque 
personne qice, whatever person ; it requires the verb following to be in 
the subjunctive. 

EXAMPLES. 

Qui que ce soit qui ait fait cela } Whoever has done that is a man 

cest un habile homme, of talent. 

Qui que je sois, Whoever I may be. 

Qui que c'ait ete, Whoever it may have been. 

Qui que ceut ete, Whoever it might have been. 

Qui que ce puisse etre, W'hoever it may be. 

433. When qui que, followed by ce soit, is used with a negative, it 
signifies aucune personne, nobody, no one ; as, je n'y trouve qui que ce 
soit, I find nobody there. 

434. Quoi que, whatever it be, is only used of things, and signifies 
quelque chose que, whatever thing ; it requires also the verb following to 
be in the subjunctive. 

EXAMPLES. 
Quoi que ce soit qu'il fasse, ou Whatever he does oi says, he is 

qzCil dise, on se defie de ha, distrusted. 

Quoi gus vous disiez t je le feral, Whatever you may say, I will do it. 

n2 



150 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS 

435. Remark. When quoi que, followed by ce soit, is used with a 
negation, it signifies aucune chose, not any thing. 

EXAMPLE. 

Sans application, on ne pent re- Without application, it is impossible 
ussir en quoi que ce soit, to succeed in any thing whatever. 

EXERCISE ON THE FOURTH CLASS. 
Whoever has told you so, he is mistaken. Passenger, whoever 
le, se tromper G. Passant, 

thou be, contemplate with 2 religious feneration this monument erected 

contempler un respect m. m. ileve 

by gratitude; it is the tomb of a 2 just 3 and 4 benevolent ! man. 

art. reconnaissancei.ee tombeaum. bienfaisant 

How can he hope to be beloved who has regard for no one ? 
Comment esperer de lui ne d'egards 

Whatever he may do or say, he (will find it) very difficult to de- 
qiCil aura bien de la peine de- 

stroy prejudices so deeply rooted. A mind vain, presump- 
truire des prejuge m. si profondement enracine. presomp* 

tuous, and inconsistent, will never succeed in any thing whatever. 
tueux, sans consistance, reussir 

Whatever a 2 frivolous l world may think of you, never swerve 

frivole monde puisse se dttourner 

from the path of virtue. 
chemin m. art. f. 

436. Quel que, m. quelle que, f. quels que, m. pi. quelles que f. pi., 
signifies de quelque sorte, de quelque espece que ce soit, of whatever sort 
or kind it may be, when relating to things ; or, qui que ce soit, whoever 
it may be, when relating to persons. It takes both gender and number 
according to the person or thing it relates to, and requires the subjunctive. 

EXAMPLES. 

Quelles que soient vos affaires, Whatever business you may have, 

venez come. 

Je rHen excepte personne, quel I except nobody, whoever he may 

qu'il soit, be. 

437. Remark. Lequel que, m. laquelle que, f. lesquels que, m. pi. 
lesquelles que, f. pi., whosoever, whichever, is also used ; as, lequel des 
trois que vous choisissiez, pen mHmporte, whichever of the three you 
choose, I care little. 

438. Quelque-que m. f. s. quelques-que m. f. pi., of both genders, when 
united to a substantive, signifies quel que soit le, quelle que soit la % &c, 
whatever be the, &c. It has both numbers, and requires the subjunctive. 

EXAMPLES. 

Quelque raison qu'on lui apporte, Whatever reason is adduced, he 
il rCett c^oit rien, believes nothing about it. 

Quelques effort* que vous fassiez, Whatever attempts you may make, 
vous ne reussirez point, you will never succeed. 

439. When united to an adjective, it operates as an adverb, and signifies 
d quelque fyoint que, however great a degree ; it then does not take number. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 151 

EXAMPLES. 

Quelque belle qxCelle puisse et^e, However beautiful she may be, she 
elle ne doit pas ttre value, ought not to be vain. 

Quelque puissans qu'ils soient, je However powerful they may be, 1 
ne les crains point, am not afraid of them. 

440 Tel que, such as, serves to mark a parity between objects by com- 
parison. 

EXAMPLE. 
Cent un homme tel quHl vous lefaut, He is just such a man as you want. 

441. Tout — que signifies quoique, encore que, though, quelque, how- 
ever. On this occasion, tout is considered as an adverb, and is employed 
with adjectives of every kind, and even with some substantives. 

EXAMPLES. 

Tout artificieux qu'ils sont, je Artful as they are, I doubt whether 
doute que le public soit long- the public will be long their dupe. 
temps leur dupe, 

Toute femme qu'elle est, Woman as she is. 

EXERCISE. 
Let 3 the laws 2 be '(what they may), we must always respect them 
hi f. Q. quel que respecter 

Whatever efforts you make, I doubt whether you will succeed. All 
m. Q. que * reussir Q. 

men, however opposite they may be, agree on that point. The 
art. oppose s'accorder m. 

man who descends into himself only to discover his defects, and 
rentrer en ne que pour y demeler m. 

correct them, likes to see himself as he is. However surprising 
ne corriger en, surprenant 

2 that ^phenomenon 'may be, it is not against the order of nature 

phenomene m. contre ordre m. art. 

Children as they are, they behaved remarkably well. 
se sont conduits fort 

A GENERAL EXERCISE ON THE PRONOUNS 

ir rHE EVENING 2 WALK. 

du soir promenade f. 

On a fine 2 summer 'evening, my brother, my sister, and myself 
Dans de soir&e f. moi 

(were walking) (by the side) of a wood (not far distant) 
nous nous promenions le long bois m. qui n' est pas bien 6loigni 

from the ca?tle which we inhabit. We (were contemplating) with 
chnU.au m. habiter. contempler H. 

rapture the ^majestic 'scenery which nature exhibits at the 
transport majestueux scene f. art. deployer 

approach of night, when we perceived at the foot of an ancient 
approchei. art. nuit f. quand apercevoir J. a piedux. tienx 

oak a boy of a 2 most 'interesting 'countenance. His beauty, 
chine m. enfant art. intiressant art figure f. f. 



152 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

his air of ingenuousness and candor, his gracefulness struck us, and 

m. . ingf unite de grace pi. frapper J. 

we approached him. What! alone here, my boy] said we; 

nous approcher J. en. seul ici, enfant lid dimes 

whence art thou 1 Whence comest thou 1 What art thou doing here 
(Tqu fais 

alone ] I am not alone, answered he, (smiling) ; I am not alone ; 

rfpondre J. dhin air riant ; 
but I was fatigued, and I (have seated myself) under the shade of this 
H. fatigue s'asseoir G. a ombre f. 

tree, while my mother is busy in gathering simples to 
arbre m. tandis que occupe a cueillir des pour 

give some relief to the pains which 2 her 3 aged 4 father 

apporter soidagement m. douleur f. vieux 

'suffers. Ah ! (how many) troubles 2 my 3 good 4 mamma 'has ! 
souffrir. que de peine f. maman 

How many troubles ! Did you know them, there is not one of you 

si connaltre H. 

that would not be touched with pity, and who could refuse the tribute 
qui * S. pitie, lid S. un tribut 

of your tears. We said to him, lovely child, thy ingenuousness, 

* larme f. J. * aimable ta 

candor, innocence, (every thing), interests us in thy misfortunes and 
f. ton f. tout, interesser a malheur 

those of thy mother. Relate them to us ; whatever they be, fear not 
a JRaconter * 

to afflict us. (Wo be) to whoever cannot feel for the 

de affliger Jklalheur ne sait pas s 1 attendrir sur 

misfortunes of others ! 2 He immediately related the history of his mother, 

mal m. aussitbt J. 

with an expression, an artlessness, a grace, altogether affecting. Our 

f. naivete f. f. tout-a-fait touchant f. sing, 

hearts felt the liveliest emotions ; tears (trickled down our cheeks); 

tprouverJ. vif f. nos couler J. 

and we gave him what little money we had about us. (In the 

lui le peu de argent que H. sur Ce- 

mean time), the mother returned. (As soon as) he saw her, he 

pendant revenir J. Des-que apercevoir J. 

exclaimed, (make haste), mamma; make haste: see what these good 
s* eerier J. accourir sing. sing. sing, ce que 

Little folks have given me ; I have related to them thy misfortunes ; 

gens f. 
they have been affected (by them), and their sensibility (has not been 
m, tonchk m. pi. en f. ne s'est pas 

satisfied) with shedding tears. See, mamma, see what they have 
bornk f. a * des sing. sing, 

given me. The mother was moved ; she thanked us, and 

J. attendri f. remercierJ* nous 

said : -generous, -feeling 'souls, the good action which you (have 

J et sensible amc f. f. 

just been doing) will not be lost. He who sees (every thing) and 

vtnez de fare perdu f. 

judges (every thing) will not let it go unrewarded. 
juger laisser * sans recompense. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 153 

CHAPTER V. 

OF THE VERB. 



Agreement of the Verb with the Subject. 



442. The subject is that of which something is affirmed, and may 
always he known by the answer to this question, qui est-ce qui ? who 
or what is it ] as, Pierre vit, Peter lives ; Voiseau vole, the bird flies. 
If it be asked, qui est-ce qui vit ? who is it that lives 1 — qui est-ce qui 
vole ? what is it that flies 1 — the answers Pierre and Voiseau shew that 
Pierre and Voiseau are the subjects of the verbs vit and vole. 

443. Rule. The verb must be of the same number and person as its 
subject. 

EXAMPLES. 
Je ris I laugh. Nous parlous, We speak. 

Tujoues, Thou playest. Vous plaisantez, You jest. 

II aime, He loves. lis sont fous, They are mad. 

La vertu est aimable, Virtue is amiable. 

444. Ris is in the singular number and the first person, because je, its 
subject, is in the singular and the first person. Joues is in the singular 
and the second person, because tu is in the singular and the second 
person, &c. 

EXERCISE. 

The most free of all men is he who can be free, even in slave- 

libre art. celui « mime art. escla- 

ry. Are we not often blind to our defects 1 All men 

vage m. s'aveugler sur defaut ? art. 

(are inclined) to idleness, but the savages of 2 hot •countries are 

tendre art. sauvage art. chaud pays 

the laziest of all men. Do you think of imposing long on the 

* en imposer A. long-temps a 
credulity of the public 1 Thou canst not deny that he is a great man. 
f. m. pouvoir nier ne Q. 

445. Remark I. When a verb has two subjects, both singular, it is 
put in the plural. 

EXAMPLE. 

Mon ptre et ma mere m'aiment My father and mother love me 
tendrement, tenderly. 

EXERCISE. 

His uprightness and honesty make him courted by every body. 
droiture f. his honnttete faire rechercher de 
Strength of body and of mind meet not always 

art. f. art. celle art. se rencontrer 

together. A good heart and a noble soul are 2 precious 'gifts of nature, 
ensemble. m. beau f. don m. art. f. 



154 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

446. Remark IT. When a verb relates to subjects of different persons, 
it agrees with the first, in preference to the other two, and with the second, 
in preference to the third. The person addressed is named first and the 
person addressing last. On this occasion, the pronoun plural nous is 
generally placed before the verb, if the first person has been mentioned 
before, or the pronoun plural vous, if no first person has been mentioned, 

EXAMPLES. 

Vous, voire frere, et moi, nous lisons You, your brother, and I, read 
ensemble la brochure nouvelle, together the new pamphlet. 

Vous et voire ami, vous viendrez You and your friend will come 
avec moi, with me. 

EXERCISE. 
You, your friend, and I, have each a different Opinion. In our 
chacun f. 

cVildhood, you and I (were pleased) with playing together. Neither 
enfance f. se plaire H. A. ni 

i nor (any one else) has been able to understand (any thing) in that 

ni cVautres ne pouvoir G. * comprendre rien a 

sentence. (Take good care), you and your brother, not to 
phrase f. se garder Men P. * de 

(give way) to the impetuosity of your character. 
s'abandonner caractere m. 

447. Retviakk III. When a verb has the relative pronoun qui for its 
subject, it is put in the same number and person as the noun or pronoun 
to which qui relates. 

EXAMPLES. 

Est-ce moi qui ai dit cette nouvelle? Is it I who told this news ? 
Est-ce nous qui favons voulu ? Is it we who desired it? 

Ceux qui aiment sHncerement la Those who sincerely love virtue 
vertu sont heureux, are happy. 

EXERCISE. 
He that complains most of mankind, is not always he that 
Celui se plaindre le plus art. homtne pi. 
(has most reason) to complain (of them). You that wish to enrich 
est le plus fon de en. vouloir * enrichir 

your mind with thoughts vigorously conceived and nobly expressed, 
esprit de f. fortement concu . noblement expHm6 

read the works of Homer and Flato. 
ouvrage Homtre 



OF THE REGIMEN OF VERBS. 

448. A verb is active when it will admit after it quelqiCun or quelque 
chose, and the word which is put after the verb is called the regimen of 
that veib. Observe that this regimen may be known by asking the ques- 
tion, qu'est-ce que? It is called direct — that is, governed directly by 
the verb, without any preposition being necessary between the verb and 
its object, and may be either a noun or a pronoun. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 155 

449. Rule. When the regimen of the active verb is a noun, it is always 
placed after the verb ; when it is a pronoun, it is generally placed before it. 

EXAMPLE. 

Ma mere aime tons ses enfans, My mother loves all her children. 

Je vous aime, and not as in English, J 1 aime vous, I love you ; 
Jl m'aime, and not II aime moi, he loves me. 



EXERCISE ON THE REGIMEN OF VERBS. 
He has discovered to all other nations his 2 ambitious 'design of 
montrer art. penple m. dessein m. 

enslaving them, and has left us no means of 

mettre dans fesclavage A. ne laisser aucan moyen 

defending our liberty but by endeavoring to overturn his new kingdom. 

A. que en tdcher de renverser royaame m. 

Homer represents Nestor as he that restrained the ungovernable 
Homere celui moderer H. bouillant 

wrath of Achilles, the pride of Agamemnon, the haughtiness of Ajax, 
courroux m. ferte 

and the 2 impetuous Courage of Diomed. He dared not (lift up) his 
m. Diomede. oser H. lever * 

eyes, lest they should meet those of his friend, whose 

art. de pear de * * rencontrer A. art. 

2 very 'silence condemned him. He caresses them, because he loves them, 
meme in. H. 

450. Besides this regimen direct, some active verbs may have a second, 
which is called indirect, and is marked by the words a or de. 

EXAMPLES. 

77 a fait un present a sa sceur, He has made a present to his sister. 
II accuse son ami dHmprudence, He accuses his friend of imprudence. 

EXERCISE. 

In submitting to the yoke of Asia, Greece would have thought 
En subir * joug m. art. art. croire 

2 virtue 'subjected to voluptuousness, the mind to the body, and 
art. assz.jettir A. art. voluptc f. 

courage to a -senseless 'force, which consisted only in numbers, 
art. insense f. H. neque art. multitude f. s. 

Three hundred Lacedemonians hastened to Thermopylae to 

Lacedemoniens courirJ. art. Thermopiles pi. un 
2 certain 'death, content, in dying, to have sacrificed to their country an 
assure* f. en de immnler puys m. 

infinite dumber of barbarians, and to have left to their countrymen the 

barbare de laisser compatriote 

example of an 2 unheard of 'bravery. You knew the importance 

inoui * hardiesse f. savoir H. f. 

which your parents attached to the success of that affair : why 

que H. reussite f. f. pourquoi 

have you not hastened to announce it to them ? 
g'empreaser G. de £ 



156 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

451. The second regimen is known by the answer to these questions : a 
qui ? to whom \ a quoi ? to what ] de qui ? of whom 1 de quoi ? of what ! 

EXAMPLES. 
A qui a-t-ilfait uu present ? To whom did he make a present ? 

A sa sccur, To his sister. 

De quoi accuse-t-il son ami P Of what does he accuse his friend 1 

D 'imprudence, Of imprudence. 

452. Passive verbs require de or par before the noun or pronoun that 
fellows them. 

EXAMPLES. 

La souris est mangle par le chat. The mouse is eaten by the cat. 
Un enfant sage est aime de tout le A good child is loved by every 
monde, body. 

453. Remark. The French never use the word par before Dieu, God ; 
they say, les mechans seront punts de Dieu, which, in order to avoid 
making use of by, may be thus Englished : God will punish the wicked. 

EXERCISE. 
The city of Troy was taken, plundered, and destroyed by the 2 con 
Troie pris, saccage, detruit con- 

federate 'Greeks, eleven hundred and forty-eight years before the 2 Christian 
fedtre avant 

2 era : this event has been celebrated by the two greatest poets of Greece 
ire f. art 

and Italy. You will only be beloved, esteemed, and courted 

de art. rechercher 

by men (in proportion as) you join the qualities of the heart 
de art. que autant que joindre L. 

to those of the mind, f God punished the Jews every time when, 
punir J. peuple Jidftoutes lesfois que 
deaf to the voice of the prophets, they fell into idolatry and 
sourd f. prophete, sing, tomber J. dans art. 

impiety. 

454. Some few neuter verbs have no regimen ; as, dormir, to sleep ; 
but many of them have a government. 

455. Rule. Some neuter verbs require a and others de before their 
regimen. 

EXAMPLES. 
Tout genre d'exces nuit a la Every kind of excess is hurtful to 

sante, health. 

ll midit de tout le ?nonde, He slanders every body. 

EXERCISE. 
This sentiment has pleased the king and all the nation. In his 
a a Dans 

retirement, he (has the full enjoyment) of the faculties of his soul. To 
retraite f. jouir de tout f. • 

f Translate as if it stood thus ;— The people Jewish were punished by God every, &c 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 157 

slander (anyone) is to assassinate him in 2 cold ^lood. The honest 
medire de quelqiiun cest * de sang. 

man seldom (permits himself ) (to jest), because he knows 

ravement se permettre des plaisanteries parce que savoir 
the most innocent jests may sometimes hurt the reputation. 
que f. pi. * pouvoir F. quelquefois nuire a f. 

It is only in retirement that one truly enjoys one's self. His 
Ce ne que art. on v^itab cement jouir de soi. 

work has pleased (every one) because it unites to 2 real 'utility 
ouvrage m. a tout le monde joindre un f. 

the charms of style and the beauties of sentiment. 
agrement m. art. m. sing. art. pi. 

456. Reflected verbs have for their regimen the personal pronouis me, 
te, se, nous, and vous, and this regimen is sometimes direct and some- 
times indirect. 



OF THE NATURE AND USE OF MOODS AND TENSES. 
Of the Indicative. 

457. The indicative is that mood which simply declares and affirms a 
thing. It contains eight tenses, viz : — the present, the imperfect, the 
preterit definite, the preterit indefinite, the preterit anterior, the plu- 
perfect, the future simple, and the future anterior* 

458. The present marks that a thing is either existing or doing at the 
moment one mentions the circumstance. 

EXAMPLES. 
J'aime, I love. lis jouent, They play. 

459. The imperfect is used to express a thing done at a time past, but 
as present with regard to another thing done at a time likewise past. 

EXAMPLE. 

J'entrais an moment ou vous I came in at the moment you were 
sortiez, going out. 

460. It is also used to express something past, but habitual, without 
fixing the time of its duration. 

EXAMPLE. 

Ctsar eta'U un habile general, Caesar was an able general. 

461. The preterit definite marks that a thing took place at a time 
mentioned and completely past. 

EXAMPLE. 

Fecrivis hier a Rome, I wrote yesterday to Rome. 

462 The preterit indefinite expresses a thing as having taken place 
at a time which is neither precise nor determinate. 

o 






158 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

EXAMPLE. 

fl rtia fait un vrai plaisir en He has given me real pleasure by 
venant me voir, coming to see me. 

463. Or at a time which is not absolutely past. 

EXAMPLE. 
J'ai vu cette semaine beancoup de I have seen many people this 
monde, week. 

EXERCISE ON THE INDICATIVE. 
My sister is in her, chamber, where she (is occupied) in reading 

ou soccuper F. a. . A. 

2 ancient 'history, 2 the study ] (of which) pleases her extremely, 
art. dont lui infinimenU 

Benefits bestowed are (so many) trophies erected 

art. Bienfait que on repandre F. des trophee que on s'erigerY. 

in the hearts of those whose 2 felicity ' (has been promoted) (by them). 

art. on /aire F. * 

The great Corneille was busy in his study tracing the plan of one 

occupe cabinet a A. m. 

of his tragedies, when a servant, terrified, came to tell him that 

domestiquem. tout effr aye h * lui 

s his 4 house 2 was on 'fire : 6 ' Go and find my wife," re- 

prendre La* art. * trouver A. re- 

plied he ; " I do not understand household concerns." 

pondre J. entendre rien a art. affaire pi. du menage m. 

Some 2 Hungarian Noblemen revolted from the Emperor Sigismund ; 
Des Hongrois seigneur se revolter contre Sigismond ; 

this prince heard it, and marched boldly against them: 

apprendre Jierement au-devant de 

" Which among you," said he (to them), " will lay 2 hands 3 upon 

Centre mettre art. f. sing, 

his king 'first] If there be one 2 bold 'enough, let him advance." 

art. en un hardi 

This noble firmness struck the rebels (with awe), who returned 
en imposer a, seditieux rentrer 

immediately to their duty. I have travelled through almost all 
aussitbt dans le * devoir. voyager dans 

Europe, and I have visited the most Celebrated 'places in Asia, 
art. f. celtbre lieu de art. dsie t 

and Africa ; if, on the one hand, I admired the masterpieces 

de art. Jifrique ; cote m. G. chefs-d'ceuvre 

of art, of every kind, which the protection of 2 enlightened 'govern- 

art. en tout genre, art. 

ments has produced, on the other, I shed tears (on seeing) the 

/aire naitre, G. sur 

ravages of ignorance and barbarism, 

art. de art. barbarie f. 

464. The preterit anterior expresses that a thing had taken place 
immediately before a time which is passed, and this tense is either definite 
or indefinite. There is the same difference between its two forms as 
petween the two preterits, definite and indefinite. — See page 93, art. 54. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 159 

EXAMPLES. 

Feus dine hier a midi, I had dined yesterday at twelve 

Quan d feus dine hier, midi When I had dined yesterday, it 

sonna, struck twelve. 

J'ai eu dejeune ce matin a dix I had done breakfast this morning 

heures, at ten o'clock. 



465. The pluperfect is that past tense which expresses a thing as 
having taken place at any period antecedent to the time when another 
thing happened, or it expresses a thing habitually done before another. 

EXAMPLES. 

J'avais soupe quand il entra, I had supped when he came in. 

Lorsque fetais a la campagne, des When I was in the country, as 
que favais dejeCnie, fallals a la soon as I had breakfasted, I 
chasse, used to go a hunting. 

466. The future absolute is that tense which expresses that an action 
or event will take place at a time which does not yet exist. 

EXAMPLE. 

J'irai demain a, la campagiie, I shall go to-morrow into the country. 

467. The future anterior is the tense which expresses that at a time 
when a thing will take place, another thing will have already taken place. 

EXAMPLE. 
Quand f aurai fni, je sortirai, When I have done, I shall go out- 

EXERCISE ON THE PRETERIT ANTERIOR, &c. 
I had done yesterday at noon. I (went out) (as soon as) I had dined. 
finir midi. sortir J. des que 

As soon as Caesar had crossed the Rubicon, he had no longer to deliberate ; 

passer plus 

he (was obliged) to conquer or to die. I had finished the task that 

devoir H. * vaincre * tdchef. 

you had imposed upon me when you came in. Those who had con- 
imposer f. * con- 

tributed most to his elevation to the throne of his ancestors, were those 
tribuer le plus sur 

who labored with the most eagerness to precipitate him (from it). 

travailler de acharnement en. 

I shall shortly go into the country, where I intend to (collect 
tie point tarder a a campagne, se proposer de h.erbo- 

plants), (in order to) (make myself perfect) in the knowledge of 
riser, pour se perfectiomier 

botany. When I have done reading the 2 divme 'writings 

^xX.botaniqua f. achever M. de A. tent m. 

of Homer and Virgil, and my mind has imbibed their 

H.omlre de que se penitrer M. de 

beauties, I shall read the other 2 epic 'poets. 



160 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

Of the Conditional. 

468. The conditional is the mood which affirms on conditions ; it has 
two tenses, the present and the past. 

469. The present of the conditional is that tense which expresses that 
a thing would take place on certain conditions. 

EXAMPLE. 

Je ferais votre affaire avant pen, si I would settle your business before 
elle dependait uniquement de moi, long, if it only depended upon me. 

470. The past of the conditional is that tense which expresses that a 
thing would have taken place at a time which no longer exists, dependant 
on certain conditions. 

EXAMPLE. 

J'aurais, ou feusse fait votre I would have settled your business, 
affaire, si vous irCen aviez, ou if you had mentioned it to me. 
nCen eussiez parle, . 

EXERCISE ON THE CONDITIONAL. 

What would not be the felicity of man, if he always sought his 
Quel * f. art. chercher H. 

happiness in himself? I shall be glad to see you harmonious, happy, 

uni, 
and comfortable. A dupe to my imagination, I should have (been 

tranquille. * de 

bewildered), (but for) you, in my search after truth. Enquire 

s'egarer sans * art. recherche f. art. $ y informer 

whether he would have consented to those conditions, in case 

si consentir dans art. que 

he had thought himself able to fulfil them. 
se croire T. capable de remplir 



Oj the Imperative. 

471. The imperative is that mood which commands, exhorts, entreats, 
or reproves. It is a present with respect to the injunction and a future 
with respect to the thing enjoined. 

472. In many verbs a compound of the imperative may be used to 
express an injunction to have a thing done previously to another; as, 
ayez dine avant que je revienne, have dined before I return. 

EXERCISE ON THE IMPERATIVE. 
Be not fond of praise ; but seek virtue, which pro- 

sing, passionni pour art. louange f. art. at- 

cures it. Let us remember that unless virtue guide us, our 

tirer se souvenir a moins que art. ne 

choice must be wrong. Let us not be deceived by the first 

devoir F. mauvais. se laisser prendre a 

appearances of things ; but let us take time to fix our judgment. 

art. se donner art. de 

Arbiters of the destinies of men, do good, if you wish to be happy ; 
Arbitre destme'e art. art bien vouloir * 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 161 

do good, if you wish that your memory should be honored ; do good, if 

Q. 
you wish that heaven should open to you its 2 etemal 'gates. Never 

art. Q.. parte f. 

forget that the 2 truly s free 'man is he who, superior to all fears 
veritablement digage de f. sing 

and all desires, is subject only to God and to reason. 
de m. sing. soumis ?ie que art. f. 



Of the Subjunctive. 

473. The subjunctive is that mood which expresses a subordination to 
what precedes. With this dependence it forms a sense, and none without. 
Je voudrais quit lut, forms a sense, but qiCil lut, alone and unconnected, 
does not. 

4-74. This mood contains four tenses : the present — which sometimes 
expresses a future — the imperfect, the preterit, and the pluperfect. 

475. The present and \he future of the subjunctive can only be distin- 
guished by the sense. In this phrase, 77 fiut que je vous sois bien 
attache pour xenir vous voir par le temps qiCil fait, I must have a great 
esteem for you to come and see you in such weather as this, je sois ex- 
presses a present time; but in this, Je ne crois pas que vous obtenie: 
cela de lui, I do not think you will obtain that of him, vous obieniez 
expresses a future, and stands for vous obtiendrez. 

476. The imperfect, the preterit, and the pluperfect of the subjunctive 
express also a past or future, according to circumstances. In this phrase, 
Sonpconniez-vous quil ne le fit pas ? Did you suspect he would not do 
it, ft expresses a past; but in this, Je desirerais qu'il vit du monde, I 
wish him to see company, vit marks a future. 

EXERCISE ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

2 Men 'must 'be (very much) blinded by their passions, not to 
art. ilfaut que bien aveugle pour 

acknowledge that they ought (to love one another) as parts of a 

convenir devoir F. s' entr aimer art. 

whole, and as 2 (the members of our body) '(would do) if (every one) 
tout, chacun 

had a particular 'vitality. You asked him to come with us, but I 

sa vie. prier G. de 

doubt whether he will have that complaisance. I could not persuade 

que Q. H. 

myself that he was so vain as to aspire to that place. Though every 

S assez * pour f. 

body says so, I do not believe that he is gone to Rome. (Is it possible) 
Q- le, Q. se pouvoir F. 

that he should let slip 2 so ? good 'an ^opportunity of acquiring 

laisser R. echapper beau occasion f. A. tin 

2 immortal ' glory ] I could have wished that he had availed himself of his 

profterT. 
abode in the country to perfect himself in the study of philosophy 
sejour a campagne pour se perfectionner art. f 

2 



162 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

Of the Infinitive. 

477. The infinitive is that mood which affirms indeterminately, without 
either number or person. 

478. It denotes of itself neither present, past, nor future, except when 
it follows other verbs. The present always expresses a present, relative 
to the preceding verb ; as, je le vois, je le vis. je le verrai venir, I see, I 
saw, I shall see him come. The past always expresses a past, relative to 
the verb that precedes it ; as, je crois, je croyais V avoir vu venir, I think, 
I thought that I had seen him coming. To express a future, the infinitive 
must be preceded by the infinitive of the verb devoir ; as, je croyais 
devoir y alter, I thought I was to go there. 

479. Remark. The infinitive also expresses a future after the verbs 
permettre, esperer, compter, s'attendre, and menacer ; as, il promet de 
venir (qu 9 il viendra), he promises to come (that he will come) ; il 
menace de s 9 y rendre (qiCil s 9 y rendraj, he threatens to go (that he 
will go) there. 

EXERCISE ON THE INFINITIVE 

We only shut our eyes to truth, because we fear to 2 see 
ne * art. art. que parce que de 

'ourselves as we are. We were yet far from the castle, when 

nous tel que H. encore 

one of our friends came to join us. I did not think I was to set 

J. * H. * devoir A. * 

out so soon. He promises every day that he will amend, but I do 

de * * se corriger A. 
not rely upon his promises. They talk of a 2 secret 'expedition; he 

compter promesse f. On 

hopes to be (in it). He relies upon seeing you (very soon) to 

* en. compter * A au premier jour pour 

terminate amicably his affair with you. You expected to take a 

a I 9 amiable s 9 attendre H. faire 

journey this year, but your father has changed his mind. He threat- 
voyage m. de * avis. 

ens to punish us severely, if we (fall again) into the same error. 
de stvtrement retomber faute. 



OF THE PARTICIPLE. 

480. The participle is a part of the verb which partakes of the properties 
both of a verb and an adjective : of a verb, as it has its signification and 
regimen — of an adjective, as it expresses the quality of a person or thing, 

481. There are two participles, the participle present and the parti' 
ciple past. 

Of the Participle Present. 

482. The participle present always terminates in ant ; as, aimant, 
finissant, recevant, rendant. 

483. Rule. The participle present remains unchanged, and takes 
neither gender nor number when it expresses an action ; as, une montagne, 
or des montagnes dominant sur des plaines immense*, a mountain, or 



SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 163 

mountains commanding immense plains ; un homme, des homines, une 
femme, des femmes lisant, parlant, marchant, a man, men, a woman, 
women reading, speaking, walking. But when, like an adjective, it ex- 
presses simply a quality, it takes both the gender and number of its sub- 
stantive ; as, un homme obligeant, an obliging man ; une femme obligeante, 
an obliging woman ; des tableaux parlans, speaking portraits ; la religion 
dominante, the established religion ; a la nuit tombante, at night fall. 

484. What grammarians call' gerund is nothing but the participle 
present, to which the word en is prefixed ; on se forme V esprit en lisant 
de bons livres, we form our minds by reading good books. 

EXERCISE ON THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

That mountain being very high, and thus commanding a vast 
eleve, ainsi dominer sur grande 

extent of country, was very well calculated for our observations. This 
itendue pays, H. * propre a 

woman is of good disposition, obliging every one whenever she 

car act ere m. tout le monde quand 

(has it in her power). They go cringing before the great, that they 

en a le pouvoir. Tamper devant pi. afin de * 

may be insolent to their equals. The state of pure nature is that of 

* A. avec egal. 

the savage living in the desert, but living in his family, knowing his 

famille f. connaitre 
children, loving them, (making use) of speech, and (making himself 

user ait. parole, se /aire 

understood). An 2 agreeable Uangor imperceptibly (laying hold) 
entendre. langueur f. insensiblement s'emparer 

of my senses, suspended the activity of my soul, and I (fell asleep) 
sens, suspendre J. s'endormir J. 

Time is a real blunderer, placing, replacing, ordering, disordering, 
art. vrai brouillon, mettre, remettre, ranger, deranger, 

impressing, erasing, approaching, removing, and making all things, good 
imprimer, effacer, appro cher, eloigner, rendre f. 

and bad ; and almost always (impossible to be known again). 
presque me connais sable. 

Of the Participle Past. 

485. The participle past has various terminations ; as, aimS,Jini, *>ectii 
ouvert, dissous, &c. 

486. This participle sometimes agrees with its subject and sometimes 
with its regimen. 

Agreement of the Participle Past with its Subject. 

487. Rule I. The particible past, when accompanied by the auxiliary 
verb ttre, agrees with its subject in gender and number. 

EXAMPLES. 

JHon frere est tombi, My brother is fallen. 

JVLes freres sont tombe's, My brothers are fallen. 

JWa soeur est tombie, My sister is fallen. 

Mes saurt font tombtet, My sisters are fallen 



164 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE 

La nuit sera bientbt passe*e, The night will soon be over* 

Les spectacles sont frequent es, The theatres are frequented. 

Cette fleur est fort recherchee, This flower is much sought after, 

lis sont fort estimes, They are very much esteemed. 

EXERCISE ON THE PARTICIPLE PAST. 

Fire-arms were not known to the ancients. Ishmael, the son of 
art. arme-a-feu f. H. connu de Ismail, * 

Abraham, is known among the Arabs as (the man) from whence they 
parmi Arabe celui 

sprung, and circumcision has remained (among them) as the 
etre sorti G. art. f. e£re demeure leur 

mark of their origin. Heaven is that permanent 'city (into which) 

f. art. cite f. ou 

the just are to be received after this life. In 2 Abraham's ] time, 

pi. devoir * apres De art 

the threatening^ of the true God was dreaded by Pharaoh, king of Egypt; 

menace f. H. redoute de Pharaon, 

but in the time of Moses, all nations were corrupted, and the world, 

JWo'ise, art. f. H. perverti, 
which God has made to manifest his power, was become a temple of 

pour pouvoir, H. devenu 

idols. That 2 dreadful 'crisis which threatened the state with 2 instant 
terrible crise f. H. de prochain 

'destruction, was happily soon over. She is come to bring us all 

f. J. heureusement passe. * 

kinds of refreshments. The sciences have always been 

sorte f. sing, rafratchissement. f. 

protected by 2 enlightened 'governments. 
protege art.. eclair e 

438. Rule II. The participle past, when it follows the verb avoir, 
never agrees with its subject. 

JMonfrtre a ecrit, My brother has written. 

JSIes freres ont ecrit, My brothers have written. 

JMa soeur a ecrit, My sister has written. 

J\fes sceurs ont ecrit, My sisters have written. 

Les Amazones ont acquis de la The Amazons have acquired cele- 

celtbrite, brity. 
Pai contraint les soldats a marcher, I have forced the soldiers to march. 

489. Remark. The participle of the verb etre, and of all the neuter 
verbs which are conjugated with the auxiliary verb avoir, never vary; as, 
il or elle a ete, he or she has been ; ils or elles ont ete, they have been ; 
il or elle a dormi, he or she has slept ; ils or elles out nui, they have 
annoyed. 

EXERCISE. 
The Romans successively triumphed over the 2 most warlike 'na- 
Romainssuccessivement G. de belliqueux 

tions. Lampridius relates that Adrian erected to Jesus Christ some 
raconter Adrien elever I. de 

temples, which (were still to be seen) in his time. Happy those 
art. on encore voir H. de * 



SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 165 

princes who have never (made use) of their power but to do 
art. user pouvoir que pour 

good ! We have spent the whole day in tormenting ourselves. 
art. bien! journeei. a A. nous. 

One has seldom seen a great stock of good sense in a man of ima- 
On rarement fonds m. sens a 

gination. The errors of Descartes (proved very useful) to Newton. 

beaucoup servir G. 

Agreement of the Participle Past with its Regimen. 

490. Rule I. The participle past always agrees with its regimen 
direct, when that regimen is placed before the participle, whether the 
auxiliary verb that accompanies it be avoir or etre. 

EXAMPLES. 

Les ecoliers que fai eus, ont fait a^e The pupils whom I have had, have 

grands pr ogres, made rapid progress. 

Lucrece s'est tuee, Lucretia has killed herself. 

Jai renvoye les livres que vous I have sent back the books which 

irCaviez pretes, you had lent me. 

Que de soins je me suis donnes ! What pains I have taken ! 

Quelle affaire avez-vous entre- What business have you under- 

prise ? taken 1 

Quand la race de Cain se fat mulr When the race of Cain had mai- 

tipliee, tiplied. 

Cesyeux que rfont emus ni soupirs Those eyes which neither sigiis 

ni terreur, nor terror have moved. 

Le Dieu Mercure est un de ceux The god Mercury is one of those 

que les anciens ont le plus mul- whom the ancients have multi- 

tiplies, plied the most. 

491. Remabk. The regimen which precedes the participle is either 
one of these pronouns — que, me, te, se, le, la, les, nous, and vous — or a 
noun sometimes joined to the pronoun quel, sometimes preceded by the 
word of quantity, combien or que — signifying combien, how much — as 
may be seen in the examples already given. 

EXERCISE ON THE AGREEMENT OF THE PARTICIPLE 
PAST WITH ITS REGIMEN. 

All the letters which I have received, confirm that important 'news. 
f. conjirmer sing. 

The 2 agitated 'life which I have led till now, makes me sigh 
agite f. mener jus qu' 'a present, soupirer 

for retirement. The difficulties which the academies (have pro- 

cures art. retraite f. f. se 

posed to one another) do not seem easy to (be resolved). The 

faife G. paraitre aise resoudre. 

sciences which you have studied will prove infinitely useful (to you). 

f. etre 

The death which Lucretia (gave herself) has (made her .mmortal). The 
f. se donner G. immortalises G. 

cities which those nations have (built for themselves) are but a 
ville f. peuple se bdtir G. nt que 



166 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 

collection of huts. The persons whom you have instructed appear to 

amas in. chaamicre. f. 

me possessed of reason and taste. Nothing can equal the ardor of 

plein de egaler 

the troops which I have seen (setting off). The chimeras which she 
f. A. chimere f. 

has got in her head (are beyond) all belief. What measures 
se mettre * art. passer croyancef. demarche f, 

have I not taken ! What fortunes has not this revolution ruined ! 

faire ! f. renverser ! 

What tears has she not shed ! what sighs has she not heaved ! The 
Que de f. verser ! m. pousser ! 

Amazons (made themselves) famous by their courage. The city of 

f. se rendre G. celebre f. 

London (has made itself), by its commerce, the metropolis of the mu- 
ni, me'iropole f. 
verse. I have thought her agitated by the furies. This day is one 

croire 
of those which they have consecrated to tears. The language in 
m. consacrer art. langue f. * 

which Cicero and Virgil have written will live in their works. I 

Ciceron Virgile par ouvrage. 

could have wished to avoid entering into those details, but I thought 
voidoir * eviter d'entrer A. m. croire G. 

them necessary. The tribunes demanded of Clodius the execution 

tribun m. J. a 

of the promises which the consul Valerius had given them, 
f. faire leur. 

492. Rule II. The participle past never agrees with its regimen, 
either when that participle is without regimen direct or when, having a 
regimen direct, that regimen is placed after it. 

EXAMPLES. 

La lettre dont je vous ai parte , The letter which I have mentioned 

to you. 
La perte et les profits aiixquels il a The loss and profits which he has 

participe, shared. 

Les academies se sont fait des ob- The academies have proposed ob- 

jections, jections to one another. 

Vous avez instruit ces personnes a You have taught these persons to 

dessiner, draw. 

Lucrece s'est donni la mort f Lucretia has put a period to her 

existence. 

EXERCISE. 

The persons whose 5 visit 'you 3 had 4 announced to 2 me, are not 
f. art. f. *- 

come. Men built themselves cities. The Amazons acquired 
art. se bdtir G. * G. 

great celebrity. I have forced the soldiers to march. That 
beaucoup de contraindre 

woman (has bestowed on herself) fine gowns. 3 Letters ""and 

se donner G. de art. 



SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 167 

5 writing ! were invented to represent speech. She has 
art. ecriture on a pour peinrfre art. parole. 

cut two (of her) fingers. Titus has made his wife mistress of his 
se couper * doigt m. rendre 

riches. I have given myself (a great deal) of trouble. Commerce 
bien. bien art. peine f. art. m. 

has made this city flourishing. They have made an appointment. 
rendre f. Jlorissant. se donner * rendezvous. 

4-93. Rule III. The participle past takes neither gender nor number 
when the participle and the auxiliary verb to w r hich it is joined are used 
impersonally, nor when that participle is followed by a verb which governs 
the pronoun or pronouns preceding it. 

EXAMPLES. 

Les chaleurs excessives qiVil a fait The excessive heats which we have 
cet ete, out beaucoup nui a la had this summer have done great 
re colt e, injury to the corn. 

Quelle fdcheuse aventure vous est-il What unpleasant adventure have 
arrive ? you met with 1 

La maison que fai fait bdtir, The house w T hich I have ordered 

to be built. 

Jmitez les vertus que vous avez Imitate the virtues w 7 hich you have 
entendu louer, heard praised. 

Les mathematiques que vous rVavez The mathematics which you would 
pas voulu que fetudiasse, not permit me to study. 

Kile s'est laisse seduire, She has suffered herself to be se- 

duced. 

494. Remark. To make a right application of the second part of this 
rule, we ought to examine whether we can put the regimen immediately 
after the participle. As we cannot say, J'ai fait la maison, vous avez 
entendu les vertus, vous iVavez pas voulu les mathematiques, it follows 
that the regimen belongs to the second verb. Sometimes, however, the 
regimen may relate either to the participle or to the following verb, 
according to the meaning of the speaker. Thus, Je Vai vu peindre, 
means, I saw her picture drawn ; but Je Vai vue peindre, signifies, I saw 
her painting. 

495. Sometimes it happens likewise that, in sentences which seem to 
resemble each other, the regimen in one belongs to the participle and in 
the other to the verb which follows it. For instance, this question — Avez 
vous entendu chanter la nouvelle actrice ? Have you heard the new 
actress sing] — should be thus answered, Oui,je Vai entendue, chanter ; 
Yes, I have : but this question — Avez-vous entendu chanter la nouvelle 
arielte? Have you heard the new song? — must be answered, Oui,je Vai 
entendu chanter ; Yes, I have. 

EXERCISE. 

The great changes which (have taken place) in the administration 
changement y avoir G. 

have astonished many people. The heavy rains which (we 

bien des persomies. grand phue f. it 

have had) in the spring have been the cause of many diseases. The 
faire G. maladie £ 



168 SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 

scarcity which there was 2 last Kvinter has afforded the opportunity 

dlsette f. G. art. dernier donner occasion 

of doing much good. What news (has reached you?) (How many) 

A. bien. vous esi-ilvenu? Que de 

imprudent steps (were taken) on that occasion ! How many large 
faux demarche f. il s'est fait en gros 

ships have been built in England within these fifty years ! The 

il se construire G. depuis * 

figures which you have learned to draw are of great beauty. [We 

apprendre dessiner un II 

ought) never to swerve from the good path which we have begun 

falioir F. * s* eloigner route f. on 

to follow. The measures which you advised me to adopt have 

mesure f. conseiller G. de prendre 

not succeeded. The rule which I have begun to explain seems to 

reussir. regie f. expliquer sembler 

me very easy to (be understood). You see that I have not been mistaken 
saisir A. se tromper G. 

respecting the affairs which I had foreseen you would have in hand. 

prevoir que * * 



CHAPTER VI. 
OF THE ADVERBS. 



Situation of the Adverbs. 



496. Rule I. In the simple tenses, the adverb is generally placed 
after the verb, and, in the compound tenses, between the auxiliary and 
the participle. 

EXAMPLES. 
Uhomme le plus 6clair6 est ordi- The man who is most learned is 

nairement celui qui pense le plus generally he who thinks most 

modestemerrt de lui-mcme, modestly of himself. 

Avez-vous jamais vu un pedant plus Have you ever seen a pedant more 

absurbe et plus vain? absurd and more vain? 

497 Compound adverbs, and those which have or might have a regi- 
men like the adjectives from which they are derived, are always placed 
after the verb. 

EXAMPLES. 
Cest a la mode. That is fashionable. 

II a agi const quemment, He has acted consistently. 

498. Adverbs which denote time in an indeterminate manner are like- 
wise placed after the verb. 

EXAMPLES. 
II cut fallu se lever plus matin, It would have been necessary to 

rise earlier. 
On a vu cela autrefois. That has been seen formerly 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERBS. 169 

499. Exceptions. 1st. — Adverbs of order, rank, and those which 
express a determinate time, are placed either before or after the verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

Nous devons premie rement /aire We ought, first, to do our duty; 

710 tre devoir; secondement, cher- secondly, enjoy lawful pleasures. 

cher les plaisirs permis, 
Aujourd'hui il fait beau; il pleuvra To-day it is fine ; it will rain per- 

peut-etre demain, haps to-morrow. 

500. 2d. — These adverbs — comment, ou, (Toil, par oil, combien, pour- 
guoi, guand, used with or without interrogation — are always placed before 
the verb which they modify. 

EXAMPLES. 
Comment vous portez-vous ? How do you do 1 
Oil allez-vous ? Where are you going ? 

Fl ne sait comment sy prendre, He does not know how to set about it. 

501. Rule II. The adverb is always placed before the adjective which 
it modifies. 

EXAMPLE. 
C'est ur.e femme fort belle, tres- She is a woman very beautiful, of great 
sensible, et infiniment sage, sensibility, and infinitely prudent. 

502. Rule III. Adverbs of quantity and comparison; and the three 
adverbs of time — souvent, toujours, jamais — are placed before the other 
adverbs. 

EXAMPLES. 
Si poliment, fort poliment, So politely, very politely 

Tres-heureusement, Very happily. 

Le plus adroitement, The most skilfully. 

Us ne seront jamais etroitement urns, They never will be intimately united 
Us sont toujours ensemble, [arrive, They are always together. 
C'est souvent a Vimproviste qu'il He often comes unexpectedly. 

503. Souvent may, however, be preceded by an adverb of quantity or 
comparison ; as, si souvent, assez souvent, fort souvent, plus souvent 9 
mains souvent, trop souvent. 

504. Remark. When adverbs of quantity and comparison meet toge- 
ther in a sentence, the following is the order which custom has established : 

Si peu Bien peu f Beaucoup trop Taut mieux 

Trop peu Bien plus Beaucoup plus Tant pis 

Tres-peu Bien davantage Beaucoup moins &c. 

505. When bien stands before another adverb, it means very, much., 
&c, as in the preceding and following examples. 

Bien assez, Quite enough. Frapper bien fort, To strike very hard 
Bien moins, Much less. Bien tard, Very late. 

506. But when it is placed after the adverb, it signifies -well; as, 
Assez bien, Pretty well. Fort bitn, Very well. 
Moins bien, Not so well. Aussi bien, A.s well. 

f Beaucoup is not, as the English much, susceptible of being modified by anjr 
adverb preceding; thus, trfe-beaucoup, trop beaucoup, &x. would be barbarism 

P 



170 



SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 



CHAPTER VII. 



OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 



507. The conjunction que serves to complete a comparison ; it is 
elliptically used to express a restriction when placed after ne, and it gene- 
rally gives grace, energy, and precision to sentences. 

EXAMPLES. 

" VAsie est plus" 
gr ancle que V Eu- 
rope, 

i parle que tie" 
nouvelle vie- \ 



auE, 



expressing compari- 
son, 



for Hen que 



— je souhaite que 

— a, moins que 

— avant que 

— sans que 

— des que 

— aussitdt que 

— si, or quand 

— soit que 



COnnep 
^ la ?io 
(_ toire, 
CQu'il vive, 
< souhaite 
C_ vive. 



pour je 
qu'*7 



Cela ne finira pas 
qu^'Z ne vienne. 



Asia is larger than 
Europe. 

) They tafo of nothing 
but the new vie 

\ tory. 

) May he live, for 1 
-wish that he may 

\ live. 

\ There will he no 

> end to it, unless 

\ he come. 



Qu'il fasse le moi?i-~) If he commits the 
Jre exces, il est > least excess, he is 
malade, J ill. 

fQ ) \i , ilperde,ouq t u y iP[ Wliether he gains 



i 



gagne son proces, I 



— jusqu a ce que 

— pourquoi ? 

— comme 

— combien 



ii'i'Q 



or loses his law- 
suit, he is a ruined 
man. 



Wait till he comes. 



I 



e'est un homme C 
ruine*, J 

Attendez qu'* 

vienne, 
Que ne se corrige- ? Why does he not 

t-il ? 5 reform 1 

Mediant qu^7 es£, Wicked as he is. 
Que Z>/ew est ? /Tow great is the 

grand ! 5 Almighty ! 

Que je hais les mi- ? Hoiv much I hate 
L chans ! 5 the wicked ! 



EXERCISE ON THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
We have every thing to fear from his wisdom, even more than from 

encore 

his power. What men style greatness, glory, power, profound 

Ce que art. appeler profond 

policy, is in the eyes of God only misery, weakness, and vanity. 

politique f. a 

May they understand, at last, that without ^internal ] peace, there 

comprendre, avec soi-meme art. 

is no happiness. May she be as happy as she deserves to be ! 

point de de le 

Never write before you have thoroughly 'examined the subject 

que Q. sous toutcs ses faces 

which you propose to treat. Let him but hear the least noise, his 
se proposer de trailer. • 



SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS, 171 

2 terrified 'imagination presents to him nothing but monsters. Do 
effraye f. * ne que 

not sift this question till I (can be your guide). Do not go 

approfondir ne vous mettre Q. sur la voie. 

out till your brother comes in. Why does he not (take advantage) of 

ne rentrer Q. profiter 

his youth, (in order to) acquire the knowledge he wants ? 

pour connaissance pi. dont avoir besom, 

508. Another frequent use of the conjunction que is to save the repe- 
tition of comme, parceque, puis que, quand, quoi que, si, &c, when to 
phrases beginning with these words, others are added under the same 
regimen, by means of the conjunction et ; as, 

Si Von aimait son pays, et qiCon en If we loved our country, and 
desirdt sincerement la gloire, on sincerely wished its glory, we 
se conduirait de manitre, &c. should act so as &c. 

EXERCISE. 
Full as he was of his prejudices, he would not acknowledge 
liempli H. prejuge, J. convenir de 

(any thing). Full 2 of 3 self-love '(as he is), expect nothing good 

rien. Petri 

(from him). 'How 6 beautiful 5 is 2 that Cultivated ^nature ! How, by 
en pur 

the care of man, it is brilliantly and richly adorned ! Had 

f. pompeusement orne ! si * de 

profound philosophers presided at the formation of languages, and 

I. a art. langue, que 

had they carefully examined the elements of speech, not only in 

avec soin T. m. art. discours, non 

their relations (to one another), but also in themselves, it is not 

entr'eux encore en m. 

(to be doubted), that languages would present principles more 

douteux art. ne offrir S. 

ample, and, at the same time, more luminous. 



Government of Conjunctions. 

509. The conjunctions which unite sentences to one another are fol- 
lowed either by the infinitive, the indicative, or the subjunctive. 

510. Those which are followed by an infinitive are, 

511. 1st. — Such as are distinguished from prepositions only by being 
followed by a verb ; as, 

U faut se reposer apres avoir One ought to rest after having 
travails, labored. 

512. 2d. — Those which have the preposition de after them ; as, 

II travaille afin de vous sur passer, He works that he may surpass you. 

EXERCISE ON THE GOVERNMENT OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
They were going to spend (a few) days in town, only that 
ne * passer quelques a art. que pour 



172 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 

they might return with more pleasure to their charming solitude 

* * se retrouver A. dans 

Many persons work only (in order to) acquire consideration and riches, 

ne que afin de 
but the 2 honest, ^humane 'man spends (so much) time in 
de bien sensible ne employer tant de a 

study, only to be useful to his fellow-creatures. I reveal to you 
art. que pour semblables. devoiler 

the plot which your enemies have concerted in secret, 

trame f. ourdir art. tenebrea f. pi. 

in order to warn you against their artifices. 
premunir 

513. Conjunctions that govern the indicative 

bien attendu que, autant que, puisque, peut-etre que, 

a condition que, non plus que, lorsque, comrae, 

a la charge que, outre que, pendant que, comme si, 

de me me que, parce que, tandis que, quand, 

ainsi que, attendu que, durant que, pourquoi, 

aussi bien que, vu que, tant que, comment, &c. 

514. They are followed by the indicative, because the principal sen- 
tence, which they unite with that which is incidental, expresses the 
affirmation in a direct, positive, and independent manner. 

515. The use of the six following conjunctions, 

si non que, de sorte que, tellement que, 

si ce n'est que, en sorte que, de maniere que, 

varies according to the meaning expressed by the principal sentence. 

EXAMPLE OF THE INDICATIVE. EXAMPLE OF THE SUB JUNCTIVF. 

Je ne lui ai repondu autre chose Je ne veux autre chose, si non 

si non que f avals execute ses que vous travailliez avec plus 

ordres y d'ardeur, 

I made him no other answer but I desire nothing else but that you 

that I had executed his orders. would study with greater ardor. 

516 The indicative is required in the first sentence by the verb fai 
ripondu expressing a positive affirmation, and the subjunctive in the 
second, because je veux expresses but a desire. 

EXERCISE. 
When you have a more ^extensive 'knowledge of geometry and 

L. art. de 

algebra, I shall give you (a few) lessons in astronomy and 
art. algebre f. quelques de de 

optics. Form your mind, heart, and taste while you are still 
uptique. votre votre encore 

young. Do not keep truth a prisoner, though you should (draw 

retenir art. * captive t quand devoir N* s'at- 

upon you) a cloud of enemies. I will give you this fine picture upon 
tirer nuiei. tableau m. a 

oondition that you keep it as a testimony of my friendship* 
conserver L. tcmoignage m. 



' PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 173 

517. The conjunctions which govern the subjunctive are, 

soit que, jusqu'a ce que, suppose que, afin que, 

sans que, encore que, au cas que, de peur que, 

pour que, a moins que, avant que, de crainte que, 

.moique, pourvu que, non pas que, &c. &c. 

518. They require the subjunctive, as they always imply doubt, desire, 
ignorance. 

EXERCISE. 
You know too well the value of time, to %iake 'it 

connaitre prix m. art. pour que etre Q. il 

necessary to tell you to (make a good use of) it. Study only great 

de de bien employer art. 

models, lest those which are but middling should spoil your 

de peur que * mediocre ne gdter Q. 

taste before it be entirely formed. I (make not the least doubt) that 

ne douter F. nullement 
your method will succeed, provided it be well known. Several 

f. ne Q. f. 

phenomena of nature are easy (to be explained), supposing the 

art. a expliquer, % 

principle of Universal ] gravitation to be true 
art. f. * 



PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES on the NINE PARTS OF SPEECH 
THE GOOD MOTHER 

What a fine morning! said the amiable Charlotte to her brother 
matinee f. J. 
George. Come, let us go into the garden, and enjoy the 2 magnificent 
sing. * A. de 

'sight of 2 rich 2 and 4 a]?undant 'nature. We will gather there 
spectacle m. une fertile cueillir v 

the ^freshest 3 and 4 sweetest lowers. We will make a nosegay, which 

frais odorant f. bouquet m. 

we will offer to mamma. You know she loves flowers. This 

maman. sing, savoir que art. 

attention will give her pleasure. Ah ! brother, it will obtain us a 

faire lui mon f. valoir 

smile, a caress, perhaps even a kiss. Ah ! sister, replied 

sourirem. f. baiserm. rr.a rtpondrei, 

George, your proposal delights me ; let us run, let us fly, that 

sing, projet enchanter counY, voler, ajinde 

we may offer her (when she rises) this tribute of our gratitude and 

A. lui a son lever hommage de 

our love. Full of this idea, Charlotte and George hastened 

Plein se hater J. de se rendre 

into the garden. Charlotte gathered violets, jessamine, and (young 

J. des bou- 

rose-buds), which (had but just begun) to open their 2 purple 

tons de rose, ne commencer H. que * entr'ouvrir depourpre 

'cups, while George prepared 2 green 'sprigs of myrtle and thyme 

calice, H. verdoyant jet m. myrte thym< 

p2 



174 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 

intended to support the flowers. ^'ever 5 had 2 these s amiable ^children 
destine soutenir H. 

6 worked with (so much) zeal and ardor. Satisfaction and pleasure 
travailler taut tie ztle art. f. art. 

beamed in all their features, sparkled in their eves, and added still 
etrepezntH. trait m. petiller H. 

to their beauty. 

While they (were employing themselves) (in this manner), their 
s'occuper H. ainsi 

mother, who had seen them in the garden, came to join them. 

J. joindre 

(As soon as) they perceived her, they flew to her, and said : Ah * 

Des que J. J. elle, lui J. 

mamma, how 3 glad *we 2 are to see you ! how (impatient we were) 

que aise de que il tar dait a notre impatience 

(for) this pleasure ! In the pleasing expectation (of it) we were preparing 
a 1 ' avoir ce doux attente f. * 

this nosegay for you. What satisfaction should we have had in 

f. ne pas a 

presenting it to you ! Look at these rose-buds, these violets, this jessamine, 

offrir * Voir * 

this myrtle, and this thyme. Well, we designed them for you. 
Eh ! bien, destiner H. 
These flowers, coming from us, would have been dear to you. When 

cher En 

you wore them, you would have said, My children were thinking of 

* porter C. s'occuper 

me while I slept. I am always as present to their minds as to their 

dormir H. sing, 

hearts. They love me, and it is by giving me every day new proofs 
sing. ce en de preuvef. 

of their affection that they acknowledge the care I have taken 

reconnaitre ' soin m. pi. que 
of them in their childhood, and all the marks of tenderness I 

que 
(am unceasingly) giving them. 
ne cesser F. de A. leur. 

My dear children, replied the mother, embracing them, how 
ripondre J. en embrasser quel 

charming you render all my days! your gratitude, your tenderness, 
charme ripandre sur 

your attention to me, make me forget my former misfortunes, and 
pi. pour oublier ancicn malheur m. 

yield my heart again to the soft impressions of pleasure. May 
rouvrir * f. art. PouvoirQ. 

Heaven continue to bless my labor ! May it be your guide and 
art. continuer de soin pi. Pouvoir 

your support in the career which (will soon be opened) to you! 

souticn carriere f. . aller F. a'ouvrir devant 

may it complete its kindness by preserving you from the dangers 

viettre le comble a bienfuitp], en garantir de 

to which you (cannot fail) to be soon exposed ! Alas ! I shudder 
~ie pas tarder L. * frtwir 



PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 175 

(at them) beforehand, my dear children ; the moment is come when you 

en cTavance oil 

must enter the world. Your persons, your birth, and your 
devoir dans figure sing. naissance, 

fortune call you there, and ensure you a distinguished 'rank (in it). 

appeler y assurer m. y 

I cannot always be your guide. Young and inexperienced, you will 

L. sans experience, allerY. 

(find yourselves) surrounded by every kind of temptation. 

se trouver A. entoure sorte f. seduction. 

(Every thing), even vice, (presents itself) there under an ^agreeable 

Tout jusque a art. m. s'offrir F. y sous * 
'form, and almost always in the shape of pleasure, which has (so many) 

pi. sous image art. tant de 

attractions for youth. They will try to mislead you, to 

attrait f. oxt.jeunessef. chercher egarer 

corrupt you ; they (will make use of) artifice, raillery, and even 
employer art. art. meme 

ridicule, and, if necessary, they will assume even the mask 

il est prendre jusque a masque m. 

of virtue. If you (abandon yourselves) to first impressions, you 

art. se laisser F. aller 

are lost. The poison of example (will insinuate itself) into your 

art. se glisser L. 

hearts, will corrupt the innocence and purity (of them), and will substitute 

alter er en, 

2 violent 'passions for the mild affections which have hitherto formed 
declarant f. a doux (aire 

your happiness. 

Do not imagine, my dear children, that in placing before your eyes a 

croire en mettre sous 

picture of the dangers of the world, my intention is to prohibit 
le tableau m. Q de int».rdire 

you every kind of pleasure. (God forbid) ! Pleasure is necessary 

espcce f. a Dieu ne plaise ! art. 

to man ; without it, our existence would be dreadful ; (and therefore) 
art. lui, affreux ; aussi 

Providence, ever attentive to our wants, has multiplied the 

art. f. besoin, -t-elle 

sources of it, both in and out of ourselves. But, in tasting the 

en nous nous. en gouier 

pleasures of the world, never (abandon yourselves) (to them). Take 

se livrer F. y Avoir 

care that they do not govern you ; know how to quit them the 

dominer savoir * * de 

moment they have acquired (too much) sway over you. It is the 

que prendre L. trap de empire Ce 

only way to enjoy with delight that -exquisite 'pleasure which we 

mo yen de volupie de delicieux 

can only find in ourselves, and which has its source in an 2 upright ? and 

en dans droit 

4 pure 'conscience. Ah ! why can I not give you ail my exper'ence? 
f. que 



176 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 

Why can* you not, like me, read the depths of the heart 1 With 

dans abtmesing. pi. 

what astonishment would you often see chagrin, agitation, and 

art. m. art. 
trouble, disguised under the appearance of joy and tranquillity ; 
art. m. de guise sous apparence pi. art. du calme ; 

hatred and envy concealed under the air of confidence and 
art. f. art. f. cache art. confiance f. de 

friendship ; indifference and selfishness affecting the most lively 
la f. art. egoisme vif 

interest; 2 the most dreadful and perfidious 'plots contrived deliber- 

trame f. ourdi de sang 
ately in the dark ; in a word, 2 the most odious l vices endea- 
froidet tenebresf.^A. en art. s'ef' 

voring to show themselves under the features of 2 (their opposite) 
forcer de traits qui leur sont opposi 

Virtues! In the world, there is but one (moving principle); 
art. ne que seul mobile m. 

that is 2 self- ' interest. (To that, every) action refers, 

ce art. personnel C'est a lid que toutes art. pi. se rapporter 

every thing tends to that as to its end. I know very well, my dear 

lui fin f. savoir 

children, that your hearts will not be infected by this vice. The senti- 

de 
ments of Universal benevolence with which I (have always) 

bienveilbance * ne point cesser G. de 

inspired you, and of which I have seen you give (so many) proofs, 
A. tant de preuve } 

(remove already every fear I might have) upon that subject : but will you 

me rassurent d'avance sur point m. 

not yield to other vices not less dangerous 1 Cruel idea ! terrible 
de non f. affreux 

uncertainty ! If this misfortune were to happen, ah ! my dear children, 

f. * * arriver, H. 

instead of being the joy and consolation of my life, you would be the 

art. f. 

torment, the shame, and the disgrace (of it). You would poison 

honte f. opprobre en. empoisonner 

my days, and you would plunge a dagger into the 2 very 'bosom which 

porter * art. mortf. mcme sein m. 

gave you life. But whither is my tenderness for you hurrying me? 

art. oil tmporter F. 

No, my children ; no, I have nothing to fear ; you love me (too much) to 
Non, trop pour 

wish to afflict me so cruelly ; and I shall have the pleasure (as long as) 
VOUloir * tant que 

1 live of seeing you walk in the ways of honor and virtue. 

L. A. marcher sender art. pr. art. 



(177) 

PART III. 



IDIOMS 



OR, 

WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR PARTICULAR RULES 



CHAPTER I. 
OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 



519. The substantive performs three functions in language, 
that of the subject, the regimen, and the apostrophe. 

520. The substantive is the subject whenever it is that of 
which something is affirmed. When we say Volseau vole, 
the bird flies ; le lion ne vole pas, the lion does not fly ; the 
substantives oiseau and lion are subjects ; because it is affirmed 
of the first that it flies, and of the second that it does not fly. 

521. It is to the substantive as the subject that every tiling 
relates in a sentence. In the following, un homme juste et 
ferine n'est ebranle, ni par les clameurs d'une populace 
injuste, ni par les menaces cVun fier tyran; quand meme le 
monde brise s'ecr outer ait, il en seraitfrappe, mais non pas 
emu, the adjectives juste and/erme modify the subject homme, 
and all the rest modify un homme juste etferme. 

EXERCISE ON THE SUBSTANTIVE. 

1. A king who is inaccessible to men is inaccessible to truth also, and 
passes his life in a ferocious, inhuman grandeur : as he is continually 
afraid of being deceived, he always unavoidably is, and deserves to be so ; 
besides, he is at the mercy of slanderers and tale-bearers — a base, malicious 
tribe, who feed on venom, and invent mischief, rather than cease to injure. 

2. The good which a man does, is never lost ; if men forget it, God 
remembers and rewards it. 



(1.) Is inaccessible also, Vest aussi— ferocious, sanv age— inhuman, et farouche — as 
he is afraid, craiqnant — is, Vest — to be so, de l'etre — besides, de plus — tale-bearers, 
rapporteur— tribe, nation— feed upon, se nourrir de— mischief, ma]— to injure, de nuire. 

(2) Good, bien— a man, on— remember, s'en souvenir. 

522. The substantive is the regimen, when governed either 



178 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 

by another substantive, by an adjective, by a verb, or by a 

preposition ; as, 

La loi de Dieu, The law of God. 

Utile a riiomme, Useful to man. 

Aimer son prochain. To love one's neighbor. 

Chez son pere f At his father's. 

523. In French, a substantive cannot be governed by an- 
other substantive but by the help of a preposition ; such as de — 
as, la difficult e de Pent-reprise, the difficulty of the undertaking ; 
or a or pour — as, V abandon a ses passions, the giving way to 
one's passions ; le gout pour le plaisir, the love of pleasure. 
224. General Rule. When two substantives are found 
together — the one governing, the other governed — the former 
is generally placed first. 

EXAMPLE. 
La beaute des sentimens, la violence The beauty of sentiments, the vio- 
cles passions, la grandeur des lence of passions, the grandeur 
ex>e7imensetlessuccesmiraculeux of events, and the prodigious 
des grandes epees des heros, tout successes of the huge swords of 
cela m'entratne comme une petite heroes, all these transport me 
file. — Sevigne. like a little girl. 

525. Remark. This order is not followed — 1. When, in 
English, two substantives are joined by an s and an apostrophe 
placed after the first — thus, \s; as, the king's palace — that is, 
the palace of the king — le palais du roi. 2. When the two 
substantives form a compound word ; as, silk-stockings — that 
is, stockings of silk — bas de soie. 

EXERCISE. 

1. The silence of the night, the calmness of 'the seethe trembling light of 
the moon diffused over the surface of the water, and the dim azure of the sky 
bespangled with glittering stars, served to heighten the beauty of the scene. 

2. Nothing was heard but the -warbling of birds, or the soft breath of 
the zephyrs sporting in the branches of the trees, or the murmurs of a 
lucid rill falling from the rocks, or the songs of the young swains who 
attended Apollo. 

3. A smiling boy was, at the same time, caressing a lap-dog, which is 
his mother's favorite, because it pleases the child. 

4. There are several gold and silver mines in this beautiful country; 
but the inhabitants, simple, and happy in their simplicity, do not even 
deign to* reckon gold and silver among their riches. 

'I) Trembling tremblant— diffused, repandu— dim, sombre — bespangled, pnrseme 
'\<>—hc.)(r/),,cn, rehailSSer — scene, spectacle. 

■ L' but, on m: plus que — breath, haleine — sporting (iphieh sported), qui 
ie» II —branches, rameaux — lucid rill, eau claire— falling, (which fell) — swains 
'. Buivre ll. 
(3.) S niling boy, enfant d'uu air riant— was caressing, raresser — lap-dog, bichon— 
pleases, amuser, fc 

* in the following exercises, when an asterisk [*] is put after an English word, 
it show? tha*. that word is not to be expressed in French. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 179 

526. The substantive is an apostrophe whenever it is the 
object addressed ; as, Rois, peuples, terre, mer, et vous, cieux 
ecoutez-moi! — Kings, nations, earth, sea and you heaven, 
listen to me ! In this sentence, the substantives rois, peuples, 
terre, mer, and cieux, form an apostrophe. 

527. N. B.- — It is only in highly oratorical language that trie 
address is thus directed to inanimate or absent objects. 

EXAMPLE OF A BEAUTIFUL APOSTROPHE. 
O, Hippias ! Hippias ! I shall never see thee again ! O, my dear Hip- 
pias ! it is I, cruel and void of compassion, who taught thee to despise 
death. Cruel gods ! ye prolonged my life only that I might see the death 
of Hippias ! O, my dear child, whom I had brought up with so much 
care, I shall see thee no more. O, dear shade, summon me to the banks 
of the Styx ; the light grows hateful to me ; it is thou only, my dear 
Hippias, whom I wish to see again. Hippias, Hippias ! O, my dear Hip 
pias ! I live but to pay the last duty to thy ashes. — Fenelon. 

Never, ne plus — void of compassion, raoi impitoyable — taught, apprendre — pro- 
longed, prolonger — only that I might, pour me faire — brought up, nourrir G.-with so 
much care, et qui me couterG. tant de soins — shade, ombre — szimmon, appeler — to, 
but — banks, rive — grows hateful, etre odieux — I live but to, ne vivre encore que poui 
—pay, rendre— ashes, cendre. 



CHAPTER II. 

OF THE ARTICLE. 



528. General Principle. — The article is to be used before 
all substantives common, taken in a determinate sense, unless 
there be another word performing the same office ; but it is 
not to be used before those that are taken in an indeter- 
minate sense 



Cases in which the Article is to he used. 

529. Rule I. — The article necessarily accompanies all 
substantives common, which denote a whole species of things 
or determinate things. 

EXAMPLES. 

L'homme se repait trap souvent de Man too often feeds on chimeias. 

chimeres, % 

Les hommes a imagination sont tou- Men of fanciful dispositions are 

jours malheureux, always unhappy. 

L'homme clont vous parlez est ires- The man you speak of is very 

instruit, learned. 



180 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 

530. In the first example, the word homme is taken in its 
fullest sense ; it denotes a collective universality. In the 
second, les homines a imagination denotes a whole particular 
class. In the third, V homme denotes but one individual, being 
restricted by the incidental proposition clont vous parlez. 

531. Remark. — In English, the article is not used before 
substantives taken in a general sense ; as, Men of genius, 
women of sound understanding. 

EXERCISE ON THE ARTICLE. 

1. The moment elegance, the most visible image of fine taste, appears, 
it is universally admired : men differ respecting the other constituent parts 
of beauty, but they all unite without hesitation in acknowledging the 
power of elegance. 

2. Men of superior genius, while they* see the rest of mankind pain- 
fully* struggling to comprehend obvious truths, glance themselves* 
through* the most remote consequences, like lightning through a track 
that cannot be measured. 

3. The man ivho lives under an habitual sense of the divine presence, 
preserves a perpetual cheerfulness of temper, and enjoys every moment 
the satisfaction of thinking himself* in company with the dearest and 
best of friends. 



(1.) The moment, du moment que— fine, delicat — appears, se montrer — is, elle est— 
respecting, sur— constituent, (which constitute) — hesitation, hesiter — in, pour. 

(2 ) While, tandis que — struggling, se tourmenter — obvious, qui s'offrent d'elle- 
memes— glance, i!s penetrent en un instant. — lightning, foudre, f. — through, traverse 
— track, espace — that, qu'on — be measured, mesurer. 

(3.) Under, dans — sense, conviction— preserves, conserver— perpetual, constant — 
cheerfulness, gaiete — temper, caractere— enjoys, jouir de— of thinking, se croire— in, 
dans la — with, de. 

532. Rule II. — The article is put before substantives em- 
ployed in the sense of an extract, or denoting only a part of 
a species ; but it is omitted if they be preceded by an adjec- 
tive or a word of quantity. 

EXAMPLES. 

Du pain et de l'eau me feraient Some bread and water would please 

plaisir, me. 

Jc vis /tier des savans qui ne pen- I yesterday saw some learned men, 

sent pas comme vons, who do not think as you do. 

Vnila de beaux tableaux, There are beautiful pictures. 

J'achet'ai hier beaucoup de livres, I bought yesterday many books. 

Que de livres facnetai filer ! How many books I bought yesterday ! 

533. Remark. — Among the words of quantity must be 
i koned plus, mains, pas, point, and jamais. 

EXAMPLES. 
II lCu fut jamais plus de lumieres, There never was more learning. 
// y a moinn (fhabitans a Paris There are fewer inhabitants in Pans 

<///'<} Londres, than in London. 

1- n§ i»ant/in pah (fa mis, I do not want for friends, 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 181 

534. Exceptions. — Bien is the only word of quantity 
which is followed by the article. 

EXAMPLES. 

II a bien de V esprit, He has a great deal of wit. 

Bile a bien de la grace, She is very graceful. 

535. Remark. — The sense of extract is marked in English 
by the word some or any, either expressed or understood, 
which answers to quelques, a particular adjective, and conse- 
quently to die, de la, de l\ des, which are elegantly used 
instead of quelque, quelques, &c. 

536. These expressions — des petit s-maitres, des petits- 
pates, &c. — are not exceptions to this rule ; because, in cases 
of this kind, the substantives are so united with the adjectives 
as to form but one and the same word. We should likewise 
say, le propre des belles actions, les sentimens des ancien? 
philosophes, &c. ; because, in expressions of this kind, the 
substantives are taken in a general sense. 

EXERCISE. 

1. We could not cast our eyes on either shore without seeing opulent 
cities, country houses agreeably situated, lands yearly covered with a golden 
harvest, meadows abounding in flocks and herds, husbandmen bending 
under the weight of the fruits, and shepherds who made the echoes around 
them repeat the sweet sounds of their pipes and flutes. 

2. Provence and Languedoc produce oranges, lemons, Jigs, olives, 
almonds, chestnuts, peaches, apricots, and grapes, of an uncommon 
sweetness. 

3. The man who has never seen this pure light is as* blind* as* one* 
who is born blind : he dies without having seen any thing ; at most, he 
perceives nothing but glimmering and false lights, vain shadows and 
phantoms that have no reality. 

4. Among the Romans, those who were convicted of having used illicit 
or unworthy means to obtain an employ, were excluded from it for ever. 

5. Those who govern are like the celestial bodies, which have great 
splendor and no rest, 

6. What beauty, sweetness, modesty, and, at the same time, what 
nobleness and greatness of soul ! 

7. Themistocles, in order to ruin Aristides, made use of many artifices, 
which would have covered him with infamy in the eyes of posterity, had not 
the eminent services which he rendered his country blotted out that stain. 

(1 ) Could, pouvoir, H. — our, les— either, les deux — seeing, apercevoir, A.— yearly, 
tons lea ana — covered with, qui se couvrent de— abounding in. remplis de— flocks and 
herds, troupeau— bending, qui etaient accabks— weight, poids— shepherds, bergers — 
pipes, chahtmeau — the echoes, aux echos — around them, d'alentour. 

(3.) Who is born blind, aveugle ne— without having, n'avoir jamais, C. — any thing, 
rien — at most, tout au plus— perceives nothing but, apercevoir ne que — glimmering, 
sombre— lights, lueur— no reality, rien de reel. 

(4.) Used, employer — illicit or unworthy means, moyen illicite ou voie indigne, pi. 
were, U.—from it, en. 

(5.) Great, beaucoup de— splendor, eclat— no rest (that have no rest), repos. 

(6.) IVhat, que de. (7.) Ruin, perdre — made use of many, employer J. bien- 

artific.es, manoeuvres— with, de— infamy, opprobre— in, a— liad, si— rendered, G. a— 
blotted out, effacer, T. — stain tachtt. 

Q 



182 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 

8. The consequences of great passions are blindness of mini] and 
depravity of heart. 

9. Noblemen should never forget that their high birth imposes great 
duties on* them. 

(9.) Noblemen, gentilhomine — should, devoir, F. 

537. Rule III. — The article is put before proper names of 
countries, regions, rivers, winds, and mountains. 

EXAMPLES. 

La France a les Pyrenees et la France is bounded on tbe south by 
Mediterranee an sud, la Suisse the Pyrenees and the Mediterra- 
et la Savoie a Vest, les Pays- nean, on the east by Switzerland 
Has au nord, et Vocean a and Savoy, on the north by the 
Vouest, Netherlands, and on the west by 

the ocean. 

La Tamise, le Rhone, Vaquilon, The Thames, the Rhone, the north 
les Jllpes, le Cantal, wind, the Alps, the Cantal. 

533. Remark. — By apposition we find the words le mont 
Pa/nasse, le rr^ont Valerien, &c, lefleuve Don, &c. But we 
should say, la montagne de Tar are, &c, la riviere de Seine, 
&c, though never lefleuve du Rhone, but simply le Rhone. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Europe is bounded on the north by the Frozen Ocean; on the 
south by the Mediterranean Sea, which separates it from Africa, ; on the 
east by the continent of Asia ; on the west by the Atlantic Ocean. It 
contains the following states: — on the north, Norway, Sweden, Den- 
mark, and Russia ; in the middle, Poland, Prussia, Germany, the 
United Provinces, the Netherlands, France, Switzerland, BoJiemia, 
Hungary, the British Isles ; on the south, Spain, Portugal, Italy, 
Turkey in Europe. 

2. The principal rivers in Europe are, the JFolga, the Don or Tana'is, 
and the BoristJienes or Nivper, in Muscovy; the Danube, the Rhine, 
and the Elbe, in Germany ; the Vistula or Wezel, in Poland ; the Loire, 
the Seine, the Rhone, and the Garonne, in France ; the Ebro, the Tagus, 
and the Douro, in Spain ; the Po, in Italy ; the Thames and the Severn, 
in England ; and the Shannon, in Ireland. 

3. The principal mountains in Europe are, the Daarne Fields, between 
Norway and Sweden; Mount Crapel, between Poland and Hungary; 

he Pyrenean Mountains, between Fiance and Spain ; the Alps, which 
divide France and Germany from Italy. 

4. The bleak north wind never blows here, and the heat of summer is 
tempered by tbe cooling zephyrs which arrive to refresh the air towards 
the middle of the day. 

(I.) Bon nrfxl, home— on, a— frozen ocean, met gl aci ale, f. — south, -sud or midi— 
Mediterranean sea, M6diterran6e, f.— east, est or orient— West, ouest or Occident — 
Bniisii isles, ilcs Bri i anniquea — Turkey in, Turquie de. 

C2 ) Muscovy, MoBCOvie— Rhine, Rhin, m.— Vistula, Vistulc, f.— Loire, {.—-Seine, f. 
— RhSne, m.— Garonne, t—Ebro, Ebre— Tagus, Tage, Di. — Thames, Tainise, f. — 
Severn, Ssverne, P. 

(3.) Pyrenean Mountains, Pyr^nc-es. 

4.1 Bleak, rigourenx — north wind, uquilon — heat, ardeur — cooling, rafraichissant 
— arrtrc, venir— to refresh, adoncir 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 183 

539. Exceptions. — The article is not used before the 
names of countries, 

540. 1, When those countries have the names of their 
capitals ; as, Naples est un pays delicieux, Naples is a de- 
lightful country. 

541. 2, When these are governed by the preposition en; 
as, il est en France, he is in France ; il est en Espagne, he 
is in Spain. 

542. 3, When those names are governed by some preceding 
noun, and have the sense of an adjective ; as, vins de France, 
French wines ; noblesse d'Angleterre, the English nobility. 

543. 4, When speaking of those countries as of places we 
come from ; as, je vims de France, I come from France ; 
f arrive oV lialie, I am just arrived from Italy. However, when 
speaking of the four parts of the world, the present practice 
favors the use of the article ; as, je viens de V Amerique, far- 
rive de V&sie. 

EXERCISE. 

1 . Naples may be called a paradise, from its beauty and fertility. - (From 
this country) ! (some suppose) Virgil took the model of the Elysian Fields. 

2. I have been a* prisoner in Egypt, as a* Phcenician : under that 
name I have long suffered, and under that name I have been set at liberty. 

3. He has received French and Spanish wines, Italian silks, Provence 
oil, and English wool. 

4. We set sa.il fro?n Holland for the Cape of Good Hope. 

5. I was but just arrived from Russia when I had the misfortune to 
lose my father. 

6. I had set otf from America when my brother arrived there. 

(1.) From, a cause do— from this country, que c'est la ou- some suppose, quelques 
personnel penser. 
(2 ) Prisoner, captii — under that name, c'est sous ce nom que. 
(4 ) Set sail, partir— /or. pour se rendre. 
(5.) I was but just, ue faire que de. 
(G.) Set off, partir— there, y. 

544. The article is also used before the names of countries, 
either distant or little known ; as, la Chine, China ; Ic Japon, 
Japan ; le Mexique, Mexico ; and before those which have 
been formed from common nouns ; as, le Havre, le Perche, 
la Fie die, &c. 

545. Remark. — In English the article is generall)^ omitted 
before the names of countries. 



Cases in which the Article is not used. 

546. Rile I. — The article is omitted before nouns common 
when, in using them, nothing is said as to the extent of their 
signification. 



184 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 

EXAMPLES. 

Le sage ria ni amour, ni hatne, The wise man has neither love nor hatred. 

lis ont renverse religion, morale, They have overturned religion, morality 
gouvernement, sciences, beaux- government, sciences, line arts, in a 
arts, en un mot, tout ce qui fait word, every thing which constitutes 
la gloire et la force cfun Etat, the glory and strength of a state. 

547. Hence the article is not employed before nouns, 
48. 1, When they are in the form of a title or an address. 
EXAMPLES. 
Preface, Preface. 77 demeure He lives in 

Livre premier, Book the first. Rue Piccadilly, Piccadilly, 

Chapitre dix, Chapter the tenth. Quartier St. James, St. James's. 

549. 2, When they are governed by the preposition en. 

EXAMPLES. " 
Regarder enpitie', To look with pity. Vivre en roi, To live as a king. 

550. 3, When they are joined to the verbs avoir or fair e, 
with which they form only one idea. 

EXAMPLES. 
Avoir peur, To he afraid. Faire pitii, To excite pity. 

551. 4, When they are used as an apostrophe or interjection. 

EXAMPLE. 

Courage, soldats, tenez ferme, Courage, soldiers, stand firm. 

552. 5, When they serve to qualify a noun or pronoun. 

EXAMPLES. 

[I est quelquefois plus qu'homme, He is sometimes more than man. 
Son Altesse Roy ale le Due d'York, His Royal Highness the Duke of 
prince du sang, &c. York, prince of the blood. 

553. 6, The article is not put before the substantive begin- 
ning an incidental sentence, which is opposed to what has 
been said. 

EXAMPLE. 
Vous les peuples de la terre ont unc All the nations of the earth have 
idee plus oumoins developpee dun an idea more or less clear of 
Etre-Supreme ; preuve evide?ite a Supreme Being ; an evident 
que le pe'chi originel iia pas proof that original sin has not to* 
tout-a-fait obscurci t ' entendement, tally obscured the understanding. 

554. 7, When they are governed by the words genre, 
e.spece, sorte, or terms of this kind. 

EXAMPLES. 

Sorte de fruit, A sort of fruit. 

Genre d'ouvrage, A kind of work. 

JMonceau d 'argent, A heap of money. 

Jiande de voleurs, A band of robbers. 

Rile de livres, A pile of books. 

Meute de chiens, A pack of dogs. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE 185 

EXERCISE. 

1. The highways are bordered with laurels, pomegranates, jessamines, 
and other trees, which* are* always green, and always in bloom. The 
mountains are covered with flocks, which yield a fine wool, in great 
request among all the known nations (of the world).* 

2. The fleets of Solomon, under the conduct of the Phoenicians, made 
frequent voyages to the land of Ophir and Tharsis (of the kingdom of 
Sophala, in Ethiopia), whence they returned at the end of three years, 
laden with gold, silver, ivory, precious stones, and other kinds of 
merchandise. 

3. 2 ( Costly furniture) '(is not allowed there), nor magnificent attire, 
nor sumptuous feasts, nor gilded palaces. 

4. We contemplated with pleasure the extensive fields covered with 
yellow ears of corn, the* rich gifts of bounteous Ceres. 

5. He was in a kind of ecstacy when he perceived us. 

6. In the most corrupt age, he lived and died a wise man* 

7. Are you surprised that the worthiest men are but men, and betray 
remains of the weakness of humanity, amid the innumerable snares and 
difficulties which* are* inseparable from royalty] 

8. He excited our pity when we saw him after his disgrace. 

9. Hear then, nations full of valor ! and you, O chiefs, so wise and 
so united ! bear what I have* to* offer to you. 

10. Out of this cavern issued, from time to time, a black thick smoke, 
which made a sort of night at mid-day. 



(I.) Highways, chemin— with, tie— pomegranates, grenadier — in bloom, fleur: — 
yield., ft.urnir — wool, laine, pi. — in great request, recherche — among, de. 

(2.) End, bout— laden, charge. 

(3.) Is not allowed there, on n'y soufTre ni — ; furniture, nieuble — costly, precieux— 
attire, ornement— feasts, repas. 

(4.) Extensive, vaste— fields, campagne — ears, epi — bounteous, fecond, f. 

(.3.) In a kind of, comme en. 

(6 ) Age, siecle. 

(7.) That, de ce que— worthy, estimable— but, encore — betray, montrer — remains, 
res'e — difficulties, embarras. 

(8.) He excited our pity , il nous fit pitie. 

(9.) Hear, ccouter. 
(10.) Out of, de — issued, sortir— thick, et epais — mid-day, milieu du jour. 

555. Rule II. — The article is not used either before nouns 
preceded by the pronominal adjectives mon, ton, son, notre, 
votre, leur, ce, mil, aucun, chaque, tout fused for chaque), 
certain, plusieurs, tel, or before those which are preceded by 
a cardinal number without any relation whatever. 

EXAMPLES. 

Nos moeurs mettent le prix a nos Our manners fix the value of our 

richesses, riches. 

Toute nation a ses lois, Each nation has its laws. 

Cent ignorans doivent-ils Vemporter Are a hundred blockheads to bo 

sur un homme instruit? preferred to one learned man] 

EXERCISE. 

1. That good father was happy in his children and his children were 
happy in him. 

Q2 



186 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 

2 Those imitative sounds are common to all languages, and form, 
as it were, their* real basis. 

3. Every man has his foibles, his moments of ill* humor, even his 
irregularities. 

4. Each plant has virtues peculiar to it, the knowledge of which 
could not but be infinitely useful. 

5. In all his instructions, he is careful to remember that grammar, 
logic, and rhetoric are three sisters that ought never to be disjoined. 

(2.) Common, fondu— to, dans— and form, as it were, et ils en sont comme la— 
real, fondamentale. 

(4.) Peculiar, qui sont propres— to it, lui— could, 'N.—not but, ne que. 

(5.) He is careful to remember, il ne point perdre de vue — ought, on devoit — to be 
disjoined, separer. 

556. Rule III. — Proper names of deities, men, animals, 
towns, and particular places, do not take the article. 

EXAMPLES. 

Dieu a crei le del et la terre, God has made heaven and earth. 

Jupiter etait le premier des dieux } Jupiter was the first of the gods. 

Bucephale 6tait le cheval d'Alex- Bucephalus was Alexander's horse. 

andre, 

Rome est une ville d?une grande Rome is a city of great beauty. 

beaute*, 

557. Exceptions. — Proper names, however, take the ar 
dele when used in a limited sense. 

EXAMPLES. 

Le Dieu des Chretiens, The God of Christians. 

Le Dieu de paix, The God of peace. 

Le Jupiter d'Homtre, Homer's Jupiter. 

Le Bucephale C Alexandre, Alexander's Bucephalus, 

JJAncienne Re me, Ancient Rome. 

La Rome moderne, Modern Rome. 

558. N. B. — In imitation of the Italians, the French use 
the article before the names of several painters and poets of 
that nation, by an elliptical mode of expression, the words 
peintrz, poete, or seigneur being understood. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Jupiter, son of Saturn and Cybele or Ops, after having expelled 
his father from the throne, divided the paternal* inheritance with his two 
brothers, Neptune and Pluto. 

2. On a dispute, at a feast of the gods, between Juno, Pallas, and 
Venus, for the pre-eminence of beauty, Jupiter, not being able to bring 
them to an agreement, referred the decision to Paris, a shepherd of Mount 
Ida, with directions that a golden apple should be given to the fairest. 
Paris assigned to Venus the golden* prize. 

3. God said, let there* be light; and there* was light 

(1) Expelled, chaaser— divided, en partager J. — inheritance, heritage. 

(2.) On, dans— at a feast, qu'il y eut a un festin— being able, pouvoir — to bring to 
an agreement, accorder— referred, renvoyer— directions, ordre— that a golden, &c. to 
give a golden apple to— assigned, adjuger 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 187 

4. The Apollo di Belvidere and the Venus di Medicis are valuable 
remains of antiquity. 

5. May and September are the two finest months of the year in the 
south of France. 

6. The God of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob was the only true God. 

(4 ) Di Belvidere de Belveder— di, de — valuable, precieux. 
(6.) Only, seul. 



CHAPTER III. 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



Of the Adjective ivith the Article, 



559. Rule I.— Adjectives used substantively are, like sub- 
stantives common, accompanied by the article, if the occasion 
require it. 

EXAMPLE. 
Les fous invent ent les modes, et Fools invent fashions, and wise men 
les sages s'y conforment, conform to them. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Were the learned of antiquity to come to life again, they would be 
much astonished at the extent of our knowledge. 

2. The ignorant have, in a* large stock of presumption, what they want 
in real knowledge, and that is the reason they are admired by fools. 

(1) Were the, si les — to come again, revenir H. — life, monde — at, de — knowledge, 
sonnaissance, pi. 

(2.) Large stock, forte dose — they want, il leur manquer — knowledge, science — the 
reason, ce qui fait que — they are, &c, the fools admire them. 

560. Rule IL— When a noun is accompanied by two ad- 
jectives, expressing opposite qualities, the article must be 
repeated before each adjective. 

EXAMPLES. 
Les vieux et les nouveaux soldats The old and the newly-raised soldiers 

sont remplis d'ardeur, are full of ardor. 

11 faut frequenter la bonne com- We ought to frequent good and shun 

pagnie et fuir la mauvaise, bad company. 

561. Remark. — But if those qualities be nearly similar, the 
article is not repeated; as, Le sage et pieux Fenelon If 
merely different, it is perhaps better to repeat it; as, Le 
sensible et Pingenieux Fenelon. 

562. N. B. — In French, the substantive must be joined to 
the first adjective, when governed by different words. 



188 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

EXERCISE. 

1. The ancient and modern writers are not agreed upon that point. 

2. The wise man preserves the same tranquillity of mind in good or 
bad fortune. 

3. The man who is jealous of his reputation frequents good and shuns 
bad company. 

4. Grand and vigorous thoughts are always the offspring of genius. 

(I.) Writers, auteur — are agreed, s'accorder. 

(2.) The wise man, )e sage. 

(3.) Vigorous, fort — offspring, fruit. 

563. Rule III. — The article is used before the adjective 
which is joined to a proper name, either to express its quality, 
or to distinguish the person spoken of from those who might 
bear the same name. 

EXAMPLES. 
Le sublime JBossuet, Le vertueux Finelon, Le tendre Racine, 
The sublime Bossuet, The virtuous Fenelon. The tender Racine. 
Louis le Gros, Louis le Juste, Louis le Grand, 

Louis the Fat. Louis the Just. Louis the Great. 

584. Remark. — If the adjective which is joined to a proper 
name precede that name, it expresses a quality which may be 
common to many; if it follow, it expresses a distinguishing 
quality. Thus, Le savant Varron, and Varron le savant, do 
not convey the same meaning : in the first example, Varron 
merely obtains the quality of savant ; in the second, Varron 
is distinguished for his learning from all of the same name. 

EXERCISE. 

1. The great Corneille astonishes by beauties of the first order and by 
faults of the worst taste. If the tender Racine does not often rise so high, 
at least, he is always equal, and possesses the art of always interesting 
the heart. 

2. The more we read the fables of the good and artless La Fontaine, 
the more we are convinced they are a book for all ages, and the manual 
of the man of taste. 

3. It was only under the reign of J^ouis the Just (XIII.), that good 
taste began to show itself in France ; but it was under that of Louis the 
Great that it was carried to perfection. 



(1.) By, par des— order, ordre — is always equal, se soutenir— possesses, avoir. 
(2 ) The vwre we, plus on — artless, simple — are convinced, on se convainc — they 
arc, que e'est— a, le— -/or, de — manual, manuel. 
(3.) Only, ne que— carried, porter a. 

5G5. Rule IV. — When a superlative relative precedes a 
substantive, the article serves for both; if it follow, the article 
must be repeated before each. 

EXAMPLES. 
Les plus naoiles gens font quelqiiefois les plus grandes f antes ; or 
Les gens les plus h&hWes font quelquefois les f antes les plus grandes, 
The ablest men sometimes commit the grossest blunders. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 169 

EXERCISE. 

1. It has been said of the Telemachus of the virtuous F£nelon, that it 
is the most useful present the muses have made to mankind; for, could 
the happiness of man be produced by a poem, it would be by that. 

2. The smoothest -waters often conceal the most dangerous gulfs. 



(1.) It has been said, on a dit — present, don que — have made, R- -could, (if the, &C 
could H.)— be produced by, naitre de — would be, naitre, N. 
(2.) Smoothest, tranquille. 



The Place of Adjectives. 

566. Rule I. — Pronominal and numerical adjectives pre- 
cede their substantives as do generally the following sixteen : 
beau, bon, brave, cher, chetif, grand, gros, jeime, mauvais, 
mediant, meilleur, moindre, petit, saint, vieux, and vrai, 
when taken in their literal sense. 

EXAMPLES. 
JMon ptre, My father. Plusieurs qfficiers, Several officers. 

Quel homme, What man. Grand homme, Great man. 

Vieille femme, Old woman, Six arbres, Six trees. 

Dix guinees, Ten guineas. Chetive mine, Mean look. 

567 Exception 1, The pronoun quelconque. 

EXAMPLE. 

D'une manitre quelconque, In whatever manner. 

568. 2, Adjectives of number, joined to proper names, pro- 
nouns, and substantives, as quotations. 

EXAMPLES. 
George Trois, George Third. Chapitre dix, Chapter tenth. 

Lui dixitme, He the Tenth. Page trente, Page the thirtieth. 

569. 3, The above sixteen adjectives, when connected by 
a conjunction with another adjective, which is to be placed 
after the substantive. 

EXAMPLE. 
C'estune femme gran de et bienfaite, She is a tall, well-made woman. 

570. Remark. — In English, two or even several adjectives 
may qualify a substantive, without a conjunction : but in 
French, this is generally required ; as, c'est un homme aimable 
et poll, he is an amiable, well-behaved man; except when 
custom allows the substantives to be placed between two ad- 
jectives ; as, c'est un grand homme sec, he is a tall, thin man. 

EXERCISE ON THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 

1 . There have been ages when a great man was a sort of prodigy, 
produced by a mistake of nature. 

2. In almost all nations, the great geniuses that have adorned them 
were contemporaries. 

(1.) Ages, des siecles — when, on— produced, enfanter. 
(2.) In, chez— nations, peuple — adorned, illustrer, G. 



100 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

3. Young people, says Horace, are supple to the enticements of vice, 
lavish, presumptuous, and equally impetuous and light in their passions ; 
old people, on the contrary, are covetous, dilatory, timid, ever alarmed 
about the future, always complaining, hard to please, panegyrists of times 
past, censors of the present, and great givers of advice. 

4. What man was ever satisfied with his condition and dissatisfied 
with his abilities 1 

5. Thirty chambers, which have a communication one with another, 
and each of them an iron door, with six huge bolts, are the places where 
he shuts himself up. 

(3) People, gens— supple, souple— lavish, yrofogne— impetuous, vif—old, f. pi (the 
following adjectives in the pi.)- covetous, avare—dilatonj, temporiseur— about, sur 
— car] p laming; plaintif— hard, difficile— please, contenter— times, sin". 

(4.) Dissatisfied, mecontent— abilities, esprit. 

(5.) Have a communication, commuiiiquer— each of them, dont chacun avoir— huge 
gros— bolts, verrou— places, lieu, sing.— shuts himself, se renfermer. ' 

571. Rule II. — Adjectives formed from the participle pre- 
sent of verbs, are generally placed after the substantive : 
ouvrage divertissant, entertaining work ; and from the par- 
ticiple past, always : figure arrondie, round figure ; those 
expressing form: table ovale, oval table; color: maison 
blanche, white house ; taste : herbe amere, bitter herb ; sound : 
orgue harmonieux, harmonious organ; action: procureur 
actif, active attorney; effect: coutume abusive, custom 
founded in abase ; arrangement : ordre grammatical, gram- 
matical order; species: qualite occulte, occult quality; 
nation: generosite anglaise, English generosity; those 
ending in -esque, -il, -ule, 4c, -ique, -in : 

Style Burlesque, Burlesque style. Bi en public, Public welfare. 

Jargon pueril, Childish jargon. Bis sardonlque, Sardonic grin. 

Femme credule, Credulous woman, Voix enfantine, Childish voice. 

But in this, custom is the best guide 

EXERCISE. 

1 . An affected simplicity is a refined imposture. 

2. The smiling images of Theocritus, Virgil, and Gessner, excite in 
the soul a soft sensibility. 

3. In that antique palace are to be seen neither wreathed columns, 
nor gilded wainscots, nor valuable basso-relievoes, nor ceilings curiously 
■painted, nor grotesque figures of animals, which never had existence but 
in the imagination of a child or a madman, 

1. if human life is exposed to many troubles, it is also susceptible of 
many pleasures. 

5. A ridiculous man is seldom so by halves. 

(1.) Refitted, d licat. 

(■'..) Smiling, riant— excite, porter— soft, douat. 

(3.) Are to be set n, on ne writ— wreathed, torse— wainscots, \am\ms-basso-reUnoea 
oas i relief— tielmgs, plafond— curiously, artistement— had existence, existcr. 
(•I.) Many, bien de— troubles, peine. 
<o.) So, \c-by halves, a demi. 



ARTICULAR RULF<* OF THE ADJECTIVE. 19). 

6. Spanish manners have, at first sight, something harsh and uncivilized, 

7. French urbanity has become a proverb among foreign nations. 

(6.) Spanish, espagnol — manners, moeurs — at first sight, au premier abord — 
uncivilized, sauvage. 
(7.) Become, passer en— among, chez. 

572. Rule III. — Although it may seem that adjectives 
expressing moral qualities are placed indifferently before 01 
after the substantive, yet taste and a correct ear will assign 
them their proper situation. 

573. In conversation, or in a broken, loose style, it may be 
indifferent to say, femme amiable or aimable femme; talens 
sublimes or sublimes talens, &e. ; but in the dignified style, 
the place of the adjective may, in a variety of instances, affect 
the beauty of a sentence. 

EXERCISE. 

1. An amiable woman gives to every thing she says an inexpressible 
grace ; the more we hear, the more we wish to hear her. 

2. The majestic eloquence of Bossuet is like a river which carries 
away every thing in its rapid course. 

3. The sublime compositions of Rubens have made 2 an ^English 
traveller 'say, that this famous painter was born in Flanders, through a 
mistake of nature. 



(].) Give to, repandre sur— we, on. [cours. 

(2.) River, fieuve — carries away, cntranier — its rapid course, la rapidite de son 
(3.) Say, m re a—; famous, celebre — through, par — mistake, meprise. 



Regimen of Adjectives. 

574. Rule. — A noun may be governed by two adjectives, 
provided these do not require different regimens ; as, Cei 
homme est utile et cher a sa famille, that man is useful and 
dear to his family. But it would be incorrect to say, Get 
homme est utile et cheri de sa famille, that man is useful and 
beloved by his family ; because the adjective utile does not 
govern the preposition de. 

EXERCISE ON THE REGIMEN OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. A young man, whose actions are all regulated by honor, and whose 
only aim is perfection in every thing, is beloved and courtedby every body. 

2. Cardinal Richelieu was all his life time feared and hated by the 
great whom he had humbled. 

3. A young lady, mild, polite, and delicate, who sees in the advantages 
of birth, riches, wit, and beauty nothing but incitements to virtue, is very 
certain of being beloved and esteemed by every body. 

(].) Actions are regulated by honor, l'honneur dirige les actions— whose only aim 
is, qui ne se propose que — courted, recherche. 

(2) Young lady, demoiselle — delicate, decent — nothing but, ne que — incitements 
encouragement — certain, assure. 



192 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVES OF NUjfBEit, 

Adjectives of Number. 

575. Unieme is used only after vingt, trente, quarante, 
cinqnante, soixante, quatre-vingts, cent, and mille. C'est la 
vingt-et-unieme fois, it is the twenty-first time. See page 58. 

576. Cent, in the plural, takes s, except when followed by 
another noun of number; as, 

lis etaient deux cents, They were two hundred. 

Trois cents homines, Three hundred men. 

lis etaient deux cent dix, They were two hundred and ten. 

577. Vingt, in quatre-vingts and six-vingts, also takes s, 
when followed by a substantive ; as, 

Quatre-vingts hommes, Eighty men. 

Six-vingts abricots, Six score apricots. 

578. Bat it takes no s when followed by anothei term ex- 
pressing number, quatre-vingt-un arbres, quatre-vingt-dix 
hommes. 

579. The ordinal numbers, collective and distributive, 
always take the sign of the plural: les premieres douzaines, 
the first dozens ; les quatre cinquiemes, the four-fifths. 

580. For dates, the French write mil ; as, mil sept cent- 
quatre-vingt-dix-neuf, one thousand seven hundred and 
ninety-nine, &c. See page 60. 

581. Remark. — Cent and mille are used indefinitely ; as, 

U luijit cent caresses, He showed him a hundred marks 

of kindness. 
Faites-lui mille amities de ma part, Present him for me a thousand 

compliments. 

EXERCISE ON THE ADJECTIVES OF NUMBER. 

1. It was the thirty-Jirst year after so glorious a peace when the war 
broke out again, with a fury of which history offers few examples. 

2. There were only three hundred, and in spite of their inferiority in* 
numbers,* they attacked the enemy, beat, and dispersed them. 

3. He has sold his country house for tivo thousand Jive hundred and 
fifty pounds. 

4. Choose out of your nursery eighty fruit-trees and ninety dwarf- 
trees ; divide them into dozens, and put in the first two dozens of each 
bort those whose fruits are most esteemed. 

5. When Louis the Fourteenth made his entry into Strasburg the 
Swiss deputies having come to pay their respects to him, Le Tellier, arch- 
-jishop of Reims, who saw among them the bishop of Basle, said to one 

(1.) Year, annce- when, que — broke out again, se rallumer. 

(2.) Only, nu que — in spite of, malgre. (3.) Pounds, livres sterling. 

'4.) Out of, Anns— nursery, nv\rimvre—fniit-trccs, pied d'arbre fruitier— dwarf- 
trees, arbre nain. 
(5) Swiss, (of the SvvissV-pay, presenter— respect, liommage — one near kirn son 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVES OF KUMBER. IbiS 

near him, " That bishop is apparently some miserable character." " How !" 
replied the other, " he has a hundred thousand livres a year." " Oh, oh !" 
said the archbishop, " he is then a respectable man ;" and showed him a 
thousand civilities. 



voisin— that bishop, &c , c'est un miserable apparemment que cet eveque— a year 
de rente— showed, faire — civilities, caresse. 

582. The French say, le onze, du onze, au onze, sur les 
onze heures, sur les une heure, pronouncing the words onze 
and une as if they were written with an h aspirated. 

583. The cardinal numbers are used for the ordinal. 

584. 1. — In reckoning time — that is, the hour of the day, 
the day of the month, the year of an era ; as, il est trots 
heures, it is three o'clock; le vingt de Marseille twentieth of 
March ; Pan mil sept cent dix, &c. See pages 6Cf. 

585. 2. — In speaking of the order of sovereigns ; as, Louis 
seize, George trois : except the first two of the series ; as, 
Henri premier, George second. Quint for cinq is only said 
of the Empereur Charles-quint and the Pape Sixte-quint. 

EXERCISE. 

1. They made in the parish and in the neighboring places a collection 
which produced a hundred mid twenty -one guineas. 

2. William, surnamed the Conqueror, king of England and duke of 
Normandy, was one of the greatest generals of the eleventh century ; he 
was born atEalaise, and was the natural son of Robert, duke of Normandy, 
and of Arlotte, a furrier's daughter. 

3. Make haste ; it will soon be ten o'clock. We shall have a good 
deal of difficulty to arrive in time. 

4. The winter was so severe in one thousand seven hundred and nine 
that there was but one olive-tree that resisted it,* in a plain where there 
had been more than ten thousand. 

5. It was the tiventy-jirst of January, one thousand seven hundred and 
ninety-three, that the unhappy Louis the sixteenth was led to the scaffold. 

(1.) They, on — neighboring places, voisinage, sing. — collection, quete. 
(2.) William, Gui llau me- furrier, fourreur. ~Jn, &, 

(3.) Make haste, se depecher — will be, F. — a good deal of diffiadty bien de la peine- 
(4.) Severe, rude — but, ne que — had been, H. 



R 



104 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS- 

CHAPTER IV. 

OF THE PRONOUNS. 



OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



Office of Personal Pronouns. 

586. The personal pronouns have the three characteristics 
of the substantive — that is, subject, regimen, and apostrophe; 
but with this difference, that some always form the subject; 
two only are used as an apostrophe : some always form the 
regimen, and lastly, others are sometimes the subject and 
sometimes the regimen. 

587. Je, tu, il, and Us, are always the subject; these four 
pronouns cannot be separated from the verb which they govern 
but by personal pronouns acting as a regimen or by the nega- 
tive ne. 

EXAMPLES. 
Je ne ltd en veiix rien dire, I will say nothing to him about it 

Tu en apprendras rfes nonvelles, Thou wilt hear news of it. 
// nous vaconta son histoire, He told us his history. 

Its sont survenus a Cimproviste, They are come unexpectedly 

588. The two acting as an apostrophe are toi, thou, and 
vons, you, whether they stand alone or are preceded by the 
interjection 6 ; as, toi, 6 toi: volts, 6 vous. 

EXERCISE ON PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

1. The better to bear the irksomeness of captivity and solitude, 7 sought 
for bo^ks ; for / was overwhelmed with melancholy, for want of some 
knowledge to cherish and support my mind. 

2. Since thou art more obdurate and unjust than thy father, moyest 
fhou suffer evils more lasting and more cruel than his! 

3. What! say they ; do not men die fast enough without destroying 
each other? Life is so short, and yet it seems that it appears too long to 
ihem. Are they sent into the world to tear each other ill pieces, and to 
make themselves wretched ] 

4. O thou, my son, my dear son, ease my heart : restore me what is 
dearer to me than my life ! Restore to me my lost son, and restore thy- 
self to thyself. 

5. O ye, who hear me with so much attention, believe not that I despise 
men ! No, no ; I am sensible how glorious it is to toil to make them 
virtuous and happy ; but this toil is full of anxieties and dangers. 

(1.) To bear, supporter — irksomeness, enfl l i — overwhelmed with, actable de— for 
want, fume — to cherish, qui put nourtir— support, soutenir. 

(■2 ) Obdurate, dur — mayest, pouvoir, CI "lasting, long. 

(:i ) Die. fust enough, ctre assoz nmrtel — destroying each other, se donner encore 
line Blurt precipitoe — sent into, sur— world, lerre — Lear in pieces, se dcchirer — make 
themselves, Be readre. 

(■I.) Ease, Houlager — restore, rendre — lost (whom T have lost), perdre. 

(x r > ) / am sensible, tuxoir—gloriuus, grand— to toil, de travailler a— toil travail— 
aaiictits, inquietude, sing. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 195 

589. Me, te, se, leur, le, la, les, y, and en are always used 
as a regimen : direct, when acted upon by the verb — indirect, 
when referable to the prepositions a or de. (See page 155.) 
They always p recede the verb, except in the imperative when 
affirmative, and can never be separated from it by any oilier 
word, except tout, rien, and jamais, which may intervene 
before an infinitive. 

EXAMPLES. 
C'est leur tout refuser, It is refusing them every thing. 

C'est ne me rien permettre, It is allowing me nothing. [him. 

U a jure de ne lui jamais par donner, He has sworn he would never pardon 

' 590. Me, te, se, form a regimen, sometimes direct and 
sometimes indirect: direct, when they represent moi, toi, 
soi ; indirect, when they supply the place of a moi, a. toi, a 
soi. See pages 61 and 62. 

EXAMPLES. 

Vous me soupqonnez mat a propos, You suspect me unjustly. 

Je fen remercie, I thank thee for it. 

It se perd de gaiete de cceur, He ruins himself out of wantonness. 

Vous me donnez un sage conseil, You give me prudent advice. 

Je te donne cela, I give thee that. 

U se donne bien du mouvement, He is an active, stirring man. 

591. Leur is always indirect, as it stands for a eux, or a elles. 

EXAMPLE. 

Te leur representai le tort quails, I represented to them the injury 
ou qu'elles se fesaient, they did themselves.. 

EXERCISE. 

1. He has been speaking to them with such energy as has astonished 
them, 

2. Women ought to be very circumspect ; for a mere appearance is 
sometimes more prejudicial to them than a real fault. 

3. He comes up to me with a smiling countenance, and, pressing my 
hand, says, " My friend, I expect you to-morrow at my house." 

4. He said to me, " Wilt thou torment thyself incessantly for advan- 
tages, the enjoyment of which could not render thee more happy 1 Cast 
thy eyes around thee : see how every thing smiles at thee, and seems to 
invite thee to prefer a retired and tranquil life to the tumultuous pleasures 
of a vain world." 

5. The ambitious man* agitates, torments, and destroys liimself to 
ohtain the places or the honors to which he aspires ; and when he has 
ohtained them, he is still dissatisfied. 



(1.) Slick energy as, une force rpii. 

(2.) Mere, simple — more prejudicial, faire plus do to'it. 

(3.) Comes up with, aborder da— pressing, serrer— my hand, la main — says, il me 
dit — at my house, chez moi. 

(4.) Incessantly, sans cesse— advantages, des biens— could, savoir N.~cast, porter 
— thy, les— smiles, sou* ire, 

(I.) Destroys, consumer—to, pour. 



196 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

592. Le, la, les, are always direct regimen ; as, 

Je le vois,je la vois, for je vois lui, je vois elle. 

Je les vois, for je vois eux, je vois elles. 

593. But y and en are always indirect regimen; as, 

Je nhj entends lien, for je n'entends rien a cela. 

Ces fruits sont bons, en voulez-vous ? for voulez-vous d'iceux ? 
Avez~voii8 requ de f argent ? — oui, for un peu, une ceriaine somme 9 
j'en ai regu, or quantite d'argent. 

594. Though seeming to perform the function of regimen 
direct in this last and other phrases of the same kind, it is 
obvious that there is in the word en an ellipsis, which may 
be readily supplied. See pages 65 and 66. 

EXERCISE. 

1. I have known him since his childhood, and I always loved him on 
account of the goodness of his character. 

2. This woman is always occupied in doing good works : you see her 
constantly consoling the unhappy, relieving the poor, reconciling enemies, 
and promoting the happiness of every one around her. 

3. The more you live with men, the more you will be convinced that it is 
necessary to know them well before you* form a connexion with them. . 

4. Enjoy the pleasures of the world, I consent to it ; but never give 
yourself up to them. 

5. I shall never consent to that foolish scheme ; do not mention it 
any* more. 

6. Have you received some copies of the new work 1 Yes, I have, 
(received some'). 

(1 ) Have knoicn, connattre F. — loved, G. — on account, a cause — the goodness of ki&, 
(his good). 

( ; 2.) In, a — vjorlis, ceuvres, f. — constantly, sans cesse — consoling, A. — relieving, 
assister — -promoting, faire — every one around her, tout ce qui I'environne. 

(3.) Live, L.—be convinced, se convaincre — before, avant de— for ma connexion, vous 

(4.) Enjoy, jouir da— give yourself up, se livrer. flier A. 

(5.) Scheme, entreprise — mention, parler de. 

((3.) Copies, exemplaires. 

595. The pronouns which are sometimes the subject and 
sometimes the regimen, are nous, vous, moi, toi, lui, elle, 
eux, elles. 

596. Nous and vous are the subject in nous aimons, vous 
aimez ; the regimen direct in Us nous ctiment, Us vous aimcnt ; 
and indirect in Us nous purlcnt, Us vous parlent. 

597. In general, moi, toi, are only the subject by apposition 
or r -m, whether they precede or follow the verb ; as, 

, dont il dichire la reputation, I, whose reputation he is aspers- 

ifl rendu que de intr, always did him acts of 

bons '{/,"■ kindness. 

Toi, i taut le brave, tu Wouldst thou, who pretcndest to 

be so brave, dare, &c. 

J' pretends, moi, I do maintain, I. 

Tu dis donc t toi Thou sayest then, thou. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 197 

598. Remark. — Sometimes the personal pronouns je and 
fu are not expressed, but understood; as, 

Jlfoi, trahir le meilleur de mes amis ! I, betray my best friend ! 

Faire une lachetg, toi ! Thou, be guilty of such baseness ! 

that is,je voudrais moi, &c. ! tn pour reds toi, &c. ! 

599. They are likewise the subject when they are placed 
in a kind of apposition expressed by ce and il in impersonal 
verbs ; as, qidfut bien aise ? cefut rnoi / ce ne pent eti e que 
toi ; que vous reste-t-il? — moi. 

600. After a conjunction, they are either the subject or 
regimen, according to the nature of the phrase ; as, noun y 
etions mon pere et moi ; il ne craint ni toi ni moi, 

801. In phrases which are not imperative, toi and moi can 
only be the object by apposition before or after the verb; as, 
voudriez-vous me perdre, moi, votre allie, &c. toi, je te 
soupconnerais de perjidie ! 

602. After a preposition, they alone can be employed; as, 
vous servirez-vous de moi? selon ?noi vous avez raison; il 
est f ache contre toi. 

603. What has just been remarked of toi and moi is appli- 
cable to ltd, but with this difference, that lui can only be the 
object after ne — que, signifying only, or in distributive 
phrases ; as, 

JV'aimez que lui, je ne le crouve That you should like only h:m, I 
pas mauvais ; mais ne me ha'is- do not disapprove, but dj not 
sez pas, hate me. 

604. So, protegez-nous, ltd, a cause de, &c. et moi, parce 
que, &c. we may likewise say by apposition, aimez-le, lui 
qui, <fec. 

605. Eux is employed in the same manner as lui, but 
differs from it in this, that it cannot be the regimen indirect, 
except after a preposition ; as, parliez-vous d'eux? est-ce a 
eux que vous parlez ? 

606. Remark. — Lui and eux may be the subject in distri- 
butive phrases without being in apposition ; as, 

Mes freres et mon cousin m'ont My brothers and cousin assisted me 
secmivu ; eux irCont releve, et they took me up, and he dressed 
lui in a pause, my wounds. 

607. The natural office of elle and elles is to form the 
subject ; however, they are susceptible of all the other uses just 
mentioned, except that they cannot be the regimen indirect, 
unless preceded by a preposition ; as, e'est a elles que je parte 

r2 



198 PARTICULAR RULES Or THE PRONOUNS. 

EXERCISE. 

1. In the education of youth, we should propose to ourselves to culti- 
vate, to polish their* understanding, and thus to enable them to fill with 
dignity the different stations assigned them ; but, above all, we ought to 
instruct them in that religious worship which God requires of them. 

2. What ! you would suffer yourself to be overwhelmed by adversity ! 

3. // stoop to the man who has imbrued his hands in the blood of 
his king ! 

4. Thou ! take that undertaking upon thyself ] Canst* thou think of it ? 

5. Your two brothers and mine take charge of the enterprise ; they find 
the money, and he will manage the work. 

6. It is I who have engaged him to undertake this journey. 

7. It is thou who hast brought this misfortune on thyself. 

8. When you are at Rome, write to me as often as you can, and give 
me an account of every thing that can interest me. 

9. He told it to thee thyself 

10. Fortune, like a traveller, shifts from inn to inn ; if she lodges to-day 
with me, to-morrow, perhaps, she will lodge -with thee. 

11. Whom dost thou think we were talking of? — it was of thee. 

12. Descartes deserves immortal praise, because it is he who has made 
reason triumph over authority in philosophy. 

13. He is dissatisfied -with himself 

14. She is never satisfied ivith herself 

15. The indiscreet often betray themselves. 

16. Saumaise, speaking of the English authors, said that he had learned 
more from them than from any other. 

17. To love a person, is to render him, on every occasion, all the ser- 
vices in our power, and to afford him, in society, every comfort that 
depends upon us. 

(1.) Youth, jeunes gens — should, devoir F. — to cultivate, (to them) — to polish, (to 
t'.i lift) orner — understanding, l'esprit — enable, disposer— stations, place — (which are) 
assigned do) them — roorship, culte — requires, demander. 

(2?) Suffer yourself, se laisser N. — to be overwhelmed, abattre. 

(3.) Stoop to, s'abaisser devant Q,. — imbrued, souiller — in, de. 

4.) Take upon thyself, se charger N. — of it, y. 

(5.) Take charge, se charger—; find, fournir — money, fends, pi. — manage,coml\ihe F. 

(V>.) Undertake, faire— journey, voyage. 

(7.) Hast brought on thyself, s'attirer G. 

(8.) Are, l^.—ean, h.—give, faire— an account, le detail. 

(9.) Told, dire G. 

CIO ) Shifts from inn to inn, changer frauberge— with, chez— she will lodge, elle ctreL. 
(11.) Were talking, parler S. 
(12) Triumph over, triompher de. 
02.) Is dissatisfied with, se dcplaire. 
(14 ) Satisfied with, content de. 
(1.3.) Hd ran se trahir. 

(17.) In our power, dont on etre capable— afford, procurer a— comfort, agrcment— 
depends upon, dependre de. 



On the Pronoun soi. 
008. Soi is generally accompanied by a preposition, and 
is used in phrases where there is an indeterminate pronoun, 
either expressed or understood : on doit rarement parler de 
*ni; il est essentiel de prendre garde a soi. In this case, it 
is the regimen indirect, but it may be employed without a 
preposition. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 199 

609. 1. — With the verb etre $ as, En cherchant a tromper 
les autres, c'est souvent soi que Von trompe, or on est souvent 
trompe soi-meme, in attempting to deceive others, we fre- 
quently deceive ourselves. In this situation it is the subject. 

610. 2. — After ne que, or by apposition ; as, 

JV" aimer que soi, c'est iHetre bon To love only ourselves is being good 

a rien, for very little. 

Penser ainsi, c'est s'aveugler soi' To think in this manner, is to blind 

me me, one's-self. 

611. It is in these examples the regimen ; but when de^oi 
and en soi are used in a definitive sense in speaking of things, 
they mean de sa nature and dans sa nature. 

EXERCISE ON THE PRONOUN SOL 

1. To excuse in one 1 s- self the follies which one cannot excuse in others 
is to prefer being a fool one's-self to seeing others so. 

2. To be too much dissatisfied with ourselves is a weakness ; but to 
be too much satisfied (-with ourselves) is fa) folly. 

3. We ought to despise no one : how often have we needed the assist- 
ance of one more insignificant than ourselves ? 

4. If we did not attend so much to ourselves, there would be less ego- 
tism in the world. 

5. Vice is odious in itself. 

6. The loadstone attracts iron (to itself). 

(1 ) Follies, sottises — others autnii —to prefer, aimer mieux— fool, sot — to seeing, que 
de voir — so, tei. 

(3.) We ought, il falloir F. — horn often, combien de fois— we, on — needed the assist- 
ance, rf avoir pas besom— insignificant, petit. 

(4 ) We, on — attend to, s'occuper de — egotism, ego'isme. 

(U.) Loadstone, aimant. 



Cases zvher e the Pronouns elle, elles, eux, ltji, leur may 
apply to things. 

612. The personal pronouns elle and elles, when the regi- 
men, generally apply to persons only. Thus, in speaking of 
a woman, we mast say, Je m'approchai d'elle, je m 9 as sis 
pres d'elle ; hut, in speaking of a table, Je m 9 en approchai, je 
m'assis aupres. 

613. However, with the prepositions avec, apres, a, de, 
dour, en, &c. they may be applied to things. Thus, it is 
correct to say — of a river, 

Cette riviere est si rapide, quand That river is so rapid when it over- 

elle deborde, qiCelle entraine avec flows that it carries away every 

elle tout ce qiCeile rencontre ; elle • thing it meets with in its course; 

ne laisse aprts elle que du sable it leaves nothing behind but sand 

et des cailloux, and pebbles. 

614. — Of an enemy's army, 

JSTous marchdmes a elle, We marched up to it. 



200 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

615. — Of things, reasons, truth, Sic. ; as, 

Ces choses sont bonnes d'elles-memes, These things are good in themselves. 
faime la verite an point que je I love truth to that degree, that I 

sacrifevais tout pour elle, would sacrifice every thing for it. 

Ces vaisons sont solides en elles- Those reasons are solid in them 

niemes, selves. 

616. After the verb etre, they are applied only to persons, 
and likewise when they are followed by the relatives qui and 
que; as, Cest a elle, c'est d 1 elles que je parte, c'est elle-meme 
qui vient. 

617. The same may be said of the pronoun eux, which is 
also generally applied to persons only, yet custom allows us 
lo say, 

Ce chien et ces oiseaux font tout This dog and these birds are my only 

man plaisir ; je iiaime qiCeux ; pleasure ; I love nothing hut them ; 

eux seuls sont mon amusement ; they alone are my diversion; I 

je ne songe qxCa eux, think of nothing else. 

618. Lui and leur are generally applied to persons, but 
are sometimes used in speaking of animals, plants, and even 
inanimate objects ; as, 

Ces chevaux sont rendus, faites- Those horses are exhausted ; give 

leur donner un pen de vin, them a little wine. 

Ces orangers vont perir, si on ne Those orange-trees will die unless 

leur donne de Veau, they have a little water. 

Ces murs sont mal faits, on ne Those walls are not skilfully built ; 

leur a pas donne assez de talus, they are not sufficiently sloped 

upward. 

619. Upon these previous observations, then, may be 
founded the following 

620. Rule. — The pronouns elle, elles, eux, lui, and leur, 
ought never to be applied to things, except when custom does 
not allow them to be replaced by the pronouns y and en. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Virtue is the first of blessings ; it is from it alone we are to expect 
happiness. 

2. The lahyrinth had heen built upon the lake Maeris, and they had 
given it a prospect proportioned to its grandeur. 

3. Mountains are frequented on account of the air one breathes on them: 
how many people are indebted to them for the recovery of their health ] 

4 Wur brings in its train numberless evils. 

5. It is a delicate affair which must not be too deeply investigated, it 
must be lightly passed over. 

(1 ) Blessings, bien — arc. devoir 

(2 ) Had been built, on b:\tir I — prospect,, vue. [recovery, ri'tnblipsrment. 

(.1) On account, ■ > CB.U8C— breathes, rv<\^rvr— on thcjn, y— arc imicbt cil fur, devoir— 
(4.) Bring* entrainer-Mn its tram, avee e\\e— numberless, bien de. 
(5.) J3j)'air y mat i. re— must, il faut— be deeply investigated, approfondir A.— be 
passed, glisser— over dessus. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 201 

6. I have had my house repaired, and have given it quite* a new 
appearance. 

7. Those trees are too much loaded ; strip them of part of their fruit. 

8. This book cost me a great deal, but I am indebted to it for my 
knowledge. 

9. Self-love is captious ; we, however, take it for our* guide ; to it are 
all our actions directed, and from it we take counsel. 

10. These arguments, although very solid in themselves, yet made no 
impression upon him, so powerful a chain is habit. 

11. These reasons convinced me, and by them I formed my decision. 

12. I leave you the care of that bird ; do not forget to give it water. 



(6 ) Have had, faire G. — appearance, air. 
(7.) Strip, bier— of part, une partie. 
(8.) A great deal, cher— knowledge, instruction. 

(9.) We, (it is it that we) — to it, (it is to it that we direct all, &c.) — direct, rapporter 
from it, (and it in from it that, &c.) 
(10.) JVb, ne aucun— so strong, &c, (so much habit is a, Sec)— habit, habitude. 
(11.) And by, d'apres (and it is from them that)— formed my decision, se decider. 



Difficulty respecting the Pronoun le explained, 

621. Le, la, les, are sometimes pronouns and sometimes 
articles. The article is always followed by a noun — le roi, 
la reine, les hommes — whereas the pronoun is always joined 
to a verb, je le connais, je la respecte, je les esthne. 

622. The pronoun le may supply the place of a substantive 
or an adjective, or even of a member of a sentence. 

623. There is no difficulty when it relates to a whole 
member of a sentence ; it is then always put in the masculine 
singular ; ?s, 

On doit s 1 accommo der aV humeur We ought to accommodate ourselves to 
des autres autant quon le peut, the temper of others as much as we can. 

EXERCISE. 

1. The laws of nature and decency oblige us equally to defend the 
honor and interest of our parents when we can do it without injustice. 

2. We ought not to condemn, after their death, those who have not 
been condemned during their life. 

(1.) Decency, bienseance.— — — (2.) We ought, falloir — condemned, le. 

624. Nor is there any difficulty when le supplies the place 
of a substantive ; it then always takes the gender and number 
of that substantive ; as, Madame, etes-vous la mere de cet 
enfant? — Oui,je la suis. Madame, are you the mother of 
that child ? — Yes, I am. Mes dames, etez-vous les parentes 
dont Monsieur m' a parte? — .Qui, nous les sommes. 

625. Remark. — Though the word relating to the following 
questions is not expressed in English, yet it must always be 
so in French ; this word is le, which takes either gender or 
number, according to its relation 



202 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS 

EXERCISE. 

1. Is that your idea? — Can you doubt that it is! 

2. Are you Mrs. Such-a-one 1 — Yes, I am. 

3. Are those your servants 1 — Yes, they are. 

( I x Idea, pen see — that it is, ce et.re Q,. 
(2.) Jlfrs., Madame — suck-a-one, un tel. 
3 ) Those, ce la — they, ce. 

626. It only remains therefore to lay down the following 

627. Rule. — The pronoun le takes neither gender nor 
number when occupying the place of an adjective. 

EXAMPLES. 

Madame, etes-vous enrhumee 1 — Oui, je le suis. 

Mesdames, etes-vous contentes de ce discours? — Oui, nous le sommes. 

Fut-il jamais une femme plus malheureuse que je le suis 1 

628. Remark. — This rule is observed when the substan- 
tives are used adjectively; as, 

Madame, etes-vous mere] — Oui, je le suis. 
Mesdames, etes-vous parentes 1 — Oui, nous le sommes. 
Elle est fillc, et le sera toute sa vie. 

629. But not if the adjectives be used substantively; as, 

Madame, etes-vous la malade 1 — Oui, je la suis. 

630. Therefore this question — Etes-vous fille de 31. le due ? 
— is to be answered, Oui,je le suis ; but this — Etes-vous la 
/die de M. le due? — Oui,je la suis. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Ladies, are you glad to have seen the new piece 1 — Yes, we are. 

2. i, a* slave ! I, born to command ! Alas ! it is but too true that I am so, 

3. She was jealous of her authority, and she ought to be so. 

4. Was there ever a girl more unhappy, and treated with more ridicule 
than I am. 

5. You have found me amiable : why have I ceased to appear so to you 1 
G. Have we ever been so quiet as we are ] 

7. Madam, are you married ? — Yes, I mm. 

8. Madam, are you the bride ] — Yes, I am. 

(I.) Ladies, Mesdames. 

(2 ) Slave, exclave— but, ne que. 

(li.) Ought, devoir II. 

(4 ) With more ridicule, plus ridiculement. 

G31. The same rule is likewise observed with the article 

placed before plus or inoins and an adjective. It takes neither 

gender nor number when there is no comparison ; as, 

La lune ne nous idaive pas autant The moon does not give us so 

que le sbleily mime quand elle est much light as the sun, even 

le plus brlli ante, when it shines brightest. 

632.. But it takes them when there is comparison , as, 
De toutes lis planites, la lune est Of all the planets, the moon is the 
la plus bvillante pour nam, most brilliant to us. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 203 

EXERCISE. 

1. This father could not bring himself to condemn his children, even 
when they were most guilty. 

2. This woman has the art of shedding tears, even when she is least 
afflicted. 

3. Out* of so many criminals, only the most guilty should be punished. 

4. Although that woman displays more fortitude than the others, she 
is not, on that account, the least distressed. 



(1.) Could. B.— bring himself, se resoudre. 

(2 ) Shedding, repawlre de — evtn when, dans le temps meme que. 
(3.) Only the most, &c. (one must punish only the most zmMy)— only , ne que. 
(4.) Displays, montrer— fortitude , fermete — on that account, pour cela -distressed, 
afflige. 



Repetition of the Personal Pronouns. 

633. Rule I. — Pronouns expressing the first and second 
persons, when the subject, must be repeated before all the 
verbs, if those verbs are in different tenses ; it is always even 
better to repeat them when the verbs are in the same tense. 

EXAMPLES. 

Je soutiens et je soutiendrai ton- I maintain, and (I) will always 

jours, maintain. 

Tons elites, et vous avez toujours You say, and (you) have always 

dit, said. 

Accable de doirfeur, je nUecriai et Overwhelmed with sorrow, I ex- 

je dis, claimed and (I) said. 

JSTotts nous promenions sur le haut We were walking upon the sum- 

du rocher, et nous voyions sous mit of the rock, when we saw 

nos plods, &c. under our feet, &c. 

634. In all cases these pronouns must be repeated, though 
the tenses of the verbs do not change if the first of these is 
followed by a regimen ; as, 

Vous aimer ez le Seigneur voire You shall love the Lord your God, 
Dieu, et vous observer ez sa loi, and (you shall) observe his law. 

EXERCISE ox the REPETITION or the PERSONAL PRONOUN. 

1. My dear child, /love you, and /shall never cease to love you: but 
it is that very love that I have for you which obliges me to correct you for 
your faults, and to punish you when you deserve it. 

2. / heard and admired these words, which comforted me a little ; but 
my mind was not sufficiently at liberty to make him a reply. 

3. Thou art young, and doubtless thou aimest at the glory of surpassing 
thy comrades. 

4. God has said, yow shall love your enemies, bless those that curse you, 
do good to those that persecute you, and pray for those who slander you. 
What a difference between this morality and that of philosophers ! 

(1 ) Correct for. raprendre de. 

(2.) Heard, ecouter H. — words, discours, sing.— my mind, ice. (I had not the mind, 
&x.) — sufficiently at liberty, assez hbre — to make a reply, repondre a. 
(3.) Aimest at, aspirer a — surpassing, l'emporter sur. 
(4.) Slander, calomnier— letween, de — and that, a celle. 



204 PARTICTLAR RULES OF THE PIT ^OTJNS. 

635. Rule II.— The pronouns of the third person, when 
they form the subject, are hardly ever repeated before verbs, 
except when those verbs are in different tenses. 

EXAMPLES. 

La bonne grace ne gate men ; elle A graceful manner spoils nothing : 

ajoute a la beanie, relive la mo- it adds to beauty, heightens rao- 

destie, et y donne du lustre, desty, and gives it lustre. 

[In* a jamais rien valu, et ne vaudra He never was good for any thing, 

jamais rien, and never will be. 

II est arrive ce matin, et il repartira He arrived this morning, and (he) 

ce soir, will set off again this evening. 

636. However, perspicuity requires the repetition of the 
pronoun when the second verb is preceded by a long incidental 
phrase ; as, II fond sur son ennemi, et apres V avoir saisi 
(Tune main victorieuse, il le renverse, comme le cruel aquilon 
abat les tendres moissons qui dorent la carnpagne. 

EXERCISE. 

1. He took the strongest cities, conquered the most considerable pro- 
vinces, and overturned the most powerful empires. 

2. He takes a hatchet, completely cuts down the mast, which was 
already broken, throws it into the sea, jumps upon it amidst the furious 
billows, calls me by my name, and encourages me to follow him. 

3. He marshals the soldiers, marches at their head, advances in good 
order towards the enemy, attacks and breaks them, and, after having 
entirely routed them, (he) cuts them to pieces. 

(1.) Overturned, renverser J. [lows, onde. 

(2.) Completely cuts down, achever de couper— jumps upon it, s'elancer dessus— bit- 
(3.) Marshals, ranger en bataille — breaks, renverser— entirely routed, achever de 
mettre en desordre — cuts, tailler. 

637. Rule III. — Any personal pronoun, when the subject, 
must be repeated before verbs when passing from an affirma- 
tion to a negative, and vice versa, or when the verbs are 
joined by any conjunction except et and m. 

EXAMPLES. 

Jl vent et ne vent pas, He will and he will not. 

ft donne d'e.rcellens principes, He lays down excellent principles, 

parce qu'ilsait que les progris, because he knows that upon them 

idterieurs en dependent, depends all further progress. 

77 donne et reroit, He gives and receives. 

II ne donne ni ne recoit, He neither gives nor receives. 

EXERCISE. 

1. It is inconceivable how whimsical she is; from one moment to an- 
other, she will and she will not. 

2. The .lews are forbidden to work on the sabbath ; they arc, as it* 
were,* locked in slumber ; they light no tire and carry no water. 

(1.) (She is of a whimsical cast inconceivable) whimsical cast, bizarreric, f. 
"(2.) (It is forbidden to) forbidden, defendre— sibbath, jour du subbtil— locked, en- 
chiiiue— slumber, rv\>oti—ligld, ulluim:r. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUN. 205 

3. For nearly a week she has neither eaten nor drunk. 

4. The soldier was not repressed by authority, but stopped from 
satiety and shame. 

(3 i For, depuis — nearly, pres rie — a week, huit jours — has eaten.... drunk, P. 
\A i Repressed, reprimer— stepped, s'arreter J.— from, par. 

C38. Rule IV. — Pronouns, when they form the regimen, 
must be repeated before any verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

L'idee de ses malheurs le poursuit, The idea of his misfortunes pursues 
le touvmente et Paccable, (him), torments (him), and 

overwhelms him. 

H nous ennuie et nous obsede sans He wearies (us) and besets us 
cesse, unceasingly. 

639. Exception. — It is not repeated before such compound 
verbs as express the repetition of the same action, when the 
verbs are in the same tense ; as, 

Je vous le dis et redis, il le fait et refait sans cesse. 

EXERCISE. 

1. It is taste that selects the expressions — that combines, arranges, and 
varies them — so as to produce the greatest effect. 

2. Horace answered his stupid critics not so much to instruct them, as 
to expose their ignorance, and let them see that they did not even know 
what poetry was. 

3. Man embellishes nature itself; he cultivates, extends, and polishes it. 

(1 .) So as to, de man i ere a ee qufelles Q,. 

(2.) Stupid, soi — not so much to, moins pour — as to, pour — shoio their, (show to 
them) — let see, faire entendre — was, e'etait que. 



Relation of the Pronouns of the Third Person to a Noun 
as expre^ed before. 

640. Rule. — The pronouns of the third person — z7, Us, 
elle, elles, le, la, les — must always relate to a noun, whether 
subject or regimen, taken only in a definite sense, before 
expressed in the same tense ; but they must not be applied 
to a subject and regimen at the same time. 

EXAMPLES. 

La rose est la veine des fleurs, The rose is the queen of flowers ; 

aussi e.Si-eile fembleme de la therefore it is the emblem of 

be a ute, beauty. 

Vaime l'ananas ; il est exquis, I like the pine-apple; it is delicious. 

641. But the two following sentences would be equivocal : 

Racine a imite Euripide, en tout Racine has imitated Euripides in all 
ce qu'il a de plus bean dans sa that he has most beautiful in his 
Phidre, Phedra 

s 



203 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

Le legat puhUa une sentence The legate published a sentence of 
. ,- il dura trots mois, interdiction ; it lasted three months 

. As in the first of these two sentences il may relate 
either to Racine or to Euripides, and from the construction 
o$ the second sentence, il cannot, as it should, relate to inter- 
(lit. Again, it is not altogether correct to say, 

Nulle paix pour Pimpiej il la JVo peace for the wicked ; he seeks 
cherche, elle fuit, it it flies. 

643. Because, from the construction, the pronouns la and 
elle seem to be used for nulle paix, whereas the meaning 
requires that the)- should supply the place of the substantive 
paix, in the affirmative. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Poetry embraces all sorts of subjects ; it takes in every thing that 
is most brilliant in history; it enters the fields of philosophy; it soars to 
the skies ; it plunges into the abyss ; it penetrates to the dead ; it makes 
the universe its domain ; and if this world be not sufficient, it creates new 
ones, which it embellishes with enchanting abodes, which it peoples with 
a thousand various inhabitants. 

2. Egypt aimed at greatness ; and wished to* strike the eye at a dis- 
tance, always pleasing it by the justness of proportion. 

3. Egypt, satisfied with its own territory, where every thing was in 
abundance, thought not of conquests ; it extended itself in another man- 
ner, by sending colonies to every part of the globe, and with them civili- 
zation and laws. 

4. The Messiah is expected by the Hebrews ; he comes and calls the 
Gentiles, as it had been announced by the prophecies ; the people that 
acknowledge him as come are incorporated with the people that expected 
him, without a single moment of interruption. 

(I ) Subjects, mature — lakes in, se charter de — that is, y avoir de — (in) the fields, 
soars to, s\ lancer dans — plunges, s'enfoncer — to, chez — (its domain of the universe) 
— he sufficient, suinre— ones, inonde — enchanting, enchanter-atorfes, demeure — va- 
rious, (iivers. 

(I.) Greatness, grand — wished, vouloir — eye, pi. — at a distance, dans IV loignement 
—(in) pleasing, contenter. 

(3.) Was in abundance, abotlder — thought of, songer a- -in, de— by, en— to, par~ 
every part of the slob e, tonte la terre. 

(4.) Gentiles, Gentil — (the prophecies had announced it.)— acknowledges, recon- 
mi'ilre- -with, a — without, sansqu'il y ait — single, seal. 



POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

Explanation of some Difficulties attendant on the use of the 
Possessive Pronouns. 

644. The possessive pronouns son, sa, ses, leur, leurs 
relate either to persons, to things personified, or simply tc 
things or to pronouns. If they relate to persons, or thingfe 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 207 

personified, their place can never be supplied by others ; but 
if they relate to things, the following rules must be observed : 

645. The possessive prorouns are always employed, 

646. 1.— When the object to which they relate is either 
named, or designated by a personal pronoun in the same 
member of a phrase. 

EXAMPLES. 
VAmeriqueetend son commerce par America extends her commerce 

toute la terre, over the whole globe. 

Elle envoie ses fiottes dans toutes She sends her fleets into every 

les mers, part of the ocean. 

647. 2. — Before a noun, when qualified even by a single 
adjective, unless the noun form the regimen. 

EXAMPLE. 

Ses ressources immenses sont Her immense resources are inex- 
inepuisables, haustible. 

648. 3.-— After every preposition. 

EXAMPLE. 
C'est par sa position, jointe a la It is by her situation, joined to the 
sagesse de son gowvernement, wisdom of her government, that 
qxCelle reunit dans son sein de she unites such vast advantages 
si grands avantages, within herself. 

649. 4. — Before all words which can govern the preposi- 
tion de. 

EXAMPLES. 

Son coiigres est le sanctuaire de la Her congress is the seat of the 
plus sage politique, wisest policy. 

Son president rHa de pouvoir que Her president possesses power only 
pour fair e le bien, to do good. 

650. On all other occasions, the article, with the pronoun 
en, placed immediately before the verb, must be substituted. 

EXAMPLE. 
Tout enfin coutribue ain en fair e In short, every thing conspires to 
aimer le sejour ; fen admire make me love that residence : I par- 
surtout Yexacte police, en meme ticularly admire the strictness of her 
temps que les lois m'en parais- police, at the same time when her 
sent extremement sages, laws appear to me extremely wise. 

EXERCISE ON POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

1. A new custom was a phenomenon in Egypt: for which reason, 
there never was a people that preserved so long its customs, its laws, and 
even its ceremonies. 

2. Solomon abandons himself to the love of women : his understanding 
declines, his heart weakens, and Ids piety degenerates into idolatry. 

3. Th at superb temple was upon the summit of a hill : its columns 
were of Parian marble, and its gates of gold. 

1.) Phenomenon, prodiire— -for which reason, aussi — a, de — preserved S. 
Understanding, esprit — declines, baissei — weakens, s'affaiblir. 
Summit, haut — hill y colli ne — Parian, de Paros. 



208 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS 

4. Laocoon is one of the finest statues in France : not only the whole, 
but all its features, even the least, are admirable. 

5. The Thames is a magnificent river : its channel is so wide and so 
deep below London-bridge, that several thousands of vessels lie at their 
ease in it. 

6. This tine country is justly admired by foreigners : its climate is 
delightful, its soil fruitful, its laws wise, and its government just and 
moderate. 

7. The trees of that orchard have sun enough, yet its fruits are but 
indifferent. 

8. The Seine has its source in Burgundy, its mouth is at Kavre-de- 
Grace. 

9. The pyramids of Egypt astonish, both by the enormity of their bulk 
and the justness of their proportions. 

10. Egypt alone could erect monuments for posterity : its obelisks are 
to this day, as well for their beauty as for their height, the principal orna- 
ment of Rome. 

11. History and geography throw mutual light on each other: a* per- 
fect knowledge of them ought to enter into the plan of a good education. 

(4.) In, qu'il y ait en — the whole, Pensemble — even, jusqu'a. [le — in it, y. 

(5.) Magnificent, superbe — channel, lit — below, au dessous de — lie at, due a — their, 

'6.J Justly, avec raison— soil, sol. 

{!.) Have sun enough, etre hi en expos6 — but indifferent, assez mauvais. 

(8.) Mouth, embouchure — Hai-re, le Havre. 

(9.) Both, egalemcnt et — bulk, masse — and, et par. 
(10.) Egypt alone could, il n'appartenait qu'a PEirypte de — erect, clever — to this 

day, encore aujourd'hui — as well for, autant par — height, hauteur. 
(11.) Throw mutual light, &c* s'eclairer Tune par l'autre— of them, (their). 

651. Again, when there exists any doubt whether the pos- 
sessive pronoun ought to be used or not before a noun that is 
the regimen, the following is the 

652. Rule.— -This article, not the possessive pronoun, must 
be put before a noun forming the regimen, when a pronoun 
which is either subject or regimen sufficiently supplies the 
place of that possessive, or when there is no sort of ambiguity. 

EXAMPLES. 

J\ii mal a la tete, I have the head-ache. [leg. 

nfaudra lui couper \&jambe, It will he necessary to take off his 

Ce cheval a pris le mors aiix dents, That horse has run away. 

EXERCISE. 

1. During the whole winter he has had had eyes. 

2. I had a fall yesterday, and hurt my hack and head. 

3. It would be better for a man to lose his life than forfeit* his honor 
by a criminal action. 

4. In this bloody battle he received a wound by a shot in his right 
arm and another in his left leg: by dint of care, his arm was saved, but 
it was necessary to amputate his leg. 

(I.) Ih.-- had had, avoir mal a. 

{ w 2.) Hud a fall, Be laisser Comber — hurt, se fain- mal {i—bnch, reinn, pi. 

(It.) Would hr hrl'rr, \;il.«ir niicux N. 

(4.) A wound In; a shot, 110 coup de fell— IS, a — by dint, a force— his arn,&,c. ^they 
saved the arm to him)— was necessary, falloir J. — to amputate, to him. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS 209 

653. Bat should either the personal pronouns or circum- 
stances not remove all ambiguity, then the possessive pronoun 
must be joined to the noun ; as, 

Je vols que m&jambe s y enfie, I see that my leg is swelling. 

fl ltd donna sa main a baiser, He gave him his hand to kiss. 

JElle a donne hardiment son bras She courageously presented her arm 

an chirurgien, to the surgeon. 

654. Ma, not la, because I may also see the ]eg of another 
person swelling, &c. 

EXERCISE. 

1. In this interview they made each other presents : she gave him her 
portrait and he gave her his finest diamond. 

2. A young surgeon preparing to bleed the great Cond£, this prince 
said to him, smiling, " Do you not tremble to bleed me V 1 " I, my lord] 
no, certainly : it is not I, it is you who ought to tremble." The prince, 
charmed with the reply, immediately gave him his arm. 

(1.) Interview, entrevue — made each other, se faire mutuellement. 
(2.) Preparing, se disposer — bleed, saiiiner — smiling, d'un air riant — it is not I, (it 
is not to me) — it is you, (it is to you)— who ought to, de- — reply, repartie. 

655. Remark I. — Although verbs which are conjugated 
with two pronouns of the same person generally remove 
every kind of amphibology, yet custom authorizes some 
familiar expressions, in which the possessive pronoun seems 
to be redundant ; as, 

II se tient ferine sur ses pieds, He stands firm upon his feet. 

Je l\d vu, de mes propres yeux, I have seen it with my own eyes. 

656. II. — When speaking of an habitual complaint, the 
possessive pronoun is properly used ; as, 

Sa migraine Va repris, His head-ache is returned. 

657. The possessive pronouns are subject to the same 
rules as the article ; they must therefore be repeated before 
all substantives which are either subject or regimen, and before 
all adjectives which express different qualities, although this 
is seldom observed in English ; as, , 

Son pere, sa mere, et ses frtres His father, mother, and brothers are 

so ni de retonr, come back. 

Je lid at montre mes pins beanx I have shewn him my finest and my 

et mes plus vilains habits, ugliest dresses. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Whateverhe may do, he always finds himself safe 

2. Can you still doubt the truth of what I tell you ? Would vou ask 
a stronger proof than that I give you, it is that I heard it — yes, heard it 
with my own ears. 

(1.) Finds himself , se retrouver— safe, sur ses jambes 
(2.) Can, N. — doubt, douter de— ask, exiger. 

s2 



210 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

3. M% gout does not allow me a moment's repose. 

4. It is in vain that I exhort you to work and study : your idleness, 
that cruel disease under* which you labor, renders useless all the exhorta- 
tions of friendship. 

5. If you wish to be beloved, fail not to perform the promises you have 
just made. 

6. In the retreat that I have chosen for myself, my study and my garden 
are my greatest delight, 

7. He brought me into his laboratory, and showed me his large and 
small vessels. 



(3.) Allow, laisser. 

(4 ) It is in vain that I, je ai beau — exhort, A. — you labor, vous travaille. 

(5.) Fail not, ne pas manquer— perform, remplir — have just made, venir de faire. 

(6.) For myself, (to me) — study, cabinet — are, faire — greatest, plus cber. 

(7.) Brought, mener — laboratory, laboratoire — vessels, vaisseau. 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

658. Qui, when it is the subject, may very properly relate 
both to persons and things. 

EXAMPLES. 

Vhomme qui joue perd son temps, The man who games loses his time. 
Le livre, qui plait le plus, n'est The book which pleases most is not 
pas toujours le plus utile, always the most useful. 

659. But when it is the regimen, it can only be used of 
persons or of things personified, whether the regimen be 
direct or indirect. 

EXAMPLES. 
Quand on est delicat et sage dans He who is wise, and discriminates in 
ses gouts, on ne s' attache pas, his choice, does not form an attach- 
sans savoir qui Von aime, ment without knowing the person 

he loves. 
Vhomme a qui appartient ce beau The man to whom this fine garden 
jar din est trts-riche, belongs is very rich. [ing. 

Lafemme de qui vous parlez, The woman of whom you are speak- 

660. Remark. — When the regimen indirect is expressed 
by the preposition de, then dont should be preferred to de 
qui. It is better to say, Lafemme dont vous parlez; how- 
ever, when the verlj expresses a kind of transfer or convey- 
ance, de qui must be used ; as, 

Celui de qirije tiens cette nouvelle, The person from whom I had that 

intelligence. 

661. Rule I. — Qui must not be separated from its antece- 
dent when that antecedent is a noun. 

EXAMPLE 
Un jeune homme qui est docile A young man who is obedient to the 
aux conseils qrfon lui donne, advice that is given him, and who 
et qui aime a en recevoir, aura loves to receive it, will infallibly 
infailliblement du nitrite, have merit. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 211 

662. Remark. — In some phrases, qui may be separated 
from the substantive by several words-- that is, when the 
sense obliges us to refer it to that substantive ; as, 

II a fallu, avant toute chose, vous faire lire dans 1'ecriture sainte, 
Vhistoire du peupie de Dieu, qui fait le fondement de la religion. 

663. This sentence is very correct; because, as du peupie 
determines the kind of history, and de Bleu the kind of 
people, the mind necessarily goes back to the substantive 
histoire, to which it refers. 

664. Qui may likewise be separated from its antecedent, 
when this antecedent is a pronoun used as the regimen 
direct; as, 

U la trouva qui pleurait a chaudes larmes, He found her crying bitterly. 
Je le vois qui joue, I see him playing. 

665. Because, in this case, the true place of the pronoun 
is before the verb, and it is the same as saying, II trouva 
elle qui pleurait, &c. je vois lui qui joue. Also in these 
kinds of sentences, which are real gallicisms : 

Ceux-la ne sont pas les plus mal- Those are not the most unhappy 
heureux, qui se plaignent le plus, who complain the most. 

EXERCISE. 

1. A young man -who loves vanity of dress, like a woman, is unworthy 
of wisdom and glory ; glory is only due to a heart that knows how* to* 
suffer pain and trample upon pleasure. 

2. Thyself, O my son, my dear son, thou* thyself that now enjoyest a 
youth so cheerful and so full of pleasure, remember that this delightful 
age is but a flower, -which will be withered almost as soon as blown. 

3. Men pass away like flowers, -which open in* the morning, and at 
night are withered and trampled under foot. 

4. You must have a man that loves nothing but truth and you, that will 
speak the truth in spite of you, that will force all your entrenchments; and 
this necessary character is the very man whom you have sent into exile, 

5. We perceived him waiting for us, quietly seated under the shade 
of a tree. 



(1.) Vanity of dress, a se parer vainement — trample upon, fouler aux pieds. 

(2.) Cheerful, vif—full of feconde en— remember, se souvenir— delightful, bel— 
withered, s r cher — blown, eclore. 

(3.) Open, s'epanouir— and, (which) — at night, le soir — withered, fletrir — under, a 
—/oof, les pieds. 

(4.) You must have, il vous faut— nothing but, ne que— will speak, d.—will force, 
Q, — entrenchments, retrancheraent— character, homrae — man, mcrae — sent into exile, 
exiler. 

(5.) Waiting for, (who waited) attendre— under, a. 

666. Rule II. — The relative qui must always have a 
reference to a noun taken in a determinate sense 

EXAMPLES. 
L'homme est un animal raisonable, qui, <&c, 
II me regut avec une politesse, qui, &c. 



212 PARTICULAR RULES OF TKE PRONdUNS. 

667. But we cannot say, 

V homme est animal raisonable, qui, &c. 
II me recut avec politesse, qui, &c. 

668. Remark. — Though in many phrases the determinate 
nature of the nouns is not expressed, yet it is clearly under- 
stood. Thus, all these phrases are correct : 

// n?a point de livre, qui ne soit He has not a book that is not of his 

de son choix, own selecting. 

Y a-t-il ville dans le royaume qui Is there a city in the kingdom that is 

soit pins favorisee ? more favored 1 

Jl se conduit en homme qui con- He behaves himself like a man who 

na>t le monde, knows the world. 

77 est accable de maux qui ne He is overwhelmed with misfortunes 

lui laissent pas un instant de that do not allow him a moment's 

rep os, rest. 

C'est une sorte de fruit, qui ne It is a sort of fruit that does not ripen 

miirit pas en Europe> in Europe. 

669. From the translation of all the above examples it is evi- 
dent that livre, ville, maux, are really determinate, the meaning 
being, il rCa pas, un livre qui, &c. ; y a-t-il une ville qui, &c. 

EXERCISE. 

1. He received us with such goodness, civility, and grace, as charmed 
us, and made us forget all we had suffered. 

2. There is no city in the world ivhere there are more riches and a 
Sweater population. 

3. Is there a man who can say, "I shall live till to-morrow?" 

4. He has no friend but would make for him every kind of sacrifice. 

5. He is surrounded by enemies, ivho are continually observing him, 
and would be very glad to detect him in a fault. 

6. In his retreat, he lives like a philosopher, ivho knows men and 
mistrusts them. 

7. The pine-apple is a sort of f nut that in Europe ripens only in 
hot-houses. 

8. That man is a sort of pedant ivho takes words for ideas, and facts 
confusedly heaped together for knowledge. 

(1.) Such as, an. ..qui — civility, polite?se. (2) Tterc are, Q. 

(?>.) Can, (I. (4.) But, qui no.— would make, S. 

(6.) Like a, (in— philosopher, sajre— m intrust s, so dtfier de. 
(7) Pine-apple, nnnnnz— hot-houses, genre chtiude. 
(8.) Heaped together, entasscr— knowledge, savoir. 

670. Que relates both to persons and tilings. It is always 
the regimen direct, and cannot subsist without an antecedent 
expressed, which it generally follows. L'honime quejc vois, 
la peche que /e mange. We say generally, because in some 
instances it may be separated from the antecedent by several 
words — that is, when the mind necessarily goes back to that 
antecedent, as in this sentence of Flechier's : 

Qu'est-ce qu'une armi'c 1 — e'est un corps anime d'une infinite de passion? 
differentes, ^z'un homme habile fait mouvoir pour la defense de la patrie 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 213 

671. Remark. — There are instances where que is appa- 
rently used as regimen indirect for a qui or dont ; as, C est a 
vous que je parte; c'est de lui que je parte; de la fagon que 
fai dit la chose. But in this case, que is a conjunction. 

EXERCISE. 

1. The God -whom the Hebrews and Christians have always served, 
has nothing in common with the deities fall of imperfection, and even of 
vice, worshipped by the rest of the world. 

2. The Epic poem is not the panegyric of a hero -who is proposed as 
a* pattern, but the recital of great and illustrious actions, -which are 
exhibited for imitation. 

3. The good which we hope for* presents itself to us, and disappears 
like an empty dream, which vanishes when we awake : to teach us that 
the very things which we think we* hold fast in* our* hands,* may slip 
away in an instant. 

4. Plato says that, in writing, we ought to hide ourselves, to disappear, 
to make the world forget us, that we may present nothing but the truths 
we wish to impress. 

(1.) (That the rest of the world worshipped). 

(2 ) Is proposed, on propose — as, pour — pattern, modele — is exhibited, on donne— 
imitation, exemple. 

(3.) Good, bien — disappears, s'envoler — empty, vain — vanishes, &c, le revcil fait 
evanouir— hold fast, tenir F. le mieux — slip away, nous echappent. 

(4) We, on — to make the world forget, se faire oublier — that we may present but, 
pour ne produire que — wish, vouloir — impress, persuader. 

672. Lequel m., laquelle f., lesquets m. pi., lesquelles f. pi., 
and dont, relate both to persons and things. But lequel, &c. 
ought never to be used, either as a subject or object, except 
to avoid ambiguity ; for whenever the sense is evident, qui 
or que must be used. 

673. Lequel, laquelle, lesquets, lesquelles, with the preposi- 
tion de, is either followed or preceded by a noun, which it 
unites to the principal sentence. If it be followed, dont is 
preferable to duquel m., de laquelle f., desquels m. pi., des- 
quelles f. pi., both for persons and things. Thus : 

La Tamise dont le lit, and not de laquelle 
Le prince dont la protection, and not duquel, 

674. If lequel, laquelle, lesquets, lesquelles, be preceded by 
the noun, we can only make use of duquel, de laquelle, des- 
quels, desquelles, when speaking of things ; as, La Tamise, 
dans le lit de laquelle : and it is always better to use it when 
speaking of persons ; as, Le prince a la protection duquel : 
de qui would not be so well. 

675. Liquet, laquelle, lesquets, lesquelles, with the prepo 
sition a, when speaking of things, requires auquel m., a la- 
quelle f., auxquels m. pi., auxquelles f. pi.; as, Les places 
auxquelles it aspire: but we ought to prefer a qui when 



214 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

speaki ng of persons ; as, Les rois a qui on doit obeir. Jlux- 
quels would not do so well. 

876. So the relative qui, preceded by a preposition, never 
relates to things, but to persons only. 

EXERCISE. 

1. The grand principle on -which the whole turns is, that all* the world 
is but one republic, of -which God is the common father, and in -which 
every nation forms, as it were, one great family. 

2. Homer, -whose genius is grand and sublime like nature, is the greatest 
poet, and perhaps the most profound moralist of antiquity. 

3. The celebrated Zenobia, -whose noble firmness you have admired, 
preferred dying with the title of queen, rather than accept the advantage- 
ous offers which Aurelian made her. 

4. The Alps, on the summit of ivhich the astonished eye discovers 
perpetual snow and ice, present at sunset the most striking and most 
magnificent spectacle. 

5. A king, to -whose care we owe a good law, has done more for his 
own glory than if he had conquered the universe. 

6. The ambitious man* sees nothing but pleasure in the possession of 
the offices to ivhich he aspires with so much eagerness, instead of seeing 
the trouble that is inseparable from them. 

7. Kings, ivhom religion makes it our duty to obey, are, upon earth, 
the true representation of the providence of God. 

(1.) Turns, rouler— every, chaque— as il were, comme. 

(3 ) Preferred, aimer mieux— -than, quo de. 

(4.) Perpetual ,eterne! — snow, ice, pi. — sunset, soleil couchant — striking, imposant. 

(5.) Carp, solicitude. [image. 

(7.) Whom, (to whom) — makes it our duty to, nous fait un devoirde — representation 

677. Quoi only relates to things. It is placed after the 
word to which it relates, but is always preceded by a prepo- 
sition, and is generally followed by the subject of the phrase 
with which it is connected; as, 

La chose a. quoi on pense ; voila les conditions sans quoi la chose ne 
pent sefaire. 

678. To this mode of expression are to be preferred lequel, 
duquel, auqueU as being much better; for quoi is never used 
with any degree of propriety but when it relates to a vague 
and indefinite subject, such as ce or rien; as, 

C'est de quoi t /e rrCoccupe sans ccsse. 
II ii y a rien a quoi je so is phis dispose*. 

079. On, d'oii, par ou, relate only to tilings. They are 
never used but when the nouns to which they refer express 
some kind of motion or rest, at least metaphorically; 

Voila le but oil il tend, That is the end he aims at 

G'Vv< am' those d'ou depend le It is a thing upon which the public 

bonheur public, happiness depends. 

hns Uetuz par 'ju il a pa*t4 % The places through which he has passed 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 215 

EXERCISE. 

1. What a young man, who begins the world, ought principally to 
attend to, is not to give it a high opinion of his understanding, but lo 
gain numerous friends by the qualities of his heart. 

2. A youth passed in idleness, effeminacy, and pleasure, lays up for* 
us nothing but sorrow and disgust in old age ; this, however, is what we 
little think of when we are young. 

3. There is nothing by -which we are more affected than the loss of 
fortune, although, being frail and perishable in its nature, it cannot con 
tribute to our happiness. 

4. A grove, in which I defy the burning heat of the dog-star, a retired 
vallev, where I can meditate in peace, a high hill, whence my eye extends 
over immense plains, are the places where I spend the happiest moments 
of my life. 

(1.) To what, ce A quoi — begins, entrer dans — to attend, s'attacher — it, y — opinion, 
idee— understanding, esprit— to gain, se faire — numerous, beaucoup de. 

(-2.) Idleness, inutilite — effeminacy, mollesse— pleasure, volupte — lays up, preparer 
— of, i)—icc. on. 

(3.) By, a — ice. on — affected, sensible—; frail, frele — by. de— cannot, Q,. — our. the. 

(4.) Grove, bosquet— defy, braver— burning heats, ardeur— dog -star, canicule- 
spend, passer. 



ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 

680. Qui relates only to persons presenting but a vague, 
indeterminate idea ; as, 

Qui sera assez hardi pour Who will be bold enough to attack 
Valtaquer ? him. 

681. It is likewise used in the feminine and in the plural . as, 

Qui est cette personne-Za ? Who is that person 1 

Qui sont ces femmes-la ? Who are those women 1 

682. Que and quoi relate to things only ; as, 

Que pouvait la valeur en ce com- What could valor do in that fatal 

bat funeste ? comb at 1 

A quoi pensez-vous ? What are you thinking of? 

683. Que is sometimes used for a quoi, de quoi ; as. 

Que sert la science sans la vertu ? What avails learning without virtue ? 
Que sert a Vavare d? avoir des What use is it to the miser to possess 
tresors ? treasures 1 

that is, a quoi sert, &c. de quoi sert, &c. 

684. Quoi, when relating to a whole sentence, is the only 
authorized expression that can be used ; as, 

La vie passe comme un songe ; e'est cependant a quoi on ne pense gueres 

68"5. Remark. — Que and quoi require the preposition de 
before the adjective or substantive that follows them ; as 

Que dit-on de nouveau 1 quoi de plus agreable I 
Que d'inconsequences dans sa conduite ! 



216 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

686. Quel m., quelle f., quels m. pi., quelles f. pi., relate 
both to persons and things ; as, 

Quel homme peut se promettre un bonheur constant 1 
Quelle grace ! quelle beaute ! mais quelle modestie ! 

687. Oil, (Foil, par oil, relate but to things. 

EXERCISE ON ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 

1. Who could ever persuade himself, did not daily experience convince 
us of it, that, out of a hundred persons, there are ninety who sacrifice to 
the enjoyment of the present all the best-founded hopes of the future 7 

2. Who would not love virtue for its own sake could he see it in all 
its beauty 1 

3. He who does not know how to apply himself in his youth, does not 
know -what to do when arrived at maturity. 

4. He*Vas a wise legislator who, having given to his countrymen laws 
calculated to make them good and happy, made them swear not to violate 
any of those laws during his absence : after -which, he went away, exiled 
himself from his country, and died poor in a foreign land. 

5. What people of antiquity ever had better laws than the Egyptians 1 
What other nation ever undertook to erect monuments calculated to 
triumph over both time and barbarism ] 

6. What more instructive and entertaining' than to read celebrated 
authors in their own language ? What beauty, what delicacy, and grace, 
which cannot be transcribed into a translation are discovered in them ! 

7. When Menage had published his book on the Origin of the French 
Language, Christina, queen of Sweden, said: — "Menage is s (the most 
troublesome) 'man 2 (in the world) : he cannot let 2 one word 'go without 
its passport ; he must know -whence it comes, -where it has passed through, 
and w hit her it is going." 



(1.) Did, si— out of, sur— future, avenir. 

(2.) Its own sake, elle meme— could he, si on pouvoir H. • [dans Yiige miir. 

(3.) How, (to what) — what, (to what)— to do, s'occuper — when arrived at maturity, 

(4.) He, ce — calculated, propre — not to, (that they would not)— went away, partir. 

(5.) Calculated to, fait pour — both, egalement — over, de. 

(6.) Language, langue— delicacy, finesse — which cannot, qu'on ne peut— be tran- 
scribed, faire passer— translation, traduction— are, &c. n'y d< couvro-t-on pns. 

(7.) When, apr.'.s que— Christina, Christine— troublesome, incommode — inthe, du. — 
cannot, ne saurait— go, passer— must, vouloir. 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

688. Ce, joined to the verb etre, always governs this verb 
in the singular, except when it is followed by the third person 
plural. 

C*est moi, e'est toi, e'est lui, c^st nous, e'est vous. 

0*81). Hut in different eases we must say, 

Ce sont. eux, ce sont elles, Sont-ce les Anglais, qui out fait cela? 

Ce furcnt vos ancetres qui, Est-ce les Anglais que vous aimez ? 

Fut-ce nos profrcsfils qui, Fut-ce nos propres Jils que. 

690. Ce, when relating to a person or thing mentioned 
before, supplies the place of il or elle 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 217 

691. Ce must always be used when the verb etre is fol- 
lowed by a substantive, accompanied by the indefinite article 
or the numerical adjective tin. 

EXAMPLES. 

Lisez Homere et Virgile : ce sont Read Homer and Viro-il : thev are 

les plus grands poetes de Van- the best poets of antiquity " 

tiquite, * *' 

La douceur, Vaffabilite, et une Gentleness, affability, and a certain 

certaine urbanite, distinguent urbanity, distinguish the man 

Ihomme qui vit clans le grand who frequents polite company ■ 

monde; ce sont la les marques these are marks oy which he 

auxquedes on le recommit, . may be known. 

Avez-vous hi Platan ? c'est un des Have you read Plato 1 he is one of 

plus beaux gemesdeV antiquity the greatest geniuses of antiquity. 

692. But when the verb etre is followed by an adjective or 
by a substantive taken adjectively, it or elle must be used'. 

EXAMPLES. 

Lisez Bemosthhie et Ciceron s Read Demosthenes and Cicero • 

lis sont tres-eloquens, thev are verv eloquent. 

J ai vu I hnpjtal de Greenwich ; I have seen Greenwich Hospital • 

H est magnifique et digne d'une it is superb, and worthy of a 

grande nation, great nat j onf 

Compteriez-vous but Valere ? Would vou rely upon Val£re * do 

ignorez-vous qu\\ est homme you not know that he is a man 

a ne jamais revenir de ses pre- who will never abandon his firs* 

mitres idets? opinions] 

EXERCISE ON DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

1. It iswc who have drawn that misfortune upon* ourselves* through 
our thoughtlessness and imprudence. 

2. It -was the Egyptians that first observed the course of the stars, 
regulated the year, and invented arithmetic. 

3. Peruse attentively Plato and Cicero: they are the two philostp^rs 

mo a ralit qUlty ^^ US ^ m ° St S ° Und and luminous ideas U P°» 

4. If you are intended for the pulpit, read over and over again Bour- 
daloue and Massillon : they are both very eloquent; but the aim of the 
lormer is to convince, and that of the latter to persuade. 

(1 ) Have drawn, s'attirer- thoughtlessness, legerete. 
(-.■) tirst. les premiers— stars, astres. 
fdl P / ruse ' Wje— swtnil, tain-morality, morale. 
et relirllns^te-ai^! bS^' * r ^*#' ch ^~ rcad «>» ™* over again, lire 

693. Ce, followed by a relative pronoun, relates to things 
only. It is always masculine singular, as it only denotes^ 
vague object, which is not sufficiently specified to know its 
gender and number. 

EXAMPLE. 

Ce qui rlatte est plus dangereux What flatters is more dangerous 
que ce qui offense, than what offendSj 

T 



218 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

694. Ce, joined to the relative pronouns qui, que, doni, 
and quoi, has in some i stances a construction peculiar to 
itself. Both re and the relative pronoun that follows it form, 
with the verb which they precede, the subject of another 
phrase, of which the verb is always etre. Now, etre may 
be followed by another verb, an adjective, or a noun. 

695. When etre, then, is followed by another verb, the 
demonstrative ce must be repeated ; as, 

Ce que faime le plus, c'est d'etre seul, What I like most, is to be alone. 

696. When followed by an adjective, the demonstrative is 
not repeated ; as, % 

Ce ilorit vous venez de me parler What you have been mentioning to 
est horrible, me is horrid. 

697. When it is followed by a substantive, the demonstrative 
may either be repeated or not, at pleasure, except in the case 
of a plural or a personal pronoun. Thus, we may say, 

Ce que je dis, est la verite, or, c'est la verite, What I say is the truth, 

698. Though the former is best. But we must say, 

Ce qui irCindigne, ce sont les injus- What provokes me, are the injuries 

tices, qnon ne cesse de /aire, which are continually committed. 

Ce qui m'arrache au sentiment What alleviates the grief that op- 

qui maccable, c'est vous, presses me, is you. 

699. Most of these rules contribute to the elegance of the 
language. 

EXERCISE. 

1. What is astonishing is not always -what is pleasing. 

2. // hat the miser thinks least of, is to enjoy his riches. 

3. What pleases us in the writings of the ancients is to see that they 
have taken nature as a model, and that they have painted her with a 
noble simplicity. 

4. What that good king has done for the happiness of his people de- 
serves to be handed down to the latest posterity. 

5. What constitutes poetry M not the exact number and regular 
cadence of syllables; but it is the sentiment which animates every thing, 
the lively fictions, bold figures, and* beauty and variety of the imagery : 
it is the enthusiasm, fire, impetuosity, force — a something in the words 
and thoughts which nature alone can impart. 

6. What we justly admire iti Shakspcare are those characters always 
natural and always well* sustained. 

7. What keeps me attached to life is yon, my son, whose tender age 
has still need of my care and advice. 

'1 ) h astonishing, < ton nor — ia pleasing, plaire. 
(8.) tVhat,(ti\a\ to winch)— miser, avare 
(3 ) /is a. pour. 

(4) Ihscrrr.- v\ro <li<rne— to be handed down, rtro transmit— latest, la plus remise 
(&.) Constitutes, f;or.> cmrt. fixe— lively, vif— imagery, image, pi — a §9nething t 
un .it- u« sain quoi — wonts, paroles— i mpart, doiltier. 

We. iMi—jnst/y, avrc justice— natural, dans la nature — sustained, souteiiU. 

Lteps attached, attacher — care, pi. — advice, pi. 






PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 219 

700. There are two ways of employing celui m., celle f., 
ceux m. pi., celles f. pi. In the first, they are followed by a 
noun, or pronoun preceded by the preposition de. 

EXAMPLES. 
Celui de vous qui, &c. Whichever of you that, &c. 

Cette montre ressemble a celle de That watch is like that of yew 
votre frere, brother. 

70 1 . In the second, they are followed by qui, que, or dont ; as, 
Celui qui ne pense qu'ii lui seul He who thinks of nobody but himself 

dispense les autres d'y penser, excuses others from thinking of him. 
Votre nouvelle est plus sure que Your intelligence is more authentic 
celle qxCon debitait hier, than that which was circulated yes- 

terday. 

702. In these two cases, they are applied both to persons 
and things. 

703. In the latter of these instances, celui, &c. are some- 
times omitted, and this turn gives strength and elegance to 
the expression ; as, 

Qui vent trop se /aire craindre, He who wishes to make himself too 
se fait raremeut aimer, much feared, seldom makes him- 

self beloved. 

704. Ceci and cela apply only to things : however, in the 
familiar style, custom authorizes us to say, in speaking of one 
person individually, or of many collectively, Cela est heureux! 
cela croupit dans lafange; cela est gueux et fter, &c. 

EXERCISE. 

1. JVJdchever of you shall be found to excel the others, both in mind 
and body, shall be acknowledged king of the island. 

2. There are admirable pictures : these are after the manner of Rubens 
and those after the manner of Van-Huysum. 

3. Why are the statues of the most celebrated modern sculptors, not- 
withstanding the perfection to which the arts have bean carried, so much 
inferior to those of the ancients 7 

4. He whose soul, glowing, as it were, with divine fire, shall represent 
to himself the wtu>le of nature, and shall breathe into objects that spirit 
of life which animates them, those afTectiug traits which delight and ravish 
us, will be a man of real genius. 

5. He that judges of others by himself is liable to many mistakes. 

6. He that is easily offended discovers his weak side, and affords his 
enemies an opportunity of taking advantage of it. 

7. He -who loves none but himself deserves not to be loved by others. 

(1.) Be found to ere el the of hers, on jusrera vainqueur— 6of A in, pi pour— and pt pour 

(2) There are. vnil s de — pictures, tableau — are after, <'tre dans — manner, jri'iire. 

(3.) Are. (to be placed before no much inferior}— have been carried. on u porte — 
inferior au-dessous. 

(4 Glowing with, en flam me de — as it were, pour ainsi dire — the wnole of. tout— 
shall breathe into, repandre sur— affecting, toiichant— delight, seduire — real, vrai. 

(5) By, d'apres — liable, expose — mistakes, meprises. 

(6 ) Is offended, s'oflenser — weak side, faible — affords, fournir a— of taking advan- 
tage, profiter. 



220 ' PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

CHAPTER V. 
PRONOUNS INDEFINITE. 



705. Though on may generally be considered as a mascu- 
line pronoun, as in the phrase on n'est pas toujours maitre 

i de ses passions, there are, however, occasions in which it is 
evidently feminine; as, on ri* est pas toujours jeune et jolie: 
it may likewise be followed by a plural; as, on se battit en 
desesperes ; est-on des traitres? 

706. This pronoun must be repeated before all the verbs 
of a sentence, and refer to one and the same subject. Thus, 
the sentence 

On croit etre aime et on ne nous aime pas 
is incorrect : it should be, 

On croit etre aime et Pon ne Test pas. 

707. Quiconque is generally masculine : however, it is 
feminine when speaking of or to females ; as, quiconque de 
vous, Mesdames, &c. : though> perhaps, telle de vous, &c, 
is preferable. 

EXERCISE ON PRONOUNS INDEFINITE. 

1. Do you sincerely think, said Emily to Lucilla, that when women are 
sensible and pretty, they are ignorant of* it 1 No, they know it very 
well : but if they are watchful over their character, they are not proud of 
these advantages. 

2. We are not slaves, to receive such treatment. 

3. Do you know what they do here 1 They eat, they drink, they dance, 
they play, they walk — in a word, they kill time in the gayest manner 
possible. 

4. Whoever of you is bold enough to slander me, I will make him 
repent it. 

5. Whoever of you is attentive and discreet shall receive a reward that 
will flatter her. 

(1.) Sincerely, de bonne foi — Emily, Emilie— women, on — they, on — kvow, savoir— 
watchful over, jaloux de — character, reputation — arc proud, s'enorgueillir. 
(2.) Wc, on— slaves, des esclaves — to receive, pour OBSliyer i!e 
(3 ) They, on— in the (ray est manner, le plus gaiment— possible, (that they can). 
(4.) Is, L —to slander, pour nu'dire de— ii, (of it). 
(5) Is, L —that will, fait pour. t 

708. Chacun m., chacune f , though always singular, may 
be followed sometimes by sun, sa, ses, and sometimes by 
lcur< kurs, which, in many instances, is embarrassing. 

709 There is no difficulty in those phrases where chacun 
is not contrasted with a plural number : for then son, sa, ses, 
must be used ; as, 

Donnez a chacun sa part, Give to each his share. 

Que chacun songe a ses affaires, Let every one mind his own business. 



PARTICULAR RULES 0T THE PRONOUNS. 221 

710. Rule. — In phrases where chacun is contrasted with 
a plural to which it refers, son, $u, ses n must he employed 
when chacun is placed after the regimen ; but leur, lews, 
must be used when chacun is placed before the regimen. 

EXAMPLES OF SOX, SJt, SES. 
Remettez ces medailles chacicne en Return those medals each into its 

sa place, m proper place. 

Les homines devraient s'aimer char Men ought to love one another, 

cun pour son propre interet, each for his own interest. 

EXAMPLE OF LEUR, LEURS. 

Les homines devraient avoir , chacun Men ought, for their own interest, 
pour leur propre interet, de to have an affection for each 
V amour les uns pour les autres, other. 

711. Remark. — In phrases where chacun is contrasted with 
a plural there are two senses, the collective and the distribu- 
tive. When chacitn is placed after the regimen, the collective 
sense expressed by the plural is finished ; and the distributive 
chacun acts separately the part of each individual: but when 
chacun precedes the regimen, the collective sense remaining 
incomplete, must be carried on to the end ; and then the pro- 
noun which follows chacitn is put in the plural ; as, 

La reine dit elle-meme aux deputes-, qu'il etait temps qu'ils s'en retour- 
nassent chacun chez eux. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Go into my library, and put the books which have been sent back 
to me each into its place. 

2. They have all brought offerings to the temple, every one according 
to his means and devotion. 

3. Thierry charged Unceianus to carry his orders to the mutineers, and 
to make them retire, each under his colors. 

4. Each of them has brought his offering, and fulfilled his religious duty. 

5. Had Ronsard and Balzac, each in his manner of writing, a sufficient 
degree of merit to form after them any very great man in verse and in prose 1 

6. After a day so usefully spent, we went back each to our own home. 

7. Minds that possess any correctness examine things with attention, 
in order to give a fair judgment of them ; and they place each of* them 
in the rank it ought to occupy. 

(2 ) Offering. ofFranrte 

(3.) To carry, aller port°r — mutineers, inutin — colors, drapeau, sing. 
(4.) (They have brorumi each their, &c )— fulfilled, remplir. 
(5 ) Manner of writing, ypnre — a Sufficient decree, assez — merit, bon — any, un. 
(6.) Day, journee — went back, retourner — to eliez— our own home. nous. 
(7 ) Possess any, avoir de— correctness, jusiesse — gice a fair judgment, juger avee 
contiaissance— place, mettre — to occupy avoir. 

712. Persnywe, used as a pronoun, is alwavs masculine ; of 
course, the adjective relating to it must be of that gender ; as, 

Personne n'est aussi heureux qtCelle, Nobody is so happy as she. 

t2 



222 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

713. IJun et V autre require the verb they govern to be in 
the plural. See page 147. 

714. Ni Vun ni V autre likewise generally govern the verb 
in the plural, when both may at the same time receive the action 
expressed by the verb : however, the two following modes 

Ni l'un ni l'autre n'ont fait leur devoir, or 
Ni l'un ni l'autre n'a fait son devoir, 

are authorized : but whenever this action applies only to a 
single object, the verb must be in the singular; as, 

Ni l'un ni l'autre n'est mon pere ; ni l'un ni l'autre ne sera nomme & 
cette ambassade. 

715. But when ni Vun ni V autre elegantly stand after the 
verb, the verb is always in the plural ; as, 

lis ne sont morts ni l'un ni l'autre. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Nobody is so severe, so virtuous in public, as some women who 

practise the least restraint in private. 

2. Nobody could be happier than she ; but as a consequence of that 
levity which you know she has, she has lost all the advantages that she 
had received from nature and education. 

3. Racine and Fenelon will be always the delight of feeling minds: 
both possessed in the highest degree the art of exciting in us at pleasure 
the most tender and the most lively emotions. 

4. Balzac and Voiture enjoyed in their time great celebrity; but neither 
has been read since by good taste : the native and simple graces are pre- 
ferred to the bombast of the former and the affectation of the latter. 



(1.) So, aussi — some, certain— practise the least restraint, etre le moins retenu. 

(2.) Could, H — that, un — levity, legorete — know she has, lui connaitre. 

(3 ) Always, dans tons les temps — both. Tun et l'autre — in the, au— pleasure, gre. 

(4.) Enjoyed, G. — neither, ni l'un ni l'autre — has been read, (they read them no 
more) — native, du nature! — simple, de la simplicity — are preferred, depuisque le bon 
gout a fait preferer les, &c— bombast, bourrissure. 

716. Tout and rien,, when the regimen direct, are placed 
after the verb in simple tenses, and between the auxiliary and 
the participle in compound tenses; as, // avoue tout; il 
rt avoue Hen ; il a tout avoue ; il n'a rien avoue. 

717. But when they form the regimen indirect, they are 
always placed after the verb, both in simple and in compound 
tenses ; as, // rit de tout ; il ne se mele de rien ; il a pense 
a tout ; il n'a pense a rien. 

718. Tout is sometimes used as an adverb; as, 

77 lui dit tout froi dement, He has told him quite coolly. 

719. Sometimes also it represents quoique, encore que, 
entierementy quelque, in which case the following rule must 
be observed : 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 223 

720. Rule. — Tout before an adjective, or a substantive 
which is used adjectively, never takes either gender or num- 
ber, except when immediately followed by an adjective femi- 
nine beginning with a consonant or h aspirated ; as, 

Les enj cms, tout ai 'ma bles qu'-'ls sont, Children, amiable as they are. 

Us sont tout inter dits, They are quite disconcerted. 

La vertu tout austere qu'elle parait, Virtue, austere as it may appear. 

Ces images tout amus antes qu'elles These images, entertaining as they 

sont, may be. 

C'est ane tete toute vide, It is quite a vacant head. 

Ces dames, toutes spirituelles qu'elles These ladies, witty as they may 

sont, be. 

Ces fleitrs sont tout aussi fraiches These flowers are quite as fresh as 

que celles que vous avez, those which you have. 

Ces dames sont, tout ainsi qae vous, These ladies, as well as you, are 

tout comme vous, belles, jeunes et handsome, young, and inge- 

spirituelles, nious. 

721. In this latter sense, tout is little more than a mere 

expletive. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Children, amiable as they are, have nevertheless many faults, which 
it is of importance to correct. 

2. The philosophers of antiquity, although very* enlightened, have 
given us but very confused ideas of the Deity, and very vague notions 
about the principal duties of the law of nature. 

3. Those flowers, inodorous as they are, are not the less esteemed. 

4. Virtue, austere as it is, makes us enjoy real pleasures. 

5. Fables, although very* entertaining, yet truly interest us only when 
they convey instruction to us, under the disguise of an ingenious allegory. 

6. Although that absurd pedant is an incessant scribbler, yet his head 
is altogether empty. 

7. Far be from us these maxims of flattery, that kings are born with 
talents, and that their favored souls come out of God's hands completely 
ivise and learned. 

8. Those fountains glide quite gently through a mead enamelled with 
flowers. 

9. These peaches are quite as good as those of the south of France. 



(1 ) Have nevertheless, ne laisser pas d" avoir— faults, defaut — of importance, essen- 
ce.) Enlightened, eclaires qirils etaient — of nature, naturel. [tiel. 
(3.) Inodorous, inodore — not, rfen. 

(4 ) Enjoy. trouter de. [convey, offrir — disguise, voile. 

(5 ) Entertaining, amusantes qirelles sont — truly, vcritableraent — only, ne que — 
(3.) Incessant, iufatieable — scribbler, ecrivailleur — his head is, (he has not iess the 

head)— not. n'en— altogether, tout. 
(7.) Far be. loin — of de la — are born, naissent — with talents, habile— favored, pri- 

Vil ;gi — come out. sor ir — learned, savant. 
(8.) Glide, couier— gently, doucement — through a mead, sur un gazon. 

722. Quelque — que, sing. m. and f., quelques — que, pi. m. 
and f., joined to a substantive, either alone or accompanied by 
an adjective, take the sign of the plural. 



224 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

EXAMPLES. 
Quelques richesses que voiia ayez, Whatever riches you may possess. 
Quelques bonnes osuvres que vous Whatever good actions you may 

fassiez, do. 

Quelques peines affreuses que vous However dreadful pains you may 

eprouviez, suffer. 

723. But when joined to an adjective separated from its 
substantive, it does not take the sign of the plural. 

EXAMPLES. 

Tous les ho?n?nes, quelque opposes All men, however opposite they 

quits soient, may be. 

Ces actions, quelque belles qiCon Those actions, however brilliant 

les trouve % they may be found. 

724. Quelque — que, sing. m. and f., quelques — que, pi. m. 
and f., quel que, in. s., quelle que, f. s., quels que, m. pi., 
and quelles que, f. pi., joined to a substantive (see page 74), 
have the same meaning, although they ^re not used indiffer- 
ently for each other. If the pronoun stands before the sub- 
stantive, we must make use of quelque — que ; as, 

Quelques richesses que vous ayez ; 

725. But if the verb intervene, then we make use of quel 
que in two separate words ; as, 

Quelles que soient les richesses que vous ayez. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Whatever talents you may possess, whatever advantages you may 
have received from nature and education, with* whatever perfections you 
may be endowed, expect only the suffrage of a small number of men. 

2. However great services you may have rendered mankind, rather 
look for their ingratitude than their acknowledgements. 

3. However useful, however well written the works which you have 
published, yet think not that you wiil immediately reap the fruits of your 
labors: it is but by slow degrees that light introduces itself among men. 
The course of time is swift ; but it seeYns to lag when it brings reason 
and truth along with it. 

4. Whatever may be the obstacles which ignorance, prejudice, and 
envy oppose to the true principles of an art, yet we night never to be 
deterred from propagating them : the sun does not cease to shine because 
Its light hurts the eyes of night-birds. 

5. Il'liatrver be youi birth, whatever your riches and dignities, re- 
member that you are frustrating the views of Providence, if you do not 

use uf them for the good of mankind. 

(j ) Foesesa, avoir— kavt received, tenir— be endowed, posseder— aspect, ne 8*attendra 

. que 

.Ma kind homme, pi.— mthcr look for, compter plutflt — acknowledgement, 
recon n His mice Ring 

c.\ v Immediately % de suite— reap, recueillir — by slow degrees, avec lenteor — among, 
( i s ft rapid" to lag, se trainer — along with it. >;i suite 

(l.i Hi on '" be deterred, Be rebuter -propagating , repandre — shine, eclairer— 
its, la— hurts, blesser — night -birds, oiseau tie auit. 
(5.) Art frustrating, frustrer. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 225 

CHAPTER VI. 

OF THE VERB. 



Agreement of the Verb with its Subject. 



726. It has been observed that the verb which has two 
subjects, both singular, is put in the plural ; but to this rule 
there are the following 

727. Exceptions. — 1, A verb with two subjects in the 
singular is not put in the plural when the two subjects are 
only joined together by the conjunctions on, comme, aussi- 
bien que, aidant que, &c. 

EXAMPLES. 

La seduction ou la terreur Z'a en- Either persuasion or terror has drawn 

traine dans le parti des rebelles, him into the party of the rebels. 

Le roi, aussi-bien que son minis- The king, as -well as his ministry, 

tire, veut le bien public, -wishes for the public good. 

Son honnetete, autant que son es- His honesty, as much as his wit, 

prit, le fait rechercher, makes him be courted. 

Venvie, comme (ambition, est Envy, like ambition, is a blind pas- 

une passion aveugle, sion. 

728. 2. — The verb is likewise put in the singular, though 
preceded by plurals, either when there is an expression which 
collects all the substantives into one — such as, tout, ce, rien, 
Sic. — or when the conjunction mais is placed before the last 
substantive, and this is in the singular. 

EXAMPLES. 

Biens, dignites, honneurs, tout Riches, dignities, honors, every xhing, 

disparait a la rr.ort, vanishes at death. 

Jeux, conversations, spectacles, Games, conversations, shows, nothing 

rien ne la distrait, diverts her. 

Perfidies, noirceurs, incendies, Perfidies, enormities, conflagrations, 

massacres, ce 7i'est la qiCune massacres, all this is but a feeble 

faible image, &c. representation, &c. 

A'on-seulementtoutes ses richesses Not only all his riches and honors, 

et tons ses honneurs, maistoute but all his virtue vanishes. 
sa vertu s'evanouit, 

EXERCISE ON THE VERB. 

1. Either fear or inability prevented them from moving. [bosom. 

2. The fear of death, or rather the love of life, began to revive in his 

3. Alcibiades, as -well as Plato, was among the disciples of Socrates. 

4. Lycurgus. like Solon, was a wise legislator. 

(1 ) Inability, impuissance — moving, remuer. 

(2.) Began to revive, se reveiller— in, au fond de— bosom, ccBur. 

(3.) Among, au nombre de. 

(4.) Lycurgus, Lycurgue. 



226 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

5. Euripides, as much as Sophocles, contributed to the glory of the 
Athenians. 

6. Riches, dignities, honors, glory, pleasure, every thing loses its 
charms from the moment we possess it, because none of those things can 
£11 the heart of man. 

7. The gentle zephyrs which preserved in that place, notwithstanding 
the scorching heat of the sun, a delightful coolness : streams gliding with 
a sweet murmur through meadows interspersed with amaranths and vio- 
lets : a thousand springing flowers, which enamelled carpets ever green : 
a wood of those tufted trees that bear golden apples, and the blossom of 
which, renewed every season, yields the sweetest of all perfumes : the 
warbling of birds: the continual prospect of a fruitful country: in a 
word, nothing of what till then had made him happy, could assuage the 
feelings of his grief. 



(si.) We, on — none, rien — those things, tout cela. 

(7.) Preserved, entretenir — scorching heat, ardeur — interspersed with, parsemer 
de — springing, naissant — carpets, tapis — tufted, touffu — golden, (of gold) — renewed, 
(which renews) se renouveler — (in) every season — yields, repandre — prospect, spec- 
tacle — made, rendre— assuage, l'arracher k— feeling, sentiment. 



Of the Collective Partitive. 

729. The collectives general have nothing to distinguish 
them from substantives common, with regard to the laws of 
agreement; but the collectives partitive apparently deviate 
from those laws in some instances. 

730. Rule. — The verb which relates to a collective parti- 
tive is put in the plural when that partitive is followed by the 
preposition de and a plural ; but it is put in the singular, either 
when the partitive is followed by a regimen singular, or when 
it expresses a determinate quantity, or lastly, when it presents 
an idea independent of the plural which follows it. 

EXAMPLES OF THE PLURAL. 

La plupart des hommes sont bien The greatest part of men are very 
prompts dans lews jugemens* hasty in their judgments. 

Bien des philosophes se sont Many philosophers have been mis- 
trompes, taken. 

EXAMPLES OF THE SINGULAR. 

fine infinite de peuple est accourue An immense number of people 

(regimen singular), flocked together. 

La moitie des soldats a piri (deter- One half of the soldiers has 

minute quantity), perished. 

Tie plus grand nombre des troupes a The greater number of the troops 

peri (idea independent of plural), has perished. 

731. Thus the substantives partitive la plupart ', line infi- 
nite ^ une foule, nn nombre, la plus grande partie, tine sorfe, 
&('.. and words signifying quantity — such as peu, bcaucoup, 
asseZ' moinSt plus, trap, tant, combicn, and que used for 
combicn, followed by a noun joined to them by the preposition 






PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 227 

( j e — have not the least influence on the verb, and conse- 
quently, it is not with them that the verb agrees, but with the 
noun which follows them. 

732. Remark. — The words infinite and la phipart, used 
by themselves, require the verb in the plural; as, Une infinite' 
pensent, la plupart sont oVavis. 

EXERCISE ON THE COLLECTIVE PARTITIVE. 

1. Many persons experience that human life is every where a state in 
which much is to be endured and little to be enjoyed. 

2. Many poets think that poetry is the art of uniting pleasure with 
truth, by calling imagination to the help of reason. 

3. Few persons reflect that time, like money, may be lost by unseason- 
able avarice. 

4. So many years of familiarity were chains of iron which linked me 
to those men who beset me every hour. 

5. How many wise men* have thought that, to seclude one's self from 
the world was to pull out the teeth of devouring animals, to take away 
from the wicked the use of his poniard, from calumny its poisons, and 
from envy its serpents ! 

6. A company of young Phoenicians, of uncommon beauty, clad in 
fine linen, whiter than snow, danced a* long while the dances of their 
own* country, then those of Egypt, and lastly those of Greece. 

7. A troop of nymphs, crowned with flowers, wmose lovely tresses 
flowed over their shoulders, and waved with the wind, swam in shoals 
behind her car. 

8. At the time of the invasion of Spain by the Moors, an innumerable 
multitude of people retired into the Asturias, and there proclaimed Pela- 
gius king. 

9. A third-part of the enemy were left dead on the field of battle ; the 
rest surrendered at discretion. 

10. The innumerable crowd of carriages which are to be seen in 
London during the winter astonishes foreigners. 



(1 ) Much is, &c (one has a great deal of pains and little of real enjoyments). 

(3 ) Unseasonable, hors de propos. 

(4) Familiarity, habitude — linked, lier— beset, obseder. [take aicay from, oter a. 

(5.) How many, que de — to seclude one's self, se retirer— pull out of, arracher a -to 

(G.) Company, troupe— clad in. et vetu de— linen, lin. 

(7.) Lovely, beau— tresses, cheven— floured, pendre — waved, flotter — with, au gre de 
—swam, naser H — shoals, foule — car. char 

(8 ) Moors, Maure— retired, se retirer — Asturias, Asturies—Pelagius, Pelage 

(9.) Ji third. part, un tiers— en emy, pi. — surrendered, se rendre. 
(10 ) Crowd, quantity— which are, &c. (which one sees). 



Place of the Subject with regard to the Verb. 

73.}. It has been seen that the subject of a verb is either a 
noun or a pronoun, and that this subject must always be 
expressed in French. It remains to speak of the place of tins 
subject with respect to the verb. 

734. Rule. — The subject, whether a noun or pronoun, is 
generally placed before the verb. 



228 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VEkB. 

EXAMPLES. 

I/ambition effrenee de quelques The boundless ambition of a few 

homines, a, dans tous les temps, men has, in all ages, been the 

ete la vraie cause des revolutions real cause of the revolutions of 

des etats, empires. 

Quand nous nageons dans Vabon- When we roll in plenty, we 

dance, il est bien rare que nous seldom think of the miseries of 

nous occupions des maux tfautrui, others. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Youth is full of presumption; it expects every thing from itself: 
although frail, it thinks itself all -sufficient, and that it has nothing to fear. 

2. Commerce is like certain springs : if you attempt to* divert their 
course, you dry them up. 

3. It is enough that falsehood is falsehood, to be unworthy of a man who 
speaks in the presence of God, and who is to sacrifice every thing to truth. 

4. The ambition and avarice of man are the sources of his unhajjpiness. 

5. They punished in Crete three vices which have remained unpunished 
in all other nations : — ingratitude, dissimulation, and avarice. 

6. Like the Numidian lion, goaded by cruel hunger, and rushing upon 
a flock of feeble sheep, he tears, he slays, he wallows in blood. 

(1.) Full of presumption, presomptueux — expects, se promettre — itself all-sufficient, 
pouvoir tout — that it has, avoir. 

(2.) Springs, source— attempt, vouloir — dry up, faire tarir. 

(3 ) It is enough, suffire— falsehood, mensonge — is, Q.—in, en — is to sacrifice, doit. 

(5.) Punished, H. — have remained, etre— in, chez. 

(15.) Like the, semblable a un — Numidian, de Numidie— goaded by, &.C., (that cruel 
hunger goads) devorer— rushing, (which rushes uponjentrer dans — tears, dechirer— 
slays, egorger — wallows, nager. 

735. Exceptions. — 1, In interrogative phrases, the ques- 
tion is made either with a pronoun or a noun, as subject of the 
verb : if with a pronoun, it is always placed after the verb ; as, 

Que dit-on 1 irai-je a la campagne 1 de qui parle-t-on ? 

736. If with a noun, the noun is sometimes placed before 
and sometimes after the verb ; it stands before when the pro- 
noun personal which answers to it asks the question ; as, 

Cette nouvelle est-elle sure 1 les hommes se rendent-ils toujours a la raison ? 

737. It stands after when a pronoun absolute or an interro- 
gative adverb, placed at the beginning of the phrase, allow 
the suppression of the personal pronoun ; as, 

Que dit votre ami T a quoi s'occupe votre frere ] ou demeure votre cousin ? 

738. Remark. — In interrogative sentences, when the verb 
which precedes if, die, on, ends with a vowel, the letter -/- is 
put between that verb and the pronoun ; as, 

Arrive-t-il 1 viendra-t-elle 1 aime-t-on les vauriens 1 

730. When /e stands after a verb which ends with e mute, 
that e mute is changed into e acute; as, Jiime-je? puisse- 
je ? But when the transposition of je after the verb becomes 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 229 

harsh, euphony then requires another turn ; so, instead of 
cours-je? dors-je? which would be intolerable, we must 
say, est-ce queje cours? est-ce queje dors? 

EXERCISE. 

1. Have you forgotten all that Providence has done for you? how 
have you escaped the shafts of your enemies ? how have you been pre- 
served from the dangers which surrounded you on all sides 1 could you 
be so blind as not to acknowledge and adore the all-powerful hand that 
has miraculously saved you ] 

2. What will posterity say of you if, instead of devoting to the happi- 
ness of mankind the great talents which you have received from nature, 
you make use of them only to deceive and corrupt them 1 

■ 3. Do not the misfortunes which we experience often contribute to 
our* prosperity 1 

4. Why are the works of nature so perfect! Because each work is a 
whole, and because she labors upon an eternal plan, from which she never 
deviates. Why, on the contrary, are the productions of man so imperfect] 
It is because the human mind, being unable to create any thing, and inca- 
pable of embracing the universe at a single glance, can* produce only 
after having been enriched by experience and meditation. 

(1.) Escaped, echapper a— shafts, trait— preserved, garantir— on all sides, de toutes 
parts— ^o as, asscz pour— saved, conserver. 

(2.) Devoting, consacrer — m-mkind, homme pi. — deceive, egarer. 

(3.) Experience, eprouver — contribute to, tourner en. 

(4.) Because, cest que— and because,et que — being unable, ne pouvoir — incapable, 
(not being able)— at, de — glance, vue—enricfied, ftconde. 

740. 2. — The subject is put after the verb in incidental sen- 
tences which express that we are quoting somebody's words ; as. 

Je meurs innocent, a dit Louis XV L I die innocent, said Louis XVI. 
Je le veux bien, dit-il, I am very willing, said he. 

741. 3. — The subject is put after the verb if the sentence 
begins with an impersonal verb, or either of these words, tel^ 
ainsi, &c. ; as, 

Tel etait V acharnement du soldat, . Such was the fury of the soldier 

que, &c. that, &c. 

Ainsifnit cette sanglante tr age die, Thus ended th^t bloody tragedy. 

EXERCISE. 

1. True glory, said he, is founded in humanity : whoever prefershis own 
glory to the feelings of humanity, is a monster of pride, and not a man. 

2. There have happened for these* ten years so many events exceeding 
all probability, that posterity will find it difficult to credit them. 

3. Such was that incorruptible Phocion who answered the deputies of 
Alexander, who were telling him that this powerful monarch loved him as 
the only honest man : Well, then, let him allow me to be and to appear so. 

(1.) Is founded, ne se trouver pas hors de— feelings, sentiment. 

(2.) There have happened for, il s'est passe depuis — exceeding, hors de— probability , 
vraisemblance — will find very difficult, avoir bien de la peine— to credit, ajouter foi a 

(3.) Loved, cherir— honest man, homme de bien— well, ho !— to be so, d'etre tel— 
appear so, le paraitre. 

u 



230 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

4. Thus ended, by the humiliation of Athens, that dreadful war of 
twenty-seven years, to* which ambition gave rise, which hatred made 
atrocious, and which was as fatal to the Greeks as their ancient con- 
federation had proved advantageous to them. 

(4.) Ended, se terminer— gave rise, faire naitre — made, rendre— had proved, etre I. 

742. 4. — The subject is put after the verb when the sub- 
junctive is used to express a wish, or to take the place of 
qitanil meme, whenever, and a conditional ; as, 

Puissant tons les peuples se con- May all nations he convinced of 

vaiucre de cette verite, this truth. 

Ihisse-je y perir,firai, Should I perish there, I will go. 

743. 5. — The subject is put after the verb when that subject 
is followed by several words which are dependent upon it, 
and form an incidental sentence which, by its length, might 
obscure the relation of the verb to the subject; perspicuity 
then requires that the subject should be displaced. 

744. Sometimes, however, this transposition of the subject 
is only the effect of taste, to avoid an inharmonious cadence * H 
or it is used by an orator who wishes to arouse the attention 
of his hearers by a bold and unexpected turn. 

EXERCISE. 

1. The gods grant that you may never experience such misfortunes ! 

2. May you, wise old man ! in a repose diversified by pleasing 
occupations, enjoy the past, lay hold of the present, and charm your latter 
days with the hope of eternal felicity ! 

3. What is not in the power of the gods ! were you at the lowest depths, 
the power of Jupiter could draw you from thence ; were you in Olympus, 
beholding the stars under your feet, Jupiter could plunge you to the bottom 
of the abyss, or precipitate you into the flames of gloomy Tartarus. 

4. There, through meadows enamelled with flowers, glide a thousand 
various rivulets, distributing every where their pure (and) limpid waters. 

5. Already, for the honor of France, there* had come into administra- 
tion a man more distinguished for his understanding and virtues than for 
his dignities. 



(1.) Grant, faire — experience, oprouvcr de. 

(2 ) Old man. vieil lard— -lay hold of, saisir— with, do. 

(3.) Is not in the power of, nc pciivont— were, S— lowest depths, fond do I'&bime— 
power, puissance— could, pouvoir N. — Olympus, 0\yni\m— stars, a^tre — gloomy, uoir 
— Tar/ or us, Tart arc. 

(4 ) Through, an milieu do,— with, do— glide, serpen ter— rimlets, ruisseau — distri- 
touting', (which distribute) — their, une, 

(50 Had come, tire enU6— administration, (of a Hairs)— for, par — understanding, 
esprit. 



Government of the Verbs. 

745. When the regimen of a verb is a noun, it is generally 
placed after the verb ; but to this rule there is one exception, 
besides those which will hereafter be mentioned. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 231 

746. Exception. — In an interrogative sentence, the regi- 
men is placed before the verb when this regimen is joined 
to an absolute pronoun. 

EXAMPLES. 

Quel objet voyez-vous ? What object do you see 

A quelle science vous appliquez- To what science do you apply 

vous ? yourself? 

De quelle affaire vous occupez- About what business are you em- 

vous ? ployed 1 

747. Remark. — In French, a verb can never have two 
regimens direct : therefore, when a verb has two regimens, 
both nouns, one of them must necessarily be preceded by a 
preposition. 

EXAMPLES. 
Donnez ce Uvre a voire frere, Give that book to your brother. 

On a accuse Ciceron (T imprudence Cicero has been accused of impru- 
et de faiblesse, dence and weakness. 

748. Though the natural order of the ideas seems to require 
that the regimen direct be placed before the indirect, the per- 
spicuity of the sentence does not allow it in all cases. 

749. Rule. — When a verb has two regimens, the shorter 
is generally placed first ; but if they be of equal length, the 
regimen direct will precede the indirect. 

EXAMPLES. 

Les hypocrites setudient a parer Hypocrites make it their study to 

le vice des dehors de la vertu, deck vice with the exterior of virtue. 

Les hypocrites s'etudient a parer Hypocrites make it their study to 

des dehors de la vertu les vices deck with the exterior of virtue 

les plus honteux et les plus the most shameful and most odious 

decries, vices. 

V ambition sacrifie le present a Ambition sacrifices the present to 

l\ivenir,maislavolupte sacrifie the future, but pleasure sacrifices 

Tavenir au present, the future to the present. 

EXERCISE ON THE GOVERNMENT OF THE VERBS. 

1. Illustrious examples teach us that God has hurled from their thrones 
princes ivlio contemned his laws : he reduced to the condition of a beast 
the haughty Nebuchadnezzar, -who -wanted to usurp divine honors. 

2. Wretched is* the man who feeds his mind -with chimeras. 

3. Our interest should prompt us to prefer virtue to vice, ivisdom to 
pleasure, and modesty to vanity. 

(I.) Illustrious, fameiix — teach, apprendre — hurled, renverser — haughty superbe — 
Nebuchadnezzar, Nabuehodonosor— wanted to, vouloir H. 
(2.) I in '—mitfi. de. 

(3.) Should, devoir F.— prompt, porter — pleasure, volupte. 

759. Rule. — A noun may be governed at once by two 
veibs, provided those verbs do not require different regimens. 



232 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB 

EXAMPLES. 

On doit aimer et respecter les rois, We ought to love and respect kings. 
Ce general attaqua etprit la ville, That general attacked and took the city 

751. But we must not say, 

Cti officier attaqua et se rendit That officer attacked and made 
maitre de la ville , himself master of the city. 

752. A different turn should be given to the sentence, by 
placing the noun after the first verb and adding en before the 
second ; as, 

Cet officier attaqua la ville, et s'en That officer attacked the city, and 
rendit maitre, made himself master of it. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Luxury is like a torrent, which carries aivay and overthrows every 
thing it meets. 

2. Nothing can* resist the operation of time : it at length undermines, 
alters, or destroys every thing. 

3. Among the Spartans, public education had two objects : the first, to 
harden their bodies by fatigue; the second, to excite and nourish in their 
minds the love of their country and an enthusiasm for what is great. 

(].) Carries away, entra:ner — overthrows, renverser — every thing, tout ce que. 
(2.) Operation, action — at length, a la longue — undermines, miner. 
(3.) Among the Spartans, h Sparte — to, de — harden, endurcir — by, a — their, les— for 
what is great, les grandes choses. 



On the use, proper or accidental, of Moods and .Tenses. 

INDICATIVE. 

753. The present is used to express an existing state ; as, 
Je suis ici, I am here. 

754. An invariable state ; as, 

Dieu est de toute etemite, God is from all eternity. 

755. A future near at hand ; as, 

II est demain fete, To-morrow is a holiday. 

756. Or even a preterit, when, to give a sort of animated 
picture, we relate a thing past as passing. Thus, we find in 
Racine, 

J'aivuvotremalheureux Jils trabie" I have seen your unhappy son 
par ses chevaux, dragged along by his horses. 

757. But suddenly passing from the preterit to the present, 
the speaker adds, 

77 vent les rappeler, et sa voix les He calls out to stop them, but his 
effraie, voice frightens them. 

758. In English, the verb to be is frequently used with 
the participle present; as, 

I am reading, I am translating, I shall be writing. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 233 

759. This construction is not adopted in French ; and, 
whenever found, it is to be translated in French simply by the 
verb, put in the tense expressed by the verb to be. Thus, / 
am reading, must be expressed by je lis ; I shall be tvritiAg, 
must be rendered fecrirai, &c. 

EXERCISE ON THE PROPER USE OF MOODS, &c. 

1. He is in his chamber, where he is relaxing his mind from the 
fatigue of business by some instructive and agreeable reading. 

2. Truth, eternal by its nature, is immutable as God himself. 

3. I never let* a day pass without devoting an hour or two to reading 
the ancients. 

4. It is this week that the new piece comes out. 

5. The armies were in sight : nothing was heard on all skies but 
dreadful cries : the engagement began. Immediately a cloud of arrows 
dark-ens the air and covers the combatants: nothing is heard but doleful 
cries of the dying, or the clattering of the arms of those who fall in the 
conflict ; the earth groans beneath a heap of dead bodies, and rivers of 
blood stream every where ; there is nothing in this confused mass of men 
enraged against one another but slaughter, despair, revenge, and brutal fury. 



(1.) Is relaxing, delasser — reading, lecture. 

(2.) By. de — immutable, immuabie. 

(3.) Devoting, consacFer— reading, la lecture de. 

(4.) Come out, on donne. 

(5.) Sight, presence — nothing was, &c. on ne que H. — the engagement began, on en 
vint aux mains — cloud, niiee — arrows, trait — darkens, obscurcir — nothing is. Sec. on 
n'entend plus que — doleful, piaintif — clattering, bruit — conflict, melee — groans, geniii 
— beneath, sous — heap, monceau — rivers, ruisseau — stream, couler— there is nothing 
in. &c. ce ne etre dans — mass, amas — enraged, acharne — but, que — slaughter, mas 
sacre. 

760. The imperfect is used — 1, To denote the recurrence 
of an action at a time which is past ; as, 

Quand fetais a Paris, fallals When I was at Paris, I often went 
souvent aux Champs Elysees, to the Champs Elysees. 

761. 2, For a past which has some duration, especially in 
narrations ; as, 

Rome etait d?abord gouvernee par Rome was at first governed by 
des rois, kings. 

EXERCISE ON THE USE OF THE IMPERFECT. 

1. When I -was at Paris, I went every morning to take a walk in the 
Champs Eli/sees or the Bois de Boidogne : afterwards, I came home, 
where I employed myself till dinner either in reading or w r riting; and in 
the evening, I generally -went for amusement to the French Theatre or 
the Opera. 

2. When I ioas in the prime of life, like the light butterfly, If uttered 
from object to object, without being able to settle to any thing : eager for 

(1) Take a walk, se promener — in. a — came home, rentrer chez soi — employed, 
s'occuper— in reading, (say to read)— for amusement, me delasser — French Theatre, 
Comedie Francaise. 

(2.) Prime of life, fleur de 1'age- butterfly, papillon-^wtteraJ, voler— being able 

U2 



234 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

pleasure, I seized every thing that had its appearance : alas ! how far was 
I then from foreseeing that I should deplore with so much bitterness the 
loss of that precious time. 

3. For a short time after Abraham, the knowledge of the true God still 
appeared in Palestine and Egypt. Melchisedec, king of Salem, was the 
priest of the Most High God. Abimelech, king of Gerar, and his successor 
of the same name, feared God, swore by his name, and reverenced his 
power. But in Moses' time, the nations adored even beasts and reptiles 
Every thing was God but God himself. 

pouvoir— settle, me fixer— eager for, avide de— had its appearance, ra'en presentait 
•'image— how, que— with so much bitterness, (so bitterly). 
(3.) Swore, jurer— reverenced, admirer— the nations, on— even, jusqu'a— but, excepte 

762. In French, the preterit definite and the preterit indt* 
finite are not used indifferently. 

763. The preterit definite is used when speaking of a time 
which is entirely past, and of which nothing remains ; as, 

Je Jis un voyage a Bath le mois I took a journey to Bath last 

dernier, month. 

Tecrivis hier a Rome, I wrote yesterday to Rome. 

764. To authorize the use of this tense, there must be the 
interval of at least one day. It is the most used in the historic 
style, and for that reason called parfait historique. 

765. The preterit indefinite is used either for a past indp- 
terminate or for a past of which something still remains ; as, 

fai voyage en Italic, I have travelled in Italy. 

Tai dejeune ce matin a Londres, I breakfasted this morning in London 
et dine a Richmond, and dined at Richmond. 

EXERCISE ON THE PROPER USE OF THE PRETERIT. 

Amenophis conceived the design of making his son a conqueror. He 
set about it after the manner of the Egyptians — that is, with great ideas. 
All the children who were born on* the same day as Sesostris, were 
brought to court by order of the king: he had them educated as his own 
children, and with the same care as Sesostris. When he was grown up, 
he made him serve his apprenticeship in a war against the Arabs : this 
young prince learned there to bear hunger and thirst, and subdued that 
nation, till then invincible. He afterwards attacked Lybia, and conquered 
it. After these successes, he formed the project of subduing the whole 
world. In consequence of* this,* he entered Ethiopia, which he made 
tributary. He continued his victories in Asia. Jerusalem was the first 
to feci the force of his arms : the rash Rehoboam could not resist him, 
and Sesostris carried away the riches of Solomon. He penetrated into 
the Indies, farther than Hercules and Bacchus, and farther than Alexander 
did afterward. The Scythians obeyed him as far as the Tanais ; Armenia 
arid CappaMocia were subject to him. In a word, he extended his empire 
from the Ganges to the Danube. 

Making, fai re i\v—sct about it, s'y prendre— after, n— ideas, pensiV— brought, amener 
-had educated, faire clover— grown up, prand— made serve, fit faire— apprenticeship, 
iflprfinfinnngri in. par— entered, entrer dans— made, rendre— as far as, jusqu'a— Cap- 
yttdocia, Capiiadoce. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 235 

766. The preterit indefinite is sometimes used instead of a 
future just approaching ; as, 

Avez-vous bientbtfini ? Have you soon done 1 

Oui,faiJini dans le moment, Yes, I shall have done in a moment. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Enflamed with the desire of knowing mankind, I have travelled, 
not only among the most polished nations, but even among the most bar 
barous. I have observed them in the different degrees of civilization, 
from the state of simple nature to the most perfect state of society, and 
wherever I went, the result -was the same : that is to say, I have every 
where seen beings occupied in drying up the different sources of happiness 
that nature had placed within their reach. 

2. I have travelled this year in Italy, where I had an* opportunity of 
seeing several masterpieces of antiquity, and where I made a valuable 
collection of scarce medals. I there admired the perfection to which they 
have brought architecture, painting, and music ; but what pleased me 
most there, was the beauty of the climate of Naples. 

(1.) With, de — mankind, homrae, pi. — among, chez— polished nations, peuple police 
— barbarous, nation sauvage— ; from, depuis — simple, pur — to, jusqu'a — wherever I 
went, dans tous les pays — the result was the same, (I had the same result)— m drying 
up, a tarir — within their reach, a leur portee. 

(2.) Opportunity, occasion — masterpieces, chefs d'ceuvre — scarce, rare— pleased me 
most, faire le plus de plaisir— was, est. 

767. The two preterits anterior differ in the same manner 
as the two preceding preterits ; but they are always accom- 
panied by a conjunction, or an adverb of time; as, 

Je suis sorti des que fai eu dine, I went out as soon as I had dined. 
J'eus Jini hier a midi, I had done yesterday at noon. 

768. The pluperfect denotes that a thing took place before 
another which had itself already taken place ; as, 

J'avais soupe quand il entra, I had supped when he came in. 

EXERCISE. [causes. 

1. As soon as I had examined this phenomenon, I tried to find out its 

2. As soon as we had crossed the river, we found ourselves in a wood 
where there was not a single foot-path traced. 

3. As soon as the great Sesostris had satisfied his ambition by the con- 
quest of so many empires, he returned into Egypt, where he devoted the 
whole of the day to administering strict justice to his people, and in the 
evening he recreated himself by holding conferences with the learned, or 
by conversing with the most upright people of his kingdom. 

4. I had only received, like most of the grandees, an education in which 
I had imbibed nothing but sentiments of pride and insensibility ; that is, 
they had done every thing in their power to stifle in me the happy and 
benevolent dispositions which I had received from nature. 

(1 ) As soon as, d.'>s que — tried to find out, en rechercher. 

(2.) Crossed, traverser— found ourselves, se trouver engage—; foot-path, sentier de. 

(3) The whole of the day, jour entier — administering, rendre A.— strict, exact— 
recreated, delasser — by holding conferences, a sentretenir — upright, honnete— 
people, gens. 

(4.) Grandee, grand — imbibed, puiser — they, on — in their power, ce qu'on pouvoir 
I —stifle, etouffer — benevolent, bienfaisant. 



236 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

769. As the use of these different preterits is attended with 
some difficulty, the following analysis is added, in order more 
clearly to explain the manner in which they are used. 

770- We read in Marmontel the following extract : 

Celicour, a Page de quinze ans, Celicour, at the age of fifteen, had 
avait ete dans le 7non.de ce qxCon been in the world what is called a 
appelle un petit prodige. little prodigy. 

771. The author employs the pluperfect, as he speaks of a 
period of time anterior to all those which he is going to mention. 

// fesait des vers les phis galans He composed the most agreeable love- 

dn monde ; il ny avait pas dans sonnets imaginable ; there ivas not 

le voisinage une jolie femme a pretty woman in the neighborhood 

qiCil a eat celebree : c'etait dom- that he had not celebrated : it ivas a 

mage de laisser tant de talens pity to let so many talents be buried 

enfolds dans une petite ville ; in a little town : Paris wot the the- 

Paris devait en etre le theatre, atre on which they ought to be 

exhibited. 

772. Here the author makes use of the imperfect, because 
he speaks of the habitual employment of Celicour. 

Et Ton fit si bie?i, que son pere And they contrived matters so that his 
se resolut de Vy envoy er, father determine d to send him there. 

773. Now, the author passes to the preterit definite, because 
ht is no longer speaking of what Celicour used to do, but what 
he did at a time past, and of which nothing remains 

Ce pere etait un honnete homme, This father ivas a good sort of man, 

qui aimait f esprit sans en avoir, who ivas fond of wit, without hav- 

et qui admirait, sans savoir ing any, and admired, without 

pourquoi, tout ce qui venait de knowing why, every thing that 

la capitale. II avait 7?ieme des came from the metropolis. Nay, 

relations littiraires, et dunom- he even had some literary con- 

bre de ses correspondans ttait nexions, and among his corres- 

:tn connaisseur nomine" J\L de pondents was a connaisseur of the 

Fintac, name of Fintac 

774. Here, again, the author resumes the form of the im- 
perfect, as he is now speaking of the habitual state of Celi- 
cour's father in his little town, and because, in this passage, 
he merely relates what that father was doing, at a time past, 
which has no kind of relation to the present. 

Ce fu.t ptincipalement a lui que It ivas particularly to him that Celi- 
Celicuur fut rcconiinaiuie, cour "wo* recommended. 

775. The form of the preterit definite is now resumed, 
because this is an action passed, at a time of which nothing 
is left, &c. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB 237 

EXERCISE. 

1. God, who had created his angels in holiness, -would have their 
happiness depend upon themselves : they could insure their felicity, by 
giving themselves willingly to dieir Creator; but they delighted in them- 
selves, and not in God : immediately those spirits of light became spirits 
of darkness. 

2. There is a letter which Philocles has written to a friend of his, about 
his project of making himself king of Carpathus. I perused that letter, 
and it seemed to me to be the hand of Philocles. They had perfectly 
imitated his writing. This letter threw me into a strange surprise. I 
read it again and again, and could not persuade myself that it -was writ- 
ten* by Philocles, when I recalled to my mind the affecting marks which 
he had given me of his disinterestedness and integrity. 

3. Those who had shewn the greatest zeal for the state and my person 
did not think themselves obliged to undeceive me after so tenible an 
example. I myself was afraid lest truth should break through the cloud, 
and reach me in spite of all my flatterers. I felt within myself that it 
would have raised in me bitter remorse. My effeminacy, and the dominion 
which a treacherous minister had gained over me, threw me into a kind 
of despair of ever recovering my* liberty. 

(1.) Have their happiness depend, (that their happiness) dependre S. — could., pouvoir 
— delighted in, se plaire en — of light, lumineux— darkness, tenebres. 

(2.) There is, voila— about, sur— Carpathus, Carpathie— to be, de—they, on— again 
and again, sans cesse— by, de—when I recalled to, repasser dans J .—integrity ', 
bonne foi. 

(3.) Did not think themselves obliged to, se croire dispense de— was afraid lest } 
craindre que— break through, percer S.— reach, parvenir jusqu'a— in spite of malgre— 
raised in, causer v— effeminacy, mollesse— dominion, ascendant— treacherous, perfide 
—gained, prendre— threw, plonger— recovering, rentrer en. 

776. There is this difference between the two future 
tenses, that the period of time expressed by the future abso- 
lute may or may not be determined ; as, 

J'irai a la campagne, or j'irai demain a la campagne, 
while, in the future anterior, the time is necessarily deter- 
mined ; as, 

J'aurai fini, quand vous arriverez. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Remember that youth is but a flower, which will wither almost ag 
soon as it* opens. Thou wilt see thyself gradually changed. Smiling 
graces, sweet pleasures, strength, health, and joy, will vanish like a pleas- 
ing dream ; nothing but the sad remembrance will be left thee. 

2. I shall next year take a journey into Greece, and I am preparing 
myself for it by reading the travels of the young Anach arsis. 

3. When you have read the celebrated discourse of Bossuet on Uni- 
versal History, and studied in it the causes of the rise and fall of states, 
you will be less astonished at the revolutions, more or less sudden, that 
modern empires have experienced, which appeared to you in the most 
flourishing state. 

(1) Will wither, (will be almost as soon withered) srcher— opens, r'close— gradually, 
insensiblement— lively, riant— pleasing, beau— nothing will be left, il n'en rester I* 
(2.) Take, fai re— /or it, y— reading, lecture de— the travels, celui- 
(3) Have read, M.— and, que vous M.—in it, y—rise, grandeur— fall, chute— sudden, 
wibite— (that have experienced the modern empires, which. &.€.."> appeared, H. 



238 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

CONDITIONAL. 

777. The conditional is used — 1, To express a wish; as, 

Qite je serais, or que faurais 6te How glad I should be, or should 
content de reus sir dans cette have been, to succeed in that 
affaire ! affair ! 

778. 2, With si, if, whether, expressing a doubt ; as, 

Demandez-lui s'il serait venu avec Ask him whether he would have 
nous suppose qiCil neat pas eu come with us, had he not been 
affaire, busy. 

779. 3, Before or after the imperfect, or pluperfect of the 
indicative, preceded by si ; as, 

JYous nous epargnerions bien des We should spare ourselves much 

peines, si nous savions moderer pain, did we know how to mode- 

nos desirs, rate our desires. 

Vous auriez ete plus heureux, si You would have been more happy 

vous aviez suivi mes conseils, if you had followed my advice. 

780. 4, With quand, used instead of si, qiwique, or quand 
mime; the verb preceded by quand is generally in one of 
the conditionals ; as, 

Quand Vavare posse der ait tout tor Were the miser to possess all the 
du monde, il ne serait pas encore gold in the world, still he would 
content, not be satisfied. 

781. 5, Lastly, for various tenses of the indicative ; as, 

Croiriez-vous votrejils ingrat ? Could you think your son ungrateful] 

which means croyez-vous, &c. 

Vauriez-vous soupconni d\m tel Could you have suspected him df 
vice ? such a vice 1 

which means Vavez-vous, &c. 

Quelle raison pourrait mempecher What cause could prevent me from 
dialler vous voir ? coming to see you ] 

which means quelle cause pourra, <fcc. 

EXERCISE ON THE CONDITIONAL. 

1. If it ivere even possible for men always to act conformably to equitv, 
as it is the multitude that must judge their conduct, the wicked would 
always blame and contradict them from malignity, and the good some- 
times from mistake. 

2. What false steps I should have made, but for you, at my entrance 
into the world ! 

:3. But for your counsels, I should have failed in this undertaking. 

(1.) If even, quand ra&me— were, N.— /or men, (that men)— to act, S —judge, juger 
de — would blame, M.— contradict, croisei IM. 
Ci.) What . que de— etepe, d< marche — but for, sans. 
(3.) But for, sans -failed, cchouer. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 239 

4. How satisfied T should have been if you had sooner informed me of 
your happiness ! 

5. If we gave to infancy none but just and clear notions, there would 
not be by far so many false wits in the world. 

6. Had Alexander conquered the whole world, his ambition would not 
have been satisfied ; he would still have found himself straitened in it. 

7. Could you believe him vain enough to aspire to that high degree 
of honor 1 

8. Could you ever have thought him capable of deserting the good 
cause, to go and side with rebels 1 

9. Would you renounce being useful to the present generation because 
envy fastens on you 1 

(4 ) How, que. 

(5.) We. on— there would not be by far so many, il y aurait bien moins de. 

(6.) (When Alexander would have conquered) — straitened, trop ;i I'eTroit. [de. 

(8.) Deserting, abandonner — to go and side with, pour se ranjrer sotis les drapeaux 

(9.) Renounce, renoncer k— fastens, s'attaclier — on you, a vos pas. 

Remark on the use of the Conditional and Future. 

782. Foreigners are very apt to use the future or the con- 
ditional after si, when meaning suppose que. They say, 

J'irai demain a la campagne, s'il I shall go into the country to-morrow 

fera beau, if the weather be fine. 

Vous auriez vu le roi, si vous You would have seen the king if you 

seriez venu, had come. 

783. The impropriety of this construction will be obviated ' 
bv attending to the following 

784. Eule. — When a verb is preceded by si, meaning 
suppose que, the present is used instead of the future abso- 
lute ; the preterit indefinite instead of the future anterior; 
the imperfect instead of the conditional present 3 and the 
pluperfect instead of the conditional past 

EXAMPLES. 

J'irai demain a la campagne, s'il I shall go to-morrow into the country, 

fait beau, if it be fine weather. 

E aura eu Cavantage, s'il a suivi He will have had the advantage, if 

vos conseils, he has followed your advice. 

Je serais content, si je vous voyais I should be pleased if I saw you 

applique, a PP-Y to study. 

J'aurais ete content, si je vous I should have been pleased if 1 had 

avais vu applique, seen you attentive to your studies. 

785. Remark. — This rule does not hold good, either when 
.si is placed between two verbs, the first of which implies 
doubt, uncertainty; as, 

Je ne sais s'il viendra, 

786. Or, with the second conditional past ; as, 
Vous m'eussiez trouv£, si vous fussiez venu cc matin. 



240 PARTICT LAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

EXERCISE. 

1. A young man who is just entering the career of letters -will conci- 
liate the good will of the public, if he consider his first successes only as 
an encouragement to do better. 

2. That absurd criticism -will have amused only fools or malicious 
people,* if attention has been paid to the spirit that pervades the whole, 
and the manner in which it is written. 

3. Life -would possess many more sweets and charms, if men, instead 
of tearing one another to pieces, formed but one society of brethren. 

4. The Athenians -would have found in the young Alcibiades the only 
man capable of insuring their superiority in Greece, had not that vain, 
thoughtless people forced him, by an unjust, or, at least, imprudent sen- 
tence, to banish himself from his country. 

5. I know not -whether reason -will soon triumph over prejudice and 
ignorance, but I am certain it will be the case sooner or later. 

6. Rome -would have never attained that high degree of splendor and 
glory which astonishes us, had it not extended its conquests as much by 
its policy as by its arms. 

(1 } Is just entering, debnter dans— career, carriere — conciliate, s'attirer— good 
will, bienveillance — consider, regarder. 

(2.) Fools, sot — malicious, mediant— paid, faire — pervades the whole, regner d'un 
bout a 1 autre — in ichich, dont. 

(3.) Possess, avoir — tearing one another to pieces, s'entredechirer. 

(4.) Superiority . preponderance — thoughtless, leger — sentence, condamnation. 

(5.) Knoio, savoir — it will be the case, cela etre. 

(6.) Mtained,pa.rvenir a— policy, politique. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

787. There are conjunctions which govern the indicative 
(page 172), and others which govern the subjunctive (page 
173). We call principal proposition the phrase which is 
followed by the conjunction, and incidental or subordinate 
proposition that which is placed after the conjunction. In 
this sentence, 

Je crois que vous aimez a jouer, 

je crois is the principal proposition, and vous aimez a jouer 
is the subordinate proposition : que is the conjunction which 
unites the two phrases. 

788. General Rule. — The verb of the subordinate pro- 
position must be put in the indicative when the verb of the 
principal proposition expresses affirmation, in a direct, posi- 
tive, and independent manner ; but it is put in the subjunc- 
tive when that of the principal proposition expresses doubt, 
wish, or uncertainty. 

Je sals qn'il est surpris f I know he is surprised. 

Je crois qu'il viendva, I believe he will come. 

Je doute qu'il soit surpris, I doubt his being surprised 

Je doute quHl vienne, J doubt his coming. 

Je souhuite qu'il rtussisse, I wish he may succeed. 

Je tremble quHl ne succombe I tremble lest he should fail 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 24 1 

EXERCISE ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1. The glory which has been ascribed to the Egyptians of being the 
most grateful of all men, shorus that they were likewise the most sociable 

2. In Egypt, when it -was proved that the conduct of a dead man* 
had been bad, they condemned his memory, and he was denied burial. 

3. I am sure that by moderation, mildness, and politeness, you ivill 
disarm even* envy itself. 

1. The new philosophers say that color is a sensation of the soul. 

5. I believe you are as honest and disinterested as you seem to be 

6. I doubt whether the Romans -would ever have triumphed over the 
Gauls if the different chiefs of this warlike people had not been disunited. 

7. I could -wish that the love which we ought to have for one another, 
•were the principle of all our actions, as it is the basis of all virtues. 

8. Fear, lest it should be said that you feed upon chimeras, and that 
you take the shadow fcr the reality. 

9. The new philosophers -will have color tc be a sensation of the soul. 

10. I -will have you to be as honest and disinterested as you seem to be. 

(1.) Which has, &c. qu'on — ascribed, donner— grateful, reconnaissant. — men, peu- 

(2.) Was denied, priver do — burial, sepulture. [pie, sir.tr. 

(3.) By, avec— politeness, hoxmetete. 

(5.) Seem to be, le paraitre. 

(6.) Whether, que. 

(8) It, on ne—feed upon, se repaitre de. 

(9.) Will have, vouloir— color to be, (that color be). 

789. Do, did, will, would, should, can, could, may, and 
might, are sometimes, with respect to the French language, 
simply signs of tenses, at others they are real verbs. 

790. There can be no difficulty about do and did ; these 
are mere expletives, denoting interrogation, negation, or 
merely emphasis, when they are joined to a verb. 

/ do love, J'aime. 

/ did love, J'aimais, or j'aimai. 

Do I love? Aime-je 1 

Did I love ? Aimais-je, or aimai-je ? 

/ do not love, Je n'aime pas. 

/ did not love. Je n'aimais pas, or je n'aimai pns 

91. In all these cases they are not expressed in French. 
But when they are followed by a noun or a pronoun, then 
they are real verbs, and mean /aire, to do. 

Do me that favor, Faites-moi ce plaisir. 

He did it, ' II ie fit. 

792. In short, they are expressed by /aire to do, when- 
ever they are followed by any thing else except by the verb 
with which they are necessarily connected ; as, 

He did more than could have been II fit plus qu'on n'eut pu espeier 
expected, 

793. Should is only a sign of the conditional when it ex- 
presses a thing which may happen upon some condition 

\ 



242 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

7 should like a country life if my J'aimerais la vie champetre, si mes 
affairs -would permit me to in- affaires me permettaient de suivre 
dulge my inclination, mon gout. 

794. But when it implies duty or obligation, it is a verb, 
and must be expressed by the verb devoir to owe ; as, 

We should newer swerve from the Nous ne devrions jamais nous 
path of virtue, ecarterdu sender de la vertu. 

795. Can, could, may, and might, are not so difficult as 
they appear at first sight ; because, in almost every instance, 
there is no impropriety in rendering them by the verb pouvoir. 
In general, can and could imply a power, a possibility, a ca- 
pability, &c, and may and might a permission, a probabi- 
lity, &c. 

796. Do, did, shall, will, &e. in English, are sometimes 
used elliptically in the answers to interrogative sentences. 
The French answer with the repetition of the verb, accom- 
panied with a pronoun expressive of the idea of the interro- 
gative sentence ; as, 

Will you do your exercise to-day? Ferez-vous votre theme au jour- 
Fes, / will. d'hui ? — Oui, je le ferai. 

Relations between the Tenses of the Indicative. 

797. Rule. — When the first verb is in the imperfect, the 
preterit, or the pluperfect, and the second denotes a temporary 
action, this second verb is put in the imperfect, if we mean to 
express a present. 

EXAMPLE. 
Je croyais, fai cru, favais cru I thought, I have thought, I had 
que vous itudiiez les mathima- thought that you were studying 
tiques, mathematics. 

798. The second verb is put in the pluperfect, if we mean 
to express a past. 

EXAMPLE. 
II rnassura f/uHl n y avait jamais He assured me that he had never 
tant ri, laughed so much. 

799. The second verb is put in the present of the condi- 
tional, if we mean to express a future absolute. 

EXAMPLE. 

On in adit que votre fr ere viendrait I was told your brother would 
a Londrcs thiver pro chain, come to town next winter. 

800. But, although the first verb may be in some of these 
tenses, yet the second is put in the present when this second 
verb expresses a thing which is true at all times. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 243 

EXAMPLE. 
Je vous disais, je vous ai dit, je I told you, I have told you, 1 had 
vous av ais dit, que las ante fait told you, that health constitutes 
la felicite du corps, et le savoir the happiness of the body, and 
celle de Vame, knowledge that of the soul. 

801. Remark.— In phrases where the imperfect is preceded 
by que it denotes sometimes a past, sometimes a present, with 
respect to the preceding verb. It denotes a past when the 
verb which is joined to it by the conjunction que is in the 
present or future 

EXAMPLE. 

Vous savez, or oous saurez que le You know, or you must know that 
peuple Romazn etait aussi avide the Romans were a people as cove- 
qiCambitieux, tous as they w r ere ambitious. 

802. But it denotes a present when the verb which precedes 
it is in the imperfect, one of the preterits, or the pluperfect. 

EXAMPLE. 

On disait, on a dit, on avait dit It was said, it has been said, it had 

que Phocio?i 6ta.lt le plus grand been said, that Phocion was the 

et le plus honnete homme de son greatest and most upright man of 

temps, his age. 

Des qu'on eut appris a Athbies As soon as it was known at Athens 

qu' Alcibiade etait a Lacede- that Alcibiades was at Lacedemon, 

mone, on se repentit de la pri- the Athenians repented of the pre- 

cipitation avec laquelle on cipitation with which they had 

V avait condamne, condemned him. 

803. Nevertheless, the imperfect denotes the past, in this 
fast instance, when it signifies an action which was past 
before that which is expressed by the first verb. 

EXAMPLE. 

En lisant Vhistoire des temps In reading the history of heroic 

heroiques, vous devez avoir times, you must have remarked 

remarque que ces hommes dont that those men who have been 

on a fait des demi-dieux, etaient made demi-gods were ferocious and 

des chefs feroces et barbares, barbarous chiefs, scarcely deserving 

dig-nes a peine du nom tf homme, the name of men. 

EXERCISE. 

1. I thought you -were not ignorant that, to teach others the principles 
of an art or science, it is necessary to have experience and skill. 

2. I have been told that your sweetest occupation ivas to form your 
taste, your heart, and your understanding. 

3. Darius, in his flight, being* reduced to the necessity of drinking 
water muddy and infected by dead bodies, affirmed that he sever had 
drunk with so much pleasure. 

(J.) Were ignorant, isnorer — teach, instruire dans — it is necessary, avoir besoin— 
<2.) I have, &c. on ra'a dit. [skill, habilete 

C3.) Fligla, feronte- -muddy, bourbeux— affirmed, assurer. 



241 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

4. Care has been taken to inculcate in me, from infancy, that I should 
succeed in the world only in proportion as I should join to the desire of 
pleasing, a great deal of gentleness and civility. 

5. Ovid has said that study softens the manners and corrects every 
thing that is found in us rude and barbarous. 

6. You knoiv that those pretended heroes whom pagan antiquity has 
made gods, -were only barbarous and ferocious kings, who overran the 
earth, not so much to conquer as to ravage it, and who left every where 
traces of their fury and of their vices. 

7. It has been said of Pericles that his eloquence was like a thunder- 
bolt, which nothing could resist. 

8. As soon as Aristides had said that the proposal of Themistocles ivas 
unjust, the whole people exclaimed that they must not think of it any 
longer. 

9. Had you read the history of the early ages, you -would know that 
Egypt ivas the most enlightened country in the universe, and the original 
spot* whence knowledge spread into Greece and the neighboring countries. 

(4.) Care has, &c. (active voice) on avoir — in me, me — in proportion, autant — 
(5.) Corrects, effacer — is found, se trouver de. [civility, honnetet6. 

(8) Overran, parcourir — not so much, moins. 
(7.) It, on— thunderbolt, foudre — (to), which. 

(8.) Exclaimed, s'ecrier — they must, falloir H. — of it, y — any longer, plus. 
(9.) Ages, temps — the original spot* whence, celui d'oii — neighboring, circonvoisin 
— countries, lieu. 



Relations between the Tenses of the Subjunctive and those 
of the Indicative. 

804. Rule I. — When the verb of the principal proposition 
is in the present or future, that of the subordinate proposition 
is put in the present of the subjunctive, to express a present 
or future, but in the preterit to express a past. We say, 

Jl faut que celui qui parle se He that speaks should accommodate 

mette a la portee de celui qui himself to the understanding of 

Vecoute, him that listens. 

II voudra que votrefrere soit de He will wish your brother to be one 

la par tie, of the party. 

805. But we must say, 

Pour s'etre elevi a ce point de To have risen to that pitch of grand- 

jrandeur, il faut que Rome ait eur, Rome must have had an unin- 

eu une suite non interrompue de terrupted succession of great men. 
grand* homines, 

806. Exception. — Though the first verb be in the present 
or future, yet the second may be put in the imperfect, or plu- 
perfect of the subjunctive, when some conditional expression 
is introduced into the sentence. 

II n'est point tVhomme, quelque There is no man, whatever merit he 

nitrite qu'il ail, qui ne fiit trrs- may have, that would not feel very 

mortifie',s'ilsavait tout ce quon much mortified were he to know 

(tense de lui, all that is thought of him. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 245 

Ou trouvera-t-on un homme qui Where will you find the man who 
ne fit la metne faute, sHl eiait would not have committed the 
expose aux memes tentations ? same error, had he been exposed 

to the same temptations 1 
Je doute que votre frere eut reussi I doubt whether your brother would 
sans votre assistance, have succeeded, had it not been 

for your assistance. 

EXERCISE. 

1. He who wishes to teach an art, must know it thoroughly ; he must 
give none but clear, precise, and well-digested notions of it : he must 
instil them, one by one, into the minds of his pupils ; and, above all, he 
must not overburden their memory with useless or unimportant rules. 

2. He must yield to the force of truth when they shall have suffered 
it to appear in its real light. 

3. There is no work, however perfect people may suppose it, that 
would not be liable to criticism, if it were examined with severity and in 
every point of view. 

4. I doubt whether his piece would have had the approbation of con- 
naisseurs if he had not determined to make in it the changes you judged 
necessary. 



(1 ) It must, (that he who, &c know it)— he must (not repeated), que— instil, faire 
entrer — by, a — overburden, surcharger — unimportant, insignifiant. 

(2.) (It must L. that he) — yield, se rendre — suffered, permettre— it to appear, (that 
it appear)— real light, vrai jour 

(3.) Would be liable, preter S. — with severity, a la rigueur — in, sous— point of view, 
face. 

(4.) Approbation, suffrage — had determined, se decider — in it, y— judged, G. 



807. Rule II. — When the first verb is in the imperfect, 
either of the preterits, the pluperfect, or either of the condi- 
tionals, the second is put in the imperfect of the subjunctive, 
if we mean to express a present or future, but it is put in the 
pluperfect if we wish to express a past. 

Je voulais, j'ai voulu, j'eus voulu, je voudrais, or 
J'eusse voulu que vous Jinissiez cette affaire. 
Je ne savais pas, je n'ai pas su, &c. que vous eussiez e'tudie' les 
mathematiques. 

808. Remark. — With the preterit indefinite the second 
verb is put in the present if it expresses an action which is 
or may be done at all times ; as, 

Dieu a entourS les yeux de tuniques God has surrounded the eyes with 

fort minces, transparantes an very thin tunics, transparent on 

dehors, ajin qiCon puisse voir a the outside, that we may see 

t ravers, through them. 

809. And in the preterit if we mean to express a past ; as, 

H a fallu qu v i\ ait sollicite ses He must have been obliged to solicit 
juges, his judges, 

x2 



246 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Mr. de Tarenne never -would buy any thing on credit from tradesmen. 
for fear, he used to say, they should lose a great part of their demand, if 
he happened to be killed. All the workmen who were employed about 
his house had orders to bring in their bills before he set out for the cam- 
paign, and they were regularly paid. 

2. It -would be better for a man who truly loves himself to lose his life 
than to forfeit his honor by some base and shameful action. 

3. Lycurgus, in one of his laws, had forbidden to light home* those 
who came from a feast in the evening, that the fear of not being able to 
reach their houses might prevent them from getting intoxicated. 

4. People used the bark of trees, or skins, to write upon* before paper 
was known. 

5. Go and* ask that old man, " For whom are you planting 1" he will 
answer you, " For the immortal gods, who have ordered both that I 
should profit by the labor of those who have preceded me, and that those 
who should come after me should profit by mine." 

(1) Would, vouloir H. — buy on credit, prendre a credit — of, chez — happened, venir 
—were employed, travailler — about, pour — bills, meraoire — he, on — set out for, se 
mettre en. 

(2.) To lose, (that he would lose)— forfeit, ternir. 

(3 ) In, par — to light, que on eclairer S. — that, afin que — reach their houses, se 
rendre chez eux— getting intoxicated, s'enivrer. 

(4.) People, on — bark, ecorce — skins, peau — known, en usage. 

(5.) Have ordered, vouloir — both, et — by, de. 

810. In interrogative and negative sentences, the second 
verb is generally put in the subjunctive ; as, 

Quel est l'insense qui tienne pour sur qu'il vivra demain % 

Vous ne vous persuadiez pas que les choses pussent tourner si mal. 

811. The verb is likewise in the subjunctive after the super- 
lative relative, and frequently after an impersonal verb ; as, 

Le meilieur cortege qu'un prince puisse avoir, c'est le coeur de ses sujets. 

812. The subjunctive is elegantly used in elliptical phrases, 
where the principal proposition is omitted ; as 

QuHl vive ! fje souhaite qu'ilj, May he live ! 

QuHl se soit oubliS jusqrfa ce point ! That he should have so far forgot- 

fje suis surpris qu'ilj, ten himself! 

Qui m'aime, me suive 1 fje veux Whoever loves me, let him follow 

que celui qui), me ! 

Heureux Vhomme qui pent, ne fht-ce Happy the man that can, were it 

que dans sa vieillesse, jouir de only in his old age, enjoy the 

toute la force de sa raison ! whole strength of his reason ! 

fquand ce ne serait que), 

EXERCISE. 

1. Is there any one who does not feel that nothing is more degrading 
in a writer than the pains he takes to express ordinary and common 
things in a singular and pompous style. 

(1.) Is iegraiing in, degrader— tn, de 



PARTICULAR RULES OF TPIE VERB, 247 

2. Do you think that, in forming the republic of bees, God has not 
had in view to teach kings to govern with gentleness and subjects to obey 
with love 1 

3. You will never be at peace, either with yourself or with others, 
unless you seriously endeavor to restrain your natural impetuosity. 



(2.) Had in view, vouloir. 

(3.) Be at peace, avoir la paix — either, ni — or, ni— endeavor, s'appliquer. 

813. Remark. — The relative pronouns qui, que, quel, dotit, 
and oil, govern the subjunctive in similar circumstances. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Who is the writer that does not sometimes experience moments 
of sterility' and languor 1 

2. There is not in the heart of man a good impulse that God does not 
produce. 

3. Choose a retreat where you may he quiet, a post whence you may 
defend yourself. 

4. The most flattering reward that a man can reap from his labors, is 
the esteem of an enlightened public. 

5. May he live, reign, and long constitute the happiness of a nation 
which he loves, and by which he is adored ! 

6. That he should thus degrade himself, is what posterity will find very 
difficult to believe. 

7. A man just and firm is not shaken, either by the clamors of an incon- 
siderate mob, or by the threats of an imperious tyrant : though* the whole 
world were to fall into ruins, he would be struck by it, but not moved. 

(2.) Impulse, mouvenient. 
(3 ) May, pouvoir. 

(5) May he, (repeated before every verb)— constitute, faire— which he loves, cherir. 
(6.) Find dijjicult, avoir de la peine — believe, se persuader. 

(7.) Js shaken, ebranler — inconsiderate, insense — mob, populace — imperious, fier— 
were, devoir — to fall into ruins, s'ecrouler. 



Further Observations upon the Conditional and Subjunctive. 

814. We have said the English auxiliaries shoidd, would, 
coidd, may, and might, are not always to be considered as 
essentially and necessarily appertaining to the conditional and 
subjunctive. Indeed, it seldom happens that the French tenses 
are the same as the English ; at least, in subordinate, though 
they may be in the principal propositions. For instance, 

I wish you would come to-night 
cannot be translated by 

Je souhaite que vous viendriez ce soir ; 

because " when the verb of the principal proposition is in the 
present, the verb of the subordinate proposition is put in the 
present of the subjunctive, if we mean to express a future " 
Therefore we must say, 

Je souhaite que vous veniez. 



248 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

815. Or, "if the first verb is in either of the conditionals, 
the second must be in the imperfect of the subjunctive." 
For which reason we must also say, 

Je voudrais que vous vinssiez. (See Rule II., page 245.) 

816. Now, in the first example, que vous veniez is marked 
in the conjunction of the verb by, that you may come, and in 
the second — que vous vinssiez — by, that you might come, 
neither of which is in the examples given. Again, 

II n'y a personne qui le crxaie, 

cannot be translated by, there is nobody who may believe it, 
although may is the sign of the subjunctive in the meaning ; 
but the meaning is, 

There is nobody that believes it ; or, simply, nobody believes it. 



Relations between the Tenses of the different Moods. 

817. Remark. — Our intention is not to give the relations 
which ail the tenses bear to each other, but simplyto mention 
some of the principal. 



Relations of the Indicative. 

818. To the imperfect are subjoined three tenses : 

C quand vous tcriviez, 
Standard. — Je lisais < quand vous avez ecrit, 
(^quand vous ecrivites. 

819. The preterit anterior requires the preterit definite ; as, 
quand feus Jini, vous entrdtes. 

820. To the pluperfect are subjoined the preterit definite, 
the preterit indefinite, the preterit anterior, and the imperfect. 

Cquand vous entrdtes, 

c T , . . J quand vous etes entr6, 

Standards. — J avaislu< J . -,, , 

| quand vous Jutes entre, 

\jjiiand vous entriez 

821. To the preterit anterior indefinite is subjoined the 
preterit indefinite ; as, quand fai eu dine, vous etes entre. 

822. In conjunction with si, for suppose- que, the future 
absolute requires the present, and the future anterior the 
preterit indefinite. 

c C Vous partirez, si je veux. 

Standard. — < r , ' . . ' . J „ . 

( II sera parti, si vou? I avez vom/k. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 249 

Relations to the Conditional and of the Conditional. 

823. In conjunction with si, for suppose que, the conditional 
present is accompanied by the imperfect, and the first condi- 
tional past by the pluperfect or by the second conditional past- 

C Voits partiriez, si je le voulais. 

Standards. — <; ^ . . C si je I' 'avais voulu, 

) \ oils seriez parti < -. „ , 

C csijel eusse voulu. 

824. The tenses of the conditional present, and of the two 
conditionals past, are likewise accompanied by themselves. 

fQuand Vavare posse der ait tout For du monde, il 

ne serait pas encore content. 
Standards. — <{ Quand Alexandre aurait conqius tout Vunivers, 

il n' ] aurait pas ete content. 
[_Vous fussiez parti, si je I 1 eusse voulu. 

825. It has been observed that when two words are joined 
by the conjunction que, the second verb is put sometimes in 
the indicative and sometimes in the subjunctive. (See page 
170 and following.) 



Standard.- 5^^ }^ e ^ 



Relations of the Present and Future Absolute, of the Indicative 
to the Tenses of their own Mood, and of the Conditional. 

826. These two tenses may be accompanied by all the 
tenses of the indicative and conditional. 

^vous partez aujourcNiui, 
vous partirez demain, 
vous serez parti, quand, &c. 
vous partiez hier, 
vous partltes hier, 
vous etes parti ce matin, 
vous fates parti hier, quand, &.c. 
vous etiez parti hier, quand, &c\ 
vous partiriez aujourd'hui, si, &c 
vous seriez parti hier, si, &c. 

jvous fussiez parti plus tut, si,6lc, 

827. Remark. — The same relation subsists when the sen- 
tence is negative ; except that for the present absolute of the 
indicative, the present of the subjunctive is substituted. In- 
stead of on ne dit pas que vous partez aujourd* htti ; the 
genius of the French language requires that we should say, 
on ne dit pas que vous partiez aujourd' hui. 

828. The imperfect, the preterit definite, the preterit inde 
finite, and the pluperfect, are accompanied either by the 
imperfect 01 by the pluperfect. 



250 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

Jol d di?hier,\ fvouspartiezaujourShui, 

STANDARnS — 1 On a dit, >* Ue > 1 ,,. ■ ,. 

~ .' ... vo7is etiez parti. 

\^On avait ait, J \_ r 

829. The future anterior requires the preterit indefinite ; 
as, on aura dit que vous avez menti. 

830. The conditional present may be accompanied by the 
present, the imperfect, the preterit indefinite, the pluperfect, 
the future of the indicative, as well as by the three conditionals. 

'"quHl se trompe, 

quHl se trompait, 

qiCil s'est trompe", 

c, n ... J qiCil s'etait trompe, 

standards. — On croiraitA 2 ,., M r ' 

A qu il se trompera, 

quHl se tromperait, si, &c. 

qiCil se serait trompe*, si, &c 

quHl sefut trompe, si, &c. 

831. The first conditional past may be accompanied by the 
imperfect, the pluperfect, as well as the two other conditionals. 

CqiCil tombait, 

c, ^ h _ J qiCil ttait tombi, 

Standards. — On aurait cru,< * ,., . 4J ,, 

j qu il serait tomoe, 

XjquHl fut tombe*. 

832. The second conditional past may be accompanied by 
the same tenses. 



Principal Relations with the Subjunctive. 

834. To the present, the future absolute, and the future 
anterior of the indicative, is generally subjoined the present 
of the subjunctive. 

C Tl vent ~J 

Standard. — -i II voudra > que vous partiez. 
C_ U aura voulu j 

834 To the imperfect, the preterit definite, the preterit 
indefinite, the pluperfect, and the preterit anterior, may be 
subjoined the imperfect of the subjunctive. 



JStandaud.- 



f ~Je voulais, "\ 

Je von his, 

J\ii voulu yq ue vous partissiez. 

J'avais voulu, 
^J'eus voulu, J 



835. To the future; anterior, the preterit of the subjunctive ; 
as, // aura vxnrtu qu'il soil parti. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 251 

836. The conditional present is accompanied either by the 
imperfect, or by the pluperfect of the subjunctive. 



C ,. j • 7 vous partissiez, 

Standard. — < Je vouarais que. > r • .• 

(_ a 3 vons Jussiez parti. 

17. To the first and second conditionals past is subjoin 
pluperfect of the subjunctive. 

C J'aurais voulu, "> r 

Standard. — -\ p " 7 \ ^ ue vous t ussiez parti. 



OF THE INFINITIVE. 

838. The preposition to before an infinitive is, according 
to circumstances, rendered either by pour, by a, or by de ; 
sometimes it is not even expressed at all. 

839. When to means in order to, it is expressed in French 
by pour ; as, 

He came to speak to me, II vint pour me parler. 

840. As for the other two cases, there is hardly any fixed 
rule to distinguish whether a or de, is to be used ; the regi- 
men which the preceding French verb requires after it is the 
only guide. Thus, 

He likes to play, will be expressed by il aime ajouer ; he told me to go, 
by il me dit d'aller ; and he preferred dying, by il aima mieux mourir. 

841. The participle present is used in English both as a 
substantive and an adjective, and frequently instead of the 
present of the infinitive. 

His ruling passion is hunting, Sa passion dominant e est la chaste. 

He is gone a -walking, II est alle se promener. 

Prevent him from doing mischief, Empechez-le de faire le mal. 

There is a pleasure in silencing II y a plaisir a fermer la bouche aux 

great talkers, grands parleurs. 

842. It likewise takes almost every other preposition. In 
the first of the above examples, it is translated by the sub- 
stantive ; in the second, by the verbal adjective; and in the 
others by the present of the infinitive. 

843. Sometimes the participle present must be expressed 
by the relative qui, with the verb in the indicative, especially 
when a different mode might create any ambiguity in the 
sense ; as, 

I met them riding post, Je Ies ai rencontres qui couraient la poste. 

844. Sometimes it must be expressed by the conjunction 
que, with the verb in the indicative or in the subjunctive, as 



252 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

circumstances may require : this is when the participle pre- 
sent is preceded by a possessive pronoun ; as, 

The fear of his coming vexed us, La crainte qu'il ne vint nous tourmen- 
I doubt his being faithful, Je doute qu'il soit fidele, &c. [tait, 

845. It may be proper to observe that, in French, the 
preposition en alone is followed by the participle present. 
All other prepositions require the present of the infinitive. 

846. Foreigners are apt to mistake the use of the participle 
present, because they do not consider that, as it expresses an 
incidental proposition, it must evidently relate to the word 
which it restrains and modifies. 

847. Rule. — The participle present always forming a 
phrase incidental and subordinate to another, must necessarily 
relate to the subject of the principal phrase, when it is not 
preceded by another noun, as in this sentence : 

Je ne puis vous accompagner a la I cannot accompany you into the 
campagne, ayant des affaires country, having some business 
qui exigent ma presence, that requires my presence here. 

848. The participle present ayant relates to the subject je, 
since the subordinate proposition, formed by ayant, could 
have no kind of relation to the principal proposition, if it 
could not be resolved into this : — Farce que fai des affaires 
qui, &c. But in this sentence, 

Comhien voyons-nous de gens qui, How many people do we see who 
connaissant le prix du temps, le knowing the value of time, 
perdent mal-a-propos ! spend it improperly ! 

connaissant relates to the substantive gens, because this is the 
word which it restrains and modifies, and because the relative 
qui, placed between that substantive as the regimen and the 
participle present, obviates every kind of ambiguity. 

849. Remarks. — 1. Two participles ought never to be 
used together without being united by a conjunction ; as, 

C'cst un hqmme aimant et craignant He is a man loving and fearing 
Dieu, God. 

850. The relative en ought never to be put either before a 
participle present or before a gerund. We cannot say, 

Je vous ai remis mon fds entre les mains, en voulant faire quclque chose 
de bon, 

because the sense would be ambiguous : for the meaning is not, 
As I wish to do something good — or, as I wish to do well— I have put 
my son into vour hands, 

but, 

I have j)ii< my son into your hands, as I wish to make something of him. 
We should say, Votdant en faire, <fcc. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 253 

851. Likewise this sentence would be improper: 
he prince tempere la rigueur du pouvoir, en en partageant les foncitons, 
on account of the repetition of the word en, used in two 
different senses, viz : as a preposition and a relative. An- 
other turn must then be adopted ; as, 

C'est en partageant les fonctions du pouvoir, qu'un prince en tempere 
la rigueur. 



CHAPTER VII. 

OF PREPOSITIONS. 



852. The office of prepositions is to bring the two terms 
between which they are placed into a state of relation, and that 
relation is generally expressed by their own signification ; as, 

Avec, sur, pendant, dans, &c. 

853. But a, de, and en express it, either by their primitive 
and proper meaning, or figuratively and by extension ; so that- 
in this last case, they are merely prepositions serving to unite 
the two terms ; whence it happens that they often express 
either the same relations that others do, or opposite relations. 
For instance, in these two sentences : 

Appro e he z-vous du feu, Come near the fire. 

Eloignez-vous du feu, Go from the fire. 

854. De merely establishes a relation between the two 
terms, without expressing in the first the relation of approxi- 
mation, or in the second the relation of distance. In order, 
therefore, to form a just idea of these three prepositions, it 
is of importance to consider only their primitive and proper 
signification. 

855. En and dans have nearly the same meaning ; but 
they differ in this, that the former is used in a more vague, 
the latter in a more determinate sense ; as, 

J'etais en Angleterre, dans la piovince de Middlesex. 

856. From what has just been said, it follows, then, that 
en, on account of its indeterminate nature, ought not to be 
followed by the article, except in a small number of phrases 
sanctioned by usage ; such are, 

En la presence de Dieu ; en la grand* chambre du parlement ; en 
/'absence d'un tel ; en Z'annee mil huit cent dix-sept, &c. 

with respect to the expressions 

En l'honneur, en Page, it is better to sav, a fhonneur, a fage. 

Y 



254 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

857. Avant is a preposition in this phrase: 
Avant le jour, Before day-light, 
but it is an adverb in this : 

Wallez pas si avant, Do not go so forward. 

858. Some other prepositions are likewise occasionally 
adverbs. 

859. Autour and alentour must not be confounded ; autour 
is a preposition and alentour an adverb ; thus, 

Tous les grands etaient autour clu All the grandees stood round the 

trbne, throne. 

Le roi etait sur son trbne, et les The king was upon the throne, and 

grands etaient alentour, the grandees stood round. 

860. Avant and auparavant are not used indifferently. 

861. Avant is followed by a regimen ; as, 

Avant Pdques, Before Easter. 

Avant ce temps, Before that time. 

862. Auparavant is followed by no regimen ; as, 

Si vous partez, venez me voir au- If you set off, come and see me 
paravant, first. 

863. Pret a and pres de are not the same expressions. 
Pret is an adjective : 

Je suis pret a /aire ce que vous I am ready to do what you 
voudrez, please. 

864. But pres is a preposition : 

Mon ouvrage est pres cVetre jini, • My work is nearly finished. 

865. Au travers and a travers differ in this : the first is 
followed by the preposition de, the second is not ; as, 

Use Jit jour au travers des ennemis, C He fought his way through the 
Use Jit jour a travers les ennemis, (_ enemy. 

866. Avant denotes priority of time and order ; as, 
II est arrive avant moi, V article se met avant le nom. 

867. Levant is used for en presence, vis-a-vis ; 
II a paru devant le juge ; il loge dcvant l'eglise. 

868. Remark. — Devant is likewise a preposition marking 
order, and is the opposite of apres ; as, 

fl a le pas devant moi, He has precedence of me. 

Si vous etes presse courez devant, If you are in a hurry, run before. 



The use of the Article with Prepositions. 

869. Some prepositions require the article before their 
regimen ; others do not ; and others again sometimes admit, 
sometimes reject it. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 255 

870. Rule I. — The following prepositions generally re- 
quire the article before the noun which they govern : 



avant, depuis, 
apres, devant, 
chez, derriere, 
dans, durant, 


envers, 
excepte, 
hors, 
hormis, 


nonobstant. selon, 
parmi, suivant, 
pendant, touchant, 
pour, vers. 


avant l'aurore, 
apres la promenade, 


chez le prince, 
dans la maison, 


envers les pauvre3, 
devant l'eglise, &c. 



871. There are, however, exceptions ; as, 

avant terme, avant diner, pour lit une paillasse, 

avant midi, apres diner, depuis minuit, &c. 

872. Rule II. — A noun governed by the preposition en is 
not, in general, preceded by the article ; as, 

En ville, en campagne, en extase, en songe, en pieces, &c. 

873. Remark. — Varmie est entree en campagne, means 
the army had taken the field ; but Mr. N. est alle a la cam- 
pagne, means, Mr. N. is gone into the country. 

874. Rule III. — These eleven prepositions — a, de, avec, 
contre, entre, malgre, outre, par, pour, sur, sans — some- 
times admit, sometimes reject the article before their regimen. 

875. The article is used in these phrases : 
Jouer sur le velours, 

St. Paul veut de la subordination entre la femme et le mari. 
Sans les passions, ou serait le m£rite ] , 

876. It is suppressed in, 

Etre sur pied ; un peu de fa^ons ne gate rien entre mari et femme. 
Vivre sans passions, c'est vivre sans plaisirs et sans peines 



Repetition of the Prepositions. 

877. Rule I.-— The prepositions de, a, and en, must be 
repeated before all the nouns which they govern ; as, 

Voyons qui Vemportera de vous, de Let us see which of us will excel, 

lui, ou de mot, you, he, or I. 

Elle a de Vhonneteti, de la douceur, She has politeness, sweetness, 

des graces, et de V esprit, grace, and abilities. 

La loi, que TJieu a gravie au The law which God has deeply 

fond de mon coeur, mHnstruit engraven on my heart, instructs 

de tout ce que je dois a Vauteur me in every thing I owe tc the 

de mon etre, au prochain, a mot- author of my being, to my neigh 

me me, bor, and to myself. 

En Asie, en Europe, en Afrique, et In Asia, in Europe, in Africa, and 

jusqu'en Amerique, on trouve le even in America, we find the 

meme prejuge, same prejudice. 

878. Rule II. — The other prepositions, especially those 
consisting of two syllables, are generally repeated before 



256 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

nouns which have meanings totally different; but seldom 
before nouns which are nearly synonymous : 

Rien n'est moms selon Dieu et Nothing is less according to God 
selon le mo?ide, and according to the world. 

Cette action est contre Vhonneur et That action is contrary to honor 
contre toute espece de principes, and to every kind of principle. 

879. But we ought to say, 

II perd sa jeunesse dans la mollesse He wastes his youth in effeminacy 

et la volupte, and pleasure. 

Notre loi ne condamne personne Our laws condemn nobody without 

sans V avoir entendu et examine, having heard and examined him- 



Of the Government of Prepositions 

880. Some prepositions govern nouns without the help of 
another preposition ; as, 

Devant la ?naison, Before the house. 

Hormis son fr ere, Except his brother. 

Sans son epee, Without his sword, &c. 

881. Others require the help of the preposition de ; as, 

Pres de la maison, Near the house, 

A Vinsu de son fr ere, Unknown to his brother. 

Au-dessus du pont, Above the bridge, &c. 

882. These four— -jusque, par rapport, auant, and sauf— 
are followed by the preposition a ; as, 

JusqiCau mois prochain, Till the next month. 

Quant a moi, As for me, &c. 

883. Practice alone can teach these different regimens. 

884. Rule. — A noun may be governed by two prepositions, 
provided they do not require different regimens ; thus, we 
may say with propriety, 

Celui qui 6crit selon les circon- He who writes according to circum- 
stances, pour et contre un parti, stances, both for and against a 
est un liomme bien me'prisable, party, is a very contemptible man. 

885. But it would be wrong to say, 

Celui qui ecrit en faveur et contre un parti, &c. 
because en faveur requires the preposition de. 

886. Rule. — Prepositions which, with their regimen, 
express a circumstance, are generally placed as nearly as 
possible to the word to which that circumstance relates; as. 

On voit des prrsonnes qui, avec We see persons who, with a great 
beaucoup d'esprit, commettent deal of wit, commit very great 
de trea-grandes fautes, faults. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 257 

J 9 at envoye* a la poste les lettres I have sent to the post office the let 

que vous avez ecrites, ters which you have written. 

Croyez-vous pouvoir ramenerpar Do you think you can reclaim by 

la douceur ces esprits egares ? gentleness those mistaken people ? 

887. If we attempt to alter the place of these prepositions, 
we shall find that the sentences will become ambiguous. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

OF THE ADVERB ? 



Of the Negative ne. 



888. Negation is expressed in French by ne, either alone 
or accompanied by pas or point. On this point the Ac*ademy 
has examined the four fallowing questions : 

1. Where is the place of the negatives ? [versa ? 

2. When is pas to be used in preference to point, and vice 

3. When may both be omitted ? 

4. When ought both to be omitted ? 

889. As this subject is of very material importance, we 
shall treat it upon the plan of the Academy, and agreeably to 
their views. 

890. First Question. — Where is the place of the negatives ? 

891. Ne is always prefixed to the verb ; but the place of 
pas and point is variable. 

892. When the verb is in the infinitive, these are placed 
indifferently before or after it ; for we say, 

Pour ne point voir, or, pour ne voir point. 

893. In the other moods, except the imperative, the tenses 
are either simple or compound. In the simple tenses, pas 
or point is placed after the verb : 

II ne parle pas ; ne parle-t-il pas 1 

894. In the compound tenses, it is placed between the 
auxiliary and the participle : 

II n'a pas parle ; n'a-t-il pas parle 1 

895. In the imperative, it is placed after the verb : 

Ne badinez pas. Ne vous en allez pas. 

896. Second Question. — When is pas to be used in pre- 
ference to point , and vice versa ? 

y2 



258 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 

897. Point is a stronger negative than tyas ; besides, it 
denotes something permanent : 77 ne lit point, means, he 
never reads. 

898. Pas denotes something accidental : 77 ne lit pas, 
means, he does not read now, or he is not reading. 

899. Point de denotes an absolute negation. Thus, II n? a 
point d? esprit, is to say, he has no wit at all. 

900. Pas de allows the liberty of a reserve. So, 77 n'a pas 
d* esprit, is to say, he has nothing of what can be called wit. 

901. Hence, the Academy concludes that pas is more proper, 

902. 1 . — Before plus, moins, si, autant, and other words 
denoting comparison ; as, 

Milton n'est pas moins sublime qiH- Milton is not less sublime than 
Homere, Homer. 

903* 2. — Before nouns of number ; as, 

II n J y a pas dix ans,' , It is not ten years ago. 

904. Point is elegantly used, # 

905. 1. — At the end of a sentence ; as, 

On s'amusait a ses depens, et il They were amusing themselves at his 
ne s'en apercevait point, expense, and he did not perceive it. 

906. 2. — In elliptical se tences ; as, 

Je croyais avoir affaire a un hon~ I thought I had to deal with an honest 
nete homme ; mais point, man ; but no. 

907. In answer to interrogative sentences ; as, 

Irez-vous ce soir au pare ? — Shall you go this evening to the park ? 
Point, — No. 

908. The Academy also observes, that when pas or point 
is introduced into interrogative sentences, it is with meanings 
somewhat different. We make use of point when we have 
any doubt on our minds ; as, 

JV"avez-vous point iti la ? Have you not oecn there 1 

909. But we use pas when we are persuaded. Thus, 
N'avez-vous pas 4t4 la ? But you have been there, have you not 1 

910. Third Question. — When may both pas and point 
be omitted ? 

911. They may be suppressed, 

912. 1. — After the words cesser, oser, and pouvoir ; but 
this omission is only for the sake of elegance ; as, 

Je ne cesse de m'en occuper, I am incessantly attentive to it. 
Je n y ose vous en parler, I dare not speak to you about it. 

fe ne pins y penser sans frimir, I cannot think of it without shuddeiiug 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 259 

913. We likewise say, but only in familiar conversation, 
JVe bougez, Do not stir. 

914. 2. — In expressions of this kind : 

T a-t-il un homme dont elle ne Is there a man that she does not 

medise ? slander ] 

Avez-vous un ami qui ne soit des Have you a friend that is not like- 

miens ? wise mine 1 

915. Fourth Question. — When ought both pas and point 
to be omitted ? 

916. They are omitted, 

917. 1. — When the extent which we mean to give to the 
negative is sufficiently expressed, either by the words which 
restrict it, by words which exclude all restriction, or lastly, 
by such as denote the smaller parts of a whole, and which 
are without the article. 

918. To exemplify the first part of this remark, we say, 

Je ne sors guere, I go out but seldom. 

Je ne sortirai de trois jours, I shall not go out for three days. 

919. To exemplify the second, we say, 

Je n'y vais jamais, I never go there. 

Je n'y pense plus, I think no more of it. 

A*ul ne salt s'il est digne a* amour, Nobody knows whether he be de- 

ou de haine, serving of love or hatred. 

K'employez aucun de ces strata- Use none of these stratagems. 

H ne plait a personne, [gemes, He pleases nobody. 

Rien nest plus charmant, Nothing is more charming. 

Je n'y pense nullement, I do not think of it at all. 

920. To exemplify the third, we say, 

U n'y voit goutte, He cannot see at all. 

Je n'en ai cueilli brin, I did not gather a sprig. 

E ne dit mot, He speaks not a word. 

921. But if to mot we join an adjective of number, pas 
must be added ; as, 

II ne dit pas un mot qui ninti- He speaks not a word but what is 

resse, interesting. 

Dans ce discours, il n'y a pas trois In that speech, there are not three 

mots a reprendre, words that are exceptionable. 

922. Pas is likewise used with the preposition de ; as, 

Jl ne fait pas de demarche inutile, He does not take any useless step 

923. Remark. — If, after the sentences we have just men- 
tioned, either the conjunction que or the relative pronouns 



260 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 

qui or dont should introduce a negative sentence, then in this 
last, pas and point are omitted ; as, 

Je nefais jamais d'exces, queje I never commit any excess without 

n'en sois incommode, being ill after it. 

Je ne vois personne qui ne vous I see nobody but what commends 

hue, you. 

924. 2. — When two negatives are joined by ni ; as, 
Je ne Vaime ni ne Vestime, I neither love nor esteem him. 

925. And when the conjunction ni is repeated, either in 
the subject, as, 

Ni Vor ni la grandeur ne nous Neither gold nor greatness can make 
rendent heureux, us happy, 

926. Or, in the attribute ; as, 

n n'est ni prudent ni sage, He is neither prudent nor wise, 

927. Or, in the regimen ; as, 

Tl n*a. ni dettes ni proces, He has neither debts nor law-suits. 

928. Remark. — Pas is preserved when ni is not repeated, 
and when this last serves only to unite two members of a 
negative sentence ; as, 

Je rCaime pas ce vain etalage I do not like that vain display of eru- 

d 'erudition, prodiguee sans dition, lavished without choice and 

choix et sans gout, ni ce luxe without taste, nor that pomp of 

de mots qui ne disent rien, words which have no meaning. 

929. 3. — With the verb which follows que, used instead of 
pourquoi, and with a moins que, or si, used instead of it ; as, 

Que rtetes-vous aussi pos6 que Why are you not as sedate as your 

votre frere ? brother '? 

Je ne sortirai pas, a moins que I shall not go out, unless you come 

vous ne veniez me prendre, to fetch me. 

Je vHirai pas chez lui, s'il ne m 9 y I shall not go to his house, if he does 

engage, not invite me 

930. 4. — With ne — que, used instead of settlement ; as, 

Tine jeunesse, qui se livre a ses Youth which abandons itself to its 
passions, ne transmet a la vieil- passions, transmits to old age noth- 
lesse qu'un corps use*, ing but a worn-out body. 

931. When before the conjunction que, the word rien is 
understood ; as, 

// ne fait que rire, He does nothing but laugh. 

932. Or when that conjunction may be changed into sincn 
or si ce n'c.st ; as, 

U ne tient qiia vous de re*ussir, The success wholly depends upon you. 
Trop de mat Ires a la fois ne ser- Too many masters at once only serve 
vent qu'a embroniller V esprit, to perplex the mind. 

933. 5. — With a verb in the preterit, preceded by the 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 261 

conjunction depuis que or by the verb il y a, denoting a 

certain duration of time ; as, 

Comment vous etes-vousporte depuis How have you been since I saw 

que je ne vous ai vu P you 1 

II y a trois mois que je ne vous ai I have not seen you for these three 

vu, months. 

934. But they are not omitted when the verb is in the 
present; as, 

Comment vit-il depuis que nous How does he live, now we dp not 

ne le voyons point ? see him 1 

II y a six mois que nous ne le We have not seen him these six 

voyons point, months. 

935. 6. — In phrases where the conjunction que is preceded 
by the adverbs of comparison plus, moins, mieux, &c, or 
some other equivalent term ; as, 

On mtprise ceux qui parlent au- We despise those who speak differ 

trement qiiils ne pensent, ently from what they think. 

II ecrii mieux qiCil ne parle, He writes better than he speaks. 

Cest pire qu y on ne le disait, It is worse than was said. 

C' est autre chose que jene croyais, It is different from what I thought. 
Peu s enfant qu 9 cn ne m?ait tromp6, I have been very near being deceived. 

936. 7. — In sentences united by the conjunction que to the 
verbs douter, desesperer, nier, and disconvenir, forming a 
negative member of a sentence ; as, 

Je ne doute pas quHl ne vienne, I doubt not that he will come. 

Ne desesperez pas que ce moyen Do not despair of the success of 

ne vous reussisse, these means. 

Je ne nie pas, or je ne disconviens I do not deny that it is so. 

pas que cela ne soit, 

937. The Academy says, that after the last two verbs, ne 
may be omitted ; as, 

Je ne nie pas, or je ne disconviens pas que cela soit. 

938. 8. — With a verb united by the conjunction que to the 
verbs empecher and prendre garde, meaning to take care ; as, 

J J empecherai Men que vous ne I shall prevent your being of the 

soyez du nombre, number. 

Prenez garde qrfon ne vous si- Take care that they do not corrupt 

duise, you. 

939. Remark. — The Academy observes, that in the above 
acceptation, prendre garde is followed by a subjunctive ; but 
when it means to reflect, the indicative is used with pas or 
point; as, 

Prenez garde que vous ne m y en~ Mind, you do not understand what 1 
tendez pas, mean. 

940. 9. — With a verb united by the conjunction que to the 



262 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 

verb craindre, and those of the same meaning, when we do 
not wish the. thing expressed by the second verb ; as, 

Jl craint que son frere ne Vaban- He is afraid his brother should for- 

donne, sake rlim. 

Je cruins que mon ami ne meure, I fear my friend will die. 

941. But pas is not omitted when we wish the thing ex- 
pressed by the second verb ; as, 

Je crains que mon pere n' arrive pas, I am afraid my father will not come. 

942. 10. — With the verb which follows de peur que, de 
crainte que, in similar circumstances with craindre. Thus, 
when we say, 

De crainte qu'il ne perde son proces, 
we wish that he may gain it ; and when we say, 

De crainte qu'il ne soit pas puni, 
we wish that he may be punished. 

943. Remark.' — In these phrases, 

Je crains que mon ami ne meure, I am afraid my friend will die, 
Vous empechez qu'on ne chante, You prevent them from singing, 

the expression ne is not a negation ; it is the ne or quin of 
the Latins, introduced into the French language, as may be 
seen by the English translation. 

944. 11. — After savoir, whenever it has the meaning of 
pouvoir ; as, 

Je ne saurais en venir a bout, I cannot accomplish it. 

945. When it means etre incertain, it is the best to omit 
pas and point ; as, 

Je ne sais oil le prendre, I do not know where to find him. 

It ne sait ce qxHil dit, He does not know what he says. 

946. Remark. — But pas and point must be used when 
savoir is taken in its true meaning ; as, 

Je ne sais pas le francais, I do not know French. 

947. 12.— We also say, 

J\Te vous diplaise, ne vous en By your leave, under favor, or let it 
dtplaise, not displease you. 

948. Plus and davantage must not be used indifferently. 

949. Plus is followed by the preposition de or the con- 
junction que; as, 

Jl a phis de briUant que de solide, He has more brilliancy than solidity. 

11 se fie phis a ses lumitres qiCa He relies more upon his own know- 

cellcs des autres, ledge than upon that of others. 

950. Davantage is used alone and at the end of sentences ; as, 

Jai science est estimable, mais la Learning is estimable, but virtue is 
ucrtu rest davanta<re, still more so. 



OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 283 

951. Though davantage cannot be followed by the prepo- 
sition de, it may be preceded by the pronoun en; as, 

Je n'en dirai pas davantage, I shall not say any more about it. 

952. It is incorrect to use davantage for le plus. We 
must say, 

De toutes les fleurs d\in parterre, Of all the flowers of a parterre, the 
V anemone est ceile qui me plait anemone is that which pleases me 
le plus, most. 

953. Si, aussi, tant, and autant, are always followed by 
the conjunction que, expressed or understood. 

954. Si and aussi are joined to adjectives, adverbs, and 
participles ; tant and autant to substantives and verbs. 

V Angleterre rHest pas si grande England is not so large ag 

que la France, France. [beloved. 

Tl est aussi estime qiCaime, He is as much esteemed as he is 

Elle a autant de beaute que de vertu, She has as much beauty as virtue. 

955. Remark. — Autant may, however, be substituted for 
aussi, when it is preceded by one adjective and followed by 
que and another adjective ; as, 

H est modeste autant que sage, He is as modest as wise. 

956. Aussi and autant are used in the affirmative ; si and 
tant in negative and interrogative sentences. The two last 
are, however, alone to be used in affirmative sentences, when 
they are put for tellement ; as, 

II est devenu si gros, quHl a de la He is become so bulky that he can 

peine a marcher, hardly walk. 

U a tant couru quHl en est hors He has been running so fast that 

d'haleine, he is out of breath. 

957. Jamais takes sometimes the preposition a, and toy- 
jours the preposition pour ; as, 

Soyez a jamais heureux, Be for ever happy. 

C'est pour toujours, It is for ever. 



CHAPTER IX. 

OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 



958. Grammatical construction is the order which the 
genius of a language has assigned, in speech, to the different 
sorts of words into which it is distinguished. Construction 
is sometimes mistaken for syntax ; but there is this difference, 
the latter consists in the rules which we are to observe, in 
order to express the relations of words one to another, whereas 



264 of gra:.: statical construction. 

grammatical construction consists in the various arrangements 
which are allowed while we observe the rules of syntax. 
Now, this arrangement is irrevocably fixed, not only as phrases 
may be interrogative, imperative, or expositive, but also as 
each of these kinds may be affirmative or negative. 

959. In sentences simply interrogative, the subject is either 
a noun or pronoun. 

960. If the subject be a noun, the following is the order to 
be observed : first, the noun, then the verb, then the corres- 
ponding personal pronoun, the adverb, if any, and the regimen 
in the simple tenses : in the compound tenses, the pronoun and 
the adverb are placed between the auxiliary^ and the participle : 

Les lumieres sont-elles tin Men pour Are sciences an advantage to na- 
lespeuples? ont-elles jamais con- tions] Have they ever contri- 
tribue a leur bonheur? buted to their happiness ? 

961. If the subject be a pronoun, the verb begins the series, 
and the other words follow in the order already pointed out ; as, 

Vons plairez-vous toujours a Will you always take pleasure in 

me dire ? slandering ] 

Aurez-vous bientot jini ? Shall you soon have done ? 

962. N. B. — When the verb is reflected, the pronoun 
forming the regimen begins the series : this pronoun always 
preserves its place before the verb, except in sentences 
simply imperative. 

963. In interrogative sentences, with negation, the same 
order is observed ; but ne is placed before the verb, and pas 
or point after the verb in the simple tenses, and between the 
auxiliary and the participle in the compound tenses ; as, 

Voire frere ne viendra-t-il pas Will not your brother come to- 

demain ? morrow 1 

JVaurez-vous pas bientot Jini ? Shall you not have soon done ! 

964. Remark. — There are in French several other ways 
of interrogating. 

965. 1. — W r ith an absolute pronoun ; as, 

Qui vous a dit cela ? or ? Who ^ ^ , 

Qui est-ce gut vous a dit cela F 3 

96G. 2. — With the demonstrative pronoun ce ; as, 

Est-ce-vous ? Is it you 1 Est-ce qxCil pleut? Does it rain ? 

967. With an interrogative adverb ; as, 
Pourquoi ne vient-il pas ? Why does he not come 1 
Comment vous trouvez-vous ? How do you find yourself? 

968. Hence we see that the absolute pronouns and the 
interrogative adverbs always begin the sentence: but the 
demonstrative pronoun always follows the verb. 



OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 265 

969. In sentences simply imperative, the verb is always 
placed first, in the first and second persons ; but in the third, it 
comes after the conjunction que and the noun or pronoun ; as, 

Allons la, Let us go there. 

Venez ici, Come here. 

Qu'ils y aillent, Let them go there. 

Que Pierre aille a Londres, Let Peter go to London. 

970. With negation, ne and pas are placed as in interro- 
gative sentences. 

971. For the place of the pronouns, see page 131 > 

972. Sentences are expositive, when we speak without 
either interrogating or commanding. The following is the 
order of the words in those which are affirmative : the subject, 
the verb, the adverb, the participle, the regimen ; as, 

Un bon prince merite Mainour de A good prince deserves the lo^e of 

ses svjets, et Vestime de tous les his subjects, and the esteem of all 

peuples, nations. 

Cesar eut inutilement passe le Caesar would have crossed the Tvubi- 

Rubicon, s'il y eut eu de son con to no purpose had there been 

temps des Fabius, Fabii in his time. 

973. The negative sentences differ from this construction 
only as ne is always placed before the verb, and pas or point 
either after the verb, or between the auxiliary and the par- 
ticiple ; as, 

Un homme riche ne fait pas ton- A rich man does not always do all 

jours le bien qit'il pourrait, the good he might. 

Oicironri eut peut-etre pas 6te un Cicero would not perhaps have been 

si grand orateur, si le desir de so great an orator, had not the 

s'elever aux premieres dignites desire of rising to the first dignities 

rCeut enflamme son ame, inflamed his soul. 

974. Sentences are either simple or compound. They are 
simple when they contain only one subject and one attribute ; as, 

Vous lisezy You read. Vous etes jeune, You are young. 

975. They are compound when they associate several 
subjects with one attribute, or several attributes with one 
subject, or several attributes with several subjects, or several 
subjects with several attributes. 

976. This sentence, Pierre et Paul sont heureux, is com- 
pound by having several subjects ; this — cettefemme est jolie, 
spirituelle et sensible — is compound by having several attri- 
butes ; and this — Pierre et Paul sont spirituels et savans — is 
composed at once of several subjects and several attributes. 

977. A sentence may be compound in various other ways ; 
by the subject, by the verb, or by the attribute. 

Z 



*f)0 OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 

978. By the subject, when this is restricted by an inci* 
dental proposition ; as, 

Dieu, qui est bon. 

979. By the verb, when it is modified by some circum- 
stance of time, order, &c. ; as, 

Dieu, qui est bon, n'abandonne jamais. 

980. By the attribute, when this attribute is modified by a 
regimen which is itself restricted ; as, 

Dieu, qui est bon, n'abandonne jamais les hommes, qui mettent 
since rement leur confiance en lui. 

981. These simple or compound sentences may be joined 
to others by a conjunction; as, 

Quand on aime £ etude, le temps When we love study, time flies with- 
passe sans qiCon s'en apergoive, out our perceiving it. 

The two partial phrases here form but one. 

982. Rule. — When a sentence is composed of two partial 
phrases, joined by a conjunction, harmony and perspicuity 
generally require the shortest to go first. 

EXAMPLES. 

Quand les passions nous quiitent When our passions leave us, we 

nous nous fattons en vain, que in vain flatter ourselves that it 

c'est nous qui les quittons, is we that leave them. 

On n'est point a plaindre, quand, He is not to be pitied who, foi 

au d4faut de plaisirs reels, on want of real pleasure, finds 

trouve le moyen de s'occuper de means to amuse himself with 

chimeres, chimeras. 

983. Periods result from the union of several partial 
phrases, the whole of which make a complete sense. Periods, 
to be clear, require the shortest phrases to be placed first 
The following example of this is taken from Flechier : 

N'attendez pas, Messieurs. 

1. Que j'ouvre une scene tragique ; 

2. Que je represente ce grand homme etendu sur ses propres trophees ; 

3. Que je decouvre ce corps pale et sanglant, aupres duquel fume encore 
la foudre qui l'a frappe ; 

4. Que je fasse crier son sang comme celui d'Abel, et que j'expose a 
vos yeux les images de la religion et de la patrie eploree. 

984. This admirable period is composed of four members, 
which go on gradually increasing. It is a rule not to give 
more than four members to a period, and to avoid multiplying 
incidental sentences. 

985 Obscurity in style is generally owing to those small 
phrases which divert the attention from the principal sen- 
tences, and make us lose sight of them 



OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 267 

986. The construction which we have mentioned is called 
direct or regular, because the words are placed in those sen- 
tences according- to the order whicn has been pointed out. But 
this order may be altered in certain cases, and then the con- 
struction is called indirect or irregular. Now, it may be 
irregular by inversion, by ellipsis, by pleonasm, or by syl- 
lip sis ; these are what are called the four figures of words. 



Of Inversion. 

987. Inversion is the transposition of a word into a place 
different from that which by usage is properly assigned to it. 
This ought never to be done except when it introduces more 
perspicuity, energy, or harmony into the language ; for it is 
a defect in construction whenever the relation subsisting be- 
tween words is not easily perceived. 

988. There are two kinds of inversion : the one, by its 
boldness, seems to be confined to poetry ; the other is fre- 
quently employed even in prose. 

989. We shall speak here of the latter kind only. 

990. The following inversions are authorized by custom. 

991. The subject by which a verb is governed may with 
propriety be placed after it ; as, 

Tout ce que hd promet tamiiie' All that the friendship of the Romans 
des Ro mains, promises him. 

992. Remark. — This inversion is a rule of the art of 
speaking and writing whenever the subject is modified by an 
incidental sentence, long enough to make us lose sight of the 
relation of the verb governed to the subject governing. 

993. The noun governed by the prepositions de and a may 
likewise be very properly placed before the verb ; as, 

D J une voix entrecoupe'e de sanglots, In a voice interrupted by sobs, 

lis s^ecrit^ent, they exclaimed. 

A taut d'injures, qu'a-t-elle re*- To so much abuse, what answeT 

pondu ? did she give 1 

994. The verb is likewise elegantly preceded by the 
prepositions apres, dans, par, sons, contre, Sic. with their 
dependencies, as well as by the conjunctions si, quand, 
parce que, puisque, quoique, lorsque, Sic. ; a», 

Par la lot du corps, je tiens a ce By the law of the body, 1 am con 

monde qui passe, nected with this passing world. 

Puisqu'il Ir veut, qu'il le fasse, Since he wishes it, let him do it 



268 OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 

Of the Ellipsis. 

995. Ellipsis is the omission of a word, or even several 
words, which are necessary to make the construction full and 
complete. In order to form a good ellipsis, the mind must 
be able easily to supply the words omitted ; as, 

J 1 accepter ais les offres de Darius, I would accept the offers of Darius, 
si fetais Alexandre : — et moi if I were Alexander : — and so 
aussi, si fetais Parmenion, would I, if I were Parmenio. 

■ Here the mind easily supplies the words je les accepter ais in 
the second number. 

996. The ellipsis is very common in answers to interro- 
gative sentences ; as, 

Quund viendrez-vous ? — Demain, When will you come '] — To-morrow 
— that is, je viendrai demain. 

997. In order to know whether an ellipsis be good, the 
words that are understood must be supplied. It is correct 
whenever the construction completely expresses the sense 
denoted by the words which are supplied : otherwise, it is 
not exact. 



Of the Pleonasm. 

998. Pleonasm, in general, is a superfluity of words ; in 
arder to constitute this figure good, it must be sanctioned by 
custom, which never authorizes its use but to give greater 
energy to language, or to express, in a clearer manner, the 
internal feeling with which we are affected. 

Et que m'a fait a moi cette Troie oil je cours ! 

Je me meurs. S'il ne veut pas vous le dire, je vous ie dirai, moi. 

Je l'ai vu de mes propres yeux. 

Je l'ai entendu de mes propres oreilles. 

— A moi, in the first sentence ; me, in the second ; moi, in 
the third ; de mes propres yeux, in the fourth ; and de mes 
propres oreilles, in the fifth, are employed merely for the 
sake of energy, or to manifest an internal feeling. But this 
manner of speaking is sanctioned by custom. 

999. Remark. — Expletives must not be mistaken for 
pleonasms ; as, 

(feet xine affaire, oil, il y va du It is an aflair in which the safety of 

saluc de Velal, the state is concerned, 

which is better than t'est Wit affaire, oh il va, &c. by omit- 
ting y, which is in reality useless on account of oh: but y 
here, is a mode of expression from which it is not allowable 
to deviate 



OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 269 

Of the Syllepsis. i 

1000. The syllepsis is a figure by which a word relates 
more to our meaning than to the literal expressions ; as in these ; 

II est onze heures ; l'an mil sept cent quatre-vingt-dix-neuf. 

1001. When using it, the mind, merely intent upon a 
precise meaning, pays no attention to either the number or 
the gender of heures and an. 

1002. There is likewise a syllepsis in these sentences : 

Je crams qu'il ne vienne. 
J'empecherai qu'il ne vous nuise. 
J'ai peur qu'il ne m'oublie, &c. 

1003. Full of a wish that the event may not take place, we 
are willing to do all we can that nothing should present an 
obstacle to that wish. This is the cause of the introduction 
of the negative, which, although unnecessary to complete the 
sense, yet must be preserved for the idiom. 

1004. There is again a very elegant syllepsis in sentences 
like the following from Racine : 

Entre le peuple et vous, vous prendrez Dieu pour juge ; 
Vous souvenant, mon fils, que cache sous ce lin, 
Comme eux vous fiites pauvre, et comme eux, orphelin. 

1005. The poet forgets that he has been using the word 
penple: nothing remains in his mind but des pauvres and 
ties orphelins, and it is with that idea of which he is so fully 
impressed that he makes the pronoun eux agree. For the 
same reason, Bossuet and Mezengui have said, 

Quand le peuple Hebreu entra dans la terre promise, tout y celebrait 
leurs ancetres. — Bossuet. 

Moise eut recours au Seigneur, et lui dit : que ferai-je a ce peuple? 
bientot ils me lapideront. — Mezexgui. 

1006. Leurs and ils stand for les Hebreux 



CHAPTER X. 

OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES, AMPHIBOLOGIES 
AND GALLICISMS. 



1007. We have chiefly to notice two incorrect modes of 
construction, which are contrary to the principles laid down 
in the preceding chapters — grammatical discordances and 
amphibologies. 

z2 



270 OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 

OF DISCORDANCES. 

1008. In general, there is a discordance in language when 
the words which compose the various members of a sentence 
or period do not agree with each other, either because their 
construction is contrary to analogy, or because they bring 
together dissimilar ideas, between which the mind perceives 
an opposition, or can see no manner of affinity. 

1009. The following examples will serve to illustrate this : 

Notre reputation ne depend pas des louanges qu'on nous donne, mais 
des actions louables que nous fesons. 

1010. This sentence is not correct, because the first member 
being negative, and the second affirmative, cannot come under 
the government of the same verb. It ought to be, 

JYotre reputation depend, non Our reputation depends, not upon the 

des louanges qu'on nous donne, praises which are bestowed on us, 

mais des actions louables que, but upon the praiseworthy actions 

&c. which we perform. 

1011. But the most common discordances are those which 
arise from the wrong use of tenses ; as in this sentence : 

II regarde votre malheur comtne une punition du peu de complaisance 
que vous avez eue pour lui, dans le temps qu'il vous pria, &c. ; 

because the two preterits, definite and indefinite, cannot well 
agree together ; it should be, 

Que vous eutes pour lui dans le temps qu'il vous pria. ■ 

1012. There is discordance in this sentence : 

On en ressentit autant de joie que d'une victoire complete dans un 
autre temps; 

because the verb cannot be understood after the que which 
serves for the comparison when the verb is to be in a different 
tense : it should be, 

On en ressentit autant de joie qu'on en aurait ressenti, &c. 

1013. This line of Racine, 

Le not, qui l'apporta, recule epouvante, 
is also incorrect, because the form of the present cannot asso- 
ciate with that of the preterit definite : it should have been, 
qui Pa apporte. 



OF AMPHIBOLOGIES. 



1014. Amphibology in language is when a sentence is so 
constructed as to be susceptible of two different interpretations : 
this must be carefully avoided. As we speak only to be un- 



OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 271 

derstood, perspicuity is the first and most essential quality of 
language ; we should always recollect that what is not clearly 
expressed in any language, is no language at all. 

1015. Amphibologies are occasioned, 1. — -By the misuse 
of moods and tenses. 2. — Of the personal pronouns il, le } 
la, &c. 3. — Of the possessive pronouns son, sa, ses, &c. 
4. — By giving a wrong place to nouns. 

Of an Amphibology of the first kind. 

Qu'ai-je fait, pour venir accabler en ces lieux 

Un heros, sur qui seul j'ai pu tourner les yeux ? — Racine. 

1016. Pour venir forms an amphibology, because we do 
not know whether it relates to the person who speaks or to 
the person spoken to : it should have been, Pour que vous 

veniez. 

Of an Amphibology of the second kind. 

Cesar voulut premierement surpasser Pompee ; les grandes richesses 
de Crassus lui firent croire, quV/ pourrait partager la gloire de ces 
deux grands hommes. 

1017. This sentence is faulty in its construction, because 
the pronouns il and lui seem to relate to Cesar, although the 
sense obliges us to refer them to Crassus. 

Of an Amphibology of the third kind. 
Valere alia chez Leandre ; il y trouva son fils. 

1018. The pronoun son is ambiguous, because we do not 
know to which it relates, to Valere or to Leandre. 

Of an Amphibology of the fourth kind. 
J'ai envoye les lettres, que j'ai ecrites, a la poste. 

1019. A la poste, thus placed, is equivocal, because we do 
not know whether it is meant that the letters have been writ- 
ten at the post office or sent to the post office. 



OF GALLICISMS. 

1020. We have distinguished in our " Grammaire Philo- 
sophique et Litteraire," four sorts of gallicisms : we shall 
only mention'here those of construction. 

1021. The gallicisms of construction are in general irre- 
gularities and deviations from the customary rules of syntax : 



272 OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 

there are some, however, which are mere ellipses, and others 
which can only be attributed to the caprice of custom 

1022. General Principle. — Every gallicism of construc- 
tion which obscures the meaning of the sentence, ought to be 
condemned. Those only ought to be preserved which do 
not impair perspicuity by introducing irregularity of con- 
struction, and which are at the same time sanctioned by long 
practice. 

1023. According to this principle, this elliptic gallicism is 
now rejected : 

Et qu'ainsi ne soit ; meaning, ce que je vous dis est si vrai que, 

because it obscures the sentence. For instance 

J'etais dans ce jardin, et qu'ainsi ne soit, voila une fleur que j'y ai 
cueillie ; that is, Et pour preuve de cela, voila une fleur, &c. 

Moliere and La Fontaine seem to have been the last great 
writers that have used this expression. 

1024. One of the most common gallicisms is that in 
which the impersonal verb il y a is used for il est, il existe 
These expressions, 

II y avait une fois un roi ; il y a cent a parier contre un, 

are gallicisms. There are two in the following sentence : 

U n'y a pas jusqu'aux enfans, qui Even children will meddle with it. 
ne s'en melent, 

1025. The verb falloir forms a sort of gallicism with the 
pronoun en when it is conjugated like pronominal verbs with 
the double pronouns il se ; as, 

II s'en faut, il s'en fallait, &c. 

It then means, to be wanting ; and when preceded by an 
adverb of quantity, the first pronoun is omitted ; as, 

Peu s'en faut, tant s'en faut. 

1026. These several manners of using the verb falloir will 
be found in the following sentences : 

EXAMPLES. 

/I s'en faut bien qu'il soit aussi He is far from being so clever as 

habile qu'il croit I'etve, he thinks. 

Peu s'en est fallu qu'il n'aii sue- He was very near failing in that 

enmhe' dans cette entvepvise, undertaking. 

II ice s'en est presque rien fallu He was as near as possible being 

gu'il n'ait 4te" tut, killed. 

I a us elites qu'il s'en faut ving-t You say it wants twenty pounds 

livrea que la somme entiere n'y to complete the sum, but you 

soit, vuiis voits vous trompez, il are mistaken, it cannot want so 

ne pent pas s'en falloir tant, much. 



OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION; 273 

Son rhume est entierement guiri, His cold is entirely well, or very 

ou pei.i s'en faut, nearly so. 

Que sen est-il fallu que ces deux How near were these two friends 

amis ne se soient brouilles? quarrelling] 

Je ne siiis pas content de voire ap- I am not satisfied with your appli- 

plication a f etude, tant s'' en faut, cation to study, far from it. 

Tant s'en faut que cette comedie So far from this play pleasing me, 

me plaise, elle me semble au con- I think it insufferable. 

trai^e detestable, 

II s'en fallait beaucoup que jevons I was far from approving your 

apfjrouvasse dans cette circon- conduct on that occasion. 

stance, 

1027. The sentences, 

11 n'est rien moins que genereux, He is far from being generous, 
Vous avez beau dire, You may say what you please, but, 

&c. 
A ce quHl me semble, By what I can see. As the matter 

appears to me, &c. 
Nous voila a nous lamenter, We began to lament. Here we are 

lamenting, crying, &c. 
Qu'est-ce que de nous, What wretched beings we are ! &c* 

are also gallicisms. 

1028. The use which is made of the preposition en, in 
many sentences is likewise another source of gallicism? : 
some of this kind will be found in the following expressions : 

A qui en avez-vous ? Whom are you angry with 1 

Ou en vsut-il venir ? What does he aim at \ What would 

he be at 1 
U lui en veut, He has a quarrel with him, &c. 

1029. The preposition en changes also sometimes the sig- 
nification of verbs, and then gives rise to gallicisms. 

1030. The conjunction que produces also a great number 
of gallicisms ; as, 

C'est une terrible passion que le jeu, Gaming is a terrible passion. 
Cest done en vain que je travaille, It is in vain then that I work. 
Ce n'est pas trop que cela, That is not too much, 

i? nUest que a* avoir du courage, There is nothing like having cou- 

rage. 

1031. Many others will be found in the use which is made 
of the prepositions a, de, dans, apres, &c. ; but enough has 
been said on the subject 

1032. Gallicisms are of very great use in the simple style ; 
therefore La Fontaine and Madame de Sevigne abound in 
them. The middling style has not so many, and the solemn 
oratorical but few, and these even of a peculiar nature. Only 



274 OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 

two examples of this kind, both taken from the tragedy of 
Iphigenia, by Racine, will be here inserted. 

Avez-vous pu pcnser qu'au sang d'Agamemnon ^ 

Achille preferat une fille sans nom, 

Q?ii de tout son destin ce qu'elle a pu comprendre. 

C'est qu'eile sort d'un sang, &c. 



And, 



Je ne sais qui m'arrSte et retient mon courroux, 
Que par un prompt avis de tout ce qui se passe. 
Je ne coure des dieux divulguer 2a menace. 



1033. In the first instance, qui is the subject, though with- 
out relating to any verb ; and in the second, je ne sais qui 
m'arrete que je ne coure, is contrary to the rules of common 
construction. " But," says Vaugelas, " these extraordinary 
phrases, far from being vicious, possess the more beauty, as 
tiiey freiong to a particular kind of language." 



1275) 



FREE EXERCISES. 



MADAME DE MAINTENON TO HER BROTHER. 

1 We can only be unhappy by our own fault ; this shall always be my 
text, and my reply to youi lamentations. 2 Recollect, my dear brother, 
the voyage to America, 3 the misfortunes of our father, of our infancy and 
our youth ; and you will bless Providence instead of murmuring against 
fortune. Ten years ago we were both very far A (below our present situa- 
tion) ; and our hopes were 5 so feeble that we limited our wishes to an 
6 (income of three thousand livres). At present we have four times 7 that 
sum, and our desires are not yet satisfied ! we enjoy the happy mediocrity 
which you 8 have so often extolled ; let us be content. If possessions 
come to us, let us receive them from the hand of God, but 10 let not our 
views be "too extravagant. We have 12 (every thing necessary) and 
13 comfortable ; all the rest is 14 avarice; all these desires of greatness 
l5 spring from a restless heart. Your debts are all paid, and you may live 
,6 elegantly without l "contracting more. What have you to desire 1 18 must 
19 schemes of wealth and ambition 20 occasion the loss of your repose and 
your health] Read the Life of St. Louis: you will see how 2I unequal 
the greatness of this world is to the desires of the human heart ; God only 
can 22 satisfy them. I repeat it, you are only unhappy by your own fault. 
Your 2S uneasiness destroys your health, which you ought to preserve 2 'if 
it were only because I love you. 25 Watch your 25 temper : if you can 
render it less 2: splenetic and less gloomy, 28 (you will have gained a great 
advantage). This is not the work of reflection only : exercise, amuse- 
ment, and a regular life 2y (are necessary for the purpose). You cannot 
think well 30 (while your health is affected) ; when the body is s 'debili- 
tated, the mind is without vigor. Adieu ! write to me more frequently, 
and in a style less gloomy. 

1 On ne £tre....que— 2 songer a — 3 the misfortunes of our infancy and tho^e of 
our, &.c. — 4 Ou point oil nous sommes au jourd'hui— 5 si peu de chose — 6 trois mille 
livras de rente — 7 that sum, en. ...plus — 8 vantiez si fort — 9 biens — 10 let us not 
have views— 11 trop vaste — 12 le necessaire — 13 le commode — 14 cupidite— 15 
spring from, partir du vide de — lb" delicieusement — 17 contracting more, en faire 
de nouvelles— 18 must, faut-il que— 19 projets — 20 couter Q, — 21 au-dessous de — 
22 le rassasier— 23 inquietude pi — 24 quand ce ctre N— 25 travailler sur— 26 
humer.r— 27 bilieux — 28 ce etre un grand point de gagne— 29 il y faut de— 30 tant 
que vjus se porter mal— 31 dans l'abattement. 



THE CONVERT. 

AN EASTERN TALE. 
Divine 'mercy had brought a vicious man into a society of sages, whose 
morals were holy and pure. He was affected by their virtues : 2 it was 
not long 'before he imitated them and lost his old habits : he became just, 
sober, patient, laborious, ^tnd benevolent. His deeds nobody could deny, 
but 4 they were attributed to odious motives. They praised his good 

1 Misericorde— 2 ne pas tarder— 3 a with the A — i On donner des motifs 



276 FREE EXERCISES. 

actions without loving his person : they would always judge him by what 
he had been, not by what he had become. This injustice filled him with 
grief; he shed tears in the bosom of an ancient sage, more just and more 
humane than the others. " O, my son." said the old man to him, "thou 
art better than thy reputation ; be thankful to God for it. Happy the man 
who can say, my enemies and my rivals censure in me vices of which I 
am not guilty. 5 What matters it, if thou art good, that men persecute 
thee as wicked 1 Hast thou not, to comfort thee, the two best witnesses 
of thy actions, God and thy conscience V — Saint-Lambert, 

5 Q-u'importe. 



Mr. de Montausier has written a letter to Monseigneur upon the taking 
of Philipsbourgh, which very much pleases me. " Monseigneur, I do not 
compliment you on the capture of Philipsbourgh : you had a good army, 
bombs, cannon, and Vauban ; neither shall I compliment you upon your 
valor, for that is an hereditary virtue in your family ; but I rejoice that 
you are liberal, generous, humane, and that you know how to recompense 
the services of those who behave well : it is for this that I congratulate 
you." — Sevigne. 



THE GOOD MINISTER. 

AN EASTERN TALE. 
The great Aaron Raschild began to suspect that his vizier Giafar was 
not deserving of the confidence which he had reposed in him. The 
women of Aaron, the inhabitants of Bagdad, the courtiers, the dervises, 
censured the vizier with bitterness. The caliph loved Giafar ; he would 
not condemn him upon the clamors of the city and the court : he visited 
his empire ; every where he saw the land well cultivated, the country 
smiling, the cottages opulent, the useful arts honored, and youth full of 
gaiety. He visited his fortified cities and sea-ports, he saw numerous 
ships, which threatened the coasts of Africa and of Asia ; he saw warriors 
disciplined and content; these warriors, the seasnen and the peasantry 
exclaimed, " O God, pour thy blessings upon the faithful, by giving them 
a caliph like Aaron and a vizier like Giafar." The caliph, affected by 
these exclamations, enters a mosque, falls upon his knees, and cries out, 
" Great God, I return thee thanks ; thou hast given me a vizier of whom 
my courtiers speak ill and my people speak well." — Saint- Lambert. 



Providence conducts us with so much goodness through the different 
periods of our life, that we '(do not perceive our progress). This loss 
3 takcs place gently : it is imperceptible — it is the shadow of the sun-dial, 
wlmse motion we do not see. If, at twenty years of age, ? we could see 
in a mirror the face we shall have at three-score, we '(should be shocked 
at the contrast) and terrified at our own figure; but it is day by day we 
advance : we are to-day as we were yesterday, and shall be to-morrow as 
we are to-day ; so we go forward without perceiving it, and this is a 
miracle of that Providence whom I adore. — S4%ign£, 

1 NV le srntons? presque pas-2 va doucement— 3 on nous fesait voir- i \ 
la rtiivcrbe. 



FREE EXERCISES. 27? 

THE MAGNIFICENT PROSPECT. 
This beautiful house was on the declivity of a hill, from whence you 
beheld the sea, sometimes clear and smooth as glass, sometimes 'idly irri- 
tated against the rocks on which it broke, ^bellowing and swelling its 
waves like mountains. On another side was seen a river, in which were 
islands bordered with blooming limes, and lofty poplars, which raised their 
proud heads to the very clouds. The several channels which formed those 
islands seemed 3 sporting in the plain. Some rolled their limpid waters 
with rapidity ; some had a peaceful and still course ; others, by long 
windings, ran back again to reascend as it were to their source, and 
seemed not to have power to leave these enchanting borders. At a dis- 
tance were seen hills and mountains which were lost in the clouds, and 
formed by their fantastic figure as delightful a horizon ! (as the eye could 
wish to behold). The neighboring mountains were covered with verdant 
5 (vine-branches) hanging in festoons; the grapes, brighter than purple, 
could not conceal themselves under the leaves, and the vine was over- 
loaded with its fruit. The fig, the olive, the pomegranate, and all other 
trees, overspread the plain, and made it one large garden. — Fenelon. 

1 Follement -2 en pf'mir— 3 se jouer— 4 a souliait pour le plaisir des yeux— 5 
pampie, in— ii vi^ne, f. 



Long hopes 'wear out jo}^, as long illness wears out pain. 
All philosophic systems are only good when one 2 (has no use for 
them) . — Sevigne. 

1 User— 2 n'en a que fuire. 



A GENERAL VIEW OF NATURE. 

With what magnificence does nature 'shine upon earth ! A pure light, 
extending from east to west, gilds successively the two hemispheres of 
this globe ; an element transparent and light surrounds it ; a gentle fecun- 
dating heat animates, 2 gives being to the seeds of life ; salubrious running 
streams contribute to their preservation and growth ; eminences diversified 
over the level land arrest the vapors of the air, make these springs inex- 
haustible and always new ; immense cavities, made to receive them, divide 
the continents. The extent of the sea is as great as that of the earth ; it 
is not a cold, barren element ; it is a new empire, as rich, as populous as 
the first. The finger of God has marked their boundaries. 

The earth, rising above the level of the sea, s is secure from its irrup- 
tions ; its surface, enamelled with flowers, adorned with ever-springing 
verdure, peopled with thousands and thousands of species of different ani- 
mals, is a place of rest, a delightful abode, where man, placed in order to 
second nature, presides over all beings. The only one among them all 
capable of knowing and worthy of admiring, God has made him spectator 
of the universe and a witness of his wonders. The divine spark with 
which he is animated enables him to participate in the divine mysteries; 
it is by this light that he thinks and reflects ; by it he sees and reads in 
the book of the universe as in a copy of the Deity. 

Nature is the exterior throne of the divine Majesty ; the man who con- 
templates, who studies it, rises by degrees to the interior throne of Omni- 
potence. Made to adore the Creator, the vassal of Heaven, sovereign of 

1 Ne brille telle pas 2 faire eclore— 3 a I'abri de 

2A 



278 



FREE EXERCISES. 



the earth, lie ennobles, peoples, enriches it ; he establishes among living 
beings order, subordination, harmony; he embellishes nature herself; he 
cultivates, extends, and polishes it; lops oil the thistle and the briar, and 
multiplies the grape and the rose. — Bvffon. 



ANOTHER GENERAL VIEW OF NATURE. 

Trees, shrubs, and plants are the ornaments and 'clothing of the earth 
Nothing is so 2 melancholy as the prospect of a country naked and bare, 
exhibiting to the eye nothing but stones, mud, and sand. But, vivified 
by nature, and ^clad in its nuptial robe, amidst the course of streams and 
the singing of birds, the earth presents to man, in the harmony of the 
three kingdoms, a spectacle full of life, of interest and charms — the only 
spectacle in the world of which his eyes and heart are never "weary. 

The more a 6 (contemplative man's soul is fraught with sensibility) the 
more he yields to the ecstasies which this harmony produces in him. A 
soft and deep melancholy then takes possession of his senses, and in an 
intoxication of delight he loses himself in the immensity of that beautiful 
system with which he feels himself identified. Then every particular 
object escapes him : he sees and feels nothing but in the whole. Some 
circumstance must contract his ideas, and circumscribe his imagination, 
7 before he can observe by parcels that universe which he was endea- 
voring to embrace. — /. J. Rousseau. 



1 Vetement— 2 triste— 3 pele— 4 revetu— 5 se lasser— 6 contemplateur a Tame 
sensible— 7 pour qu'il. 



CULTIVATED NATURE. 
How beautiful is cultivated nature ! by the labors of man, how brilliant 
it is, and how pompously adorned ! He himself is its chief ornament, its 
noblest part; by multiplying himself, he multiplies the most precious 
germ ; she also seems to multiply with him : by his art he '(brings forth 
to view) all that she 2 concealed in her bosom. How many unknown 
treasures ! What new riches ! Flowers, fruits, seeds, brought to perfec- 
tion, multiplied to infinity ; the useful species of animals transported, 
propagated, increased without number; the noxious species reduced, con 
fined, banished; gold — and iron, more necessary than gold — extracted 
from the bowels of the earth ; torrents ? confined ; rivers directed, 'con- 
tracted ; the sea itself subjected, 'explored, crossed from one hemisphere 
to the other ; the earth accessible in every part, and every where rendered 
equally cheerful and fruitful ; in the vallies. delightful meadows ; in the 
plains, rich pastures and still richer harvests ; hills covered with vines 
and fruits; their summits crowned with useful trees and young forests; 
deserts changed into cities inhabited by an immense population, which, 
continually circulating, spreads itself from these centres to their extremi- 
ties; roads opened and frequented; communications established every 
wnere, as so many witnesses of the strength and union of society; a 
thousand other monuments of power and glory sufficiently demonstrate 
that man, possessing dominion over the earth, has changed, renewed 
the whole of its surface, and that, at all times, he shares the empire 
of it with nature. 

< Mettre au Jour— 2 receler— 3 coutenu— A rcsserre->5 rcconnu 



FREE EXERCISES. 279 

THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 

However, man only reigns by right of conquest ; he rather enjoys than 
possesses, and he can preserve only by means of continual labor. If this 
ceases, every thing droops, every thing declines, every thing changes, and 
again 'returns under the hand of nature ; she reassumes her rights, erases 
the work of man, covers with dust and moss his most pompous monu- 
ments, destroys them in time, and leaves him nothing but the regret of 
having lost through his fault what his ancestors had conquered by their 
tabors. Those times in which man loses his dominion, those 2 barbarous 
ages during which every thing is seen to perish, are always preceded by 
war, and accompanied by scarcity and depopulation. Man, who can do 
nothing but by number, who is strong only by union, who can be happy 
only by peace, is mad enough to arm himself for his misery, and to fight 
for his ruin. Impelled by an insatiable thirst of having, blinded by ambi- 
tion still more insatiable, he renounces all the feelings of humanity, turns 
all his strength against himself, seeks mutual destruction, ? actually destroys 
himself, and after these periods of blood and carnage, when the smoke of 
glory has vanished, he contemplates with a sad eye the earth wasted, the 
arts buried, nations scattered, the people weakened, his own happiness 
ruined, and his real power annihilated. — Buffon. 

Rentrer— 2 de barbarie— 3 en effefc. 



INVOCATION TO THE GOD OF NATURE. 

Almighty God ! whose presence alone supports nature, and maintains 
the harmony of the laws of the universe : Thou who, from the immove- 
able throne of the empyrean, seest the celestial spheres roll under thy feet 
without shock or confusion : who, from the bosom of repose, reprodurest 
every moment their immense movements, and alone governest in profound 
peace that infinite number of heavens and worlds ; restore, restore at 
length tranquillity to the agitated earth ! let it be silent at thy voice ; let 
discord and war cease their proud clamors ! God of goodness ! author 
of all beings! thy paternal eye Hakes in all the objects of the creation ; 
but man is thy chosen being ; thou hast -illumined his soul with a ray 
of thy immortal light : complete the measure of thy kindness by pene- 
trating his heart with a ray of thy love : this divine sentiment, diffusing 
itself every where, will reconcile opposite natures ; man will no longer 
dread the sight of man ; his hand will no longer wield the murderous 
s steel ; the devouring flames of war will no longer 1 dry up the sources of 
population : the human species, now weakened, mutilated, mowed down 
in the blossom, 5 wili spring anew, and multiply without number; nature, 
overwhelmed under the weight of 6 scourges, will soon reassume with a 
new life its former fruitfulness ; and we, beneficent God, will second it, 
we will cultivate it, we will contemplate it incessantly, that we may every 
moment offer thee a new tribute of gratitude and admiration. — Buffon. 

I Kmbrasser— 2 Cclairer— 3 le fer armer sa main— 4 tarir— 5 gem.er de nouveau 

— 6 fleau. 



Happy they who *are disgusted wi^i turbulent pleasures, and know 
2 how to be contented with the sweets of an innocent life ! Happy *»hey 

1 Se degoutcr de— 2 se contenter de. 



280 TRLE EXERCISES. 

who delight 'in being instructed, and who "take a pleasure in storing their 
minds with knowledge ! Wherever adverse fortune may throw them, 
they always carry entertainment with them ; and the disquiet which 
preys upon ethers, even in the midst of pleasures, is unknown to those 
who can employ themselves in reading. Happy they who love to read, 
and are not like me deprived of the ability. As these thoughts were 
passing in my mind, I went into a gloomy forest, where I Immediately 
perceived an old man, holding a book in his hand. The forehead of this 
sage was broad, bald, and a little wrinkled : a white beard hung down to 
his girdle ; his stature was tall and majestic ; his complexion still fresh 
and ruddy ; his eyes lively and piercing ; his voice sweet ; his words plain 
and charming. I never saw so venerable an old man. He was a priest 
of Apollo, and Officiated in a marble temple, which the kings of Egypt 
had dedicated to that god in this forest. The book which he held in his 
hand was a collection of hymns in honor of the gods. He accosted me 
in a friendly manner, and we discoursed together. He related things 
past so well, that they seemed present; and yet with such brevity, that 
his account never tired me. He foresaw the future by his 
knowledge, which made him know men, and the designs of which they 
are capable. With all this wisdom, he was cheerful and complaisant, 
and the sprightliest youth has not so many graces as this man had at so 
advanced an age. He accordingly loved young men when they were 
teachable, and had a taste for study and virtue. — Fenelon 

3 S'instruiie— 4 se plaire— 5 servir— 6 docile. 



THOUGHTS ON POETRY. 

Wherever I went, I found that poetry was considered as the '(highest 
teaming), and regarded with a veneration 2 (somewhat approaching to) that 
which men would pay to angelic nature. 

It yet fills me with wonder that, in almost all countries, the most, an- 
cient poets are considered as the best; whether "(it be that) every kind 
of knowledge is an acquisition gradually attained, and poetry is a gift 
conferred at once ; or that the first poetry of every notion surprised them 
as a novelty, and retained the credit by consent which it received by acci- 
dent at first; or whether, as the '^province of poetry is to describe nature 
and passion, which are always the same, the first writers "(took possession) 
of '(the most striking objects for description), and "(the most probable 
.occurrences for fiction), and left nothing to those that followed them but 
^transcriptions of the same events, and 'new combinations of the same 
images. Whatever be the reason, it is commonly observed that the 
early writers are in possession of nature, and their lp fol lowers of art ; 
that the first excel in strength and invention, and the latter in elegance 
and refinement. 

I was desirous to add my name to this illustrious "fraternity. I read 

all the poets of Persia and Arabia, and was able to repeat by memory (he 

volumes that are suspended in the mosque at Mecca. But I soon found 

that no man was ever great by imitation. My desire of '-excellence 

-impelled me "to transfer my attention to nature and to 'life. Nature 

j Partiie la plus sublime de la litterajure— 9 qui tenoit tie— 3celn vjenne de c 
—4 hut— 5 e'emparer— 6 objets qui fourinssftient lea plus richer descriptions— 7 < v v m«»- 
mens qui pretaient 1<* plus a la fiction— 8 <!<> copier— 9 faire de nouvellea cbmmnai 
■ons— 10 Buccesseurs— 11 famille— 12 exceller— 13 engager— 14 reporter. ..tur— 15 ta- 
bleau de la vie. 



FREE EXERCISES. 281 

was to be my subject, and men to be my auditors : I could never describe 
what I had not seen; I could not hope !: (to move those with delight or 
terror) whose interests and opinions I did not '-"understand. 

1G rcveiller Ie plaisir oil la terreur dans ceux— 17 ne connaitre ni. 



THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 

Being now resolved to be a poet, I saw every thing ,8 (with a new 
purpose) ; my sphere of attention was suddenly magnified : no kind of 
knowledge 19 (was to be overlooked). I ranged mountains and deserts 
2 for images and resemblances, and 21 (pictured upon my mind) every 
tree of the forest and flower of the valley. I observed with equal care the 
crags of the rock and the pinnacles of the palace. Sometimes I wandered 
along the mazes of the rivulet, and sometimes watched the changes ot the 
summer clouds. To a poet nothing can be useless. Whatever is beau- 
tiful and whatever is dreadful must be familiar to his imagination : he 
must r2 (be conversant) with all that 2; (is awfully vast or elegantly little). 
The plants of the garden, the animals of the wood, the minerals of the 
earth, and the meteors of the sky. must all concur to store his mind with 
inexhaustible variety . for every idea is useful for the 24 (enforcement or 
decoration) of moral or religious truth ; and he who knows most will 
have most 25 power of diversifying his 26 scenes, and gratifying his reader 
with remote allusions and unexpected instruction. 

All the appearances of nature 2r I was therefore careful to study, and 
every country which I have surveyed has contributed something to my 
poetical powers. 

In so wide a survey, interrupted the prince, you must surely have left 
much unobserved. I have lived till now within the circuit of these 
mountains, and yet cannot walk abroad without the sight of something 
which I had never beheld before or never 2? heeded. 

J^So'i? -an nouveau jour— 19 je ne devaisnea:!i<rer— 20 pour recueillir— 21 pen^trer 
nion esprit <!u tableau dv— -22 bien connaitre— 23 etonne par sa grandeur ou charme 
par son elegante petitesse— 24 fV.rtirier. ou embellir— 25 ressources pour— 213 tableau 
-27 etudier avec soin toutes les, &cc— 28 remarquer. 



THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 

The business of a poet, said Imlac, is to examine, not the individual, 
Dut the species; to remark general properties and 2p (large appearances) : 
he does not number the streaks of the tulip or describe the different shades 
in the verdure of the forest. He is to exhibit, in his portraits of nature, 
h prominent and striking features as recal the original to every mind; 
and must neglect 3, the minuter discriminations, which one may have 
remarked and another neglected, 32 for those characteristics which ; - 3 are 
alike obvious to :)4 vigilance and i5 carelessness. 

But the knowledge of nature is only :,6 half the task of a poet: he must 
be acquainted likewise with 3 all the modes of life. His character requires 
that he ^estimate the happiness and misery of every condition ■ observe 
the power of all the passions, in all their combinations, and y9 trace the 

29 Considerer les objets en grand— 30 de ces traits saillans et frappans qui, <fec— 
31 ces petits details— 32 pour s'appliquer a caractcriser, &c. &x.— 33 frappe <gale- 
ment— 34 ceil observateur— 35 esprit insouciant— 36 the half of— 37 tous les difHreas 
aspects— 38 apprecier— 39 suivre les vicissitudes. 

2 a2 



282 FREE EXERCISES. 

changes of the human mind, as they are modified by various institutions 
and accidental influences of climate or custom, from the sprightliness of 
infancy to the despondence of decrepitude. He must 4c divest himself of 
the prejudices of his age or country ; he must consider 4 'right and wrong 
42 in their abstracted and invariable state ; he must disregard present laws 
and opinions, and rise to general and transcendent truths, which will 
always be the same; he must therefore 4S (content himself with the slow 
progress of his name), contemn the applause of his own time, and commit 
his claims to the justice of posterity. He must write as the interpreter 
of nature and the legislator of mankind, and consider himself as 4A pre- 
siding over the thoughts and manners of future generations, as a being 
superior to time and place. 

His labor is not yet at an end : he must know many languages and 
many sciences ; and, that his style may be worthy of his thoughts, he 
must, by incessant practice, familiarize himself to every delicacy of speech 
and grace of harmony. — S. Johnson. 

40 Se depouiller — 41 ce qui est juste ou injuste — 42 abstraction faite de ces divers 
prejuges— 43 se resigner a voir son nom percer ditlicilement— 44 influer. 



First follow nature, and your judgment frame 

By her just standard, which is still the same : 

Unerring nature, still divinely bright, 

One clear, unchanged, and universal light, 

Life, force, and beauty must to all impart ; l 

At once the source, and end, and test of art. 2 

Art, from that fund, its just supply provides ; 

Works without show, and without pomp presides ; 

In some fair body thus th' informing soul, 

With spirit feeds, with vigor fills the whole ; 

Each motion guides, and every nerve sustains 

Itself unseen, but in th' effect remains. 3 

Some, to whom Heav'n in wit has been profuse, 

Want as much more to turn it to its use : 

For wit and judgment often are at strife, 

Though meant each other's aid, like man and wife. 4 

'Tis more to guide than spur the muse's steed, 

Restrain his fury than provoke his speed : 5 

The winged courser, like a gen'rous horse, 

Shows most true mettle when you check its course.' 1 — Pope* 

1. Light, clear, immutable, and universal nature, which nevr errs, and shines 
always with a divine splendor, must impart to all she does life, force, and beauty. 

2. She is at once the source, &c. 

3. So in a fair body, unseed itself, but always sensible by its effects the soul 
continually acting, feeds the whole with spirit, fills it with vigor, guides every 
motion of it, and sustains every nerve. 

4. Some to whom Heaven has given wit in profusion, want as much yet to know 
the use they ought to make of it ; for wit and judgment, though made, like man 
and wife, to aid each other, are often in opposition. 

o. It is more diilicult to guide than spur the courser of the muses, and to restrain 
its ardor than provoke its impetuosity. 

C. The winged courser is like a generous horse : the more we strive to stop it in 
its rapid course, the more it shows unconquerable vigor 



283 ) 



EXAMPLES OF PHRASES 



PRINCIPAL DIFFICULTIES OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE 



Sur les Collectifs Partitifs. 
lt\ pi apart des fruits verts sont d'un gout 

aust re, 
La plupart des gens ne se conduiseat que 

par interet, 
La phipart du monde se trompe, 
D ok prise par philosophic les honneurs 

que la plupart du monde recherche, 
II devait me fournir tant d*arbres; mais 

j'en ai rejete la moitie qui ne valait 

rieri. 
Un grand nombre de spectateurs ajoutait 

a la beaute du spectacle, 
Toute sorte de livres ne. sont pas egale- 

ment bons, 
Beaucoupde personnes se sont presentees, 
Bien des personnes se font des principes a 

leur fantasie, 



On the Collective Partitives. 

The greater part of green fruit is of a 

harsh taste. 
Most people are guided only by interest. 

The greater part of mankind live in error 
As a true philosopher, he despises those 

honors which mankind hi general cou?t. 
He was to furnish, me so many trees, but 

I refused half of them, which were good 

for nothing. 
A considerable number of spectators added 

to the splendor of the scene. 
Every kind of books are not equally good. 

Many people presented themselves. 
Many persons form principles to them- 
selves, according to their fancy. 



Sur quelques Verbs q\Con ne peut 
conjuguer avec Avoir sans faire 
des barbarismes. 

II lui est echu une succession du chef de 

sa femme, 
II est bien dechu de son credit, 
Ne sommes-nous pas convenus du prix? 
N'est-il pas intervenu dans cette affaire, 

co mine il l'avait promis ? 
II est stirvenu a Timproviste, 
La neige, qui est tombee ce matin, a 

adouci le temps, 
Que de neige il est tombe ce matin! 
Toutes les dents lui sont tombees, 
Ce propos n'est pas tombe a terre, 
Etes-vous alle voir votre ami? 
lis sont arrives a midi et sont repartis de 

suite, 
Oes fleurs sont a peine ecloses, 
Us est ne de parens vertueux, qui n'ont 

rien neglige pour son education, 
Mademoiselle votre sceur est-elle rentree ? 
Madame votre mere n'est-elle pas encore 

venue? 



On some Verbs which cannot be con- 
jugated with the verb Avoir with 
out making barbarous phrases. 

An estate fell to him in right of his wife. 

He has lost much of his credit. 

Have we not agreed about the price? 

Did he not interfere in that affair as he 
had promised? 

He came up unawares. 

The snow which fell this morning hah 
softened the weather. 

How much snow has fallen this morning I 

All his teeth have fallen out. 

That remark was Wot allowed to escape. 

Have you been to see your friend? 

They arrived at noon, and set out again 
immediately. 

These flowers are scarcely blown. 

He was born of virtuous parents, who be- 
stowed on him the best education. 

Is your sister returned? 

Is not your mother come yet? 



Sur les JMots de Quantite. 

II a beaucoup d'esprit, mais encore plus 

d'amour propre. 
II a assez d'ar:_ r ent pour ses menus plaisirs, 
T y avait bien du monde a l'Opra, 
II y avait hier au Pare je ne sais combien 

ile L r ens, 
11 boit autant d'eau que de vin, 
II a tant d'amis qu'il ne manquera de 

rien, 
Personne n'y a plus d'interet que lui, 
Il n'a pas plus d'esprit qu'il n'en faut, 
Trop de loisir perd souvent la jeunesse, 

Ty ai bien moins d'interet que vous, 



On words of Quantity. 

He has a great deal of sense, but still 

more vanity. 
He has sufficient pocket-money. [Opera. 
There icerc a prea* many people at the 
There were I do not know how many people 

in the Park yesterday. 
He drinks as much water as irinc. 
He has so many friends that he will want 

for nothing. 
Nobody has more interest there than he 
He is not overburdened with sense. 
Too much leisure time is frequently the 

destruction of youth. 
I am much less concerned in it than you 



284 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



Sur les Pronoms Personnels. 

Sors et te retire, 

Cours vite et ne t'amuse point, 

1.1 dit aujourd'hui une chose et demain il 

se drmentira, 
II s'est d menti lui-m^me, 
La jeunesse est naturellement emportee ; 

e!le a besoin de quelque entrave qui la 

retienne, 
II ne pent voir personne dans la prosperity 

sans lui porter envie, 
Ce que vous me dites est une enigme pour 

nidi, 
Cast un homme extreme en tout ; il aime 

et il hait avec fureur, 

£i vous n'y avez jamais ete, je vous y 

m nerai, 
Je l'ai connu doux et modeste; il s'est 

fcien irate dans le commerce de ses nou- 

veaux amis, 
Elle n'est pas encore revenue du saisisse- 

ment, que lui causa cette nouvelle. 

II menace de l'exterminer, lui et toute sa 

race. 
Si vous n'avez que faire dc ce livre-la, 

protez-le-moi, 
Je lui avais envoye un diamant, il l'a 

refuse, je le lui ai renvoye, 
II apprend facilement et oublie de meme, 
Je lui pardon ne facilement d'avoir voulu 

se faire auteur ; mais je ne saurais lui 

pardon ner toutes les puerilitesdont il a 

farci son livre, 
Je me plains a vous de vous-m6me, 
Si vous ne voulez pas etre pour lui, au 

moins ne soyez pas contre, 
duand sera-ce que vous viendrez nous 

voir? 



On the Personal Pronouns. 

Go out and retire, withdraw. 

Go quick, and do vot loiter. 

He advances a thing today, and will con- 
tradict himself to-morrow. 

lie has contradicted himself. 

Youth is naturally hasty, it needs some 
check to restrain it. 

He can see the prosperity of nobody with 

out envying them. 
What you tell mc is a perfect riddle to me. 

He is a man that carries every thing to 
excess ; he is alike violent in his love 
and in his hatred. 

If you have never been there, I will take 
you. 

I knew him when he was mild and modest ; 
he has been much corrupted by asso- 
ciating with his new acquaintances. 

She is not yet recovered from the con- 
sternation into which that intelligence 
threw her. 

He threatens to exterminate him and all 
his family. 

If you have done with this book, lend it 
me. 

I had sent him a diamond, and he refused 
it, but I sent him it back again. 

He learns easily and forgets the same. 

lean easily pardon him for having at- 
tempted to turn author ; but I cannot 
pardon him all the absurdities with 
which he has filled his book. 

I complain to you of yourself '. 

If you will not be for him, at least do not 
be against him. 

When will you come to see us? 



Sur soi, lui, soi-meme, et lui-meme. 

Q.uand on a pour soi le temoignage de sa 

conscience, on est bien fort, 
L'estime de toute la terre ne sert de rien 

a u n homme qui n'a pas le temoignage 

de sa conscience pour lui, 
Un homme fait mi lie fautes, parce qu'il 

ne fait point de reflexions sur lui, 

On fait mille fautes, quand on ne fait 

aurune r flexion sur soi, 
II aime mieux dire du mal de lui, que de 

n'rn point parler, 
L l 6go'iBte aimera mieux dire du mal de 

soi, que de n'en point parler, 

On a souvent besoin d'un plus petit que 

soi, 
fjn prince a souvent besoin de beaucoup 

de ir«'iis plus petite que lui, 
C'est un bon inoyen dc sVp-vor soi-numm, 

one d'exalter ses pareils; et un homme 

adroit B'eleve ainsi lui>meme, 



On soi, lui, soi-meme, and Im-meme. 

The approbation ofaurconscicncc imparts 
great courage. 

The good opinion of the whole world is of 
no use to a man who has not the appro- 
bation of his own conscience. 

A man commits a thousand faults lirrause 
he does not reflect on future conse- 
quences. 

We commit a thousand faults ichen we 
neglect to reflect on ourselves. 

He had rather speak ill of himself than 
not speak of himself ai all 

The egotist prefers speaking ill of himself 
rather than not be the subject of his own 
conversation. 

We frequently want the assistance of one 
who is below ours, 

A prince frequently needs the assistance 
of ninny persons inferior to himself. 

It is an excellent method of a citing our- 
si Iris to emit our equals, and a man of 
address by this means exalts himself. 



Sur les Pronoms Iielatifs. 

Il n'y a nen de si capable dYif miner le 
cournuf, quo I'oieiveU et les dclices, 

II faut emprclier que la division, qui eat 
dans cette famille, n'eclate. 



On the Relative Pronouns. 

Nothing is so calculated to enervate the 
mind as idleness and pleasure. 

The dissension in that family must be 
prevented f rum becoming public. 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



285 



fl'v a biPM des evenemena que Ton suppose 

it les entr'actes, 
Je le trouvai qui s'liabillait, 

Qui le tirera de Del embarras, le tirera 
d'utie gr a nde mis re, 

Ceu.v-l t sont veritablement heureux, qui 
croient I'etre, 

II n'y a que la vertu, qui puisse rendre un 

homme heureux en cette vie, 
II n'y a regie, si generate, qui n'ait son 

exception, 
C'est un orateur qui se possede et qui ne 

se trouble jamais, 
II n'y a pas dans le crEiir humam de repli 

qup Dieu ne connaisse, 
On na trouve que quelques fragmens du 

grand ouvrage qu'il avait promis. 
La faute, que vous avez faite. est plus 

importante que vous ne pensez. 
Les premieres d-marches qu'on fait dans 

le monde, ont beaucoup d'influence sur 

le reste de la vie, 
Otte farce est une des plus risibles qu'on 

ait encore vues, 
^massez-vous des tresors que les vers et 

la rouille ne puissent point guter, et que 

les voleurs ne puissent point derober, 
L'incertitude, ou nous somnies de ce qui 

doit arriver. fait que nous ne saurions 

prendre des mesures justes, 
Je m'etonne qu*il ne voie pas le danger 

ou il est, 
L'homme dont vous parlez, n'est plus ici, 

Celui de qui je tiens cette nouvelle ne 

vous est pas connu, 
Celui a qui ce beau chateau appartient 

ne l'habite presque jamais, 
Ce sont des evenemens auxquels il faut 

bien se soumettre, 
C'est ce a quoi vous ne pensez guere, 



There are many events in a piece ichich 

are supposed io happen between the acts 
I found him dressing. 
Whoerer extricates kirn from this difficulty 

trill relieve him from much distress. 
Those are realty happy who think them- 
selves so. 
Virtue alone can render a man happy in 

this life 
There is no rule so general but it admits 

of exceptions. 
He is an orator icho is master of himself \ 

and who is never embarrassed. 
There is no recess of the human heart but 

God perceives it. 
Only some fragments of the great work 

he had promised have been found. 
The error yon have committed is of more 

consequence than you imagine. 
The first steps we take on entering the 

world have considerable influence on the 

rest of our lives. 
T/iat farce is one of the most truly comic 

that ever icas seen. 
Lay up for yourselves treasures which 

neither moth nor rust can corrupt, and 

which thieves cannot steal. 
Our uncertainty as to what shall happen 

makes us incapable of properly pro 

viding against it. 
I am astonished he does not see the danger 

he is in. 
The man whom* you are speaking of is not 

here now. 
The person from whom I received the in- 
telligence is not known to you. 
The proprietor of that beautiful scat sel 

dom resides there. 
These are events to which we must submit 

It is what you seldom think of. 



Suv les Pr ononis Demonstratifs. 
Ne point reconnaitre la divinite, c'est 

renoncer a toutes les lumitres de la 

raison. 
Mentir, c'est m priser Dieu et craindre 

les hommes, 
II y a des e pi demies morales, et ce sont 

les plus damrereuses, 
Je crois que ce que vous dites est bien 

eloign t de ce que vous pensez, 
Les hommes n'aiment ordinairement que 

ceux qui les flattent, 
Celui qui persuade a un autre de faire un 

crime, n'est guere moins coupable que 

celui qui le commet, 
Penser ainsi, c'est s'aveugler soi-meme, 

Ce qu'on rapporte de lui est inconcevable, 

Ce qui m'afihge, c'est de voir le triomphe 

du crime, 
Conmiis^'/.-vous la jeune Emilie ? C'est 

une enfant dont tout le monde dit du 

bien, 
Inntez en tout votre amie: elle est douce, 

appliquee, honnete et coinpatissante, 



On the Demonstrative Pronouns. 

Not to acknowledge the divinity is totally 
to renounce the light of reason. 

To lie is to despise God and to fear yuan. 

There are moral contagious disorders, 
and these are the inost dangerous. 

What you advance is, I think, icidcly dif- 
ferent from your sentiments. 

Men in general love only those who flatter 
them. 

He who persuades another to the commis- 
sion of a crime is hardly less guilty 
than he who commits it. 

To think in this manner is to be wilfully 
blind. 

The reports concerning him are hardly 
conceivable. 

What distresses me is to see guilt tri- 
umphant. 

Do you know little Emily ? She is a child 
of whom every body speaks well. 

Imitate your friend in every thing; shr 
is mild, assiduous^ polite, and cempas 
sionate. 



286 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



Sur le verbe Avoir employe a rim- On the verb Avoir, to have, employed 



personnel. 

Remarque. — Qiiand le verbe avoir s'em- 
ploie a 1'impersonnel, e'est dans le sens 
d'etre, et alors il se joint toujours*avec y. 
II y a un an que je ne vous ai vu, 
Y a-t-il des nouvelles? 
Nun, il n'y en a pas.du moins que je sache, 



impersonally. 

When thevcrb avoir is used impersonally 
it signifies etre, to be, and in tins sense it 
is always accompanied by the adcerb y. 
It is a ticelccmonth since I saw you. 
Is there any news? 
JVo, there is none, at least that I know. 



N'y a-t-il pas cinquante-quatre milles de Is it, not fifty-four miles from London to 



Londres a Brighton ? 
II y avait deja beaucoup de monde lorsque 

j'arrivai, 
II n'y avait hier ^presque personne au 

pare, 
Y avait-il de grands debats? 
N'y avait-il pas beaucoup de curieux? 
Je I'avais vu il y avait a peine vingt- 

quatre heures, 



Brighton ? 
There were already a great many people 

when I arrived. 
There was hardly any body in the park 

yesterday. 
Were there violent debates ? 
Were there not many curious people? 
I had seen him scarcely four -and- twenty 

hours before. 



II n'y avait pas deux jours qu'il avait He had dined with me not two days before. 
din 



i chez moi. 
Y avait-il si long-tempsque vous ne 1'aviez 
II y eut hier unbal chezM. un tel. [vu? 
II n'y eut pas hierde spectacle. 
Y eut-il beaucoup de confusion et de de 

sordre ? 
N'y eut-il pas un beau feu d'artifice? 
II y a eu aujourd'hui une foule immense a 

la promenade, 
II n'y a pas eu de bal, comme on l'avait 

annonce, 
Est-il vrai qu'il y a eu un duel ? 
N'y a-t-il pas eu dans sa conduite un peu 

trop d'emportement? 



Was it so long since you had seen him. 
There was yesterday a ball at Mr. As. 
There was no play yesterday. 
Was there a great deal of confusion and 

disorder ? 
Were there not handsome fireworks? 
There was an immense crowd to-day at 

the public walks. 
There has not been any ball, as had been 

mentioned. 
Is it true that there has been a duel? 
Was there not rather too much hastiness 

in his behaviour ? 



Q,uand il y eut eu une explication, les After there had been an explanation, 



esprits se calmerent, 
N'y avait-il pas eu un plus grand nombre 

de spectateurs? 
II y aura demain un simulacre de combat 

naval, 
II n'y aura aucun de vous, 

Y aura-t-il une bonne recoltecette annee? 
N'y aura-t-il pas quelqu'un de votre fa- 
mine? 

A coup sur il y aura eu bien du desordre, 
Sur cent personnes, il n'y en aura pas eu 
dix de satisfaites, 

Y aura-t-il eu un bon soupe? 

N'y aura-t il pas eu demecontens? 

II y aurait de la malhonnetete dans cepro- 

II n'y aurait pas irrand mal a cela. [cede. 

Y aurait-il quelqu'un assez hardi pour 
I'attaquer? 

N'y au'.ait-il pas quelqu'un assez charita- 
ble pour Pavertir de ce qu'on dif de lui ? 
Il y aurait eu de rimprudence a cela. 

II n'y aurait pas eu taut de mesintelli- 

gence, si Ton m'en avait cru. 
[I n'y aurait pas eu dix personnes, 

Y aurait-il eu de I'inconvenient? 



tranquillity was restored. 

Was there not a greater number of spec- 
tators 1 

To-morrow there will be the representation 
of a sea-fight. 

There will be none of you. 

Will there be a good harvest this year? 

Will not there be some of your family ? 
[order. 

There must certainly have been much dis- 

Out of a hundred persons, there icill not 
hare been ten satisfied. 

Will there have been a good supper ? 

Will there not hare been some dissatisfied ? 

Such a step would hare been uugenteel. 

There tcould be no great harm in that. 

Would there be any one bold enough to 
attack him ? 

Would there be nobody kind cnouph tr 
acquaint him with what is said of him ? 

There would hare been some imprudence 
in that. 

There would not have been so great a mis- 
understanding had I been believed. 

There would not have hern ten persons. 

Would there have been any inconve- 
nience ? 

Would there not have been some avians 
person to thwart him in his designs? 



N'y aurait il pas eu de jaloux pour le 

traverser dans ses projets ? 

Je ne croia pas qu'il y ait un spectacle I do not think there can be a more superb 

plus majrnifique, 'arte. 

Je riesirerais qu'il yefit moins de faussete I wish >!;crc were less duplicity in the 

lailfl le commerce de la vie, concerns of fife 

Je n'ai pas on'i dire qu'il y ait eu hier des I hare net heard that there was any news 

nouvelles 'In continent, from the continent yesferda>j. 

Aunez-VOUS cru qu'il y eut eu tant de per- Could you have thought ts many prisons 

iniinei compromises dans ceue affaire? icould have been cr.poscdin that ajfairi 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



2R7 



Phrases Diverses. 
8a vie. ses actions, ses paroles, son air 

.nPine et sa demarche, tout preclie, tout 

4din> en lui, 
On craignait qu'il n'arrivat quelque de- 

sordre dans I'assemblee, mais toutes 

choses s'y pass-rent fort doucement, 
La vigne et le lierre s'entortillent autour 

des ormes, 
On ne disconvient point qu'il ne soit 

brave, mais il est un peu trop fanfaron, 
Le cadet est riche, mais Paine Test encore 

davantage, 
Le ciel est couvert de nuages, et 1'orage 

est prct a fondre, 
Apr. s qu'il eut franchi les Alpes avoc ses 

troupes, il entra en Italie, 
La frugality rend les corps plus sains et 

plus robustes, 
Ce discours est peut-ctre un des plus 

beaux morceaux d'eloquence, qu'il y 

ait jamais eu, 
(7est un bomme qui aime la liberte ; il ne 

se gene pour qui que ce soit, 
II est plus haut que moi de deux doigts, 
lrez-vous vous exposer a la barbarie et a 

1'inhospitalite de ces peoples? 

A la longue, les erreurs disparaissent, et 

la verite surnage, 
3i vous le prenez avec moi sur ce ton de 

fierte, je serai aussi fier que vous, 
C'est un homme rigide, qui ne pardonne 

rien, ni aux autres ui a lui-meme, 
Les uns montent, les autres descendent, 

ainsi va la roue de la fortune, 
Je ne vois rien de solide dans tout ce que 

vous me proposez, 
L'art n'a jamais rien produit de plus beau, 
Lequel est-ce des deux qui a tort ? 
On aime quelquefbis la trahison, mais on 

hait toujours les traitres, 



Promiscuous Phrases. 

His life, his actions, his very look and 
deportment, every thing in him instructs 

and edifies. 
It was apprehended some disorder would 

take place in the assembly, hut every 

thing went off very quietly. 
The vine and ivy twist round the elms. 

They do not deny that he is brave, but he 

boasts rather too much 
The youngest is rich, but the eldest is still 

more so* 
The sky is covered with clouds, and tht 

storm is preparing to burst. 
After having crossed the Alps with his 

troops, he entered Italy. 
Temperance imparts an increase of health 

and strength to the body. 
This speech is perhaps one cf the finest 

pieces of eloquence that was ever pro- 
nounced. 
He is a man fond of liberty, he icill be 

restrained by nobody. 
He is taller than I by two inches. 
Will you go and expose yourself to the 

barbarity and inhospitality of those 

nations? 
In time errors vanish and truth survives 

If you treat me with that haughtiness, I 

can be, as haughty as you. 
He is a strange character, who pardons 

nothing, either in hirnselfor others. 
Some mount, others descend ; thus goes 

the wheel of fortune. 
I see nothing certain in all you propose 

to me. 
It is one of the finest productions of art. 
Which of the two is in the wrong? 
We sometimes love the treason, but we 

always hate the traitor. 



Continuation. 

L'elephant se sert de sa trompe pour pren- 
dre et pour enlever tout ce qu'il veut, 
Plus j'examine cette personne, plus je 

crois I' a voir vue quelque part, 
La nuit vint, de facon que je fus contraint 

de me retirer, 
II faut vivre de facon qu'on ne fasse tort 

a personne, 
Elle sut qu'on attaquait son mari et 

courut aussitot tout eperdue pour le 

secourir, 
Je trouvai ses parens tout eplorcs, 
Cet arbre pousse ses branches toutes 

droites, 
J'en ai encore la memoire toute fraiche, 
II a voulu faire voir par cet essai qu'il 

pouvait reussir en quelque chose de 

plus grand, 
II fut blesse au front et mourut de cette 

blessure, 
Ces cheyaux prirent le mors aux dents et 

enirainerent le carrosse, 
C'est un homme qui compose sans chaleur 

ni imagination; tout ce qu'il ecrit est 

froid et plat, 
Ce b:\timent a plus de profondeur que de 

largeur, 



Continuation. 

The elephant makes use of his trunk la 

take and lift whatever he pleases. 
The more I look at that person, the moie 

think I have seen him{or her) somewhere 
Night came on, so that I was obliged U 

retire. 
We must live in such a manner as U 

injure nobody. 
She kneio her husband was attacked, and, 

in a state of distraction, ran to his 

assistance. 
I found his relations all in tears. 
The branches of that tree grow quite 

straight. 
It is still quite fresh in my memory. 
He wished to show, by that attempt, that 

he could succeed in an enterprise of 

more consequence. 
He ions voundedin the forshcad, and died 

of this loound. 
Those horses ran away with the carriage. 

He is a man who writes without the lca*t 
warmth or animation : all his produc- 
tions are cold and insipid. 

That building is deeper than it is broad 



2S8 



PHRASE/ ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



Cet hoinrne est nn prodige de savoir, de 

science, de valeur, d'esprit, et de me- 

moire, 
U est attache a run et a 1'autre, mais plus 

a Tun qu'a I'autfe, 
lis ont bien de Pair 1'un de 1'autre, 
Si 1'on mine cet homme-Ia, le contre-coup 

retombera sur vous, 
II serait mort, si on ne l'eut assiste avec 

soin, 
Ce poeme serait parfait, si les incidens, 

qui le font languir, n'inter»-oinpaienl la 

continuite de Faction, 



That man is a prodigy of knowledge 
judgment, courage, sense, and memory 

He is attached to both, but to one morb 
than to the ether. 

They very much resemble each otlier. 

If that man is ruined, his misfortune will 
recoil upon you. 

He would have died, if he had not been 
kindly assisted. 

That would be a perfect poem, if the inci- 
dents which give a heaviness to it, did 
not break the connection of the subject. 



Continuation, 

Cluand jele voudrais, je ne le pourraispas, 
Je serai toujours votre ami, quand meme 

vous ne le voudriez pas, 
Cluand vous auriez rcussf, que vous en 

serait-il revenu ? 
Cluand on decouvrirait votre demarche, 

on ne pourrait la blamer, 
Cluand vous auriez consults quelqu'un sur 

votre marriage, vousn'auriez pas mieux 

reussi, 
Le tonnerre et r'eclair ne sont sensibles 

que par la propagation da bruit et de la 

Jumiere jusqu'a roeil et a Toreille, 
Le langage de la prose est plus simple et 

moins figure que celui des vers, 
Le commencement de son discours est 

toujours assez sajre ; mais, dans la suite, 

a force de vouloir s'elever, il se perd dans 

les hues: on ne sait plus ni ce qu'on 

voit, ni co qu'on en tend, 
Cost une faute excusable dans un autre 

homme, mais a un homme aussi sage 

que lui, elle ne se peut pardonner, 
II ne suffit pas de paraitrehonnete homme, 

il faut Ti'tre, 
II nous a recus avec bonte, et nous a 

ecout 's avec patience, 
Tout y est si bien peint, qu'on croit voir 

ce qu'il d6cr it, 
On ne pense rien de vous, qui ne vous soit 

glorieux, 
Les eaux de citernes ne sont que des eaux 

de piuie ramassees, 
S'il n'est pas fort riche, du moins a-t-il de 

quoi vivre honnetement, 
an el quanti me du moia avoha-noua ? 
II lui tarde qu'il ne soit majcur, il compte 

les jours et lea moia, 
Deaquarites excellentea, jointes a de rares 

talens, font le parfait merite, 
I! a une rriauvaiae qualite, e'eat qu'il ne 

satirait garder un secret, 



Continuation. 

If I were disposed. I could not do it. 

I will always be your friend, even though 
you should not wish it. 

Had you even succeeded, what were you 
to have derived from it? 

Should the steps you have taken be dis- 
covered, they could not be blamed. 

Had you consulted somebody about your 
marriage, you could not have succeeded 
better. 

Thunder and lightning are only percep- 
tible by the transmission of sound and 
light to the ear and eye. 

Prose language is much more simple and 
less figurative than poetic. 

The beginning of his speech is always 
tolerably sensible; but afterwards, by 
affecting the sublime, he loses himself, 
and we no longer understand either 
what ice see or hear. 

This fault would be excusable in another 
man, but in a man of his sense it is 
unpardonable. 

It is not enough to seem an honest man ; 
we must be so. 

He received us with kindness, and heard 
us patiently. 

EveYy thing in it is so well delineated, you 
think you sec wh it he desc 

They think nothing of you but what is to 
your lienor. 

Cistern-water is only rain-ica'cr collected 

If he is not rich, at least he has enough to 

live upon respecta 
What day of the month is it? 
He longs to be of age, and counts the days 

and months. 
Excellent qua lit ies, joined fo distinguished 

talents, constitute perfect merit 
He lias one bad quality, he cannot keep a 

secret. 



Modules de phrases dans lesquelles, 

on doit f aire usage de Particle. 
I/rvM ! :': him des vicissitudes, 

Lee hommes d'un vrai genie sont rares, 
Lee hommes a imagination Bowt rRremcnt 

heureux, 
L' homme, dont vous parlez, est un de mes 

d D 1 1 i , 
La * T ie est un m»'lamre de biensct de maux, 
Li perfection an tout genre est le but 

auquel on doit tendre 



Examples of Phrases in which the 

Article is used. 
J] fan |« Un hie to a variety of changes. 
Sllen of real 'senilis arc scarce. 
Men of a visionary diameter arc seldom 

hap pa 
The man you spcik of is a friend of mine 

Life is a compound of eood and evil. 
Perfection in every thing cught to be 0U7 
object. 



THRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



289 



La beaute, les graces, et l'esprit sont des 
avantages hien precieux, quand ils sont 
releves par la modestie, 
Voila des tableaux d'une grande beaute, 
Faites-vous des principes, dont vous ne 

vous ecartiez jamais, 
Cet arbre porte des fruits excellens, 
Ces faisnns sont des conjectures bien 

faibles. 
Servez- vous des termes etablis par l'usage, 
On doit eviter Pair de PafFectation, 

Le Jupiter de Phidias etait d'une grande 
beaute, 



Beauty, gracefulness, and wit are valu- 
able endowments, when heightened by 
modesty. 

These are very beautiful pictures. 

Establish rules for yourself, and never 
deviate from them. 

This tree bears very excellent fruit. 

These reasons are very idle conjectures 

Use the expressions established by custom. 
We ought to avoid the appearance of 

affectation. 
The Jupiter of Phidias was extre.nely 

beautiful 



Continuation des mbnes Phrases. 

La memoire est le tresor de l'esprit, le 

fruit de l'attention et de la reflexion, 
J'achetai hier des gravures precieuses et 

rares, 
La France est le plus beau pays de PEurcpe, 
L'interet de 1'AMemagne etait oppose a 

celui de la Ru&sie. 
La longueur de PAnsleterre du nord au 

sud est de 360 milles, e\ sa largeur de 

Vest a Touest est de 300. 
II arrive de la Chine, du Japon, et des 

Indes Orientales, &c. 
II arrive de I'Amerique, de la Barbade, de 

la Jama'ique, &c. 
II vient de la Flandre franeaise, 
U s'est etabli dans la province deMiddlesex, 
Des petits maitres sont des etres insup- 

portables dans la societe, 
C'est Popinion des nouveaux philosophes, 
Elle a bien de la grace dans tout ce 

qu'elle fait, 
Cette etofife se vend une guinee Fauna, 
Ce vin coute 70 livres sterlings la piece, 



The same Phrases continued. 

Memory is the treasure of the mind, the 
result of attention and refection. 

I yesterday bought some valuable and 
scarce engravings. 

Francs is the finest country in Europe. 

The German interest was contrary to the 
Russian. 

The length of England from north to 
south is 360 miles, and its breadth from 
east to west is 300. 

He comes from China, Japan, and the 
East Indies. 

He comes from America, Barbadocs, Ja 
maica, §c. 

He comes from French Flanders. 

He has settled in the county of Middlesex. 

Coxcombs are insufferable beings in so- 
ciety. 

It is the opinion of the new philosophers. 

She does every thing most gracefully. 

This stuff sells at a guinea an ell. 
This wine costs seventy pounds the pipe 



Modtles de Phrases dans lesquelles Examples of Phrases in which the 
on ne doit pas fair e usage de V article. Article is omitted. 

Our knowledge ought to be derived from 
evident principles. 

This tree produces excellent fruit. 

These reasons are idle conjectures. 

Avoid whatever bears the appearance of 
affectation. 

These examples may serve as models. 

He has great presence of mind. 

The memory of reason and sense is more 
useful than any other kind of memory. 

Few persons rejlect on the rapidity cf life. 



Nos connaissances doivent etre tirees de 

principes evidens, 
Cet arbre porte d'excellens fruits, 
Ces raisons sont de faibles conjectures, 
Evitez tout ce qui a un air d'affectation, 

Ces exemples peuvent servir de modeles, 
II a une grande presence d'esprit, 
La memoire de raison et d'esprit est plus 
utile que les autres sortes de memoire, 
Peu de personnes reflechissent sur la 

rapidite de la vie, 
Glue d'evenemens inconcevables se sont 

euccedea les uns aux autres ! 
II y a plus d'esprit, mais moins de con- 
naissances, dans ce siecle que dans le 
aiecle dernier, 
On ne vit jamais autant d'efFronterie, 
Je pris hier beaucoap de peine pour rien, 

Candie e^t une des iles les plus agreables 

de la Mediterranee, 
II arrive de Perse, d'ltalie, d'Espagne, &c. 
II est revenu de Suisse, d'Allemagne, &c. 

Lea vine de France seront chers cette 
annee les vignes ant coule, 



How many inconceivable events have fol 

lowed in succession I 
There is more wit, but less knowledge, in 

this age than the last. 

So much assurance never was met with. 

I took a great deal of trouble yesteraajf 
about nothing. 

Candia is one of the most agreeable 
islands in the Mediterranean. 

He comes from Persia, Italy, Spain, fyc. 

He is relumed from Switzerland, Ger- 
many, fyc. 

French wines will be dear this yearf tlu 
vines h-ave been blighted. 



B 



290 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



L'empire d'AIIemngne est compose de 

grands tt de petits etats, 
Les chevaux d'Angleterre sont excellent, 
Apres men depart de Suisse, je me retirai 

a Rome. 



The German empire is composed of great 

and small stuffs 
English horses ore err client. 
After /caving Switzerland, I retired tc 

home. 



Continuation des memes Phrases. Continuation of the same Phrases. 



Vows trouverez ce passage page 1-20, livre 

premier, chapitre dix. 
II s'e?t ret ire en Angleterre, 
II vit dans sa retraite en vrai philosophe, 
Quand il r flcchit sur sa conduite, il en 

eut honte, 
C'est un homme qui clierche fortune, 
[1 eutend malice a tout, 
Ne portez en vie a person ne, 
Si vous promettez, tenez parole, 
Dans les affaires importantes ne vous 

decidez jamais sans prendre conseil, 
Courage, soldats, tenons fermes ; la vio- 

tojre est a nous, 
Cette fennne n'a ni grace ni beaute, 

Monseigneur le due de, &c. prince du sang, 

alia liier a la campagne, 
Montrer tant de faiblesse, e'est n'etre pas 

bon i me, 
Cet horn me est une espece de misanthrope, 

dont les brusqueries sont quelquefois 

trt'S-plaisantes, 
L'ananas est une sorte de fruit tres- 

commun aux Antilles, 
C'est un genre de vie qui ne me plait point, 



You will find this passage at page 120, 

book the first, chapter the tenth. 
He has retired to England. \pher 

Helives in his retreat like a real philoso- 
When he reflected on his conduct, he icas 

ashamed of it. 
He is a man that seeks to make a fortune. 
He puts a malicious construction on every 
Envy nobody. [thing. 

If you promise, keep your word. 
In matters of consequence, never decide 

without advice. 
Cheer up, soldiers, let us continue firm; 

the day is our own. 
This woman is destitute both of grace 

and beauty. 
The duke of, fyc. a prince of the bloody 

went yesterday into the country. 
To show so much weakness, is not acting 

like a man, 
This man is a kind of misanthropist, 

whose oddities are sometimes comical. 

The pine-apple is a kind of fruit very 

common in the Antilles. 
It is a kind of life that is not agreeable tome 



Continuation des memes Phrases. 

Cette dame plait a tout le monde par son 

honnrtete et sa douceur, 
Tout homme a des defauts plus ou moins 

sensible^, 
Cette conduite augmentait chaque jour le 

nombre de ses amis, 
Tons les biens nous viennent de Dieu, 
Venus etait la deesse de la beaute, et la 

mere de I'aniour el des grnces, 
Selon les paiens, Jupiter etait le premier 

des dieux, 
A pollen etait frere jumeau de Diane, 
Rubens a ete un grand peintre, 
Home re et Virgile sont les deux plus 

grands poetes e piques, 
Londres est la plus belle ville que je 

connaisse, 
L'eau de riviere est douce, et I'eau de 

mer est. salee, 
C'est un excellent poisson de mer, 
Voila une super be table de marbre, 
[i'eau de Seine est celle qu'on prcfrre a 

Paris, 
Pauvrete if est pas vice, 
Citoyens, et rangers, grands, peuples, se 

sont muntres sensibles a cette perte, 



The same Sentences continued. 

This lady pleases every one by her good 
breeding and mildness. 

Every one has defects, more or less 
obvious. 

This behaviour daily increased the num- 
ber of his friends. 

Every blessing comes from God. 

Venus was the goddess of beauty, and the 
mother of love and the graces. 

According to the heathens, Jupiter was 
the first of the gods. 

Apollo was twin-brother to Diana. 

Rubens ivas a (Treat painter. 

Homer and Virgil are the two greatest 
epic poets. 

London is the finest city that I know. 

Rirer-water is sweet, and sea-water is 

salt. 
It is an excellent sea-fish. 
There is a superb marble table. 
The water of the Seine is preferred at 

Paris. 
Poverty is not a vice. 
Citizens, st rangers, grandees, people, havt 

shown themselves sensible of this loss. 



J\lodilts de Phrases sur le pronom Forms of Phrases upon the pronoun 

LE. LE. 

Est ce la votre opinion ?— Ne doutez point Is that your opinion 1— Do not question it 

que ce ne la suit. 

Sont ce la vos domestiques?— Oui, ce les Arc these your servants?— Yes, they are. 

sont. 

Meedames, etes vous les etrangeres qu'on Ladies, are you the strangers that have 

ma annonc^esV—Oui, nous lee eomrues. been announced to me?—Yes, we are. 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



291 



Madame, etes-vons la malade pour la- 

qiinlie on m'a appele ? — Oui, je la sins. 
Madame, etes- vous la mere de cet enfant ? 

— Oui, je la suis. 
Mesdames. rtrs-vous contentes de cette 

musique ?— Oui, nous le sommes. 
Ells est malheureuse, et je crains bien, 

qu'elle ne le soit toute la vie. 
Madame, etes -vous mere? — Oui, jele suis. 
Madame, etes-vous malade ?-Oui,jele suis. 
Madame, depuis quel temps etes-vous 

mariee? — Je le suis depuis un an, 
y a-t-il long temps que vous etes arrivee ? 

— Je le suis depuis quinze jours, 
Aristote croyait que le monde etait de 

toute eternite; mais Platon ne le 

croyait pas, 
Quoique cette femme montre plus de fer- 

mete que les autres, elle n'est pas pour 

cela la moins afiiigi j e, 
Cette femme a Tart de repawdre des larmes 

dans ie temps meme qu'elle est le moins 

affiigee. 



Madam, are you the sick person for whom 

I have been called ? — Fes, / am. 
Madam, are you the mother of this child? 

— Yes, I am. 

Ladies, are you pleased with this music? 

— Yes, we are. 

She is unhappy, and I much fear she will 
continue so for life. 

Madam, are you a mother? — Yes, lam. 

Madam, arc you sickl — Yes, I am. 

Madam, how long have you been married? 
— A year. 

Is it long since you arrived? — A fort- 
night. 

Aristotle believed the world to have been 
from all eternity, but Plato did not. 

Although this woman shows more resolu- 
tion than the others, she is nevertheless 
not the least afflicted. 

This woman has the art of shedding tears 
even when she is least afflicted. 



Jlfodeles de phrases sur les diffe- 
rentes regies du participe passe. 

La nouvelle prce a-t-elle ete applaudie? 

Vos parens y seront-ils arrives a temps? 

Elle s'est donne de belles robes, 

Elles nous out apporte de superbes oeillets, 

Cette ruse ne lui a pas reussi, 

La vie tranquille que j'ai menee depuis 
dix ans. a beaucoup contribute a me faire 
oublier mes malheurs, 

Les lettres, qui j'ai recues, m'ont beau- 
coup afflige, 

Que de peines vous vous etes donnees ! 

Quelle tache vous vous etes imposae ! 

C'est une satire que j'ai retrouvee dans 
mes papiers, 

Les lettres qu'a ecrites Pline le jeune, 
quelque agr.^ables qu'elles soient, se 
ressentent nean moins un peu de la de- 
cadence du gout parmi les Romaius, 

Je ne serais pas entre avec vous dans tous 
ces details de grammaire, si je ne les 
avais crus necessaires, 

L'Egypte s'etait rendire celebre par la 
sasesse de ses lois long-temps avant 
que la Grece sortit de la barbarie, 

C'est unedesplusgrandes merveilles qu'on 
ait vues, 

L'homme de lettres, dont vous m'avez 
parte, a un gout exquis, 

Vous avez tres-bien instruit vos cleves, 

Lucrece s'est donne la mort, 

La secheresse qu'il y a eu an printemps a 

fait p^rir tons les fruits, 
Fe n'ai point reussi, maljrre les mesures 
que vous m'avez conseille de prendre, 

Quelle aventure vous est-il arrive ? 

Cette femme s'est proposee pour modele a 
ses en fans. 

Cette femme s'est propose d'enseiirner la 
geographic et l'histoire a ses enfans. 



Forms of Phrases upon the different 
rules of the participle past. 

Did the new piece meet with applause? 
Will your relations have arrived there in 
She has given herself fine gowns, [time? 
They have brought us beautiful pinks. 
He has not succeeded in this stratagem. 
The quiet life J have led these ten years 

has greatly contributed to make vie 
forget my misfortunes. 
The letters I have received have afflicted 

me greatly. [yourself! 

What a deal of trouble you have given 
What a task you haveimposedon yourself! 
It is a satire that I have again met with 

in my papers. 
The letters tohich the younger Pliny has 

written, however agreeable they may 

be. savor nevertheless a little of the 

decline of taste among the Rom2?is. 
I would not have entered into these gram- 
matical details with you, had I not 

thought them necessary. 
Egypt had become celebrated for the wis 

dom of its laws long before Greece had 

emerged from barbarism. 
It is one of the greatest iconders that has 

ever been seen. 
The man of letters you spoke to me of has 

an excellent taste. 
You have instructed your pupils extremely 
Lucretia killed herself. [will. 

The dry weather we had in the spring has 

destroyed all the fruit. 
I have not succeeded, notwithstanding the 

steps you advised me to take. 
What adventures hare you met with? 
This woman proposed herself as a model 

for her children. 
This woman proposed to teach geography 

and history to her children. 



JMo deles de Phrases sur les princi- Forms of Phrases upon the principal 

paux rapports des modes et des te??ips. relations of moods and tenses. 

Je I'attenriats depuis long-temps, quand il J had waited a long time for him, when 

vint me joindre, he rame to me. lint? 

II sortit au moment meme que j'entrais, Hi was going out at the time 1 was enter- 



292 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



Je commenc.aisaavoir des c.raintes sur la 
reussite de votre affaire, lorsque j'ai 
recu votre lettre, 

Des que j'eus fait quelques visites indis- 
pcnsables, je rentrai ciiez moi, et je ne 
sortis plus, 

J'avais deja tout prepare pour mon depart, 
Jorsque des affaires imprevues m'ont 
force a le differer de quelques jours, 

Vous etiez deja sorti, quand je me pre- 

seutai chess vous, 
J'avais deja livre a 1'impression mon 

ouvrage, lorsque vous me demandiez, 

si je le donnerais bientot au public, 
Lorsque j'ai eu termine mon affaire vous 

avez commence la votre, 
Lorsque j'eus dejefine je montai a cheval, 

et je fus a Londres, 
Lorsque j'aurai lu la nouvelle piece, je vous 

dirai avec franchise ce que j'en pense. 
Iriez-vous a Rome si vous le pouviez? — 

Oui, j'irais, 
Auriez-vous consenti a ces conditions, si 

on vous les avait proposees? 
Irez-vous demain a Londres, si vous le 

pouvez? — Oui, j'irai, 
11 sera surement parti, si vous l'avez voulu, 
Vous eussiez laisse echapper une occasion 

si favorable, si Ton ne voas eut averti a 

temps, 

Continuation des mimes Phrases. 
On (lit que vous partez aujourd'hui pour 

Paris, 
Tout le monde soutient que vous ac- 

cepterez la place qu'on vous offre, 
On soupoonne que vous aviez hier recu 

cette agreabje nouvelle quand on vous 

rencontra, 
Beaucoup de vos amis croient que vous 

partites hier pour la eampagne, 
Le bruit se repand que vous avez fait une 

grosse perte, 
J'apprends dans l'instant que vous fiissiez 

parti il y a trois jours, si des enjjape- 

inens, que vous aviez contract. -s depuis 

long-temps, ne vous avaient retenu, 
N'est-il pas vrai que vous partiriez au- 
jourd'hui, si vous le pouviez? 
Est-il vrai que vous seriez parti depuis 

long-temps pour la eampagne; si votre 

amour pour les arts ne vous avait retenu 

a la ville? 
Je ne crois pas que vous partiez, quoique 

tout le monde l'assure, 
le ne croyais pas qu'il fut si tot de retour, 
II a fallu qu'il ait eu affaire a bien des 

personnes, 
Je doute que votre ami fut venu a bout 

de ses projets, s'il n'avait pas etc forte- 

ment protege, 
11 n'est point d'homme, quelque rnerite 

qu'il ait, qui ne fut tree-rnortifie, s'il 

savait tout ce qu'on pense de lui, 

Vous ne vous pejrsuariiez p ns QUfl les af- 
faires pussent si mal tourner, 

JModeles de Phrases sur la negative 

JVE. 
11 n'y a pas beaucoue d'argent chez ces 
gens de lettres, 



/ was beginning to be apprehensive of 

the success of your business when I 

received your letter. 
As soon as I had paid some indispensable 

visits, I went home, and did not go out 

afterwards. 
I had already made every preparation for 

my departure, when some unexpected 

business occurred that obliged me to 

defer it for some days. 
You were already gone out when I called 

vpon you. 
My work had been sent to be printed 

when you asked me if I should soon 

bring it out. 
When my business was over, you began 

yours. 
When I had done breakfast, I got cm 

horseback, and went to London. 
When I have read the new piece. I trill 

candidly give you my opinion of it. 
Would you go to Rome if it were in (j ur 

power? — Yes, I would. 
Would you have agreed to those terms, 

had they been proponed to you ? 
Shall you go to London to-morrow, if you 

can ? — Yes, J shall. [ wished it. 

He will certainly have set out, if you 
You would have let so favorable an oppor- 
tunity slip, had you not been learned in 

time. 



The same Phrases continued 
It is said that you set off to-day for Paris. 

Every one maintains that you will accept 

of the place that is offered to you. 
It is suspected that you had received this 

agreeable intelligence when you were 

met yesterday. 
Many of your friends believe that you set 

out yesterday for the country. 
There is a report that you have met with 

a considerable loss. 
I have this moment learned that you would 

have set out three days since, had not 

engagements which you had formed 

long ago detained you. 
Is it not true that you would set out today 

if you could? 
Is it. true that you would hare set out for 

the country long since, had not your 

love for the arts detained you in town ? 

I do not imagine that you will set out, 
although every body asserts it. 

I did not believe he had gone back so soon. 

He must have had business with a great 
many persons. 

I doubt that your friend would have suc- 
ceeded in his plan, had he not been 
strongly patronized. 

There is not a man, whatever merit he 
may possess, that would not be very 
much mortified were he to know every 
thing that is thought cf him. 

You never pe rs uad ed y* : w rs e If that matte rs 
could have taken so unfortunate a turn. 

Forms of Phrases upon the negative 
N i:. 

There is not much money to be fwund 
among men qf letters. 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



293 



II iTy n point de resource dans une per- 

sonne qui n'a point d'esprit, 
C'est a tort que voiis 1'accusez de jouer, 

je vous assure qu'il ne joue point, 
Entrez dans le salon ; vous pourrez lui 

parler ; il ne joue pas, 
Si pour avoir du bien, il en coute a la 

pro bite, je n'en veux point, 
Rien n'est sur avec les capricieux ; vous 

croyez eire bien en faveur, point du 

tout , l'lnstant de la plus belle huineur 

est suivi de la plus facheuse, 
Vous ne cessez de nousrepeter les memes 

choscs, 
Je n'aurais ose vous en parler le premier, 
Malgre ses protections, il n'a pu reussir 

dans ses projets, 
Cet ouvrage serait fort bon, n'etait pour 

la negligence du style, 
V a-t-il quelqu'un dont elle ne medise, 
J'ai pris tant de gout pour une vie retiree, 

que je ne sors presque jamais. 
Voila ce qui s'est passe; n'en parlez a 

personne, 
Mori parti est pris; ne m'en parlez plus, 
iV'employez aucun de ces moyens : ils sont 

indignes de vous, 
Rien lfest plus j<vii, 
Je ne dis rien que je ne pense, 
Je ne fais jamais d'exces que je n'en sois 

incommode, 



TJiere are no resources in a person with- 
out se?ise. 

You accuse him wrongfully of gaming ; 
I assure you he never names. 

Go into the room, you may speak to him ; 
he is not playing. 

I do not wish to make a fortune, if it. can 
only be done at the expense of honesty. 

Nothing is certain with capricious people, 
you think yourself in faror, by no 
means; the moment of the best humor 
is foil ore ed by that of the worst. 

You are constantly repeating the same 
thing to us. [speak to you of it. 

I should not have dared to be the first to 

With all his interest, he has not been able 
to succeed in his plans. 

This work would be very good, were it 
not. for the negligence of the style. 

Is there any one she does not slander? 

I have acquired so great a taste for retire- 
ment that I seldom go abroad. 

This is what has passed ; do not speak of 
it to eny one. [of it. 

My resolution is fixed ; talk to me no more 

Do not employ any one of these measures ; 
they are unworthy of you. 

Nothing is more beautiful. 

J never speak but what I think. 

I never commit any excess without suffer- 
ing by it. 



Continuation des memes Phrases. Continuation of the same Phrases. 



C'est un homme pour qui je n'ai ni amour, 

ni estime, 
fl n'est ni assez prudent ni assez eclair?, 
Je vous assure que je ne le frequente ni 

ne le vois, 
Ne faire que parcourir les differentes 

branches des connaissances humaines 

sand s'arreter a aucune, c'est moins 

chercher a s'instruire, qu'a tuer le temps, 
due n'etes-vous toujours aitssi complai- 
sant ? 
II ne le fera pas, a moins que vous ne l'y 

engafjiez, 
11 n'ira pas, si vous ne Ten priez, 
11 nous a menaces de se venger ; nous 

n'avons fait qu'en rire, 
Trop d'iusouciance ne peut que nuire, 
due devenez-vous? il y a trois mois que 

nous no vous avons vu ? - 
Comment vous etes-vous pone depuisque 

nous ne vous avons vu ? 

Men pire qu'on ne le disait, 
Peu h en faut que je n'aie donne tete 

baissee dans le piege, 
Dites la verite en toute occasion ; on me- 

prise toujours ceux qui parlent autre- 

nient qu'ils ne pensent, 
IS~e desespsrez pas que la verite ne se fasse 

jour a la longue, [ainsi, 

Je ne disconviens pas que la chose ne soit 
Prenez garde qu'on ne vous entraine dans 

quelque fausse demarche, 
J'empicherai bien qu'on ne vous nuise 

dans cette affaire, 
II craint qu'on ne le soupeonne d'avoir 

trempe dans ce complot, 
On lui a donne d'excellens conseils, de 

crainte qu'il ne manquat l'occasion de 

faire connaitre ce qu'il est en etat de 

faire, 2 



He is a man for whom I have neither 
love nor esteem. [lightened. 

He is neither sufficiently prudent nor en- 

I assure you I neither associate with him. 
nor see him. 

To go through the different branches of 
human knowledge only, without fixing 
upon any one of them, is not to seek for 
instruction, but to kill time. 

Why are. you not at all times squally com- 
plaisant 1 

He will not do it unless you persuade him 
to it.. [him. 

He will not go, if you do not request u of 

He has threatened us with vengeance • we 
only laughed at him. 

Too great supinen ess cannot, but behurtfuL 

What had become of you ? we have not 
seen you these three months. 

How have you been since we saw you.< 

It is much worse than was said. 

I was near running headlong into the 

snare. 
Tell the truth on all occasions: those who 

speak what they do not think are always 

despised. 
Do not despair that truth will appear in 

time. 
I admit that it is so. 
Take care that you are not led into some 

false step. 
I shall prevent them from doing you any 

harm in this business. 
He is apprehensive that he is suspected of 

being concerned in this plot. 
They have given him excellent advice, lest 

he shoulc llosethe opportunity of sliowing 

xohat he was capable of doing. 
b2 



294 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES 



J'y ai long temps travaille ; je ne saurais 

en venir a bout, 
Vous feriez mieux de vous taire; vous ne 

savez ce que vous dites, [plaisir, 

Vous ne sauriez me faire un plus grand 



/ have been long employed about it; J 

cannot accomplish it. 
You had better be silent ; you do not knot 

what you are saying. 
You cannot do me a greater favor. 



Phrases sur quelques De'licatesses 

de la Langue Fvanqaise. 
Irez-vous ce soir a I'opera? — Oui, j'irai, 

Iriez-vous avec plaisir a Rome ? — Oui, 

j'irais, 
La justice qui nous est quelquefois refus^e 

par nos contemporains, la posu rite sait 

nous la rendre, 
Cette grandeur qui vous etonne si fort, il 

la doit a votre nonchalance, 
U perit, ce heros, si cher a son pays, 
Je l'avais bien prevu que ce haul degre de 

grandeur serait la cause de sa ruine, 
Citoyens,etrangers,ennemis,peuples,rois, 

ernpereurs, le plaignent et le reverent, 
L'assemblee finie, chacun se retira chez 

soi, 
Heureux lepeuple qu'un sageroi gouverne, 
11 refusa les plus grands honneurs, content 

de les meriter, 
Prieres, remontrances, commandemens, 

tout est inutile, 
Le vent renverse tours, cabanes, palais, 

eglises, 
Notre reputation ne depend pas du caprice 

des homines; mais elle depend des ac- 
tions louables que nous fesons, 
Dya beaucoup de choses qu'il n'importe 

point du tout de savoir, 
La vue de l'esprit a plus d'etendue que la 

vue du corps, 
Ce qui sert a la vanite. n'est que vanite, 
Tout ce qui n'a que le monde pour fonde- 

fnent, se dissipe et s'evanouit avec le 

monde, 
C'est le privilege des grands hommes de 

vaincre l'envie ; le merite la fait naitre, 

le merite la fait mourir, 
L'amour-propre est plus habile que le plus 

habile homme du monde, 
En quittant le monde, on ne quitte le plus 

souvent ru les erreurs, ui les folles pas- 
sions du monde. 



Phrases on some Delicacies of the 

French Language. 
Shall you go to the opera this evening? — 

Yes, J shall. 
Would you cheerfully go to Rome? — Yes, 

I would. 
Posterity knows how to do us that justice 

which is sometimes refused us by our 

contemporaries. 
That greatness which so much astonishes 

you, he owes to your indifference. 
That hero, so dear to his country , perished. 
I foresaw that the greatness of his eleva' 

tion would be his ruin. 
Citizens, strangers, enemies, nations, 

kings, emperors, pity and respect him. 
The assembly being over, each returned 

home. [by a wise king. 

Happy are the people who are governed 
He refused the greatest honors, satisfied 

with having deserved them.. 
Entreaties, remonstrances, injunctions, 

are all useless. 
The wind overturns towers, cottages, pa- 
laces, churches. 
Our reputation does not depend on the 

caprice of men, but on the commendablt 

actions we perform. 
There are many things which it is of no 

consequence at all to know. 
The eye of the mind reaches much farther 

than the bodily eye. 
What promotes vanity is only vanity. 
Jill that is confined to this lower world 

disperses and vanishes with the world. 

It is the pferogativc of great men to con- 

quer envy; merit gives it birth and 

merit destroys it. 
Self-love is more ingenious than the most 

ingenious man in the world. 
In renouncing the world, tr.e generally 

renounce neither the errors nor giddy 

passions of the world. 



THE hSD 



OF VERBS. 

Of Verbs. 

1 A verb is a word which expresses what is affirmed of 
persons, animals, things, etc. 

2. Or, as it is more commonly defined, a verb is a word, or 
that part of speech which signifies to do, to be, or to suffer. 

3. When we say John is polite, we affirm that the quality polite, be- 
longs to John. When we say John is not polite, we also affirm that the 
quality polite, does not belong to John — in both sentences, the word is, 
which expresses that affirmation, is a verb. 

Of the different sorts of French Verbs. 

4. There are in French seven sorts of verbs : — the auxiliary 
verb — the active verb — the neuter verb — the passive verb — the 
reflected verb — the reciprocal verb — and the unipersonal, or 
impersonal verb. 

Of Auxiliary Verbs. 

5. A verb is auxiliary when it serves to conjugate some of 
the tenses of other verbs. 

6. In French there are but two auxiliary verbs, Avoir to have, 
and Etre to be. 

7. Avoir, is sometimes an auxiliary verb, and sometimes an irregular 
active verb of the third conjugation. 

8. Avoir to have, is an auxiliary verb whenever it is used to conjugate 
the compound tenses of another verb, as: vous avez parle you have spokm, 
&c. When auxiliary, it is always followed by the participle past of some 
other verb. 

9. Avoir to have, is an active verb, whenever it is used to indicate the 
possession of any thing— as, vous avez une pomme you have an apple, &c. 

10. Avoir to have, is used as an auxiliary verb — 1st, to all the active 
verbs, and 2d, to upward of six hundred neuter verbs. 

11. Eire to be, is sometimes an auxiliary verb and sometimes an 
irregular neuter verb of the % fourth conjugation. It is also called substan- 
tive verb. 

12. Etre to be, is an auxiliary verb, whenever it is used to conjugate 
the compound tenses of another verb — as, je suis frapp e I am struck, &c, 
When auxiliary it is always followed by the participle past of some 
other verb. 

13. Etre to be, is a neuter verb whenever it is used to indicate the 
state of any person or thing — as, je suis ici I am here — cette table est 
ronde this table is round, &c. 

14. Etre to be, is used as an auxiliary verb — 1st, To a few neuter verbs, 
the list of which may be found in page 160. — 2d, To all the passive verbs — 
and 3d, To all the reflected and reciprocal verbs, although these two last 
kinds of verbs are conjugated with to have in English 



* OF ACTIVE, NEUTER, AND PASSIVE VERBS. 

Of Active Verbs. 

15. A verb is active in French when it expresses that an 
agent called nominative, or subject, performs an action on an 
object, or regimen, without the help of a preposition — as, Jean 
frappe Joseph John strikes Joseph, &c. 

Of Neuter Verbs. 

16. A verb is neuter in French — 1st, When it expresses that 
an agent called nominative, or subject, performs an action, that 
either is, or can be directed towards an object or regimen, with 
the help of a preposition — as, Jean parle u Joseph John speaks 
to Joseph. 2d, When it expresses the state, situation, or man- 
ner of being, or existing, of the nominative or subject — as, 
je dors I sleep — Jean est ici John is here, &c. 

17. Note — The words active and neuter, applied to verbs, do not mean 
that an active verb expresses action, and that a neuter verb expresses 
inaction. For chanter to sing, which is an active verb, does not express 
so much action as courir to run, which is a neuter verb. It means that 
the verbs called active, are those after which une personne a person — or 
une chose a thing ; can be put as an object or regimen, without a prepo- 
sition — 3,s,frapper une personne to strike a person — frapper une chose to 
strike a thing; whereas the verbs called neuter, are those after which 
une personne a person — or une chose a thing; cannot be put as an object 
or regimen without a preposition, being either expressed or understood — 
as, courir a une personne to run to a person; in English the preposition is 
often understood — as, to run an hour meaning to run during an hour. Some 
neuter verbs, those that express the state of the nominative, or subject, 
admit of no object or regimen, either with or without a preposition — as, 
je dors I sleep — je suis I am. The best division of verbs, I think, is that 
of Mr. Noah Webster, in his Dictionary, who divides them into transitive 
and intransitive ; but I could not for the French adopt this division, which 
would confuse the pupil, whose French Dictionary would not be on that 
plan. 

Of Passive Verbs. 

18. A verb is passive in French, when it indicates that the 
nominative, or subject, bears the effect of another's action — as*, 
Jean fut prappe par Joseph John was struck by Joseph — Jean 
fut tue par une balle John was killed by a ball. 

19. The passive verbs in French, as in English, are formed with the 
help of the different tenses and persons of the auxiliary verb, Etre to be; 
to which is joined the participle past, of the verb to he conjugated — as^'e 
suis frappe I am struck — il sera vendu it will be sold, &c. 

20. All the French active verbs may be employed in the passive voice, 
except avoir to have. 



OF REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL VERBS, <&C 3 

21. Ill French the passive voice of verbs is but very seldom used, we 
generally make use of the active voice ; for instance, instead of saying Jean 
fut frappe par Joseph John was struck by Joseph — we would more readily 
say, Joseph fra ppa Jean Joseph struck John, &c. 

22. Properly speaking, there are no passive verbs in French; for eire 
frappe to be struck — je suis frappe I am struck ; is no more a passive verb 
than etre malade to be sick — je suis malade I am sick, &c. 

Of Refected Verbs. 

23. A verb is refected when it expresses an action which 
falls on the nominative, or subject — as, je me fatte I flatter 
myself, &c. 

Of Reciprocal Verbs. 

24. A verb is reciprocal when it expresses that two or more 
nominatives, or subjects act upon each other — as, Jean et Joseph 
Raiment John and Joseph love one another — Jean, Joseph, et 
Paul Raiment John, Joseph, and Paul love each other, &c. 

Of Unipersonal or Impersonal Verbs. 

25. A verb is unipersonal or impersonal when it expresses 
what happens — as, il pleut it rains — il arriva it happened, <kc. 

26. They are called by some unipersonal, because they are only used 
in one person; the third person singular. 

27. They are called by others impersonal, because the acts indicated by 
them, are attributed to no person. 

Division of the Verbs. 

28. The above seven different sorts of verbs, are divided into 
regular, and irregular, perfect, and defective verbs. 

Of Regular Verbs. 

29. Regular Verbs are those whose tenses are conjugated 
in a uniform manner, according to some general standard. 

Of Irregular Verbs. 

30. Irregular Verbs are those which deviate, in the conju ora- 
tion of their tenses, from the general standard, given for the 
conjugation of regular verbs. 

Of Perfect Verbs. 

31. Perfect Verbs have all their moods, tenses, and persons. 

Of Defective Verbs. 

32. Defective Verbs are those which want some of their 
moods, tenses, or persons. 



4 OF MOODS AND TENSES. 

Conjugation of Verbs. 

33. To conjugate a verb, is to write or rehearse it, with all 
its different inflections, through every mood, tense, number, and 
person. 

Of Moods. 

34. Mood, signifies manner. We call moods the different 
manners of using a verb, in order to express the different ways 
in which an action is performed, or suffered. 

35. A verb may be used in French in five different man- 
ners, namely, in an indefinite, positive, conditional, imperative, 
and subordinate manner ; which constitute five moods in verbs, 
called the infinitive mood, the indicative mood, the conditional 
mood, the imperative mood, and the subjunctive mood. 

36. The Infinitive mood, is so called, because it expresses 
an action in an indefinite manner, without any reference to 
number or person — as, chanter to sing — punir fo punish. 

37. The Indicative mood, affirms in a direct, positive, and 
absolute manner, that a thing is or is not, without depending 
on any other word, whatever may be the time to which the 
affirmative relates — as, je connais ces dames I know these 
ladies — j'ai vu ces dames I have seen these ladies — je ne 
porterai pas ce livre I will not carry this book, &c. 

38. The Conditional mood, denotes that a thing or an action 
would take place, or would have taken place, depending on a 
condition — as, € /e vous rendrais service sije le pouvais I would 
render you service if I could — je vous aurais rendu service si 
je Vavais pu I would have rendered you service if I had been 
able, &c. 

39. The Imperative mood, is used for either commanding, 
exhorting, entreating, or permitting — as, venez ici come here — 
faites cela do that — permettez-moi de sortir allow me to go 
out, &c. 

40. The Subjunctive mood, represents a person or a thing, 
under a condition, motive, wish, or supposition, and is depen- 
dant on a conjunction — &s,je souhaite qtfil vienne I wish (that) 
he may come, &c. In English the conjunction is often un- 
derstood. 

Of Tenses. 

41. Tenses indicate whether an action, is doing, has been 
done, or will be done : hence three tenses, the present, the 



NAMES AND NUMBER OF TENSES. O 

past, and the future. These tenses have been subdivided, to 
mark their difference with accuracy. 

42. The tenses of verbs are divided into simple and com- 
pound. 

43. Simple tenses are those which are conjugated without 
the help of either the auxiliary, Avoir to have, or Eire to be. 

44. Compound tenses, (which have also other names, which 
indicate more clearly their use,) are those which are formed 
with the help of either the auxiliary, Avoir to have, or Eire 
to be ; to which the past participle of the verb to be conjugated, 
is joined. 

Names and Number of Tenses in each Mood. 

45. The Infinitive mood has five tenses ; 
The present, {which is the root of the verb,) 
The past or perfect, (or compound of the pyresent,) 
The participle present or active, 

The compound of the participle present, and 
The participle past or passive. 

46. The Indicative mood has eight tenses ; 
The present, 

The perfect or preterit indefinite, (or compound of the present,) 

The imperfect, 

The pluperfect, (or compound of the imperfect,) 

The preterit definite, 

The preterit anterior, (or compound of the preterit definite,) 

The future absolute, and 

The future anterior, (or compound of the future absolute.) 

47. The Conditional mood has two tenses ; 
The present, and 

The past, (or compound of the present.) 

48. The Imperative mood has but one tense, which is at 
once present and future. Present with respect to the action 
of commanding, and future with respect to the thing enjoined. 

49. The Subjunctive mood has four tenses ; 
The present or future, 

The preterit or past, (or compound of the present,) 

The imperfect, and 

The pluperfect, (or compound of the imperfect.) 



6 OF NUMBERS AND PERSONS. 

Of Numbers. 

50. Number, is the form which verbs assume, to denote 
their agreement with their nominatives. 

51. There are two numbers in every tense : the singular , 
which is employed when only one thing, or one person is men- 
tioned — as, la maison tombe the house is falling — Joseph parle 
Joseph speaks. And the plural, which is employed when 
more than one thing, or more than one person are mentioned — 
as, les maisons tombent the houses are falling — Joseph et Jean 
parlent Joseph and John speak. 

Of Persons. 

52. Each number has three persons. 

First Person. 

53. The first person is the person who speaks, or the persons 
who speak ; it is designated hy je I, in the singular — asjje pense 
I think • and by nous we, in the plural — as, nous pensons we 
think. 

Second Pe? % son. 

54. The second person is the person spoken to, or the per- 
so?is spoken to ; it is expressed by tu thou, for the singular — as, 
tu penses thou thinkest ; and by vous you, for the plural — as, 
vous pensez you think. 

55. When in speaking to one person, we wish to be polite and respectful ; 
custom has established in modern languages that the second person plural 
be used instead of the second person singular : thus, for instance, a person 
speaking to Mr. A..., instead of saying tu es ici thou art here — will say 
vous etes ici you are here ; as he would if he was speaking to several 
persons 

56. When one person only is spoken to, if an adjective comes after the 
verb, that adjective is put in the singular, although, through politeness and 
custom, the verb be in the plural : thus in speaking to Mr. A..., I shall say 
vous ties fort you are strong — whereas in speaking to several persons, the 
adjective will be in the plural ; speaking to Messrs A... and B..., I shall say 
vous ites forts you ara strong. 

57. When in addressing ourselves to a person, politeness or respect 
induces us to use a dignifying expression, instead of a personal pronoun 
<»f the second person, the verb as well as what relates to that expression, 
is put in the third person: for instance, instead of saying Monsieur 
avez-vous eu la horde de penser a, ce que vous m'avez promis, we say 
Monsieur a-t-il eu la honte de penser a ce qu'il nVa proniis? Have you 
been so kind, Sir, as to think of what you promised me? The literal 
translation of the French is : Sir has he had the goodness to think to 
what he has promised me. 



OF THE DIFFERENT WAYS OF CONJUGATING VERBS. 7 

Third Person, 

58. The third person, is the person spoken of or the persons 
spoken of; it is expressed by il he or it ; or elle she or it v for the 
singular, or by any noun in the singular — as, il parle he speaks 
— elle parle she speaks — Vhomme parle man speaks. And by 
Us they — elles they, or any noun in the plural — as, Us parlent 
they speak — elles parlent they speak — les hommes parlent 
men speak. 

Different Ways of Conjugating Verbs* 

59. There are four ways of conjugating verbs : — 1st, Affir- 
matively ; 2d, Negatively ; 3d, Interrogatively ; 4th, Nega- 
tively and Interrogatively. 

First Way. 

60. Affirmatively. When verbs are preceded by their nomi- 
natives or subjects, and used without any negation, they are said 
to be conjugated affirmatively — as, je parle I speak — tu paries 
thou speakest, &c. 

Second Way. 

61. Negatively. Verbs are conjugated negatively, by placing 
ne immediately after the nominative or subject of the verb ; 
and pas after the verb, in simple tenses — as, je ne parle pas 
I speak not, &c. In compound tenses, ne is placed as in the 
simple tenses, after the nominative or subject of the verb ; 
but pas is placed between the auxiliary and the participle past, 
of the verb — as, je rtai pas parle I have not spoken. Ne and pas 
are generally placed together, before the infinitive present — as, 
ne pasparler not to speak ; however a few writers place ne before 
the infinitive present, and pas after ; neparler pas not to speak. 

Third Way. 

62. Interrogatively. Verbs are conjugated interrogatively 
in French, by placing the pronoun, which is the nominative 
or subject of the verb, after the verb, in simple tenses ; the 
pronoun must be joined to the verb by a hyphen — as, parle je 
do I speak — parles-tu dost thou speak — parle-Uil does he 
speak, <fec. In compound tenses, the pronoun must be placed 
after the auxiliary, that is, between the auxiliary and the par- 
ticiple past of the verb ; the pronoun must also be joined to 
the auxiliary by a hyphen — as, aije parle have 1 spoken — 
as tu parle hast thou spoken — a-t-il parle has he spoken, &c. 

2C 



8 OF THE DIFFERENT WAYS OF CONJUGATING VERBS. 

63. When a noun instead of a personal pronoun is the nomi- 
native of the verb, in the interrogative sentence, this noun, 
subject of the question, is placed before the verb; and either of 
the pronouns il, elle, Us, or dies, according to the gender and 
number of the noun, is added and placed after the verb in 
simple tenses, joined to it by a hyphen ; and in compound 
tenses, after the auxiliary, joined to it by a hyphen. 

Example in Simple Tenses. 

Monfrere sait-il ? My brother knows he ? 

Meaning Does my brother know ? 

Example in Compound Tenses. 

Mesfreres avaient-ils chante ? My brothers had they sung ? 
Meaning Had my brothers sung ? 

Observations. 

64. 1st, The first person of the present of the indicative mood, ending 
with e mute, (see page 44 ,) in all the verbs of the first conjugation, and 
in about fifteen of the irregular verbs of the second, we are obliged, 
to avoid a disagreeable sound, to put an acute accent on the e mute, when 
used interrogatively — as, je parte I speak — parle-je do I speak — fouvre 
I open — ouvre-je do I open, &c. 

65. 2d, When the first person singular of the present of the indicative, 
of any verb, has only one syllable, we cannot use it interrogatively ; thus, 
we cannot say, vends-je do I sell — prends-je do I take, &c. We have 
recourse to a different expression, we say, est-ce que je vends do I sell — 
est-ce que je prends do I take, &c. The only exceptions that custom 
authorises — a,re,fais-je do I do — dis-je do I say — dois-je do I owe — vois-je 
do I see — ai-je have I — and vais-je do I go. 

66. 3d, When the third person singular of any tense, ends with e or cr, 
we are obliged, to avoid a disagreeable sound, to put a t between two 
hyphens : thus, 4-, between the verb and the pronoun, il or elle — as, a-t-il 
has he — a-t-elle has she — parle-t-il does he speak — parle-Uelle does she 
speak, &c. 

67. 4th, The imperative mood, and the subjunctive mood, cannot be 
used interrogatively ; we however, can say, in the present of the subjunc- 
tive, puisse-je may I ; and in the imperfect of the subjunctive, dussi-je 
were I obliged to. 

Fourth Way. 

68. Negatively and Interrogatively. Verbs are conjugated 
negatively and interrogatively, in Frenchjby placing in simple 
tenses ne before the verb, the subject or nominative pronoun, 
after the verb, joined to it by a hyphen, and pas after the 
pronoun — as, ne parle-je pas ? do I not speak? &c. And in 
compound tenses, by placing ne before the verb, the subject or 
nominative pronoun, after the auxiliary ; and pas after the pro- 
noun ; then comes the participle past of the verb, to be conjuga- 
ted, which comes last, rf ai-je pas parle ? have I not spoken 1 &c. 



OP THE CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS. 9 

69. When a noun instead of a personal pronoun, is the nomi- 
native of the verb, in a sentence both negative and interroga- 
tive, this noun, subject of the question, is placed before the 
verb, and either of the pronouns, il, elle, ils> or dies, is added, 
and placed after the verb in simple tenses, joined to it by a 
hyphen ; and in compound tenses, after the auxiliary, joined 
to it by a hyphen. 

Example in Simple Tenses. 

Ma samr ne sait-elle pas ? My sister knows she not ? 

Meaning Does not my sister know ? 

Example in Compound Tenses. 
Mes saurs rtavaient-elles pas ) •»«■ • . , -, ., , « 

, , ? t ^-y sisters nac * tne y not sung? 

Meaning Had not my sisters sung ? 

70. The four observations made with regard to the conjugation of verbs 
interrogatively, apply also to verbs conjugated both negatively and inter- 
rogatively. 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verbs. 

71. The auxiliary verbs avoir to have, and etre to be, being 
used in the formation of the compound tenses of all the other 
verbs, it will be proper to begin by their conjugation. 

72. Avoir to have, is employed as an auxiliary, to conjugate 
its own compound tenses — so that any compound tenses of 
avoir to have, is one of its simple tenses, to which the participle 
past has been added ; thus the preterit indefinite, (or compound 
of the present,) is formed with the present indicative, fai I have, 
to which the participle past, eu had, is added — -fai eu I have 
had — tu as eu thou hast had, &c; and so on of the other com- 
pound tenses. 

73 The compound tenses of etre to be, are formed with the 
help of avoir to have, so that any compound tense of etre to be, 
is composed of a simple tense of avoir to have, to which the 
participle past of etre to be, is added ; thus the preterit indefi- 
nite, (or compound of the present,) is formed with the present 
indicative, J'ai I have, of avoir to have, to which the participle 
past, ete been, of ttre to be, is added ; fai ete I have been — 
tu as ete thou hast been, &c; and so on, of the other compound 
tenses. 

74. Observe that the terminations of the imperfects, and of the con- 
ditionals, which are now generally spelt ais, ais, aii, lient, in all verbs, 
were formerly, and are still now, by a few writers, spelt ois, ois % oit, oient. 
Both ways are pronounced alike, but the new spelling is nearer the pro- 
nunciation than the old one. 



10 



AVOIR 



to have. 



l ami. tine. te. e'crit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, oter. tout, vemte. 
2 st. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over, too, fool. 

tCONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 

Avoir to have. {Affirmatively, ) 



-A- 

avoir 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

• to have 

PAST Or PERFECT, 
or compound of the present. 

to have had 



PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 

having 



-c- 

ayant 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

ayant eu having had 

-E- PARTICIPLE PAST Or PERFECT Or PASSIVE. 

eu, m. s. eue,/. s. eus, m.p. eues,/. p. had 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



a voi ru 
e* yan 
e yan tu 
u 



J'ai 
tu as 
ila 


I have 
thou hast 
he has 


tu a 
ila 


nous avori3 


ice have 


nou za vo© 


vous avez 
ils ont 


you have 
they have 


vcu za ve* 
il zon 


•G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 

J'ai eu J have had 
tu as eu thou hast had 
il a eu he has had 


tua zu 
i la u 


nous avons eu 
vous avez eu 
ils ont eu 


we have had 
you have had 
they have had 


nou za von zu 
vou za v£ zu 
il zon tu 


-H- 

J'avais 
tu avais 
il avail 


IMPERFECT. 

1 had 
tli9u hadsi 
he had 


ja ve 
tu a ve 
ila ve 


nous avions 


we had 


uou za vi on 


vous aviez 
ils avaient 


you had 
they had 


vou za vi (t 
il za ve 


-i- 

J'avais eu 
tu avais eu 
kl avait eu 


PLUFERFECT, 

?r compound of tin i viper feci. 

I had had 

tfwu hadst Ji ad 
he had had 


ja ve zu 
tu a ve zu 
i la ve tu 


nous avions eu 
vous aviez eu 
ils avaient eu 


we had had 
you had had 
(key had had 
fSce pagel, an. ?. 


nou za vi 
vou za vi 6 zu 
il za v* tu 



AVOIR 



to have. 



11 



*mwr. mur. jeime. jeune. boite. bozte. ftncre, mgrat. onde. un, ameN. 
4 j, as 5 in pleasure, gn, as ni in umon. ill, as Hi, in WiZZiam, 



-J- 


PRETERIT DEFINITE. 




J'eas 


i" had 


j u 


tu eus 


thou hadst 


tu u 


il eut 


he had 


ilu 


nous eumes 


we had 


nou zum 


vous eutes 


you had 


vou zut 


ils eurent 


they had 


il zur 


-K- 


PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 




er compound of the preterit. 




J'eus eu 


I had had 


juzu 


tu eus eu 


thou hadst had 


tu u zu 


il eut eu 


he had had 


ilu tu 


nous eumes eu we had had 


nou zum zu 


vous eutes eu 


you had had 


vou zut zu 


ils eurent eu 


they had had 


il zur tu 


-L- 


FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 




J'aurai 


/ shall or will have 


jo re* 


tu auras 


thou shalt or wilt havz. 


tu o ra 


U aura 


he shall or will have 


i lo ra 


nous aurons 


we shall or will have 


nou zo ron 


vous aurez 


you shall or will have 


vou zo re 


ils auront 


they shall or will have 


il zo ron 



-M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

J'aurai eu I shall or will have had jo t6 u 

tu auras eu thou shalt or wilt have had tu o ra zu 

il aura eu he shall or will have had i lo ra u 

nous aurons eu we shall or will have had nou zo ron zu 

vous aurez eu you shall or will have had vou zo re zu 

ils auront eu they shall or will have had il zo ron tu 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



-N- 



J'aurais 



tu aurais 



ii aurait 



nous aunons 



vous aunez 



ils auraient 



PRESENT. 

/ should, would, could, 

or might have 

thou shouldst, ivouldst, 

couldst, or mights t have 
he should, would, could, 
or might have 
we should, would, could, 
or might have 
you should, would, could, 
or migJU have 
they should* would, could, 
or might have 
2 c 2 



jor& 
tuor£ 
i lord 
nou zo ri on 
rou zo ri e 
ilzoxd 



12 



AVOIR 



to have. 



'ami. ane. te. £crit. mere. etre. zdole. gzte. opera, dter. tout, vowte. 
2 a/. arm. tub. ale. mare. th*re. idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



-0- 


PAST, 




or compound of the present. 




J'aurais eu, 


I should, would, could, 


jo re zu 


or feusse eu 


or might have had 


jus u 


tu aurais eu, 


thou shouldst, wouldst, 


tu o re zu 


or tu eusses eu 


couldst, or mightsl have had 


tu us zu 


il aurait eu, 


he should, would, could, 


i lo re tu 


or il eut eu 


or might have had 


i lu tu 


nous aurions eu, 


we should, would, could, 


nou zo ri on zu 


or nous eussions eu 


or might have had 


nou zu si on zu 


vous auriez eu, 


you should, would, could. 


vou zo ri e* zu 


or vous eussiez eu 


or might have had 


vou zu si e zu 


ils auraient eu, 


they should, would, could, 


il zo re tu 


or ils eussenl eu 


or might have had 


il zus tu 


-p- 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 




aie 


have (thou) 


e 


qu'il ait 


let him have 


ki Id 


ayons 


let us have 


£yon 


ayez 


have (you) 


£ ye 


qu'ils aient 


let them have 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


kilze 


~q- PRESENT. 




Que j'aie 


that I may have 


keje 


que tu aies 


that thou mayst have 


ke tu e 


qu'il ait 


that he may have 


kile 


que nous ayons 


that we may have 


ke nou ze* yon 


que vous ayez 


that you may have 


ke vou ze" ye* 


qu'ils aient 


that they may have 


kilzd 


-R- PRETERIT Or PAST, 




or compound of the present. 




Que j'aie eu 


that [may have had 


ke je u 


que tu aies eu 


that thou mayst have had 


ke tu e zu 


qu'il ait eu 


that he may have had 


ki le tu 


que nous ayons eu 


that we may have had 


ke nou z£yon zu 


que vous ayez eu 


that you may have had 


ke vou ze* ye* zu 


qu'ils aient eu 


that they may have had 


kil ze tu 


-S- IMPERFECT. 




Que j'eusse 


that I might have 


ke jus 


que tu eusses 


that thou mightst have 


ke tu us 


qu'il eut 


that he might have 


kilu 


quo nous eussions 


that we might have 


ke nou zu si on 


que vous eussiez 


that you might have 


ke vou zu si e* 


qu'ils eussent 


that they might have 


kil zus 


-T- PLUPERFECT, 




or compound of the imperfect* 




Que j'eusse eu 


that I might have had 


ke jus u 


que tu eusses eu 


that thou mightst have had 


ke tu us zu 


qu'il eut eu 


that he might have had 


ki lu tu 


que nous eussions eu 


thai we might have had 


kenou zu si on zu 


que vous eussiez eu 


that yon might have had 


ke vou zu si e zu 


Qu'ils eussent eu 


that they might have had 


kil zus Lu 



AVOIR 



to have 



13 



5 mur. mux. jeune. jeune. boite. boite. ancve. tngrat. oride. un. ames. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as Z/t, in WitVr^in. 

CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 

Avoir to have (Negatively.) 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



-A- 

ne pas avoir 



PRESENT. 

no/ to have 



PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 

n'avoir pas eu not to have had 

-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 

n'ayant pas not having 

COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 



-D- 



n'ayant pas eu 



having not had 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



ne pa za voir 

na voir pa zu 
ne yan pa 
ne yan pa zu 



Je n'ai pas 

tu n'as pas 

il n'a pas 

nous n'avons pas 

vous n'avez pas 

ils n'ont pas 



/ have not 
thou hast not 
he has not 
we have not 
you have not 
they have not 



Je n'ai pas eu 
tu n'as pas eu 
iln'a pas eu 
nous n'avons pas eu 
vous n'avez pas eu 
ils n'ont pas eu 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 



I have not had 
thou hast not had 
he has not had 
we have not had 
you have not had 
they have not had 



IMPERFECT. 



Je n'avais pas 
tu n'avais pas 
il n'avait pas 
nous n'avions pas 
vous n'aviez pas 
ils n'avaicnt pas 



/ had not 
thou hadst not 
ke had not 
we had not 
you had not 
they had not 



Je n'avais pas eu 
tu n'avais pas eu 
il n'avait pas eu 
nous n'avions pas eu 
vous n'aviez pas eu 
ils n'avaient paseu 



PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 



I had not had 
thou hadst not had 
he had not had 
we had not had 
you had not had 
they had not had 



je ne" pa 
tu na pa 
il na pa. 
nou na von pj 
vou nave pa 
il non pa. 



je ne* pa zu 
tu na pa zu 
il na pa zu 
nou na von pazu 
vou na ve pa zu 
il non pa zu 

je na ve* pa. 
tu na ve pa. 
il na ve pa 
nou na vi on pa 
vou na vie pa. 
il na ve pa 



je na ve pazu 
tu na ve pa. zu 
il na ve pa zu 
nounavionpazu 
vou na vi 6 pa zu 
il na v£ pa zu 



14 



AVOIR 



to have. 



'ami. dne. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite, op£ra. oter. tout, route. 
^'Zt. arm. twb. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over, too, fool. 



Je n'eus pas 
tu n'eus pas 
il n'eut pas 
aous n'eiimes pas 
vous n'eutes pas 
ils n'eurent pas 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

/ had not 
thou hadst not 
he had not 
we had not 
you had not 
they had not 



je nu pa 
tu nupa 
il nu pa 
nou num pa 
vou nut pa 
il nur pa 



Je n'eus pas eu 
tu n'eus pas eu 
il n'eut pas eu 
nous n'eiimes pas eu 
vous n'eutes pas eu 
ils n'eurent pas eu 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

I had not had 
thou hadst not had 
he had not had 
we had not had 
you had not had 
they had not had 



Je n'aurai pas 
tu n'auras pas 
il n'aura pas 
nous n'aurons pas 
vous n'aurez pas 
ils n'auront pas 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

/ shall or will not have 
thou shalt or wilt not have 
he shall or will not have 
we shall or will not have 
you shall or will not have 
they shall or will not have 



je nu pa zu 
tu nu pa zu 
il nu pa zu 
nou num pa zu 
vou nut pa zu 
il nur pa zu 



je no 7 re pa 
tu no ra pa 
il no ra pa 
nou no ron pa 
vou no re pa 
il no ron pa 



Je n'aurai pas eu 
tu n'auras pas eu 
il n'aura pas eu 
nous n'aurons pas eu 
vous n'aurez pas eu 
ils n'auront pas eu 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

I shall or will not have had 
thou shalt or wilt not have had 
he shall or will not have had 
we shall or will not have had 
you shall or will not have had 
they shall or will not have had 



je no re pa zu 
tu no ra pa zu 
il no ra pa zu 
nou no ron pa zu 
vou no re pa zu 
il no ron pa zu 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Je n'aurais pas 
tu n'aurais pas 
il n'aurait pas 
nous n'aurions pas 
vous n'auriez pas 
ils n'auraient pas 



PRESENT. 

/ should, would, could, 
or might not have 
thou shouldst, wouldst, 

couldst, or mights t not have 
he should, would, could, 

or might not hare 
we should, ivould, could, 

or might 710 1 have 
you should, would, could, 

or might 7io t have 
they should, would, could, 
or might not have 



je no re pa 
tu no re pa 
il no re pa 
nou no ri on pa 
vou no ri 6 pa 
il no r£ pa 



AVOIR 



to have. 



15 



3 mwr mur. jeune. jewne. boite. bozte. ancie, ingrat. orcde. wn, ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. £-72, as ni in union. ttf, as Hi, in Wi/Ziam. 



-O- PAST, 

or compound of the present. 
Je n'aurais pas eu, I should, would, could, je no re pa zu 

or ^'e n'eusse pas e%* or might not have had je nus pa zu 

tu n'aurais pas eu, thou shouldst+wouldst, couldst, tu no re pa zu 
or tu n'eusses pas eu or mightst not have had tu nus pa zu 

il n'aurait pas eu, he should, would, could, 

or il rfeut pas eu or might not have had 

nous n'aurions pas eu, we should, would, could, 
or nous n'eussions pas eu or might not have had 
vous n'auriez pas eu, you should, would, could, 
or vous n'eussiez pas eu or might not have had 
ils n'auraient pas eu, they should, would could, 
or might not have had 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

have not (thou) 
let him not have 
let us not have 
have not (you) 
let them not have 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 

PRESENT. 



or ils n'eussent pas eu 
-p- 



qu'il 



n aie pas 
n'ait pas 
n'ayons pas 
n'ayez pas 
qu'ils n'aient pas 



il no re pa zu 
il nu pa zu 
nou no ri on pa zu 
nou nu si on pa zu 
vou no ri e pa zu 
vou nu si epd zn 
il no re pa zu 
il nus pa zu 



nepa 
kil ne pa 
ne yon pa 
ne ye pa 
kil ne pa 



-Q- 

Que je n'aie pas 
que tu n'aies pas 
qu'il n'ait pas 
que nous n'ayons pas 
que vous n'ayez pas 
qu'ils n'aient pas 



that I may 
that thou mayst 
that he may 
that we may 
that you may 
that they may 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compound of the present. 



Que je n'aie pas eu 
que tu n'aies pas eu 
qu'il n'ait pas eu 
que nous n'ayons pas eu 
que vous n'ayez pas eu 
qu'ils n'aient pas eu 

-S- IMPERFECT. 

Que je n'eusse pas that I might 

que tu n'eusses pas 

qu'il n'eutpas 

que nous n'eussions pas 

que vous n'eussiez pas 

qu'ils n'eussent pas 

-T- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 
Que je n'eusse pas eu lhat I might 

que tu n'eusses pas eu that thou mightst 
qu'il n'eut pas eu that he might 

que nous n'eussions pas eu that we might 
que vous n'eussiez pas eu that you might 
qu'ils n'eussent pas eu that they might 



that I may 
that thou mayst 
that he may 
that we may 
that you may 
that they may 



that thou mightst J 
that he might t 
that we might f 
that you might 
that they might J 



kej ne pa 
S ke tu ne pa 
•* kil ne pa 
I - ke nou ne yon pa 
» ke vou ne ye" pa 

kil ne pa 



s kej ne pa. zu 

S. ke tu ne pa zu 

g* kil ne pa zu 

§ ke nou ne yon pa zu 

g- ke vou ne ye pa zu 

a- kil ne pa zu 

kej nus pa 
3 ke tu nus pa 
S. kil nu pa 
g - ke nou nu si on pa 
« ke vou nu si e pa 

kil nus pa. 



j* kej nus pa zu 

2. ke tu nus pazu 

g - kil nu pa zu 

g ke nou nu si on pa zu 

&- ke vou nu si e pa zu 

a-, kil nus pa. zu 



^m 



16 



AVOIR 



to have. 



! ami. dne. te. ecrit. mere. etre. tdol-c. gite. ope>a. dter. tout, voute. 
l at. arm., tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 

Avoir to have. (Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



-F- 


PRESENT. 


Ai-je 

as-tu 
a-t-il 


have I 
hast thou 
has he 


avons-nous 


have we 


avez-vous 
ont-ils 


have you 
have they 



atu 
a til 

a von nou 
a ve vou 
on til 



-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

Ai-je eu have I had 6] u 

as-tu eu hast thou had a tu u 

a-t-il eu has he had a til u 

avons-nous eu have we had a von nou zn 

avez-vous eu have you had a ve* vou zu 

oiit-iis eu have they had on til zu 



-H- 

Avais-je 

avais-tu 

avait-il 

avions-nous 

aviez-vous 

avaient-ils 



IMPERFECT. 

had 1 

hadst thou 
had he 
had we 
had you 
had they 

PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 



avej 
a ve tu 
a ve til 
a vi on nou 
a vi 6 vou 
a ve til 



Avais-je eu 


had I had 


a vej u 


avais-tu eu 


hadst thou had 


a ve tu u 


avait-il eu 


had he had 


a ve til u 


avions-nous eu 


had ice had 


a vi on nou zu 


aviez-vous eu 


had you had 


a vi 6 vou zu 


avaient-ils eu 


had they had 


a ve til zu 


-j- 


PRETERIT DEFINITE. 




Eus-je 


had I 


U J 


eus-tu 


hadst thou 


u tu 


eut-il 


had he 


util 


eurnes-nouy 


had ice 


urn nou 


eutes-vouB 


had you 


ut vou 


eureni-ils 


haa they 


ur til 



AVOIR 



to have 



3 mwr. mur. jeune. jctine. boite. bozte. ancre. zngrat. onde. tm. ameN. 
4 j, as s in plea 5 lire, gn, as ni in union, ill, as Hi, in WiZ/iam. 



-K- 


PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the -preterit. 




Eus-je eu 


had I had 


u j u 


eus-tu eu 


hadst thou had 


u tu u 


eut-il eu 


had he had 


u ti lu 


eumes-nous eu 


had we had 


um nou zu 


eutes-vous eu 


had you had 


ut vou zu 


eurent-ils eu 


had they had 


ur til zu 


-L- 


FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 




Aurai-je 


shall or will I have 


orej 


auras-tu 


shall or wilt thou have 


ra tu 


aura-t-il 


shall or will he have 


ra til 


aurons-nous 


shall or will we have 


ron nou 


aurez-vous 


shall or will you have 


r£ vou 


auront-ils 


shall or will they have 


ron til 


-M- 


FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 




Aurai-je eu 


shall or will I have had 


rej u 


auras-tu eu 


shalt or wilt thou have had 


ra. tu u 


aura-t-il eu 


shall or will he have had 


ra til u 


aurons-nous eu 


shall or will we have had 


ron ncu zu 


aurez-vous eu 


shall or will you have had 


re vou zu 


auront-ils eu 


shall or will they have had 


ron til zu 



Aurais-je 



aurait-il 



aunons-nous 



auriez-vous 



auraient-ils 



Aurais-je eu, 
or eusst-je eu 
aurais-tu eu, 
or eusses-tu eu 
aurait-il eu, 
or tut-il eu 
aurions-nous eu, 
or eussions-nous eu 
auriez-vous eu, 
or eussies-vous eu 
auraient-ils eu, 
or eussen(-iU eu 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

should, would, could, 

or might I have 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
or mightst thou have 
should, would, could, 

or might he have 
should, xcould, could, 
or might we have 
should, would, could, 

or might you have 
should, would, could, 

or might they have 

PAST, 

or compound of the present. 



should, would, could) 

or might I have had 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou have had 
should, would, could, 

or might he have had 
should, would, could, 

or might ice have had 
should, would, could, 

or might you have had 
should, would, could, 

or might they have had 



orej 
o re tu 
ore til 
o ri on nou 
o ri 6 vou 
o re til 



o rej u 
u sej u 
o re tu u 
us tu u 
o re til eu 
u ti lu 

o ri on nou zu 
u si on nou zu 
o ri 6 vou zu 
u si e vou zu 
o re til zu 
us tU zu 



18 



AVOIR 



to have. 



'ami. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gzte. opera, oter. tout, vowte 
2 at, arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 

Avoir to have (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



N'ai-je pas 
n'as-tu pas 
n'a-t-il pas 
n'avons-nous pas 
n'avez-vous pas 
n'ont-ils pas 



have I not 
hast thou not 
has he not 
have we not 
have you not 
have they not 



n«j pa 
na tu pa 
na til pa 
na von nou pa 
na ve vou pa 
non til pa 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 



N'ai je pas eu 
n'as-tu pas eu 
n'a-t-il pas eu 
n'avons-nous pas eu 
n'avez-vous pas eu 
n'ont-ils pas eu 



have I not had 
hast thou not had 
has he not had 
have we not had 
have you not had 
have they not had 



n£j pa zu 
na tu pa zu 
na til pa zu 
na von nou pa zu 
na ve* vou pa zu 
non til pa zu 



N'avais-je pas 
n'avais-tu pas 
n'avait-il pas 
n'avions-nous pas 
n'aviez-vous pas 
n'avaient-ils pas 



IMPERFECT. 

had I not 
hadst thou not 
had he not 
had we not 
had you not 
had they not 



na vej pa 
na ve tu pa 
na ve til pa 
na vi on nou pa 
na vi € vou pa 
na ve til pa 



PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 



N'avais-je pas eu 
n'avais-tu pas eu 
n'avait-il pas eu 
n'avions-nous pas eu 
n'aviez-vous pas eu 
n'avaient-ils pas eu 



had I not had 
hadst thou not had 
had he not had 
had we not had 
had you not had 
had they not had 



na vej pa zu 
na ve tu pa zu 
na ve til pa zu 
navionnoupa zu 
na vi £ vou pa r /u 
na ve til pa zu 



N'eus-je pas 
n'eus-tu pas 
n'eut-il pas 
n'eumes-nous pas 
n'eutes-vous pas 
n'eurent-ils pas 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

had J not 
hadst thou nU 
had fie not 
had we not 
had you not 
had they not 



nuj pf 
nu tu pa 
nu til pa 
num nou pa 
nut vou pa 
nur til pa 



AVOIR 



to have. 



19 



J, as s in pleasure, gn, as m in union, ill, as ft in Witfiam. 



-K- 

N'eus-je pas eu 
n'eus-tu pas eu 
n'eut-il pas eu 
n'eumes-nous pas eu 
n'eutes-vous pas eu 
n'eurent-ils pas eu 

-L- 

N'aurai-je pas 
n'auras-tu pas 
n'aura-t-il pas 
n'aurons-nous pas 
n'aurez-vous pas 
n'auront-ils pas 

-M- 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 
had J not had 
hadst thou not had 
had he not had 
had we not had 
had you not had 
had they not had 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I not have 
shalt or wilt thou not have 
shall or will he not have 
shall or will we not have 
shall or will you not have 
shall or will they not have 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 



or compound of the future. 
N'aurai-je pas eu shall or will I not have had 

shalt or wilt thou not have had 
shall or will he not have had 
shall or will ive not have had 
shall or will you not have had 
shall or will they not have had 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

should, would, could, 

or might I not have 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou not have 
should, would, could, 

or might he not have 
should, would, could, 

or might we not have 
should, would, could, 

or might you not have 
should, would, could, • 

or might they not have 

' u " PAST, 

or compound of the present. 
N'aurais-je pas eu, should, would, could, 

or might I not have had 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou not have had 
should, would, could, 
or might he not have had 
n aunons-nous pas eu, should, would, could, 
or n eusswns-nous pas eu or might we not have had 
n aunez-vous pas eu, should, would, could, 
or n eussiez-vous pas eu or mi^ht you not have had 
n auraient-ils pas eu, should, would could, 
or n eussent-ils pas eu or might they not have had 

2 ]) 



n'auras-tu pas eu 
n'aura-t-il pas eu 
n'aurons-nous pas eu 
n'aurez-vous pas eu 
n'auront-ils pas eu 



N'aurais-je pas 
n'aurais-tu pas 
n'aurait-il pas 
n'aurions-nous pas 
n'auriez-vous pas 
n'auraient-ils pas 



or n'eusse-je pas eu 
n'aurais-tu pas eu, 
or n'eusses-tupaseu 
n'aurait il pas eu, 
or n'eut-ilpas eu 



nuj pa zu 
nu tu pa zu 
nu til pa zu 
num nou pa zu 
nut vou pa zu 
nur til pa zu 

no rej pa 
no ra tu pa 
no ra til pa 
no ron nou pa 
no re vou pa. 
no ron til pa 



no rej pa zu 
no ra tu pa zu 
no ra til pa zu 
no ron nou pa zu 
no re vou pa zu 
no ron tU pa zu 



no rej pa 
no re tu pa 
no ih til pa 
no ri on nou pa 
no ri e vou pa 
no il til pa 



no re\j p£ zu 
nu sej pd zu 
no re tu pa zu 
nus tu pa zu 
no re til pa zu 
nu til pd zu 
no ri on nou pa z\\ 
nu si on nou pa zu 
no ri £ vou pa 
nu si e vou pa zu 
no re til pa zu 
nus W pd zu 



20 



Y AVOIR 



there to be. 



l crmi. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. op£ra. dter. tout, vouto. 
2 ar. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool 

CONJUGATION OF THE UNIPERSONAL VERB. 

Y avoir there to be (Affirmatively.) 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

-A- PRESENT. 

Y avoir there to be 

-B- PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 

Y avoir eu there to have been 

-C- PARTICirLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 

Y ayant there being 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

Y ayant eu there having been 

INDICATIVE MOOD- 

-F- PRESENT. 

II y a there is or there are 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

II y a eu there has been or there have been 

-H- IMPERFECT. 

II y avait there was or there were 

ml* PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

II y avait eu there had been 

-J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I J y eut there was or there were 

-K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

II y eut eu there had been 

-L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE, 

II y aura there will be 

-M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, * 

or compound of the future. 
II y aura eu there will have been 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 



H y auiait 


there would be 


-0- 


PAST, 


i 


9r compound of the present. 


11 y aurait eu 


there would have been 




SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 


-Q- 


PRESENT. 


Qu'il y ait 


that there may be 


-R- 


PRETERIT Or PAST, 




or compound of the present. 


Qu'il y ait eu 


that there may have been 


-s- 


IMPERFECT. 


Qu'il y eut 


that there might be 


-T- 


PLUPERFECT, 


or compound of the imperfect. 


Qu'il y eut eu 


that there miglit have been 



i a voi ru 
i £yan 
i e" yan tu 

il ya 

il ya u 
il ya ve 

il ya ve tu 
ilyu 

il yu tu 
il yo ra 

il yo ra u 

il yo re 

il yo r£ tu 

kily£ 

kil y£ tu 
kil yu 

kil yu tn 



y avoir there to be 21 

s mur. mur. jewne. jeune. bo/te. boite. ancre. ingrat. onde. un, ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union. ?7Z, as Z/i, in Wi/aam. 

CONJUGATION OF THE UNIPERSONAL VERB. 

Y avoir there to be (Negatively.) 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

-A- PRESENT. 

Ne pas y avoir not there to be ne pa zi a voir 

-B- PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. • 

Ne pas y avoir eu not there to have been ne pazi a voi ru 

-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 

N'y ayant pas there not being ni e yan pa. 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT 

N'y ayant pas eu there not having been ni e yan pa zu 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

-F- PRESENT. 

II n'y a pas there is not or there are not il gna pa 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present- 

ji , there has not been >, 

y P or there have not been " V 

-H- IMPERFECT. 

II n'y avait pas *there was not or there were not il gna ve pa 

-I- PLUPERFECT, 

er compound of the imperfect. 
II n'y avait pas eu there had not been il gna ve pa zu 

-J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

II n'y eut pas there xvas nof or there were not il gnu pa 

-K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

II n'y eut pas eu there had not been il gnu pa in 

-L- FUTURE AESOLUTE. 

II n'y aura pas there will not be il gno ra pa. 

-M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

II n'y aura pas eu there will not have been il gno ra pa zu 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

II n"*y aurait pas there would not be il gno re pa 

-o- PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

II n'y aurait pas eu there would not have been il gno re pa zu 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

-Q- PRESENT. 

Qu'il n'y ait pas that there may not be kil gne zu 

-R- PRETERIT Or PAST, 

or compound of the present, 
Qu'il n'y ait pas eu that there may not have been kil gne pa zu 

-S- IMPERFECT. 

Qu'il ny eut pas that there might not be kil gnu pa 

-T- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

Qu'il n'y eut pas eu that there might not have been kil gnu pa zu 



22 y avoir there to be. 

l *mi. ane. te. eerit. mere. etre. z'dole. gzte. opera, oter. tout. voute. 
2 at. arm. tuh. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE UNIPERSONAL VERB. 

Y avoir there to be (Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

-F- PRESENT. 

Y a-t-il is there or are there ya til 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

Y a-t-il eu has there been ox have there been ya ti lu 

-H- IMPERFECT. 

Y avait-il was there or were there ya ve til 

-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

Y avait-il eu had there been ya v£ ti lu 

yu til 

yu ti lu 
yo ra til 

-M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

Y aura-t-il eu will there have been yo ra ti lu 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- r RESENT. 

Y aurait-il would there be yo re til 

-O- PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

Y aurait-il eu would there have been yo re ti lu 



-J- 




PRETERIT DEFINITE. 


Y eut-il 




was there or were there 


-K- 




PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 


Y eut-il 


eu 


had there been 


-L- 




FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 


Y aura- 


L-il 


will there be 



y avoir there to be 23 

3 mur. mur. jeune. jeime. boite. hoite. ancre. ingrnt. o?ide. un. ameN 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in umon. ill, as Z/i, in Wi/Zzam. 

CONJUGATION OF THE UNIPERSONAL VERB. 

V avoir /Acre to be (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 



t 



INDICATIVE MOOT). 

F- PRESENT. 

N'y a-t-il pas is there not or are there not gna til pa 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

N'y a-t-il pas eu has there not been gna til pa zu 

or have there not been 

-H- IMPERFECT. 

N'y avait-il pas was there not or were there not gna ve til pi 

-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 
N'y avait-il pas eu had there not been gna ve til pa zu 

-J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

N'y eut-il pas was there not or were there not gnu til pa 

-K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

N'y eut-il pas eu had there not been gnu til pa zu 

»L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

Ny aura-t-il pas will there not be gno ra til pa 

-M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

N'y aura-t-il pas eu will there not have been gno ra til pa zu 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

*2f» PRESENT. 

N'y aurait-il pas would there not be gno re til pa 

-o- PAST, 

or compound of the present 

N'y aurait-il pas eu would there not have been gno re til pa zu 

2 D % 



24 



ETRE 



to be. 



'ami. ane. te. e'crit. mere. etre. idoie. g/te. opera, dter. towt. voute, 
2 at. arm. twb. «le. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fooL 

tCONJUGrATICN OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 

Etre to be (Affirmatively.) 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



"A- 

etre 

-B- 



PRESFNT, 

to be 



PAST Or PERFECT, 
or compound of the preser** 

to have been 

PARTICIPLE PRESENT OY ACTIVE. 

being 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

ayant ete having been 

-E- PARTICIPLE PAST OR PERFECT OR PASSIVF 

6t6 been 



avoir £te 

-c- 

6tant 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



-F- 

Je suis 
t a e& 
il est 

:ious sommes 
vous etes 
ils sont 

-G- 



J'ai 6t6 

tu as ete" 

il a ete 

nous avons e*te 

vous avez ete" 

ils ont ete 

-H- 

J' e"tais 
tu etais 
il etait 
nous etions 
vous eHiez 
ils etaient 

-i- 

.1 'avais ete" 
tu avais e*te" 
il avait 6te 
nous avions ete" 
vous aviez 6t6 
ils avaient 6t6 



PRESENT. 

lam 
thou art 
he is 
we are 
you are 
they are 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 
I have been 
thou hast been 
he has been 
we have been 
you have been 
they have been 

IMPERFECT. 

I was 
thou wast 
he was 
we were 
you were 
they were 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 
1 had been 
thou hadst been 
he had been 
we had been 
you had been 
they had been 



£ tre 

a vio re te 
e tan 

e yan te te 
6t€ 



je su i 
tu e 
ile 

nou som 
vou z&t 
il son 



\6 6 i \ 

tu a 7 > te* 

i la 4 H 

nou *a von ze" te 

vou za ve" z6 te" 

il z« n te" te 

je ce 
tu 6 te 
il e te 

n »u ze" ti on 
v »u ze ti e 
i! ze te 



j t ve ze te' 
t i a ve 7 e" te" 
i la ve* t : te 
Diuzauon ze" t6 
v »u za \i\ e" z£ te 
H za v? te" i€ 



£tre 



to be. 



25 



*m:xr. mur. jeune. 


jci2ne. hoite. boite. ancre, 


zngrat. oracle, un, amew. 


4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as m in union. 


ill, as Hi, in Wi Hi am 


-j- 


PRETERIT DEFINITE. 




Je fus 


I was 


je fu 


tu fus 


thou wast 


tufu 


il fat 


he was 


ilfu 


nous fumes 


we were 


nou fum 


vous ftites 


you were 


vou fut 


ils furent 


they were 


ilfur 


-K- 


PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit* 




J'eus £te* 


I had been 


ju ze* te* 


tu eus ete* 


thou hadst been 


tu u ze te* 


il eut ete 


he had been 


i lu te tt 


nous eumes e'te' 


we had been 


nou zum ze* te 


vous eutes £te 


you had been 


vou zut ze te 


ils eurent ete 


they had been 


il zur te te 


-L- 


FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 




Je serai 


/ shall or will be 


je sr6 


tu seras 


thou shalt or wilt be 


tu sra. 


il sera 


he shall or will be 


il sra 


nous serons 


we shall or will be 


nou sron 


vous serez 


you shall or will be 


vou sre 


ils seront 


they shall or will be 


il sron 



J'aurai ete 
tu auras ete" 
il aura ete 
nous aurons ete 
vous aurez ete 
ils auront ete 



•N- 

Je serais 
tu serais 
il serait 
nous serions 
vous seriez 
iLs seraient 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future, 

I shall or will have been 
thou shalt or wilt have been 
he shall or will have been 
we shall or will have been 
you shall or will have been 
they shall or will have been 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

J should, would, could, 

or might be 
thou shGuldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst be 
he should, would, could, 

or might be 
we should, would, could, 

or might be 
you should, would, could, 

or might be 
they sMuld, would, could, 

or might be 



jo re e te" 
tu o ra ze te 
il o ra € te 
nou zo ron ze te 
vou zo re ze te 
il zo ron te" te 



.Josre 



tu sre 
il sre 



nou se n on 



vou se n e 



il sr& 



26 



ETRE 



to be. 



ami. ane. te. e'crit. mere. etre. z'dole. g/te. op£ra. dter. tout, voute 
'at. arm. titb. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over.- too. fool. 



-o- P. 

or compound 
J'aurais ete 
ox feusse ete 
tu aurais ete 
or tu eusses ete 
il aurait ete 
or il eut ete 
nous aurions 6t6 
or nous eussions ete 
vous auriez ete 
or vous eussiez e\ 
ils auraient ete* 
or ils eussent ete 



Sois 
qu'il soit 
soyons 
soyez 
qu'ils soient 



AST, 

of the present. 
I should, would, could, 

or might have been 
thoushouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst have been 
he should, would, could, 

or might have been 
we should, would, could, 

or might have been 
you should, would, could, 

or might have been 
they should, would, could, 
or might have been 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

be {thou) 
let him be 
let us be 
be (you) 
let them be 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



jo re ze te 
jus e te 
tu o re ze te 
tu us zt te 
i lo re te te 
i lu te te 

nou zo ri on ze t€ 
nou su si on ze te 
vouzori e ze te 
vou su si e ze te 
il zo re te t£ 
il zus te te 



soi 

kil soi 
soi yon 
soi ye 
kil soi 



Que je sois 
que tu sois 
qu'il soit 
que nous soyons 
que vous soyez 
qu'ils soient 



that I may be 
that thou mayst be 
that he may be 
that we may be 
that you may be 
that they may be 



-R- 

Que j'aie ete 

que tu aies ete* 

qu'il ait ete 

que nous ay oris ete 

que vous ayez ete' 

qu'ils aient ete 

-s- 

Que je fusse 

que tu fusses 

qu'il fut 

que nous fussions 

que vous fussiez 

qu'ils fussent 

-T- 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compound of the present, 

that I may have been 
that thou mayst have been 
that he may have been 
that we may have been 
that you may have been 
that they may have been 



IMPERFECT. 

that I might be 
that thou mightst be 
that he might be 
that we might be 
that you migJit be 
that they might be 

PLUPERFECT, 



or compound of the imperfect. 
Que j'eusse 6t6 that I might have been 

que tu eusses ete that thou mightst have been 
qu'il eut ete that lie might have been 

que nous eussions 6t6 that we might have been 
que vous eussiez et£ that you might have been 
qu'ils eussent £te that they might have been 



kej soi 

ke tu soi 

kil soi 

ke nou soi yon 

ke vou soi ye* 

kil soi 



ke je e te 

ke tu e ze* t6 

ki le te" te 

ke nou ze yon ze* te 

ke vou ze ye ze t£ 

kil ze te te 

kej fus 

ke tu fus 

kilfu 

ke nou fu si on 

ke vou fu si e 

kil fus 



ke jus e t£ 

ke tu us z6 t6 

ki lu te* t£ 

ke nou zu si on z€ te* 

ke vou zu si € ze te 

kil zus te le 



ETRE 



to be 



27 



3 raz/r. mur. jeime. jeune. boite. hoite. ancre. zngrat. onde. un. arneN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as //**, in Wi//iani 

CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 

Etre to be (Negatively.) 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



-A- 

Ne pas etre 

-B- 



PRESENT. 

not to be 



ne pa ze tre 



PAST Or PERFECT, 
or compound of the present. 

ne pas avoir ete not to have been 



ne pa za voirete 
ne tan pa 



-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 

n' etant pas not being 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

n'ayant pas ete not having been ne* yan pa ze te 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Je ne suis pas 

tu n'es pas 

il n'est pas 

nous ne sommes pas 

vous n'etes pas 

ils ne sont pas 



PRESENT. 

J am not 
thou art not 
he is not 
we are not 
you are not 
they are not 



-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

Je n'ai pas ete / have not been 

tu n'as pas ete thou hast not been 

il n'a pas ete he has not been 

nous n'avons pas ete we have not been 
vous n'avez pas ete you have not been 
ils n'ont pas ete they have not been 



-H- 

Je n'etais pas 
tu n'etais pas 
il n'etait pas 
nous n'etions pas 
vous n'etiez pas 
ils n'etaient pas 



IMPERFECT. 

/ was not 
thou wast not 
he was not 
we were not 
you were not 
they were not 



-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

Je n'avais pas ete / had not been 
tu n'avais pas ete thou hadst not been 
il n'avait pas ete he had not been 
nous n'avions pas ete we had not been 
vous n'aviez pas ete you had not been 
ils n'avaient pas ete they had not been 



jeN su i pa 
tu ne pa 
il ne pa 
nouN som p& 
vou net pa 
il ne son pa 



je ne* pa ze te* 
tu na pa ze te* 
il na pa ze te 
nou na von pa ze te 
vou na ve pa. ze te 
il non pa ze te 

je ne te pa 
tu ne te pa 
il ne te pa 
nou ne ti on pa 
vou ne ti e pa 
il ne te pa. 



je na ve pa z6 te 
tu na ve pa z& te 
il na ve pa ze t6 
nounavi on pa ze te 
vou na vi e pa ze te 
il rtavepa ae te 



28 



&TRE 



to be. 



•ami. dne. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idofe. gzte, op£ra. oter. tout, vowte. 
2 at. firm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



Je ne fus pas 
tu ne fus pas 
il ne flit pas 
nous ne fumes pas 
vous ne futes pas 
ils ne furent pas 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

/ was not 
thou wast not 
he was not 
we were not 
you were not 
they were not 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 



Je n'eus pas £te" 
tu n'eus pas ete 
il n'eut pas ete 
nous n'eilmes pas ete 
vous n'eutes pas ete 
ils n'eurent pas ete 



I had not been 
thou hadst not been 
he had not been 
we had not been 
you had not been 
they had not been 



jeN fu pa. 
tuN fu pa 
il ne fu pa 
nouN fum pa 
voun fut pa 
il ne fur pa 



je nu pa ze" te" 
tu nu pa z6 te" 
il nu pa z£ te" 
nou num pa ze" te 
vou nut pa ze te 
il nur pa. ze" te 



Je ne serai pas 
tu ne seras pas 
il ne sera pas 
nous ne serons pas 
vous ne serez pas 
ils ne seront pas 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

/ shall or will not be 
thou shalt or wilt not be 
he shall or will not be 
we shall or will not be 
you shall or will not be 
they shall or will not be 



jeN sre pa 
tuN sra pa 
il ne sra pa 
nouN sron pa 
voun sr€ pa 
il no sron pa 



Te n'aurai pas ete 
tu n'auras pas ete 
il n'aura pas ete 
nous n'aurons pas ete 
vous n'aurez pas £te 
ils n'auront pas ete 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

I shall or will not have been jno re" pS'ze" te" 
thou shalt or wilt not have been tu no ra pa ze" te" 
he shall or will not have been il no ra pa ze te" 
we shall or will not have been nou no ron pa ze" te 
you shall or will not have been vou no re pa z€ te" 
they shall or will not have been il no ron pa ze" t€ 



Je ne serais pas 
tu ne serais pas 
il ne serait pas 
nous ne serions pas 
vous ne seriez pas 
ils ne seraient pas 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

I should, would, could , 



jeN sre pa 

or mi^htnot be J r 

thoushou/dsf f wouldst,couldst, f , „ 

or mightst not be 
he should, would, could, 

or might not be 
we should, mould, could, 

or m i glit not be 
you should, would, could, 

or might not be 
they should, would, could, 

or might not be 



il ne sre pa 
noiiN se ri on pa 
voun se ri e pa 
il ne sr£\)a 



ETRE 



to be. 



29 



8 mwr. mur. jeane. jeune. boite. bozte. ancre, ingrat. onde. un, ameN, 
4 j, as 5 in pleasure, gn, as ni in union. ill, as Hi, in VVi Hi am. 



PAST, 

or compound of the present. 



Je n'aurais pas ete 
or^'e iCeusse pas ete 
tu n'aurais pas ete 
or tu n'eusses pas ete 
il n'aurait pas ete 
or il rteut pas ete 
nous n'aurions pas ete 
or nous rteussions pas ete 
vous n'auriez pas ete 
or vow rCeussiezpas ete 
ils n'auraient pas ete 
or ilsn'eussent pas ete 



I should, would, 

could, or might 

thou shouldst, wouldst, 

couldst, or might st 

he should, icould, 

could, or might 

we should, would, 

could, or might 

you should, would, 

could, or might 

they should, would, 

could, or might 



je no re pa ze te 
je nus pa ze te 
tu no re pa ze te 
s tu nus pa ze te 
** il no re pa ze te 
if il nu pa ze te 
ob nou no ri on pa ze 16 
^ nou nu si on pa ze te 
$ vou no ri e pa ze te" 
vou nu si e pa ze te 
il no re pa ze te 
il nus pa ze te . 



Ne sois pas 
qu'il ne soit pas 
ne soyons pas 
ne soyez pas 
qu'ils ne soient pas 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

be not (thou) ne soi pa 

let him not be kil ne soi pa 

let us not be ne soi yon pa 

be not (you) ne soi ye pa. 

let them not be kil ne soi pa 



Que je ne sois pas 
que tu ne sois pas 
qu'il ne spit pas 
que nous ne soyon? pae 
que vous ne soyez pas 
qu'ils ne soient pas 

-R- 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 

PRESENT. 

that I may 
that thou may st 
that he may 1 5 

pas that ice may [ ^ 

that you may 
that they may J 

PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compound of the present. 
Que je n'aie pas ete that I may 

que tu n'aies pas ete that thou mayst 

qu'il n'ait pas ete that he may 

que nous n'ayons pas 6te that we may 
que vous n'ayez pas ete* that you may 
qu'i'.s n'aient pas ete that they may 

-S- IMPERFECT. 

Que je ne fusse pas that I might 

que tu ne fusses pas that thou mightst 

qu'il ne fut pas that he might 

que nous ne fussions pas that we might 

que vous ne fussiez pas that you might 

qu'ils ne fussent pas that they might 

-T- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 
Que je n'eusse pas ete that I might 
que tu n'eusses pas ete' that thou mightst 
qu'il n'eut pas ete that he might 

que nous n'eussions pas £te that we might 
que vous n'eussiez pas £t£ that you might 
qu'ils n'enssent oas ete that thty might 



ke jex soi pa 
ke tux soi pa 
kil ne soi pa 
ke nouN soi yon pa 
ke voun soi j6 pa 
kil ne soi pa. 



3 kej ne pa. ze t£ 

S ke tu ne pa z£ t£ 

a kil ne pa ze te 

« ke nou ne yon pa ze te 

^ ke vou ne" ye pa ze" te - 

§ kil ne pa. ze t6 

ke jeN fus pa 

ke tu.N fus pa. 
§ kil ne fu pa 
cj, ke nouN fu si on pa 
b ke voux fu si 6* pa. 

kil ne fus pa 



a kej nus pa z£ t6 

*•* ke tu nus pa ze t6 

a - kil nu pa. ze* t6 

«> ke nou nu si onpaze te 

tt ko vou nu si £ pa ze te 

§ kil nus pa ze* te 



30 



ETRE 



to be. 



'ami. one. te. eerit. mere. etre. idole. gzte. opera, dter. tout, vottte. 
t-aL arm. t«b. ale. mare, there, zdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 

Etre to be (Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



-F- 


PRESENT. 


Suis-je 

es-tu 

est-il 


am I 
art thou 
is he 


sommes-nous 


are we 


etes-vous 
sont-ils 


are you 
are they 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 



SU 1J 

e tu 
etil 

som nou 
et vou 
son til 



Ai-je ete 


have I been 


£jete* 


as-tu £te 


hast thou been 


a tu e te 


a-t-il et£ 


has he been 


a ti le te 


avons-nous ete 


have we been 


a von nou ze te 


avez-vous ete 


have you been 


a ve vou ze* te 


ont-ils ete 


have they been 


on til ze te 


-H- 


IMPERFECT. 




Etais-je 


was I 


£tej 


<Hais-tu 


wast thou 


e te tu 


e*tait-il 


was he 


e te til 


£tions-nous 


were we 


e ti on nou 


£tiez-vous 


were you 


e ti e vou 


etaient-ils 


were they 


e* te til 


-i- 


PLUPERFECT, 




or c 


impound of the imperfect 




Avais-je ete 


had I been 


a ve j£ te 


avais-tu ete 


hadst thou been 


a ve tu 6 te* 


avait-il ete 


had he been 


a ve ti le te* 


avicns-nous ete* 


had we been 


a vi on nou ze* ti 


aviez-vous ete 


had you been 


a vi e vou ze te 


avaient-ils etc* 


had they been 


a ve til ze te* 


-j- 


ritETERIT DEFINITE. 




Fus-je 


was I 


filj 


fus-tu 


wast thou 


fu tu 


fut-il 


was he 


fu til 


fumes-nous 


were ice 


fum nou 


futes-vous 


ictre you 


fut vou 


furent-ils 


were they 


fur til 



ETRE 



to be 



31 



s mur. mur. jeitne. jeune. boite. boite. ancre. ingrat. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in um'on. ill, as Hi, in WW/* am. 



Eus-je ete* 
eus-tu ete 
eut-il ete 
eumes-nous ete* 
eiites-vous ete 
eurent-ils ete 

-L- 

Serai-je 

seras-tu 

sera-t-il 

serons-nous 

serez-vous 

seront-ils 



Aurai-je ete 
auras-tu ete 
aura-t-il ete* 
aurons-nous ete 
aurez-vous ete 
auront-ils ete 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 
had I been 
hadst thou been 
had he been 
had we been 
had you been 
had they been 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or ivill 1 be 
shall or wilt thou be 
shall or will he be 
shall or will we be 
shall or will you be 
shall or will they be 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future 

shall or will I have been 
shall or wilt thou have been 
shall or will he have been 
shall or will we have been 
shall or will you have been 
shall or will they have been 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Serais-je 



serais-tu 



serait-il 



senons-nous 



senez-vous 



seraient-ils 



PRESENT. 

should, woula\ could, 

or might I be 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou be 
should, would, could, 

or might he be 
should, would, could, 

or might we be 
should, would, could, 

or might you be 
should, would, could, 

or might they be 

PAST, 

or compound of the present. 



Aurais-je ete 
or eusse-je eti 
aurais-tu ete 
or eusses-tu tie 
aurait-il ete 
or eicl-il ete 
aurions-nous 6t6 
or eussions-nous ete 
auriez-vous ete* 
or eussiez-vous Sle 
auraient-ils 6t6 
or eussent-ils iti 



should, would, could, 

or might I have been 
shouldst, wouldst, couldsi, 

or mightst thou have been 
should, would, could, 

or might he have been 
should, would, could, 

or might we have been 
should, would, could, 

or might you have been 
should, icould, could, 

or might they have been 
2E 



u je t6 
u tu e te 
u ti le te 
um nou z6 t6 
ut vou ze te 
ur til ze te 

se rej 
se ra tu 
se ra til 
se ron nou 
se re vou 
se ron til 



o re je te 
o ra tu e te 
o ra til e t£ 
o ron nou ze t£ 
o re vou ze t£ 
o ron til ze t£ 



se rej 
se re tu 
sa re til 
se ri on nou 
se ri e vou 
se re til 



o re je* te* 
u seje te 
o re tu e t6 
us tu e te 
o re ti le te* 
u ti le ti 
o ri on nou ze te 
u si on nou ze te 
o ri e vou ze te 
u si e vou ze te 
o re til ze te 
us til ze te 






32 



ETRE 



to be. 



'ami. due. te. ecrit. mere. tire, zdole. g/"te. opera, oter. toui. voute. 
2 at. arm. twb. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 

Etre to be (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Ne suis-je pas 
n'es-tu pas 
n'est-il pas 
ne sommes-nous pas 
n'etes-vous pas 
ne sont-ils pas 



am I not 
art thou not 
is he not 
are we not 
are you not 
are they not 



ne su ij pa 
ne tu pa 
ne til pa 
ne sora nou pa 
net vou pa 
ne son til pa 



N'ai-je pas ete 
n'as-tu pas ete 
n'a-t-il pas ete 
n'avons-unus pas ete 
n'avez-vous pas ete 
n'ont-ils pas ete 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 

have I not been 
hast thou not been 
has he not been 
have iv e not been 
have you not been 
have they not been 



n£j pa ze te 

na tu pa ze te* 

na til pa ze te 

na von nou pa ze* te* 

na v<§ vou pa ze te 

non til pa ze te 



N'etais-je pas 
n'^tais-tu pas 
n'£tait-il pas 
n'etions-nous pas 
n'etiez-vous pas 
n'etaient-ils pas 



IMPERFECT. 

was I not 
wast thou not 
was he not 
were we not 
were you not 
were they not 



-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

N'avais-je pas £te had I not been 
n'avais-tu pas ete* hadst thou not been 

n'avait-il pas ete had he not been 

n'avions-nous pas ete* had we not been 
n'aviez-vous pas ete had you not been 
n'avaient-ils pas ete had they not been 



ne tej pa 
ne te tu pa 
ne te til pa 
ne ti on nou pa 
ne ti e vou p& 
ne te til pa 



na ve j pa ze* te* 
na ve tu pa ze te* 
na ve til pa ze* te* 
na vi on nou pa ze* te 
na vi £ vou pa ze te* 
na ve til pa ze te 



Ne fus-je pas 
ne fus-tu pas 
ne fut-il pas 
ne fumes-nous pas 
ne futes-vous pas 
ne furent-ils oas 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

was I not 
wast thou not 
was he not 
were we not 
were you not 
were they not 



ne fuj pa 
ne fu tu pa , 
ne fu til pa 
ne fum nou pa 
ne fut vou pa 
ne fur til pa 



&TRE 



to be. 



33 



*mwr, mwr. jewne. je?2ne. boite. bozte. ancre. tngrat. onde. un } ameN 
4 j, as 5 in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, i/Z, as ZZi, in William. 



-K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit, 

N'eus-je pas ete* had I not been 

n'eus-tu pas ete hadst thou not been 

n'eut-il pas ete had he not been 

n'eumes-nous pas ete had we not been 
n'eutes-vous pas ete had you not been 
n'eurent-ils pas ete had they not been 



Ne serai-je pas 
ne seras-tu pas 
ne sera-t-il pas 
ne serons-nous pas 
ne serez-vous pas 
ne seront-ils pas 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I not be 
shall or wilt thou not be 
shall or will he not be 
shall or will we not be 
shall or will you not bz 
shall or will they not be 



nuj pa ze* te 
nu tu pa ze t& 
nu til pa ze te 
num nou pa ze t6 
nut vou pa ze te 
nur til pa ze te 

ne sre*j pa 
ne sra tu pa 
ne sra til pa 
ne sron nou pa 
ne sre vou pa 
ne sron til pa 



-M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

N'aurai-je pas ete shall or will I not have been no rej pa ze te 

n'auras-tu pas ete shalt or wilt thou not have been no ra tu pa ze t€ 

n'aura-t-il pas ete shall or will he not have been no ra til pa ze te* 

n*aurons-nous pas 6t6 shall or will we not have been no ron nou pa ze t£ 

n"aurez-vous pas ete shall or will you not have been no re vou pa ze* t6 

n'auront-ils pas ete shall or will they not have been no ron til pa z6 t£ 



Ne serais-je pas 
ne serais-tu pas 
ne serait-il pas 
ne serions-nous pas 
ne seriez-vous pas 
ne seraient-ils pas 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

should^ would) could) 

or might I not be 
shouldst) wouldsl) couldst, 

or mighlst thou not be 
should^ would) could* 

or might he not be 
should, would* could) 

or might we not be 
should) would) could) 

or might you not be 
should) would) could) 

or might they not be 



-O- PAST, 

or compound of the present. 
N'aurais-je pas ete, should* would) 
or n'eusse-je pas tie 
n'aurais-tu pas ete, 
or rteusses-tupas ete 
n'aurait-il pas ete, 
or n'eut-il pas ite 
n*aurions-nous pas ete, 



could) or might I 
shouldst) wouldst) 
couldst) or mightst thou 
should* would* 
could) or might he 
should) would) 



or neuss ions-nous pas ete could* or might we 

nVariez-vous pas ete, should) would) 

or ntusziez-vous pas Hi could* or might you 

n\iuraient-ils pas ete, should) would) 

or -tt' easstnt-ils pas tie could) or might they 



rl 



ne srej pa 
ne sre tu pa 
ne sre til pa 
ne se ri on nou pa 
ne se ri € vou pa 
ne sre til pa 



no rej pa. ze" t<* 
nu sej pa ze th 
i» •> re tu pa ze te" 
n\-.s tu pa zt it 
no re til pa ze te* 
nu nl pa si te 
no r; on nou pa 7.4 te 
nu si on nou r>n ze te 
no ri e vou pa ze" te 
nu si e ron pa ze te 
no re til pa ze te 
nusiilpa ze te 



34 



OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 



Of the different hinds of Conjugations. 

75. There are in French, four Conjugations, (comprising 
upwards of 3164 verbs,) which are distinguished from each 
other by the termination of the present of the Infinitive. 

First Conjugation. 

76. The present of the Infinitive of the first conjugation, has 
for termination er — as, pari er, donn er, &c. 

Second Conjugation. 

77. The present of the Infinitive of the second conjugation, 
has for termination ir — as, fin ir, pun ir, &c. 

Third Conjugation. 

78. The present of the Infinitive of the third conjugation, 
has for termination oir — as, recev oir, Sav oir, &c. 

Fourth Conjugation. 

79. The present of the Infinitive of the fourth conjugation, 
has for termination re — as, vend re, rend re, &c. 

Of the First Conjugation. 

80. All verbs whose present of the Infinitive ends with er, 
(to the number of about 2500) are of the first conjugation, and 
if regular, are conjugated like parler to speak ; which is here- 
after conjugated, to be used as a model. 

81. The only irregular verbs of the first conjugation, are 
s'en alter to go away, page 112 — aller to go, page 122 — envoyer 
to send, page!23 — and renvoyer to send back ; conjugated like 
envoyer to send. 

82. Some verbs ending in er, although not among the 
irregular verbs of the first conjugation, are not exactly conju- 
gated like parler ; these verbs are noticed at page 48. 

83. Conjugate in the same manner — as, pari er to speak ; the 
following verbs : — 



accord er 


to grant, 


epouvant er 


to frighten, 


ace us er 


to accuse, 


inspir er 


to inspire, 


affirm er 


to aifirm, 


lim er 


to file, 


camp er 


to encamp, 


pat in er 


to skate, 


donn er 


to give, 


pu pi er 


to sting, 


port er 


to carry, 


p re par er 


to prepare, 


rnontr er 


to show, 


pri'v er 


to deprive, 


trouv er 


to find, 


propoa er 


to propose, 


cass e» 


to break, 


imagin er 


to imagine, 



OP THE FORMATION OF THE COMPOUND TENSES. 35 



allum er 


to light, 


import er 


to import, 


pleur er 


to weep, 


improuv er 


to disapprove. 


vol er 


to steal, 


irrit er 


to irritate, 


dejeun er 


to breakfast, 


invent er 


to invent, 


din er 


to dine, 


pens er 


to think, 


soup er 


to sup, 


vant er 


to praise, 



84. To conjugate the above verbs, or any other regular 
verb, of the first conjugation : observe that in French a regular 
verb is divided into two parts : — 1st, The radical part, which 
is, that portion of the word which is the same in all tenses and 
persons of the verb ; 2d, The termination, which is, that portion 
of the word that varies at almost every tense and person ; for 
instance, in parler to speak ; pari is the radical part, and er is 
the termination : then pari will be the same in all tenses and 
persons ; whereas the termination er, will change at every tense 
and person. Knowing the above, when a verb is to be conju- 
gated on parler, the only thing to be done, is to place the ter- 
minations of the different tenses and persons of parler after 
the radical part of the verb to be conjugated. 

85. In the different conjugations throughout this volume, the 
radical part, and the terminations have been separated, and the 
terminations in the model verbs have been besides printed in 
italics. 

Formation of the Compound Tenses. 

86. The formation of the compound tenses, in all the verbs 
of the four conjugations, whether regular or irregular, is the 
same. 

87. When a scholar wants tc form a compound tense, he 
must first ascertain whether the verb in question, takes the 
auxiliary avoir to have, or etre to be, which he can easily do, 
by referring to page 1, Art. 10 and 14; afterwards he must 
take from avoir to have, or etre to be, the tense named, and add 
to it the participle past, of the verb he has to conjugate ; for in- 
stance, suppose a scholar wants to form the compound of the 
future absolute, of parler to speak, he must after having ascer- 
tained that parler to speak, is one of those neuter verbs that 
takes the auxiliary avoir to have, as not being among the neuter 
verbs, that are put down in pagelbi ; take the future absolute 
of avoir to have, which is, J^aurai 1 shall or will have, and add 
to it the participle past of parler to speak, which is, parU 
spoken ; then he shall have for the compound of the future ab- 
solute faurai parle I shall or will have spoken — tu auras parle 
thou shalt or wilt have spoken, &c. 

2 e 2 



36 TABLE OF THE TERMINATIONS OF THE REGULAR VERBS, 



Table of the Terminations of the Regular Verbs. 

SIMPLE TENSES. 









INFINITIVE MOOLX 
















PRESENT. 














pari 


er 


fin 


ir 


rec 


evoir 


vend 


re 








PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 












pari 


ant 


fin 


is sunt 


rec 


evant 


vend ant 








PARTICIPLE PAST OR PASSIVE 












pari 


€ 


fin 


i 


rec 


u 


vend 


u 








INDICATIVE MOOD. 
















PRESENT. 










JO 




pari 


e 


fin 


is 


rec 


ois 


vend 


s 


tu 






es 




is 




ois 




8 


il or elle 






e 




it 




oit 


vend 




nous 






ons • 




is sons 




evons 




ons 


VOU3 






ez 




issez 




evez 




ez 


ils or elles 






ent 




issent 




oivent 




ent 










IMPERFECT. 










je 




pari 


ais 


fin 


issais 


rec 


evais 


vend 


ais 


tu 






ais 




is s ais 




evais 




ais 


il or elle 






art 




is s ait 




evait 




ait 


nous 






ions 




issions 




evjons 




ions 


VQUS 






iez 




issiez 




eviez 




iez 


ils or elles 






aient 




iss aient 




ev aient 




aien 








PRETERIT DEFINITE 










je 




par) 


at 


fin 


is 


rec 


us 


vend 


is 


tu 






as 




is 




us 




is 


il or elle 






a 




it 




ut 




it 


nous 






dmes 




imes 




umes 




imes 


vous 






dtes 




ites 




utes 




ites 


Us or elles 






erent 




irent 




urer.t 




irent 








FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 










jo 




pari 


erai 


fin 


irai 


rec 


evrai 


vend 


rai 


tu 






eras 




iras 




evras 




ras 


il or elle 






era 




ira 




ear a 




ra 


nous 






erons 




irons 




evrons 




rons 


vous 






ercz 




irez 




evrez 




rez 


ils or elles 






eront 




ironl 




evronl 




ront 








CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
















PRESENT. 










je 




pari 


erais 


fin 


irais 


rec 


evrais 


vend 


rais 


tu 






erais 




irdis 




cvr.zis 




rais 


il or elle 






erait 




irait 




evrait 




rait 


00 us 






erions 




irions 




evrions 




rions 


vous 






eriez 




iricz 




evnez 




nez 


ils or elles 






eraient 




irai ent 




evraient 




raient 








IMPERATIVE M0< 












pari 


e 


fin 


is 


rec 


ois 


vend 


8 


qu'il or qu' 


elle 




c 

ons 

ez 




isse 

issons 

issez 




oive 

evons 

evez 




€ 

ons 
ez 


qu'ils or qu 


'elles 




ent 




issent 




oivent 




ent 








SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
















PRESENT. 










queje 




pari 





fin 


isSe 


rec 


oive 


vend 


e 


que tu 






es 




isses 




oives 




es 


qu'il or qu' 


elle 




e 




isse 




oive 




e 


que nous 






ion* 




issions 




evions 




ions 


QUO vous 






iez 




issiez 




eviez 




iei 


qu'ils or qu 


'elles 




cut 




issent 




oivent 




ent 










IMPERKKCT. 










queje 




pari 


asse 


fin 


isse 


rec 


usse 


vend 


isse 


quii tu 






esse* 




isses 




asses 




isses 


qu'il or qu' 


elle 




dt 




it 




ut 




it 


que nous 






as si ons 




issions 




us si ons 




issions 


que vous 






ass iez 




issiez 




ussiez 




issiez 


qu'ils or qc 


'elles 




assent 




issent 




us sent 




issent 






1st Conjugation 




2d Cony 




3d Cony 




Ath Conj, 



OP THE FOUR REGULAR CONJUGATIONS. 



37 



Of the Four Regular Conjugations. 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
past or perfect, (or compound of the present.) 



pari 6 



fin i 



vend 



ayant 



COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

pari e fin i rec u 



vend u 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 
perfect or preterit indefinite, (or compoujtd of the present.) 



tu as 

il or elle a 
nous avons 
vous avez 
ils or elles ont 



pari 6 
e 
e 

e 
i 

t 



fin i 



rec 



pluperfect, (or componnd of the Imperfect.) 
pari e fin i rec u 

& i u 

6 i u 

e i u 



vend u 



vend u 



''av&ia 

tu avais 

il or elle avait 

nous avions 

vous aviez ex a 

ils or elles avaient e i u 

preterit anterior, (or compound of the preterit definite.) 

j'eus pari e fin i rec u vend 

tu eus k i u 

il or elle eut 6 i u 

nous eumes e i u 

vous eutes t i u 

ils or elles eurent 6 i u 

future anterior, (or compound of the future absolute.) 



j aural 

tu auras 

il or elle aura 

nous aurons 

vous aurez 

As or elles auront 



j aurais 

tu aurais 

il or elle aurait 

nous aurions 

vous auriez 

Us or elles auraient 



pari e 
6 
e 



fin 



rec u 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
Tast, (or compound of the present.) 

pari e fin i rec 

e i 

e i 

e i 

e i 

6 i 



vend u 



vend u 



JVb Compound of the Imperative. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
preterit or past, (or compound of the present.) 



of the imperfect.) 
rec u 



que j aie 




pari 


e 


que lu aies 






t 


qu'il or qu-'elle ait 






e 


que nous ayoni 






e 


que vous ayez 






e 


qu'ils or qu'elles aient 




e 




pluperfect 


, (or ex. 


que j*eusse 




pari 


c 


que tu eusses 






e 


qu'il or qu'elle eut 






6 


que nous erosions 






e 


que vous eussiez 






f 


qu'iJs or qu'ellea eussent 




e 




1st Conjugation. 



~ond u 
u 
u 

U 



2d Conj. 2d Conj. 



ith Con]. 



38 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



parler to speak. 



•ami. ane. te. eerit. mere, etre. z'dole. g/te. opera, oter. tout, voute 
'at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, rdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 



Parler 



to speak. 



(•Affirmatively.) 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



-A- 

Parl er 



Avoir pari e 

-o 

Parl ant 

-D- 

Ayant pari e 

-E- 

ParU 



-F- 

Je pari e 
tu pari es 
il pari e 
nous pari ons 
vous pari es 
ils pari ent 

-G- 



J'ai pari e 

tu as pari e 

il a pari e 

nous avons pari e 

vous avez pari e 

ils onL pari e 

-H- 

Je pari ais 
tu pari az's 
il pari ait 
nous pari z'on* 
vous pari iez 
ils pari aient 



J'avais pari 6 
tu avais pari e 
il avait pa'! 6 
nous avions pari e 
vous aviez pari e 
'As avaient pari i 



PRESENT. 

to speak 

PAST Or PERFECT, 
or compound of the present, 
to have spoken 

PARTICIPLE PRESENT OT ACTIVE. 

speaking 

COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

having spoken 

PARTICIPLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 

spoken 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

I speak, do speak, or am speaking 
thou speakest, dost speak, or art speaking 
he speaks, does speak, or is speaking 
we speak, do speak, or are speaking 
you speak, do speak, or are speaking 
they speak, do speak, or are speaking 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compcind of the present. 

I have spoken, did speak, or have been speaking 
thou hast spoken, didst speak, or hast been speaking 
lie has spoken, did speak, or has been speaking 
we have spoken, did speak, or have been speaking 
you have spoken, did speak, or have been speaking 
they have spoken, did speak, or have been speaking 



IMPERFECT. 

I spoke, did speak, or was speaking 
thou spokest, didst speak, or wast speaking 
he spoke, did speak, or icas speaking 
we spoke, did speak, or were speaking 
you spoke, did speak, or were speaking 
they spoke, did speak, or were speaking 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 

I had spoken, or had been speaking 
thou hadsl spoken, or hadst been speaking 
he had spoken, or had been speaking 
we had spoken, or had been speaking 
you had spoken, or had been speaking 
they had spoken, or had been speaking 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



parler to speak. 



3 mur. mwr. jeane. jeane. boite. boite. ancre. ingrat. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as /2i, in Wi/^anu 



-j- 

Je pari ai 
tu pari as 
il pari a 
nous pari ame* 
vous pari dies 
il pari eYe/i/ 



J'eus pari i 
tu eus pari e 
il eut pari e 
nous eumes pari e 
vous eutes pari e 
ils eurent pari e 

-L- 

Je pari erai 
tu pari era* 
il pari era 
nous pari erons 
vous pari eres 
ils pari eront 



J'aurai pari 6 
tu auras pari e 
il aura pari e 
nous aurons pari 6 
vous aurez pari e 
ils auront pari e 



-N- 

Je pari erais 
tu pari erais 
il pari erai/ 
nous pari erions 
vous pari eriez 
ils pari eraient 



J'aurais pari e, 
or feusse pari e 
tu aurai^arl e, 
or /a eussesparl e 
il aurait pari e, 
or il eut pari 6 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

/ spoke, or did speak 
thou spokest, or didst speak 
he spoke, or did speak 
we spoke, or did speak 
you spoke, or did speak 
they spoke, or did speak 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

I had spoken 
thou hadst spoken 
he had spoken 
we had spoken 
you had spoken 
they had spoken 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

/ shall, or will speak 
thou shall, or wilt speak 
he shall, or will speak 
we shall, or will speak 
you shall, or will speak 
they shall, or will speak 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

I shall, or will have spoken 
thou shall, or wilt have spoken 
he shall, or will have speken 
we shall, or will have spoken 
you shall, or will have spoken 
they shall, or will have speka* 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



/ should, would, could, or might speak 

thou shoutdst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst speak 

he should, would, could, or might speak 

we should, would, could, or might speak 

you should, would, could, or might speak 

they should, would, coul I, or might speak 

PAST, 

or compound of the presi it. 

\ I should, would, could, or might have spoken 

£ thou shouldst, wouldst couldst, or mightst have spoken 

I he should, wou'd, cow d, or might have spoken 



40 



FIRST CONJUGATION. PARLER to Speak. 



'ami. due. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gUa* opera, dter. tout, voute. 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



nous aurions pari e, 
or nous eussions pari < 
vous auriez pari e', 
or vous eussiezparl £ 
ils auraient pari e, 
or ils eussent pari £ 



Pari e 

qu'il pari e 
pari ons 
pari es 
qu'ils pari ent 



> we should, would, could, or might have spoken 

> you should, would, could, or might have spoken 
they should, would, could, or might have spoken 



\ 



IMPERATIVE MOOD, 

speak or do speak (thou) 

let him speak 

lei us speak 

speak or do speak (you) 

let them speak 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Que je pari e 
que tu pari es 
qu'il pari e 
que nous par! ions 
que vous pari iez 
qu'ils pari ent 



that I may speak 
that thou mayst speak 
that he may speak 
that we may speak 
that you may speak 
that they may speak 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compound of the present^ 



Que j'aie pari £ 
que tu aies pari £ 
qu'il ait pari e 
que nous ayons pari £ 
que vous ayez pari £ 
qu'ils aient pari e 



that I may have spoken 
that thou mayst have spoken 
that he may have spoken 
that we may have spoken 
that you may have spoken 
that they may have spoken 



-s- 

Que je pari asse 

que tu pari asses 

qu'il pari at 

que nous pari assions 

que vous pari assies 

qu'ils pari assent 



IMPERFECT. 

that I might speak 
that thou mights t speak 
that he might speak 
that we might speak 
that you might speak 
that they might speak 



-T- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

Que j'eusse pari £ that I might have spoken 

que In eusses pari £ thai thou rnig/ilsl have spoken 

qu'il eut pari £ thai he might have spoke?i 

que nous eussions pari £ that ice might have spoken 

que, vous eussiez pari £ thai you might have spoken 

qu'ils eussent pari £ that they might have spoken 



FIRST CONJUGATION. PARLER tO Spedk. 41 

8 mur. mitt. je?me. jeifrie. boite. bozte. ancie. twgrat. onde. «n, ame a 
4 j, ass in pleasure. gn 9 as m in union. ill, as ZZi, in WiZ/ian . 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Parleb to speak. (Negatively.) 



-A- 

Ne pas pari er 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT, 

no/ to speak 

-B- PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present* 

N'avoir pas pari i not to have spoken 

-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 

Ne pari ant pas not speaking 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

N'ayant pas pari e not having spoken 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

J speak not, do not speak, or am not 

thou speakest not, dost not speak, or art not 

he speaks not, does not speak, or is not 

we speak not, do not speak, or are not r 

you speak not, do not speak, or are not 

they speak not, do not speak, or are not 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 

I have not spoken, did not speak, or have not 

thou hast not spoken, didst not speak, or hast not 

he has not spoken, did not speak, or has not 

nous n'avons pas pari e we have not spoken, did not speak, or hare not 

vous n'avez pas pari i you have not spoken, did not speak, or have not 

they have not spoken, did not speak, or have not^ 

IMPERFECT. 

J spoke not, did not speak, or was not 

thou spokest not, didst not speak, or wast not 

he spoke not, did not speak, or was not 

we spoke not, did not speak, or were not 

you spoke not, did not speak, or were not crq| 

they spoke not, did not speak, or were not 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 

I had not spoken, or had not been 
thou, hadst not spoken, or hadst not been 
henad not spoken, or had not been 
nous n'ttvions pas pari e we had not spoken, or had not been 
vous n'aviez pas pari e you had not spoken, or had not been 
ils n'avaient pas pari i they had not spoken, or had not been 



-F- 

Je ne pari e pas 
tu ne pari es pas 
il ne pari e pas 
nous ne pari ons pas 
vous ne pari ez pas 
ils ne pari ent pas 



Je n'ai pas pari e 
tu n'as pas pari e 
il n'a pas pari e 



ils n'ont pas pari e 

-H- 

Je ne pari ais pas 
tu ne pari ais pas 
il ne pari ait pas 
nous ne pari ions pas 
vous ne pari iez pas 
ils ne pari aient pas 
-i- 

Je n'avais pas pari e 
tu n'avais pas pari e 
il n'avait pas pari e 



3 

I 



42 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



PA RLE R tO SpeCUi. 



'ami. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. sdoie. g/le. opera, dter. tout, voute. 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



Je ne pari ax pas 
tu ne pari as pas 
il ne pari a pas 
nous ne pari ames pas 
vous ne pari hies pas 
lis ne pari erent pas 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

/ spoke not or did not speak 
thou spokest not or didst not speak 
he spoke not or did not speak 
we spoke not or did not speak 
you spoke not or did not speak 
thty spoke not or did not speak 



Je n'eus pas pari e 
tu n'eus pas pari e 
il n'cut pas pari 6 
nous n'eumes pas pari e 
vous n'eutes pas pari i 
ils n'eurent pas pari e 



PRETERTT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

I had not spoken 
thou hadst not spoken 
he had not spoken 
we had not spoken 
you had not spoken 
they had not spoken 



Je ne pari erai pas 
tu ne pari eras pas 
il ne pari era pas 
nous ne pari erons pas 
vous ne pari erez pas 
ils ne pari eront pas 



Je n'aurai pas pari i 
tu n'auras pas pari e 
il n'aura pas pari 6 
nous n'aurons pas pari i 
vous n'aurez pas pari e 
ils n'auront pas pari e 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

/ shall or will not speak 
thou shalt or wilt not speak 
he shall or will not speak 
we shall or will not speak 
you shall or will not speak 
they shall or will not speak 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

I shall or will not have spoken 
thou shalt or wilt not have spoken 
he shall or will not have spoken 
we shall or will not have spoken 
you shall or will not have spoken 
they shall or will not have spoken 



Je ne pari erais pas 
tu ne pari erais pas 
il ne pari erait pas 
nous ne pari erions pas 
vous ne pari eriez pas 
ils ne pari eraient pas 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

/ should, would, could, or might 

thou shouldsl, wouldst, couldst, or mightst 

he should, would, could, or might 

we should, would, could, or might 

you sJiould, would, could, or might 

they should, would, could, or might 



Je n'aurais pas pari £., 
orje neusse pas pari e 
tu n'aurais pas pari 6, 
or tu 71 eussf s pas pari 6 
il n'aurait pas pari i, 
or il n"eut pas pari 6 



PAST, 
or compound of the present. 



I should, would, could, 
or might not have spoken 

thou shouldst, wouldst, couldsU 
or mightst not have spoken 

fie should, would* could, 
or might not have spoken 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



parler to speak* 43 



3 mur. mur. jeime. jeune. boite. bozte. ancie. tngr&t. onde, un. amen 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as ///, in Wi//iam 



nous n'aurions pas pari e 
or nous rteussions pas pari e 
vous n'auriez pas pari e 
or rows rteussiez pas pari e 
ils n'auraient pas pari e 
or ifo n'eussent pas pari e 



we should, would, could. 

or might not have spoken 
you should, would, could, 

or might not have spoken 
they should, would, could* 

or might not have spoken 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Ne pari e pas 
qu'il ne pari e pas 
ne pari ons pas 
ne pari ez pas 
qu'ils ne parler^ pas 



(thou) 



speak not or do not speak 

let him not speak 

let us not speak 

speak not or do not speak (you) 

let them not speak 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



-a- 

Que je ne pari e pas 
que tu ne par] es pas 
qu'il ne pari e pas 
que nous ne pari ions pas 
que vous ne pari iez pas 
qu'ils ne pari ent pas 



PRESENT. 

that I may not speak 
that thou mayst not speak 
that he may not speak 
that we may not speak 
that you may not speak 
that they may not speak 



Que je n]aie pas pari e 
que tu n'aies pas pari e 
qu'il n'ait pas pari e 
que nous n'ayons pas pari 6 
que vous n'ayez pas pari e 
qu'ils n'aient pas pari i 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

that I may not have spoken 
that thou mayst not have spoken 
that he may not have spoken 
that we may not have spoken 
that you may not have spoken 
that they may not have spoken 



Que je ne pari asse pas 
que tu ne pari asses pas 
qu'il ne pari at pas 
que nous ne pari assions pas 
que vous ne pari assiez pas 
qu'ils ne pari assent pas 



IMPERFECT. 

that I might not speak 
that thou mightst not speak 
that he might not speak 
that we might not speak 
/hat you might not speak 
that they might not speak 



-T- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperject. 

Que je n'eusse pas pari c that 1 might not hare spoken 

que tu n'eusses pas pari I that thou mightst not have spoken 

qu'il n'eut pas pari e that he might not have spoken 

que nous n'eussions pas pari 6 that we might not have spoken 

que vous n'eussiez pas pari e that you might not have spoken 

qu'ils n'eussent pas pari I that they might not have spoken 

2 F ' 



44 



FIRST CONJUGATION. PARLER to Speak 



cmi. tine. te. tent, mere, etre. z'dole. g/te, opera, oter. tout, voute 
at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. foo\. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Parler to speak. (Interrogatively.) 



Pari e-jet 
pari es-tu 
pari e-t-il 
pari 07W-nous 
pari es-vous 
pari en^-ils 



Ai-je pari i 
as-tu pari e 
a-t-il pari e 
avons-nous pari e 
avez-vous pari e 
ont-ils pari e 



Pari ais-]e 
pari ais-tu 
pari ai/-il 
pari ions-nous 
pari les-vous 
pari aient-ils 



Avais-je pari 6 
avais-tu pari i 
avait-il pari e 
avions-nous pari 6 
aviez-vous pari 6 
avaient-ils pari 6 

•j- 

Parl cri'-jo 
pari as-t\\ 
pari a-t-il 
pari awes-nous 
pari a/es-vous 
pari erenl-ils 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

do I speak or am I speaking 
dost thou speak or art thou speaking 
does he speak or is he speaking 
do iv e speak or are we speaking 
do you speak or are you speaking 
do they speak or are they speaking 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

have I spoken or did I speak 
hast thou spoken or didst thou speak 
has he spoken or did he speak 
have ice spoken or did we speak 
have you spoken or did you speak 
have they spoken or did they speak 

IMPERFECT. 

did I speak or was I speaking 
didst thou speak or wast thou speaking 
did he speak or was he speaking 
did we speak or were we speaking 
did you speak or were you speaking 
did they speak or were they speaking 

PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

had I spoken or had I been speaking 
hadsl thou spoken or hadst thou been speaking 
had he spoken or had he been speaking 
had we spoken or had we been speaking 
had you spoken or had you been speaking 
had they spoken or had they been speakitig 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did I speak 
didst thou speak 
did he speak 
did we speak 
did you speak 
did they cpeak 



FIRST CONJUGATION. PARLER to Speak. 45 

*mur. mur. jeune. jewne. boite. boite. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. amen 
4 j, as 6 in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as ^t, in Wi di am 



Eus-je pari e 
eus-tu pari e 
eut-il pari e 
eumes-nous pari £ 
eutes-vous pari 6 
eurent-ils pari e 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

had I spoken 
hadst thou spoken 
had he spoken 
had we spoken 
had you spoken 
had they spoken 



Pari erai-]e 
pari eras-tu 
pari era-t-il 
pari enms-nous 
pari eres- vous 
pari eront -ils 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I speak 
shall or will thou speak 
shall or will he speak 
shall or will we speak 
shall or will you speak 
shall or will they speak 



Aurai-je pari i 
auras-tu pari e 
aura-t-il pari e 
aurons-nous pari 6 
aurez-vous parle 
auront-ils pari 6 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

shall or will I have spoken 
shalt or wilt thou have spoken 
shall or will he have spoken 
shall or will we have spoken 
shall or will you have spoken 
shall or will they have spoken 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Pari erais-]e 
pari erais-tu. 
pari erait-i\ 
pari erions-nous 
pari eriez-vo\i3 
pari eraient-iis 

Aurais-je pari e, 
or eusse-je pari e 
aurais-ta pari £, 
or eusses-tu pari 6 
aurail-il pari e, 
or eut-il pari e 
aurions-nous pari e, 
or euss ions-nous pari 
aunez-vous pari e, 
or eussiez-vous pari i 
auraient-ils pari e, 
or eussent-ils pari i 



should, would, could, or might I speak 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mights I thou speaft 
should, would, could, or might he speak 
should, would, could, or might we speak 
should, would, could, or might you speak 
should, would, could, or might they speak 

FAST, 
or compound of the present 

should, would, could, 

or might I have spoken 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mights t thou have spoken 
should, would, could, 

or migfit lie have spoken 
should, would, could, 
e or might we have spoken 

should, would, could, 

or might you have spoken 
should, would, could, 

or might they have spoken 



46 



FIRST CONJUGATION. PARLER to SpCdk. 



l ami dne. te. ecrit. mere. etre. zdole. gzte. opera, dter. tout, voute 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Parler to speak. (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 



Ne pari e-je pas 
ne pari es-tu pas 
ne pari e-t-il pas 
ne pari ons-nous pas 
ne pari es-vous pas 
ne pari m/-ils pas 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

do I not speak or am I not speaking 
dost thou not speak or art thou not speaking 
does he not speak or is he not speaking 
do we not speak or are' we not speaking 
do you not speak or are you not speaking 
do they not speak or are they not speaking 



N'ai-je pas pari £ 
n'as-tu pas pari £ 
n'a-t-il pas pari £ 
n'avons-nous pas pari £ 
n'avez-vous pas pari c 
n'ont-ils pas pari £ 

-H- 

Ne pari ais-je pas 
ne pari ais-tu. pas 
ne pari ait-il pas 
ne pari ions-nous pas 
ne pari ies-vous pas 
ne pari aient-ils pas 



N'avais-je pas pari £ 
n'avais-tu pas pari £ 
n'avait-il pas pari £ 
n'avions-nous pas pari 6 
n'aviez-vous pas pari e 
n'avaient-ils pas pari £ 

-j- 

Ne pari ai-je pas 

ne pari as-tu pas 

ne pari a-t-il pas 

ne pari ames-nous pas 

ne pari a/es-vous pas 

ne pari erent-i\a pas 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 

have I not spoken,did I not speak, 

or have I not been speaking 
hast thou not spoken,didsi thou not speak, 

or hast thou not been speaking 
has he not spoken, did he not speak- 

or has he not been speaking 
have we not spoken, did we not speak, 

or have we not been speaking 
have you not spoken, did you not speak 

or have you not been speaking 
have they not spoken, did they not speak, 

or have they not been speaking 



i:.i PERFECT. 
did I not speak or was I not speaking 
didst thou not speak or wast thou not speaking 
did he not speak or was he not speaki?ig 
did we not speak or were we not speaking 
did you not speak or were you not speaking 
did they not speak or were they not speaking 

PLUPERFECT, 
r compound of the imperfect. 
had J not spoken or had I not beefi 
hadsi thou not spoken or hadst thou not been 
had he not spoken or had he not been 
had we not spoken or had we not been 
had you not spoken or had you not been 
had they not spoken or had they not been 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did I not speak 
didst thou not speak 
did he not speak 
did we not speak 
did you not speak 
did they not speak 



Cfc 

i s 

IS 



FIRST CONJUGATION. PARLER to Speak 47 

? mur. mur. jei/ne. jeiaie. boj'te. bo2te. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. arneM. 
? j, as 5 m pleasure, gn, as ni in nmon. z7/, as Mi, in Wi/ftam. 



•Veus-je pas pari e 
n'eus-tu pas pari e 
n'eut-il pas pari e 
n'eumes-nous pas pari e 
n'eutes-vous pas pari e 
n'eurent-ils pas pari e 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

had I not spoken 

hadst thou not spoken 

had he not spoken 

had we not spoken 

had you not spoken 

had they not spoken 



Ne pari erai-je pas 
ne pari eras-tu. pas 
ne pari era-t-il pas 
ne pari erons-nous pas 
ne pari erez-vo\is pas 
ne pari eront-ils pas 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I not speak 
shall or wilt thou not speak 
shall or will he not speak 
shall or will we not speak 
shall or will you not speak 
shall or will they not speak 



N'aurai-je pas pari 6 
n'auras-tu pas pari e 
n'aura-t-il-pas pari e 
n*aurons-nous pas pari e 
n'aurez-vous pas pari e 
n'auront-ils pas pari e 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

shall or will I not have spoken 
shalt or wilt thou not have spoken 
shall or will he not have spoken 
shall or will we not have spoken 
shall or will you not have spoken 
shall or vnll they not have spoken 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



-N- 

Ne pari erais-je pas 
ne pari erais-tu. pas 
ne pari erait-il pas 
ne pari erions-nous pas 
ne pari eries-vous pas 
ne pari eraient-ils pas 



should, would, could, or might I 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst thou 
should, would, could, or might he 
should, would, could, or might we 
should, would, could, or might you 
should, would, could, or might they 



N'aurais-je pas pari e y 
or n'eusse-je pas pari e 
n*aurais-tu pas pari e, 
or n eussti-tu pas pari e 
n'auraiL-il pas pari e, 
or n'eut-il pas pari e 
n'aurions-nous pas pari e, 
or n tuss ions -nous pas pari 6 
n'auriez-vous pas pari e, 
or rfeussies-vous pas pari e 
n'auraient-ils pas pari e, 
oi rfeussent-ils pas pari e 



PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

should, icould, could, 

or might I not have spoken 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou not have spoken 
should, ivould, could, 

or might he not have spoken 
should, would, could, 

or might wc not have spoken 
should, would, could, 

or might you not have spoken 
should, would, could, 

or might they not have spoken 

2 f '2 



48 



OBSERVATIONS ON SOME VERBS. 



Of Irregularities in some Verbs of the First Conjugation. 

N. B. What follows will be better studied after the pupil shall have 
learned the other three conjugations, 

88. Of the verbs of the first conjugation , that is, of all the verbs having 
the termination of the infinitive present, in er, (amounting to about 2500,) 
four only are, properly speaking, irregular ; that is, cannot take the termi- 
nations of the model verb, parler to speak, in all their tenses and persons 
these verbs are, s'en alter, pagell2.— alter, page 122.— envoyer, pagel23,— 
and r envoy er, conjugated like envoy er. 

89. However, besides these four irregular verbs, there are some, which 
though generally classed among the regular verbs of the first conjugation. 
undergo some changes in the orthography of some of their tenses and per- 
sons ; these irregularities deserve so much the more attention, as they are 
absolutely necessary to a correct pronunciation. 

90. This subject has not been clearly explained in any books published 
for the use of the English pupil. The following directions will supply the 
deficiency : 

91. Some of the verbs ending with eler — as, appeler to call, generally 
speaking, take a second I, in those tenses and persons only, in which the let. 
ter I is followed by e, es, ent. Those tenses and persons are the following :— 



j 'appelle 

j'appellerai 
nous appellerons 
j'appellerais 
nous appellerions 



0. que j'appelle 



tu appelles 

tu appelleras 
vous appellerez 
tu appellerais 
vous appelleriez 
appelle 

que tu appelles 



il appelle 
ils appellent 
il appellera 
ils appelleront 
il appellerait 
ils appelleraient 
qu'il appelle 
qu'ils appellent 
qu'il appelle" 
qu'ils appellent. 



92. Conjugate in the same manner: — atteler to put to — amonceler to 
neap — chanceler to stagger — deteler to unteam — Stinceler to sparkle — 
ficeler to tie with pack thread — niveler to level — rappeler to recall — renou- 
veler to renew. 

93. Some other verbs, ending also with eler, instead of taking a second I 
in those tenses and persons, in which the letter I is followed by e, es, ent, 
take a grave accent upon the e, which precedes the I — as, prter to peal. 



je pele 

je pelerai 

nous pelerons 
je pelerais 

nous pelerions 



a que jo pele 



tu peles 

tu peleras 
vous pe Jerez 
tu pelerais 
vous peleriez 
pele 

que tu peles 



il pele 
ils pelent 
il pelera 
ils peleront 
il pelerait 
ils peleraient 
qu'il pele 
qu'ils pelent 
qu'il pele 
qu'ils pelent. 



94. Conjugate in the same manner : — bourreler to torment — con gelt r to 
congeal — degeler to thaw — geler to freeze — harceler to torment — regder 
to freeze again 



OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 



49 



95. Some of the verbs ending with eter — as, jeter to throw, take a 
second t, in those tenses and persons only in which the letter t is followed 
by e, es, ent. 



p je jette 



je jetterai 
nous jetterons 
je jetterais 
nous jetterions 



q, que je jette 



tu jettes 

tu jetteras 
vous jetterez 
tu jetterais 
vous jetteriez 
jette 

que tu jettes 



il jette 
ils jettent 
il jettera 
ils jetteront 
il jetterait 
ils jette raient 
qu'il jette 
qu'ils jettent 
qu'il jette 
qu'ils jettent. 



96. Conjugate in the same manner : — cacheter to seal — decacheter to un- 
seal — projeter to project — recacheter to seal again. 

97. Some other verbs, also ending with eter, instead of taking a second t 
in those tenses and persons in which the t is followed by e, es, ent, take 
a grave accent upon the e which precedes the t — as, acheter to buy. 

f j 'achete tu achetes il achete 

ils ache tent 
l j'acheterai tu acheteras il achetera 

ils acheteront 
n j'achetejais tu acheterais il acheterait 

ils acheteraient 
p achete qu'il achete 

qu'ils ache tent 
0, que j'achete que tu achetes qu'il achete 

qu'ils achetent. 
98 Conjugate in the same manner: — colleter to collar — coqueter to 
coquet — decolleter to uncover the neck — etiqueter to label— -suracheter to 
overpay — trompeter to summon with sound of trumpet. 

99. Conjugate also, in the same manner, all verbs ending- with 



ecer — as, depecer to carve, 

emer — as, semer to sow, 

ener — as, mener to lead, 

100. All verbs ending with 

ebrer — as, celebrer 
£cer — as, rapiecer 
echer — as, lecher 
£der — as, posstder 
£gler — as, regler 
egner — as, rtgner 
egrer — as, rtintegrer 
£guer — as, alUguer 
eler — as, reveler 
£mer — as, blasphemer 
£ner — as, aliener 
£quer — as, hypothequer 
erer — as, esperer 
eter — as, inquieter 
£trer — as, penctrer 



ever — as, achever 
evrer — as, sevrer 



to finish* 
to wean 



to celebrate, 

to piece, 

to lick, 

to possess, 

to regulate, 

to reign, 

to reinstate 

to allege, 

to reveal, 

to blaspheme, 

to alienate., 

to mortgage, 

to hope, 

to make uneasy, 

to penetrate 



50 



OBSERVATIONS ON SOME VERBS. 



change the acute accent which is on the e of the last syllable but one, 
(the penultimate,) into a grave accent, in those lenses and persons in 
which that penultimate syllable is followed by e, es, ent — as, csptrer to 
hope. 



j'espere 

j'espererai 
nous espererons 
j'espereraig 
nous espererions 



que j'espere 



tu esperes 



tu espereras 
vous espereres 
tu espererais 
vous espereriez 
espere 

que tu espere? 



il espere 
ils esperent 
il esperera 
ils espererons 
il espererait 
ils espereraient 
qu'il espere 
qu'ils esperent 
qu'il espere 
qu'ils esperent. 

101. In verbs ending with cer — as, avancer to advance, a cedilla, that 
is a small comma, (5) is put under the c, in those tenses and persons in 
which the c is followed by a, 0, in order to preserve the soft sound the 
c has in the infinitive present, and in other tenses and persons. See 
page 11, Art. 40. Cedilla. 

102. In verbs ending with ger — as, negliger to neglect; the g having 
the sound of j, an e mute must be put after the g", in those tenses and per- 
sons in which the g is followed by a, ; in order to preserve the sound 
of j, throughout the tenses. 

103. In the verbs ending with 

ayer — as, essayer 
eyer — as, grasseyer 
oyer — as, employer 
uyer — as, appuyer 

the y is changed into i, in those tenses and persons only, in which 
the y is followed by e, es, ent ; but y is preserved when followed by any 
other letters, even when followed by i — as, essayer to try. 

The pronunciation of this verb being very difficulty it is figured under 
every person. 



to try, 

to speak thick, 
to employ, 
to support, 



-a- essayer, 
e-se-ye\ 



essayant, 
£-se-yan, 



essay e, 
£-se-ye, 



-F- 



j essaie, 

j.e-se, 
tu essaies, 

tu e-se, 
il essaie, 

il £-se, 



nous essayons, 
nou z.£-se-yon, 

vous essayez, 
vou z.6-se-y£, 

ils essaient. 
il z.£-se. 



-H- j essayais, 
j.e-se-ye,^ 

tu essayais, 
tu £-se-ye, 

il essayait, 
il e-se-ye\ 



nous essayions, 
nou z.e-se-yion, 

vous essayiez, 
vou z.£-se-yie\ 

ils essayaient 
il z.£-se-ye. 



OP THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 



51 



-IV- 



j essayai, 

j.e-se-y<§, 
tu essayas, 

tu e-se-ya, 
il essay a, 

il e-se-ya, 

j'essaierai, 

j.e-se-re, 
tu essaieras 

tu e-se-ra 
il essaiera, 

il £-se-ra, 

j'essaierais, 

j.£-se-re, 
tu essaierais, 

tu e-se-re, 
il essaierait, 

il e^se'-re, 



nous essayames, 

nou z.e'-se-yam, 
vous essayates, 

vou z.e-se-yat, 
ils essayerent. 

il z.e-se-yer. 

nous essaierons, 

nou z.e-se-ron, 
vous essaierez, 

vou z.e'-se-re, 
ils essaieront. 

il z.e-se-ron. 

nous essaierions, 

nou z.e-se-rion, 
vous essaieriez, 

vou z.e-se-rie, 
ils essaieraient. 

il z.e-se-re. 

essayons, 

£-se-yon, 
essayez, 

£-se-ye\ 
qu'ils essaient. 

k.il z.£-se*. 

que nous essayions, 
ke nou z.£-se-yion, 

que vous essayiez, 
ke vou z.e se-yie\ 

qu'ils essaient. 
k.il z.e-se. 

que nous essayassions, 
ke nou z.£-se-ya-sion, 

que vous essayassiez, 
ke vou z.d-se-ya-sie, 

qu'ils essayassent. 
k.il z.£-se-yas. 



-P- 

essaie, 

£-se, 
qu'il essaie, 

k.il <$-sd, 

■q- que j'essaie, 

ke j.&se, 
que tu essaies, 

ke tu £-se, 
qu'il essaie, 

k.il £-se, 

-s- que j'essayasse, 

ke j.£-se-yas, 
que tu essayasses, 

ke tu e-se-yas 
qu'il essayat, 

k.il £-se-ya, 

104. In verbs whose participle present ends with uant — as, saluanU 
from saluer to bow ; a dioeresis is put upon the z, thus, i, to cause the xi 
and i to be pronounced separately in the first and second persoa plural of 
the imperfect of the indicative : nous salmons we bowed — vous saluiez 
you bowed; and of the subjunctive present: que nous saluions that we 
may bow — que vous saluiez that you may bow. 

105. All the verbs of that kind are found in the first conjugation, except 
conclure to conclude — and exclure to exclude, which belong t.o the fourth 
conjugation. 



52 OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 

Of the Second Conjugation. 

106. The verbs of the second conjugation, like those of the 
first, are known by the termination of the present of the in- 
finitive. 

107. The present of the infinitive of the second conjugation 
has for termination ir — as, fin ir to finish. 

108. All verbs whose present of the infinitive end with ir, 
to the amount of about 366, are of the second conjugation ; and, 
if regular, are conjugated like finir to finish ; which is hereaf- 
ter conjugated to be used as a model. 

109. There are in the second conjugation about 294 regular 
verbs which take the termination of finir to finish, and 92 ir- 
regular which are all conjugated in this volume, and which are 
to be found in the alphabetical list of all the irregular verbs, 
pagel62. 

110. To diminish the number of the irregular verbs of this conjuga- 
tion, several schemes have been invented. Among others, Levizac, in his 
grammar, has divided the verbs of this conjugation into four, what he 
calls branches ; this plan, which is not in accordance with any of our 
French grammars, affords no advantage over the old one, as every prac- 
tical teacher must have found out, to his great annoyance ; it is besides 
erroneous in many instances. I shall here mention some of the errors 
alluded to : page 151, Levizac's Grammar, sen tir, to feel, is there given 
as the model verb, of all the verbs composing the second branch, page 150, 
among which, are, dor mir to sleep — redor mir to sleep again — ser vir to 
serve ; and several others. 

Nofv taking any tense of the model verb, sen tir to feel; the present 
of the indicative, for instance, we shall have — 

je sen s, je dor s, je ser s, 

tu sen s, tu dor s, tu ser s, 

il sen t, il dor t, il ser t, 

nous sen tons, nous dor tons, nous ser tons, 

vouj sen tez, vous dor tez, vous ser tez, 

ils sen tent, ils dor tent, ils ser tent. 

Taking any other tense, the future, for instance, we shall have — 

je sen thai, je dor tirai, je ser tirai, 

tu sen tiras, tu dor tiras, tu ser tiras, 

il sen tira, il dor tira, il ser lira, 

nous sen tirons, nous dor tirons, nous ser tirons 

vous sen tirez, vous dor tirez, vous ser tirez, 

ils sen tiront, ils dor tiront, ils ser tiront, 

and so on for the other tenses, which are by no means correct. The fact 
is, that Levizac, deceived by the first three persons of the present of the 
indicative, which happened to be right, concluded, without further inquiry, 
that the rest would alsc be right 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



53 



These faults, and a great many others, are in the first edition of 
Levizac's; since that first edition, the grammar has gone through nine 
editions in England, and through seven in America, and the same faults 
are still in it, although the preface of every edition announces that the 
work has been thoroughly revised, corrected, and improved, by the ablest 
masters. 

HI. Hint The best way for a pupil to ascertain whether a verb end- 
ing in the present of the infinitive, with ir, is regular or irregular : he 
must look for it in the alphabetical list of all the irregular verbs, given at 
page 162, if met there, the scholar will be referred to the page where it is 
conjugated ; if not to be met in the above mentioned table, it is a regular 
verb, and is to be conjugated like the model verb, Jinir to finish. 

112. Those who have already learned the verbs, will readily ascertain 
whether a verb of the second conjugation, is regular or irregular, if they 
remember that issant is the termination of the participle present, of all the 
regular verbs of the second conjugation. 

113. Conjugate in the same manner — as, fin ir to finish, 
the following verbs : — 



adouc ir 


to soften, 


gem ir 


to groan, 


compat ir 


to sympathise, 


noire ir 


to blacken 


demol ir 


to pull down, 


per ir 


to perish, 


eblou ir 


to dazzle, 


pun ir 


to punish, 


etabl ir 


to establish, 


rempl ir 


to fill, 


fourn ir 


to furnish, 


sais ir 


to seize. 



114. For the formation of the compound tenses, see page 35, 
art. 86 and 87. 



54 



SECOND CONJUGATION. FINIR to finish. 



Jaini. one. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, 6ter. tout, voute 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Finir to finish. (Affirmatively.) 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

to finish 

PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present, 
to have finished 

PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 

finishing 

COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

having finished 

PARTICIPLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 

finished 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 



-A- 

Fin ir 



Avoir fin t 

-c- 

Fin issant 

-D- 

Ayant fin i 

-E- 

Fini 



-F- 

Je fin is 

tu fin is 

il fin it 

nous fin issons 

vous fin issez 

ils fin issent 

-G- 

J'ai fin i 

tu as fin i 

il a fin i 

nous avons fin i 

vous avcz fin i 

ils ont fin i 

-H- 

Je fin issais 
tu fin issais 
il fin issait 
nous fin is s ions 
vous fin issiez 
ils fin issaicnt 
-I- 



I finish, do finish, or am finishing 
thou finishest, dost finish, or art finishing 
he finishes, does finish, or is finishing 
we finish, do finish, or are finishing 
you finish, do finish, or are finishing 
they finish, do finish, or are finishing 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

I have finished, did finish, or have been 
thou hast finished, didst finish, or hast been 
he has finished, did finish, or has been 
we have finished, did finish, or have been 
you have finished, did finish, or have been 
they have finished, did finish, or have been 

IMPERFECT. 

I finished, did finish, or wasfinisJiing 
thoufinishedst, didst finish, or icatfj'niishing 
he finished, did finish, or was finishing 
ive finished, did finish, or were finishing 
you finished, did finish, or were finishing 
they finis J ted, did finish, or were finishing 



PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 
J'avais fin i I had finished or had been finishing 

tu avais fin i thou hadst finished or hadst been finishing 

il avait fin i he had finished or had been finishing 

nous avions fin i we had finished or had been finishing 
vous aviez fin i you had finished or had been finishing 

ils avaient fin t tfiey had finished or had been finishing 



SECOND CONJUGATION. FINIR to finish. 55 

3 m«r. mur. jeune. jewne. bozte. bofte. ancre. ingrat. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ni in union. ill, as Hi in WiZZiam. 



-J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

Je fin is I finished or did finish 

tu fin is thou finishedst or didst finish 

il fin it he finished 01 did finish 

nous fin imes we finished or did finish 

vous fin £/es you finished or did finish 

ils fin zrcn/ they finished or did finish 

-K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

J' e us fin t J had finished 

tu eus fin i ffam hadst finished 

il eut fin z /te had finished 

nous euraes fin i we had finished 

vous eutes fin i you had finished 

ils eurent fin i they had finished 

-L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

Je fin irai I shall or will finish 

tu fin iras thou shall or wilt finish 

il fin tra /ie s/iaZZ or will finish 

nous fin irorw we shall or will finish 

vous fin ire* you s/ia/Z or will finish 

ils fin iron/ Z/ie?/ shall or will finish 

-M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

J'aurai fin t I shall or will have finished 

tu auras fin i thou shall or wiZZ have finished 

il auras fin i he shall or mZZ have finished 

nous aurons fini we s/iaZZ or will have finished 

vous aurez fin i you shall or will have finished 

ils auront fini they shall or will have finished 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

Je fin irais I should, would, could, or might finish 

tu fin irais thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst finish 

il fin irait he should, would, could, or might finish 

nous fin irions we should, would, could, or might finish 

vous fin iries you should, would, could, or might finish 

ils fin iraient they should, would, could, or might finish 

-o» pAst, 

or compound of the present. 

J'aurais fin i, J should, would, could, 

or feusse fin i or might have finished 

tu aurais fin i, thou shouldst, wouldst, couldsU 

or tu eussesfin i or mightst have finished 

i\ aurait fin i, he should, would, could, 

or il eutfin i or mis;ht have finished 

2G 



56 



SECOND CONJUGATION. FINIR to finish. 



l am\. ane. te. icxit. mere. £tre. tdoie. gzte. opera, oter. tout, voute 
2 at. arm. tub. aie. mare, there, zdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



nous aurions fin i, 
or nous euss ions fin i 
vous auriez fin i, 
or vous eussiezjin i 
ils auraient fin i, 
or ils eussentfin i 



we should^ would, could, 
or might have finished 

you should, would, could, 
or might have finished 

they should, would, could^ 
or might have finished 



Finis 
qu'il fin isse 
fin issons 
fin issez 
qu'ils fin issent 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

finish {thou) 
let him finish 
let us finish 

finish (you) 
let them finish 



-a- 

Que je fin isse 
que tu fin isses 
qu'tl fin isse 
que nous fin issions 
que vous fin issiez 
qu'ils fin issent 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

that I may finish 
that thou may st finish 
that he may finish 
that we may finish 
thai you may finish 
that they may finish 



Que j'aie fin i 
que tu aies tin i 
qu'il ait fin i 
que nous ayous fin i 
que vous ayez fin i 
qu'ils aient fin t 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compound of the present, 

that I may have finished 
that thou mayst have finished 
that he may have finished 
that we may have finished 
that you may have finished 
that they may have finished 



-8- 

Que je fin Use 
que tu fin isses 
qu'il fin it 
que nous fin issions 
que vous fin issiez 
qu'ils fin issent 



IMPERFECT. 

that 1 might finish 
that thou mightst finish 
that he might finish 
that we might finish 
that you might finish 
that they might finish 



Que j'eusso fin i 
que tu eusses fin i 
qu'il eut fin i 
que nous eussions fin i 
que vous eussiez fin i 
qu'ils eussent fin i 



PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 

that I might have finished 
that thou mightst have finislicd 
that he might have finished 
that we might have finished 
that you might have finished 
that they might have finished 



SECOND CONJUGATION. 



finir to finish. 57 



3 mwr. muT. jewne. jewne. boite. boite. a/icre. tngrat. onde. wn. ameN 
4 j, ass in pleasure, gn, as ni in urn* on. ill, as /Zi, in Wi Hi am. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Finir to finish. ( Negatively ) 



-A- 

Ne pas fin ir 

-B- 



INFLNITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

not to finish 

PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present, 

N'avoir pas fin i not to have finished 

-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT OT ACTIVE. 

Ne fin issant pas not finishing 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

N'ayant pas fin i not having finished 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

I finish not, do not finish, or am not 
thou finishes t not, dost not finish* or art nol 
he finishes not, does not finish, or is not 
we finish not, do not finish, or are not 
you finish not, do not finish, or are not 
they fonish not, do not finish, or are not 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 
I have not finished,, did not finish, or have not 
thou hast not finished, didst not finish, or hast not 
he has not finished, did not finish, or has not 
nous n'avons pas fin i we have not finished, did not finish, or have not 
vous n'avez pas fin i you have not finished* did not finish, or have not 



Je ne fin is pas 
tu ne fin is pas 
il ne fin it pas 
nous ne fin issons pas 
vous ne fin issez pas 
il ne fin issent pas 



Je n'ai pas fin i 
tu n'as pas fin i 
il n'a pas fin i 



V 



ils n'ont pas fin i 

-H- 

Je ne fin issais pas 
tu ne fin maw pas 
il ne fin issait pas 
nous ne fin issions pas 
vous ne fin issiez pas 
ils ne fin issaient pa* 
-i- 

Je n'avais pas fin i 
tu n'avais pas fin i 
il n'avait pas fin i 
nous n'avions pas fin i 
vous n'aviez pas fin i 
ils n'avaient pas fin i 



they have notfinished, did not finish, or have not w 

IMPERFECT 

I finished not, did not finish, or was 
thoufinishedst not, didst not finish, or wast 
he finished not, did not finish, or was 
we finished not, did not finish, or were 
you finished not, did not finish, or were 
they finished not, did not finish, or were 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 
I had not finished or had not been 
thou hadst notfinished or hadst not been 
lie had notfinished or had not been 
we had not finished or had not been 
you lead notfinished or had not been 
they had notfinished or had not been 






a?' 



^ 

3 



3 



58 



SECOND CONJUGATION. FINIR tO finiStl. 



•ami. tine. te. ecrit. mere. etre. /dole. g*te. op£ra. oter. tout, \vute 
2 at. arm. tuh. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



-j- 

Je ne fin is pas 
tu ne fin is pas 
il ne fin it pas 
nous ne fin imes pas 
vous ne fin ites pas 
ils ne fin irent pas 



Je n'eus pas fin i 
tu n'eus pas fin i 
il n'eut pas fin i 
nous n'eumes pas fin i 
vous n'eutes pas fin i 
ils n'eurent pas fin i 



Je ne fin irai pas 
tu ne fin iras pas 
il ne iin ira pas 
nous ne fin irons pas 
vous ne fin ires pas 
lis ne fin iront pas 



Je n r aurai pas fin i 
tu n 'auras pas fin i 
il n'aura pas fin i 
nous n'au'rons pas fin i 
vous n'aurez pas fin i 
lis n'auront pas fin i 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I finished not or did not finish 
iitoufinishedst not or didst not finish 
he finished not or did not finish 
we finished not or did not finish 
you finished not or did not finish 
they finis! Led not or didnot finish 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

I had not finished 
thou hadst not finished 
he had not finished 
we had not finished 
you had not finished 
they had not finished 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

/ shall or will not finish 
thou shalt or wilt not finish 
he shall or will not finish 
we shall or will not finish 
you shall or will not finish 
they shall or will not finish 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or corn-pound of the future. 

I shall or ivill not have finished 
thou shalt or wilt not have finished 
he shall or will not have finished 
we shall or will not hare finished 
you shall or will not have finished 
they sliall or will not have finished 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



-N- 

Je nc fin irais pas 
tu ne fin irais pas 
il ne fin irait pas 
uous ne fin irions pas 
vous no tin iriez pas 
ils ne fin iraienl pas 



Je n'aurais pas fin i, 
orje ncusse ]>asfin i 
tu iraurais pas tint, 
or tu n'eusses pas fin i 
il n\iurait pas fin i, 
or il 7i tut pas fin i 



PRESENT. 

/ stiould, would, could, or might 
ihou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst 
he should, would, could, or might 
wt should, would, could, or might 
you should, would, could, or might 
they should, would, could, or migfit 

PAST, 

or compound of the present. 
I should, would, could, 

or might not have finished 
thou should si, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst not have finished* 
lie should, would, could, 

or might not have finished 



i 



SECOND CONJUGATION. FINIR to finill. 59 



s mur. mux. jeune. )eune. hoite. boita. cncre. mgrat. onde. un. araeN. 
4 j, as 5 in pleasure, gn, as ni in anion. ill, as J/t, in Witfiam. 



nous n'aurions pas fin t, 
or nous n'eussions pas Jin i 
vous n'auriez pas rinz", 
or vous rteussiez pas Jin % 
ils n'auraient pas fin i, 
or ils rCeussent pas Jin i 



we should, would, could* 
or might not havejinished 

you should, would, could, 
or might not havejinished 

they should, would, could, 
or might not have Jinishcd 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Ne fin is pas 

qu'il ne fin isse pas 
ne fin issons pas 
ne fin issez pas 
qu'ils ne fin issent pas 



(thou) 



finish not or do not finish 

let him not Jinish 

let us not Jinish 

Jinish not or do not Jinish (you) 

let them not Jinish 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Que je ne fin isse pas 
que tu ne fin isses pas 
qu'il ne fin isse pas 
que nous ne fin issions pas 
que vous ne fin issiez pas 
qu'ils ne fin issent pas 



that I may not Jinish 
that thou mayst not Jinish 
that he may not Jinish 
that we may not Jinish 
that you may not Jinish 
that they may not finish 



PRETERIT OT PAST, 

or compound of the -present. 

that I may not have finished 
that thou mayst not havejinished 
that he may not havejinished 
que nous n'ayons pas fin i that we may not havejinished 
que vous n'ayez pas fin i that you may not have finished 
qu'ils n'aient pas fin i that they may not havejinished 



Que je n'aie pas fin % 
que tu n'aies pas fini 
qu'il n'ait pas fin i 



Que je ne fin isse pas 
que tu ne fin isses pas 
qu'il ne fin it pas 
que nous ne fin issions pas 
que vous ne fin issiez pas 
qu'ils ne fin issent pas 



IMPERFECT. 

that I might not finish 
thai thou mightst not finish 
that he might not finish 
that we might not finish 
that you might not finish 
that they might not Jinish 



•T- TLUTERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

Que je n'eusse pas fin i that I might not havejinished 
que tu n'eusscs pas fin i that thou mightst not havejinished 
qu'il n'efit pas fini that lie might not havejinished 

quenous n'eussions pas fin i that we might not have finished 
que vous n'eussiez pas finz that you might not havejinished 
qu'ils n'eusscnt pas fin i that they might not havejinished 

2 o*2 



60 



SECOND CONJUGATION. FINIR to finish. 



l ami. due. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, dter. tout, vovte. 
*at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Finir to finish (Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 



Fin is-je do I finish or am I finishing 

fin z>-tu dost thou finish or art thoufinishing 

tin i/-il does he finish or is he finishing 

fin issons-nous do we finish or are we finishing 

fin isses-vous do you finish or are you finishing 

fin issent-ils do they finish or are they finishing 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

Ai- je fin i have I finished or did I finish 

as-tu fin i hast thou finished or didst thou finish 

a-t-il fin i has he finished or did he finish 

avons-nous fin i have we finished or did we finish 

avez-vous fin i have you finished or did you finish 

ont-ils fin i have they finished or did they finish 



Fin issais-]e 
fin issais-tu. 
fin is.9ai/-il 
fin issions-nous 
fin issies-v oas 
fin issa ient-ils 



avais-je fin i 
avais-tu fin i 
avait-il fini 
avions-nous fin i 
aviez-vous fin i 
avaient-ils fin i 

-J- 

Fin is-jc 
tin is-tu 
im it-il 
fin Smef-nouii 
fin itts-vo\ia 
fin irenf-ils 



IMPERFECT. 

did 1 finish or was I finishing 
didst thou finish or wast thoufinishing 
did he finish or was he finishing 
did we finish or were we finishing 
did you finish or were you finishing 
did they finish or were they finishing 

PLUFERFECT, 
cr compound of the imperfecta 
had I finished or had I been finishing 
hadst thou finished or hadst thou been finishing 
had he finished or had he been finishing 
had wefinished or had we been finishing 
had you finished or had you beenfinisiiing 
had they finished or had they been finishing 

PRETERIT DEFINITE 

did I finish 
didst t In) it finish 
did he finish 
did we finish, 
did youfi?iish 
did Uieyfmisk 



SECOND CONJUGATION. 



finir to finish* 61 



hnui. iuut. jeime. ^une. boite. boite. ancre. iw.grat. onde. an. arueN 
'*j, as s in pleasure, gn, as zm in union, ill, as //i, in Wi <a am. 



Eus-je fin 2 
eub-tu fnu 
eat-il fin i 
eumes-nous fin i 
eutes-vous fin i 
eurent-ils fin i 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the -preterit. 

had I finished 
hadst thou finished 
had lie finished 
had we finished 
had you finished 
had they finished 



Fin irai-]G 
fin iras-tu. 
fin ira-t-il 
fin irons-noxis 
fin irez-vo\is 
fin iront-ils 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or icill I finish 
shalfi or wilt thou finish 
shell or iv ill he finish 
shall or will we finish 
shall or iri// you finish 
shall or it7'/Z they finish 



Aurai-je fin i 
auras-tu fin i 
aura-t-il fin i 
aurons-nous fin % 
aurez-vous fin i 
auront-ils fin i 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

%hall or will I have finished 
shalt or will thou have finished 
shall or will he have finished 
shall or will we have finished 
shall or will you have finished 
shall or will they have finished 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

Pin irais-je should, would, could, or might I finish 

in irais-tu shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst thoufinisf- 

in irait-i\ should, would, could, or might he finish 

in irions-nous should, would, could, or might ice finish 

in iries-vous should, would, could, or might you finish 

.n ira£en/-ils should, would, could, or might they finish 



Aurais-je fin i, 
or russt-jefin i 
aurais-tu fin i, 
or eusses-tufin i 
aurait-ii fin i, 
or eut-ilfin i 
aurions-nous fin t, 
or eussions-nous fin i 
auriez-vous fin i 
or eussi ez-vous fin i 
auraient-ils fin i, 
or 6W>sent~Usfin i 



PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

should, would, could, 

or might I have finished 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou have finished 
should, would, could, 

or might lie have finished 
should, would, could, 

or might we have finished 
should, would, could, 

or might you have finished 
should, would, could, 

or might they hare finished 



62 



SECOND CONJUGATION. FINIR to finish. 



ami. tine. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gzte. op^ra. oter. tout, voute. 
t at. arm. twb. ale. mare, there, z'diom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Finir to finish. (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 



Ne fin w-je pas 
ne fin is-tu pas 
ne fin it-i\ pas 
ne fin mons-nous pas 
ne fin issez-vous pas 
ne fin issent-i\s pas 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

do I not finish or am I not finishing 
dost thou not finish or art thou not finishing 
does he not finish or is he not finishing 
do we not finish or are we not finishing 
do you notfinish^or are you not finishing 
do they not finish or are they not finishing 



N'ai-je pas fin i 
n'as-tu pas fin i 
n'a-t-il pas fin i 
n'avons-nous pas fin i 
n'avez-vous pas fin i 
n'ont-ils pas fin i 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present, 
have Inot finished, did I not finish, 

or have I not been finishing 
hast thou not finished, didst thou notfinisliy 

or hast thou not been finishing 
has he not finished, did he not finish, 

or has he not been finishing 
have we not finished, did we not finish, 

or have we not been finishing 
have you not finished, did you not finish, 

or have you not been finishing 
have they not finished, did they not finish 

or have they not been finishing 



Ne fin issais-je pas 
ne fin issais-tu. pas 
no iin issait-il pas 
ne fin issions-nous pas 
ne fin issiez-vous pas 
ne fin issaient-ils pas 



N'avais-je pas fin i 
n'avais-tu pas fin i 
n'avait-il pas fin i 
n'avions-nous pas fin i 
n'aviez-vous pas fin i 
n'avaient-ils pas fin i 

-j- 

Ne fin is-]e pas 

ne fin is-tu. pas 

ne fin it-il pas 

ne fin fmes-nous pas 

ne fin iles-vous pas 

ne fin irent-ils pas 



IMPERFECT. 

did I not finish or ivas I not finishing 
didst thou not finish or wast thou not finishing 
did he not finish or was he not finishing 
did we not finish or were we not finishing 
did you not finish or were you not finishing 
did they not finish or were they not finishing 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect, 
had I not finished or had I not been 
hadst thou not finished or Jiadst thou not been 
had he not finished or had he not been 
had wc not finished or had we not been 
had you not finished or had you not been 
had they not finished or had they not been 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did I not finish 
didst thou not finish 
did he not finish 
did ice not finish 
did you not finish 
did thty not finish 






I 



SECOND CONJUGATION FINIR to finish. 



63 



J mzzr. rciui. jeime. jewne. boi'te. boite. ancre. ingraL onde. i/n. ameN 
4 j, as * in pleasure, gn, as ni in um on. ill, as ZZ£, in Willi am 



N'eus-je pas fint 
n'eus-tu pas fin i 
n'eut-il pas fin i 
n'eumes-nous pas fin i 
n'eutes-vous pas fin i 
n'eurent-ils pas fin i 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 
had 1 not finished 
hadst thou not finished 
had he not finished 
had we not finished 
had you not finished 
had they not finished 



-L- 

Ne fin irai-je pas 
ne fin iras-tu pas 
ne fin ira-t-i\ pas 
ne fin *>ons-nous pas 
ne fin ires-vous pas 
ne fin iront-ils pas 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I not finish 
shalt or wilt thou not finish 
shall or will he not finish 
shall or will we not finish 
shall or will you not finish 
shall or will they not finish 



N'aurai-je pas fin i 
n'auras-tu pas fin i 
n'aura-t-il-pas fin % 
n'aurons-nous pas fin i 
n'aurez-vous pas fin i 
n'auront-ils pas fin £ 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

shall or will I not have finished 
shalt or wilt thou not have finished 
shall or will he not have finished 
shall or will we not have finished 
shall or will you not have finished 
shall or will they not have finished 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Ne fin irais-je pas 
ne fin irais-tu pas 
ne fin irait-\\ pas 
ne fin mom-nous pas 
L.e fin mes-vous pas 
ne fin iraient-ils pas 



PRESENT. 

should, would, could, or might I 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst thou 
should, would, could, or might he 
should, would, could, or might we 
should, would, could 9 or might you 
should, would, could, or might they 



^ 



N'aurais-je pas fin i, 
or neusse-je pas fin i 
n'aurai-s-tu pas fin i, 
or n'eusses-tu pas fin i 
n'aurait-il pas fin i, 
or n'eut-il pas fin i 
n'aurions-nous pas fin i, 
or n^euss ions-nous pas fin i 
n'auriez-vous pas fin i, 
or rSeussiez-vovs pas fin i 
n'auraient-ils pas fin i, 
or tfeustent'ils pas fin i 



PAST, 
compound of the present. 

should, would, could, 

or might I not have finished 
shouldst, would st, couldst, 

or mightst thou not have finished 
should, would, could, 

or might he not have finished 
should, would, could, 

or might we not have finished 
should^ would, could, 

or might you not have finished 
should, would, could, 

or might they not have finished 



<J4 OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 

Of the Third Conjugation. 

115. The verbs of the third conjugation, like those of the 
first and of the second, are known by the termination of the 
present of the infinitive. 

116. The present of the infinitive, of the third conjugation, 
has for its termination, oir — as, recevoir to receive. 

117. All verbs whose present of the infinitive ends with oir, 
to the amount of 230, are of the third conjugation ; and if 
regular, are conjugated like recevoir to receive ; which is here- 
after conjugated, to be used as a model. 

118. There are in the third conjugation 7 regular verbs 
only. The regular verbs of this conjugation are easily known, 
from the irregular ones ; they all 7 end with evoir, in the 
present of the infinitive. 

119. There are about 223 irregular verbs in this conjugation ; 
they are all conjugated in this volume, and are to be found in 
the alphabetical list of all the irregular verbs, page 162. 

120. List of the 7 regular verbs, all conjugated like 
rec evoir to receive. 

aperc evoir to perceive, 

cone evoir to conceive 

dec evoir to deceive, 

perc evoir to collect taxes 

rec evoir to receive, 

d evoir to owe, 

red evoir to owe again. 

121. When the termination of any tense or person begins 
with a, o, w, the c, which terminates the radical part of the 
five regular verbs — 

aperc evoir to perceive, 

cone evoir to conceive, 

dec evoir to deceive, 

perc evoir to collect taxes, 

rec evoir to receive, 

take a cedilla, thus c, to change the hard sound the c would 
have before a, o, w, into the soft sound it has in the infinitive 
present, and in other tenses and persons, when before e. 

122. In conjugati ng d evoir to owe, and red evoir to owe 
again, on rec evoir, care must be taken to observe what is the 
radical part of these two verbs. 



OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 65 

123. In the participle past du owed, from devoir to owe, a 
circumflex accent is put over the u to distinguish du owed, 
from du of the. 

124. The circumflex accent is put on du owed, in the mas- 
culine singular only. 

125. The participle past redu owed again, from redevoir to 
owe again, takes no accent. 

126. Apercevoir to perceive, which is an active verb, is 
very often used as a reflected verb : thus, £ apercevoir (to per- 
ceive one's self of) that is, to notice. We say, apercevoir quel- 
que chose to perceive something — but we say, s'apercevoir de 
quelque chose (to perceive one's self of something,) that is, to 
notice something. It must be remembered that the verb 
s 'apercevoir, requires the preposition de of, before its object , 
whereas apercevoir being an active verb, requires no preposition 
before its object. 

127. Apercevoir to perceive, forms its compound tenses with 
avoir to have, like all other active verbs. 

128. S'apercevoir to notice, is conjugated like apercevoir to 
perceive, with this difference ; that, like all other reflected 
verbs, it forms its compound tenses with etre to be, and takes 
two pronouns. See se lever to rise, page 92. 

129. For the formation of the compound tenses, see page 35. 
art- 86 and 87 



66 THIRD CONJUGATION. 



RECEVOIR 



to receive. 



'•ami. dne. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, oter. tout, voute. 
'-at. arm. tub. ale. marc, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Recevoir to receive. (Affirmatively.) 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



-A- PRKSENT. 

Rec evoir to receive 

-B- PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present 
Avoir rec. u to have received 

-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 

Rec evant receiving 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

Ay ant re 9 z* having received 

-E- PARTICIPLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 

Reg u received 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

/ receive, do receive, or am receiving 
thou receivest, dost receive, or art receiving 
he receives, does receive, or is receiving 
we receive, do receive, or are receiving 
you receive, do receive, or are receiving 
they receive, do receive, or are receiving 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 
I have received, did receive, or have been 
thou hast received, didst receive, or hast been 
he has received, did receive, or has been 
we have received, did receive, or have been 
you have received, did receive, or hast been 
they have received, did receive, or have been 

IMPERFECT. 

/ received, did receive, or was receiving 
thou receivedst, didst receive, or wast receiving 
he received, did receive, or iras receiving 
we received, did receive, or were receiving 
you received, did receive, or were receiving 
they received, did receive^ or were receiving 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 
I had received or had been receiving 
thou hadst received or hadst been receiving 
he had received or had been receiving 
we had received or had been receiving 
you had received or had been receiving 
they had received or had been receiving 



-F- 

Je rec, ois 
tu reg ois 
il re 9 oit 
oous rec evons 
vous rec eves 
ils reg oivent 

-G- 

J'ai reg u 
tu as re9 u 
il a reg u 
nous avons reg u 
vous avez reg u 
ils ont reg u 

Je rec evais 
tu rec evais 
il rec evait 
nous rec evions 
vous rec eviez 
ils rec evaiem 

-1- 

J'avais rcqu 
tu avais reg u 
il avait reg u 
nous avions reg u 
vous aviezreg u 
ils avaient reg a 



THIRD CONJUGATION 



recevoik to receive. 67 



3 muT. mur jeime. jetoie. boite. bolte. ancre. ingrat. onde. un, ameN, 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ni in union. ill, as /ft in Wi/aara. 



-j- 

Je reg us 
tu reg ws 
il reg ut 
nous reg tfmes 
vous reg wtes 
ils reg urent 

-K- 



J'eus reg w 
tu eus reg w 
il eut reg u 
nous eumes »*eg u 
vous eutes reg u 
ils eurent reg w 



Je rec evrai 
tu rec evras 
il rec cvra 
nous rec evrons 
vous rec eures 
ils rec evront 

-M- 

J'aurai rec u 
tu auras reg u 
il aura reg w 
nous aurons reg u 
vous aurez reg u 
ils auront reg u 



-N- 

Je rec earais 
tu rec e'jrais 
il rec evrait 
nous rec evrions 
vous rec evriez 
ils rec cvraient 

-o- 

J'aurais reg w, 
or feus se rec u 
tu aurais reg w, 
or /w eusses rec u 
il aurait reg u, 
or if eu/ ref u 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

/ received or did receive 
thou receivedst or didst receive 
he received or did receive 
we received or did receive 
you received or did receive 
they received or did receive 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit, 

I had received 
thou hadst received 
he had received 
we had received 
you had received 
they had received 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

/ shall or will receive 
thou shall or wilt receive 
he shall or will receive 
we shall or will receive 
you shall or will receive 
they shall or will receive 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

I shall or will have received 
thou shalt or wilt have received 
he shall or will have received 
we shall or will have received 
you shall or will have received 
they shall or will have received 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

J should, would, could, or might receive 

thou shouldst, ivouldst, couldst, or mightst receive 

he should, would, could, or might receive 

we should, would, could, or might receive 

you should, would, could, or might receive 

they should, would, could, or might receive 

PAST, 
or compound of the present 
I should, would, could, 

or might have received 
thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst 

or mightst, have received 
he should, would, could 
or might have received 



68 THIRD CONJUGATION. 



RECEVOIR 



to receive. 



'ami. due. ts. e'crit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, oter. tout, \ouie 
*at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



nous aunons reg u, 
or nous eussions re£ u 
vous auriez reg w, 
or vous eussiez re£ u 
ils auraient reg u, 
or ils tusstnt re§ u 



Regois 
qu'il reg oive 
rec evons 
rec eves 
qu'ils re9 oivent 



we should, would, could, 
or might have received 

you should, would, could, 
or might have received 

they should, ivould, could 
or might have received 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

receive {thou) 
let him receive 
let us receive 
receive {you) 
let them receive 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



-a- 

Que je reg oive 
que tu reg oives 
qu'il reg oive 
que nous rec evions 
que vous rec eviez 
qu'ils reg oivent 



that I may receive 
that thou mayst receive 
that he may receive 
that we may receive 
that you may receive 
that they may receive 



-R- 

que j'aie reg u 
que tu aies reg u 
qu'il ait reg u 
que nous ayons reg u 
que vous ayez reg u 
qu'ils aient reg u 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 

)r compound of the present. 

that I may have received 
that thou mayst have received 
that he may have received 
that we may have received 
that you may have received 
that they may have received 



Que je reg usse 
que tu reg usses 
qu l reg ut 
qae nous reg ussions 
que vous reg ussiest 
qu'ils reg ussent 



IMPERFECT. 

that I might receive 
that thou mightst receive 
that he might receive 
that we might receive 
that you might receive 
that they might receive 



Que j'eusse reg u 
que tu eusses rog u 
qu'il eut reg u 
que no as eussions reg u 
que vous eussiez reg u 
qu'ils eusscnt reg u 



PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 

that I might have received 
that thou mightst have received 
that he might have received 
that we might have received 
that you might have received 
thai they might have received 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 



recevoir to receive. 69 



8 mur. mur. jewne. jeune. boiie. boite. ancre. ingrat. onde. un* ameN. 
4 j, as* in pleasure. gn 9 as ni in union. ill, as Z/i, in Wi Hi am. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Recevoir to receive, (Negatively.) 



-A- 

Ne pas rec evoir 



N'avoir pas reg u 

-c- 

Ne rec eran/ pas 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

not to receive 

PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 
not to have received 

PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 

not receiving 



-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

N'ayant pas reg u not having received 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Je ne reg ois pas 
tu ne rec ois pas 
il ne rec, oit pas 
nous ne rec evons pas 
vous ne rec eves pas 
Us ne rec, oiv-ent pas 



1 receive not, do not receive, or am not 
thou receives t not, dost not receive, or art not 
he receives not, does not receive, or is not 
ice receive not, do not receive, or are not 
you receive not, do not receive, or are not 
they receive net, do not receive, or are not 



. 8 

09 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 

I have not received, did not receive, or have not 1 

thou hast not received, didst not receive, or hast not ' 

he has not received, did not receive, or has not \ 



Je n'ai pas rec, u 

tu n'as pas rec, u 

il n'a pas reg u 

nous n'avons pas reg u we have not received, did not receive, or have not 
you have not received, did not receive, or have not 
they have not received, did not receive, or have notj 



vous n^avez pas reg u youhave not received, did not receive, or have not I 

IMPERFECT. 



ils n'ont pas reg u 
-ii- 

Je ne rec evais pas 
tu ne rec evais pas 
il ne rec evait pas 
nous ne recei'ionspas 
vous ne rec eviez pas 
ils ne rec evaient pas 
-i- 



/ received not, did not receive, or was 
thou receivedst not, didst not receive, or wast 
he received not, did not receive, or was 
we received not, did not receive, or were 
you received not, did not receive, or were 
they received not, did not receive, or were 

PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

J had not received or had not been 
thou liadst not received or hadst not been 
he had not received or had not been 
nous rTavions pas reg u we had not received or had not been 
vous n'aviezpas reg u you had not received or had not been 
ils n'avaient pas reg u they had not received or had not been J 



Je n'avais pas reg u 
tu n'avais pas reg u 
il n'avait pas reg u 






70 THIRD CONJUGATION. 



reoevoir to receive. 



•ami. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. glte. opera, dter. tout, voute 
2 at, arm. twb. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



Je ne reg us pas 
tu ne reg us pas 
il ne reg ut pas 
nous ne reg umes pas 
vous ne reg utes pas 
ils ne reg urent pas 



Je n'eus pas reg u 
tu n'eus pas reg u 
il n'eut pas reg u 
nous n'eumes pas reg u 
vous n'eutes pas reg u 
ils n'eurent pas reg u 

-L- 

Je ne rec evrai pas 
tu ne rec evras pas 
il ne rec evra pas 
nous ne rec evrons pas 
vous ne rec evrez pas 
ils ne rec evront pas 



Je n'aurai pas reg u 
tu n'auras pas regw 
il n'aura pas reg u 
nous n'aurons pas reg u 
vous n'aurez pas reg u 
ils n'auront pas reg u 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

J received not or did not receive 
thou receivedst not or didst not receive 
he received not or did not receive 
we received not or did not receive 
you received not or did not receive 
they received not or did not receive 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 
1 had not received 
thou hadst not received 
he had not received 
we had not received 
you had not received 
they had not received 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

/ shall or will not receive 
thou shall or wilt not receive 
he shall or will not receive 
we shall or will not receive 
you shall or will not receive 
they shall or will not receive 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future 

I shall or will not have received 
thou shall or wilt not have received 
he shall or will not have received 
ice shall or will not have received 
you shall or will not have received 
they shall or will not have received 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

Je ne rec evrais pas I should, would, could, or might not 

tu ne rec evrais pas thou shouldst, icouldst, couldsf, or mighlst not 

ilne rec evrait pas he should, would, could, or might not 

nous ne rec evrions pas we should, would, could, or might not 

vous ne rec evriez pas you should, would, could, or might not 

ils ne rec evraient pas they should, would, could, or might not 



Je n'aurais pas reg u, 
or je n'eusse pas re$ u 
tu n'aurais pas reg u, 
or tu rteusses pas refu 
il n'aurait pas reg u, 
or il n'eitt pas ref u 



PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

I should, would, could, 
or might not have received 

thou shouldst^ wouldst, couldst* 
or mightst not have received 

he should, would, could, 
or might not have received 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 



recevoir to receive, 71 



s mwr. mux. jeime. je£ne. boite. boite. ancre. z'ngrat. onde. un. araev, 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in umon. ill, as Hi, in WW/* am. 



nous n'aurions pas reg u, 
or ?io?** n'eussions pas re$ u 
vous n'auriez pas reg w, 
or vows rCeussiezpas reg u 
ils n'auraient pas reg w, 
or i/s neussent pas reg u 



we should, would, could, 
or might not have received 

you should, would, could, 
or might not have received 

they should, would, could, 
or might not have received 



Ne reg ois pas 
qu'il ne reg oive pas 
ne rec ewms pas 
ne rec eves pas 
qu'ils ne reg oivent pas 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

receive not or do no/ receive {thou) 

let him not receive 

let us not receive 

receive not or do not receive (you) 

let them not receive 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 



Que je ne reg oive pas 
que lu ne rec, oives pas 
qu'il ne rec, oive pas 
que nous ne rec evions pas 
que vous ne rec evies pas 
qu'ils ne rec, oivent pas 



that I may not receive 
that thou mayst not receive 
that he may not receive 
that we may not receive 
that you may not receive 
that they may not receive 



Que je n'aie pas reg u 
que tu n'aies pas reg u 
qu'il n'ait pas reg u 
que nous n'ayons pas reg u 
que vous n'ayez pas reg u 
qu'ils n'aient pas reg u 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compoun d of the present, 

that I may not have received 
that thou mayst not have received 
that he may not have received 
that we may not have received 
that you may not have received 
that they may not have received 



Que je ne reg usse pas 
que tu ne regimes pas 
qu'il ne regit/ pas 
que rousne reg ussions pas 
que vous ne reg ussiez pas 
qiTils ne reg ussent pas 



IMPERFECT. 

that I might not receive 
that thou mii^ntst not receive 
that he might not receive 
that, we might not receive 
that you might not receive 
that they might not receive 



PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 



Que je n'eusse pas reg u 
que tu n'eusses pas reg u 
qu'il n'eut pas regw 
que nous n'eussions pas reg u 
que vous n'eussiez pas reg u 
qu'ils n'eussent pas reg u 



that I might not have received 
that thou mights t not have received 
that he might not have received 
that we might not have received 
that you might not have received 
that they might not have received 
2a 2 



72 THIRD CONJUGATION. 



RECEVOIR 



to receive. 



l ami. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, dter. tout, voute. 
*at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Recevoir to receive. (Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Re5 ois-]e 
reg ois-tu. 
re9 oit-il 
rec evons-nous 
rec eres-vous 
re9 oivent-ils 



Ai-je req u 
as-tu req u 
a~t-il re9 u 
avons-nous req u 
avez-vous req u 
ont-ils rc9 u 

-H- 

Rec cvaw-je 
rec evais-tu. 
rec evait-il 
rec evions-nous 
rec evies-voua 
rec euaienMls 



a*o J receive or am / receiving 
dost thou receive or art thou receiving 
does he receive or is he receiving 
do we receive or are we receiving 
do you receive or are you receiving 
do they receive or are they receiving 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

have I received or did I receive 
hast thou received or didst thou receive 
has he received or did he receive 
have we received or did we receive 
have you received or did you receive 
have they received or did they receive 

IMPERFECT. 

did I receive or was I receiving 
didst thou receive or wast thou receiving 
did he receive or was he receiving* 
did we receive or were we receiving 
did you receive or were you receiving 
did they receive or were they receiving 



Avais-je re9 u 
avais-tu re9 u 
avait-il re9 u 
avions-nous re9 u 
aviez-vous re9 u 
avaicnt-ils re9 u 

-J- 

Re9 us-]e 
req us-tu 
req ut-il 
teq umes-noxia 
req utes-voub 
rec urent-ils 



PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

had I received or had I been receiving 
hadst thou received or hadst thou been receiving 
had lie received or had he been receiving 
had we received or had we been receiving 
had you received or had you been receiving 
had they received or had they been receiving 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did I receive 
didst thou receive 
did he receive 
did we receive 
did you receive 
did they receive 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 



recevoir to receive. 73 



s mwr. mur. jeune. jeime. boite. bozte. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. ameN, 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ni in union, UU as Z/i in Wn/iam. 



-K- 

Eus-je reg u 
eus-tu reg u 
eut-il reg u 
eumes-nous reg u 
eutes-vous reg u 
eurent-ils reg u 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

had I received 
hadst thou received 
had he received 
had we received 
had you received 
had they received 



Rec evrai-je 
rec evras-tu 
rec evra-t-i\ 
rec evrons-nous 
rec evres-v ous 
rec evront-ila 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I receive 
shall or wilt thou receive 
shall or will he receive 
shall or will we receive 
shall or will you receive 
shall or will they receive 



Aarai-je rec, u 
auras-tu rec, u 
aura-t-il reg u 
aurons-nous reg u 
aurez-vous rec, u 
auront-ils rec, u 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

shall or will I have received 
shalt or wilt thou have received 
shall or will he have received 
shall or will we have received 
shall or will you have received 
shall or will they have received 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Rec evrais-je should, would, could, or might I receive 

rec evrais-tu. shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst thou receive 

rec evrait-il should, would, could, or might he receive 

rec evrions-nous should, would, could, or might we receive 

rec cvriez-vous should, would, could, or might you receive 

rec evraient-ils should, would, could, or might they receive 



Aurais-je rec, u, 
or eusse-je reg u 
aurais-tu rec, u, 
or eusscs-tu reg u 
aurait-il reg u, 
or eut-il reg u 
aurions-nous reg w, 
or eussions-nous reg u 
auriez-vous reg u, 
or eussiez-vous reg u 
auraient-ils reg u, 
ox eussenl-ils reg u 



PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

should, would, could, 

or might I have received 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou have received 
should, would, could, 

or might he have received 
should, would, could, 

or might we have received 
should, would, could, 

or might you have received 
should, would, could, 

or might they have received 



74 THIRD CONJUGATION. 



recevoir to receive. 



'ami. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, dter. tout, vowte. 
> at. arm. tab. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Recevoir to receive. (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

do I not receive or am I not receiving 
dost thou not receive or art thou not receiving 
does he not receive or is he not receiving 
do we not receive or are we not receiving 
do you not receive or are you not receiving 
do they not receive or are they not receiving 



-F- 

Ne reg ozs-je pas 
ne reg ois-tu pas 
ne reg oit-i\ pas 
ne rec evons-nous pas 
ne rec eves-vous pas 
ne reg oivent-ils pas 

. G - PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present 

have I not received, did I not receive, 

or have I not been receiving 
hast thou not received, didst thou 'not receive 

or hast thou not been receiving 
has he not received, did he not reczive^ 

or has he not been receiving 
have we not received, did we not receive^ 

or have we not been receiving 
have you not received, did you not receive^ 

or have you not been receiving 
have they not received, did they not receive 

or have they not been receiving 



N'ai-je pas reg u 
n'as-tu pas reg u 
n'a-t-il pas reg u 
n'avons-nous pas reg u 
n'avez-vous pas reg u 
n'ont-ils pas reg u 



Ne rec cvais-]e pas 
ne rec evais-tu pas 
on rec evait-W pas 
x * rec evions-nous pas 
ne rec eviez-vous pas 
ne rec evazen/-ils pas 



N'avais-je pas reg u 
n'avais-tu pas reg u 
n'avait-il pas reg u 
n'avions-nous pas reg u 
n'aviez-vous pas reg u 
n'avaient-ils pas reg u 

-j- 

Ne reg us-je pas 
ne reg us-tu. pas 
no reg w/-il pas 
ne reg £me$-nous pas 
ne reg utes-vous pas 
ne reg uren/-ils pas 



IMPERFECT. 

did I not receive or was I not receiving 
didst thou not receive or wact thou not receiving 
did he not receive or was he not receiving 
did we not receive or were we not receiving 
did you not receive or were you not receiving 
did they not receive or were they not receiving 

PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

had I not received or had I not been 
hadsl thou not received or h a dst tliou ?wt been 
had he not received or had he not been 
had we not received or had we not been 
had you not received or had you not been 
had tJiey not received or had they not been 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did J not receive 
didst thou not rrccive 
did he not receive 
did we not receive 
did you not receive 
did they not receive 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 



RECE70IR 



to receive. 75 



3 mwr. mur. jeune. jeune. boite. boite. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. ameN, 
*i, as 5 in pleasure. gn, as ni in um'on. ill, as Wi, in Wi Hi am. 



N'eus-je pas reg u 
n'eus-tu pas re9 u 
n'eut-il pas re9 u 
n'eumes-nous pas req u 
n'eutes-vous pas re9 u 
n'eurent-ils pas re$ u 



Ne rec evrai-]e pas 
ne rec evras- tu pas 
ne rec evra-t-il pas 
ne rec evrons-nous pas 
ne rec eyres-vous pas 
ne rec evront-'ds pas 



N'aurai-je pas re9 u 
n'auras-tu pas re9 u 
n'aura-t-il pas re9 u 
n'aurons-nous pas re9 u 
n'aurez-vous pas re9 u 
n'auront-ils pas re9 u 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

had I not received 
hadst thou not received 
had he not received 
had we not received 
had you not received 
had they not received 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I not receive 
shall or wilt thou not receive 
shall or will he not receive 
shall or will we not receive 
shall or will you not receive 
shall or will they not receive 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

shall or will I not have received 
shalt or wilt thou not have received 
shall or will he not have received 
shall or will we not have received 
shall or will you not have received 
shall or will they not have received 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Ne rec evrais-]e pas 
ne rec evrais-tu. pas 
ne rec evrait-il pas 
ne rec evrions-nous pas 
ne rec evries-\o\is pas 
ne rec evraient-ils pas 



should, would, could, or might I 
shouldstj wouldst, couldst, or mightst thou 
should, would, could, or might he 
should, would, could, or might we 
should, would, could, or might you 
should, would, could, or might they 



N'aurais-je pas re9 u, 
or n'eusssi-je pas ref u 
n'aurais-tu pas reg u, 
or n'eusses-tu pas rec u 
n'aurait-il pas reg u, 
or n'eut-il pas ref u 
n'aurions-nous pas re9 u, 
or rteussions-nous pas re$ u 
n'auriez-vous pas re9 w, 
or n'eussiez-vous pas re$ u 
n'auraient-ils pas re9 u, 
or n'eussent-ils pas re$ u 



PAST, 
or compound of the present, 
should, would, could, 

or might I not have received 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst, thou not have received 
should, would, could, 

or might he not have received 
should, would, could, 

or might we not have received 
should, would, could, 

or might you not have received 
should, would, could, 

or might they not have received 



70 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



Of the Fourth Conjugation. 

130. The verbs of the fourth conjugation, like those of the 
first, second, and third, are known by the termination of the 
present of the infinitive. 

131. The present of the infinitive of the fourth conjugation 
has for its termination re — as, vend re to sell. 

132. All verbs, whose present of the infinitive ends with re, 
to the amount of about 240, are of the fourth conjugation ; and 
if regular, are conjugated like vend re to sell, which is here- 
after conjugated, to be used as a model. 

133. There are in the fourth conjugation 40 regular verbs 
which take the termination of vend re to sell. 



134. They are- 






append re 


to hang up, 


mord re 


to bite, 


attend re 


to wait, to expect, 


morfond re 


to make very cold, 




to wait for, 


parfbnd re 


to melt equally, 


confond re 


to confound, 


pend re 


to hang, 


correspond re 


to correspond, 


perd re 


to lose, to destroy, 


defend re 


to defend, 


pond re 


to lay eggs, 




to prohibit, 


pourfend re 


to split, to cut in tw<\ 




to forbid, 


pretend re 


to pretend, 


demord re 


to give up, 


refend re 


to cleave again, 




to cease biting, 




to split again, 


depend re 


to take down, 


refond re 


to melt again, 




to depend on or uoon, 




to cast again, 


descend re 


to go down, 


remord re 


to bite again, 




to descend, 


rend re 


to render, to 




to take down, 




return, to give back, 


detend re 


to unbend, 


repand re 


to spill, to shed, 




to loosen, 


r^pond re 


to answer, to reply 


detord re 


to untwist, 


retord re 


to twist again, 


distend re 


to distend, 


revend re 


to sell again, 




to extend, 


sous-entend re 


to understand, 


entend re 


to hear, 




not tc express, 




to understand, 


survend re 


to seL too dear, 




to comprehend, 


suspend re 


to suspend, 


£pand re 


to spread, 


tend re 


to hold out, 


(Hand re 


to spread, 




to stretch out, 


fend re 


to cleave, 




to bend, 




to split, 


tond re 


to shear, 


fond re 


to melt, 


tord re 


to twist, 


m£vena re 


to undersell, 


vend re 


to sell. 



135. All the other verbs whose present of the infinitive ends 
with re, and not included in the above list, are irregular, and 
are to be found m the alphabetical list of all the irregular 
verbs, page 162 



OP THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 77 

136. Those who have already learned the verbs, will readily 
ascertain, without having recourse to the above table of the 
regular verbs, whether a verb, whose present of the infinitive 
ends with re, is regular or irregular, if they remember that 
dant terminates the participle present of all the regular verbs 
of the fourth conjugation. 

137. The third person singular of the present of the indica- 
tive of this conjugation, consists of the radical part of the verb 
only, it does not take any termination. 

138. Observe, that when vendre to sell, like several other 
verbs, mentioned in page 8, art. 65, is conjugated Interroga- 
tively or Negatively and Interrogatively, the first person sin- 
gular of the present of the indicative, is not conjugated like 
other verbs ; for the reason of this deviation, see page 3, 
art. 65. 

139. For the formation of the compound tenses, see page 
35, art. 86 and 87. 



78 FOURTH CONJUGATION, 



VENDRE 



to sell. 



-ami. dne. te. ecrit. mere. lire, zdole. gite. opera, oter. tout, voute 
2 at. arm. twb. ale. mare, there, tdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Vendre to sell. (Affirmatively.) 



-A- 

Vend re 

-B- 



LNFINJTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

to sell 



PAST Or PERFECT, 
or compound of the present, 
to have sold 

PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 

selling 

• D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

Ayant vend u having sold 

-E- PARTICIPLE PAST Of PASSIVE. 

Vend u sold 



Avoir vend u 

•c- 

Vend ant 



-F- 

Je vend s 
tu vend * 
il vend 

nous vend ons 
vous vend ez 
ils vend ent 



J'ai vend u 
tu as vend u 
il a vend u 
nous avons vend u 
vous avez vend u 
ils ont vend u 

-II- 

Je vend ats 
tu vend ais 
il vend ail 
nous vend ions 
vous vend ies 
ils vend aient 



J'avais vendw 
tu avais vend u 
il avait vend u 
nous avions vend u 
vous aviez vend u 
ils Avaient vend u 



INDICATIVE MOOD 

PRESENT. 

J sell, do sell, or am selling 
thou sellest, dost sell, or art selling 
he sells, does sell, or is selling 
we sell, do sell, or are selling 
you sell, do sell, or are selling 
they sell, do sell, or are selling 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE 
or compound of the present. 
I have sold, did sell, or have been selling 
thou hast sold, didst sell, or hast been selling 
he has sold, did sell, or has been selling 
we have sold, did sell, or have been selling 
you have sold, did sell, or have been selling 
they have sold, did sell, or have been selling 

IMPERFECT. 

/ sold, did sell, or was selling 
thousoldest,didst sell, or wast selling 
he sold, did sell, or ivas selling 
we sold, did sell, or were selling 
you sold, did sell, or were selling 
they sold, did sell, or were selling 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 
I had sold or had been selling 
thou hadst sold or hadst been selling 
he had sold or had been selling 
we had sold or had been selling 
you had sold or had been selling 
they had sold or had been selling 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



VEND RE 



to selL 79 



s mitT. mur. jewne. jeune. b&tte. bolle. ancre. ingrai. o?ide. un. ameN. 
<j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as //j, in WW/2" am. 



Je vend is 
tu vend is 
il vend it 
nous vend £mc* 
vous vend ites 
ils vend ircn/ 

-K- 

J'eus vend u 
tu eus vend u 
il eut vend u 
nous eumes vend u 
vous eutes vend w 
ils eurent vend u 



Je vend rai 
tu vend r<w 
il vend ra 
nous vend rons 
vous vend res 
ils vend ront 

-M- 

J'aurai vend u 
tu auras vend u 
il aura vend u 
nous aurons vend u 
vous aurez vend u 
ils auront vendu 



pre terit definite. 

Isold or did sell 
thou soldest, or efr"ck/ *eZZ 
/te 50/rf or (f i'c? se/Z 
toe sold or did se/Z 
you sold or did seZ/ 
they sold or did se// 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 
I had sold 
thou hadst sold 
he had sold 
we had sold 
you had sold 
they had sold 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

/ shall or will sell 
thou shall or wilt sell 
he shall or will sell 
we shall or will sell 
you shall or will sell 
they shall or will sell 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

1 shall or will have sold 
thou shall or wilt have sold 
he bhall or will have sold 
we shall or will have sold 
you shall or will have sold 
they shall or will have sold 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Je vend rais 
tu vend rais 
il vend rait 
nous vend rions 
vous vend riez 
ils vend raient 



j aurais vend u, 
or feus se vena u 
tu aurais vend u, 
or tu tusses vendu 
ii aurait vend u, 
or il exit vend u 



I should, would, could, or might sell 
thou shouldst, would st,couldst, or mighist seh 
he should, would, could, or might sell 
we should, would, could, or might sell 
you should, would, could, or might sell 
they should, would, could, or might sell 

PAST, 
or compound of the prat nt. 

I should. would % could, 

or might have sold 
thou shbxddst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst have sold 
he should, would, could, 
or misht have sold 
2 I 



82 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



VENDUE 



to sell 



'ami. dne. te. e'crit. meie. etre. idole. gUe. opera, dter. tout, voiito 
*at. arm. tub. ale. rnare. there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



Je ne vend is pas 
tu ne vend is pas 
il no vend it pas 
nous ne vend irnes pas 
vous ne vend ites pas 
lis ne vend irenl pas 



Je n'eus pas vend u 
tu n'eus pas vend u 
il n'eut pas vend u 
nous n'eiiraes pas vendu 
vous n'eutes pas vend u 
Us n'eurent pas vend u 



Je ne vend rai pas 
tu ne vend ras pas 
il ne vend ra pas 
nous ne vend rons pas 
vous ne vend rez pas 
ils ne vend ront pas 



Je n'aurai pas vend u 
tu n'auras pas vend u 
il n'aura pas vend u 
nous n'aurons pas vend u 
vous n'aurez pas vend u 
ils n'auront pas vend u 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

/ sold not or did not sell 
thou soldest not or didst not sell 
he sold not or did not sell 
we sold not or did not sell 
you sold not or did not sell 
they sold not or did not sell 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

• I had not sold 

thou hadst not sold 
he had not sold 
ice had not sold 
you had not sold 
they had not sold 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

Isliall or will not sell 
thou shall or wilt not sell 
he shall or will not sell 
we shall or will not sell 
you shall or trill not sell 
they shall or will not sell 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

I shall or will not have sold 
thou shall or wilt not have sold 
he shall or will not have sold 
we shall or will not have sold 
you shall or will not have sold 
they shall or will not have sold 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Je ne vend rais pas 
tu ne vend rais pas 
il ne vend rail pas 
nous ne vend rions pas 
vous ne vend riez pas 
ils ne vend raient pas 



le n'aurais pas vend u, 
or ;V neussc pas vend u 
hi n'aurais pas vend u, 
or tu n'eusses pas vend u 
il n'aurait pas vend u, 
jr il u' tut pas vend u 



present. 
1 ihouht, would) could) or might 
thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst 
he should, would, could, or might 
we should, would, could, or might 
you should, would, could, or might 
they should, would, could, or might 

past, 
or compound of the present. 

I should, would, could, 

or might not hare sold 
thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst* 

or migntst not have sold 
he should, would, could, 
or might nut have sold 






FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



VENDRE 



to sell. 83 



*muT. mur yune. jcwne. boite. boitc. ancre. ingrat. onde. un. aniCN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ra in union. ill, as //i in Wi/foam. 



nous n'aurions pas vend t«, 
or nous ri* eussions pas vtndu 
vous n'auriez pas vend u 
or vows rteussiez pas vend u 
ils n'auraient pas vend u, 
or iis n'eussent pas vend u 



we should, would, could. 

or might not have sold 
you should, would, could, 

or might not have sold 
they should, would, could, 

or might not have sold 



IMPERATIVE MOOD 



Ne vend s pas 
qu'il no vend e pas 
ne vend ons pas 
ne vend ez pas 
qu'ils ne vend ent pas 



sell not or do not sell (jthou) 

let him not sell 

let us not sell 

sell not or do not sell {you) 

let them not sell 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Que je ne vend e pas 
que tu ne vend es pas 
qu'il ne vende pas 
quo nous ne vend ions pas 
que vous ne vend iez pas 
qu'ils ne vend ent pas 



PRESENT. 

that I may not sell 
that thou mayst not sell 
that he may not seCl 
that we may not sell 
that you may not sell 
that they may not sell 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compound of the present. 



Que je n'aie pas vend u 
que tu n'aies pas vend u 
qu'il n'ait pas vend u 
que nous n'ayons pas vend u 
que vous n'ayez pas vend u 
qu'ils n'aient pas vend u 



that I may not have sold 
that thou mayst not have sold 
that he may not have sold 
that we may not have sold 
that you may not have sold 
that they may not have sold 



Que je ne vend isse pas 
que tu ne vend isses pas 
qu'il ne vendi* pas 
que nous ne vend issions pas 
que vous ne vend issiez pas 
qu'ils ne vend issent pas 



IMPERFECT. 

that I might not sell 
* that thou mighlst not sell 
that he might not sell 
that we might not sell 
that you might not sell 
that they might not sell 



PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of iLe imperfect. 



Que je n'eusse pas vend u 
que tu n'eusses pas vend u 
qu'il n'eut pas vend u 
que nous n'eussions pas vend u 
que vous n'eussiez pas vend u 
qu'ils n'eussent pas vend u 



2 i 



that 1 might not have sold 
that l/'tou jnighlsl not have sold 
that he might not have sold 
that we might not have sold 
that you might not have sold 
that they might not have sold 
2 



84 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



VENDRE 



to sell. 



ami. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. zdole. gite. opera, 6ter. tout, youie 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool, 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Vend re to sell. (Iiiierrogatively*) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Est-ce que je vendst 

vend 5-tu 

vend-il 

vend ons-nous 

vend es-vous 

vend ent-ils 



do I sell or am I selling 
dost thou sell or art thou selling 
does he sell or is he selling 
do we sell or are we selling 
do you sell or are you selling 
do they sell or are they selling 



FERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 



Ai-je vend u 
as-tu vend u 
a-t-il vend u 
avons-nous vend u 
avez-vous vend u 
ont-ils vend u 

-ii- 

Vend ais-je 
vend ais-ta 
vend ait-il 
vend ions-nous 
vend ies-vous 
vend aien/-ils 



Avais-je vend u 
avais-tu vend u 
avait-il vend u 
avions-nous vend u 
aviez-votis vend u 
avaient-ils vend u 



Vend i.5- jo 
vend is-tu. 
vend if-i] 
vend Imes- no us 
vend ites-vous 
vend tren/-ils 



have I sold or did I sell 
hadst thou sold or didst thou sell 
has he sold or did he sell 
have iv e sold or did we sell 
have you sold or did you sell 
have they sold or did they sell 

IMPERFECT. 

did I sell or was 1 selling 
didst thou sell or wast thou selling 
did he sell or was he selling 
did we sell or were we selling 
did you sell or were you selling 
did they sell or were they selling 

PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

had I sold or had I been selling 
hadst thou sold or hadst thou been selling 
had he sold or had he been selling 
had we sold or had we been selling 
had you sold or had you been selling 
had they sold or had tlicy been selling 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did I sell 
didst If lok sell 
did he sell 
did ice sell 
did you sell 
did they sell 

t^ce page B, irt. M 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



VENDRE 



to sell 85 



? mwr. rnur. jewne. j«2nt. boite. bozte. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. araeX. 
1 j, as 5 in pleasure, gn. as ni in union. i//, as Mi, in William. 



Eus-je vend u 
eus-tu vend u 
eut-il vend u 
oumes-nous vend u 
eutes-vous vend u 
eurent-ils vend u 

-L- 

Vend rai-je 
vend ras-tu. 
vend ra-t-il 
vend rons-nous 
vend res-vous 
vend ront-ils 



IRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit, 
had I sold 
hadst thou sold 
had he sold 
had we sold 
had you sold 
had they sold 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I sell 
shall or wilt thou sell 
shall or will he sell 
shall or will we sell 
shall or will you sell 
shall or will they sell 



Aurai-je vend u 
auras-tu vend u 
aura-t-il vend u 
aurons-nous vend u 
aurez-vous vend u 
auront-il vend u 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

shall or will I have sold 
sltalt or wilt thou have sold 
. shall or will he have sold 
shall or will ice have sold 
shall or will you have sold 
shall or will they have sold 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

Vend rais-]e should, would, could, or might I sell 

vend rais-iM shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst thou sell 

vend rait-\\ should, would, could, or might he sell 

vend n'ems-nous should, would, could, or might we sell 

vend riez- vous should, would, could, or might you sell 

vend raient-ila should, would, could, or might they sell 



Aurais-je vend tf, 
or eusse-je vend u 
aurais-tu vend u, 
or eusses-tu vend v. 
aurait-il vend u, 
01 eut-ilvendu 
aurions-nous vendw, 
or eussions-nous vendu 
auriez-vous vend u, 
or eussiez-vous vend u 
auraient-ils vend u, 
r eussent-ils vend u 



PAST, 
or compound oj the present 

should, would, could, 

or might I have sold 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst* 

or mightst thou have sold 
should, would, could, 

or might he have sold 
should, would, could, 

or might we have sold 
should, would, could, 

or might you have sold 
should, woucd* could, 

or might they have sold 






86 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



VENDRE 



to sell. 



l iimi. ane. te. tent. mere. etre. idole. gtte. ope>a. oter. tout. \ouXe. 
--it. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Vendre to sell. (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

-F- PRESENT. 

Est-ce que je ne vend s pas do I not sell or am I not selling 
ne vend s-tu pas dost thou not sell or art thou not selling 

ne vend-il pas does he not sell or is he not selling 

ne vend ons-nous pas do we not sell or are we not selling 

ae vend es-vous pas do you not sell or are you not selling 

ne vend ent-ils pas do they not sell or are they not selling 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

have I not sold, did I not sell, 

or have I not been selling 
hast thou not sold, didst thou not sell, 

or hast thou not been selling 
has he not sold, did he not sell, 

or has he not been selling 
have we not sold, did we not sell, 

or have we not been selling 
have you not sold, did you not sell, 

or have you not been selling- 
have they not sold, did they not sell, 

or have they not been selling 



N'ai-je pas vend u 
n'as-tu pas vend u 
n'a-t-il pas vendw 
n'avons-nous pas vend u 
n'avez-vous pas vend u 
n'ont-ils pas vend u 



Ne vend ais-]e pas 
ne vend ais-tu pas 
ne vend ail-il pas 
ne vend ions-nous pas 
ne vend zes-vous pas 
ne vend aient-ils pas 



N'avais-je pas vend u 
n'avais-tu pas vend u 
n'avait-il pas vend u 
n'avions-nous pas vend u 
n'aviez-vous pas vend u 
n'avaient-ils pas vend u 

-J- 

Ne vend w-je pas 

ne vend is-tu pas 

ne vend u-il paa 

ne vend imes nous pas 

ne vendz/es-vous pas 

ne vend ir ent-ils pas 



IMPERFECT. 

did I not sell or was I not selling 
didst thou not sell or wast thou not selling 
did he not sell or was he not selling 
did we not sell or were we not selling 
did you not sell or were you not selling 
did they not sell or were they not selling 

PLUPERFECT, 
compound of the imperfect, 
had I not sold or had I not been 
hadst thou not sold or kadst thou not been 
had he not sold, or had he not been 
had we not sold or had we not been 
had you not sold or had you not been 
had they not sold or had they not been 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did 1 not sell 
didst thou not sell 
did he not sell 
did we not sell 
did you not sell 
did they not sell 



I 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



VENDRE 



to sell 17 



s mur. mur. jewne. jeune. boite. bo£te. ancre. zngrat. onde. un. amoN 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as hi^ in WiWtam 



N'eus-je pas vend w 
n*eus-tu pas vend w 
n'eut-il pas vend u 
n'eumes-nous pas vend u 
n'eutes-vous pas vend u 
n'eurent-ils pas vendw 



PRETERIT ANTERIOPv, 
or compound of the preterit. 

had I not sold 
hadst thou not sold 
had he not sold 
had we not sold 
had you not sold 
had they not sold 



Ne vend raz-je pas 
ne vend ras-tu pas 
ne vend ra-t-il pas 
ne vend rons-nous pas 
ne vend rez-vous pas 
ne vend ront-ils pas 



N'aurai-je pas vend u 
n'auras-tu pas vend u 
n'aura-t-il pas vend u 
n'aurons-nous pas vend u 
n'aurez-vous pas vend u 
n'auront-ils pas vend u 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I not sell 
shall or wilt thou not sell 
shall or will he not sell 
shall or will we not sell 
shall or will you not sell 
shall or will they not sell 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

shall or will I not have sold 
shall or wilt thou not have sold 
shall or will he not have sold 
shall or will we not have sold 
shall or will you not have sold 
shall or will they not have sold 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Ne vend rais-]e pas 
ne vend rais-iu pas 
ne vend rait-il pas 
ne vend rwms-nous pas 
ne vend rics-vous pas 
ne \end raient-ils pas 



PRESENT. 

should, would) could, or might I 1 

shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst thou J 
should, would, could, or might he \ § 

should, would, could, or might we f g 

should, would, could, or might you i ^ 

should, would, could, or might they 

PAST, 
or compound of Vie present. 



N'aurais-je pas vend w, 
or n'euast-je pas vend u 
n"aurais-tu pas vend u, 
or neusses-tupas vendu 
n'aurait-il pas vend u, 
or n'eut-il pas vend u 
n'aurions-nous pas vend u, 
or n'eussions-nous pas vend u 
n'auriez-voas pas vend u, 
or n'eussicz-vous pas vendu 
n'auraient-ils pas vend i/, 
or rteussent-ils pas vend u 



should, would, could, 

or might I not have sold 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou not have sold 
should, would, could, 

or might he not have sold 
should, would, could, 

or might we not have sold 
should, would, could, 

or might you not have sold 
should, would, could, 

or might they not have sold 



90 



LIST OF REFLECTED VERBS. 



1st, nous nous secourons Pun Pautre we assist one another. 

Mary and Sai % ah will say, 
2d, nous nous secourons Tune l'autre we assist one another. 

John, Joseph, Paul, and any number of others will say, 
3^, nous nous secourons les uns les autres we assist one another 

Mary, Sarah, Rebecca, and any number of others will say, 
Ath, nous nous secourons lesunes les autres we assist one another. 

156. Remark that when two persons only, are the nomina- 
tives or subjects of the verb, one another, is put in the singular 
in French ; and if both persons, or one only, is of the masculine 
gender, one another is rendered by Van V autre as in the 1st 
example ; but if both persons are of the feminine gender, one 
another is rendered by Fune Fautre, as in the 2d example. 

157. When more than two persons are the nominatives or 
subjects of the verbs, then one another is put in the plural in 
French ; and if all the persons, or one only, is of the masculine 
gender, one another is rendered by les uns les autres, as in the 
3d example ; but if all the persons are of the feminine gender, 
one another is rendered by les unes les autres, as in the 4th 
example. 

158. A list of Verbs, which, though not admitting in English, 
the pronouns one's-self, myself, thyself, himself, herself, our* 
selves, yourselves, themselves, are nevertheless reflected in 
French. 



to abstain 
to agree 
to apply 
to bathe 

to bear up against 
to be angry 
to be offended 
to become liquid 
to be dying 
to be eager 
to be eclipsed 
to begin to thrive 
to be moved 
to be obstinate 
to be out of con- j 
ceit with J 

to be renewed 
to be resolved 
to be silent 
to beit a it 
to Irmc 
to boa*t 



s'abstenir, 

s'accorder, 

s'adresser, 

se baigner, 

se raidir, 

se facher, 

se facher, 

se llqueficr, 

se mourir, 

s'empresser, 

s'eclipser, 

se remplumer, 

s'atteridrir, 

s'opiniatrer, 

se dego (iter, 

sc rcnouvolcr, 
se resoudre, 
se taire, 
se garder, 

s'epanouir, 
se vantcr, 



to break loose 

to catch cold 

to care for 

to complain 

to come forward 

to confer 

to congeal 

to creep into 

to delight in 

to delight in 

to diminish 

to desist 

to discharge 

to discourse with, 

to distrust 

to determine 

to elapse 

to endeavour 

to exclaim 

to expect 

to evaporate 

to fade away 



se dechainer, 

s'enrhumer, 

se soucier, 

se plaindre, 

s'avancer, 

s'aboucher, 

se figer, 

se glisser, 

se plaire, 

se complaire, 

s'apetisser, 

se desister, 

s'acquitter, 

s'entrctcnir, 

se defter, 

se determiner, 

s'ecouler, 

s'eftbrcer, 

se rdcrier, 

s'attendre, 

s'evaporer, 

se flelrir, 



LIST OF REFLECTED VERBS. 



VI 



to faint away 
to fall asleep 
to fall asleep again 
to fall furiously 

upon 
to fall tooth and ) 

nail upon ( 

to fancy 
to fancy 
to new feather 
to flock in crowds 
to flow out 
to fly away 
to fly into a passion 
to gangrene 
to get intoxicated 
to get palsied 
to get preferment 
to get up 
to get weary 
to give over 
to give up 
to go away 
to go forward 
to go to bed 
to grieve 
to grow better 
to grow bold 
to grow drowsy 
to grow familiar 
to grow impatient 
to grow milder 
to grow poor 
to grow proud 
to grow nch 
to grow tired 
to heal 
to inqiire 
to intermeddle 
to intermeddle 
to keep from 
o kneel down 
to laugh at 
to lay hold of 
to league 
to lean on one's ^ 

elbow \ 

to lean upon 
to make haste 
to make haste 
to make one's escape 
to make one's escape 
to make an alliance 
to marry 
to meddle with 



s evanomr, 
s'endormir, 
se rendormir, 

s'acharner, 

s'acharner, 

se figurer, 

s'hnaginer, 

se remplumer, 

s'attrouper, 

s'ecouler, 

s'envoler, 

s'emporter, 

se gangrener, 

s'enivrer, 

se paraliser, 

s'avancer, 

se lever, 

s'ennuyer, 

se de sister, 

se demettre, 

s'en aller, 

s'avancer, 

se eoucher, 

s'attrister, 

s'amender, 

s'enhardir, 

s'assoupir, 

se familiariser, 

s'impalienter 

se radoucir 

s'appauvrir, 

s'enorgueillir, 

s'enrichir, 

se lasser, 

se guerir, 

s'enquerir, 

s'entremettre, 

s'ingerer, 

se garder, 

s'agenouiller, 

se moquer 

se saisir, 

se liguer, 

s'accouder, 

s'appuycr, 
se depecher, 

se hater 
s'evader, 
s'echapper, 
s'allier, 
se marier 
sp melcr, 



to melt 
to mistake 
to mistrust 
to move forward 
to mutiny 
to oppose, 
to overflow 
to paint 
to perceive 
to persist 
to putrefy 
to quit one's country 
to rebel 
to recant 
to rejoice 
to remember 
to remember 
to repent 
to resign 
to retract 
to rise 

to run into debt 
to runaway 
to seize 
to sell 
o set off 
to shrink 
to sit down 
to sit down at table 
to slip 
to stay 
to steal away 
to stick to 
to stiffen 
to stoop 
to stop 
to strive 
to struggle 
to submit 
to subscribe 
to surrender 
to take a strong ) 
fancy $ 

to take delight, in 
to take offence 
to take pet 
to take refuge 
to take rest 
to lake root 
to trust 

to vanish nwiy 
to walk- 
to withdraw 
to wonder 
to wonder 
K 



se fondrc, 
se me prendre, 
se mefier, 
s'avancer, 
se mutiner, 
s'opposer, 
se deborder, 
se farder, 
s'apercevoir 
s'obstiner, 
se putrefier, 
s'expatrier, 
se revolter, 
se dedire, 
se rejouir, 
se souvenir, 
se ressouvenir, 
jse repantir, 
se de'meltre, 
se retracler, 
se lever, 
s'endetter, 
s'enfuir 
se saisir, 
se vend re, 
s'acheminer 
s'apctisser, 
s'asseoir, 
s'attabler, 
se glisser, 
s'arreter, 
s'esquiver, 
s'aUacher, 
se raidir, 
se baisser, 
s'arreter, 
s'efFc-rcer, 
se debattre, 
se soumettre, 
s'abonner, 
se rendre, 

s'entetcr, 

se plaire, 
se formalise!*, 
se piqner, 
se reii'_ 
se reposer, 
s'enraciner. 
se fier, 
s'eclipser, 
se prom en er, 
se retir^r, 
s'gtoiincr, 
s'emerveiller, 



92 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 

•ami. ine. te. ecrit. mere. etre. tdolc. g-ite. opera, oter. tout, voute 
2 >it. aim. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

Se lever to rise. (JlJ/irmatively.) 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

-A- PRESENT. 

&e lev cr to rise 

-B- TAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 
S^tre lev i to have risen 

-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 

Se lev ant rising 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

S'&ant lev i . having risen 

-B- PARTICITLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 

Lev i risen 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

-y- PRESENT. 

Je me l£v c / rwe, do rise, or am rising 

tu te lev es thou risest, dost rise, or art rising 

il se lev e he rises, does rise, or is rising 

nous nous lev ons ice rise, do rise, or are rising 

vous vous lev tz you rise, do rise, or are rising 

ils se lev tnt they rise, do rise, or are rising 

-G- FERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 
Je me suis lev e 1 have risen, did rise, or have been rising 

tu t'es lev e thou hast risen, didst rise, or hast been rising 

il s'est lev i he has risen, did rise, or has been rising 

nous nous sommes lev is we have risen, did rise, or have been rising 
vous vous etes lev is you have risen, did rise, or have been rising 
ils se sont lev is they have risen, did rise, or have been risitig 

-H- IMPERFECT. 

Je me lev ais I rose, did rise, or was rising 

tu te lev ais thou rosest, didst rise, or toast rising 

il se lev ail he rose, did rise, or uas rising 

nous nous lev ions we rose, did rise, or were rising 

vous vous lev itz you rose, did rise, or were rising 

ils se lev aicnt they rose., did rise, or were rising 

-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

Jem'etais lev k 1 had risen or had been rising 

tu tY-tais lev i thou hadst risen or hadst been rising 

il s^tait lev e* he had risen or had been rising 

nous nous (Hions lev is we had risen or had been rising 

vous vous etiez lev is you had rUtn or had been rising 

ils s'&aient lev is they had risen or had beer, rising 






PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



93 



3 mwr. mur. jeune. jewne. boite. boite. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. amew. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ni in union. 2//, as Hi in WW/iam, 



-j- 

Je me lev ai 

tu te lev as 

il se lev a 

nous nous lev dmes 

vous vous lev a/e$ 

ils se lev erenl 

-K- 

Je me fus lev e 

tu te fus lev i 

il se fut lev e 

nous nous fumes lev is 

vcus vous futes lev is 

ils se furent lev is 

-L- 

Je me lev erai 
tu te lev era? 
il se lev era 
nous nous lev erons 
vous vous lev eres 
ils se le v eront 

-M- 

Je me serai lev e 

tu te seras lev i 

il se sera lev i 

nous nous scrons lev is 

vous vous serez lev is 

ils se seront lev is 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

/ rose or did rise 
thou r os est or didst rise 
he rose or did rise 
we rose or did rise 
you ro& or did rise 
tkey rose or did rise 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

I had risen 
thou hadst risen 
he had risen 
we had risen 
you had risen 
they had risen 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

I shall or will rise 
thou shall or wilt rise 
he shall or will rise 
we sliall or will rise 
you shall or will rise 
they shall or will rise 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

I shall or will have risen 
thou shall or wilt have risen 
he sliall or will have risen 
we shall or will have risen 
you shall or will have risen 
they shall or will have risen 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



-N- 

Je me lev erais 
tu te lev erais 
il se lev erait 
nous nous lev erions 
vous vous lev eriez 
ils se lev eraient 



Je me serais lev i, 
orjt mtjussb lev e 
tu te serais lev i, 
or tu te fusses lev 4 
il se serait lev i, 
or il sefCU lev i 



PRESENT. 

/ should^ would) could) or might rise 

thou shouidst, wouldst) couldst, or mightst rise 

he should^ would) could, or might rise 

we should) would, could, or might rise 

you should) would) could, or might rise 

they should) would) could) or might rise 

PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

I should, would) could, 

or might have risen 
thou shouldst) wouldst) couldstj 

or mightst have risen 
he should) would) could, 

or might have risen 



94 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



[ amu one. te. icxit. mere. etre. idole. gzte. opera, oter. tout, voute. 
*at, arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool 



nous nous serions lev is, 
or nous nousfussions lev is 
vous vous seriez lev is, 
or vous vous fussies lev is 
ils se seraient lev is, 
or ils sefusstnt lev is 



we should, would, could, 
or might have risen 

you should, would, could, 
or might have risen 

they should, would, could, 
or might have risen 



Lev e-toi 
qu'il se lev e 

ley ons-nona 
leves-vous 
qu'ils se lev ent 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

rise (thou) 
let him rise 
let us rise 
rise (you) 
let them, rise 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



-Q- 

Que je me levc 
que tu te le* v es 
qu'il se lev e 
que nous nous lev ions 
que vous vous lev iez 
qu'ils se lev ent 



that I may rise 
that thou mayst rise 
that he may rise 
that we may rise 
that you may rise 
that they may rise 



Que je me sois lev i 

que tu te sois lev e 

qu'il se soit lev i 

que nous no as soyons lev is 

que vous vous soyez lev is 

qu'ils se soient lev is 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

that I may have risen 
that thou mayst have risen 
that he may have risen 
that we may have risen 
that you may have risen 
that they may have risen 



Que je me lev asse 

que tu te lev asses 

qu il se lev at 

que nous nous lev assions 

que vous vous lev assies 

qu'ils se lev assent 



IMPERFECT. 

that I might rise 
that thou mighlst rise 
that he might rise 
that ice might rise 
that you might rise 
that they might rise 



Que je mo fusse lev i 
que tu to fusses lev i 
qu'il se fut lev 6 
que nous nous fussions lev is 
que vous vous fussiez lev is 
qu'ils se fussent lev is 



PLUPERFECT, 

compound of the imperfect. 

that I might have risen 
that thou mightst have risen 
that he might have risen 
that not might have risen 
Hint you might liave risen 
that they might have risen 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



95 



3 m?*r. miir. jeune. jewne. boite. boHe. ancre. ingrat. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, i//, as Hi, in Wi /fc am. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

Se lever to rise. (Negatively.) 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Ne pas se lev er 



PRESENT. 

no/ to rise 

PAST Or PERFECT, 
or compound of the present. 

not to have risen 



Ne pas s'etre lev i 

-O PARTICIPLE PRESENT OT ACTIVE. 

Ne se lev ant pas not rising 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

Ne s'£tant pas lev e 



not having risen 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Je ne me lev e pas 
tu ne te lev es pas 
il ne se lev e pas 
nous ne nous lev ons pas 
vous ne vous lev es pas 
lis ne se lev ent pas 

-G- 



PRESENT. 

/ rise not, do not rise, or am not 
thou risestnot 9 dost not me, or art not 
he rises not, does not rise, or is not 
we rise not, do not rise, or are not 
you rise not, do not rise, or are not 
they rise not, do not rise, or are not 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 
Je ne me suis pas lev e I have not risen, did not rise, 

or have not been rising 
tu ne t'es pas lev e thou hast not risen, didst not rise, 

or hast not been rising 
il ne s'est pas lev 6 he has not risen, did not rise* 

or has not been rising 
nous ne nous sommes pas lev es we have not risen, did not rise, 

or have not been rising 
you have not risen, did not rise, 

or have not been rising 
they have not risen, did not rise, 
or have not been rising 

IMPERFECT. 

/ rose not, did not rise, or was 
thou rosest not, didst not rise, or wast 
he rose not, did not rise, or was 
we rose not, did not rise, or were 
you rose not, did not rise, or were 
they rose not, did not rise, or were 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 

I had not risen or had not been 
thou hadst not risen or hadst not been 
he had not risen or had not been 
we had not risen or had not been 
you had not risen or had not been 
they had not risen or had not been 
2 k 2 



vous ne vous etes pas lev es 
ils ne se sont pas lev is 



Je ne me lev aw pas 

tu ne te lev ais pas 

il ne se lev ait pas 

nous ne nous lev ions pas 

vous ne vous lev ies pas 

ils nese lev aient pas 

-i- 



Jo ne m'^tais pas lev 6 

tu ne t'^tais pas lev e 

il ne s'etait pas lev e 

nous ne nous etions pas lev es 

vous ne vous etiez pas lev is 

ils ne s'^taient pas lev is 



96 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



l ami. ano. te. e'crit. mere. etre. idole. gzte. opera, dter. tout, voute. 
' 2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

-J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

Je ne me lev ai pas I rose not or did not rise 

tu ne te lev as pas thou rosest not or didst not rise 

il ne se lev a pas he rose not or did not rise 

nous ne nous lev antes pas we rose not or did not rise 

vous ne vous lev dies pas you rose not or did not rise 

ils ne se lev erent pas they rose not or did not rise 

-K- PRETERIT INTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 
Je ne me fus pas lev i I had not risen 

tu ne te fus pas lev i thou hadst not risen 

il ne se fut pas lev e he had not risen 

nous ne nous fumes pas lev is we had not risen 
vous ne vous fiites pas lev is you had not risen 
ils ne se furent pas lev es they had not risen 

-L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

Je ne me lev erai pas / shall or will not rise 

tu ne te lev eras pas thou shalt or wilt not rise 

il ne se lev era pas he shall or will not rise 

nous ne nous lev erons pas we shall or will not rise 

vous ne vous lev eres pas you shall or will not rise # 

ils ne se lev eront pas they shall or will not rise 

-M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 
Je ne me serai pas lev e I shall or will not have risen 

tu ne te seras pas lev e thou shalt or wilt not have risen 

il ne se sera pas lev i he shall or will not have risen 

nous ne nous serons pas lev is we shall or will not have risen 
vous ne vous serez pas lev is you shall or will not have risen 
ils no se seront pas lev is they shall or will not have risen 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

Je ne me lev erais pas / should, would, could, or might 

tu ne te le v erais pas thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst 

il ne se lev erait pas he should, would, could, or might 

nous ne nous lev erions pas we sliould, would, could, or might 

vous ne vous lev eriez pas you should, would, could, or might 

ils ne se lev eraient Das they should, would, could, or might 

•O- PAST 

or compound of the present. 

Je ne me serais pas lev i, I should, would, could, 
or je ne mefusse pas lev i or might 7iot Jiave risen 

tu no te serais pas lev S, thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
or tu ne te fusses pas lev i or mighfsl not have risen 

il ne se serai t pas lev i, he should, would, could, 
or il ne se fut pas lev t or might not have riser 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 97 

5 mwr. mur. jewne. jeune. bozte. boite. ancre. trcgrat. ondc. un. ai.aeN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as Hi, in WWViauL 

nous ne nous serions pas lev es, we should, would, could, 
or nous ne nousfussions pas lev es or might not have risen 

vous ne vous seriez pas lev is, you should, would, could, 
or vous ne vous fussies pas lev es or might not have risen 

ils ne se seraient pas lev is, they should, would, could, 
or ils ne se fussent pas lev is or might not have risen 

. P . IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Ne te lev e pas rise not or do not rise {thou) 

qu'il ne se lev c pas let him not rise 

ne nous lev ons pas let us not rise 

ne vous lev es pas rise not or do not rise (you) 

qu'ils ne se lev ent pas let them not rise 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Que je ne me lev e pas that I may not rise 

que tu ne te lev es pas that thou mayst not rise 

qu'il ne se lev e pas that he may not rise 

que nous ne nous lev ions pas that we may not rise 

que vous ne vous lev ies pas that you may not rise 

qu'ils ne se lev ent pas that they may not rise 

-R- PRETERIT Or PAST, 

or compound of the present, 

Que je ne me sois pas lev i that I may not have risen 

que tu ne te sois pas lev i that thou mayst not have risen 

qu'il ne se soit pas lev i that he may not have risen 

que nous ne nous soyons pas lev es that we may not have risen 

que vous ne vous soyez pas lev es that you may not have risen 

qu'ils ne se soient pas lev is that they may not have risen 

-S- IMPERFECT. 

Que je ne me lev asse pas that I might not rise 

que tu ne te lev asses pas that thou mightst not rise 

qu'il ne se lev at pas that he might not rise 

que nous ne nous lev assions pas that we might not tise 

que vous ne vous lev assies pas that you might not msf 

qu'ils ne re lev assent pas that they might not rise 

-T- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

Que je ne me fusse pas lev i that I might not have risen 

que tu ne te fusses pas lev i that thou mightst not have risen 

qu'il ne se fut pas lev i that he might not have risen 

que nous ne nous fussions pas lev h lhat we might not have risen 

que vous ne vous fussiez pas lev h that yon might not hate risen 

qu'ils ne se fussent pas lev is thai they might not have risen 



98 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



Mtaii. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, dter. towt. vowte. 
■uti arm. tuh. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

Se lever to rise. (Interrogatively.) 



ISle lev e'-je 

te lev es-tu 

Be lev e-t-il 

nous lev ons-nous 

vous lev es-vous 

se lev ent-i\s 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

do I rise or am I rising 
dost thou rise or art thou rising 
does he rise or is he rising 
do we rise or are we rising 
do you rise or are you rising 
do they rise or are they rising 



-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

Me suis-je lev i have I risen or did I rise 

t n es-tu lev i hadst thou risen or didst thou rise 

s'est-il lev i has he risen or did he rise 

nous sommes-nous lev is have we risen or did we rise 
vous etes-vous lev is have you risen or did you rise 
se sont-ils lev is have they risen or did they rise 



-H- 

Me lev ais-]Q 
te lsv ais-tu 
se lev ai/-il 
nous lev ions-nous 
vous lev ies-vous 
se lev aien/-ils 



IMPERFECT. 

did I rise or was I rising 
didst thou rise or wast thou rising 
did he rise or was he rising 
did we rise or were we rising 
did you rise or were you rising 
did they rise or were they rising 



M'ctais-je lev c 
t'etais-tu lev e 
s'etait-il lev e 
nous £tions-nous lev is 
vous £tiez-vous lev is 
8'£taient-ils lev is 

-j- 

Me lev a?-je 

te lev as-tu 

se leva-t-il 

nous lev awes-nou8 

vous lev a7es-vous 

se lev eVen/-ils 



PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 
had I risen or had I been risi'jig 
hadst thou risen or hadst thou been rising 
had he risen or had he been rising 
had ice risen or had we been rising 
had you risen or had you been rising 
had they risen or had they been rising 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did I rise 
didst thou rise 
did he rise 
did we rise 
did you rise 
did they rise 



PRONOMINAL VFRBS. 



99 



s mur. mur. jeime. jeune. boite. bozte. ancre. zngrat. onde. an- arne.\ 
4 j, as 5 in pleasure. gn, as ni in union. ill, as Hi in W.lLain. 



Me fus-je lev i 

te fus-tu lev e 

se fut-il lev i 

nous fiimes-nous lev is 

vous futes-vous lev is 

se furent ils lev is 

-L- 

Me lev erai-]e 
te lev eras-tu. 
se lev era-t-il 
nous lev eron$-nous 
vous lev e?-es-vous 
se lev eront-'As 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

had I risen 
hadst thou risen 
had lie risen 
had we risen 
had you risen 
had they risen 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I rise 
shall or wilt thou rise 
shall or will he rise 
shall or will we rise 
shall or will you rise 
shall or will they rise 



-M- 

Me serai-je lev i 

te seras-tu lev e 

se sera-t-il lev e 

nous serons-nous lev es 

vous serez-vous lev es 

se seront-ils lev is 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 



shall or ivill I have risen 
shalt or wilt thou have risvtt 
shall or will he have risen 
shall or will we have risen 
shall or will you have risen 
shall or will they have risen 



-N- 

Melev erais-]e 
te lev erais-tu. 
se lev erait-il 
nous lev erions-nous 
vous lev eriez-vous 
se lev eraienl-ils 



CONDITIONAL MOOD 

PRESENT. 

should, would, could, or might I rise 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or miglilst thou rise 
should,- would, could, or might he rise 
should, would, could, or might we rise 
should, would, could, or might you rise 
should, would, could, or might they rise 



Me serais-je lev i, 

or mefusse-je lev e 

te serais-tu lev i, 

or te fusses- tu lev i 

se serait-il lev i, 

or se fut-il lev i 

nous serions-nous lev is, 

or nous fussions-nous lev is 

vous seriez-vous lev is, 

or vous fussiez-vous lev is 

se seraient-ils lev is, 

or se fussent-ils lev is 



PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

should, would, could, 

or might I have risen 
shouldst, ivouldst, couldst, 

or mights I thou have risen 
should, would, coula, 

or might he have risen 
should, u'ould, could* 

or mi glil we have risen 
should, would, could, 

or might you have risen 
should, would, could, 

or might they have rmen 



100 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



''ami. ane. te. ecrit. me v re. etre. t'dole. gzte. opera, dter. tout, voute 
i at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

Se lever to rise. (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Ne me lev e-je pas do I not rise or am I not rising 

ne te lev es-tu pas dost thou not rise or art thou not rising 

ne se lev e-t-il pas does he not rise or is he not rising 

ne nous lev ons-nous pas do we not rise or are we not rising 

ne vous lev es-vous pas- do you not rise or are you not rising 

ne se lev ent-i\s pas do they not rise or are they not rising 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

Ne me suis-je pas lev e have I not risen, did I not rise, 

or have I not been rising 
ne tes-tu pas lev e hast thou not risen, didst thou not me, 

or hast thou not been rising 
ne s'est-il pas lev e has he not risen, did he not rise, 

or has he not been rising 
ne nous sommes-nous pas lev es have we not risen, did we not rise, 

or have we not been rising 
ne vous etes-vgus pas lev es have you not risen, did you not rise, 

or have you not been rising 
ne se sont-ils pas lev es have they not risen, did they not rise, 

or have they not been rising 

-II- IMPERFECT. 

Ne me lev ais-je pas did I not rise or was 1 not rising 

ne te lev ais-tu. pas didst thou not rise or ivast thou not rising 

ne se lev ait-il pas did he not rise or was he not risi?ig 

ne nous lev zons-nous pas did we not rise or were we not rising 

ne vous lev ies-vous pas did you not rise or were you not rising 

ne se lev aient-ils pas did they not rise or were they not rising 

-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 
Ne m'etais-je pas lev e had I not risen or had I not 

no t'etais-tu pas lev e hadst thou not risen or hadst thou not 

ne s'etait-il pas lev e had he not risen or had he not 

ne nous etions-nous pas lev es had we not risen or had we not 
ne vous 6liez-vous pas lev es had you not risen or liad you not 
ne s'etaienl-ils pas lev es had they not risen or had they not d 

-J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

Ne me lev at-je pas did I not rise 

ne te lev as-tu pas didst thou not rise 

ne se lev a-t-il p>is did he not rise 

ne nous lev awes-nous pas did ice not rise 

ne vous lev<i/e*-vous pas did you not rise 

ne se lev erenMls pas did thiy not rise 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. ll I 



8 mwr. mur. jeune. jeune. boZte. boZto. ancre. ingrat. onde. wn. aniew 
4 j, as* in pleasure. gn, as ni in union. t/Z, as Hi, in Wi /ti am 

-K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

Ne me fus-je pas lev e had I not risen 

ne te fus-tu pas lev e hadst thou not risen 

ne se fut-il pas lev e had he not risen 

ne nous fumes-nous pas lev es had we not risen 

ne vous futes-vous pas lev es had you not risen 

ne se furent-ils pas lev es had they not risen 

-L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

Ne me lev era£-je pas shall or will I not rise 

ne te lev eras-tu pas shall or will thou not rise 

ne se lev era-t-il pas shall or will he not rise 

ne nous lev erons-nous pas shall or will we not rise 

ne vous lev eres-vous pas shall or will you not rise 

be se lev eront-ils pas sAaZZ or will they not rise 

-M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

Ne me serai-je pas lev e shall cr will 1 not have risen 

ne te seras-tu pas lev e shall or w/ZZ thou not have risen 

ne se sera-t-il pas lev e shall or urc'fl /te no/ have risen 

ne nous serons-nous pas Lev es sAaZZ or will we not have risen 

ne vous serez-vous pas lev es shall or m'ZZ j/on not have risen 

ne se seront-ils pas lev es $/ia/Z or will they not have risen 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

Ne me lev enm-je pas • should, would, could, or might I 

ne te lev erais-Ui pas shouldst,wouldsl, couldsl, or mightsl l/tou s 

ne se lev eraxt-W pas should, would, could, or migtit he 

ne nous lev er/om-nous pas should, would, could, or might we 

ne vous lev eriez-vous pas sliould, would, could, or miglit you 

ne se lev eraien/-ils pas should, would, could, or might they 



\ 



-O- PAST, 

o?' compound of the present. 

Ne me serais-je pas leve, sliould, would, could, 

or ne mefusst-je jjus lev e or might 1 not have men 

ne te serais-tu pas lev e', shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or ne tefusses-iu pas lev e or mightsl thou not have i isen 

ne se serait-il pas lev e', should, would, could, 

or ne se fut-il fas lev e or might he not have risen 

ne nous serions-nous pas lev es, should, would, could, 

or ne nous fussions -nous pas lev es or might we not have risen 

ne vous seriez-vous pas lev es, should, would, could, 

or ne vous fuss iez-vous pas lev es or might you not have risen 

ne se seraient-ils pas lev es should, would, could, 

or ne sefussent-ils pas lev es or might they not have risen 



102 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



'ami. dne. te. ecrit. mere. etre. /dole, g/'te. opera, oter. tout, voutc. 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool, 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

Se bien porter to be well. (Affirmatively.) 



-A- 

Se bien porter 

-B- 



INFLN1TIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

to be well 



PAST Or PERFECT, 
or compound of the present. 
S'etre bien port 6 to have been well 

-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 

Se port ant bien being well 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

S'etant bien port i having been well 

-E- PARTICIPLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 

Bien port e been well 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Je me port e bien 
tu te port es bien 
il se port e bien 
nous nous port ons bien 
vous vous port es bien 
ils se port ent bien 



PRESENT. 

/ am well 
thou art well 
he is well 
we are well 
you are well 
they are well 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 



Je me suis bien porte 

tu fes bien porte 

il s'est bien port e 

nous nous sorames bien port es 

vous vous etes bien port te 

ils se sont bien port es 

-H- 

.Te me port ais bien 

tu te port ais bien 

il se port ail bien 

nous nous port ions bien 

vous vous porties bien 

ils se port aient bien 

-I- 



Je irTdtais b/cn port 6 

tu tY'tais bien port I 

il sVitait bien port e* 

nous nous elions bien port te 

vous vous eliez bien port te 

ils sVtaiont bien port es 



I have been well 
thou hast been icell 
he has been well 
we have been well 
you have been vjell 
they have been well 

IMPERFECT. 

I was well 
thou least well 
he was well 
we were well 
you were well 
they were well 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 
J had been well 
thou Ji.adst been well 
he had been well 
we had been well 
you had been well 
they had bt en welt 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



103 



? mwr. m/?r. jeiene. jeune. boi'te. bo-He. ancre. ingra.t. onde. un. araeN. 
*j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in uw'on. ill, as Ui, in Wi#iazn 



Je me port ai bien 

tu te port as bien 

il se port a bien 

nous nous port times bien 

vous vous port dies bien 

ils se port erent bien 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I was well 
thou wast well 
he was well 
we were well 
you were well 
they were well 



Je me fus bien port i 

tu te fus bien port i 

il se fut bien port e 

nous nous fumes bien port 6s 

vous vous futes bien port is 

ils se furent bien port is 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

I had been well 
thou hadst been well 
he had been well 
we had been well 
you had been well 
they had been well 



Je me port erai bien 
tu te port eras bien 
il se port era bien 
nous nous port erons bien 
vous vous port eres bien 
ils se port eront bien 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

I shall or will be well 
tliou shall or wilt be well 
he shall or will be well 
we shall or will be well 
you shall or will be well 
they shall or will be well 



Je me serai bien port e* 

tu te seras bien port i 

il se sera bien port e 

nous nous serons bien port is 

vous vous serez bien port is 

ils se seront bien port is 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

I shall or will have been well 
thou shalt or wilt have been well 
he shall or will have been well 
we shall or will have been well 
you shall or will have been well 
they shall or will leave been well 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Je me port erais bien 
tu te port erais bien 
il se port trait bien 
nous nous port eri'ons bien 
vous vous port eriez bien 
ils se port eraie?U bien 



PRESENT. 

/ should, would, could, or might 
thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst 
he should, would, could, or might 
we should, would, could, or might 
you should, would, could, or might 
they should, would, could, or might 



Je me serais bien port e, 
or je mefusse bien port i 
tu te serais bien port i, 
or tu te fusses bien port i 
il se serait bien port i, 

or il sr ff,t hirrt f>n r f I 



PAST, 

or compound of the prrsr.vt. 

I should, would, could, 

or might have been well 

■ thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst 

or migldst hare been well 

he should, would, could, 
or tftight hf^ beffi itell 



>$ 



104 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



'ami. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gile. opera, oter. tout, voiitb 
*at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fo»\. 

nous nous serions bien port is, we should, would, could, 
or nous nousfussions bien port is or might have been well 

vous vous seriez bien port es, you should, would, could, 
or vous vousfussiez bien port es or might have been well 

Us se seraient bien port es, they should, would, could, 
or Us sefussent bien port is or might have been well 

-p- IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Port e-toi bien be well (thou) 

qu'il se port e bien let him be well 

port ons-nous bien let us be well 

port esr-vous bien be well (you) 

qu'ils se port ent bien let them be well 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

-Q- PRESENT. 

Que je me port e bien that I may be well 

que tu te port es bien that thou mayst be well 

qu'il se port e bien that he may be well 

que nous nous port ions bien that we may be well 

que vous vous port iez bien that you may be well 

qu'ils se port ent bien that they may be well 

-R- PRETERIT Or PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

Que je me sois bien port e that I may have been well 

que tu te sois bien port 6 that thou mayst have been well 

qu'il se soit bien port e that he may have been well 

que nous nous soyons bien port is that we may have been well 

que vous vous soyez bien port is that you may have been well 

qu'ils se soient bien port is that they may have been well 

-S- IMPERFECT. 

Que je me port asse bien that I might be udl 

que tu te port asses bien that thou might st be well 

ij.i'il se port at bien that he might be well 

que nous nous port, assions bion tJuit tec Might be well 

quo vous vous port assies bien that you might be well 

qu"ils so port assent bien that they might be well 

-T- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

Quo je me fusse bien port e that I might have been well 

que tu te fusses bien port e that tkoumighlst have been well 

qu'il se fut bien port i that he might have been wdl 

que nous nous fussions bien port is that we might have been well 

que vous vous fussiez bien ported that you might have been well 

qu'ils se fussent bien port is that they might have been well 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 105 



*mMr. mur. jeime. je£ne. boite. bozte. ancre. mgrat. orade. wn. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ni in union, i/Z, as Hi in Wi&iara. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

Se bien porter to be well (Negatively ) 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

-A- PRESENT. 

Ne se pas bien port er not to be well 

-B- PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 
Ne s'etre pas bien porte not to have been well 

•C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 

Ne se port ant pas bien not being well 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

Ne s'etant pas bien port e not having been well 

INDICATIVE MOOD 

-F- PRESENT. 

Je ne me port e pas bien / am not well 

tu ne te port es pas bien thou art not well 

il ne se port e pas bien he is not well 

nous ne nous port ons pas bien we are not well 

vous ne vous port es pas bien you are not well 

ils ne se port enl pas bien they are not well 

•G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 
Je ne me suis pas bien port e / have not been well 

tu ne Ves pas bien port e thou hast not been well 

il ne s'est pas bien port e he has not been well 

nous ne nous sommes pas bien portes we have not been well 
vous ne vous etes pas bien porte* you have not been well 

lis ne se sont pas bien port es they have not been well 

-H- IMPERFECT. 

Je ne me port ais pas bien I was not well 

tu ne te port ais pas bien thou wast not well 

i\ ne se port ail pas bien he was not well 

nous ne nous port ions pas bien we were not well 

vous ne vous port ies pas bien you were not well 

ils ne se port aient pas bien they were not well 

-1- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect 
Je ne m'etais pas bien port e / had not been well 

tu ne t'etais pas bien port e thou hadst not been well 

il ne s'etait pas bien port e he had not been well 

nous ne nous etions pas bien port es we had not been well 
vous ne vous etiez pas bien port es you had not been well 

ils ne s'etaient pas bien port es they had not been wall 



106 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



l ami. ane. te. e'crit, mere. etre. idole. gzte. opera, dter. tout, voute 
7 at. arm. tab. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

-J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

Jc ne me port ai pas bien / was not well 

tu ne te port as pas bien thou wast not well 

il ne se port a pas bien he was not well 

nous ne nous port times pas bien we were not well 

vous ne vous port cites pas bien you were not well 

ils ne se port erent pas bien they were not well 

-K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of ike -preterit. 
Je ne me fus pas bien port e I had not been well 

tu ne te fus pas bien port e thou hadst not been well 

il ne se fut pas bien port e he had not been well 

nous ne nous fumes pas bien port es we had not been well 
vous ne vous futes pas bien port es you had not been well 
il ne se furent pas bien port es they had not been well 

-L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

Je ne me port erai pas bien / shall or will not be well 

tu ne te port eras pas bien thou shall or wilt not be well 

il ne se port era pas bien he shall or will not be well 

nous ne nous port erons pas bien we shall or will not be well 

vous ne vous port erez pas bien you shall or will not be well 

ils ne se port eront pas bien they shall or will not be well 

-M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 
Je ne me serai pas bien port 6 I shall or will not have 

tu ne te seras pas bien port e thou shall or will not have 

il ne se sera pas bien port e he shall or will not have I 3 

nous ne nous serons pas bien port es ice shall or will not have 
vous ne vous serez pas bien port es you shall or will not have 
ils ne se seront pas bien port es they shall or will not have 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

Je ne me port erais pas bien / should, would, could, » 

or might not be well 
tu ne te port erais pas bien thou shouldst, wouldst, eouldsty 

or mightst ?iot be well 
il ne se port erait pas bien he should, would, could, 

or might not be well 
nous ne nous port erions pas bien we should, would, could, 

or might not be weil 
vous ne vous port erics pas bien you should, would, could, 

or mi gh t not be well 
ils ne se port eraient pas bien they should, would, could, 

or might not be well 
-o- PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

Je ne me serais pas bien port e I should, would, cottld, 
or je ne mefusse pas bien port e or might not 'nave fxen well 

tu ne te serais pas bien port e, thou shouldst, wouldst, coulds4 y 
or tu ne te fusses pas bien port e or mightst not have been weli 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 107 

•mwr. mur. jewne. jeune. boite. bofte. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. tmeN. 
4 j, as* in pleasure, gn, as ni in union. til, as Hi, in Wi Hi am. 

il ne se serait pas bien port e, he should, would, coula\ 

or il ne se fat pas bien port e or might not have been well 

nous ne nous serions pas bien port es, we should, would, could, 

or nous ne nous /visions pas bien port es or might not have been well 

vous ne vous seriez pas bien porte's, you should, woidd, could, 

or vous ne vousfussies pas bien port es or might not have been well 

ils ne se seraient pas bien port es, they should, would, could, 

or il ne sefussent pas bien port es or might not have been well 

-p- IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Ne te port e pas bien be not well or do not be well (thou) 

qu'il ne se port e pas bien let him not be well 

ne nous port ons pas bien let us not be well 

ne vous port es pas bien be not well or do not be well (you) 

qu'ils ne se port ent pas bien let them not be well 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

-Q- PRESENT. 

Que je ne me port e pas bien that I may not be well 

que tu ne te portes pas bien that thou mayst not be well 

qu'il ne se port e pas bien that he may not be well 

que nous ne nous port ions pas bien that we may not be well 

que vous ne vous port iez pas bien that you may not be well 

qu'ils ne se port ent pas bien that they may not be well 

-R- PRETERIT Or PAST, 

or compound of the present^ 

Que je ne me sois pas bien port e that I may not have been well 

que tu ne te sois pas bien port i that thou mayst not have been 

well 
qu'il ne se soit pas bien port e that he may not have been well 

que nous ne nous soyons pas bien port es that we may not have been well 
que vous ne vous soyez pas bien port es that you may not have been well 
qu'ils ne se soient pas bien port cs that they may not have been well 

•S- IMPERFECT. 

Que je ne me port asse pas bien that I might not be well 

-pie tu ne te port asses pas bien that thou mightsi not be well 

qu'il ne se port at pas bien that he might not be well 

que nous ne nous port assions pas bien that we mio-lii not be well 

que vous ne vous port assiez pas bien that you mi<rht not be well 

qu'ils nese port assent pas bien that they might not be well 

T- PLUPERFECT. 

or compound of the imperfect 
Que je ne me fusse pas bien port e that I wight not have 

que tu ne te fusses pas bien port £ that thou mightst not have 

qu'il ne se fiit pas bien port e that he might not have \ 8 

que nous ne nous fussions pas bien port es that v)e might not have i g 

que vous ne vous fussiez pas bien port es that you might not have ?5 

qu'ils ne se fussent pas bien port es that they might nut have J 

2i2 



108 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



•ami. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gzte. opera, dter. tout, rout® 
y at. arm. htb. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

Se bien porter to be well. (Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 



Me port e-je bien am I well 

te port es-tu bien art thou well 

se port e-t-il bien is he well 

nous port oras-nous bien are we well 

vous port es-vous bien are you well 

se port C7i/-ils bien are they well 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

Me suis-je bien port i have I been well 

t'es-tu bien port i hast thou been well 

s'est-il bien port e has he been well 

nous sommes-nous bien port is have we been well 

vous etes-vous bien port is have you been well 

se sont-ils bien port is have they been well 

-H- IMPERFECT. 

Me port aw-je bien was I well 

te port ais-tu bien wast thou well 

se port ai/-il bien was he well 

nous port ions-nous bien were we well 

vous port iez-vous bien were you well 

se port aient*ils bien were they well 

-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 
M'^tais-je bien port i had I been well 

t'^tais-tu bien port e hadst thou been well 

s'^tait-il bien porte had he been well 

nous £tions-nous bien port es had ice been well 

vous £tiez-vous bien port es had you been well 

tTetaient-ils bien port es had they been well 

-J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

Me port ttt-je Men WHS 1 well 

te port as-tu bien wast thou well 

se port a-t-il bien was he well 

nous port ames-nous bitn were we well 

vous port a/es-vous bien were you well 

se port cren/-ils bien were they well 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



109 



'mwr. m?2r. jeime. jeune. boi'te. bozte. ancre. ingrat. onde. un. ameN 
'j, as 5 in pleasure, gn, as ni in umon. ill, as Hi, in Wi'/i'am. 



Me fus-je bien port i 

te fus-tu bien port i 

se fut-il bien port i 

nous fumes-nous bien port is 

vous futes-vous bien port is 

se furent-ils bien port is 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

had I been well 
hadst thou been well 
had he been well 
had we been well 
had you been well 
had they been well 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 



Me port erai-]e bien 
te port eras-tu bien 
se port era -t-il bien 
nous port erons-nous bien 
vous port eres-vous bien 
se port eront-ils bien 



shall or will I be well 
shall or wilt thou be well 
shall or will he be well 
shall or will we be well 
shall or will you be well 
shall or will they be well 



Me serai-je bien port 6 
te seras-tu bien port i 
se sera-t-il bien port i 
nous serons-nous bien port is 
vous serez-vous bien port is 
se seront-ils bien port is 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

shall or will I have been well 
shalt or wilt thou have been well 
shall or will he have been well 
shall or will we have been well 
shall or will you have been well 
shall or will they have been well 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Me port erais-]e bien 
te port erais-tu bien 
se port erait-ii bien 
nous port enons-nous bien 
vous port eries-vous bien 
se port eraient -ils bien 



should, would, could, or might I 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst thou 
should, would, could, or might he 
should, would, could, or might we 
should, would, could, or might you 
should, would, could, or might they 



PAST, 
or compound of the present. 



Me serais-je bien port e, 

or mefusse-je bien porti 

te serais-tu bien port i, 

or tefusses-tu bien porti 

se serait-il bien port i, 

or se fut-il bien port i 

nous serions-nous bien port is, 

or nous fuss ions -nous bien port is 

vous seriez-vous bien port is, 

or vous fussiez-vous bien port is 

se seraient-ils bien port is, 

or sefu3$ent-ils bien port is 



should, would, could, 

or might I have been well 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou have been well 
should, would, could, 

or might he have been well 
should, would, could, 

or might we have been well 
should, would, could, 

or might you have been well 
should, would, could, 

or might they have been well 



110 PRONOMINAL VERBS* 



ami dne. te. ecrit. mere. gtre. idole. gite % op£ra. oter. tout, vowte 
*at. arm. twb. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

Se bien porter to be well (Negatively and Interrogatively ) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

-F- PRESENT. 

Ne me port e-je pas bien am I not well 

ne te port es-tu pas bien art thou not well 

ne se port e-t-il pas bien is he not well 

ne nous port ons-nous pas bien are we not well 

ne vous port es-vous pas bien are you not well 

ne se port enJ-ils pas bien are they not well 

•G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

Ne me suis-je pas bien port e have I not been well 

ne t'es-tu pas bien port e hast thou not been well 

ne s'est-il pas bien port e has he not been well 

ne nous sommes-nous pas bien port es have we not been well 

ne vous etes-vous pas bien port es have you not been well 

ne se sont-ils pas bien port es have they not been well 

•H- IMPERFECT. 

Ne me pert aw-je pas bien • was I not well 

ne te port ais-tu. pas bien wast thou not well 

ne se port az/-il pas bien was he not well 

ne nous port ions-nous pas bien were we not well 

ne vous porties-vous pas bien were you not well 

ne se port aien/-ils pas bien were they not well 

-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

Ne m'etais-je pas bien port c had I not been well 

ne t'etais-tu pas bien port e hadst thou not been well 

ne s'etait-il pas bien port e had he not been well 

ne nous etions-nous pas bien port es had we not been well 

ne vous etiez-vous pas bien port es had you not been well 

ne s'etaient-ils pas bien port is had they not been well 

J- TRETERIT DEFINITE. 

File me port ai-je pas bien was I not well 

ne te port as-tu pas bien wast thou not well 

ne se porta-t-il pas bien was he not well 

ne nous port ames-nous pas bien were we not well 

ne vous port d/es-vous pas bien were you not well 

lie se poj t ertnt-i\B pas bien were they not well 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



Ill 



3 mwr. miir. jewne. jezine. boite. boite. a/icre. wgrat. onde. un. ameK 
4 j, as 5 in pleasure. gn, as ni in union, ill, as Hi, in Wi Z.'i am. 

-K* PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 



Ne me fus-je pas bien port i 

ne te fus-tu pas bien port i 

ne se fut-il pas bien port e 

re nous fumes-nous pas bien port is 

ne vous futes-vous pas bien port is 

ne se furent-ils pas bien port es 



had I not been well 
hadst thou not bet,n well 
had he not been well 
had we not been well 
had you not been well 
had they not been well 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 



Ne me port erai-je pas bien 
ne te port eras-tu pas bien 
ne se port era-t-il pas bien 
ne nous port erons-nous pas bien 
ne vous port eres-vous pas bien 
ne se port eront-ils pas bien 



shall or will I not be well 
shall or wilt thou not be well 
shall or will he not be well 
shall or will we not be well 
shall or will you not be well 
shall or will they not be well 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 



Ne me serai-je pas bien port i 

ne te seras-tu pas bien port i 

ne se sera-t-il pas bien port S 

ne nous serons-nous pas bien port is 

ne vous serez-vous pas bien port is 

ne se seront-ils pas bien port is 



shall or will I not have 
shall or wilt thou not have 
shall or will he not have 
shall or will we not have 
shall or will you not have 
shall or will they not have 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Ne me port craw-je pas bien 
ne te port erais-tu pas bien 
ne se port erait-i\ pas bien 
ne nous port mons-nous pas bien 
ne vous port mez-vous pas bien 
ne se port eraient-ils pas bien 



should, would, could, 

or might I not be well 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst. 

or mightst thou not be well 
should, would, could, 

or might he not be well 
should, would, could, 

or might we not be well 
should, would, could, 

or might you not be well 
should, would, could, 

or might they not be well 



PAST, 

or compound of the present. 



Ne me serais-je pas bien port i, 

or ne mefusse-je pas bien port i 

ne te serais-tu pas bien port i, 

or ne tefusses-tu pas bien port 6 

ne se serait-il pas bien port i, 

or ne seful-il pas bien port i 

ne nous serions-nous pas bien port is, 

or ne nous fusswns-nous pas bien port is 

ne vous seriez-vous pas bien port is, 

or ne vous fussiez-vous pas bi p n port is 

ne se seraient-ils pas bien poit is, 

or ne sefussent-ils pas bien port is 



should, would, could, 

or might I not have been treil 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mighlst thou not have oetrn will 
should, would, could) 

or might he not have been well 
should, would, could, 

or might we not have been well 
should, would, could, 

or might you not have been well 
should, ivould, could, 

01 might they not have been well 



112 



PRONOMINAL VERBS 



ami. dne. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. ope>a. oter. tout, route. 
'at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB.. 

S'en aller to go away. (Affirmatively.) 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



-A- 

S'en aller 



-B- 



PRESENT. 

to go away 

PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 

to have gone away 

PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 

going away 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

S'en etant alle having gone away 

-E- PARTICIPLE PAST Of PASSIVE. 

En alle* gone away 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



S'en etre alle* 

-c- 

S'en allant 



-F- 

Je m'en vaist 

tu t'en vas 

il s'en va 

nous nous en allons 

vous vous en allez 

ils s'en vont 

-G- 



PRESENT. 

I go away, do go away, or am 
thou goest away, dost go away, or art 
he goes away, does go away, or is 
we go away, do go away, or are 
you go away, do go away, or are 
they go away, do go away, or are 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 






Je m'en suis alle* 

tu t'en es alle 

il s'en est alle 

nous nous en sommes all£s 

vous\ous en etes all£s 

Us s'en sont alles 



H- 

Je m'en allais 

tu t'en allais 

il s'en allait 

nous nous en allions 

vous vous en alliez 

ils s'en allaient 

-i- 

Je m'en elais alle* 

tu t'en £tais alle* 

il s'en dtait alle* 

aoiis nous en £tions alles 

vous vous en £tiez all£s 

ils s'en £taient alles 



/ went away, did go away, or have 
thou wentest away, didst go away, or hast 
he went away, did go away, or has 
we went away, did go away, or have 
you went away, did go away, or have 
they went away, did go away, or have 

IMPERFECT. 

/ went away, did go away, or was 
thou wentest away, didst go away, or wast 
he tvejit away, did go away, or was 
we went away, did go away, or were 
you went away, did go away, or were 
they went away, did go away, or were 

PLUPERFECT, 
<>»• compound of the imperfect. 
I had gone away 
thou liadst gone away 
he had gone away 
\r&. had gone away 
you had gone away 

they had gone away 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



113 



s mwr. mur. jeune. jeime. boite. boite. ancre. ingrat. onde. un. ameN 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ni in union. i*Z, as Hi in WiZZiam 



Je m'en allai 

tu t'en alias 

il s'en alia 

nous nous en allames 

vous vous en allates 

ite s'en allerent 

-K- 

Je m'en fus alle* 

tu t'en fus alle* 

il s'en fut alle 

nous nous en fumes allds 

vous vous en futes alles 

lis s'en furent alles 

-L- 

Je m'en irai 

tu t'en iras 

il s'en ira 

nous nous en irons 

vous vous en irez 

ils s'en iront 

-M- 

Je m'en serai alle* 

tu t'en seras alle 

il s'en sera alle 

nous nous en serons all£s 

vous vous en serez alles 

ils s'en seront all^s 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

J went away or did go away 
thou wentest away or didst go away 
he went away or did go away 
we went away or did go away 
you went away or did go away 
they went away or did go away 

RETERIT ANTERIOR, 
compound of the preterit. 

I had gone away 

thou hadst gone away 

he had gone away 

we had gone away 

you had gone away 

they had gone away 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

/ shall or will go away 
thou shalt or wilt go away 
he shall or will go away 
we shall or will go away 
you shall or will go away 
they shall or will go away 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

I shall or will have gone away 
thou shalt or wilt have gone away 
he shall or will have gone away 
we shall or will have gone away 
you shall or will have gone away 
they shall or will have gone away 



-N- 

Je m'en irais 

tu t'en irais 

il s'en irait 

nous nous en irions 

vous vous en iriez 

ils s'en iraient 

•o- 

Je m'en serais alle\ 
orje m 9 en fosse alle 
tu t'en serais alle\ 
or tu f en fusses alii 
il s'en serait alle, 
or il s'en fut alle 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

/ should, would, could, or might go away 

thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst go away 

he should, would, could, or might go away 

we should, would, could, or might go away 

you should, would, could, or might go away 

they should, would, could, or might go away 



or compound of the present. 

I should, would, could, 

or might have gone away 
thou shouldst, ivouldst, couldst, 

or mightst have gone away 
he should, would* could, 

or might have gone away 



114 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



'ami. dne. te. e'crit. mere. etre. zdole. gite. op£ra. dter. tout, voute 
l at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



nous nous en serions all£s, 
or nous nous en/ussions allfo 
vous vous en seriez all£s, 
or vous vous enfussies cults 
ils s'en seraient all£s, 
or its s*enfussent alles 



we should, would, could, 
or might have gone away 

you should, would, could, 
or might have gone away 

they should, would, could, 
or might have gone away 



Va-t'en 

qu'il s'en aille 

allons-nous-en 
allez-vous-en 
qu'ils s'en aillent 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

go away (thou) 
let him go away 
let us go away 
go away (you) 
let them go away 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



-ci- 
Oue je m'en aille 
que tu t'en ailles 
qu'il s'en aille 
que nous nous en allions 
que vous vous en alliez 
qu'ils s'en aillent 



PRESENT. 

that I may go away 
that thou mayst go away 
that he may go away 
that we may go away 
that you may go away 
that they may go away 



Que je m'en sois alle* 

que tu t'en sois alle* 

qu'il s'en soit alle 

que nous nous en soyons all£s 

que vous vous en soyez alles 

au'ils s'en soient alles 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 
ir compound of the present, 

that I may have gone away 
thai thou mayst have gone away 
that he may have gone away 
that we may have gone away 
that you may have gone away 
that they may have gone away 



IMPERFECT. 



Que je m'en allasse 

que tu t'en allasses 

qu'il s'en allat 

que nous nous en allassions 

que voiis vous en allassiez 

qu'ils s'en allassent 



that I might go away 
that thou mightst go away 
that he might go away 
that we might go away 
that you might go away 
that they might go away 



Que je m'en fusse alle" 

que tu t'en fusses alle* 

qu'i" g en fut alle* 

que nous nous en fussions all^s 

que vous vous en fussiez alles 

qu'ils s'en dissent alles 



PLUFERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect, 

that I might have gone away 
that thou mights t have gone away 
that he might have gone away 
that we might have gone away 
that you might have gone away 
that they might have gone away 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



115 



s rawr. mill, jeune. jeune. bo/te. boite. ancxe. ingrat. onde. un. ameN, 
s j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, t//, as Z/i, in William. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

S'en aller to go away. (Negatively.) 



Ne pas s'en aller 

-B- 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

not to go away 

PAST Or PERFECT, 
or compound of the present. 
Ne pas s'en etre alle* not to have gone away 

-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT 07 ACTIVE. 

Ne s'en allant pas not going away 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESJLNT. 

Ne s'en etant pas alls' not having gone away 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Je ne m'en vais pas 

tu ne fen vas pas 

il ne s'en va pas 

nous ne nous en alfons pas 

vous ne vousen allez pas 

ils ne s'en vont pas 



PRESENT. 

/ do not go away or am not 
thou dost not go away o* art not 
he does not go away or is not 
we do not go away or are not 
you do not go away or are not 
they do not go away or are not 



tto 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or comvound of the present, 



Je ne m'en suis pas alle 

tu ne t'en es pas alle 

il ne s'en est pas alle 

nous ne nous en sommes pas alles 

vous ne vous en etes pas alles 

ils ne s'en sont pas alles 

•H- 

Je ne m'en allais pas 

tu ne t'en allais pas 

il ne s'en allait pas 

nous ne nous en allions pas 

vous ne vous en alliez pas 

ils ne s'en allaient pas 



/ did not go away or have not 
thou didst not go away or hast not 
he did not go away or has not 
we did not go away or have not 
you did not go away or have not 
they did not go away or have not 

IMPERFECT. 

/ did not go away or was not 
thou didst not go away or wast not 
he did not go away or was not 
we did not go away or were not 
you did not go away or were not 
they did not go away or were not 

PLUPERFECT, 



or compound of the imperfect 
Je ne m'en etais pas alle" / had not gone away 

tu ne t'en etais pas alle 
il ne s'en etait pas alle* 
nous ne nous en etions pas alles 
vous ne vous en etiez pas alles 
ils ne s'en e'taient pas all£s 



thou hadst not gone away 
he had not gone away 
we had not gone away 
you had not gone away 
they had not gone away 



116 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



'ami. ane. te. e'crit. mere, etre. idole. gite. opera, dter. tout. voate. 
2 at. arm. tab. ale. mare there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 



Je ne m'en allai pas 

tu ne t'en alias pas 

ll ne s'en alia pas 

nous ne nous en allames pas 

vous ne vous en allates pas 

ils ne s'en allererJl pas 



/ did not go away 
thou didst not go away 
he did not go away 
we did not go away 
you did not go away 
they did not go away 



Je ne m'en fus pas alle* 

tu ne t'en fus pas alle' 

il ne s'en fut pas alle 

nous ne nous en fumes pas alles 

vous ne vous en futes pas all£s 

ils ne s'en furent pas alles 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

I had not gone away 
thou hadst not feone away 
he had not gone away 
we had not gone away 
you had not gone away 
they had not gone away 



-L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

Je ne m'en irai pas / shall or will not go away 

tu ne t'en iras pas thou shall or wilt not go away 

il ne s'en ira pas he shall or will not go away 

nous ne nous en irons pas we shall or will not go away 

vous ne vous en irez pas you shall or will not go away 

ils ne s'en iront pas they shall or will not go away 



Je ne m'en serai pas alle 

tu ne t'en seras pas alle 

il ne s'en sera pas alle 

nous ne nous en serons pas alles 

vous ne vous en serez pas alles 

ils ne s'en seront pas alles 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

I shall or will not have gone away 
thou shalt or wilt not have gene away 
he shall or will not have gone away 
we shall or will not have gone away 
you shall or will not have gone awaii 
they shall or will not have gone awap 



CONDITIONAL MOOD 



-N- 

Je ne m'en irais pas 

tu ne t'en irais pas 

il ne s'en irait pas 

nous ne nous en irions pas 

vous ne vous en iriez pas 

ils ne s'en iraient pas 



Je ne m'en serais pas alle\ 
or ^e nc rtCenfusse pas alle 
tu ne t'en serais pas all£, 
or tu ne fen fusses pas alle 
il ne s'en serait pas all£, 
or il ne s'en f tit pu* alii 



PRESENT. 

I should, would, could, or might 
thou shouldst, wouldst,couldst, or mighlst 
ht should, would, could, or might 
we should, would, could, or might 
you should, would, could, or might 
they should, would, could, or might 

PAST, 
compound of the present, 

I ihould, would, could, 

or might not have gone away 
thou shouldst, wouldsl, couldst, 

or mightst not have gone away 
he should, would, could, 

or might not have gone away 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



117 



3 muT. mur. jewne. ]eune, boite. boite. ancre. ingr&t. onde. un. ameN 
4 j, as 5 in plea 5 ure. gn, as ni in union. ill, as Hi, in Wi Hi am. 



nous ne nous en serions pas ally's, 
or nous ne nous enfussionspas allts 
vous ne vous en seriez pas alles, 
or vous ne vous enfussiespas alles 
ils ne s'en seraient pas all£s, 
or Us ne s'enfussent pas allts 



ive should, would, could, 

or might not have gone away 

you should, would, could, 
or might not have gone away 

they should, would, could, 
or might not have gone away 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Ne t'en va pas 
qu'il ne s'en aille pas 

ne nous en allons pas 
ne vous en allez pas 
qu'ils ne s'en aillent pas 



do not go away (thou) 
let him not go away 
let us not go away 
do not go away (you) 
let them not go away 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

-Q,- PRESENT. 

Que je ne m'en aille pas that I may not go away 

que tu ne t'en ailles pas that thou mayst not go away 

qu'il ne s'en aille pas that he may not go away 

que nous ne nous en allions pas that we may not go away 

que vous ne vous en alliez pas that you may not go away 

qu'ils ne s'en aillent pas that they may not go away 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compound of the present. 



Que je ne rr'en sois pas all6 

que tu ne t'en sois pas alle 

qu'il ne s'en soit pas alle 

que nous ne nous en soyons pas alles 

que vous ne vous en soyez pas alles 

qu'ils ne s'en soient pas alles 



that I may not have gone 
that thou mayst not have gont 
that he may not have gone 
that we may not have gone 
that you may not have gone 
that they may not have gone ^ 



IMPERFECT. 



Que je ne m'en allasse pas 
que tu ne t'en allasses pas 
qu'il ne s'en allat pas 
que nous ne nous en allassions pas 
que vous ne vous en allassiez pas 
qu'ils ne s'en allassent pas 



that I might not go away 
that thou mightst not go away 
that he might not go away 
that we might not go away 
that you might not go away 
that they might not go away 



PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of Vie imperfect. 



Que je ne m'en fusse pas alle" 

que tu ne t'en fusses pas alle" 

qu'il ne s'en fut pas alle 

que nous ne nous en fussions pas all£s 

que vous ne vous en fussiez pas alles 

qu'ils ne s'en fussent pas all£s 



that I might not have, 
that thou mightst not have 
that he might not have 
thai we might not have 
that you might not have 
that they might no! have 



118 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



'ami. ane. te. eerit. mere. Hre. z'dole. gzte. op£ra. dter. tout, voute. 
2 at. arm. tuh. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

S'en aller to go away. (Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



M'en vais-je 

t'en vas-tu 

s'en va-t-il 

nous en allons-nous 

vous en allez-vous 

s'en vont-ils 



do I go away or am I going away 
dost thou go away or art thou going away 
does he go away or is he going away 
do we go away or are we going away 
do you go away or are you going away 
do they go away or are they going away 



M'en suis-je alle* 

t'en es-tu alle 

s'en est-il alle 

nous en sommes-nous all£s 

vous en etes-vous alles 

s'en sont-ils alles 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 

did I go away or have I 
didst thou go away or hadst thou 
did he go away or has he 
did we go away or have we 
did you go away or have you 
did they go away or have they 



or* 



-H- 

M'en allais-je 
t'en allais-tu 
s'en allait-il 
nous en allions-nous 
vous en alliez-vous 
s'en allaient-ils 



IMPERFECT. 

did I go away or was 1 *j 
didst thou go away or wast thou &. 

did he go away or was he \ J| 

did we go away or were we f a 

did you go away or were you ' § 

did they go away or were they ' ^ 



M'en £tais-je alle* 

t'en etais-tu alle 

s'en 6tait-il alle* 

nous en etions-nous all£s 

vous en 6tiez-vous all£s 

s'en £taient-ils alles 



PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 
had I g07ie away 
hadst thou gone away 
had he gone away 
had we gone away 
had you go?ie away 
had they gone away 



-J- 

M'on allai-je 

t'en allas-tu 

s'en alla-t-il 

nous en allamcs-nous 

vous en allates-vous 

e'en allerent-ils 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did I go away 
didst thou go away 
did he go away 
did we go away 
did you go away 
die- they go away 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



119 



3 mwr. mux, jeune. jeune. boite. boite. ancre. ingrat. onde. un. araeN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in um'on, ill, as Hi, in William. 



M'en fus-je all6 

t'en fus-tu alle 

s'en fut-il alle* 

nous en fumes-nous alle*s 

vous en futes-vous alles 

s'en furent-ils al!6s 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

had I gone away 
hadst thou gone away 
had he gone away 
had we gone away 
had you gone away 
had they gone away 



-L- 

M'en irai-je 
t'en iras-tu 
E'en ira-t-il 
nous en irons-nous 
vous en irez-vous 
s'en iront-ils 



M'en serai-je alle* 

t'en seras-tu alle 

s'en sera-t-il alle" 

nous en serons-nous all^s 

vous en serez-vous al^es 

s'en seront-ils alles 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

sliall or will I go away 
shall or wilt thou go away 
shall or will he go away 
shall or will we go away 
shall or will you go away 
shall or will they go away 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

shall or will I have gone away 
skalt or wilt thou have gone away 
shall or will he have gone away 
shall or will we have gone away 
shall or will you have gone away 
shall or will they have gone away 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



-N- 

M'en irais-je 

t'en irais-tu 

s'en irait-il 

nous en irions-nous 

vous en iriez-vous 

e'en iraient-ils 



PRESENT. 

should, ivould, could, or might I go away 
shouldst, wouldsl, couldst, or mightst thou go away 
should, would, could, or might he go away 
should, would, could, or might we go away 
should, would, could, or might you go away 
should, would, could, or might they go auay 



-o- 



M'en serais-je alle", 

or nienfusst-je alle 

t'en serais-tu alle, 

or Cenfusses-tu alle 

s'en serait-il alle\ 

or s'en fut-il alle 

nous en serions-nous all£s, 

or no us en fussions-nous alles 

vous en seriez-vous all€s, 

or vous enfussies-vous allh 

s'en seraient-ils alles, 

or s'enfusscnt-ils alles 



PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

should, would, could, 

or might I have gone away 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou have gone away 
should, ivould, could, 

or might he have gone away 
should, would, could, 

or might we have gone away 
should, would, could, 

or might you have gone away 
should, would, could, 

or migfd they have gone away 
2 m 2 



120 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



'ami. one. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. ope>a. dter. tout, voute. 
7 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

S'en aller to go away. (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



-F- 

Ne m'en vais-je pas 

ne t'en vas-tu pas 

ne s'en va-t-il pas 

ne nous en allons-nous pas 

ne vous en allez-vous pas 

ne s'en vont-ils pas 



Ne m'en suis-je pas alle 

ne t'en es-tu pas alle* 

ne s'en est-il pas alle* 

ne nous en sommes-nous pas alles 

ne vous en etes-vous pas alles 

ne s'en sont-ils pas all£s 



Ne m'en allais-je pas 

ne t'en allais-tu pas 

ne s'en allait-il pas 

ne nous en allions-nous pas 

ne vous en alliez-vous pas 

ne s'en allaient-ils pas 



PRESENT. 

do I not go away or am I not 
dost thou not go away or art thou not 
does he not go away or is he not 
do we not go away or are we not 
do you not go away or are you not 
do they not go away or are they not 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

did I not go away 

or have I not gone away 
didst thou not go away 

or hast thou not gone away 
did he not go away 

or has he not gone away 
did we not go away 

or have we not gone away 
did you not go away 

or have you not gone away 
did they not go away 

or have they not gone away 

IMPERFECT. 

did I not go away or was I not 
didst thou not go away or wast thou not 
did he not go away or was he not 
did we not go away or were we not 
did you not go away or were you not 
did they not go away or were they not 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 



Ne m'en £tais-je pas all£ 

ne t'en £tais-tu pas alle" 

ne s'en etait-il pas alle 

ne nous en 6tions-nous pas all£s 

ne vous en 6tiez-vous pas alles 

ne s'en £taient-ils pas alles 

-J- 

Ne m'en allai-je pas 

ne t'en allas-tu pas 

ne s'en alla-t-il pas 

ne nous en allames-nous pas 

ne vous en allates-vous pas 

ne s'en allerent-ils pas 



had I not gone away 
hadst thou not gone away 
had he not gone away 
had we not gone away 
had you not gone away 
had they not gone away 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did I not go away 
didst thou not go away 
did he not go away 
did we not go a way 
did you not go away 
did they not go away 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



121 



8 it)Mr. mur. jewne. jeune. boite. bozte. ancre. mgrat. onde. un, ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ni in umon. i/Z, as //i in "WiZ/iam. 



Ne m'en fus-je pas alle 

ne t'en fus-tu pas alle* 

ne s'en fut-il pas alle 

ne nous en fumes-nous pas alles 

ne vous en futes-vous pas alles 

ne s'en furent-ils pas allds 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

had I not gone away 
hadst thou not gone away 
had he not gone away 
had we not gone away 
had you not gone away 
had they not gone away 



-L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

Ne m'en irai-je pas shall or will I not go away 

ne t'en iras-tu pas shalt or wilt thou not go away 

ne s'en ira-t-il pas shall or will he not go away 

ne nous en irons-nous pas shall or will we not go away 

ne vous en irez-vous pas shall or will you not go away 

ne s'en iront-ils pas shall or will they not go away 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future* 



Ne m'en serai-je pas alle* 

ne t'en seras-tu pas alle 

lie s'en sera-t-il pas alle 

ne nous en serons-nous pas alles 

ne vous en serez-vous pas alles 

ne s'en seront-ils pas all£s 



shall or will I not have 
shalt or wilt thou not have 
shall or will he not have 
shall or will we not have 
shall or will you not have 
shall or will they not have^ 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Ne m'en irais-je pas 

ne t'en irais-tu pas 

ne s'en irait-il pas 

ne nous en irions-nous pas 

ne vous en iriez-vous pas 

ne s'en iraient-ils pas 



PRESENT. 

should, would, could, or might I 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightsl thou 
should, would, could, or might he 
should, would, could, or might we 
should, would, could, or might you 
should, would, could, or might they 



PAST, 
or compound of the present. 



Ne m'en serais-je pas aile\ 

or ne m'en fussi-je pas alle 

ne t'en sera is- tu pas alle, 

or ne fenfusses-tu pas alii 

ne s'en serait-il pas alle\ 

or ne s' 'en fut-il pas alle 

ne nous en serions-nous pas all£s, 

or ne nous enfussions-nous pas alles 

ne vous en seriez-vous pas all£s, 

or ne vous en fussiez-vous pas allis 

ne s'en seraient-ils pas aHes, 

or ne s'en fussent-Us pas allis 



should, would, could, 

or might I not have gone away 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou not have gone away 
should, would, could, 

or might he not have gone away 
should, would, could, 

or might we not have gone away 
should, would, could, 

or Might you not have gene away 
should, would, could, 

or might they not have gone away 



122 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 

Irregular Verbs are those, which differ in the variations of 
some of their tenses and persons, from the verbs which serve as models 
to the four regular conjugations. 

However great the irregularity of a verb may be, its irregu- 
larities never occur but in the simple tenses ; the compound are always 
regular, and consequently conjugated as the compound tenses of the 
verbs given as models of the four regular conjugations. 

Defective Verbs, are those, which are not employed in all 
tenses or personn. 

Unipersonal Verbs, or, as commonly called Impersonal Verbs, 
are those, which are only employed in the third person singular, as II 
importe, it matters ; Il pleut, it rains, &c. 





Aller to 


go- 




-a- Aller. 


-c- Allant. 




-E- AM. 


-F- Je vais, 
nous allons, 


tu vas, 
vous allez, 




il va, 
ils vont. 


-H- J'allais, 

nous allions, 


tu allais, 
vous alliez, 




il allait, 
ils allaient. 


•j- J'allai, 

nous allames, 


tu alias, 
vous allates, 




il alia, 

ils allercnt. 


-L- J'irai, 

nous irons, 


tu iras, 
vous irez, 




il ira. 
ils iront. 


-N- J'irais, 

nous irions, 


tu irais, 
vous iriez, 




il irait, 
ils iraient. 


-p- 

allons, 


va, 
allez, 




qu'il aille, 
qu'ils aillent. 


-a- Que j'aille, 

que nous allions, 


que tu aille, 
que vous alliez, 




qu'il aille, 
qu'ils aillent. 


-s- Que j'allasse, 

que nous allassions, 


que tu allasses, 
que vous allassiez, 


qu'il allat, 
qu'ils allassent 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Etre, to be. 

There is a very common error prevalent in France, even among 
pretty well informed people, in the application of the Compound Tenses 
of the above verb Aller, to go ; people are very liable to use the Com- 
pound Tenses Eire alii, je suis alle, tu es alle, il est alle, &c. instead of 
using the Compound Tenses of Etre, to be; avoir ite,fai etc, tu as iti, 
it a e.tk, 6zc. 

The general rule to follow is, that, whenever the return from the 
place mentioned, has not taken place, etre alle, je .suis alle, tu es alle, 
ilest alle, Sic. must be used; for instance — Jean est allt a Veeolece matin, 
John has gono to school this morning; means that John has gone to 
school, and lias not yet returned. 

Whenever the return from the place mentioned, has taken place. 
Avoir ete, j'ai ete, tu as etc, il a ete, &c. must be used, for instance— 
Jean a Hi aVt'colc. ce matin, John has been to school this morning; 
moans that John has been to school and has returned, or at least haa 
left the LJchoox. 



OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION* 



123 



The following mode of expression, I will come aiid see you — Je 
viendrai vous voir; is frequently erroneously used in English, instead of 
/ will go and see you — JHrai vous voir. Venir, to come, must be used 
in the sense of coming again to the place where the person speaking is ; 
and Aller, to go, in the sense of going from the place where one is, to 
any other place ; for instance — being at a person's house, I must say, 
Je viendrai vous voir demain — I will come and see you to-morrow ; but 
being at any place out of the house of the person to whom I speak, I must 
say, JHrai vous voir demain — I will go and see you to-morrow. In French 
this distinction must absolutely be made. 

S'en aller, to go away, is conjugated, page 112. 



Envoyer 



-a.- Envoyer. 

-p- J'envoie, 

nous envoyons, 

-H- J'envoyais, 
nous envoyions, 

-j- J 'envoy ai, 

nous envoyames, 

-L- J'enverrai, 

nous enverrons, 

-N- J'enverrais, 

nous enverrions, 

-p- 

envoyons, 

-d- Que j'envoie, 

que nous envoyions, 

-s- Que j 'envoy asse, 



c- Envoyant. 

tu envoies, 
vous envoyez, 

tu envoy ais, 
vous envoyiez, 

tu envoyas, 
vous envoyates, 

tu enverras, 
vous enverrez, 

tu enverrais, 
vous enverriez, 

envoie, 
envoyez, 

que tu envoies, 
que vous envoyiez, 

que tu envoyasses, 



to send. 

-E- Envoye. 



il envoie, 
ils envoient. 

il envoyait, 
ils envoy aient. 

il envoya, 

ils envoyerent. 

il enverra, 
ils enverront. 

il enverrait, 
ils enverraient. 

qu'il envoie, 
qu'ils envoient. 

qu'il envoie, 
qu'ils envoient. 

qu'il envoyat, 



que nous envoyassions, que vous envoyassiez, qu'ils envoyassenr. 
Conjugate after the same manner — Renvoyer, to send back. 
The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 



Defective and Unipersonal Verbs of the First Conjugation. 

The following verbs are conjugated as Parler, to speak ; but are 
employed, at the third persons singular only. 



Neiger 



to snow. 



-a- Neig er 
-c- Neigean/ 



to have snowed, 
having snowed. 



-f- II neig e 
-a- II a neig e 
-H- 11 neige ait 



to snow. -B- Avoir neig 6 

snowing. -d- Ayant neig e 

-E- Neig & snowed, 

it snows, it does snow, it is snowing. 
it has snowed, it did snow, it has been snowing 
it snowed, it did snow t it was snowing. 



124 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



-I- II avait neige 
-j- I] neige a 



it had snowed or had been snowing. 

it snowed or did snow. 

it had snowed. 

it will snow 

it will have snowed. 

it should, would, could) or might snow 

> it should, would) could) or might have snowed 

that it may snow. 

that it may have snowed. 

that it mi 6 ht snow. 

that it might have snowed. 

See the verb Parler, to speak) page 38, and conjugate like it, 
the above verb JYegatively) Interrogatively) and Negatively and Interroga- 
tively; in the third person singular of every tense. 

Conjugate after the same manner, the following verbs. 



-K- II eut neig e 
-L- II neig era 
-M- II aura neig £ 
-N- II neig erait 
-o- II aurait neig e, 
or it eut neig e 
-a- Qu'il neig e 
-R- Qu'il ait neig e 
-s- Qu'il neige at 
-T- Qu'il eut neig £ 



[1 arriv e 


it happens. 


11 gr£l c 


it hails. 


11 bruin e 


it drizzles. 


11 gresill e 


it rimes. 


11 deg£l c 


it thaws. 


11 import e 


it matters. 


11 eclair c 


it lightens. 


11 result e 


it follows. 


11 gd e 


itfreezes. 


11 tomi e 


it thunders. 



Irregular, Defective, and Unipersonal Verbs of the Second 
Conjugation. 
Acquerir to acquire. 

-c- Acque*rant. 



•a- Acquerir. 

-F- J'acquiers, 

nous acquerons, 

-H- J'acqu6rais, 
nous acqu£rions, 

-J- J'acquis, 

nous acquimes, 

-L- J'acquerrai, 

nous acquerrons, 

-N- J'acqueirais, 

nous acquernuns, 

-p- 

acqugrons, 

-a- Quo j'acquicre, 

que nous acquerions, 

-8- Que j'acquisso, 



tu acquiers, 
vous acquerez, 

tu acquerais, 
vous acqu£riez, 

tu acquis, 
vous acquites, 

tu acquerras, 
vous acquerrez, 

tu acquerrais, 
vous acquerriez, 

acquiers, 
acquerez, 

quo tu acquieres, 
que vous acqueriez, 

que tu acquisses, 



-E- Acquis. 

il acquiert, 
ils acquierent. 

il acquerait, 
ils acqueraienU 

il acquit, 
ils acquirent. 

il acquerra, 
ils acquerront. 

il acquerrait, 
ils acqucrraient. 

qu'il acquiere, 
qu'ils acquierent. 

qu'il acquiere, 
qu'ils acquierent. 

qu'il acquit, 
qu'ils acquissent. 



que nous aoquissions, que vous acquissiez, 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



125 



Conjugated after the same manner — 



S'enquerir 
Querir 



to inquire, 
to fetch. 



Requerir to require. 

» Conquerir to conquer 

Reconquerir to conquer again. 

Conquerir, to conquer, {defective) only used in -a- the present of the 
infinitive, in -j- the preterit definite, in -s- the imperfect of the subjunctive* 
and in the compound tenses. 

Reconquerir, to conquer again, {defective) chiefly used in -e- the past 
participle. 

S'enquerir, to inquire, {defective) very little used, except in -a- the pre- 
sent of the infinitive, and in the compound tenses. 

Querir, to fetch, {defective) is only used in -a- the present of the infinitive, 
with the verbs Venir to come, Aller to go, and Envoyer to send, as 
il est venu querir Jean— he has come to fetch John ; allez me querir 
Jean— go and fetch me John ; fai envoy e querir Jean — I have sent for 
John ; this verb is only used in common conversation. 



AsSAILLIR 



to assault. 



a- Assaillir. 

f- J'assaille, 
nous assaillons, 

-H- J'assaillais, 
nous assaillions, 

-j- J'assaiilis, 

nous assaillimes, 

-L- J'assaillirai, 

nous assaillirons, 

-N- J'assaillirais, 

nous assaillirions, 

-p- 

assaillons, 



-c- Assaillant, 

tu assailles, 
vous assaillez, 

tu assaillais, 
vous assailliez, 

tu assaillis, 
vous assaillites, 

tu assailliras, 
vous assaillirez, 

tu assaillirais, 
vous assailliriez, 

assaille, 
assaillez, 



-a- Que j'assaille, 

que nous assaillions, 



-E- Assailli. 

il assaille, 
ils assaillent. 

il assaill ait, 

ils assaillaient, 

il assaillit, 
ils assaillirent. 

il assaillira, 
ils assailliront. 

il assaillirait, 
ils assailliraient. 

qu'il assaille, 
qu'ils assaillent 



que tu assailles qu'il assaille, 

que vous assailliez, qu'ils assaillent. 
-s- Que j'assaillisse, que tu assaillisses, qu'il assaillit, 

que nous assaillissions, que vous assaillissiez, qu'ils assailli'ssent 
Conjugated after the same manner, Tressaillir, to start, to 

[leap for. 
The compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 



-a- Bouillir. 

-F- Je bous, 

nous bouillons^ 

-H- Je bouillais, 
nous bouillions, 



Bouillir 

-c- BoUillant. 
tu bous, 



to boil. 



vous bouillez, 

tu bouillais, 
vous bouilliez, 



-E- Bouilh. 

il bout, 

ils bouillent. 

il bouillait, 
ils bouillaient, 



126 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



-J- 


Je bouillis, 
nous bouillimes, 


tu bouillis, 
vous bouillites, 


il bouillit, 
ils bouiliirent. 


-L- 


Je bouillirai, 
nous bouillirons, 


tu bouilliras, 
vous bouillirez 


il bouillira, 
ils bouilliront. 


-N- 


Je bouillirais, 
nous bouillirions, 


tu bouillirais, 
vous bouilliriez, 


il bouillirait, 
ils bouilliraient. 


P- 


bouillons, 


bous, 
bouillez, 


qu'il bouille, 
qu'ils bouillent. 


-*- 


Que je bouille, 
que nous bouillions, 


que tu bouilles, 
que vous bouilliez, 


qu'il bouille, 
qu'ils bouillent. 



-s- Que je bouillisse, que tu bouillisses, qu'il bouillit, 

que nous bouillissions, que vous bouillissiez, qu'ils bouillissent. 

Conjugate after the same manner, Ebouillir, to boil away, 
R ebouillir, to boil again. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 

The above verbs are but seldom employed in any persons, ex- 
cept the third person singular and plural of their different tenses, simple 
and compound — as Veau bout — the water boils ; les pois out bouilli — the 
peas have boiled, &c. If any other person of these verbs is want- 
ing, the verb, Faire, to make, is used with the present of the infinitive 
Bouillir, Ebouillir, or Rebouillir^ which is put after — thus we 
say, je fais bouillir — I boil ; je ferai bouillir — I shall boil, &c. 



CoURIR 



to run. 



-a- Courir. 



-C- Courant, 



-K- Couru. 



■F- 


Je cours. 


tu cours, 


il court, 




nous coarons. 


vous courez, 


ils courent 


•H- 


Je courais, 
nous courions, 


tu courais, 
vous couriez, 


il courait, 
ils couraient. 


J- 


Je courus, 
nous courumes, 


tu courus, 
vous courutes, 


il courut, 
ils coururent. 


■L- 


Je courrai, 
nous courrons, 


tu courras, 
vous courrez, 


il courra, 
ils courront. 


•N- 


Je courrais, 
nous courrions, 


tu courrais, 
vous courriez, 


il courrait, 
ils courraient. 


.- 


coarons, 


cours, 
courez, 


qu'il coure, 
qu'ils courent. 


•1- 


Que je coure, 
que nous courions, 


que tu coures, 
que vous couriez, 


qu'il coure, 
qu'ils courent. 


■S- 


Que jo courusse, 
que nous courussions, 


que tu courusses, 
que vous courussiez, 


qu'il courut, 
qu'ils courussent 




Conj'ignte after the 


same manner — 





OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



J27 



Accourir, 
Concourir, 
Discourir, 
Encourir, 



to run to. 
to concur, 
to discourse, 
to incur. 



Parcourir, 

Recourir, 

Secourir, 



to run over. 

to have recourse. 

to succour, to help, 



'1 lie Compound Tenses, of the above verbs, are conjugated with 
Avoir, to have ; those of Accourir, to run to. are also sometimes con- 
jugated with Etre, to be. 



Cueillir to gather. 



-A- 


Cueillir. 


-c- Cueillant, 


-E- Cueilli. 


-F- 


Je cueille, 
nous cueillons, 


tu cueilles, 
vous cueillez. 


il cueille, 
ils cueillent. 


-H- 


Je cueillais, 
nous cueillions, 


tu cueillais, 
vous cueilliez. 


il cueillait, 
ils cueillaient. 


-J- 


Je cueillis, 
nous cueiilimes, 


tu cueillis, 
vous cueillites. 


il cueillit, 
ils cueillirent. 


-L- 


Je cueillerai, 
nous cueillerons, 


tu cueilleras, 
vous cueillerez. 


il cueillera, 
ils cueilleront. 


-N- 


Je cueillerais, 
nous cueillerions, 


tu cueillerais, 
vous cueilleriez. 


il cueillerait, 
ils cueilleraient. 


-?- 


cueillons, 


cueille, 
cueillez. 


qu'il cueille, 
qu'ils cueillent. 


-CI- 


■ Que je cueille, 
que nous cueillions, 


que tu cueilles, 
que vous cueilliez. 


qu'il cueille, 
qu'ils cueillent. 


-5- 


Que je cueillisse, 


que tu cueillisses, 


qu'il cueillit, 



que nous cueillissions, que vous cueillissiez, qu'ils cueillissent. 
The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugated after the same manner — 

Accueillir, to welcome. | Recueillir, to gather, to reap 



-a- Dormir. 

-F- Je dors, 

nous dormons, 

-H- Je dormais, 
nous dormions, 

-j- Je dormis, 

nous dormimes, 

-L- Je dormirai, 
nous dormirons, 

-N- Je dormirais, 
nous dormirions- 



Dormir to 

-c- Dormant. 

tu dors, 
vous dormez, 

tu dormais, 
vous dormiez, 

tu dormis, 
vous dormites, 

tu dormiras, 
vous dormirez, 

tu dormirais, 
vous dormiriez, 

2JN 



-E- Dormi. 

il dort, 

ils dorment. 

il dormait, 
ils doimaient. 

il dormit, 
ils dormirent. 

il dormira, 
ils dormiront. 

il dormirait, 
ils dormiraient. 



128 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



dormons, 

-Q - Que je dorme, 

que nous dormions, 



dors, 
dormez, 

que tu dormes, 
que vous dormiez, 



Que je dormisse, 
que nous dormissions, 



qu'il dorme, 
qu'ils dorment. 

qu'il dorme, 
qu'ils dorment. 

qu'il dornlit, 



que tu dormisses, 

que vous dormissiez, qu'ils dormissent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have 

Conjugate after the same manner — 
Endormir, to lull asleep. I Redormir, to sleep again. 
S'endormir, to fall asleep. | Se rendormir, to fall asleep again. 

The Compound Tenses of S'endormir, and Se rendormir, are 
conjugated with Etre, to be, as all pronominal verbs are. 



-a- Faillir, 

-j- Je faillis, 

nous faillimes, 



Faillir 
-c- Fail] ant. 



to fail 



tu faillis, 
vous faillites, 



-E- Failli. 

il faillit, 
ils faillirent. 



This verb is defective, and only used in the above tenses, and in 
all the compound tenses, which are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 



Fleurir 



to blossom, to flourish. 



This verb is regular and conjugated like Finir, when speaking 
of plants and flowers ; but when speaking of the prosperity of a king- 
dom, or of a town, -c- the participle present, is florissant; and -li- 
the imperfect of the indicative, jeflorissais, tuflorissais, &c. 

Refleurir, to blossom, or flourish again, follows the same rule. 



-a- Fuir. 



Fuir 
-c- Fuyant. 



to fly. 



-e- Fui. 



•f- Je fuis, 

nous fuyons, 


tu fuis, 
vous fuyez, 


il fuit, 
ils fuient. 


-H- Je fuyais, 
nous fuyions, 


tu fuyais, 
vous fuyiez, 


il fuyait, 
ils fuyaient 


•j- Je fuis, 

nous futmcs, 


tu fuis, 
vous fuites, 


il fuit, 
lis fuirent. 


•L- Je fuirai, 
nous fuirons, 


tu fuiras, 
vous fuirez, 


il fuira, 
kiS fuiront. 


•n- Je fuirais, 
nous fuirions, 


tu fuirais, 
vous fuiriez, 


il fuirait, 
iis fuiraient. 


-p- 

fiiyons, 


fuis, 
fuyez, 


qu'il fuie, 
qu'ils fuient. 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION- 



129 



-a- Que je fuie, 

que nous fuyions, 

-s- Que je fuisse, 

que nous fuissions, 



que tu fuies, 
que vous fuyiez, 

que tu fuisses, 
que vous fuissiez, 



qu'il fuie, 
qu'ils fuient. 

qu'il fuit, 
qu'ils fuissent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugated after the same manner, S'enfuir, to run away. 



Gesir 



to lie. 



This verb, (defective) which formerly signified to be lying down 
is no longer in use ; we however, say sometimes, il git ; ci-git, here lies, 
is the common form by which an epitaph begins. 



Hair 



to hate. 



This verb is regular, and conjugated like Finir, except in the 
first three persons singular of -f- the present of the indicative, Je hais, 
I hate ; tu hais, thou hatest; il hait, he hates ; and in the second person 
singular of -p- the imperative, hais, hate. 

A diaeresis ( •• ) is required over the i in all tenses and persons, 
except in those above mentioned ; this diaeresis is to cause the a and i to 
be pronounced as two syllables. 





Mourir 


to die. 


•a- Mourir. 


-c- Mourant. 


-E- Mort. 


•f- Je meurs, 
nous mourons 


tu meurs, % 
vous mourez, 


il meurt, 
ils meurent. 


■H- Je mourais, 
nous mourions, 


tu mourais, 
vous mouriez, 


il mourait, 
ils mouraient. 


a- Je mourus, 

nous mourumes, 


tu mourus, 
vous mourutes, 


il mourut, 
ils moururent. 


•l- Je mourrai, 
nous mourrons, 


tu mourras, 
vous mourrez, 


il mourra, 
Ls mourront. 


■n- Je mourrais, 
nous mourrions, 


tu mourrais, 
vous mourriez, 


il mourrait, 
ils mourraient. 


•p- 

mourons, 


meurs, 
mourez, 


qu'il meure, 
qu'ils meurent. 


a- Que je meure, 
que nous mourions 


que tu meures, qu'il meare, 
, que vous mouriez, qu'ils meurent. 



Que je mourusse, que tu mourusses, qu'il mourut, 

que nous mourussions, que vous mourussiez, qu'ils mourussent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Etre, to be. 
Conjugated after the same manner, Se mourir, to be dying 



130 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 

Ouir to hear. 

This verb, (defective) can only be used in -a- the present of the 
infinitive, ouir, to hear ; in -J- the preterit definite, fou'is, I heard ; 
il ouit, he heard ; in -s- the imperfect of the subjunctive, que fou'isse, 
that I might hear ; qu'il ouit, that he might hear ; and in its compound 
tenses, which are formed with the simple tenses of Avoir, to have, and 
its past participle out, as j'ai oui, I have heard, tu as oui, &c. 





Ouvrir to open. 




A- 


Ouv rir. 


-c- Ouv rant. -k 


- Ouv ert. 


~F- 


J 'ouv re, 

nous oavrons, 


tu ouv res, 
vous ouv res, 


il ouv re, 
ils ouv rent. 


-H- 


J'ouv rais, 
nous ouv rions, 


tu ouv raw, 
vous ouv riez, 


il ouv rait, 
ils ouv raient. 


-J- 


J'ouv ris, 

nous ouv rimes, 


tu ouv m, 
vous ouv rites, 


il ouv ri*, 
ils ouv rirent. 


-L- 


J'ouv rirai, 
nous ouv rirons, 


tu ouv riras, 
vous ouv rires, 


il ouv rira, 
ils ouv riront. 


• N- 


J'ouv rirais, 
nous ouv virions, 


tu ouv riraw, 
vous ouv riries, 


il ouv rirai/, 
ils ouv riraient. 


-T- 


ouv rons, 


ouv re, 

ouv res, 
• 


qu'il ouv re, 
qu'ils ouv rent. 


-Q- 


Que j'ouv re, 

que nous ouv rions, 


que tu ouv res, 
que vous ouv ries, 


qu'il ouv re, 
qu'ils ouvrenf. 



-s- Que j'ouv risse, que tu ouv risses, qu'il ouv rit, 

que nous ouv rissions, que vous ouv rimes, qu'ils ouv risseni. 

Compound Tenses are Conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugated after the same manner— • 



Rouv rir„ to open again. 

Entr'ouv rir, to half open. 

Couv rir, to cover. 

Recouv rir j to cover again. 



Dec mi vnr, to discover. 

Off rir, to offer. 

Mesoff rir 9 to underbid 

Souffnr to suffer. 



-a- Sen tir. 

-F- Je sen s, 

nous sen tens, 

-u- Je sen tais, 
nous sen tions 

j- je sen tis, 
nous sen times 



Sentir 



to feel. 



-c- Sen tant. 



tu sen rf, 
vous sen tes. 

tu sen tais, 
vous sen/ie3, 

tu sen ti*, 
vous sen tites, 



- r- Sen ti. 

il sen /, 
ils sen ttnt. 

il sen tait, 
ils sen taient 

il sen tit, 
ils sen tirenL 



OF THE SECONU CONJUGATION. 



131 



-L- Je sen tirai, 
nous sen tirons, 

-N- Je sen Urate, 
nous sen tirions, 



-p- 



sen tons, 



tu sen tiras, 
vous sen tires, 

tu sen tirais, 
vous sen tiries, 

sen s, 
sen /es, 

que tu sen tes, 
que vous sen ties, 



il sen /ira. 
ils sentiront, 

il sen tirait, 
ils sen tiraient. 

qu'il sen /e, 
qu'ils sen /en/. 

qu'il sen /e, 
qu'ils sen tent. 



-a- Que je sen te, 
que nous sen tions, 

-s- Queje sen /me, 

que nous sen tissions, 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 

Conjugate after the same manner— 



quetu sen tisses, 
que vous sen tissies, 



qu'il sen tit, 
qu'ils sen tissent. 



C onsen Hr 9 to consent Jo agree. 
Pressenfo'r, to foresee. 
Ressen ti+ 9 to resent, to feel still. 
Men Hr 9 to lie. 

DemenftY, to give the lie, to be- 
\7ie, to contradict. 
Repar tir, to reply. 

The Compound Tenses of the first six of the above verbs, are 
conjugated with Avoir, to have. 

Those of Se ressentir and Se repentir, as all other pronomi- 
nal verbs, are conjugated with Etre, to be. 

And those of Partir, Repartir, Sortir, and Rbssortir, some- 
times with Avoir, sometimes with Etre. 



Se ressen tir, to feel still. 
Se repen Hr 9 to repent. 

Par tir, to set out, to depart 
Repar tir, to set out again. 
Sor tir, to go out. 
Ressor tir, to go out agairu 





s 


jervir to serve. 




•A- 


Ser vir. 


-c- Servant. -e- 


Ser vi. 


■F- 


Je ser 8, 


tu ser s, 


il ser t , 




nous ser vons, 


vous ser res, 


ils ser vent. 


H- 


Je ser vais, 


tu Bervais, 


il servait, 




nous ser vions, 


vous ser vies, 


ils ser vaitnt. 


J- 


Je sex vis, 


tu ser vis, 


il sevvit, 




nous ser vimes, 


vous ser vites, 


ils sevvirent. 


■L- 


Je ser virai, 


tu sermra*, 


il ser vir a, 




nous ser virons, 


vous ser vires, 


ils ser viront. 


N- 


Je servirais, 


tu ser vir ais, 


il ser virait. 




nous ser virions, 


vous ser vines, 


ils ser viraitnt 


•P- 




ser 5, 


qu'il ser re, 




seriww, 


ser ves, 
2 y 2 


qu'ils ser cent 



132 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



-0,- Que je serve, que tu serves, qu'il serve, 

que nous ser vions, que vo us ser vies, qu'ils servenf, 

-8- Que je servisse, que tu services, qu'il servi/, 

que nous ser vissions, que vous ser vissiesr, qu'ils seivissent, 

Conjugated after the same manner — 

Desser vir, to clear a table, to do an ill office to somebody. 
Se ser vir, to make use, to use. 

The Compound Tenses of Servir and Desservir, are conjtz 
gated with Avoir ; those of Se servir, with Etre. 

Asservir, to subject, is regular, and conjugated like Finir. 



Tenir 



to hold. 



J 



A- 


Tenir. 


-c- T enant. 


-K- T ent< 


-F- 


Je tiens, 
nous t enons, 


tu tiens, 
vous t enes, 


il t ien/, 
ils t iennent. 


•II- 


Je t enais, 
nous t enions* 


tu t enais, 
vous t eniez, 


il t cnait, 
ils t enaient. 


-J- 


Je tin*, 
nous t inmes, 


tu t ins, 
vous t intes, 


il tin/, 
ils t inrent. 


-L- 


Je tiendrai) 
nous tiendrons, 


tu t iendras, 
vous t iendrez, 


il tientfra, 
ils t iendront. 


-N- 


Je tiendrais, 
nous t iendrions. 


tu tiendrais, 
vous tiendriez, 


il tiendrait, 
ils t iendraient. 


-P- 


t enons, 


t iens, 
t enes, 


qu'il tienne, 
qu'ils tiennent. 


-Q- 


• Que je tienne, 
que nous t enions, 


que tu t iennes, 
que vous t enies, 


qu'il tienne, 
qu'ils t iennent. 


-s- 


Que jet m«e, 
que nous tinssions, 


que tu t insses, 
que vous tinssies, 


qu'il tin/, 
qu'ils t insscnt. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, /o /iave. 
Conjugate after tne same manner — 



*Appart mfr, to belong. 
Av em>, to happen. 
*Circonv enir, to circumvent. 
*Cont cnir, to contain. 
*Contrevem'r, to contravene. 
Conv enir, to agree, to suit. 
*D£prev enir, to vnpreposjess. 
*Det enir, to detain. 
Dev mir % to become. 



Disconv enir, to disagree 
*Entret enir, to entertain. 
Intervener, to intervene. 
*Maintem'r, to maintain. 
Mesavcnir, to succeed ill. 
*Obt enir, to obtain. 
Parv enir, to attain. 
* Pre v enir, to prevent, to inform. 
Prov enir, to proceed from. 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



133 



Redev enir, to become again. 
*Ret enir, to retain. 
Rev enir, to come again, 

[to come back. 
S'abst enir, to abstain. 
*Sout enir, to sustain,to support. 



Se ressouv enir, to recollect. 
Se souvenir, to remember. 
*Subv enir, to relieve. 
Surv enir, to come unexpectedly. 
V enir, to come. 



Those of the above verbs, which are marked with an asterisk (*) t 
are conjugated in their compound tenses, with Avoir, to have, and the 
others, with Etre, to be. 

Avenir, to happen, is only used in the third person singular, of 
-F- the present of the indicative, as sHl avient, if it happens. 

Provenir, to proceed from, is' employed in its third persons sin- 
gular, and plural; as celaprovient de, that proceeds from ; Tous set mal- 
heurs proviennent de, &c. all his misfortunes proceed from, &c. 



Vetir 



to clothe. 



-a- VSttr. 


-c- Vet ant. 


-E-V6tw. 


-p- Je vet s, 
nous v&t ons, 


tu vet 5, 
vous vetesr, 


il vet, 
ils v£t ent. 


-H- Je vet ais, 
nous vet ions, 


tu vet ais, 
vous v6t iez, 


il vetaiY, 
ils vSt aient. 


-j- Je vetis, 

nous vet imes, 


tu v6t is, 
vous vet ites, 


il vStif, 
ils v6t irent 


-L- Je vctirai, 
nous vet irons, 


tu vetiras, 
vous vet irez, 


il v£t z'ra, 
ils v£t iront. 


-N- Je vet ir ais, 
nous vet irions, 


tu v6t i'rai>, 
vous v&t iriez, 


il v£t i/m7, 
ils v&tiraient. 


-p- 

vet ons, 


vet j, 
v6t ez, 


qu'il vSt e, 
qu'ils vet en/. 


-<*- Que je vet e, 

que nous vet ions, 


que tu vet es, 
que vous vtliez, 


qu'il v£te, 
qu'ils v&t ent. 


-s- Que je vet isse, 

que nous vet issions, 


que tu v&t isse*, 
que vous vetwsies, 


qu'il v£t it, 
qu'il v&tmen/. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugated after the same manner — 



Revet ir, to clothe. 

De vetir, to strip, to undress. 



Se vetir, to dress, or clothe one's 

[self. 
Se de vetir, to divest one's self 

The Compound Tenses of Se vetir, and Se devetir, are conjuga 
led with Etre, to be; as all other pronominal verbs are. 



134 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 

Irregular, Defective, and Unipersonal Verbs of the Third 
Conjugation. 

Avoir to have. 

This verb, (active and auxiliary) is one of the most irregular. 
See its conjugation, page 10. 



Ravoir 



to have again. 



This verb, {active and defective) is only used in -a- the present 
of the infinitive. 



Y avoir there to be. 

This verb, (unipersonal) is conjugated, page 20. 



S'asseoir 



to sit down. 



-a- S'asseoir. 

-F- Je m'assieds, 

nous nous asseyons, 

-H- Je m'asseyais, 

nous nous asseyions, 

-j- Je m'assis, 

nous nous assimes, 

-L- Je m'asseyerai, 
or je m'asseierai, 
or je m'assierai, 
nous nous asseyerons, 
or nous nous asseierons, 
or nous nous assierons, 



-c- S'asseyant. 

tu t'assieds, 

vous vous asseyez, 



tu t'asseyais, 
vous vous asseyiez, 

tu t'assis, 

vous vous assites, 

tu t'asseyeras, 
tu t'asseieras, 
tu t'assieras, 
vous vous asseyerez, 
vous vous asseierez, 
vous vous assierez, 



-E- Assis 

il s'assied, 
ils s'asseyent, 
or ils s'asseient, 

il s'asseyait, 
ils s'asseyaienU 

il s'assit, 
ils s'assirent, 

il s'asseyera, 
il s'asseiera, 
il s'assiera, 
ils s'asseyeront, 
ils s'asseieront, 
ils s'assieront. 

il s'asseyerait, 
il s'asseierait, 
il s'assierait, 
ils s'asseyeraient, 
ils s'asseieraient, 
ils s'assieraient. 

qu'il s'asseye, 
or qu'il s'asseie. 

qu'ils s'asseyent, 
or qu'ils s'asseient. 

-a- Q U9 j° m'asseye, quo tu t'asseyes, qu'il s'asseye, 

or que je m'asseie, or que tu t'asseies, or qu'd s'asseie, 

que nous nous asseyions, que vous vou* asseyiez, qu'ils s'asseyent, 

or qu'ils s'asseient 

-s- Que je m'assisse, que tu t'assisses, qu'il s'assit, 

que nous nous assissions, que vous vous ossissiez, qu'ils s'assissent 



-N- Je m'asseyerais, tu t'asseyerais, 

or je m'asseierais, tu t'asseierais, 

or je m'assierais, tu t'assierais, 

nous nous asseyerions, vous vous asseyeriez, 

or nous nous asseierions, vous vous asseieriez, 

or nous nous assi6rions, vous vous assi£riez, 

-F- assieds-toi, 



asseyons-nous, 



asseyez-vous, 



OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 



135 



Conjugated after the same manner, Se rasseoir,/o sit down again. 

The Compound Tenses of these two verbs, are conjugated with 
Etre, to be ; as all other pronominal verbs are. 

Conjugate after the same manner, without the second pronoun, 
me, te* se, &c. Asseoir, to set, or to lay something, or somebody down. 

The compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 

The different ways of writing and pronouncing some of the 
tenses and persons of the above verbs, render them very difficult ; par- 
ticular attention must be paid to their conjugations. Of the three ways 
of writing and pronouncing, -l- the future, and -n- the conditional pre- 
sent ; I would recommend the third as being the easiest, and I believe 
the most used. 

Some Grammarians have imagined, to do away with the difficul- 
ties these verbs offer, even to French people, to conjugate them as 
follows — 



S'assoir 



to sit down. 



-a- S'assoir. 

-F- Je m'assois, 

nous nous assoyons, 

-H- Je m'assoyais, 

nous nous assoyions, 

• j- Je m'assis, 

nous nous assimes, 

-L- Je m'assoirai, 

nous nous assoirons, 

-N- Je m'assoirais, 

nous nous assoirions, 

-p- 

assoyons-nous, 



-c- S'assoyant. 

tu t'assois, 

vous vous assoyez, 

tu t'assoyais, 
vous vous assoyiez, 

tu t'assis, 

vous vous assites, 

tu t'assoiras, 
vous vous assoirez, 

tu t'assoirais, 
vous vous assoiriez, 

assois-toi, 
assoyez-vous, 



-e- Assis. 

il s'assoit, 
ils s'assoient. 

il s'assoyait, 
ils s'assoyaient 

il s'assit, 
ils s'assirent. 

il s'assoira, 
ils s'assoiront. 

il s'assoirait, 
ils s'assoiraient. 

qu'il s'assoie, 
qu'ils s'assoient 



-a- Que je m'assoie, que tu t'assoies, qu'il s'assoie, 

que nous nous assoyions, que vous vous assoyiez, qu'ils s'assoient. 

-s- que je m'assisse, que tu t'assisses, qu'il s'assit, 

que nous nous assissions, que vous vous assissiez. qu'ils s'assissent. 

It is certain that this way of conjugating the above, is much 
more convenient ; and I should like to recommend it; but although 
much used in some parts of France, it is not yet generally received as 
correct by most of those of the Old School — who in every country seem 
to be opposed to every thing that can facilitate knowledge, lest we 
should now acquire in a short time, and with little trouble, what has 
cost them much time and great trouble. 



Choir to fall. 

This verb is not used, except in -a- the present of the infinitive 



136 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 

Dechoir to decay. 

This verb is seldom used, except in -a- the present of the infini- 
tive, and in its compound tenses, which are conjugated sometimes with 
Etre, sometimes with Avoir. 



ECHOIR 



to fall to j to expire, to be due, to fall due. 



This verb is only used in the third person of -f- present of the 
indicative,^ echoit, sometimes pronounced ilechet; in -J- il echut ; in 
-L- il echerra ; in -n- il icherrait ; in -s- quHl 6 chut, &c. in -a- echoir • 
in -c- echeant ; in -b- echu; and in the compound tenses, which are con- 
jugated sometimes with Avoir, and sometimes with Etre. 



Falloir 



to be necessary. 



-F- II faui, 
-H- II fallait, 
-j- II fallut, 
-L- 11 faudra, 
-N- II faudrait, 
-p- (none) 
-a- Qu'il faille, 
-s- Qu'il fallut, 



it is necessary. 

it was necessary, 

it was necessary. 

it shall or will be necessary. 

it should, would, could, or might be necessary 



that it may be necessary, 
that it might be necessary. 

The Compound Tenses of this verb, (unvpersonal and defective) 
are formed by the addition of its participle past, /a/Zw, to the third person 
singular of the verb Avoir, as il afallu, it has been necessary, «fec. 

The expressions, / must, he must, we must, you must, they must, 
&o. are rendered by it must that I— it must that he, &c. the verb which 
follows is put in the subjunctive mood, and in the person indicated by the 
personal pronoun, which is before must, in the English; as I must write — 
Il faut que fecrive ; you must drink — il faut que vous buviez, &c. we 
say also, il me faut ecrire, il vous faut boire. 



-a- Mouvoir. 

-F- Je meus, 

nous mouvons, 

-H- Je mouvais, 
nous mouvions, 

-j- Je mus, 

nous mumes, 

-L- Je mouvrai, 
nous mouvrons, 



Mouvoir 
-o- Mouvant. 



to move. 



tu meus, 
vous mouvez, 

tu mouvais, 
vous mouviez, 

tu mus, 
vous mutes, 

tu mouvras, 
vous mouvrez, 



-E- Mu. 



il meut, 

ils mcuvent. 

il mouvait, 
ils mouvaient. 

il mut, 
ils murent. 

il mouvra, 
ils mouvront. 



OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 



137 



-N- Je mouvrais, 
nous mouvrions, 

-p- 

mouvons, 

-q,- Que je meuve, 

que nous mouvions, 

-s- Que je musse, 

que nous mussions, 



tu mouvrais, 
vous mouvriez, 

meus, 
mouvez, 

que tu meuves, 
que vous mouviez, 

que tu musses, 
que vous mussiez, 



il mouvrait, 
ils mouvraient 

qu'il meuve, 
qu'ils meuvent, 

qu'il meuve, 
qu'ils meuvent. 

qu'il mut, 
qu'ils mussent. 



This verb is very little used, except in -a- the present of the 
infinitive. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
The object in giving, here, all its tenses, is to have a model, for- 

Emouvoir, to move. S'emouvoir, to be concerned. 

Promouvoir, to promote. 

which are conjugated like it. The compound tenses of S*emouvoir, are 
conjugated with Etre. 

Promouvoir, is only used in -a- the present of the infinitive, and 
in the compound tenses. 



Pleuvoir 



to rain. 



-a- Pleuvoir, 
•c- Pleuvant, 
-e- Plu, 
-F- II pleut, 
-H- II pleuvait, 
-j- II plut, 
-L- II pleuvra, 
-N- II pleuvrait, 
-p- (none.) 
-a- Qu'il pleuve, 
-s- Qu'il plut, 



to rain. 

raining. 

rained. 

it rains, does rain^ or is raining. 

it rained, did rain, or was raining. 

it rained or did rain. 

it will rain. 

it would rain. 

that it may rain, 
that it might rain. 



The compound tenses, of the above unipersonal verb, are formed 
by the addition of -e- its participle passive, /?foz, to the third person sin- 
gular of the simple tenses of Avoir; as il a plu, it has rained, &c. 



-a- Pourvoir. 



Pourvoir to provide. 

-c- Pourvoyant. -e- Pourvu. 



-F- Je pourvois, 

nous pourvoyons, 

-H- Je pourvoyais, 
nous pourvoyions, 



tu pourvois, 
vous pourvoyez, 

lu pourvoyais, 
vous pourvoyiez 



il pourvoit, 
lis pourvoient. 

•1 pouivoyait, 
ils pourvoyaient. 



138 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPER.SONAL VERBS 



-J- Je pourvus, 

nous pourv uraes, 

-L- Je pourvoirai, 
nous pourvoirons, 

-n- Je pourvoirais, 
nous pourvoirions, 

-p- 

pourvoyons, 

-d- Que je pourvoie, 



tu pourvus, 
vous pourvutes, 

tu pourvoiras, 
vous pourvoirez, 

tu pourvoirais, 
vous pourvoiriez, 



il pourvut, 
ils pourvurent 

il pourvoira, 
ils pourvoiront. 

il pourvoirait, 
ils pourvoiraient. 



pourvois, qu'il pourvoie, 

pourvoyez, qu'ils pourvoient. 

que tu pourvoies, qu'il pourvoie, 

que nous pourvoyions, que vous pourvoyiez, qu'ils pourvoient. 

■s- Que je pourvusse, que tu pourvusses, qu'il pourvut, 

que nous pourvussions, que vous pourvussiez, qu'ils pourvussent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have* 



POUVOIR 



to be able. 



-a- Pouvoir. 

-F- Je puis or je peux, 
nous pouvons, 

-H- Je pouvais, 
nous pouvions, 

-j- Je pus, 

nous piimes, 

-L- Je pourrai, 
nous pourrons, 

-N- Je pourrais, 

nous pourrions, 
-p- 

-Q- Que je puisse, 

que nous puissions, 

s- Que je pusse, 
que nous pussions, 



-c- Pouvant. 



-E- Pu. 



tu peux, 
vous pouvez, 

tu pouvais, 
vous pouviez, 

tu pus, 
vous putes, 

tu pourras, 
vous pourrez, 

tu pourrais, 
vous pourriez, 

(none) 
que tu puisse, 
que vous puissiez, 

que tu pusses, 
que vous pussiez, 



il peut, 

ils peuvent. 

il pouvait, 
ils pouvaient. 

il put, 
ils purent. 

il pourra, 
ils pourront. 

il pourrait, 
ils pourraient. 

qu'il puisse, 
qu'ils puissent. 

qu'il put, 
qu'ils pussent. 



Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 



Savoir 



to know. 



-a- Savoir 

-F- Je sais, 

nous savons, 

-il- Je savais, 
nous savions, 

-j- Je sus, 

nous eumes 



-c- Sachant. 

tu sais, 
vous savez, 

tu savais, 
vous saviez, 

tu sus, 
vous sutes, 



-F- Su. 



il sait, 
ils savent. 

il savait, 
ils savaient 

il sut, 

ils surent. 



OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 



139 



«L- 


> Je saurai, 
nous saurons, 


tu sauras, 
vous saurez, 


il saura, 

ils sauront 


•N- 


• Je saurais, 
nous saurions, 


tu saurais, 
vous sauriez, 


il saurai t, 
ils sauraient. 


-P- 


sachons, 


sache, 
sachez, 


qu'il sache, 
qu'ils sachent. 


-Q- 


Que je sache, 
que nous sachions, 


que tu saclies, 
que vous sachiez, 


qu'il sache, 
qu'ils sachent. 


-S- 


Que je susse, 
que nous sussions, 


que tu susses, 
que vous sussiez* 


qu'il sut, 
qu'ils sussent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 

Savoir, to know ; must not be confounded with Connaitre, to 
know. Connaitre, is mostly used, in the sense of, to be acquainted with ; 
and Savoir, in other circumstances. 



Seoir 



-a- Seoir. 

-E- II sied, 

-H- II seyait, 

-j- 

-L- 11 siera, 

-N- II sierait, 

-p- 

-Q- Qu'il siee, 

-s- 



-c- Seyant. 
it Jits, 
it fitted, 
(none) 
it will fit. 
it would fit. 
{none) 

that it may fit. 
(none) 



to jit, to become, to Jit welL 

Sis. 

they fit. 



-fi- 
lls silent, 
ils seyaient, 



ils sieront, 
ils si£raient, 



they fitted. 

they will fit. 
they would fit. 



qu'ils silent, that they may fit. 



This verb, which is only employed in the third person o^" t 
singular, and of the plural, of some tenses, has no ©orapound tenses. 



Surseoir to reprieve, to put off 

This verb is seldom used, except in -a- the present 
infinitive. 





Valoib 


t to be worth. 


-a- Valoir. 


-c- 


Valant. 


-E- Valu. 


p- Je vaux, 
nous valons, 




tu vaux, 
vous valez, 


il vaut, 
ils valent. 


■H- Je valais, 
nous valions, 




tu valais, 
vous vaiiez, 


il valait, 
ils valaient. 


•j- Je valus, 
nous valumes, 




tu valus, 
vous valutes, 
20 


il valut, 
ils valurent 



140 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



-L- 


Je vaudrai, 
nous vaudrons, 


tu vaudras, 
vous vaudrez, 


il vaudra, 
ils vaudront. 


-N- 


Je vaudrais, 
nous vaudrions, 


tu vaudrais, 
vous vaudricz, 


il vaudrait, 
ils vaudraient. 


-P- 


valons, 


vaux, 
valez, 


qu'il vaille, 
qu'ils vaillent 


-a« 


Que je vaille, 
que nous valions, 


que tu vailles, 
que vous valiez, 


qu'il vaille, 
qu'ils vaillent. 


-s- 


Que je valusse, 
que nous valussions, 


que tu valusses, 
que vous valussiez, 


qu'il valut, 
qu'ils valussent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugated after the same manner — 

Re valoir, to return like for like. I Pre valoir, to prevail. 
Equi valoir, to be equivalent. 

This last, makes in -a- the subjunctive, que je private, que tu 
privates, quHl private, que nous privations, que vous privalies, qu'ik 
prevalent. 



Voir 



to see. 



-a- Voir. 



• Voyant. 



Vu. 



-F- 


Je vois, 
nous voyons, 


tu vois, 
vous voyez, 


il voit, 
ils voient. 


-H- 


Je voyais, 
nous voyions, 


tu voyais, 
vous voyiez, 


il voyait, 
ils voyaienL 


-J- 


Je vis, 
nous vimes, 


tu vis, 
vous vites, 


il vit. 
ils virent. 


-L- 


Je verrai, 
nous verrons, 


tu verras, 
vous verrez, 


il verra, 
ils verront. 


-N- 


Je verrais, 
nous verrior*, 


tu verrais, 
vous verriez, 


il verrait, 
ils verraicnt. 


-P- 


voyons, 


vois, 
voyez, 


qu'il voie, 
qu'ils voient. 


-a- 


Que je voie, 
que nous voyions, 


que tu voics, 
que vous voyiez, 


qu'il voie, 
qu'ils voient. 


-8- 


Qua je visse, 
que nous vissions, 


que tu visscs, 
que vous vissiez, 


qu'il vit, 
qu'ils vissent 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 

Re voir, to see again. I Entre voir, to have a glimpse of. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



141 



Pre voir 



to foresee. 



This verb is conjugated like Voir, to see, except in -L- 
i present of the conditional. 



This verb is conjugated like Voir, to se 
future, and in -n- the present of the conditional. 

-L- Je pr£voirai, tu prevoiras, il prevoira, 

ils prevoiront. 



nous prevoirons, vous prevoirez, 



-N- Je pre>oirais, 
nous pre>oirions, 



tu pr^voirais, 
vous prevoiriez, 



il prevoirait, 
ils prevoiraient 



the 



VoULOIB 



to be willing. 



-a- Vouloir 



-c- Voulant, 



-K- Voulu, 



-F- Je veux, 

nous voulons, 

-H- Je voulais, 
nous voulions, 

-j- Je voulus, 

nous voulumes, 

-L- Je voudrai, 
nous voudrons, 

n- Je voudrais, 
nous voudrions, 



a- Que je veuille, 
que nous vouiions, 

-s- Que je voulusse, 

que nous voulussions, 



tu veux, 
vous voulez, 

tu voulais, 
vous vouliez, 

tu voulus, 
vous voulutes, 

tu voudras, 
vous voudrez, 



il veut, 
ils veulent 

il voulait, 
ils voulaient, 

il voulut, 
ils voulurent. 

il voudra, 
ils voudront. 

il voudrait, 
ils voudraient. 



tu voudrais, 
vous voudnez, 

veuillez, (is the only person) 

que tu veuilles, qu'il veuille, 



que vous vouliez, 



qu'ils veuillent. 



que tu voulusses, qu'il voulut, 

que vous voulussiez, qu'ils voulussent 
with avoir. 



Irregular, Defective, and Unipersonal Verbs of the Fourth 
Conjugation. 



Battre 



to beat 



•B- 


Battre. 


-c- Battant. 


-E- Battu. 


F- 


Je bats, 
nous battons, 


tu bats, 
vous battez, 


'1 bat, 

lis battent. 


11- 


Je battais, 
nous battions, 


tu battais, 
vous battiez, 


il battait, 
ils battaient 


•J- 


je battis, 
nous battimes, 


tu battis, 
vous battites, 


il battit, 
ils battirent. 


-L- 


Je battrai, 
nous battrons, 


tu battras, 
vous battrez, 


il battra, 
ils battront. 



142 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



-tf- 


Je battrais, 
aous battrions. 


tu battrais, 
vous battriez, 


il battrait, 
ils battraient. 


-p- 


battons, 


bats, 
battez, 


qu'il batte, 
qu'ils battent. 


•Q,- 


Que je batte, 
que nous battions, 


que tu battes, 
que vous battiez, 


qu'il batte, 
qu'ils battent. 


-S- 


Que je battisse, 
que nous battissions, 


que tu batisses, 
que vous battissiez, 


qu'il battit, 
qu'ils battissent. 



The compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 



A battre, to pull down. 
Com battre, to fight. 
De battre, to debate, 
Ra battre, to pull down again, 
[to abate. 



Re battre, to beat again. 
S'e battre, tu make or be merry 
Se de battre, to struggle. 



The compound tenses of S""tbattre % and Se dtbattre, are conjuga- 
ted with Etre, to be. 



Boire 



to drink. 



■ 



-A- 


Boire. 


-c- Buvant, -e- Bu. 


-F- 


Je bois, 
nous buvons, 


tu bois, il boit, 
vous buvez, ils boivent. 


-H- 


Je buvais, 
nous buvions, 


tu buvais, il buvait, 
vous buviez, ils buvaient. 


-J 


Je bus, 
nous bumes, 


tu bus, il but, 
vous butes, ils burent. 


-L- 


Je boirai, 
nous boirons, 


tuboiras, il boira, 
vous boirez, ils boiront. 


-N- 


Je boirais, 
nous boirions, 


tu boirais, il bcirait, 
vous boiriez, ils boiraient. 


-r- 


mvons, 


bois, qu'il boive, 
buvez, qu'ils boivent. 


-u 


. Que je boive 
que nous buvions, 


que tu boive, qu'il boive, 
que vous buviez, qu'ils boivent 


-8- 


Que je busse, 
que nous bussions, 


que tu busses, qu'il but, 
que vous bussiez, qu'ils bussent 




The Compound 


Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 




Conjugate after the same manner, Re boire. to drink again. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



143 



Clore 



to close. 



-a- Clore. 


(none) 


-E- Clos. 


-F- Je clos, 


tu clos, 


il clot 


-L- Je elorai, 
nous elorons, 


tu cloras, 
vous clorez, 


il clora, 
ils cloront. 


-N- Je clorais, 
nous clorions, 


tu clorais, 
vous cloriez, 


il clorait 
ils cloraient. 



This verb, (defective) is only used in the above few tenses, and 
persons, and in all the compound tenses, which are formea with 
Avoir, to have. Some write this verb with double r 

Conjugated after the same manner, En clore, to enclose. 





Conclure to conclude 


-A- 


■ Conclure. 


-c- Concluant. 


-E- Conclu. 


-F- 


Je conclus, 
nous concluons, 


tu conclus, 
vous concluez, 


il conclut, 
ils concluent. 


-H- 


■ Je concluais, 
nous conclu'ions, 


tu concluais, 
vous conclu'iez, 


il concluait, 
ils concluaient. 


-J- 


Je conclus, 
nous conclumes, 


tu conclus, 
vous conclutes, 


il conclut, 
ils conclurent. 


-L- 


Je conclurai, 
nous conclurons, 


tu concluras, 
vous conclurez, 


il conclura, 
ils concluront. 


-N- 


Je conclurais, 
nous conclurions, 


tu conclurais, 
vous concluriez, 


il conclurait, 
ils concluraient, 


-P- 


concluons, 


conclus, 
concluez, 


qu'il conclue, 
qu'ils concluent. 


■4- 


Que je conclue, 
que nous conclu'ions, 


que tu conchies, 
que vous conclu'iez, 


qu'il conclue, 
qu'ils concluent. 


-8- 


Que je conclusse, 


que tu conclusses, 


qu'il conclut, 



que nous conclussions, que vous conclussiez, qu'ils conclussent. 
The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugated after the same manner, Exclure, to exclude. 



CONFIRE 



to pickle. 



•a- Conf ire. 

»f- Je confi*, 

nous conf isons, 

*H- Je conf wow, 
nous conf m<m«, 



-c- Conf isant. 

tu conf w, 
vous conf isez, 

tu conf isaisy 
vous conf wiftsf, 
x o "4 



-E- Conf it. 

il conf if, 
ils conf isent. 

il conf isait 9 
ils conf isaient, 



144 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



»J- 


Je conf is, 
nous confirms, 


tu conf is, 
vous conf ites, 


il conf it, 
ils conf irent. 


-L- 


Je conf irai, 
nous conf irons, 


tu confirms, 
vous conf irez, 


il conf ira, 
ils conf ironl. 


-N- 


Je conf irais, 
nous conf irions, 


tu conf irais, 
vous confines, 


il conf irait, 
ils conf iraient. 


-P- 


conf isons, 


conf is, 
conf ises, 


qu'il conf ise, 
qu'ils conf isen/. 


~<l- 


Que je conf zse, 
que nous conf isions, 


que tu conf ises, 
que vous conf isies, 


qu'il conf ise, 
qu'ils conf isent. 


-S- 


Que je conf me, 
que nous conf issions, 


que tu conf isses, 
que vous conf issies, 


qu'il conf it, 
qu'ils conf issent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 



Suffire, 



to suffice. Circonc ire, to circumcise. 



Coudre 



to sew 



-A- 


Coudre. 


-c- Cousant. 


-* Cousu. 


-F- 


Je couds, 
nous cousons, 


tu couds, 
vous cousez, 


il coud, 
ils cousent. 


-H- 


Je cousais, 
nous cousions, 


tu cousais, 
vous cousiez, 


il cousait, 
ils cousaient. 


-J- 


Je cousis, 
nous cousimes, 


tu cousis, 
vous cousites, 


il cousit, 
ils cousirent. 


-L- 


Je coudrai, 
nous coudrons, 


tu coudras, 
vous coudrez, 


il coudra, 
ils coudront. 


-N- 


Je coudrais, 
nous coudrions, 


tu coudrais, 
vous coudrie2, 


il coudrait, 
ils coudraient. 


-P- 


cousons, 


couds, 
cousez, 


qu'il couse, 
qu'ils cousent. 


-a- 


Que je couse, 
que nous cousions, 


que tu cousep 
que vous cousiez, 


qu'il couse, 
qu'ils cousent. 


-0- 


Que je cousisse, 
que nous cousissions 


que tu cousisses, 
que vous cousissiez, 


qu'il cousit, 
qu'ils cousissent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have* 
Conjugate after the same manner— 

De coudre, to rip Re coudre, to sew again. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

Croire to believe. 



145 



«>A>- Croire. 



►f- Je crois, 

nous croyons, 

-H- Je croyais, 
nous croyions, 

-j- Je cms, 

nous crumes, 

»L- Je croirai, 
nous croirons, 

-N- Je croirais, 
nous croirions, 

croyons, 

-Q- Que je croie, 

que nous croyions, 

-s- Que je crusse, 

que nous crussions, 



-t> Croyant. 

tu crois, 
vous croyez, 

tu croyais, 
vous croyiez, 

tu crus, 
vous crutes, 

tu croiras, 
vous croirez, 

tu croirais, 
vous croiriez, 



-E- Cru. 

il croit, 
ils croient. 

il croyait, 
ils croyaient. 

il crut, 
ils crurent. 

il croira, 
ils croiront. 

il croirail, 
ils croiraient. 



crois, qu'il croie, 

croyez, qu'ils croient. 

que tu croies, qu'il croie, 

que vous croyiez, qu'ils croient 

que tu crusses, qu'il crut, 

que vous crussiez, qu'ils crussent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have 
Accroire, to make one believe, to impose upon one, 

Is only used in -a- the present of the infinitive with the verb Faire, 
which serves as an auxiliary. 



-a- Croitre. 

*f- Je crois, 

nous croissons, 

-H- Je croissais, 
nous croissions, 

-j- Je crus, 

nous crumes, 

-L- Je croitrai, 
nous croitrons, 

-N- Je croitrais, 
nous croitrions, 

-?- 

croissons, 

-a- Que je croisse, 
que nous croissions, 

•s- Que je crusse, 
que nous crussions, 



Croitre to grow. 

-c- Croissant. -e- Cru. 



tu crois, 
vous croissez, 


il croit, 

ils croissent. 


tu croissais, 
vous croissiez, 


il croissait, 
ils croissaient. 


tu cnis, 
vous crutes, 


il crut, 
ils crurent. 


tu croitras, 
vous croitrez, 


il croitra, 
ils croitront. 


tu croitrais, 
vous croitriez, 


il crottrait, 
ils croitraient. 


crois, 
croissez, 


qu'il croisse, 
qu'ils croissent- 


que tu croisses, 
que vous croissiez* 


qu'il croisse, 
qu'ils croissent. 


que tu crusses, 
que vous crussiez, 


qu'il crut, 
qu'ils crussent. 



146 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 

The compound tenses are conjugated sometimes, with Avoim, 
sometimes with Etre ; with Avoir, when it expresses the action of 
growing, and with Etre, when it denotes the state in which one is. 

Conjugate after the same manner — 

Ac croitre, to increase. De croitre, to decrease. 



Dire 



to say 



-a- Dire. 


-c- Disant. 


-E- Dit. 


-F- Je dis, 

nous disons, 


tu dis, 
vous dites, 


ildit, 

ils disent. 


-B- je disais, 
nous disions, 


tu disais, 
vous disiez, 


il disait, 
ils disaieni. 


j- Je dis, 

nous dimes, 


tu dis, 
vous dites, 


il dit, 
ils dirent. 


-L- Je dirai, 
nous dirons, 


tu diras, 
vous direz, 


il dira, 
ils diront. 


-N- Je dirais, 
nous dirions, 


tu dirais, 
vous diriez, 


il dirait, 

ils diraient 


disons, 


dis, 
dites, 


qu'il dise, 
qu'ils disent. 


-u- Que je dise, 

que nous disions, 


que tu dises, 
que vous disiez, 


qu'il dise, 
qu'ils disent. 


-s- Que je disse, 

que nous dissions, 


que tu disses, 
que vous dissiez, 


qu'il dit, 
qu'ils dissent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner, Re dire, to say again. 
The following verbs — 



Contre dire, 
De dire, 
Inter dire, 
Mau dire, 



to contradict, 
to disown, 
to interdict, 
to curse. 



Me dire, 
Pre dire, 
Se de dire, 



to slander, 
to foretell, 
to recant. 



are also conjugated like Dire, except in the second person plural of -f- 
the indicative present, and of -p- the imperative, in which they make 



Contre disez 
De disez. 
Inter disez. 



Mau dissez. Me disez* 
Pre disez. 
De disez. 



Mau dire, takes two s's in -c-, maudissant ; in the three persons 
plural of -F-, nous maudissons, vous maudissez, ils maudissent ; in all the 
persons of -H-, je maudissais, &C.J in the third person singular, and in 
the thiee persons plural, of -r-, qu'il maudisse, que nous maudissons &c; 
and also in the three persons plural, of -q-, que nous maudissions, &~c; iu 
Us other pcinons and tenser it is conjugated like Dire 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION, 

Eclore to hatch, to blow, to open. 



-a- Eel ore. 


(none) 


-E- Eclos. 


-F- 11 eclot, 




lis dclosent. 


-H- 


(none) 




-J- 


(none) 




-L- 11 £clora, 




ils dcloront. 


-N- 11 dclorait, 




ils £cloraient. 


-p- 


(none) 




-<i- Qu'il dclose, 




qu'ils ^closent. 



147 



(none) 
The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have 



Ecrire 



to write. 



-a- Ecr ire. 


-c- Ecr ivani 


-E- lilcr if. 


-F- J'dcr is, 

nous 6crivons, 


tu 6cr 27, 
vous £cr ives^ 


il 6cr it, 
ils £cr ivent. 


-H- J'dcr ivais, 
nous 6cr ivions, 


tu dcr iuai», 
vous £cr ivies, 


il £cr ivaif, 
ils ecr ivaient. 


-j- J'dcr ivis, 

nous 6cr ivimes 


tu £cr ivis, 
vous £cr iuz/e*, 


il £cr iVif, 
ils £cr ivirent. 


-L- J'£cr irai, 
nous ecr irons, 


tu 6cr iras, 
vous dcr ires, 


il £cr ira. 
ils ecr iront. 


-N- J'£cr irais, 
nous 6cr irions, 


tu dcr iraw, 
vous dcr iriez, 


il dcr iraif, 
ils e'er iraitnt. 


-p- 

£cr ivons, 


ivtis, 
dcr ives, 


qu'il derive, 
qu'ils £cr ivenf , 


-a- Que j'£cr ii?e, 

que nous 6cr ivions, 


que tu 6cr ives, 
que vous 6cr ivies, 


qu'il derive, 
qu'ils e'er ivent. 



-s- Que j'£cr ivisse, que tu £cr ivisses, qu'il £cr ivit, 

que nous dcr ivissions, que vous £cr ivissiez, qu'ils 6cr ivissent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, /o have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 

Oirconscr ire, to circumscribe, 

Deer ire, to describe. 

Inscr ire, to inscribe. 

Prescr ire, to prescribe. 



Proscr ire, to proscribe. 
Recr ire, to write again 
Souscrire, to subscribe. 
Transcr ire, to transcribe 



Etre to be. 

Sec its conjugation, page 24. 



148 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



Faire 



to make, to do, to cause. 



-a- Faire. 


-c- Fesant. 


-E- Fait. 


-F- Je fais, 

nous fesons, 


tu fais, 
vous faites, 


il fait, 
ils font. 


-H- Je fesais, 
nous fesions, 


tu fesais, 
yous fesiez, 


il fesait, 
ils fesaient. 


-j- Je fis, 

nous fimes, 


tu fis, 
vous f ites, 


ilfit, 
ils firent 


-L- Je ferai, 
nous ferons, 


tu feras, 
yous ferez, 


il fera, 
ils feront. 


-N- Je ferais, 
nous ferions, 


tu ferais, 
vous feriez, 


il ferait, 
ils feraient 


-p- 

fesons, 


fais, 
faites, 


qu'il fasse, 
qu'ils fassent. 


-0,- Que je fasse, 

que nous fassions, 


que tu fasses, 
que vous fassiez, 


qu'il fasse, 

qu'ils fasseni. 


-s Que je fisse, 

que nous fissions, 


que tu £sses, 
que vous fissiez, 


qu'il fit, 
qu'ils fissent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 



Contre faire, to counterfeit, 

[to mimic. 
De faire, to undo. 
Rede faire, to undo again. 

Observe, that in the spelling of this verb, 1 have adopted the 
orthography of most modern writers. 



Re faire, to do again. 
Satis faire, to satisfy. 
Sur faire, to ask to much. 



Frire 



to fry. 



-a - Frire. 
-F- Je fris, 

-L- Je frirai, 
nous frirons, 

-N- Je frirais, 
nous fririons, 



(none) 

tu fris, 

tu friras, 
vous frirez, 

tu frirais, 
vous fririez, 

fris. 



-E- Frit 
il frit. 

il frira, 
ils friront. 

il frirait, 
ils friraient. 



This verb, (defective) is only used in the above few persons and 
tenses, and in all the compound tenses, which are formed with Avoir. 

To supply the persons and tenses which are wanting, we use 
the different tenses of Faire, to make, with the infinitive present of 
Frirjb ; as jious fesons frire, vous faites frire, Us font frire. &c. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



149 



JOINDRE 



to join. 



-a- Joi ndre. 



Joi gnant. 



Joint. 



-F- Je joi ns, 

nous joi gnons, 




tu joi rw, 
vous joi gne*, 


il joi nU 
ils joi gnent. 


-H- Je joi gnats, 
nous joi gnions, 




tu joi gnaw, 
vous joi gnus. 


il joi gnait, 
ils joi gnaient. 


-j- Je joi gnis, 

nous joi gnimeS) 




tu joi gnw, 
vous joi gnites, 


il joi gnit, 
ils joi gninnt. 


-L- Je joi ndrai) 
nous joi ndrons. 




tu joi ndras, 
vous joi naVes, 


il joi ndra, 
ils joi ndront. 


-N- Je joi ndrais, 
nous joi ndrionsy 




tu joi ndrais, 
vous joi ndYies, 


il joi ndraiU 
ils joi ndraiem 


-p- 

joi gnons, 




joins, 
joi gnes, 


qu'il joi gne, 
qu'ils joi gnent. 


-a- Que je joi gne, 
que nous joi gnions, 




que tu joi gnes, 
que vous joi gniez, 


qu'il joi gnc, 
qu'ils joi gnent. 


-s- Que je joi gnme, 
que nous joi gnissions, 


que tu joi gnisses, 
que vous joigntmesr, 


qu'il joi gnz/, 
qu'ils joi gnissent, 


Compound Tenses i 
Conjugate after the 
the infinitive ends 

f aindre as 

in < eindre as 

(^ oindre as 


ire conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
same manner — all verbs, whose present 

C rai ndre, to fear. 
Pei ndre, to paint. 
Poi ndre, to dawn. 



also. 



Astrei ndre, to subject, to com- 
Ipel 
Attei ndre, to reach, to overtake. 
Cei ndre, to gird. 
Contrai ndre, to constrain, to 
[force. 
Enfrei ndre, to infringe. 



Etei ndre, to put out, to extin- 
[jguisfc 

Fei ndre, to feign, to pretend. 
Plai ndre, to pity. 
Restrei ndre, to restrain- 
Tei ndre, to dye. 





Lire 


to read. 




-a- Lire. 


•o- 


Lisant. 


-B- 


La. 


-F- Je lis, 

nous lisons, 




tu lis, 
vous lisez, 




illit, 
ils lisent 


-H- Je lisais, 
nous lisions, 




tu lisais, 
vous lisiez, 




il lisait, 
ils lisaient 


-j- Je lus, 
nous lumea, 




tu lus, 
vous lutes, 




illut, 
ils lurent. 



150 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



-L- Je lirai, 
nous lirons, 


tu liras, 
vous lirez, 


il lira, 
ils liront. 


-N- Je lirais, 
nous lirions, 


tu lirais, 
vous linez, 


il lirait, 
ils liraient. 


lisons, 


lis, 
lisez, 


qu'il lise, 

quiJs lisent. 


•a- Que je lise, 

que nous lisions, 


que tu lises, 
que vous lisiez, 


qu'il lise, 
qu'ils lisent. 


-s- Que je lusse, 

que nous lussions, 


que tu lusses, 
que vous lussiez, 


qu'il lut, 
qu'ils lussent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 
Re lire, to read again. j £ lire, to elect 





Mettre to 


put. 




-A- 


Mettre. 


-c- 


Mettant. 


-E- 


Mis. 


-P- 


Je mets, 
nous mettons, 




tu mets, 
vous mettez, 




il met, 

ils mettent, 


-H- 


Je mettais, 
nous mettions, 




tu mettais, 
vous mettiez, 




il mettait, 
ils mettaient. 


-J- 


Je mis, 
nous mimes, 




tu mis, 
vous mites, 




il mit, 
ils mirent. 


-L~ 


Je mettrai, 
nous mettrons, 




tu mettras, 
vous mettrez, 




il mettra, 
ils mettront. 


-.V- 


Je mettrais, 
nous mettrions, 




tu mettrais, 
vous mettriez, 




il mettrait, 
ils mettraient 


-P- 


mettons, 




mets, 
mettez, 




qu'il mette, 
qu'ils mettent. 


-Q- 


Que je mette, 
que nous mettions, 




que tu mettes, 
que vous mettiez, 




qu'il mette, 
qu'ils mettent 


-B- 


Que je misse, 
que nous missions, 




que tu misses, 
que vous missicz, 




qu'il mit, 
qu'ils missent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 



Ad nettre, to admit. 
Com mettre, w commit. 
Compro mettre, to compromise, 
De mettre, to disjoint, to put 
[out 
O mettre, to omit. 
Per mettre, to permit. 



Pro mettre, to promise. 
Re mettre, to put again, to set 
[again, to replace. 
Sou mettre, to submit. 
Trans mettre, to transmit. 
Se de mettre, to resign. 
S'entre mettre, to interpose. 



The ttf o last have their compound tenses conjugated with Etrh 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



151 



-a- Moudre. 

-p- Je mouds, 
nous moulons, 

-H- Je moulais, 
nous raoulions, 

-J- Je moulus, 

nous moulGmes, 

-L- Je moudrai, 
nous nioudrons, 

-**• Je raoudrais, 
nous moudrions, 

-p- 

raoulons, 

-a- Que je moule, 

que nous moulions, 



Moudre 

-c- Moulant. 

tu mouds, 
vous raoulez, 



to grind. 

-E- Moulu. 



tu moulais, 
vous moulioz, 

tu moulus, 
vous moulutes, 

tu moudras, 
vous moudrez, 

tu moudrais, 
vous moudriez, 

mouds, 
moulez, 

que tu moules, 
quo vous mouliez, 



il moud, 
ils moulenU 

il moulait, 
ils mouiaient. 

il moulut, 
ils moulurent. 

il moudra, 
ils moudront. 

il moudrait, 
ils moudraient. 

qu'il moule, 
qu'ils moulent. 

qu'il moule, 
qu'ils moulent. 



-s- Que je moulusse, que tu moulusscs, qu'il moulut, 

que nous raoulussions, que vous moulussiez, qu'ils moulussent 

The Compound Tenses arc conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugated after the same manner — 

Re moudre, to grind again. \ t, moudre, to grind, to whet 





Naitre to be borru 


■A- 


Naitre. -c- 


NaissanU -b- 


Ne. 


F- 


Je nais, 


tu nais, 


il natt, 




nous naissons, 


vous naissez, 


ils naissent. 


H- 


Je naissais, 


tu naissais, 


il naissait, 




nous naissions, 


vous naissioz, 


ils naissaient. 


J- 


Je naquis, 


tu naquis, 


il naquit, 




nous naqutmes, 


vous naquitcs, 


ils naquiront. 


L- 


Je naitrai, 


tu naitras, 


il naitra, 




nous naitrons, 


vous naitrcz, 


ils naUront. 


N- 


Je naitrais, 


tu naitrais, 


il naitrait, 




nous naitrions, 


vous naitriez, 


ils naitraient. 


■P- 




nais, 


qu'il naisse, 




naissons, 


naissez, 


qu'ils naissent. 


Q- 


Que je naisse, 


que tu naisse, 


qu'il naisso, 




que nous naissions, 


que vous naissiez, 


qu'ils naissent 


S- 


Que je naquisse, 


que tu naquisse, 


quU naquit, 




que nous naquisBions, 


que vous naquisfMoz, 
? P 


qiTil? nnquigfcfcnt 



152 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 

The Compound tenses are conjugated with Etre, to be. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 

Re naitre, to revive. 





PaItre to graze. 




-a- Paitre. 




-o PaissanL -k 


-Pu. 


-F- Je pais, 

nous paissons, 




tu pais, 

to us paissez, 


il patt, 

ils paissent. 


•h- Je paissais, 
nous paissions, 




tu paissais, 
vous paissiez, 


il paissait, 
ils paissaient. 


-j- 


(none) 




-L- Je paitrai, 
nous paitrons, 




tu paitras, 
vous paitrez, 


il paitra, 
ils paitront. 


-N- Je paitrais, 
nous paitrions, 




tu paitrais, 
vous paitriez, 


il paitrait, 
ils paitraient. 


paissons, 




pais, 
paissez, 


qu'il paisse, 
qu'ils paissent. 


-a- Que je paisse, 

que nous paissions, 


que tu paisses, 
que vous paissiez, 


qu'il paisse, 
qu'ils paissent* 



-s- (none) 

This verb is very little used ; it has no compound tenses. 
Conjugate after the same manner— 

Re paitre, to feed. Se re paitre, to feed one's self. 

These last two verbs, have a preterit definite, and an imperfect 
of the subjunctive. 



-j- Je repus, 

nous repumes, 

• s- Que je repusse, 

que nous repussions, 



tu repus, 
vous reputes, 



il reput, 
ils repurent. 



que tu repusses, qu'il reput, 

que vous repussiez, qu'ils repussent. 

The compound tenses of Repaitre, are conjugated with Avoir, 
and those of Se repaitre, with Etre. 



a- Par altre. 



ParaItre 

-a- Par aissant. 



-F- Jo par ais 

nous par ausons, 

-H- Je par aissais, 
nous par aissions 



to appear. 
-£- Par u. 



tu par aw, 
vous par aissez, 

tu par aissais, 
vous par aissiez, 



il par aft, 

ils par ais sent. 

il par aissait, 
ils par aiasaient. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



153 



-j- Je par us, 

nous par times, 

-L- Je par aitraiy 
nous par altrons, 

•n- Je par aitrais, 
nous par aitrions, 

-p- 

par aissons, 

-a- Que je par aisse, 



tu par us, 
vous par utes, 

tu par aitras, 
vous par aitrez, 

tu par ait r ais, 
vous par aitriez, 

par a£$, 
par aissez, 



i\ par uA 
lis par urent. 

il par ffz/ra, 
ils par aitront. 

il par aitrait, 
ils par aitraient. 

qu'il par ame, 
qu'ils par aisstnt. 



qu'il par aisse, 
qu'ils par dissent, 



que tu par aisses, 
que nous par amissions, que vous par aissiez, 

-s- Que je par uwc, que tu par usw, 

que nous par ussions, que vous par ussiez, 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have, 

Conjugated after the same manner — 



qu'il par ut, 
qu'ils par ussent. 



Appar ait re, to appear. 
Compar attre, to appear. 
Conn (litre, to know. 
Dispar aUre, to disappear. 
Me conn aitre, to mistake, to 
[forget, to neglect. 
The compound tenses of the last verb, are conjugated with Eras 



Reconnafrre, to recognize* to 

[to know again. 

Repar aitre, to appear again- 

Se meconn aUre, to forget one>h 

[self. 



-a- PI aire. 

-F- Je pi ais, 

nous pi aisons, 

-H- Je pi aisais, 
nous pi aisions, 

-j- Je pliw, 

nous pi titties, 

-L- Je pi airai, 
nous pi airons, 

-N- Je pi airais % 
nous pi airions, 

-p- 

pl aisons, 

-a- Que je pi aise, 

que nous pi anions, 

-8- Que je pi usse, 

que nous pi ussions, 



Plaire to please. 

-o PI aisant. -e- PI u. 



tu pi ais, 
vous pi aisez, 

lu pi aisais, 
vous pi aisitz, 

tu pi us, 
vous pi tiles, 

tu pi airas, 
vous pi airez, 

tu pi airais* 
vous pi curies, 

pi ais, 
pi aise2, 

que tu pi aiscJ, 
que vous pi aisies, 



il pi ait, 
ils pi aiscnt. 

il pi aisait, 
iis pi aisaient. 

il pi w/, 

ils pi wren/. 

il pi cfiV«, 
ils pi airout. 

il pi air ait, 
ils pi airaient. 

qu'il pi <me, 
qu'ils pi axstnt. 

qu'il pi aise, 
qurls ul aisant. 

qu'il pi »/, 

qu'ils pi ussent. 



que tu pi 7mes, 
que vous pi ussiez, 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, 10 have. 
Conjugated after the same manner— 



154 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPER&ONAL VERBS 

Compl aire, to humour, to pleaseASzT aire, to forbear talking, to 
Depl aire, to displease. [be silent, to hold one's tangue. 

T aire, to conceal, to keep secret] 

The compound tenses of St Taire, are conjugated with Etre,£o ht, 





POINDRE 


to shoot forth, 


to dawn. 


A.* 


Poindre. 


-F- 11 point. 


-l~ 11 poindra. 




Are the only tenses and persons used. 






• 
Prendre to take. 


A- 


Prendre, -o« 


Prenant. -b- 


Pris. 


-5 1 - 


Je prends, 
nous prenons, 


tu prends, 
vous prenez, 


il prend, 
ils prennenC 


-H 


■ Je prenais, 
nous prenions, 


tu prenais, 
vous preniez, 


il prenait, 
ils prenaient. 


-J- 


Je pris, 
nous primes, 


tu pris, 
vous prites, 


il prit, 
ils prirent. 


-L- 


Je prendrai, 
nous prendrons, 


tu prendras, 
vous prendrez* 


il prendra, 
Us prendronL 


-N- 


Je prendrais, 
nous prendrions, 


tu prendrais, 
vous prendriez, 


il prendrait, 
ils prendraienfc* 


-P- 


prenons, 


prends, 
prenez, 


qti'il prenne, 
qu'ils prennenU 


-a- 


Que je prenne, 
que nous prenions, 


que tu prcnnes, 
que vous preniez, 


qu'il prenne, 
qu'ils prennenL 


-s- 


Que je prissc, 
que nous prissions, 


que tu prisse, 
que vous prissiez, 


qu'il prit, 
qu'ils prissent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 

Rap prendre, to learn again. 
Re prendre, to take again, to* 

[resume. 
Sur prendre, to surprise, to 

[deceive. 
Se me prendre, to mistake. 
■S'e prendre, to be smitten. 



Ap prendre, to learn. 
Com prendre, to comprehend, 
[to understand. 
De prendre, to loosen, to dis- 
[engage. 
Desap prendre, to unlearn. 
Entre prendre, to undertake. 



The compound tenses of Se nitprcndre, and S'eprendre, are con- 
jugated with Etre, to be ; S'eprendre, is used only in -e- the participle 
past, and in all the compound tenses. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



155 



Reduire 



to reduce. 



-a- R£dui re. 

-F- Je r£dui s, 

nous r£dui sons, 

-H- Je r^dui sals, 
nous redui sions, 

-j- Je r£dui sis, 

nous redui simes, 

-L- Je re'dui rai, 
nous redui rons, 

-N- Je re'dui raw, 
nous redui rions, 



r 6dm sons, 

Que je redui se, 
que nous redui sions, 



-c- Re'dui sant. 



tu re'dui s, 
vous re'dui ses, 

tu re'dui sais, 
vous redui $ies, 

tu re'dui sis, 
vous re'dui sites, 

tu r£dui raj, 
vous redui res, 

tu r£dui raw, 
vous re'dui riez, 

re'dui «, 
r£dui ses, 

que tu r£dui ses, 
que vous redui szes, 



-E- R^duW. 

il r^dui t, 
ils redui sen** 

il redui sail, 
ils redui saient. 

il redui sit, 
ils redui tirenl 

il re'dui ra, 
ils redui rem*. 

il re'dui rait, 
ils redui raient. 

qu'il r^dui^c, 
qu'ils reduisen* 

qu'il redui se, 
qu'ils redui sent. 



Que je re'dui sme, que tu re'dui sisses, qu'il re'dui sit, 

que nous redui sissions, que vous redui sissies, qii'ils redui sisseni 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to /uzt?£. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 



Condui re, to conduct, to lead. 

Construi re, to construct. 

Cui re, to bake. 

Dedui re, to deduct, to take from. 

Detrui re, to destroy. 

Econdui re, to discard in a po- 
lite manner. 

Endui re, to plaster. 

Entre-lui re, to shine a little, to 
\_glow a little. 

Indui re, to induce. 

Instrui re, to instruct. 

Introdui re, to introduce. 



Lui re, to shine, to glow 
Nui re, /o /mr/. 
Produi re, to produce. 
Recondui re, to reconduct, to 
[lead back. 
Reconstrui re, to construct j 
[again. 
Recui re, £o bake again. 
Relui re, /o shine, to glow. 
Rendui re, to plaster again. 
Reprodui re, to reproduce. 
Sddui re, to seduce. 
Tradui re, to translate. 



Resoudre 



to dissolve, to resolve. 



-A- R£ soudre. 

-F- Je re' sous, 

nous r6 solvons, 

-H- Je r£ solvais, 
nous re' solvions. 



-o- R£ sohanL 

tu r£ sous, 
vous re sulvez, 

tu re* solvais, 
vo\is re" soiviez, 
2 p 2 



e- R.e soiu or resoius. 

il re' sout, 
ils re solvent. 

il re' sol v ait, 
ils re" solvaieut. 



156 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



tu t6 solus, 
vous r£ soliltes, 

tu r£ soudras, 
vous r£ soudrez, 

tu re soudrais, 
vous re soudriez, 

re* sous, 
re* solvez, 

que tu re solve, 
que vous re* solviez, 



il re" solut, 
ils r6 solurent. 

il re soudra, 

ils re soudront. 

il re* soudrait, 
ils r£ soudraient. 

qu'il re" solve, 
qu'ils re* solvent. 

qu'il re" solve, 
qu'ils re solvent. 



-j- Je ie* solus, 

nous re solumes, 

-L- Je r6 soudrai, 
nous re* soudrons, 

-N- Je re* soudrais, 
nous re* soudrions, 

-p- 

t6 solvons, 

-Q- Que je re" solve, 
que nous re solvions, 

-s- Que je re* solusse, que tu re* solusses, qu'il re solut, 

que nous re* solussions, que vous re solussiez, qu'ils re solussent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 

The above verb has two -e- participles past. Resolu, is used 
when Resoudre, is employed to express, to resolve; and Resous, is used 
when employed to express, to dissolve. 

Conjugate after the same manner — 
Se re soudre, to be dissolved, to melt. 

Compound tenses with Etre, to be. 

Ab soudre, to absolve, | Dis soudre, to dissolve. 

These two last verbs, have no -j- preterit definite, nor -s- im- 
perfect of the subjunctive. 

Their compound tenses are conjugated with the simple tenses 
of Avoir, to have; to which is added the -e- participle past, Absous. 



-a- Rire. 



Rire to laugh. 

-o Riant. -e- Ri. 



-F- Je ris, 
nous rions, 


tu ris, 
vous riez, 


il rit, 
ils rient 


-ii- Je riais, 
nous riions, 


tu riais, 
vous riiez, 


il riait, 
ils riaient. 


-J- Jeris, 

nous rimes, 


tu ris, 
vous rites, 


il rit, 
ils rirent, 


-L- Je rirai, 
nous rirons, 


tu riras, 
vous riroz, 


il rira, 
ils riront. 


-N- Je rirais, 
nous ririons, 


tu rirais, 
vous ririoz, 


il rirait, 
ils riraiont. 


p- 

rlons, 


ris, 
riez, 


qu'il rie, 
qu'ils riont. 


-Q- Que je rie, 
qne nous riions, 


quo tu ries, 
quo vous riiez, 


qu'il rie, 
qu'ils rient 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



157 



-s- Que je risse, que tu risses, qu'il rit, 

que nous rissions, que vous rissiez, qu'ils rissent. 

Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 

Sou rire, to smile. Se rire de, to laugh at. 

Tho compound tenses of Se rire de y are conjugated with Etrs. 



Rompre 



to break. 



-A- 


• Rompre. 


Rompant. -e- 


Rompu. 


-F- 


Je romps, 
nous rompons, 


tu romps, 
vous rompez, 


il rompt, 
ils rompent. 


-H- 


Je rompais, 
nous rompions, 


tu rompais, 
vous rompiez, 


il rompait, 
ils rompaient. 


J- 


Je romois, 
nous rompimes, 


tu rompis, 
vous rompites, 


il rompit, 
ils rompirent. 


-L- 


Je romprai, 
nous romprons, 


tu rompras, 
vous romprez, 


il rompra, 
ils rompront. 


-N- 


Je romprais, 
nous romprions, 


tu romprais, 
vous rompriez, 


il romprait, 
ils rompraient. 


-P- 


rompons, 


romps, 
rompez, 


qu'il rompe, 
qu'ils rompent. 


-a- 


Que je rompe, 
que nous rompions, 


que tu rompes, 
que vous rompiez, 


qu'il rompe, 
qu'ils rompent 


-s- 


Que je rompisse, 
que nous rompissions, 


que tu rompisses, 
que vous rompissiez, 


qu'il rompit, 
qu'ils rompissent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 

Cor rompre, to corrupt. Inter rompre, to interrupt 



-a- Suivre. 

-F- Je suis, 

nous suivons, 

-H- Je suivais, 
nous suivions, 

3- Je suivis, 

nous suivtmefl, 



Suivre 

-c- SuivanL 

tu suis, 
vous suivez, 

tu suivais, 
vous suiviez, 



to follow. 



tu suivis, 
vous suivites, 



-E- Suivi. 

il suit, 

ils suivent. 

il suivait, 
ils suivaient. 

il suivit, 

ils suivirent. 



158 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPEB60NAL VERBS 



l- Je suivrai, 
nous suivrons, 


tu suivras, 
vous suivrez, 


il suivra, 
ils suivront. 


-N- Je suivrais, 
nous suivrions, 


tu suivrais, 
vous suivriez, 


il suivrait, 
ils suivraient. 


-p- 

suivons, 


suis, 
suivez, 


qu'il suive, 
qu'ils suivent. 


-a- Que je suive, 

que nous suivions, 


que tu suives, 
que vous suiviez, 


qu'il suive, 
qu'ils suivent. 


-e- Que je suivisse, 

que nous suivissions, 


que tu suivisses, 
que vous suivissiez, 


qu'il suivit, 
qu'ils suivissent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have* 
Conjugate after the same manner — 
Pour suivre, to pursue, to prose- I S'en suivre, to follow, to 

[cute. I [result. 

This last verb is only used in the third person singular of 
every tense. 



-a- Traire. 

-p- Je trais, 

nous trayons, 

-H- Je trayais, 
nous trayions, 

-J- 

-Lr Je trairai, 
nous trairons, 

n- Je trairais, 
nous trairions, 



Traire 

-c- Trayant. 

tu trais, 
vous trayez, 

tu trayais, 
vous trayiez, 



to milk. 



(none) 



tu Irairas, 
vous trairez, 

tu trairais, 
vous trairiez, 



-E- Trait. 

il trait, 
ils traient. 

il trayait, 
ils trayaient. 



il traira, 
ils trairont. 

il trairait, 
ils trairaient. 



trais, qu'il traie, 

trayez, qu'ils traient. 

que tu traies, qu'il traie, 

que vous trayiez, qu'ils traient, 

-s- (none) 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 



trayons, 

-Q- Que je traie, 

que nous trayions, 



Abs traire, to abstract. 

At traire, to attract, to entice. 

Dis traire, to distract, to divert. 

Ex traire, to extract. 

Ren traire, to fine draw. } 

Re traire, to redeem an estate. 

Se xoustrairc a, is conjugated with Etre, to be 



Sous traire, to subtract, to hide, 
[to conceal, to take away. 

Se sous traire a, to avoid, to 
[escape, to withdraw one's 
[self from. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



159 



V A IXC RE 



to vanquish, to conquer 



-a- Vaiucre. 

-i- Jo vaincs. 

nous vainquons, 

-H- Jo vainquais, 
nous vainquions, 

-j- Je vainquis, 

nous vainquimes, 

-L- Je vaincrai, 
nous vaincrons, 

-N- Je vaincrais, 
nous vaincrions, 

vainquons, 



-c- Vainquant. 

tu vaincs, 
vous vainquez, 

tu vainquais, 
vous vainquiez, 

tu vainquis, 
vous vainquites, 

tu vaincras, 
vous vaincrez, 

tu vaincrais, 
vous vaincriez, 

vaincs, 
vainquoz 



-a- que je vainque, 
que nous vainquions, 



que tu vainques, 
que vous vainquiez, 



-K- Vamcu. 



il vainc, 

ils vainquent. 

il vain qu ait, 
ils vainquaierrt. 

il vainquit, 
ils vainquirent, 

il vaincra, 
ils vaincront. 

il vaincrait, 
ils vaincraient 

qu'il vainque, 
qu'ils vainquent. 

qu'il vainque, 
qu'ils vainquent. 



-s- Que je vainquisse, que tu vainquisses, qu'il vainquit, 

que nous vainquissions, que vous vainquissiez, qu'ils vainquissent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to hare. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 

Con vaincre, to convince. 



Vivre 



to live. 



-a- Vivre. 


-c- Vivant. 


-E- Ve"eu. 


-F- Je vis, 

nous vivons, 


tu vis, 
vous vivez, 


il vit, 
ils vivent. 


-H- Je vivais, 
nous vivions, 


tu vivais, 
vous viviez, 


il vivait, 
ils vivaient. 


-J- Je vdcus, 

nous v6*cumes, 


tu v£cus, 
vous v^cutes, 


il v£cut, 
ils v£curent. 


-L- Je vivrai, 


tu vivras, 


il vivra, 


nous vivrons, 


vous vivrcz, 


ils vivront. 


-N- Je vivrais, 


tu vivrais, 


il vivrait, 


nous vivrions, 


vous vivriez, 


ils vivraient. 


-p- 

vivons, 


vis, ' 
vivez, 


qu'il vive, 
qu'ils vivent. 



160 



ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS, &C. 



-a- Que je vive, 
que nous vivions, 



que tu vives, 
que vous viviez. 



qu'il vive, 
qu ? ils vivent. 



s- Que je vecusse, que tu vecusses, qu'il vecut, 

que nous vecussions, que vous vecussiez, qu'ils vecussent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have 
Conjugate after the same manner — 

Re vivre, to revive. 



Sur vivre, to 



survive. 



Alphabetical List of Verbs, that form the Compound Tenses 
with etre ; or sometimes with avoir, and sometimes with etre. 

1. There are in the French language about six hundred 
neuter verbs, which, like the active verbs, take the auxiliary 
verb avoir to have, to form their compound tenses. The only 
exceptions are the following: of which some take etre, and 
some take either itre or avoir, according to the sense in 
which the verb is to be employed. 

2. k put after some of the following verbs indicates tha 
they form their compound tenses in French, with etre to be 
although, perhaps, conjugated with avoir to have, in English 
a, i, put after some of the following verbs, indicate that they 
sometimes form their compound tenses with avoir to have, and 
sometimes with etre to be. 

3. Those verbs marked a, t, take avoir when they are 
meant to express the action, thus: 

Monsieur A... a demeure a Paris. 
Mr. A... has lived in Paris. 

4. They take itre when they are meant to express the 
state, thus : 

Monsieur A... est demeure a Paris pour ses affaires. 
Mr. A... has remained in Paris for his business. 




Aoorder, 0, £, to land. 

aecouchcr, a, e, to bring forth 

accourir, a, <?, to run to. 

accroUre, o, e, to increase. 

tiller c, to go. 



apparaitre, cr, c, to appear. 
arriver, e, to arrive, to happen 

avcnir, c, to happen, to chance 

cesser, a, £, to cease, to leave off 

changer, a, e, to change. 



ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERES, &C. 



16J 



choir, e, 
convenir, a, e *, 
eroitre, a e, 
decamper, a, e, 

deceder, e, 
dechoir, a, e, 
decroitre, a, e, 
demeurer, «, £, 
descendre, a, e, f 

devenir, e, 
disconvenir, I, 
disparaitre, a, e, 
£chapper, a, £, 
£choir, e, 

^chouer, a, e, 

eciore, I, 

embellir, a, e, 
empirer, a, e, 

entrer, a, £, t 

expirer, a, e, 
intervenir, e, 
mlsavenir, e, 
monter, a, e, f 

mourir, e, 



to fall, 
to agree, to suit, to 
to grow. [become 
to decamp, to run 

away, 
to die, to decease, 
to decay, 
to decrease, 
to remain, to stay, 
to come down, to go 

down, to descend, 
to become, 
to deny, to disown, 
to disappear, 
to escape, 
to become due, to fall 

to the lot of. 
to run aground, to 

miscarry, 
to be hatched, to blow, 

to blossom, 
to embellish* 
to make worse, 

grow worse, 
to enter, to go in, 

come in. 
to expire, 
to intervene, 
to succeed ill. 
to ascend, to go up. 

to come up. 
to die. 



to 



to 



naitre, e, 
partir, e, 
parvenir, i, 
passer, a, e, f 
perir, a, e, 
provenir, e, 

rajeunir, a, e, 
redescendre, a, 

redevenir, i, 
remonter, a, e, 



rentrer, a, i, f 

repartir, £, ** 
repasser, a, e, 

ressortir, a, i, 
resier, a, e, 
resulter, a, e, 
retomber, e, 
retourner, S, 
revenir, e, 

sortir, a, e, t 
survenir, e, 
tomber, e, 
vieillir, a e*, 
venir, e, 



to be born. 

to depart, to set off 

to attain, to reach, 

to pass. 

to perish. 

to proceed, to come 

from, 
to become young. 
,e, to come down again, 

to go down again, 
to become again. 
t to ascend again, to 

go up again, to 

come up again, 
to re-enter, to go in 

again, 
to set off again, 
to pass again, to re 

pass, 
to go out again, 
to remain, to stay, 
to result, to follow, 
to fall again. 
to return, to go back, 
to come again, to 

come back again, 
to go out. 

to befall, to happen* 
to fall. 

to become oid 
to come. 



* Convenir to agree, takes avoir to have, and convenir to suit, to be 
come, to Jit, to be expedient, to be proper, takes etre to be. 

f Several grammarians conjugate with avoir to have, the verbs which 
are marked thus t in the above list, only when they have a direct object :\ 
thus, nous avons passe le fleuve we have crossed the river. They con- 
jugate the same verbs with etre to be, when they have no direct object, 
thus : La procession est passte the procession has past. 

However, most of the grammarians use these verbs as they do any 
other marked a, e, that is, they conjugate them with avoir to have, whether 
they have a direct objectX or not, if they are meant to express an action, 
and they conjugate them with etre to be, when they are meant to express 
the state. 

** Repartir to set off again, is conjugated with etre to be, but repartir 
to reply, is conjugated with avoir to have. 



I By direct object wo understand, in French, the noun or pronoun which is governed 
in the objective case by the verb, and not by any preposition. 



162 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPEK Oi\AL VERBS. 

Alphabetical List of all the Irregular, Defective, and Uniper- 
sonal Verbs, of the four conjugations, with reference to the 
pages where they are to be found conjugated. 

However numerous the irregularities of an irregular verb 
may be, they never occur but in the simple tenses ; the com- 
pound tenses of all the verbs regular or irregular, defective or 
unipersonal, are all formed in the same manner ; that is, with 
the addition of avoir to have, or itre to be, to the participle 
past of the verb to be conjugated. 

Some verbs have the compound tenses conjugated with avoir r 
others with etre, others sometimes with avoir, sometimes with 
itre, according to the sense in which the verb is to be em- 
ployed. In the following list the letter & put after a verb in- 
dicates that the compound tenses of that verb are to be conju- 
gated in French with etre, although perhaps conjugated with 
avoir to have, in English. And the letters a, &, indicate that 
the compound tenses of that verb are to be conjugated some- 
times with itre, sometimes with avoir. Those verbs after 
which neither £ nor a, £, are put, have, of course, their com- 
pound tenses conjugated with avoir. 

A list of all the verbs, whose compound tenses are to be 
conjugated with etre, or sometimes with itre and sometimes 
with avoir, is given, page 160. 

N. B. Any verb not found in this list, is regular, and must 
be conjugated on parler if the present of the infinitive ends 
with er ; onfinir if it ends with ir ; on recevoir if it ends with 
evoir ; and on rendre if it ends with re. 

%* Some verbs, although regular, have been put in this list of irregular 

verbs, in order to call the attention of the learner to some peculiarities con- 
cerning these verbs. 

A 

Abattre . ... to pull down, to throw down, to fell . battre . . 141 

to fall down battre . . 141 

to land (see page 160) parler . . 38 

to absolve resoudre . 155 

to abstain, to refrain tenir . .132 

to abstract traire . . 158 

to bring forth (see page 1G0) . . . parler . . 38 

to run to, to hasten to (see page 160.) courir . . 126 

to make one believe croire . . 145 

to increase, to accrue, to augment (see 

page 160) croitre . . 145 

to increase croitre . . 155 

to welcome, to receive well, to receive 

kindly cueillir . . 127 

acheter . ... to buy, to purchase (see page 49, art, 

97 & 99) parler . ^8 



s' abattre, e , 
aborder, a, e 
absoudre. . 
s'abstenir, e 
abstraire . 
accouche., a, e 
accourir, a, 6 
accroire . . 
accroitre, a, 6 



s'accroitre, 6 
accueillir 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 163 



achever . 

acquerir . 
adjoindre 

admettre . 
aliener . 
alleguer . 
aller, e . 
s'en aller, e 
amener . 
amonceler 
apparaitre, a, 

appartenir 
appeler . 
apprendre 
appuyer . 
arriver, e 

ar river, 6 
assaillir . 
asseoir . 

assoir . . 
s'asseoir, e 
s'assoir, e 
aslreindre, 



s'astreindre, e 

atteindre 

atteler 

attraire 

avancer 

aveindre 

avenir, e 

avoir . 
y avoir 



battre . . 
ee battre, e 
blasphemer 
boire . 
bouillir 
bourreler 
bra ire 
bminer 
bruire 



cacheter 
ceindre 
celer . 
eelebrer 



tojlnish, to accomplish (see page 49, 

art. 97 & 99) parlor . 

to acquire acquerir 

to associate, to adjoin, to give an as- 
sistant, to give a colleague . . . joindre 

to admit, to allow of mettre . 

to alienate (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) parler . 

to allege (see page 49, art. 100) . . parler . 

to go aller 

to go away s'en aller 

to bring (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) . parler . 

to heap (see page 48, art. 91) . . . parler . 
to appear, to make one's appearance 

(see page 160) ....... paraitre 

to belong to, to become well .... tenir . 

to call (see page 48, art. 91) . . . parler . 

to learn, to hear of prendre 

to support (see page 50, art. 103) . parler . 
to happen, to chance, to fall out, to 

come to pass (see page 160) . . . neiger . 

to arrive (see page 160) . . . . . parler . 

to assault assaillir 

to set something or somebody down, to 

lay some thing or some body down s'asseoir 

idem s'assoir 

to sit down (one's self} s'asseoir 

to sit down (one's self) s'assoir 

to subject, to oblige, to compel, to force, 

to constrain joindre 

to confine one's self joindre 

to overtake, to reach, to catch . . . joindre 

to put to (see page 48, art. 91) . . parler . 

to allure, to attract, to entice . . . traire . 

to advance (see page 50, art. 101) . parler . 

to take out, to fetch out joindre 

to happen, to chance, to come to pass, 

to fall out (see page 160) . . . tenir . 

to have avoir . 

there to be y avoir 

B 

to beai, *o strike battre . 

to fight, to combat battre . 

to blaspheme (see page 49, art. 100) . parler . 

to drink boire . 

to boil bouillir 

to torment (see page 48, art. 93) . . parler . 

to bray traire . 

to drizzle neiger . 

to roar, to make a great noise to 

rustle, to rattle rcduire 

C 

to seal (see page 49, art. 95) . . . parler . 

to gird, to encompass joindre 

to conceal (see page 49. art. 100) . . parler 

to celebrate (see pa^e 49, art. 100) . parlor 
2 <4 



38 
124 

149 

150 

38 

38 

122 

112 

38 

38 

152 
132 

38 
154 

38 

123 

38 

125 

134 
135 
134 
135 

149 
149 
149 

38 
158 

38 
149 

132 
10 
20 



141 
141 

38 
142 
125 

38 
158 
123 

135 



38 

149 

38 

38 



16 A IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAI VERBS. 



cesser, a, e . 

chanceler 
changer, a, s 
choir, e . . 
circonscrire . 
circonvenir . 

clore . . . 
colleter . . 
combattre . 
commettre . 
comparaitre 
complaindre 
complaire . 
se complaire, e 
comprendre 

compromettre 
se compromettre, 
conclure . 
concourir 
conduire . 

confire . 

congeler . 

conjoindre 

connaitre 

conquerir 

consentir 

construire 

contenir 

se contenir, 

contraindre 

contredire 
contrefaire 

contrevenir 
convaincre 
convenir, a, 

coqueter . 
•orrompre 
coudre . 
courir 
couvrir . 
craindre . 
croire . . 
se croire, e 
croitre, a, e 

cueillir . . 
cuire . . . 

d6battre . . 
se debattre, 6 



to cease, to leave off, to discontinue, 
(see page 160) 

to stagger (see page 48, art. 91) . . 

to change (see p. 100 & 59, art. 102) 

to fall (see page 100' 

to circumscribe 

to circumvent, to deceive, to delude, to 
cozen 

to shut, to close 

to collar (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) . 

to Jight, to combat ■* 

to commit . . . ^ 

to appear, to give evidence .... 

to complain to 

to humour, to please, to comply . . 

to delight, to take delight in . . . 

to understand, to include, to compre- 
hend, to contain, to inclose . . . 

to compromise, to expose .... 

to expose one's self 

to conclude (see page 51, art. 104) . 

to concur 

to conduct, to lead, to carry, to take a 
person to a place 

to preserve, to pickle 

to congeal (see page 48, art. 93) . . 

to conjoin ..,....*.. 

to know, to be acquainted with . . 

to conquer, to vanquish 

to consent, to agree 

to construct, to build 

to contain, to hold 

to refrain 

to constrain, to force, to compel, to 
oblige 

to contradict 

to counterfeit, to imitate, to mimic, 
toforge, 

to infringe, to act contrary to . . . 

to convince, to persuade 

to suit, to Jit, to become, to agree, to be 
expedient, to beproper(see pagelGO) 

to coquet (see page 49, art. 97 & 99 . 

to corrupt 

to sew, to stitch 

to run, to hunt 

to cover, to shelter 

to fear, to be apprehensive, to be afraid 

to believe, to think 

to rely upon one's own judgment 

to grow, to increase, to augment (see 
page 160) 

to gather, to pick up, to collect . . 

to cook, to bake, to smart .... 
D 

to debate 

to struggle 



parler . 




38 


parler . , 


38 


parler . . 


38 


choir . . 


135 


eenre . , 


147 


tenir . . 


132 


clore . , 


143 


parler . , 


38 


battre . 


141 


mettre . . 


150 


paraitre , 


152 


joindre 


149 


plaire . , 


153 


plaire . . 


153 


prendre . 


154 


mettre . 


150 


mettre . . 


150 


conclure . 


14? 


eounr . 


12b 


reduire 


, 155 


confire . 


143 


parler . 


38 


joindre 


149 


paraitre 


152 


acquenr 


, 124 


sentir . 


130 


reduire 


155 


tenir . 


132 


tenir 




132 


joindre 




149 


dire. 




J 16 


faire 




148 


tenir 




132 


vaincre 


159 


tenir . 


132 


parler . 


, 38 


rompre . 
coudre . 


157 


144 


courir . 


126 


ouvnr . . 


130 


joindre . 


149 


croire . . 


145 


croire . 


145 


croitre . 


145 


cueillir . 


127 


reduire 


155 


battre . . 141 


battre . 




141 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 165 



decacheter 
decamper, a, e 
deceder, e, 
deceler . 
dechoir, e, 

declore . 
decolleter 

deconfire 

deconstruire 

decoudre 

decouvrir 

decrire . 

decroire . 

decroitre, a, 

decuire 

dedire 

se dedire, e, 

deduire 

defaillir 

defaire 

se deiaire, e 

degeler . . 

dejoindre 

dementir 

se dementir, e 

demettre 

se demettre, e 

demeurer, a, e 
demouvoir . 
departir . . 

se departir, e 
depecer . . 
depeindre . 
deplaire . . 
se deplaire, e 
depourvoir 
de prendre . 
deprevenir 
derompre . 
desapprendre 



desservir 

deteindre 
deteler . 
detenir . 
detruire . 
se detruire, 

d2vruir £ 



to unseal (see page 49, art. 95) . . parler . , 38 

to decamp, to run away (see page 160) parler . . 38 

to die (see page 160 & p. 49, art. 100) parler . , 38 

to betray, to detect (see p. 49, art. 100) parler . . 38 
to decay, to have fallen from, to have 

abated from dechoir . 136 

to unclose clore . . 143 

to uncover the neck (see page 49, art. 

97 & 99) parler . . 38 

to defeat totally . . conflre . . 143 

to take to pieces , to disunite, to analyze reduire . 155 

to rip coudre . , 144 

to discover, to uncover ouvrir . . 130 

to describe, to depict . ecrire . . 147 

to disbelieve croire . . 145 

to decrease, to become less, (p. 160) croitre . . 145 

to render syrup more liquid . . . reduire , 155 

to disown, to unsay dire . . . 146 

to recant, to retract dire . . . 146 

to deduct, to take from reduire . 155 

to fail, to faint, to swoon, to decay . faillir . . 128 

to undo, to defeat faire . . 148 

to part with, to get rid of, to rid one's 

self of faire . . 148 

to thaw (see page 48, art. 93) . . . neiger . , 123 

to disjoin joindre . 149 

to contradict, to belie, to give the lie . sentir . . 130 
to belie one's self, to contradict one's 

self sentir . . 130 

to disjoint, to put out of joint . . . mettre . . 150 
to resign, to have put out of joint one's 

wrist or ankle ....... mettre . . 150 

to dwell, to live, to inhabit (p. 160) . parler . * 38 

to cause one to desist ...... mouvoir . 136 

to distribute, to divide, to share, to 

allot sentir . . 130 

to desist, to give up, to swerve . , . sentir . . 130 

to carve (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) . parler . . 38 

to describe joindre . 149 

to displease plaire . . 153 

to be displeased with plaire . . 153 

to deprive, to leave destitute . . . pourvoir . 137 

to loosen, to disengage prendre . 154 

to unprepossess tenir . . 132 

to break down rompre . 157 

to unlearn prendre . 154 

to descend, to come down, to go down 

(see page 160) vendre . . 78 

to clear a table, to take away, to do an 

ill office to servir . . 131 

to discolour joindre . 149 

to unteam, to unyoke (p. 48, art. 91) parler . . 38 

to detain, to keep icnir . . 132 

to destroy, to annihilate reduire . 155 

to kill ont's self, to decay, to fall to 

ruin rt'duire 155 

to become to become of (see page 160) tenir . 13^ 



166 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



devetir .... to strip, to undress vetir . 

se devetir, e . . to divest one's self, to leave off part 

of one's clothes vetir . 

dire . ... to say, to tell . dire 

disconvenir, e . . to deny, to disown (see page 160) . tenir . 

discourir . . . . to discourse, to talk about .... courir . 

disjoindre . . . to disjoin . . joindre 

disparaitre, a, e . to disappear (see page 100) . . . paraitre 

dissoudre . . . to dissolve, to melt, to break up . . resoudre 

se dissoudre, e . . to dissolve, to be dissolved .... resoudre 
distraire . ... to distract, to divert, to amuse, to take 

from traire . 

dorrnir . . . . to sleep dormir . 

■E 
s'ebattre, e . . . to take one's pleasure, to make merry, 

to be merry battre . 

ebouillii . ... to boil away bouiliir 

echapper, a, e . . to escape (see page 160) parler . 

echoir, g .... to chance, to happen, to fall out, to 
fall to, to expire, to be due, to fall 

due (see page 160) echoir . 

eclairer . ... to lighten neiger . 

echouer, a, e . . to run aground, to miscarry, (see 

page 160) parler . 

eclore, e .... to come to life, to be hatched, to blos- 
som, to open, to blow (see page 160) eclore . 
econduire . . . to refuse, to discard in a polite man- 

ncr, to refuse delicately .... reduire 

eenre to write eerire . 

elire to elect, to choose lire . . 

embattre . . . to lay the tire of a wheel .... battre . 

embellir, a, e . . to embellish (see page 160) .... finir 

s'emboire, e . . to imbibe, to soak in boire . 

emettre . ... to express, to set forth mettre . 

emmener . . . to take away (see p. 49, art. 97 & 99) parler . 

emoudre . ... to whet, to sharpen, to grind knives . moudre 

emouvoir . . . to move, to stir up, to excite . . . mouvoir 

s : emoirvoir . . . to be moved, to % be concerned . . . mouvoir 

empirer, a, e . . to make worse, to grow worse (p. 160) parler . 

employer . . . to employ, (see p. 50, art. 103) . . parler . 

empreiudre . . . to imprint, to stamp joindre 

enceindre , . . to enclose, to encompass joindre 

enclovre . . . . to surround, to enclose clore . 

encourir . ... to incur . . . • courir . 

endormir . , . to cause to sleep, to lull asleep . . . dormir . 

s'endormir, e . . to fall asleep dormir . 

enduire . ... to plaster, to do over reduire 

enfriendre . . . to transgress, to infringe, to violate joindre 

s'enfuir, ^ ... to run away fuir . . 

cnjoindie . . . to enjoin joindre 

8 enquerir, e . . to inquire acqu^rir 

cntreluire . . . to shine a little reduire 

s'entre mettre, e . to interpose, to meddle mettre . ., 

cntrer, a, 6 . * . to enter, to come in, to go in (p. 160) parler 

entrcprendre . to undertake prendre 

entretenir . . to entertain, to maintain^ to keep up tenir 



133 

133 
146 
132 
126 
149 
152 
153 
155 

158 

127 



141 
125 

38 



136 
123 

38 

147 

155 
147 
149 
141 

54 
142 
150 

38 
151 
136 
136 

33 

38 
119 
149 
143 
126 
127 
127 
165 
149 
128 
149 
124 
155 
150 

38 
154 
132 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 16? 



s'entretenir, 6 
ciitrouir . 
entrevoir 
s'entrevoir, e 
entr'ouvrir 
envoyer . 
epreindre 
s'eprendre, e 
equivaloir 
esperer . 
essayer . 
cteindre . 
etinceler 
etiqueter 
etre . . 
etreindre 
exclare . 
expirer, a, e 
extraire . . 



faillir . 
faire . 
falloir . 
feindre 
ficeler 
fleurir 



forclore 
t'orfaire 
frire . 
fuir . 



gem (Ire . 
geler . . 
gesir . . 
grass oyer 
greler . . 
grcsiller . 



to discourse with 

to hear imperfectly 

to glimpse at, to have a glimpse of . 

to see each other 

to open a little ........ 

to send 

to squeeze out, to wring 

to be smitten . . , 

to be equivalent 

to hope (see page 49, art. 100) . . . 
to try (see page 50, art. 103) . . . 
to extinguish, to put out .... 
to sparkle (see page 48, art. 91) , . 
to label (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) . 

to be , . . 

to bend close, to tie close 

to exclude (see page 51, art. 104) . . 

to expire (see page 160) 

to extract 



to fail, to have like to 

to do, to make, to cause 

to be necessary (must) 

to feign, to dissemble, to pretend . . 
to tie with pack thread (p. 48, art. 91) 
to bloom, to blossom to be prosperous, 

to flourish 

to debar 

to fail, to trespass 

to fry 

to run away, to fly i to flee, to avoid, 

to shun 

G 

to whine, to moan m 

to freeze (see page 48, art. 93) . . 

to lie 

to lisp (see page 50, art. 103^ . . . 
to hail (see page 49, art. 100) . . . 
to rime 



tenir 


132 


ouir . . 


130 


voir . . 


140 


voir 


140 


ouvnr . 


130 


envoyer . 


123 


joindre 


149 


prendre 


154 


valoir . . 


139 


parler . 


38 


parler . . 


38 


joindre 


149 


parler . 


38 


parler . 


38 


etre 


24 


joindre 


149 


conclure 


. 143 


parler . 


. 38 


traire . 


i 158 


faillir . 


. 128 


faire 


. 148 


falloir . 


. 136 


joindre 


. 149 


parler . 


. 38 


neurir . 


. 128 


clore . 


. 143 


faire 


. 148 


frire 


. 148 



fuir . 



H 



nair . . . 
harceler . . 
hypothequer 

importer . 
induire . 
inquieter 
inscrire . 
s'inscrire, e 
instruire . 
interdire . 
interrompre 
intervenir, t 
introduire 



to hate , 

to torment (see page 48, art. 93) . . 
to mortgage (see page 49, art. 100) . 

I 

to matter 

to induce, to Cngage 

to make uneasy (see p. 49, art. 100) , 
to inscribe, to write down . . . . 
to enter one's name in a register , . 

to instruct, to teach 

to interdict, to forbid 

to interrupt 

to intervene (see page 160) . . . 

to introduce 

2 a 2 



128 



joindre ' . 


149 


neiger . . 


123 


gesir . 


129 


parler . . 


38 


neijjor . . . 


123 


neiger . . 


123 


hair . . 


129 


parler . 


38 


parler . 


38 


neiger . 


123 


reduire 


155 


parler . 


38 


eenre . 


147 


ecrire . 


147 


reduire 


155 


dire 


146 


rompre 


157 


tenir . 


132 


reduire 


. 155 



108 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIFERSONAL VERBS. 



jeter . . . 
se jeter, c . 
joindre . . 
se joindre, e 



lecher 
tire . 
hure . 



to throw, to cast (see page 49 ; art. 95) 
to cast one's self' (see page 49, art. 95) 

to join, to unite . . 

to unite 



to lick (see p. 49, art. 100) . 

to read 

to shine, to glitter, to sparkle 



maintenir . . 
se maintenir, 4 
malfaire . . . 
maudire . . . 
meconnaitre . 

se meconnaitre 
mecroire « . 
medire . . 
mefaire . . 
mener . . 
mentir . . 
se meprendre, 
mesavenir, e 
mesoffrir 
messeoir . . 
mettre . . 
monter, a, 6 
moudre . . 
mourir, e . 
se mourir, e 
mouvoir . . 
se mouvoir, 6 



naitre, 6 . 
negliger . 
tieiger . 
niveler . 



obtenir 
offrir . 



s'offrir, e 
oindre 
omettre . 
ou'ir . , 
ouvrir 



paitre 
se paitre . 
parfaire . 



M 

to maintain, to keep up 

to keep up 

to do mischief 

to curse 

to disown, to mistake, to neglect, to 

forget, not to know 

to forget one's self 

to disbelieve 

to slander, to speak ill of ... . 

to misdo, to do wrong 

to lead, to take to (p. 49, art. 97 & 99) 

to lie, to tell a lie 

to mistake 

to succeed ill (see page 1 60) . . . 

to underbid 

to be unbecoming . 

to put, to place 

to mount, to ascend, to go up (p. 160) 

to grind (grain) 

to die (see page 160) 

to be dying 

to move, to stir 

to move 

N 
to be born (see page 160) . . 
to neglect (see page 50, art. 102) 

to snow 

to level (see page 48, art. 91 ) . 
to hurt, to do an ill office . . 

O 

to obtain 

to offer, to propose, to present a person 

with 

to offer one's self, or itself .... 

to anoini . . . .* 

to omit 

to hear 

to open . 



parler . 


38 


parler . 


38 


joindre 


149 


joindre 


149 


parler . 


; 33 


lire . . 


149 


reduire 


155 


tenir . 


132 


tenir . 


132 


faire 


143 


dire . . 


146 


paraitre 


152 


paraitre 


152 


croire . 


145 


dire. . 


146 


faire . 


148 


parler . 


38 


sentir . 


130 


prendre 


154 


tenir . 


132 


ouvrir . 


130 


seoir . 


139 


mettre . 


150 


parler . 


38 


moudre 


151 


mourir . 


129 


mourir . 


129 


mouvoir 


136 


mouvoir 


136 


naitre . 


151 


parler . 


38 


neiger . 


123 


parler . 


38 


reduire 


155 



temr 



132 



to graze, to feed . . 
to feed upon . . . . 
to perfect, to complete 



ouvrir . 


130 


ouvrir . 


130 


joindre 


149 


mettre . 


150 


ouir 


130 


ouvrir . 


130 


paitre . 


152 


paitre . 


152 


faire 


118 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, ASD UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



169 



paraitre . 
parcourir 
partir, a, e 

parvenir, e 
passer, a, e 
pa)'er . . 
peindre . 
peler . . 
penetrer 
perir, a, e 
permettre 
plaindre . 
se plaindre, 
plaire . . 
pleuvoir . 
poindre . 
posseder . 
poursuivre 
pourvoir . 



se pourvoir, e 
pouvoir . . 

predire . . 

pre lire . . 

prendre . . 

prescrire . . 
be prescrire, e 

pressentir . 
prevaloir 

Be prevaloir, e 

prevenir . . 

pre voir . 
produire . 
se produire. 
projeter . 
promettre 
Be promettre, e 
promouvoir 
proscrire . 
provenir, 6 



qucnr 



rabattre . . 

ee rabattre, e 
racheter . . 
rajeunir, a, e 
lapiccer . , 



to appear, to seem paraitre . 152 

to run over, to go through .... coinir . . 126 
to set out, to go away, to depart (see 

page 160) . sentir . . 130 

to arrive, to attain, to reach (p. 160) tenir . . 132 

to pass (see page 160) parler . . 38 

to pay (see page 50, art. 103) . . . parler . . 38 

to paint, to describe joindre . 149 

to peal (see page 48, art. 93) . . . parler . . 38 

to penetrate (see p. 49, art. 100) . . parler . . 38 

to perish (see page 160) ..... finir . . 54 

to permit, to allow mettre . . 150 

to pity joindre . 149 

to complain joindre . 149 

to please plaire . . 153 

to rain pleuvoir . 137 

to dawn, to shoot forth, to peep . . poindre . 154 

to possess (see page 49,, art. 100) . . parler . . 38 

to pursue, to prosecute suivre . . 157 

to provide, to furnish with, to supply 

with pourvoir . 137 

to provide one's self pourvoir . 137 

to be able, to can, to be at liberty to, 

may pouvoir . 138 

to foretell, to predict ...... dire . . 146 

to read over previously lire . . . 149 

to take prendre . 154 

to prescribe* to order, to command . ecrire . . 147 
to lose by prescription ..... ecrire . . 147 
to foresee, to have a foresight of . . sentir . . 130 
to prevail, to predominate, to be pre- 
valent valoir . . 139 

to take advantage, to glory in, to 

pride in valoir . . 139 

to anticipate, to prevent, to prejudice, 

to prepossess, to forewarn . . . tenir . . 132 

to foresee pre voir . 141 

to produce, to bring forth .... reduire . 155 

to put one's self forward .... reduire . 155 

to project (see page 49, art. 95) ■ . . parler . . 38 

to promise mettre . . 150 

to hope for mettre . . 150 

to promote, to advance mouvoir . 136 

to proscribe, to banish, to outlaw . . ecrire . r 147 

to proceed from, to come from (p. 160) tenir . , 132 

a 

*o go and fetch, to send for, to come 

for acquenr , 124 

R 

to abate, to beat down again to bring 

down .......... baUre . . 141 

to turn about battre . . J 41 

to buy again (see p. 49, an. 97 & 99) parler . 38 

to become young -finir • • 51 

to piece (see page 40, art: ; IOC) . . parler . 38 



170 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNI PERSONAL VERBS* 



rappeler . 
rapprendre 
rasseoir . 

se rasseoir, 
ratteindre 
ravoir 
rebattre . 
reboire . 
rebouillir 
recacheter 
receler . 

rechoir . 
reclure . 
reconduire 
reconnaitre 



se reconnaitre, 
reconquerir . 
feconstruire 

recoudre . . 

recourir . . 

recouvrir . . 

recrire . . 
recroitre 
recueillir 
se recueillir, e 

recuire . . 



rede faire. 
redescendre, 
redevenir, e 
redire 
redonnir . 
reduire . 
se reduire, i 
refaire 
se refaire, e 
refleurir . 
refrire . 
regeler . 

regler . . 
regner . 
reintegrer 
rejoindre 
relire . . 
reluire . 
remettre . 



se remettre, 6 . 
b en remettre, 6 
re mo ad re . 



to recall (see page 48, art. 91) . . parler . 3ft 

to learn again prendre 15-1 

to set down again some body or some 

thing at his or its place .... s'asseoir 

to sit down again s'asseoir 

to catch again, to overtake again . . joindre 

to have again ravoir . 

to beat again ........ battre . 

to drink again boire . 

to boil again bouillir 

to seal again (see p. 49, art. 95) . . parler . 
to secrete, to receive stolen goods (see 

page 49, art. 100) parler . 

to fall again choir . 

to shut up conclure 

to conduct back again . . . ... reduire 

to recognize, to know again, to ac- 
knowledge, to confess, to be thank- 
ful, to reconnoiter paraitre 

to recognize one's self paraitre 

to reconquer acquerir 

to construct again, to rebuild, to build 

again reduire 

to sew again ........ coudre . 

to have recourse, to run again . . courir . 

to cover again ouvrir . 

to write again, to write anew . . . ecrire . 

to grow again . . * croitre . 

to gather, to reap cueillir 

to recollect one's self, cueillir 

to bake again, to boil again, to roast 

again, to do again reduire 

to undo again faire 

to come down again (see page 1G0) . vendre . 

to become again (see page 100) . . tenir . 

to say again, to repeat, to tell again dire 

to sleep again ........ dormir . 

to reduce reduire 

to amount to, to be reduced to . . . reduire 

to make again, to do over again . . faire 

to recover faire 

to blossom again, to flourish again . fleurir . 

to fry again frire 

to freeze again (see page 48, art. 

93) neiger . 

to regulate (see page 49, art. 100) . parler . 

to reign (see page 49, art. 100) . . parler . 

to reinstate (see page 49, art. 100) . parler . 

to join again, to rejoin joindre 

to read over again lire . . 

to glitter, to shine, to sparkle . . . reduire 

to remit, to set again, to replace, to 

deliver up, to put back, to put again, 

to recognise a person inettre . . 150 

to recollect, to recover mettre . . 150 

to refer a thing to somebody . . . mrtlrc . . 150 

io grind over again ...... moudre . 151 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AAD UKIPERSONAL VERBS. 171 



reraonter, a, e 

renaitre . . 

rendormir . 
se rendormir, < 
renduire . . 
renouveler . 
rentraire 
rentrer, a, 6 . 
renvoyer 
repaitre . . 
se repaitre, e ' 
reparaitre . 
repartir, e . 
reuartir . . 
repasser, a, e 
repeindre . 
se repentir, e 
reprendre . 

se reprendre 

reproduire . 
requerir . . 
resoudre . . 

6e resoudre, e 

ressentir . . 

se ressentir, 6 

ressortir, a, 
se ressouvenir, 
rester, a, e 
restreindrc 
resulter, a, 
retenir . 
se retenir, e 
retomber, e 
retoumer, e 
rctraire . 
revaloir . 
reveler . 
revenir, e 

revetir . 

«e revetir, 6 
eevivre . 

revoir . . 
fire . . 
se rire, e 
rompre, . 
se rompre. 
rouvnr . 



. to ascend again, to mount again (see 

f>age 160) parler . 

. to revive, to be born again, to spring 

up again, to become alive again . naitre . 

. to lull to sleep again dormir . 

. to fall asleep again dormir . 

. to plaster anew ........ reduire 

. to renew (see page 48, art 9)) . . parler . 

. to darn traire . 

. to reenter (see page 160) .... parler . 

, to send back, to return ..... envoyer 

. to feed paitre . 

. to thirst after, to delight in - . . paitre . 

, to reappear, to appear again . . . paraitre 

, to set off again (see page 161) . . sentir . 

, to reply, to answer (see page 161) . sentir . 

, to pass again, to repass (see p. 160) parler . 

, to paint again joindre 

to repent sentir . 

to retake, to take again, to correct, to 

chide, to resume prendre 

to recollect one's self, to correct one's 

self prendre 

to reproduce reduire 

to request, to beg, to require, to exact acquerir 
to resolve, to solve , to decide, to un- 
riddle resoudre 

to resolve, to be resolved, to change, 

to turn into resoudre 

to resent, to be sensible of, to feel still, 

to have a deep sense of . . . . sentir . 

to feel still, to have remains of, to 

have suffered by ...... sentir . 

to go out again (see page 160) . . sentir . 

to remember, to recollect .... tenir . 

to remain, to stay (see page 160) . . parler . 

to restrain, to confine jviindre 

to follow, to result (see page 160) . . neiger . 

to retain, to detain, to hold back . . tenir . 

to forbear, to stop tenir . 

t j fall again (see page 160) . . . parler . 

to return, to go back (see page 160) . parler . 

to redeem an estate traire . 

to return like for like, to repay . . valoir . 

to reveal, to disclose (p. 40, art. 100) . parler . 
to come back, to return, to come again 

(see page l6*0) tenir . 

to give other clothes, to clothe, to 

dress, to invest vetir . 

to put on one's clothes vetir . 

to revive vivre . 

to see again voir 

to laugh . rire . . 

to la ugh at rire . 

to break rompre 

to break . . . / rompre 

to reopen, to open again .... ouvrir . 



. 38 

, 151 

. 1-27 

. 1*27 

, 155 

, 38 

158 

38 

123 

152 

152 

152 

130 

130 

38 

149 

130 

154 

154 
155 
124 

155 

155 

130 

130 
130 
132 

38 
149 
.23 
132 
i32 

38 

38 
158 
139 

38 

132 

133 
133 
159 
140 
156 
156 
15- 
15? 
J3C 



172 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



saillir . 



valuer 
satisfaire 
savoir 
secourir . 
se secourir, 
seduire . 
semer 
sentir 
seoir . . 
servir . . 
se servir, 6 
severer . 
sortir, a, e 
soudre . 
souffrir . 
soumettre 
se soumettre 
sourire . 
souscrire . 
se souscrire, e 
soustraire . 

se soustraire, < 

soutenir . . 

se soutenir, 6 
se souvenir, e 
subvenh . . 
sumre . . 
suivre . . 
sen suivre. e 
suracheter . 
surcroitre . 
suri'aire . . 
surprendre . 
surscuir . . 
survenir, e . 

survi\re . . 



S 

to project^ to jut out, to gush out, to 

leap assaillir 

to salute, to bow (see p. 51, art. 104) parler . 

to satisfy, to content, to comply with faire 

to know savoir . 

to succour, to assist, to help . . . courir . 

to help one another courir . 

to seduce, to bribe reduire 

to sow (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) . . parler . 

to feel, to smell sentir . 

to Jit, to Jit well, to become .... seoir . 

to serve, to wait upon, to be of use . servir . 

to use, to make use, to avail one's self servir . 

to wean (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) . parler . 

to go out (see page 160) . . . . . sentir . 

to solve, to resolve resoudre 

to suffer, to allow, to undergo . . . ouvrir . 

to submit, to subdue, to conquer . . mettre . 

to submit, to yield, to give up . . . mettre . 

to smile rire . . 

to subscribe ecrire . 

to subscribe one's self ecrire . 

to subtract, to deduct, to hide, to con- 

ceal, to take away, to withdraw . traire . 

to avoid, to escape, to withdraw one's 

self traire . 

to maintain, to sustain, to support, to 

bear tenir . 

to stand up, to hold out tenir . 

to recollect, to remember, to remind . tenir . 

to relieve, to assist tenir . 

to suffice, to be sufficient .... confire . 

to follow suivre . 

to follow from., to result suivre . 

to overpay (see p. 49, art. 97 & 99) . parler . 

to grow out croitre . 

to exact, to ask too much .... faire 

to surprize, to astonish, to deceive . prendre 

to supersede, to put off, to suspend . surseoir 

to befall, to happen, to come in unex- 
pectedly, to come upon (see p. 160) tenir . 

to survive, to outlive vivre . 



taire . . • 

se tjure, e . 

teinure . . 

tenir . . . 
se tenir, e 

s'en tenir, 6 

Lumber, e . 

touner . . 

traduire . . 

traire . . . 

franserire . 



to conceal, to keep secret plaire . 

to forbear talking, to keep silent, to 

hold one's tongue pin ire . 

to die, to colour joindre 

*o hold, to keep tenir . 

to stand, to hold one's self .... tenir 

tc abide by tenir . 

to fail (&» page lf>0) parler . 

to thunder nei<jer . 

to trans/ate. to bring to justice . . reduire 

to milk traire . 

to h .inscribe . ecrire . 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 173 



fcransmettre . 
tressaillir 
tronipeter . 



ramcre , 
valoir . , 
valoir mieux 
venir, e . 
vetir . . 
se vetir, e 
vieillir, a, e 
vivre . . 
voir . . 
se voir, e 
vouloir . 



to transmit, to convey mettre . 

to start up, to leap for assaiilir 

to summon with the sound of the 

trur.ipet (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) parler . 

V 

to vanquish, to conquer, to surpass . vaincre 

to he worth valoir . 

to be better . . valoir . 

to come (see page 160) tenir . 

to clothe, to dress vetir . 

to dress, to clothe one J s self .... vetir . 

to become old (see page 160) . . . finir 

to live vivre . 

to see - . . . . voir 

to see one's self, to visit one another voir 
to be willing, to will, to wish } to wish 

for vouloir 



150 
125 

38 



1^9 

139 
139 
132 
133 
133 
54 
159 
140 
140 

141 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township. PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 



